(rae Hee Bt hr a eee ee eee ie B~ eo d= Hvbetnto te! pie dr erie re dngm theo et eaten pain Be B= tak ete eee ee ia nae cn Pe fhe belinda Re tata tre oh semana Pugs whee Nhe dn bo dn ue Geli Su bare tnt Anfte Soe Foti bak Rattan He phar Hepes grants tee we a Rear Less Haters ware errr meee PCTE SN nl hae ne er ee Wynd fedd Retin tim be te Hn i= the Panton Oe paciotetinth kaa W Oe rohnert rherapeiret woe Te MEAL a meaner ee Te Bee ee Fe en. ead ties mare teliotet= the ie fips Sorta Hs tig aha Ft aks haat ee 8 les rye arene ewanr raid Carat ME AY Ts nireerirnd ade Struensee fo > ‘ ewer Ht : cs ot -. Pieper MN I neat got ae etcarmee tert " . - Andante Mage’ at Hch baht —lony Bah DOAN GL are be dete tinned en ed ehmevateyetin be thaninttlletohreds I. = de ane stpo hy Nd WB Oni OR ree er re a rane itech SS eee RR i alee oat ne otteihetite esr earabere ne ORE bate stat — prt ~te se fase t eh Gaeereites enepre abrertatatade fate betta Btn INAH IRa TASES AE raeee Por prern ante eM Pe earl ere a Ne Wr Laren th eA Se lalgtatanpeg carb aie han ints ote any KwteboGe Gait! SPS Oe oe die Sete al earch Deseo rare Den hare Ai Rotana fhm tine pine sateen betntntntr ins Oe Sra rer ne fe L A Sor fiery ee NER TI er padonaho tin the hoe she meg ednpsete de sade in inhaled de® by ieee wet ee ¥ sane tan joa tee tin been abode Srurutewurney or sear es iene ibe dn ote bon teen be he a La ee ; 7 Sern “ Teel a orunwerse eects at MM AIO SOR ntr arene EES # = ee > Nie detonate ares ceninvetin ate tiodoisn [pattie Hee bende tee we et Gp enedin ein he dmtnd Ceh sativa eb REBT ICR, x - Nite eee pace ental tnt tea-monenatohol Ota SE STA tatatan ola bei feats BoP - Pe oT A pared ye ats rie . hago pate inbeteen Va badirFnddnd osm eRe vata Beanie sha cfinb Witte tinh 9-0 asides tielintatfate bts feel ID TE E , ~ e . ep eb tent i San rs rere NEE eR nary Pay ee ae ar os a ee eal igh “ * bee. een ee eset Iai ae alee ieiritbnanh teeta aay 7 Se en nctrurirusraneannn ee re ip tert ‘ is oe ta i - im tt tt oes = -. — leet Linn a - Creed cehetateste tev Tahara Setariree ul rar wena eee Pe Sk eo as ln rare eae TD pcOe eb AAUP ae ita tnth oat natn eS ES SS aereotinesicrra a here ar Pogeeeteds em ede He oe . aches . etn beth dp te ean Mole dio Shas iron PabetaAa ia ting ked oped eto Ct ripririrseneasmnr annette were Farin Soe bethow te Grsom a es ; : het rte ee ee ; UR I Nt A ei aaartired See eaccoeten et atte rete tent eere iohetral o ‘ - My Seba bereemoterty: thmetu tn he tn ongipattadrtesto a“ [bent ot or dbaetinton te tinnte tondin Pnlla dma tit i iSeerance teitentet sc ietc ta ae 5 ences fara tart uae eA N Te omen : oe Srcihetntiotad ep a ne pyre Te Ee Aababeelnih aires tabeceee teh Petite ttadnbn® de dhinht . Tae herrea Se tac ciameocoet ef Seen ptttne netetostee- ti VN tee : puke ‘ een RECN NT pdede fete ture tnieteda tot tee e ates ’ ‘ - fore tete tape trede trite fei ee mani ede eG tedote y's Feheledatr er tedote fom ee ‘ sero eestests - het finde tae Piel eet? a iota rear tane eot pir hr in etna bee fietnnthe Fair taw > xs ; Rpiesedeinabonetnacdnsic (ctr tcpcte teamed ee a foperte inet ae ee Leer Batra sa cee a ie : : Acifrcrsr et recreate erence A Joke ete Tarot ihe ae awnieea Sola psdetebe' t= beteiatn tnt feted tinaiteeye bet tet Sindatnbc trope oati Sc ratanne Fobepere inte Fete ict rarat peanaede ricco heretebrontehe mt Iete ch Nea hebed-ihetejoieindobae x : mee picasento sn sosyene aedrieariiste sede im) oie iste Be aoe abate to Tain gepedede dete iete inte rinl eatin ae etiettaibetete Toit wjaon saw Aea it ae simtethebetin ary ; 3 a hp bmterr i mttaer en Sat agente tier atntacin wnitarsetachee felitnte eae Ym ci bio ‘ W w “3 fara wat Ure 5 jut ’ = ¢ C below s ~ eee ee x? ‘ . “ spoqpesy-> J ytiotbe gente ~ ~ re é mhenr eyelet " ae us A tact be Se eas Led py reset — ae) e Sete oo ees e f.4 Boat Oe Bohodayes ar" Vote mtnh he ete ttaahee basethry 9 0Pe-Ped * Naa ate te kt af Salut sty fe ain SIS ic a Renecharditre: THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY or New SouTH WALES FOR THE YEAR 1953 VOL. LXXVIII. WITH EIGHTEEN PLATES. 201 Text-figures. SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO. LTD. Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, and SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1954. ii CONTENTS. CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, 1953 PARTS I-II (Nos. 365-366). (Issued 112th June,, 1953.) Presidential Address, delivered at the Seventy-eighth Annual General Meeting, 25th March, 1953, by S. J. Copland, M.Sc. Recent Australian Herpetology Elections Balance Sheets for the Year Ending 28th February, 1953 .. Australian Rust Studies. XI. Experiments in Crossing Wheat and Rye. By W. L. Waterhouse. (Plates i-ii.) Genetic Control in Hucalyptus Distribution. By L. D. Pryor. (Thirteen Text- figures. ) On Australian Helodidae. Part I. Descriptions of New Genera and Species. By J. W. T. Armstrong. (Thirteen Text-figuyres.) A New Species of Austroasca Lower (Cicadellidae, Homoptera). By Harry F. Lower. (Hight Text-figures.) Factors worth considering when making Measurements of Trombiculid Larvae. By Carl HE. M. Gunther. (Three Text-figures.) A New Species of Pelecorhynchus (Diptera, Tabanidae) from the Dorrigo Plateau, New South Wales. By I. M. Mackerras and M. J. Mackerras. (Three Text-figures. ) A New Subspecies of Cermatulus nasalis (Westwood) (Hemiptera- Heteroptera: Pentatomidae). By T. E. Woodward. (Communicated by F.. A. Perkins.) (Two Text-figures. ) Pages. j-XXXvVli XXXVii XXXVili—xl i= 7 19-32 33-34 35-37 38—40 41-42 CONTENTS. PARTS III-IV (Nos. 367-368). (Issued 15th September, 1953.) Anther Shape in Hucalyptus Genetics and Systematics. By L. D. Pryor. (Plates iii-iv and four Text-figures. ) An Undescribed Species of Grevillea from the Rylstone District. By H. S. McKee Australian Fungi. New Species and Revisions. I. The Meliolaceae of Australia. By C. G@. Hansford. (Forty-two Text-figures. ) Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. III. Azotobacter beijerinckii (Lipman 1903) var. acido-tolerans (Tchan 1952). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. IV. Taxonomy of Genus Azotobacter (Beijerinck 1901). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society .. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery—Adelong— Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part I. Introduction and Metamorphism of the Sedimentary Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plates v—vi and nine Text-figures. ) Cytology of Sentoria and Selenophoma Spores. By Dorothy E. Shaw. (Plate vii and three Text-figures.) The Culex pipiens Group in South-eastern Australia. II. By N. V. Dobrotworsky and F. H. Drummond. (Communicated by D. J. Lee.) (Five Text-figures.) .. Australian Rust Studies. XII. Specialization within Uromyces striatus Schroet. on Trigonella suavissima Lindl. and Medicago sativa L. By W. L. Waterhouse. (Plate viii.) The Genus Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia. By Dorothy HE. Shaw. (Plate ix.) .. Study of Soil Algae. Il. The Variation of the Algal Population in Sandy Soils. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, and Jill A. Whitehouse. (Plate x, Figs. 1-2, and one Text-figure.) Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. V. Presence of Beijerinckia in Northern Australia and Geographic Distribution of Non-symbiotic N-fixing Micro- organisms. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. (Plate x, Figs. 8-4, and four Text-figures.) .. A New Species of Pseudophryne from Victoria. By John A. Moore. (Communi- cated by L. C. Birch.) (One Text-figure.) 9318 ili Pages. 43— 48 49— 50 51— 82 83-— 84 85— 89 90-121 . 122-130 131-146 . 147-150 eee 5159 co UGO=G0 oo NU SMGS . 179-180 lv CONTENTS. PARTS V—-VI (Nos. 369-370). (Issued 18th January, 1954.) Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery- Adelong-Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part II. Intermediate-Basic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plate xi and two Text-figures. ) Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery- Adelong-Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part III. The Granitic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plate xii and ten Text-figures.) The Occurrence of Varved Clays in the Kosciusko District, N.S.W. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plate xiii and one Text- figure. ) Australian Rust Studies. XIII. Specialization of Uromyces phaseoli (Pers.) Wint. in Australia. By W. L. Waterhouse. (Plate xiv.) A New Sub-family and New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera- Heteroptera. By N. C. EH. Miller. (Communicated by T. G. Campbell.) (Hight Text-figures. ) A New Genus of the Plectascales. By Lilian Fraser. (Plate xv and twenty- nine Text-figures.) Abnormalities in Linum usitatissimum L. By H. B. Kerr. (Plates xvi-xvii and twenty-two Text-figures.) Notes on Australian Thynninae. I. Ariphron bicolor Hrichson. By B. B. Given. (Communicated by Dr. A. J. Nicholson.) (Fifteen Text-figures. ) A Note on the Geology of Panuara and Angullong, South of Orange, N.S.W. By N. C. Stevens. (Three Text-figures. ) Gustavus Athol Waterhouse (Memorial Series No. 14). (With portrait, Plate XViii. ) Studies on Australian Thynnidae. I. A Check List of the Australian and Austro-Malayan Thynnidae. By K. E. W. Salter. Abstract of Proceedings List of Members Lists of New Sub-family, Genera, Species and Subspecies .. List of Plates TWO. | ae aah RA EE ee ee Pages 181-196 197-220 221-225 226-232 233-240 241-246 247-257 258-261 262-268 269-275 276-315 ~ xli-xlvi xlviiHii lili liv lv—lvii OUT RE hh itt ieee F rae ah hasty Me AOIAL SVE ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING. 25th Marcu, 1953. The Seventy-eighth Annual General Meeting was held in the Society’s Rooms, Science House, Gloucester Street, Sydney, on Wednesday, 25th March, 1953. Mr. S. J. Copland, President, occupied the Chair. The Minutes of the Seventy-seventh Annual General Meeting, 26th March, 1952, were read and confirmed. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. My first duty is to pay a tribute and express gratitude on behalf of the Society to Dr. A. B. Walkom and Dr. W. R. Browne. We all know how capably they have filled the posts of honorary treasurer and editor, and honorary secretary, but I doubt if we are aware of the profound debt we owe them. The value of a society like ours resides in its published work. The appointment of a permanent secretary would mean little money for publishing and our proceedings would be thin indeed. Our present relatively comfortable position is almost entirely due to the self-sacrifice, energy and efficiency of these two men. I will now ask Mr. A. N. Colefax to propose a vote of thanks to Dr. Browne and Dr. Walkom so that our appreciation may be recorded. Doing without a paid secretary has inevitably placed an added burden on our permanent Assistant Secretary, Miss G. L. Allpress. The Society has to thank her for loyal and willing service. I am grateful to her for compiling the first part of my address, which summarizes the activities of the Society during the past year. Volume 77, Parts 1-4 of the Society’s Proceedings were published in 1952 and Parts 5-6 in January, 1953. Volume 77 consists of 394 + lxv pages, 16 plates and 311 text-figures. The volume is much larger than previous ones due to the receipt of financial assistance from several sources as follows: An anonymous gift of £20 and a grant of £100 from the Commonwealth Publications Fund towards the cost of publication of the paper by Dr. Carl E. M. Gunther; the complete cost of publication (£82/18/4) of the paper by G. B. Fairchild by the Gorgas Memorial Institute of Tropical and Preventive Medicine, Washington, D.C., U.S.A.; and a grant of £150 by the University of Sydney towards the cost of publication of ‘‘Australian Rust Studies. IX” by W. L. Waterhouse. Library accessions from scientific societies and institutions totalled 1,488 for the year. Unwanted periodicals from the libraries of the University of Melbourne, and C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, have been received to help complete sets in the Library. Mis- cellaneous duplicate reprints in the Society’s possession were made available gratis to members and all reprints were disposed of. Requests for library loans, especially from interstate and C.S.I.R.O. libraries, have been as numerous as in the previous year. A volume of the history of the Holland Society of Sciences, issued on the occasion of the 200th anniversary of its foundation in May, 1752, was received - for the library. New exchanges were commenced with The West of Scotland Agricultural College, Glasgow, Scotland (to receive the Abstract of Proceedings only); Louisiana Academy of Sciences, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, U.S.A.; Bioloski Institut u Sarajevu, Sarajevu, Jugoslavija; Ohio State University Library, Columbus, Ohio, U.S.A.; Instituto di Patologia Vegetale della Universita di Milano, Milan, Italy (to receive Botanical and Agricultural Reprints only). 5 At the following monthly meetings during the year programmes of special interest were given: May: Lecturette by Mr. D. P. Clark entitled “Heological Study of the Microfauna of the Soil”. June: Lecturettes on Mitochondria; Cytology and Function in Plants and Bacteria, by Miss Mary Hindmarsh, Dr. R. N. Robertson and Dr. Y. T. Tchan. A ii PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. July: Lecturette dealing with various phases of the Natural History of Heard Island, illustrated by a colour film and exhibits, by Mr. K. G. Brown, who had been biologist to the Australian Antarctic Expedition in 1951. September: Illustrated account of the new Botany School in the University of Oxford, by Professor T. G. B. Osborn, Sherardian Professor of Botany, University of Oxford. October: Lecturette on ‘Preservation of Plant-tissues in Coal”, by Professor C. EH. Marshall. November: Lecturette, illustrated by Kodachrome slides, on the Australian Museum Expedition to North-west Australia, by Mr. H. O. Fletcher, Leader of the Expedition. We are indebted to and wish to thank all who contributed to these programmes. No Ordinary Monthly Meeting was held in August, 1952, on account of the Sydney Meeting of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science and the University Centenary Celebrations. Two Special General Meetings were held on 30th July and 24th September, 1952, to consider and confirm the adoption of an alteration of the Rules of the Society recommended by Council, that a rule XVIA be inserted, to read: The Council may decide that the duties of the Secretary as set out in Rule XIX shall be carried out by one or more Honorary Secretaries. In this event the Council shall consist of eighteen members and the Honorary Secretaries shall be office-bearers to be elected by the Council in terms of Rules XXVIII and XVI. Since the last Annual Meeting the names of 20 members have been added to the list, two members have been lost by death, three have been removed from the list under Rule VII, and nine have resigned. The number of members as at 15th March, 1953, is: Ordinary Members, 205; Life Members, 24; Honorary Member, 1; Corresponding Members, 2; Associate Member, 1; total, 233. On account of his acceptance of the Chair of Botany of the University of Liverpool, Professor N. A. Burges resigned from the Council on 18th June, 1952, prior to his departure for Hnegland. By decision of the Deputy Commissioner of Taxation the Society was approved as a scientific research institute, donations to which for purposes of research would be tax-free. On behalf of the Society, a subscription was sent towards the memorial to the late Dr. Robert Broom. The total net return from the Society’s one-third ownership of Science House for the year was £642. The Council of the Society endorsed the Fair Copying Declaration, as requested by the Royal Society of London. A fourth Natural History Survey was made, under the leadership of Dr. W. R. Browne, in the Kosciusko region from 26th January to 9th February, 1953, when a party of seven scientists visited the area; transport and accommodation were offered again by the Kosciusko State Park Trust and the Snowy Mountains Hydro-electric Authority. The Joint Scientific Advisory Committee (comprising members appointed by the Linnean Society of New South Wales and the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales) is indebted to the Australian and New Zealand Associtaion for the Advancement of Science for its Research Grant of £100 towards the work of this Survey. Many members of the Society took part in the activities of the Sydney Meeting of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science held from 20th to 27th August, 1952, in which over 2,000 participated. This meeting, the first to be held in Sydney since 1932, was a great success, many overseas scientists visiting Sydney for the occasion. The next meeting of the Association will be held in Canberra in January, 1954. Congratulations are offered to: Professor N. A. Burges, who accepted an invitation to the Chair of Botany in the University of Liverpool; Dr. Daphne Eliot (née Davison) and Dr. Ian Fraser, on obtaining the degree of Ph.D. of the University of Cambridge; Miss Helen Lancaster, on obtaining the M.Sc. degree of the University of Sydney; > PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS: iii Dr. Marie E. Phillips, on the award of the Ph.D. degree of the University of Manchester; Professor W. L. Waterhouse, on the honour conferred on him as Emeritus Professor on his retirement from the University of Sydney; Professor J. B. Cleland, on the award of the Australian Natural History Medallion by the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria; and Dr. G. F. Humphrey, on the award of a Nuffield Foundation Travelling Scholarship for 1958. Linnean Macleay Fellowships. In November, 1951, the Council reappointed Miss Mary Hindmarsh and Myr. T. G. Vallance to Fellowships in Botany and Geology respectively for 1952. During 1952 Miss Hindmarsh studied two aspects of the effects of chemicals on root tips. An investigation of the effect of colchicine on the spindle, which was begun late in the previous year, was completed. It was found that the spindle could be observed in unstained plant cells by using the phase contrast microscope after acid fixation of the tissue. In roots treated with 0:1% colchicine the spindles had disappeared from cells in all stages of division in one hour and the abnormalities induced by colchicine could be directly related to destruction of the spindle or lack of its formation. These results were published in a short paper in Parts 5-6 of the Proceedings of the Society for 1952. Portion of the year was devoted to a study of the effects of p-amino- benzoic acid and sulphanilamide on the growth of roots. The effects of these two substances on cell division have been previously studied and it is known that p-amino- benzoic acid reverses sulphanilamide inhibition of cell division. This, however, does not explain effects of these substances on root elongation, since both inhibit elongation at the concentrations used for the cytological work. As well as reversing sulphanilamide inhibition of cell division, p-aminobenzoic acid has an independent effect on root elonga- tion, perhaps by preventing the extension of cells behind the meristem of the root. Mr. Vallance reports that the year 1952 has seen the conclusion of his research Studies on the geology of the Wantabadgery—Adelong—-Tumbarumba district, N.S.W. It was found that the metamorphism which affected the sediments (probably in the main of upper Ordovician age) of the area had an important thermal aspect though it was essentially regional in influence. An attempt was made to relate the ‘metamorphic phenomena to a general scheme such as is provided by the Metamorphic Facies Principle. In this way he was able to establish that the metamorphic facies sequence in this area is complete and rather analogous to the well-known Barrovian zonal sequence, although Barrow’s zones are more dynamothermal and belong to different subfacies types from those found in the present case. Many analogies were found between the metamorphic phenomena of the Cooma (N.S.W.) area and of the district under review. In addition, two series of plutonic (granitic) rocks were recognized and studied in some detail. It is believed that the members of the first (and earlier) series are more closely related to the general metamorphism than are those cf the second series. Hvidence was found which suggests that while the granites were not formed in situ, they are at all events not far from their place of origin. In November, 1952, three applications were received by the Council. Miss Mary Hindmarsh and Mr. T. G. Vallance were reappointed to Fellowships in Botany and Geology respectively for 1953. Miss Hindmarsh. proposes to complete the work now in hand as follows: (1) An anatomical study of cells in the zone of elongation of roots treated with sulphanilamide and p-aminobenzoic acid will be made, to see whether inhibition of cell extension or polarization mechanisms or both are responsible for the results obtained during 1952. These results will be written up together with the cytological effects of sulphanilamide and p-aminobenzoic acid. (2) The technique of observing the presence or absence of the spindle after certain types of fixation will be used to find out whether sulphanilamide, sulphanilamide + p-aminobenzoic acid and nitrophenols have a similar effect to colchicine - on spindles. This is important in comparing effects of mitotic poisons and studying their action on the cell division process. (3) The work on phosphate inhibition of cell division, begun in 1950-51, will be completed and written up. This work was done on onion seedling roots and it is thought to be an antagonism effect rather than a specific AA Iv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. phosphate inhibition of cell division. It must be repeated on bulb roots to make certain that effects obtained were not due to a shortage of nutrient in the medium. Mr. Vallance proposes to conclude his studies in the Ordovician metamorphic belt of the Wagga Wagga-—Adelong region and prepare the results for publication; also to commence a new study on the geology of the pre-Cambrian rocks of the Broken Hill region of New South Wales, submitting for his new project the title “Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Broken Hill Region, N.S.W.’’. Best wishes are extended to both Fellows for success in their research work. Macleay Bacteriologist. During the year 1952-53 Dr. Yao-tseng Tchan’s researches were mainly concerned with two subjects: (1) Work on the N-fixing bacteria in northern Australia has shown some promising field for research. For the first time in Australia, Beijerinckia, a genus of tropical N-fixing bacteria, was isolated. From 48 samples nearly 30% are inhabited by these groups of organisms. The morpho-cytological research on Azotobacter, especially on the possibility of the presence of mitochondria, has shown that it is impossible to distinguish between the nucleus or nucleus-like bodies and the mitochondria or mitochondria-like bodies of Azotobacter. Will this suggest that the term Biodynamic centre should be used? In collaboration with the University of Technology, this problem is under investigation with the electronic microscope. (2) For the soil algae work, a new technique has been devised using the property of fluorescence of the chlorophylls. This technique provides a useful tool for soil algae studies. In collaboration with Miss Whitehouse of the University, investigations have been made on the ecology of soil algae. The daily variations and the horizontal distribution of algal population have been investigated with the new technique. The possibility of algae growing hetero- trophically in the dark has been studied. Some preliminary experiments showed that the algal population in the soil can be used as an indication of soil fertility. In collaboration with the Department of Conservation and the Botany Department of the University, the N economy of semi-desert soils of the Broken Hill district will be investigated if suitable facilities are provided by the above departments. Obituaries. It is recorded with regret that the following members died during the year: Mr. Walter Mervyn Carne and Sir William Dixson. Walter Mervyn Carne. WALTER MERVYN CARNE, who died on 20th November, 1952, at Chatswood, N.S.W., had been a member of the Society for over forty years, having joined in 1905. He was born on 16th September, 1885, and educated at Fort Street, Sydney High School and Sydney Technical College. He also took courses at the University of Sydney and University of California. He held Government posts in the States of New South Wales and Western Australia and under the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research. He acted as lecturer in Economic Botany, Plant Pathology and Entomology at Hawkes- bury Agricultural College and later as lecturer in the University of Western Australia. His total period of official service was forty-five years. He served four years in the A.I.F. (1915 to 1919), being mentioned in despatches and awarded the Serbian Silver Medal for services in the field. In 1931 he visited England at the invitation and expense of the Empire Marketing Board to examine Australian apples and pears. In 1938, being Principal Research Officer of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, he was seconded to the Department of Commerce to become the technical adviser under the title of Supervisor of Fresh Fruit and Vegetable Exports. In 1941 he was permanently transferred to the Department of Commerce. During his career he visited practically every agricultural college and research institution in Australia concerned with horti- culture and plant pathology and travelled extensively to visit agricultural colleges and experiment stations in Great Britain, United States of America, Canada, South Africa, Holland, Palestine and Egypt. Plant taxonomy and ecology were among his earliest scientific interests, his first paper being published in 1910 in the Proceedings PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Vv of this Society. Many articles on economic botany, parasitic diseases, and non-parasitic disorders also were published by him in various journals in Australia. He was widely recognized in Australia and overseas as the authority on the identification and incidence of the non-parasitic disorders in apples. From 1931 to 1950 he did much for ship earriage of fruit and vegetables and in connection with export inspection and the overseas marketing of Australian fruit. After his retirement in 1950 he came to New South Wales to reside at Chatswood. Of late years he attended meetings of the Society and took part in the discussions, the last occasion of his attendance being about a month before his death. Sir Wiliam Diarson. Sir WILLIAM Drxson, who had been a Life Member of the Society since 1927, died on 17th August, 1952, aged 82. Sir William was born in Sydney on 18th April, 1870, and was educated at All Saints’ College, Bathurst. When 19 years old he went to Scotland and served his time as an engineer, returning to Sydney in 1899 and joining the family business of Dixson and Sons Ltd., tobacco merchants. He became a director of the company and later of the British Australian Tobacco Company Ltd., into which Dixson and Sons was merged. Sir William, who had been collecting pictures about Australia, books and manuscripts, important prints and pictorial records of historical value for nearly fifty years, presented the nation with a valuable collection, which is housed in the Dixson Wing of the Mitchell Library, Sydney. The collection won him the reputation of being the greatest living collector of Australiana. In this he followed in the footsteps of his father, Sir Hugh Dixson, who acquired a copy of almost every publication about Australasia. Besides his gift to the Mitchell Library, Sir William gave £2,500 for a University Library at the New England University College, and in 1951 £15,000 more to the Public Library for additions to the Dixson Bequest. He was a bachelor and had lived at Killara. A munificent gift of books, manuscripts, charts, etchings, photographs, etc., to the Public Library of New South Wales, together with the establishment of a fund to be known as the William Dixson Foundation, was revealed in his will after his death. RECENT AUSTRALIAN HERPETOLOGY. In choosing “Recent Australian Herpetology” for the subject of my address, I hope that the facts I have brought together will be of value to everyone interested in Australia’s animals as well as to workers specializing in this particular field. I will bring forward some work on our common goanna. THE BLOOD VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE TRUNK OF THE GOANNA VARANUS VARIUS (SHAW). This study is intended to provide a reasonably detailed description of the blood vessels of the trunk of an Australian member of the Varanidae, a homogeneous group of lizards, which probably originated in early Cretaceous time in south-east Asia and reached Australia soon afterwards. Their migration through southern Asia to Africa appears to have been much more recent. It is hoped to use this description as a basis to make systematic comparisons with other species of both Varanus and lizards of other genera. For this reason only a single specimen has been dealt with to avoid any possibility of making a composite account. At the same time a small series of other specimens was checked to ensure that the single specimen described is not abnormal. Only the main and more easily accessible vessels have been discussed. The veins and arteries of the limbs and head, which are unlikely to be of taxonomic importance because they are not so easily reached, have been excluded except for their proximal relationships. Varanus varius (Shaw) has been selected for the basic study because it may be regarded as the typical Australian goanna, being figured, described and reported as “not uncommon at Port Jackson” in 1789 in “The Voyage of Governor Phillip to Botany Bay” (London) and again described and named in the following year by Shaw in White’s “Journal of a Voyage to New South Wales’. I have reason to suspect that there is considerable subspecific differentiation in this widespread species. vi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Mr. H. Worrell collected the specimen examined (No. 4150 in the author’s collection) at Uki on the Far North Coast of New South Wales at the end of October, 1948. Ordinary ducoes in a medium of acetone and amyl acetate were used for the injections. .The ‘volatile constituents soon dry off, do not run, and can be used cold because of their small bulk. The usual injections were made into the great vessels near the heart and also the anterior abdominal vein while the heart was still beating. Chloroform and ether mixed have been found to be a more effective anaesthetic than either alone. Small aluminium alligator clips with the teeth filed flat and thin strips of cardboard tied over the jaws proved ideal forceps for the blood vessels. I wish to thank Professor H. A. Briggs, who suggested my working on Varanus, and Professor P. D. F. Murray for much help and advice. P. R. Rowe Pty. Ltd. kindly supplied ducoes and other injecting fluids. The only abbreviations used in the text-figures are: A, artery or arteries; V, vein or veins; L, left; and R, right; excepting those for a very few awkwardly long names. Abbreviations for these are explained in the legends under the figures in which they occur. The Heart (Text-figs. 1 and 2). The heart lies slightly but noticeably to the right side, being displaced by the stomach. It is overlain ventrally to some extent by the anterior lobes of the liver and is bounded on the left by the stomach and on the right by the right lung. It is only moderately elongated, the width at its maximum across the atria being 28 mm. .and the length 37 mm. The ventricle is rounded, but a little longer than broad. The two atria are about equal in size. The sinus venosus is noticeable externally and is asymmetrically placed. The large left precaval vein runs in a deep groove on the dorsal surface of the left atrium and then turns sharply right near the sulcus to enter the sinus venosus. The right precaval runs over and at the side of the right atrium, hiding it from view dorsally. The right precaval is almost in a line with the postcaval. The bases of the two great veins merge and they discharge their blood together into the sinus venosus. The heart and the bases of the great vessels are enclosed in a thin and transparent, but tough, pericardium. Mathur (1944) has recently treated the anatomy of the heart of Varanus monitor (Linné) in detail, but comparison of the internal anatomy with Varanus varius has been reserved for later treatment. System of the Carotid Arch (Text-fig. 3). The posterior position of the heart and the elongation of the neck have led to a striking development of the primary and common carotids. Loss of the ductus caroticus is a sequel to the wide separation of the carotid and systemic arches. The primary carotid forks from the right systemic arch practically in the midline of the heart and, about 5 mm. in front of it. It runs forward, following the right bronchus fairly closely. Because the heart is displaced towards the right, the primary carotid inclines. to the left to regain the median axis of the body, which it does 55 mm. in front of the heart on the ventral surface of the trachea. It then divides into the right and left common carotids. The primary carotid gives off only three vessels. The pericardial artery (described under heading A following) is fairly large, but the other two (see following headings B and () are small. A. The pericardial artery (Figs. 3 and 11) comes off from the mid-ventral surface of the primary carotid immediately forward of its origin. It soon forks into right and left branches, which run back in close contact with the lateral abdominal veins and eventually anastomose with branches of the posterior epigastric artery. The right and left sides are joined by a loop near the front of the liver. This loop sends a small artery to parallel the median abdominal vein. Many small vessels run over the pericardium and extend more or less at right angles over the ventral and lateral body walls. A small, but interesting, branch is given off on each side near the origin of the pericardial artery. These run to the pectoral wall in close association with the small vessels from the lateral abdominal veins, which join the pectoral vein. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Vii B. This small artery (Fig. 3) leaves the extreme anterior end ‘of the primary carotid and runs to the right pectoral area, giving off branches to the right bronchus. C. The more posterior artery (Fig. 3) originates 15 mm. further back. and runs along the outer edge of the right bronchus for about 20 mm., sending in tiny branches between the cartilage rings. It then splits into three, one branch reticulating over the right bronchus until it breaks up over the surface of the lung; another. running >../(L INTERNAL R INTERNAL } ~| AEREBUBY coe > -- L SYSTEMIC ARCH BSA ne R SYSTEMIC ARCH «=== - Ne POSTERIOR HORN oF HYOID | R VENTRAL le CERVICAL A L PULMONARY A “A TO THYMUS ® PULMONARY A ~__ L PULMONARY V ‘A TO THYMUS” fi ae R THYMUS GLAND~~ R PULMONARY V ---- L ATRIUM eee th oe R ATRIUM ---- --- rovers NN YEE) tee) BA Tis Geerceece= THYROID A--7 1OMM. -----L THYROID GLAND —— R THYROID GLAND , ; hie VENTRAL 1 re Ee THYROID A ------- CERVICAL A t \ ' \ H \ = ‘| i ' ‘ A 4 i fv. Swa-------- THYROID A ! \ t ea ; i f 1 SS 5 We / x POSTCAVAL V ._1 ~ VENTRICLE ae r i SSc5- ON 7 R COMMON }__---+---- ( ( y : =a COMM CAROTID A < 5 CAROTID A PRIMARY CAROTID Ree y ~*~ TRACHEA ( SYSTEMIC ARCH ~~~ >--- AZYGOUS V -- |--]--- R SYSTEMIC ARCH (© PULMONARY A --- . L. PULMONARY V_ __- RPULMONARY A L PRECAVAL V.__ A, AGIEIUM sca oes ~ R PULMONARY V y-\----SINUS VENOSUS tN see L. BRONCHUS VENTRICLE ------- 10MM. - POSTCAVAL V Fig. 1.—Heart. Ventral view. Dashes indicate position of lobes of liver. Fig. 2.—Heart. Dorsal view. Fig. 3.—The carotid arch as far forward as the hyoid. Ventral view. D. The anterior oesophageal branch serves the posterior part of the oesophagus on the left side. #. The middle gastro-hepatic branch passes to the opposite side of the stomach, where it forks into three. One runs a short distance along the lesser curvature of the stomach. A branch from it supplies the right posterior part of the oesophagus opposite to D. The third branch enters the anterior tip of the left lobe of the liver. F. This branch supplies the anterior haif of the stomach along the greater curvature. G. The posterior mesenteric artery (Fig. 4) is the first offshoot of the coeliaco- mesenteric. Almost at once it gives off a large posterior mesenteric branch and—still running in the mesentery—four more branches to the posterior intestine before entering PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ix DUODENAL Vv». ,/ LIENO-GASTRIG V QUODENAL A ~.__ ~ MINOR SPLENIC A | MAJOR --~~ |SPLENIC A Se _--- STOMACH MDDLE INTESTINAL A------------\ = 20MM. _--{ LIENO- —_—{ aads ieee A cols COELIACO-MESENTERIC A------- Lene POSTERIOR MESENTERIC A.___ oe 2 2-7e SG SITTER Sy DOSTERION REDE eat J OLED NL ILIAC -INTES Z \ OE af RADICES LC ILIAC- INTESTINAL V L ANTERIOR GASTRIC A” ‘DORSAL AORTA OF AORTA 4 OX A 6) RINTERNAL | ____. -------- Nee =O ------------- {\ INTERNAL ts | SNS ay: A JUGULAR V ca JUGULAR V R SYSTEMIC ARCH SN EAC) Soy ee ; | A & SYSTEMIC ARCH 53 fu EXTERNAL js 4s ANTERIOR NG a Ae gee JUGULAR Vv TRACHEAL V rH R THYMUS GLAND * aa are Ry es ee Wi ie tee OR ee ke PN Md MV NNR AM BL gee tl THYMUS GLAND B--- 172, R EXTERNAL Cora Era | JUGULAR, "4 Sea care L ANTERIOR-- an GASTRIC A __- is L POSTERIOR GOELIAGO- ~~~ [ieee sy TRAGHEAL V MESENTERIC A R THYROID GLAND --------B( vg \ | | QF N@\¥@----.---- L THYROID GLAND LIENO-GASTRIG A~~ DORSAL AORTA ~--__ [ L CORACO- R ASR vy GLAVICULAR V -L SPERMATIC A CLAVICULAR V R SPERMATIC A= ------------| VERTEBRAL A R VERTEBRAL A-------.___ 4 PE SS ‘i R RENAL A---____ _--L. SUBCLAVIAN V iN ft RENAL A R SUBGLAVIAN V----- . tt _.-------L_ SUBCLAVIAN A R POSTERIOR ; EPIGASTRIC A R SUBCLAVIAN A----- - Pres Eh es ee eh he aN SAO aire MEUN crease L PECTORAL V ~L LUMBAR AR PECTORAL V--------- Linc A PECTORAL V RENGICEOACALHAU MPT my. tpi tar eet ny OO, en kana eM ee L PRECAVAL V R LUMBAR A---~ R ILIAC A R INGUINAL A------_ oh § CRINGUINTATEAN gen wae RY) Megs eo se Bere = COMMON SUBCLAVIAN A --->--"-L HEMIPENIAL A R PRECAVAL V---------------- AZYGOUS V------------7--7- oT 7 CAUDAL A------ < 5 LJ Fo] a Ly} Cj s) Fig. 4.—The main arteries and veins of the viscera. View from the left side with the duodenum lifted vertically until the alimentary canal is straightened out. A, cardiac branch of left anterior gastric artery. B, gastro-hepatic branch of left anterior gastric artery. C, anterior oesophageal branch of left anterior gastric artery. Fig. 5.—Ventral view of the dorsal aorta showing the origin of the principal branches. A, anterior oesophageal branch of left anterior gastric artery. B, gastro-hepatic branch of left anterior gastric artery. C, cardiac branch of left anterior gastric artery. D, left branch to fat body from lumbar artery. EH, vertebral branch. Fig. 6.—The precaval veins and their tributaries: also branches of the common subclavian artery. Ventral view. A, oesophageal veins of external jugular vein. x PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. the coat of the rectum near the point of emergence of the rectal veins. As the rectal artery it then runs back to the cloaca, sending many small twigs into its walls. H. The next branch, the middle intestinal artery (Fig. 4), supplies by far the greater part of the intestine, sending about two dozen main branches into its walls. ZI. The anterior intestinal artery, which is given off practically simultaneously with the middle, is a long but comparatively unimportant vessel. J. The remaining branch of the coeliaco-mesenteric artery is the large duodenal. It sends an offshoot to the pyloric region. kK. The lieno-gastric artery (Figs. 4 and 5) is given off opposite the 7th vertebra. It crosses the coeliaco-mesenteric artery dorsally and runs into the gastro-splenic mesentery. It sends two large branches into the left side of the stomach about half-way along its length before a minor artery to the spleen. A third gastric branch leaves on the opposite side to the main splenic artery, which bifurcates before entering the gland. A large branch is now given off which divides into a second minor splenic artery, two further gastric arteries and a pyloric artery. The main vessel next runs round to the opposite side of the stomach near the anterior end of the pancreas. It immediately divides into hepatic (LZ), pancreatic (M), and anterior gastric (N) arteries (Fig. 8). iL. The hepatic artery runs nearly parallel to the hepatic portal vein and enters the liver close to it between the two lobes. M. The pancreatic artery enters the pancreas a few millimetres from its origin and ramifies through the tissue. N. The anterior gastric artery closely parallels the anterior gastric vein, giving off almost identical branches along practically the whole of the stomach along the lesser curvature. : O. The spermatic arteries (Fig. 5) come off symmetrically on opposite sides of the aorta opposite the 12th vertebra. The right artery then inclines slightly forward and the left back. They supply the suprarenal glands as well as the testes. P. The parietal artery (Fig. 5) opposite the 13th vertebra is considerably enlarged and sends many branches to the dorsal and lateral body wall. Q. The right renal artery comes off opposite the 14th vertebra, and the left opposite the 15th. R. The lumbar artery (Fig. 5) is the much enlarged parietal opposite the 17th vertebra. The usual vertebral branch is given off on the left side, and then a large posterior vessel which runs round the pelvis near the acetabulum and is distributed to the proximal preaxial and dorsal thigh muscles. The next branch is anterior, supplying a rather small area of body wall, and the posterior fourth runs dorsally to the posterior epigastric and then forward to serve a large superficial area of the back and side. The fifth is short, going to the dorsum of the thigh and a small section of back adjoining. The important sixth supplies the whole of the fat body on the left side. This single source of supply is in striking contrast to the profuse venous system of the same body. The main vessel runs laterally and then forward as the posterior epigastric artery to parallel the left lateral abdominal vein and a branch of it, the median abdominal vein. Many small branches extend out at right angles. Craniad small branches from the posterior epigastric artery and the pericardial artery anastomose. The right artery is similar to the left except that there are two extra anterior twigs and no branch to the median abdominal vein. S. The large common iliac arteries (Fig. 5) are given off opposite the 18th vertebra. Each passes outward and slightly backwards from the aorta over the dorsal side of the pelvis. Only the vertebral branch and a small vessel to the dorsal muscles are given off before it runs just posterior to the hip joint and almost simultaneously splits into five branches. The hemipenial arteries derived from the iliacs may be mentioned here. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xi T. The reno-cloacal artery (Fig. 5) leaves the aorta mid-ventrally between the iliacs. It divides and sends a branch to the rear end of each kidney. These run forward to meet the anterior renal arteries. A third branch passes ventrally between the posterior lobes of the kidneys to the dorsal side of the cloaca. U. The artery opposite the 20th vertebra is quite large and branches repeatedly to the proximal postaxial muscles of the thigh. V. Inguinal arteries come off opposite the 21st vertebra. They supply the area about the groin and hemipenial sheaths and anterior caudal muscles. W. The dorsal aorta (Fig. 5) then passes into the haemal arches as the caudal artery. Small paired parietal arteries are given off to the tail muscles. The Common Subclavian Artery (Text-fig. 6). The common subclavian artery (Fig. 6) comes off from the right radix of the systemic arch and runs forward in the midline. It gives off a vertebral branch on each side and then bifurcates about 35 mm. in front of its origin. Each branch is similar. After sending off two combined vertebral and parietal branches as it diverges laterally, the artery forks into the vertebral and subclavian arteries. The subclavian as the main branch turns rather abruptly laterally and ventrally and passes just dorsal to the subclavian vein into the forelimb. The vertebral artery sends two branches to the vertebral column before it enters it about the level of the bifurcation of the jugular veins. The Precaval Veins (Text-figs. 1, 2 and 6). The right and left precavals (Figs. 1, 2 and 6) are wide, stout trunks. The leit comes in asymmetrically through the pericardium, runnimg obliquely over the dorsal surface of the left atrium towards the right, where it joins the sinus venosus. The right is nearly in a line with the postcaval vein, running almost directly backwards over the right dorsal surface of the right atrium to join the sinus venosus about the base of the postcaval. The left precaval is joined on the dorsal side by the large azygous vein (4) about 20 mm. in front of the heart. For the rest of their course the precavals are symmetrical, so only one will be described. The comparatively small pectoral vein (B) comes in 50 mm. in front of the heart. Only 5 mm. further on the very large subclavian vein (C) extends out at right angles. Four veins (D) are next received laterally and between them a large vein (#) comes in from the dorsal side. The precaval runs in a deep groove from the pectoral vein to the anteriormost of these veins. It then leaves the body wall and runs slightly medially. A short but quite stout thyroid vein enters practically at the junction with the large external jugular vein (fF), which is little smaller than the internal jugular (L). A. Veins of the azygous system (Fig. 6) drain practically the whole of the costal and vertebral areas although the azygous vein itself is only present on the right side. The left side is served by branches running over the vertebral column. The whole system may be divided into three parts (1-3). 1. The section of the azygous vein proper. Branches extend both back and forward as well as to the common jugular and internal jugular veins. The main branches fail about the sixth intercostal space, but small factors probably extend into the next section. 2. Five large veins from the intercostal spaces backward from the level of the origin of the lieno-gastric artery feed a large trunk which runs directly ventrally to enter the postcaval lobe of the liver. 3. There appear to be four tributaries to the trunk which runs into the spermatic vein just before its junction with the efferent renal vein. There appears to be a small fourth vein running in near the anterior tip of the liver. B. The pectoral vein (Fig. 6) soon forks, receiving branches from the ventro-lateral body walls. xii PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. C. The subclavian vein (Fig. 6) drains practically the whole of the forelimb. The subclavian artery runs over it dorsally. D. The four coraco-clavicular veins serve the ventral and lateral sectors of the shoulder girdle and receive branches from the scapular and dorsal area. The large anterior vein of the four has two main tributaries from the proximal preaxial muscles ot the forelimb and the other from the dorsal neck muscles. E. This large vertebral vein connects anteriorly indirectly with the internal jugulars and posteriorly with the azygous vein. F. The external jugulars (Fig. 6) immediately sweep inwards and form a very wide, band-like loop. The two main veins then run directly forward and pass over the hyoid. Near the base of the basihyal they make another prominent anastomosis and at the same place receive the large loops of the lingual veins. The left external jugular may be a trifle smaller than the right, but the difference is hardly noticeable. Its tributaries (G—K) are now noted (Fig. 6). G. A large cutaneous vein comes in from the anterior superficial muscles and skin. H. This vein serves much the same purpose as the preceding, but a more posterior area. It runs ventrally under the thyroid and then dorsally over the common jugular. I. Two posterior tracheal veins serve the trachea behind the jugular anastomosis. J. A single large anterior tracheal vein drains the ventral surface of the trachea at least as far forward as the basihyal. kK. Short stout oesophageal veins come in at short intervals from the oesophagus. L. The internal jugular vein (Fig. 6) receives a very stout tributary (M) just before its junction with the external jugular. Another large vein (Q) comes in 15 mm. anteriorly just after the anterior thymus veins (fF). M. This stout vein runs dorsally over the thymus to its median side, where it divides into three branches (N—P) (Fig. 6). N. A large vertebral vein connects with the azygous system and runs dorsally over the external jugular. O. The largest tributary is received from the powerful dorsal neck muscles. P. The posterior thymus veins drain a highly branching network over the gland. Q. This vein with three main tributaries comes from the lateral and ventral muscles of the neck. R. The anterior thymus vein is fed by numerous quite substantial tributaries. It comes mainly from the ventral surface of the gland. The System of the Postcaval Vein (Text-figs. 1, 2 and 7). The postcaval vein, which is a large, thin-walled vessel, is not free caudad to the liver, being formed, by the union of the two efferent renals (A, B) (Fig. 7) at the extreme posterior edge of the postcaval lobe of the liver. It remains visible through the rather leaf-like lobe until it reaches the main right lobe. From then on it cannot be seen until it emerges at the anterior end about 15 mm. to the right of the midline. During its course it bends from the postcaval lobe until it is close to the right margin of the liver and then swings back again to the point where it emerges. Only about 5 mm. is free before it enters the sinus venosus. The walls of the postcaval are riddled with tiny openings of veins running from the substance of the liver. It also receives two large hepatic trunks (C, D). A. The left efferent renal vein (Fig. 7) begins in a wide anastomosis with its fellow near the posterior end of the kidney, where it receives a short, but stout, tributary from the posterior lobe. From the start it is a large, thin-walled vessel running forward on the median and ventral face of the left kidney separated from the right efferent renal vein by the dorsal mesentery. It is fed by numerous, short, comparatively stout renal factors from the substance of the kidney. Small, very thin veins run in at irregular intervals from the mesentery. The junction with the large spermatic vein (#) is near the anterior tip of the kidney. Two smaller spermatic veins (F')! are received from the posterior and anterior ends of the left testis. The vein then runs forward about 15 mm. before swinging right to pass through the mesentery to the postcaval lobe. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xili B. The right efferent renal vein is similar in diameter to its fellow, but shorter and straighter, running just to the right of the midline almost directly forward to the posteaval lobe. Its connections with the spermatic veins are more anterior because the right testis is more advanced craniad than the left. C. The large left hepatic vein (Fig. 7) receives branches from all parts of the left lobe of the liver and joins the postcaval just as it is leaving the right lobe. D. The right hepatic vein is smaller than the left probably because of the large 2 amount of direct drainage into the postcaval. Its branches are most diffuse. It joins the postcaval nearly 20 mm. behind the point of entry of the left hepatic vein. E. Hach main spermatic vein (Fig. 7) is about 25 mm. long. It begins at the anterior end of the testis and runs back between it and the respective efferent renal vein to join about the level of the posterior end of the testis. » It practically covers the suprarenal gland ventrally, receiving many small vessels from it. Two or three largisl veins and many very small ones join it from the testis as well as a large one from the body wall. F. The smaller spermatic veins on each side appear somewhat irregular, either running direct to the efferent renal vein and remaining quite distinct from the main spermatic, or else partly anastomosing with it. System of the Caudal Vein (Text-figs. 7, 9 and 10). The caudal vein (Fig. 7) is very long, extending practically the full 790 mm. length of the tail, the muscle segments of which contribute small paired factors. It runs forward in the haemal arches ventral to the caudal artery and leaving them divides cleanly and symmetrically into two afferent renal veins (renal portals) (4) 10 mm. behind the posterior tips of the kidneys. A. Hach afferent renal vein immediately receives a large vessel (B) (Fig. 10). At the level of the posterior end of the kidneys it is crossed by the prominent iliac- intestinal vein (Ff), to which it is joined by an extremely short trunk. The afferent renal vein (Fig. 7) does not enter its corresponding kidney at its extreme posterior tip but about 6 mm. forward. It at once occupies a wide groove, which extends almost to the anterior end of the kidney and contains the vein snugly. The large, thin-walled vessel hardly tapers at all and appears to act as an always-filled reservoir for the branches into the kidney substance. Besides smaller veins, about 13, short, thick interlobular veins are given off between each lobe of the kidney and each one branches repeatedly into the lobes on each side. A thin septum, concealed ventrally by the vas deferens, separates the afferent renal veins. , B. The inguinal vein is made up of three main branches (Fig. 10). CO. A rectal vein comes in 5 mm. from the afferent renal vein. It drains the ventral side of the rectum near the cloaca, and receives small branches from connective tissue about the cloaca, posterior end of the kidneys and vas deferens. D. A large vertebral branch joins 5 mm. from the rectal vein. EH. This comparatively long vein has branches from the groin, the more anterior ventral tail muscles and the median side of the hemipenial sheath. F. There appears to be no doubt that each afferent renal vein is a direct continuation of the corresponding branch of the caudal vein (Figs. 9 and 10). The large iliac- intestinal vein about 12 mm. long, joining the posterior end of the intestinal vein and the iliac vein, runs across it laterally nearly at right angles. There appears to be an extremely short trunk joining them rather than a four-way joint. The Hepatic Portal System (Text-figs. 4, 8, 10, 11 and 12). The hepatic portal vein (Fig. 8) is a wide trunk about 20 mm. long formed by the union of the anterior abdominal vein (A), the extension of which it appears to be, and the intestinal vein (C). It enters the liver at the extreme margin of the right lobe near the gall bladder and is mainly distributed by three large branches to the right lobe and one to the left. xiv PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. A. The anterior abdominal vein is formed by the junction of the pelvic veins at the anteriormost point of the pelvic ring (Fig. 10). It runs from the midline slightly towards the left until it joins the intestinal vein about level with the craniad tip of the pancreas. It has only one tributary, the pancreatic vein (B). B. Five veins with three separate sources of supply go to initiate the pancreatic vein (Fig. 8). The three anterior veins run from the stomach, in the line of the anterior gastric vein, through the pancreas. The fourth vein is a branch of the lieno- gastric and the fifth a branch of the duodenal vein. The fourth and fifth run from the POSTCAVAL V------- iL LOBE OF Pe w-7 | LIVER AYE: __---7 STOMACH wine | LIVER J ~~~. {AMERCS --GASTRIC A ---LHEP : RHEPATIGV~ > AuGN. A HEPATICA-./ --§-§ Sa | ANTERIOR = ---DORSAL AORTA i (sts—“‘iLSCSCC eR Cena | H = eeu BUENA penny GLAND _- LSPERMATICA HEPATIC) _—' ea et LSUPRARENAL porTAL \ --f- PANCREATIC A. GLAND RTESTIS---— 4-------- L TESTIS INTESTINAL V-~~ DUTT ooo RSPERMATICV-=7 Be 4 8 1a ei ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL V ~~ ANGRE ATI RRENAL A >>> L SPERMATICV PANCREATICNY REFFERENT) _.------77~ BS RENACA VESICAL V_—, BLADDER RENAL V j y R RECTAL Vv ! / RECTUM RKIDNEY --------- PROM E Sgt? - -- ----- LKIDNEY 7 y / 1 i ata POSTERIOR RENALA ' Ol i io MaGenteea Ie e eRCO TALE MMINMRRS Riccar, | O/C BNE a) i CLOACAL V RAFFERENT RENALV----- --- 4 oleae LARBERENT FENALY WY i 0} > ‘fF — tii TE = ——- - -- CAUDAL V 20MM. -—4 _-- CAUDAL Vv R EFFERENT = we RENAL v paced R AFFERENT RENAL V “>> R ILIAG- INTESTINAL V 5 2 se |OMM. R PELVIC y “SR COMMON ILIAG V Fig. 7.—The systems of the caudal and postcaval veins. Ventral view. Fig. §8.—Anterior relationships of the hepatic portal vein, also anterior gastric, hepatic and pancreatic arteries. The left lobe of the liver overlies the stomach as far as the dotted line, but it is only drawn as far as the right margin of the stomach to show the vessels it overlies. Ventral view. > FEMORAL v ee eae esa c RILIAC-INTESTINAL V------ | i, «gg [-- R AFFERENT RENAL V------------ “>>> L AFFERENT RENAL v RL INGUINAL Wesessee ee) OY Ee ec L. INGUINAL Vv eineeneeecs ~~ 777 >-VERTEBRAL BRANCH R HEMIPENIAL V------>----7-7"% L HEMIPENIAL v Bea 10 CAUDAL V~~ PRIMARY CAROTID pf _---- PERICARDIAL A L FAT Bopy. oe AS Cen? { R LATERAL _-( ABDOMINAL V ee alg R LATERAL ABDOMINAL v t LATERAL agomnar ono \ L LATERAL) kr ABDOMINAL V acco 8 \ { POSTERIOR As. ANTERIOR \ Sees EPIGASTRIC A “SOE ABDOMINAL Vv ‘ peo, 7 ee fe AED te hI ee ac a eee ra R PELVIC v 20MM. ab L PELVIC v ‘ ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL V-' i DORSAL AORTA Fig. 10.—Veins of the pelvic ring. Ventral view. A, cloacal branch of the left abdominal veins. B, branch of iliac-intestinal vein from superficial pelvic muscles. C, branch of iliac vein from dorsum of thigh. JD, right rectal branch of inguinal vein. #H, left rectal branch of inguinal vein. Fig. 11.—The lateral and median abdominal veins, Also branches of the posterior epigastric and pericardial arteries. Dorsal view. Fig. 12.—Relationships of the fat bodies to their blood supply. Dorsal view. xvi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Bach sae is joined by two comparatively large cloacal veins from the anterior and posterior lips of the cloaca. These veins anastomose into a ring and join the sac as a single vessel on the left side, but have separate entries on the right side after an anastomosis. There are also tributaries from the walls of the bladder and the posterior part of the rectum near the cloaca. After running forward for a little more than 100 mm., receiving numerous, wide, short tributaries from the rectum, the rectal veins converge and unite to form the intestinal vein as it enters the mesentery. EH. These four mainly anterior rectal veins (Fig. 4) extend over a length of 120 mm. along the alimentary canal. The posterior two are quite short, but the anterior two are longer and run a considerable distance in the mesentery before they reach the alimentary canal. , F. The posterior intestinal vein (Fig. 4) flows in close to the place where the coeliaco-mesenteric artery branches. It is formed by three main trunks which again - are fed by about nine main tributaries from the intestine. G. The middle intestinal vein comes in more than 30 mm. from the posterior. It is fed by six main branches formed by about two dozen smaller factors from the intestine. H. The anterior intestinal vein, joining close to the middle intestinal vein, has two main branches and six or seven smaller tributaries. I. The duodenal vein (Fig. 4) is very large. Tributaries from the duodenum form nine big veins which flow more or less direct into the main trunk. The most anterior vein has a branch from the pancreas. The duodenal and three intestinal veins are all joined by a continuous vessel about 320 mm. long formed by short loops, which runs from the pylorus to the posterior end of the intestine. There is also a conspicuous anastomosis between the main branches of the duodenal and anterior intestinal veins and again between the middle and posterior intestinal veins. J. The lieno-gastric vein (Fig. 4) originates in a ramification of small vessels at the anterior extremity of the cardiac part of the stomach on the opposite side to the beginnings of the anterior gastric vein. After running about 40 mm. and receiving four or five stout tributaries from the stomach it is joined by a large vein from the azygous system. This vein is again joined near the level of the dorsal aorta by an important one from the posterior part of the oesophagus. The gastric vein receives a few other tributaries and then 20 mm. back becomes tree of the stomach and runs in the gastro-splenic mesentery. It receives about eight small factors from the spleen on one side and three large gastric factors on the other. After its junction with the pyloric vein (AK) the lieno-gastric vein runs a short distance to join the main intestinal vein about 10 mm. after the duodenal. Kk. The pyloric vein connects through the pancreas with the pancreatic vein. The pancreatic branch continues along the lesser curvature of the pylorus and after being joined by a large gastric factor is a prominent vessel by the time it reaches the lieno-gastric. i. The anterior gastric vein (Fig. 8) starts from a small group of vessels near the anterior end of the stomach and quickly increases in size as it runs backward in the gastro-hepatic omentum. It is just lapped ventrally through practically its whole course by the edge of the left lobe of the liver. It is fed by nine large veins which run transversely across the ventral and the greater part of the lateral walls of the stomach as far back as the duodenum. These tributaries are paired anteriorly where the gastric vein runs in the coat of the stomach, but further back, where the main vein becomes free, they have short common trunks. The posterior tributary receives a branch from the pancreas. Just as the anterior gastric vein reaches the level of the pancreas, from which comes a second branch direct, it turns sharply medially and, still concealed from ventral view by the posterior lobe of the liver, joins the large intestinal vein just before its junction with the anterior abdominal vein. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XVii The Pelvic Ring (Text-figs. 8, 10, 11 and 12). The pelvic ring may be taken as beginning with the symmetrical forking of the caudal vein to form the two afferent renal veins (Fig. 10). Each afferent renal vein almost immediately receives the inguinal vein with its vertebral, rectal and hemipenial branches. The vein then flows forward to the kidney. It is crossed almost at right angles by the iliac-intestinal vein, which connects the common iliac vein by way of the rectal vein with the intestinal system. Blood can either leave or enter the afferent renal vein through its connection by a very short trunk with the iliac-intestinal vein. Just before meeting the common iliac the iliac-intestinal is joined by a vessel from the superficial ventral pelvic muscles. Two branches, one vertebral and the other from the proximal dorsal thigh muscles, run into the common iliac, which now passes forward and laterally as the pelvic vein. The next tributary is the large femoral from the preaxial and dorsal sides of the thigh. About 5 mm. forward the great cutaneous vein joins. It can be traced forward in the muscles of the dorso-lateral body wall to the axillary region. The pelvic vein now turns medially to join its fellow in the midline and form the anterior abdominal vein (Fig. 10). Before the junction it receives about eight tributaries from the body wall, the ventral pelvic region and the fat bodies as well as a vesical vein (Figs. 10 and 12). The lateral abdominal veins start on each side of the anterior abdominal vein (Fig. 11). They run forward, each receiving a large vessel which serves as the main drainage of the fat bodies. Numerous small tributaries run in from the superficial ventral area. The right lateral abdominal vein gives off a median branch which forms a loop to rejoin near the front of the liver (Fig. 11). Each vein enters the liver at the anterior end of its respective lobe. A branch running forward on each side joins the right and left precavals. Hach lateral abdominal vein near its origin is joined by long thin veins running from the anterior lip of the cloaca. They are independent of the stout, median cloacal vein. The anterior abdominal vein is joined by two or three small veins near its base and from then on receives only the pancreatic vein before merging with the intestinal vein to form the hepatic portal vein (Fig. 8). The Pulmonary Vessels (Text-figs. 1 and 2). The pulmonary arch is the most posterior and dorsal of the three. It bifurcates immediately close to the heart. The right artery has a reasonably direct path to the right lung, but the left is forced out widely to pass under the stomach. Just as it enters the lung each artery splits into anterior and posterior branches. The posterior branch runs back about 40 mm. along the median ventral surface to the tip of the lung. The anterior branch runs forward about 110 mm. to the anterior tip. Both main branches send out a rich system of small arteries which ramify through the lung. There appears to be no trace of a ductus arteriosus (ductus Botalli). The radices of the systemic arch have been searched as well as the pulmonary arch. The pulmonary veins follow paths in the lungs almost identical with those of the arteries, leaving the lungs just laterally to the arteries. They open by a single very short trunk into the dorso-medial border of the left auricle about half-way back. Bibliography for Anatomical Section. The following works are among those consulted. More or less comprehensive references in publications marked with an asterisk have permitted considerable curtailment of this list. ; Briecs, EH. A., 1934.—Anatomy of Animal Types. Sydney. CUNNINGHAM, D. J., 1947.—Text Book of Anatomy. 8th Ed. London. Dre Beer, G. R., 1932.—Vertebrate Zoology. London. FRANCIS, Eric T. B., 1934.—The Anatomy of the Salamander. Oxford.* GoopRicH, Epwin S., 1930.—Studies on the Structure and Development of Vertebrates. London. * GuyYeR, MicHArL F., 1943.—Animal Micrology. 4th Ed. Chicago. HYMAN. LiIsBi—g HENRIETTA, 1943.—Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy. 2nd Ed. Chicago.* Litttn, Matcotm E., and Kempron, Rupoir T., 1932.—A Laboratory Manual for Comparative Anatomy. New York. XViii PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. MATHUR, PRAHLAD, NARAIN, 1944.—The Anatomy of the Reptilian Heart. Part 1. Varanus monitor (Linné). Proc. Ind. Acad. Svi., Sec. B, 20: 1:-29.* O’DoONOGHUE, CHAS. H., 1920.—The Blood Vascular System of the Tuatara, Sphenodon punctatus. Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., Ser. B, 210: 175-252.* PARKER, T. JEFFERY, and HASWELL, WILLIAM A., 1947.—A Text-Book of Zoology. 6th Hd. London. * SAUNDERS, J. T., and Manton, S. M., 1931.—A Manual of Practical Vertebrate Morphology. Oxford. STIBBE, EDWARD P., 1943.—Aids to Anatomy. 10th Ed. London. WIEDERSHEIM, ROBERT, and PARKER, W. N., 1907.—Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates. 3rd English Ed. London.* The main part of my address consists of a bibliography of Australian herpetological literature published since 1920 accompanied by a short review of work done during that time. I apologize in advance for many inevitable omissions. I have been arbitrary in taking 1920 as the date to begin my survey of recent Australian herpetology, but may justify it as an approximate turning point from the older more static view of this branch of zoology. The newer viewpoint takes into account ecological and geographical factors as well as a more fluid concept of species, which is best expressed for the taxonomist in the modern concept of races or subspecies rather than hard and fast species. The last 33 years of research on Australian reptiles and amphibia may best be outlined by describing in some detail the publications of four men whose works form the landmarks of Australian herpetology in that time. I refer to J. R. Kinghorn, of the Australian Museum, Arthur Loveridge, of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, Heber A. Longman, of the Queensland Museum, and H. W. Parker, of the British Museum (Natural History). Considerations of space preclude a full discussion of Kinghorn’s work, but the more important of his activities can be noted briefly. Nearly every one of his many papers contains some important contribution towards tying up loose ends left by earlier herpetologists. His work outside Australia in the Solomons and New Guinea does not come within the scope of this survey, but its value may be noted here. In 1920 Kinghorn published a comprehensive paper on the snake Denisonia suta Peters. Six well developed young in the oviducts of a snake captured at Willow Tree by W. W. Froggatt furnished a dramatic proof of the identity of Denisonia frontalis (Ogilby) with D. suta because the young snakes possessed among them the contrasted characteristics by which the two supposed species had been separated. D. stirlingi (Lucas and Frost), D. frenata Boulenger and D. frontalis var. propinqua De Vis were also united with D. suta. Next year he clarified the position of several snakes. He redescribed Notechis ater (Krefft) from the holotype, clearing up errors in the original description. Notechis scutatus niger was described as a new race from Deep Creek, Kangaroo Island. Denisonia ornata Krefft and Dendrelaphis schlenckeri Ogilby were sunk in the synonymies of Denisonia maculata (Steindachner) and Dendrophis calligaster Giinther respectively. A full discussion was given of Pseudechis mortonensis De Vis, and Willow Tree is noted as its first locality record in New South Wales. In 1923 he erected the genus Oxyuranus to accommodate the taipan and wrote, “Oxyuranus differs consistently from all allied genera by the extension of the maxillary beyond the palatine; by the peculiar anterior process of the palatine; the narrow anterior portion of the parietal; the strongly developed postfrontals; the fewer palatine and pterygoid teeth and the enlarged mandibular tooth. The same year he published a review of the Western Australian genera Aprasia and Ophioseps, restricting them to the three species Aprasia pulchella Gray, A. repens Fry, and Ophioseps nasutus Bocage. Varanus boulengeri was also described as new from Queensland, the type from Coquet Island and two paratypes from Townsville. An annotated list dealt with eight forms of snakes, 39 of lizards and 13 of frogs collected in South Australia and Western Australia in 1920 by EH. le G. Troughton, J. H. Wright, A. F. Basset Hull and H. S. Grant. Five specimens of Leiolepisma guichenoti Duméril and Bibron from Kangaroo Island form the first record I have been able to find of the occurrence of the lizard in South Australia. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xix Continued interest in the legless lizards led in 1924 to a review of the genus Lidlis Gray, and culminated two years later in an excellent and comprehensive revision of the whole family Pygopodidae. All available specimens were assembled and thorough comparisons were made. Hach species of the genera Pygopus, Delma, Paradelma, Ophidio- cephalus, Pletholax, Ophioseps, Aprasia and Lialis was discussed. The new genus Paradelma was erected to include the former Delma orientalis Giinther from Peak Downs and Gayndah, both in Queensland. However, the text should be followed instead of the faulty key for Delma as pointed out by Loveridge (1934: 315 and 316). Valuable work in clarifying the position of our snakes was added to in 1926 when he synonymized Pseudelaps minutus Fry with Denisonia coronoides (Giinther). He erected the genus Lucasius when he examined paratypes and topotypes of Ceramodactylus damaeus Lucas and Frost from Charlotte Waters, Central Australia, and other specimens from Perth, Ooldea and Pooncarie, and found that the species was not referable to Ceramodactylus Blanford or Diplodactylus Gray. An examination of 70 specimens led him to sink Diplodactylus polyothalmus Giinther into the synonymy of D. vittatus Gray. Diplodactylus strophurus Duméril and Bibron was revived from the synonymy of D. spinigerus Gray to which it had been relegated by Zietz (1920: 185). He notes that D. strophurus has a shorter and deeper head than D. spinigerus and that the dorsal tubercules do not resemble spines. D. ciliaris Boulenger and D. intermedius Ogilby remain in the synonymy. Series of Diplodactylus hili Longman, D. conspicillatus Lucas and Frost and D. platyurus Parker were compared and the decision reached that the only conspicuous differences were in the variable body scaling: In Herpetological Notes No. 2 of 1931 he figures Demansia guttata Parker and Rhinhoplocephalus bicolor Mueller for the first time, notes other snakes, and describes two new races of the lizards Egernia whitei and Tiliqua occipitalis. The mating ceremonial of the Bearded Dragon Amphibolurus barbatus Cuvier is detailed, and interesting locality records, extending the ranges of snakes, lizards and frogs, are given for Groote EHylandt, Hinchinbrook Island, Cape York and other parts of Queensland. Later in the year he described a new snake Rhynchoelaps roperi collected near the Roper River, North Australia, by K. Langford Smith; and a new gecko Heteronota walshi from Boggabri, New South Wales. Kinghorn in 1932 noted that Typhlops leonhardi Sternfeld was synonymous with T. endoterus Waite. Both were collected at Hermannsburg, Central Australia. The snake Stegonotus modestus Duméril and Bibron, of the Moluccas and Papuasia, was definitely recorded from Australia when two specimens were collected at Rocky River, near Coen. Another Queensland specimen from Ripple Creek, near Cardwell, had been in the Australian Museum collection since 1897, but the locality was in doubt. New subspecies Sphenomorphus isolepis foresti from Forest River, Western Australia; Sphenomorphus tenuis intermedius from the North Coast of New South Wales; and Sphenomorphus quoyi kosciuskoi from Mount Kosciusko were described. Tympano- cryptis cephalus Giinther was retained as a subspecies of 7. lineata Peters. Ecological notes were added on Moloch horridus Gray, Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Giinther, Myobatrachus gouldii Gray and Hyla citropus Giinther. Information on colour, colour changes, mating and distribution of the Hyla was especially valuable. In 1939 he discussed differences between the closely allied genera Glyphodon and Aspidomorphus, described Glyphodon barnardi as new and redescribed and figured Denisonia muelleri Fischer for the first time. Both snakes were collected at Coomoo- boolaroo Station, 15 miles south of Duaringa, Queensland. Typhlops yirrikalae [nearest relative JT. nigrescens (Gray)] from Arnhem Land was described as new in 1942. Examination of a large series of specimens led to the confirmation of Loveridge’s action in reducing Demansia olivacea and D. torquata to the synonymy of D. psammophis (Schlegel), and to the addition of D. ornaticeps (Macleay) to the list. Four other snakes were considered. Hxtreme variation in the markings and scalation were demonstrated for the gecko Oedura marmorata Gray, and O. tryoni, O. fracticolor, O. ocellata, O. cincta, O. monolis, O. castelnaui and O. meyeri were placed in its synonymy. Kinghorn in 1945 reported on the collections of the Simpson Desert xx PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Expedition of 1939. H. O. Fletcher was in charge of the biological collecting, which produced 120 specimens, comprising 18 genera, 20 species of lizards, three of snakes and one frog. Kinghorn’s handbook, the “Snakes of Australia’? was published in 1929 with 137 drawings in colour by Hthel A. King. It is the only recent authoritative book on the same field, and it is a great pity that it is out of print. One hopes that it will be republished and brought up to date so as to include the important findings of Loveridge, Kinghorn himself, and others. In 1943 he published in conjunction with C. H. Kellaway a valuable small guide “The Dangerous Snakes of the South-West Pacific Area’, which was widely circulated among the Australian and United States armed forces. The title indicates its contents. Oxyuranus was retained as a separate genus and separated from its nearest relatives by possessing 21 or 23 rows of keeled scales at midbody, an undivided anal, and one or two small teeth behind Jarge fangs. In concluding this short review of Kinghorn’s work, I can safely take it upon myself to thank him on behalf of all herpetologists for unselfish and ever ready assistance. Our greatest debt to Loveridge is for his catalogues of Australian and New Guinea reptiles and amphibians in the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, Massachusetts. Discussion of 267 forms of crocodilians, chelonians, snakes and lizards, and 78 species or races of frogs (of a total of 88 known then) shows the comprehensive- ness of the two Australian catalogues. But their main value is in the analytical approach to the whole question of Australian systematics. Dealing with the reptiles, five species and three races were described as new, including Nephrurus wheeleri, Amphibolurus darlingtoni, Sphenomorphus schevilli, Rhodona nichollsi and Lygosoma darlingtoni. Hight species of lizards and snakes were revived from synonymy, among them Typhlops nigrescens (Gray), the common blind snake around Sydney, from polygrammicus (Schlegel) from Timor. Important contributions were made towards clearing up the status of the Brown and Whip Snakes; Lycodon reticulatus and L. olivaceus, both of Gray, were reduced to races of Demansia psammophis (Schlegel), and Pseudonaja nuchalis Ginther and P. afflnis Giinther to races of Demansia textilis (Duméril and Bibron). Five species of lizards were regarded as subspecies. Loveridge’s onslaught on synonyms shortened the list of Australian species by at least one of chelonians, 10 of snakes and 65 of lizards. I am confident that only a very few (such as Hemiergis initiale Werner) will be revived. Wealth of experience has enabled him to compare analogous ranges in the variation of Australian snakes with those of exotic genera, such as Leptophis with Dendrophis, and Prosymna with Rhynchoelaps. On one small point I cannot agree with his use of the name Ablepharus lineoocellatus anomalus for New South Wales and other eastern skinks. Gray’s Morethia anomalus was described from Western Australia. This usage would mean that the type locality of the eastern skinks would be within the range of the western race of Ablepharus lineoocellatus. All local frogs known in 1935 are listed and all but ten of them discussed in Loveridge’s catalogue of amphibia, which is for all practical purposes the only handbook covering the whole class in Australia. His “New Guinean Reptiles and Amphibians” issued in 1948 is the most comprehensive modern treatment of the area and its importance is acknowledged here because of discussions of forms common to New Guinea and Australia, for example Gymnodactylus pelagicus (Girard), Leiolepisma fusca (Duméril and Bibron), L. bicarinata (Macleay), L. novaeguineae (Meyer), Ablepharus boutonii (Desjardin), Chondropython viridis (Schlegel), Natrix mairii (Gray) and Hyla bicolor (Gray). ; Loveridge’s 17 papers on the Australian fauna include his description in 1945 of a new species of blind snake Typhlops tovelli from Koonowarra Sports Ground, seven miles from Darwin. The snake is near 7. broomi Boulenger from Muldiva, north-east Queens- land, of which it may be a subspecies. In 1949 he dealt with T. R. Tovell’s collection made within 60 miles of Darwin of seven snakes, 16 lizards and eight frogs. Next year PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xxi he described as new Cyclorana slevini, near OC. australis (Gray) from Noondoo, South Queensland, Hyla kinghorni, near H. latopalmata Giinther; and Hyla aurea ulongae. The latter two are from Ulong, west of Coff’s Harbour. A key is given for the four races of Hyla aurea. Other papers include treatment of the snakes Pseudechis australis (Gray) and Fordonia papuensis Macleay; new lizards of the genera Nephrurus, Amphi- bolurus, Physignathus, Sphenomorphus, Rhodona and Lygosoma; seven new Crinine frogs; and a review of the frogs of Tasmania. It is unfair to leave our review of Loveridge’s work without paying tribute to Eh J. Darlington and W. EH. Schevill, an entomologist and a geologist, who collected so Many specimens on which Loveridge based his papers. Their contributions towards the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zoology totalled at least 1500 reptiles and frogs. Most of Longman’s work on living reptiles preceded 1920 and our main concern is with his activities as a vertebrate palaeontologist. Much of his work in this field dealt with fossil mammals, which again must be excluded, so that we are restricted to his research as a palaeoherpetologist. His most spectacular work was perhaps the description of Australia’s only well known dinosaurs. There had been three previous records of these reptiles in Australia, but they had been based only on fragments. H. G. Seeley described Agrosaurus macgillivrayi from the north-east coast, and A. Smith Woodward an ungual phalange of a carnivorous dinosaur from Cape Patterson, Victoria, and a tooth and a posterior caudal vertebra of a small Megalosaurian from Lightning Ridge. Longman’s first species was Rhoetosaurus brownei from Durham Downs, near Roma. The description was mainly based on 22 vertebrae. The gigantic herbivorous Jurassic dinosaur was probably more than 40 ft. long. Material recovered later enabled the reconstruction of a 5-ft. femur. A second dinosaur Austrosaurus mckillopi, which was found on Clutha Station, near Maxwelton, in 1932, came from the Cretaceous and was about 50 ft. long. In 1922 he described in detail a large skull of Ichthyosaurus australis found at Galah Creek, 12 miles from Hughenden, and gave a general discussion on the stapes. In 1935 he noted the finding of the greater part of a complete skeleton of the ichthyosaur from Telemon Station, also near Hughenden; and gave locality records of Megalania prisca, Notochelone costata and several plesiosaurs. Careful analysis of vertebrate evidence on the origin of the Australian fauna indicated for Longman dispersal from a northern centre without any need of postulating an Antarctic land bridge. He questioned any conclusions drawn from frogs because phylogenetic relationships in the Anura are still so incompletely known. A well at Brigalow brought to light Chelonian remains and fragments of the extinct erocodile Pallimnarchus pollens De Vis as well as bones of that extraordinary marsupial Huryzygoma dunense Longman. Ching PISA , 1950.—The Marsh Snake. Op. cit., 29-31. , 1951.—Venomous Land Snakes of New South Wales and their Comparative Danger to Man. Op. cit., 37-41. , 1952.—Notes on Snake Hibernation in New South Wales. Op. cit., 25-27. Proce. PARKER, H. W., 1926.—New Reptiles and a new Frog from Queensland. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9) 17: 665-670. , 1926.—A New Lizard from South Australia. Op. cit., (9) 18: 203-205. , 1931.—A new species of Blind Snake from N.W. Australia. Op. cit., (10) 8: 604-605. , 1934.—A Monograph on the Frogs of the Family Microhylidae. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.) London, 1-208. . , 1938.—The races of the Australian frog Hyla aurea Lesson. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) 2: 302-305. , 1940.—The Australasian frogs of the family Leptodactylidae. Novit Zool., London, 42:1-106. Prescott, EH. E., 1927.—Blue-tongue Lizards in captivity. Vict. Nat., 44: 212. Pocock, R. I., 1927.—A record Australian Python. Field, 149 (3879): 707; 149 (3884): 919. Pratt, C. W. McE., 1948.—The morphology of the ethmoidal region of Sphenodon and lizards. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 118:171-201. Procter, J. B., 19238.—On New and Rare Reptiles and Batrachians from the Australian Region. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1069-1077. , 1923.—The Flora and Fauna of Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator Group. No. 5. The Lizards. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47: 79-81. , 1924.—Unrecorded Characters seen in living Snakes and Description of a new Tree- frog. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1125-1129. Roperts, N. L., 1941.—Some notes on Australian spiders. Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. N.S.W., 36-41. ROBINSON, St. J., 1948.—The crocodile at the nest (Crocodilus porosus). N. Qd. Nat., 16 (88): 3-4. Roppa, A. E., 1925.—A Naturalist at Bethanga. Vict. Nat., 42 (7): 164-170. Scott, H. O. G., 1932.—On the occurrence in Tasmania of Hydrophis ornatus, variety ocellatus ; with a note on Pelamis platurus (= Hydrus platurus). Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas., 111. , 1933.—A note on the so-called Minute Snake of Tasmania. Op. cit., 54-55. , 1942.—A new Hyla from Cradle Valley, Tasmania. Rec. Queen Victoria Mus., Launceston, 1 (1): 5-11. SIEBENROCK, F., 1914.—Hine neue Chelodina Art aus Westaustralien. Anz. Akad. Wiss. Wien.. 27: 386-387. , 1915.—Die Schildkréten gattung Chelodina Fitz. SiteBer. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 124:13-35. Simpson, D. A., 1949.—The epiphyseal complex in Trachysaurus rugosus. SaAUsts,, (o G)is t=5- SmirH, H. M., 1939.—A new Australian lizard, with a note on Hemiergis. Field Mus. Pub., 24:11-14. SmirH, Matcoutm A., 1926.—Monograph on the Sea-Snakes (Hydrophiidae). Brit. Mus., London, i-xvii + 1-130. —————, 1927.—-Contributions to the Herpetology of the Indo-Australian Region. Proc. Zool. Soc. London: 199-225. , 1931.—Description of a new genus of Sea Snake from the coast of Australia, with a note on the structure providing for complete closure of the mouth in Aquatic Snakes. Proc. Zool. Soc. London., 397-398. , 1937.—A Review of the Genus Lygosoma and its Allies. Rec. Ind. Mus., 39 (3): 213- Trans. Roy. Soc. 234. SnypDER, Richard C., 1952.—Quadrupedal and Bipedal Locomotion of Lizards. Copeia, (2): 64-70. STEJNEGER, L., 1933.—The Ophidian generic names Ahaetulla and Dendrophis. Copeia (4) : 199-208. STERNFELD, R., 1925.—Beitrage zur Herpetologie Inner-Australiens. Abh. senckenb. naturf. Ges., 38 (3): 221-251. STINSON, G. E., 1923.—Notes on the Carpet Snake. Aust. Nat., 5: 81-82. STOKELY, Paul Scott, 1947.—The Post-cranial Skeleton of Aprasia repens. Copeia, (1) :; 22-28. STULL, O. G., 1932.—Five new subspecies of the Family Boidae. Occ. Pap. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 8: 25-29. , 1935.—A Check List of the family Boidae. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 40: 387-408. Tayior, H. H., 1935.—Notes on a small herpetological collection from Western Australia. Trans. Kans. Acad. Sci., 38: 341-344. XXXVi PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. TercHprt, C., 1944.—Upper Cretaceous Ichthyosaurian and Plesiosaurian remains from Western Australia. Aust. J. Sci., 6 (6): 167-170. 1947.—Contributions to the Geology of Houtman’s Abrolhos, Western Australia. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 71 (3-4) : 145-196. TxxoMSON, D. F., 1930.—Observations on the venom of Pseudechis australis (Gray). iL, Synonymy. Aust. J. Hap. Biol. Med. Sci., 7: 125-133. F ———-— , 1933.—Notes on Australian Snakes of the genera Pseudechis and Oxyuranus. Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond., (4) : 855-860. 1934.—A new Snake from North Queensland. Op. cit., 529-531. , 1935.—Preliminary notes on a collection of Snakes from Cape York Peninsula. Op. cit.,. 723-731. TRETHEWIE, BE. R., and Day, A. J., 1948.—The influence of heparin on the toxicity of Australian snake venom. Aust. J. Hap. Biol. Med. Sci., 26 (1): 37-43. —, 1948.—New therapy in ophidiasis. Op. cit., 26 (2): 153-161. TSCHAMBERS, B., 1949.—Birth of the Australian Blue-tongued lizard, Tiliqua scincoides (Shaw). Herpetologica, 5 (6): 141-142. TUBB, J. A., 1937.—Reports of the Expedition of the McCoy Society for Field Investigation and Research. Lady Julia Percy Island (Hgernia whitii.) Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 49 (2): 425. , 1938.—The Sir Joseph Banks Islands. Reports of the Expedition of the McCoy Society for Field Investigation and Research. II. Reptilia, Part 1: General. Op: Git, 50 (2): 383-398. WaAITE, E. R., 1923.—The Fauna and Flora of Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator Group. No. 10. The Snakes of Francis Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47: 127-128. , 1925.—Field Notes on some Australian Reptiles and Batrachians. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., a (ily 3 fez, , 1927.—The Fauna of Kangaroo Island, South Australia. No. 3. The Reptiles and Amphibians. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51: 326-329. , 1929.—The Reptiles and Amphibians of South Australia, Adelaide, 1-270. Waith, E. R., and LoNGMAN, H. A., 1920.—Descriptions of little-known Australian Snakes. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 1: 173-180. Watson, D. M. S., 1926.—The Evolution and Origin of the Amphibia. Philos. Trans., B 214 (416) : 189-257. WEEKES, H. CLAIRE, 1927.—A Note on reproductive phenomena in some Lizards. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 52: 25-32. , 1927.—Placentation and other phenomena in the Scincid Lizard Lygosoma (Hinulia) quoyi. Op. cit., 52: 499-554. , 1929.—On Placentation in Reptiles. I. Op. cit., 54 (2): 34-60. , 1930.—On Placentation in Reptiles. II. Op. cit., 55 (5): 550-576. , 1933.—On the distribution, habitat and reproductive habits of certain European and Australian Snakes and Lizards, with particular regard to their adoption of viviparity. Op. cit., 58 (38-4): 270-274. , 1934.—The corpus luteum in certain oviparous and viviparous reptiles. OpaGits, 59 (5-6): 380-391. , 1935.—A review of placentation among Reptiles with particular regard to the function and evolution of the Placenta. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 625-645. WERNER, F., 1917.—Uber einige neue Reptilien und einen neuen Frosch des Zoologischen Museums in Hamburg. Jahrb. Hamburg wiss. Anst., 2 Beih., 34: 31-36. , 1925.—Neue oder wenig bekannte Schlangen aus dem Wiener naturhistorischen Staatsmuseum. Site.Ber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 134 (1 and 2): 45-66. WHITE, S. R., 1948.—Observations on the Mountain Devil (Moloch horridus). W. Aust. Nat., 1 (4): 78-81. , 1949.—Some notes on the netted dragon lizard (Amphibolurus reticulatus). Op. cit., ° (CS) 8 alaygeilGal Wuite, T. E., 1935.—On a skull of Kronosaurus queenslandicus Longman. Occ. Pap. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 8: 219-227. WILKINSON, H. J., 1947.—-An introduction to the evolution of the brain. Proc. Roy. Soc. Qd., 58: 1-33. WILLISTON, S. W., and GreGory, W. K., 1925.—The Osteology of the Reptiles. Harv. U. Press, i-xiii + 1-300. Woopwarp, A. S., 1932.—In Zittell’s “Text Book of Palaeontology’. II. Vertebrates. London. Amphibia and Reptilia: 189-427. WorrEL, H., 1945.—Freshwater Crocodile in Captivity. Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. N.S.W., 30-32. ————, 1945.—The Orange-Naped Whipsnake. Op. cit., 32-33. , 1946.—A strange tortoise (Hmydura krefftii). Op. cit., 29-31. , 1946.—The northern River Snake (Natrix mairii). Op. cit., 32. . , 1947.—Emotion in reptiles. Op. cit., 31-32. , 1947.—A new sanctuary. Op. cit., 33. , 1951.—Classification of Australian Boidae. Op. cit., 20-25. , 1952.—The Australian Crocodiles. Op. cit., 18-238. ————., 1952.—Dangerous Snakes of Australia. Sydney. 1-64. , PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXXVil YoncsE, C. M., 1930.—A Year on the Great Barrier Reef. London and New York. (Marine turtles, 204-206.) ZANGERL, Rainer, 1945.—Contributions to the osteology of the post-cranial skeleton of the Amphisbaenidae. Amer. Midl. Nat., 33: 764-780. ZiETz, F. R., 1920.—Catalogue of Australian Lizards. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 1 (3): 181-228. The Honorary Treasurer, Dr. A. B. Walkom, presented the Balance Sheets for the year ended 28th February, 1953, duly signed by the Auditor, Mr. S. J. Rayment, F.C.A. (Aust.), and his motion that they be received and adopted was carried unanimously. No nominations of other candidates having been received, the Chairman declared the following elections for the ensuing year to be duly made: President: J. M. Vincent, B.Sc.Agr. Members of Council: R. H. Anderson, B.Sc.Agr.; W. R. Browne, D.Sc.; A. N. Colefax, B.Se.; S. J. Copland, M.Sc.; Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, B.Se., Ph.D., F.R.G.S., F.R.S.G.S.; Professor J. L. Still, B.Sc., Ph.D.; and J. M. Vincent, B.Sc.Agr. Auditor: S. J. Rayment, F.C.A. (Aust.). Finally I wish to thank you for the honour of electing, me President, especially as I have been the only non-professional scientist to hold the office for many years. I take the opportunity of wishing the Society every success in the future. A cordial vote of thanks to the retiring President was carried by acclamation. XXXVili ‘IIINSvILL, “UOF 9 8 foam inn aie a=) co OL T : P ote = ein ae SS6L ‘Wore UP “LOJIPNY “SS6L “yore WIL ‘SouDAS ‘WOMTVM “a “VY (ysny) JUBJUNODDY poaleVIVYO “INGWAVY “f '*S 698 SF *po}DVdSUT Us0q DAT, SJUSTIJSOAUL OY} JO SoIBOYTIAGD ‘syooqg vy} Aq UMOYS SB ‘“eG6l ‘Alvniqagq UI8Z 7B SAreye S,A4J9IN0G 9} JO 91e1S ena} oY JUeSeId UOTUIdO AW UT pue “YJIMo19y}] sdURP1INNNV UL PUB jdaTI0D 918 JUNODDY VUODUT SuTAUBdUIODDe puUe Jo9qS dDUB[VG VGAOGV 9} }VY} AjI}100 puv “EGET ‘AtvnAgay 4I8Z Pepue IBv9A BY} JOJ SoTePAA YWINOS MON JO A1eTIOS UBsUUTT 94} JO SIoYONOA puB JUNODDe Jo Syoog VY] PoUlWeXY VALY T ‘SUAENHN OL LYOdHU S.YOLIGNV Oye = ACh 883 P9E : : SjulIdet jo [eg “ LT tL 292 fe oce a ee PS-ES61 0} souRTeg * GEg oe suljulid SpivMO} s]uUBIt) “ ye IE XS ‘* JuNODDY SUIPUIQYoo, 0} JejsuBly, “ € Ssosuedxq yurg ‘ & 6 O6L 99% oie (poilteysuB.sy (@ WIL Rie mes eres Fie Soslceh sel yueg “ “SG6L eenade g Y38Z 7e suU00 0 0 68 eee aM igs aren “* suluvs[g “ -ul snjdins) junososy sdiysMmor[aq ‘ IL &L 9F S80) a A SE Sa eo nae sesuedxy “ GZS (s GOA #1) 9) JUSULULOAO) ‘MSN S TIT 0 68 Sas ae Te OE USUCTIETS pue 3sunulg “ S61 iS sores “ 6 til eed tae - yipny “ CFO OSnoH vouelIS “ & OL G6 a 02S . . ee 4s9.190]UT “cc I ST LZ oe oe oe oe oe oe yseo An10d 66 61 Soo7 oourUy ““ Z SL 19 oan oar oe oe oe oy oe 93R1S0d “6 G6s IL OL IZ oe oe oe oe ee o. doUBINSUL ce 0 OL Been ge roe a cn oc a1e1l00ssy 8 GL F08'T 0 OL OL oe oe oe Od e. JOUBAPB ul Z GL PLL a,0 ee oe ee ee ee ee Syoold ce 0 eT rE oe oe oe oe o- oe SIBVIIIW 0 Zz 6LE o. o- oe oe S] UT doy Sunuidg 6c 0 6&1 69& ee Sri eee €S-ZG6T :SuOT}dIIosqng Seamer ge OG) Nees SALOON surjulig “ 96§ 2g: Se ZS-LG6T Woly souv[eg Aq | 8 9 BGP te Senne seas fee "s+ SOLIBlVS OL 72 Pas F Oey eee eee “ES6L ‘Arenaqey yIgzZ pepuyq ze9x “LNNODDV AWOONI 9LS‘T Es EE ee OUGELes: 869 T T 889 Soh ae pedir es ‘pyT ‘Aoupség 30 suvawoy, =SIOMPTTOHES| [V1d.1SUIUIOD De 9G XO = aaa OS SONG OMB ETE MOR ITO) MOE ** puvy Ur Yseg LT FL LS a tg ee jUNODDV 2WOOUT —Ss]Ossy }Ue1IND 9 L OSPF ae WE gees el junODDy sUuTpulqyoog 8180 P TL 898'0& ys ore sss Spnung peTRB[NuMNo.Vy F p G88 FL ee ee ee oe oe On ee als{oys) ———————— EE ye ‘(91BYS PAIlY}-9uU0) 8ssSnNOH{ VsdUETIS P LT 898‘0L yr th ts fs 6 QALESeY S8TOUISUTIUOD 9 L 466 hake es 3800 }e “‘pivog oseuleid OO UNS $= pue oseviomes ‘101eM Ue pOdOIe][ 0 0 0009 TITM SIU Aq poyyeonbeq wins 19qIN YG :seinjqueqeqd 0 0 O000%T °° SWTOJIT SIU SulINnp ABIpORTN 0 OL 8FO‘GE °° °° 4800 7B ‘suBOTT YITVAMUO WUD WIBITTIM JIG WOlJ peaAtooot JUNOWY —S}ossy PoXly —Te}1dep 3 {DEAS aoe a: P73 SDSS: ‘S.LHSSV ‘SHILLITIGAVIT “ES6L ‘Arenaqey yIgZ ye Jey souRTeEG “LNNOODODV TVWYAANAD SATVM HLNOS MAN JO ALAIDOS NVANNIT XXxix "SG6L ‘WoIV WIP *L1OJIPNVW ‘IOINSVIL], ‘UOT ‘WOMIVA ‘OG °V “SG6L “YOIe UITT ‘Aoupsg ‘Caisny) JUeIUNODY poieVIVYO ‘INAWAVY “[ 'S ‘poJDVdSUL Useq BABY SJUSUIJSOAUL 94} JO SoUBVOYIIASD ‘syooq vy? Aq UMOYS se ‘eggT ‘Aienaiqeay WI8zZ 7 SAleye 8,AJ9ID0G VY} JO 07¥IS ONA 9} JUGSeId UOoTUIdO AW UT pue ‘YIMesey] VdUBP10N0B UL PUB J991100 O1R JUNODDW VUIODUT SsuTAURdIODDR pu JOOS QoUB[V_ AOGR OY} IVY} AJI}A00 pue ‘EGET ‘AreNAGaT YIZZ pepuse IB9A 9Y} 1OJ sopeA YING MON JO 4]0T90G UKOUUT'T 9Y} JO SIOYINOA pue }UNODIe Jo SYoog VY} PouTWeXe JAvY T ‘SUHENHN OL LYOdHY S.YOLICAV 4so9.10]UT AG SL SL8 1S 9 CFL o. oe oe oe oe eo. oe "+ qunoosoy jevideg 6 9 992 0-0 oe oe oe oa oe o- UNODDW [e199 0} Bemiersuee XLT SCOTS Suleq ‘eouvleg “ Onm oe So 29 SRG, [@weer =) oD 00 Ne) 0 06 ce ae SR ee SosucedxW Plely pue Youvssey “ rr Ceyeip 9° ‘* SMOT[OA ABITIBI, UVOUTII'T JO Soliv[Vs OT, DS "EGG, ‘Areniqe. 4yIgZ pEepuyq 7eak “LNNOOOV FNOONI b 8 SSL sos ‘piqT ‘Aoupsg jo Auedwog suryued [VIo1e9uIlU0/) ‘SJEeSSV JUeTIND 3 = 187 6 6 P8S°ES OO OSGiy Tl. eSeS1i0oW Uo uUeoT OQ O- SO 1s00 1% ‘pivog osvulTeig pue ssVIaMOG ‘19}eM UL ITTOdO.1,9I :Y0019 poeql.osuy 0 SE ZZU‘% °° 4800 1% “MSN jo Yuvg [einy 6 FT 9C0'ST “" * 4S00 38 ‘pivog osvuleid pue ISBIBMOG ‘1O]VAA ULITLOMOIOWI :Ssoinjueqod 0 0 OGF0g °° °° 4800 78 ‘sUBOT Y}[BVOMUOTIUTO/D) ‘S]OSSV PoXTA ‘SLHSSV b 8 SeL‘ess iz Se Geewe °2 <8 ‘+ ++ pazipeyideg stuio0uy sn{ding 0 0 o000;Sg °° eae WPITIIM IIS Aq poyyeonbeq JUNOWY ‘spun poe e[NUINYy p's 5 ‘SHILITIAVIT "EGG ‘Aaenaqey 4IgzZ 7 LAAHS AONV IVA “LNNODDV SdIHSMOTISAA AVATIOVIN NVANNIT ‘SHTVM HLNOS MAN JO ALSIOOS NVANNIT x] “AIIMSVI1LT, “COR “SS6L “ole UIP ‘WOMIVA ‘G@ “WV Oe “TOVIPNW ‘Cysny) JUR]JUNODDY pole,IeYO “INAWAVY “f£ “Ss “SG6T “Worley ITT ‘AoupAs ‘poyoodsul Useq VARY S]USUIJSOAUT 9} JO So7eVOyIIIED se ‘“eggr ‘Arenaiqagq YSZ 1B SATeye S,AJ9TII0G oY} JO 97¥1S ena} OY) JUASIId uolurdo AW UL pue ‘“Y}IMo1eY} VOURP1090B UL PUB }d91100 918 JUNODDW vUODUT SuTAUedUIODDe pue eeqS aoUuR[eg IAOdV JY} 7eY} AJIZ190 pue “Eg¢gT ‘Areniqaq YSZ pepuse eed 9} JOT soyeAA UNOS MON JO AjoTOOG UBIUUTT oY} JO StoyONOA puUv jJUNODIe JO SYOOd VY} pouruMIeXxe sARY T ‘SUAENON OL LYOdHU S.YOLIGAV ‘SyOOod oy} Aq UMOYS Q & ess Oe) Races L IL #96 2; oaeeae “" FG-§G6T 0} s0uvleg * 8 © 01 6 TL me : satedezy vo 8 y ae soley ) ee se aouBINSUyT OeOR Or, edoosololf, JO apes “ :Ajiedoig oyessuey “ 8 9 8g ee ee ee judy 3 0 F ee OO XBL []o1Aeg “ac 0 0 O&F suoijeu0g “ IL 91 ia 3 BP ee eouvinsuy “ OL €L TOS ysotoquy “ 9° 5916S oa siredey pue juowdmnby” “ 9 G 666 GS-TG6L Wo1j souvleg Aq | F GT Z9T'T svURPMOTTY pue AIBTVS OL DS F DS F ps F €S61 ‘Aaenaqoy yIgZ pepuy 4e92, “LNNODOV AIWOONI Qos! Gr Olio 0 6 €L6‘6IS 0 6 &F8'T “SOTTIGeIT JUGLINY) ) @° yueg SSuIAeS YI[RPeaMUOWWUOD © LT 828 eee SS eT TE ‘pi, ‘keupAg ‘SJOSSV JUeLIND jo = = ‘S =~ s s = = iS Ss S = S = S ES = ~ a = o va) maculosa — aX xx XX X Dalrympleana Xx — — — viminalis XOXG XxX xx rubida ROK Bx Cordieri — Stuartiana 28 x=Hybrid determined on morphological evidence. xx—=Hybrid determined on evidence of segregation in a progeny test. The area displays as a whole features in conformity with the two generalities mentioned at the outset. The most striking exception is the apparent overlap in the interbreeding species #. rubida (Text-fig. 4) and H. Stuartiana (Text-fig. 5). The explanation here, however, is Simple. The distribution of #. rubida in this area is mainly due to the presence of soil which is periodically swampy, and in most cases is represented by narrow flats along drainage channels, and is frequently associated with an understorey of Lepto- spermum juniperinum. This habitat is very sharply cut off from the surrounding areas and is a narrow strip of accumulated soil in contrast with the soil of most of the area which is developed in situ. If the #. rubida distribution is compared with Leptospermum (Text-fig. 6) it will be seen that there is close correspondence. The mixing with H. Stuartiana is conditioned by the habitat and is an expression of the mosaic of two distinct habitats. On well-drained soils H. Stwartiana and EH. rubida are not co-dominants in mixed stands. In this particular area the remaining species belonging to the Macrantherae, EH. maculosa (Text-fig. 7) is almost completely separated from #. Stuartiana as it occupies here soils derived from sedimentary rock, whiie #. Stuartiana is mainly on soils derived from granite. In the group of species belonging to the Renantherae it will be seen that all pairs of species, with one exception, are almost entirely separated in their distribution. The exception is H. dives and HE. macrorrhyncha, 12 GENETIC CONTROL IN EUCALYPTUS DISTRIBUTION, ¢ Rucalyptus rubida ®) e Pucalyptue Rosaii = : eS rs o Pacalypftus Sturtiana UNDERGROWTH TYPES SYALBOLS- 4 Levtospermum scoparium () Xantherrrcea austratts SES] Grasses (Mainly Danthonia) ERB eeriem ageinnum Danthonia pallida EA Brachyloma, Mibbertia (is Themeaa sustreis {cums 8 fy ] 8 » Text-figures 4-6. which show some overlap. For the area concerned the overlap of these two species is: about 15% of their total distribution, which compares with only about 1% between: E. dives and E. Rossii within the same limits. While this difference needs further explanation, it will be seen at once that the amount of overlap is quite different from that of non-interbreeding species which, for example, in the case of HE. macrorrhyncha is co-extensive with H. maculosa for about 75% of the area covered by the latter species. BY L. D. PRYOR. ; e Mucalyptus maculosa @) e mucaly tus melliodora s e A eo ‘ 20 2 une i ee ee 2 ® ; a= ee A e ry) @°@ ee C) OF} e°? the ae 0 pss Ve °o iy f Yi f es e 18 : e0 . Or) “i -ee @ e Se SS ee Fi <0 06 i ® oe (2) AS at e eKhk ee a e Se oe se e KAO mA cers $ ee? YOK "0 0 H 3 eee $e OF Se SURO : : i Sen A e mucalyptus dives ° Small sapling Text-figures 7-9. It is obvious that the extent of overlap is partly related to the habitat requirements of the species. For example, H#. Robertsoni requiring good soil and sheltered conditions needs a habitat which is strongly contrasted with that occupied by H. Rossii which can survive naturally only on exposed slopes with poor rocky soil. These habitats are strongly contrasted and any intermediate zone is usually too exposed for H. Robertsoni or too sheltered for H. Rossii, their place being taken by the Renantherous species 13 14 GENETIC CONTROL IN EUCALYPTUS DISTRIBUTION, BE. macrorrhyncha. This difference is reflected in the fact that they do not overlap at all in the area and barely come into contact in one or two places. On the other hand, the requirements of #. dives and H. macrorrhyncha are much closer and at their junction there is obviously a gently grading habitat which can readily accommodate both species. In a broad view extending to the full range of these species beyond the marginal area being studied, #. dives and EL. macrorrhyncha do not occur together as co-dominants in stands. #. dives is distributed at elevations above H. macrorrhyncha, so that as one proceeds higher on the Southern Tablelands the same habitat which carried HE. macrorrhyncha alone or with a non-interbreeding species at the warmer northern end is found to have #. dives alone or similarly combined in the colder southern areas, as, for example, to the south of Michelago towards Cooma and Jindabyne. The rather broad overlap of the two species in the subject area, however, probably results from another cause. This is illustrated by Text-figures 8, 9, 10 and 11, showing the distribution of #. macrorrhyncha and E. dives. It will be noticed if these figures are compared, that since settlement, which has meant burning and partial clearing followed by extensive regeneration, H. dives has extended its range much more than HE. macrorrhyncha. The new conditions favour H. dives, as indicated from the figures. The dominants are large, old trees which would correspond quite closely to the virgin stand. Co-dominants are mostly the early regeneration following settlement and the saplings or dominated trees are plants up to about thirty years of age. The response of various species to the new conditions resulting from settlement is quite variable; some are aggressive and spread rapidly, like H. dives, whereas others tend to remain restricted or even diminish, as, for example, H. maculosa. It is likely, therefore, that the overlap between #. dives and EH. macrorrhyncha was even less than the figures indicate but, on the other hand, in the future the overlap will become still greater as H. dives extends its range in accordance with the regeneration already established and the favouring of further regeneration by present conditions. In the virgin state the zone of overlap between HE. dives and H. macrorrhyncha is small and quite precise compared with present-day conditions. This area illustrates particularly well another type of junction zone of interbreeding species. : As mentioned above, #. Rossii and H. Robertsoni, as a result of their habitat requirements, do not overlap and barely approach one another at one or two points. The intermediate habitat zone is occupied by H#. macrorrhyncha in so far as Renantherae are concerned (Text-figs. 4 and 12). When the survey of this area was carried out in 1938 trees distinct from either EH. Robertsoni or H. Rossii but possessing some of the characters of either, were recog- nized in this intermediate zone. In particular, their Peppermint affinity was quite apparent, but as at that stage nothing was known of their genetic make-up, they were accordingly recorded as a new species of Hucalyptus with Peppermint affinities. The genetic constitution of these trees has been subsequently determined, and it is clear that they are #. Rossii x H. Robertsoni hybrids. Text-figure 13 shows three features of the occurrence of these hybrids which are of interest. Firstly, they are in the intermediate habitat; secondly, there are some old trees which were present before settlement; and thirdly, the range and number of the hybrids have extended in regrowth since settlement. CHARACTERISTICS OF SPECIES JUNCTIONS. From similar field studies it is found that in the area where two interbreeding species of Hucalyptus_ meet there is usually a zone of hybrids between the two species to a greater or lesser degree. The extent of this zone and the number of actual hybrids are affected by several things. First of all it is likely that the ease of hybridizing between all pairs of parents is not the same, and secondly, the viability of the offspring from the combinations is apparently not uniform. In addition, the type of habitat and | the rapidity of change in gradation between the two habitats at times eliminate most of the space in which hybrids with growth requirements approximately between the | hg i BY L. D. PRYOR. 15 two parents can thrive, or it may be practically non-existent, as in the case of the very sharp transition from the swampy accumulated soils ordinarily occupied by ZH. stellulata to those occupied by, say, H. macrorrhyncha. A careful examination of a number of species junctions in different areas shows that old hybrid trees, which were growing before settlement, occur in many cases, even though rather sparsely, e.g., H. pauciflora x EH. fastigata at the upper limit of the E. fastigata is fairly frequent, and H. gigantea x E. pauciflora is found. The same kind of thing has been observed in widely different regions, for example, between Z. melanophloia and H. albens about thirty miles west of Tenterfield on the Bonshaw road; between EH. micrantha and H. campanulata at the edge of the scarp about fifteen miles east of Tenterfield; between HL. sideroxylon and H. albens in the vicinity of Gundagai; and LH. leucoxylon and E. odorata on the Adelaide plains. As a result of this reconstruction of the conditions of hybrid occurrence in virgin stands, it is shown that in many cases the formation of hybrids has been going on for an indefinitely long time, but under virgin conditions they have been able to thrive successfully only in a small area at the junction of the two species. There is some evidence that in addition to the occurrence of hybrids in the junction zone there is a degree of introgression by either species, one into the other, usually present. Further study is necessary, however, to understand fully the position in this particular respect. SPREAD OF HYBRID SWARMS. It is not difficult to account for the extensive development of hybrid swarms between various species combinations following settlement, and it does not seem necessary to postulate an altered rate of hybridization between any given pair of species to account for the present condition. At the time of settlement a reservoir of hybrids was already present, and the result of settlement has been the upset of balance, the “hybridization of the habitat” (Anderson, 1949), which has favoured the spread of progeny derived from hybrids of one kind or another at the expense of species occupying the adjoining zones in the virgin state. It has already been mentioned in the case of #. dives that the conditions following settlement favour the regeneration of that species. This fact is clear and it can be demonstrated easily that it is associated with fire, although all the details of the process are not yet known. The result is, however, that certain hybrid combinations derived from species favoured in their growth by the new conditions are even more successful than their parents in spreading at the expense of other species, and this is expressed in mountain areas in the Australian Capital Territory by the advance of certain Renantherous species at the expense of some of the Macrantherae. Moreover, this often makes available to Renantherous species a site which was not well, or even at all, occupied by either of them in the virgin state. In such circumstances hybrids often thrive better than either of the invading parent species. A good example of this is provided by the area in the vicinity of Lees Springs, A.C.T. Approaching the top of the range there is a gently grading broad gully which gradually becomes less sheltered and, while at first carrying a stand of H. gigantea and E. Dalrympleana, gives way to a substantial area of well-grown H. Dalrympleana alone or with some £#. paucifiora where the site is still favourable but not quite good enough for #. gigantea. At the upper limit ZL. Dalrympleanca is replaced entirely by HL. paucifiora. On adjoining, sharp, exposed ridges at the same elevation as H. Dalrympleana there is a stand of EH. dives mixed with depauperate EH. Dalrympleana. This at its upper limit and at approximately the same elevation as the upper limit of HE. Dalrympleana joins the pervading EL. pauciflora stand. The usual hybrids between EH. paucifiora and E. dives - occur at the stand junction between these two on rather poor sites which immediately adjoins the good site carrying large trees of H. Dalrympleana. The comparative failure of E. Dalrympleana to regenerate and the vigorous regeneration of H. dives and _E. paucifiora have resulted in the replacement in regeneration under the now large : | L6 GENETIC CONTROL IN EUCALYPTUS DISTRIBUTION, fire-damaged trees of H. Dalrympleana of that species by a swarm of H. dives x HE. pauciflora. A new habitat has become available for this hybrid combination which was not available for it to colonize under virgin conditions, as it was fully occupied by BE. Dalrympleana. As there is apparently some hybrid vigour or, at least in the early stages, rapid growth of the hybrids as compared with either parent, #. dives or E. pauciflora, the hybrid swarm has become the most biologically effective population to occupy this area. This kind of thing appears to be common, and a further good illustration with some variation is provided at Badja, some 20 miles north-east of Cooma. The arrange- ment of the species in the virgin condition in one section of this area is a little ° grall sapling Text-figures 10-11. unusual in that there is a temperature inversion due to the physiography of the country, which results in #. radiata occurring towards the upper part of ridges, with E£. pauciflora near the flat basin at the bottom, and E. Dalrympleana interposed in the intermediate zone between them. This arrangement is not unique and occurs in various similar areas in the highlands of the southern part of New South Wales. Here, where the stands have been subject to repeated fire since settlement, regeneration of #. Dalrympleana is very scarce. The old stands are opening up due to gradual destruction by burning, and regeneration of £. radiata and EH. pauciflora is abundant under the old stand, to the exclusion of H. Dalrympleana, entering from above and ; ) BY L. D. PRYOR. 11 7/ below into the original #. Dalrympleana stand. The regeneration under the #. Dalrympleana is a hybrid swarm between #H. radiata and H. paucifiora, but the morpho- logical characters indicating hybrid origin, which are well known from numerous progenies of this combination studied, if taken as an average at a series of points, show a definite gradation in the regeneration from almost pure ZH. pauciflora stock under the original H. pauciflora stands, through a series of graded intermediates to almost pure H#. radiata regeneration under the #H. radiata stand. In short, there is a hybrid swarm replacing the #. Dalrympleana and the swarm is graded according to the graded habitat conditions through the intermediate zone. e Dacalyptus Fovertsoni @ © Bucalyptus pauciflora Dominant Sub Dominent © Smal! Sapling Text-figures 12-13. SYSTEMATICS AND PLANT SOCIOLOGY. The above considerations have a bearing on two other aspects of study dealing with Hucalyptus. Firstly, in considering the validity of any described species, it is fair to say, following the rule induced from the majority of established species, that if they are interbreeding they occupy distinctly different ecological habitats, any new | forms being studied should be considered only as species or sub-species if they represent a population which occurs in a zone ecologically distinct from that occupied by related interbreeding species. If this criterion is applied to Hucalyptus species as at present deseribed, the classification of the genus is at once somewhat simplified and a number of forms described as species can be properly placed in perspective in relation to the D 18 GENETIC CONTROL IN EUCALYPTUS DISTRIBUTION. remainder. In the systematic revision of the genus which must be made at some {ime in the future, this criterion must be prominent in delimiting species. In the field of plant sociology most workers describe forest types—or, as they are now generally called, “associations’—as proposed by Beadle and Costin (1952), in communities dominated by Hucalyptus species and they characterize them by the com- bination of dominant Hucalyptus species present. From the above study it is apparent that Eucalyptus communities fall into three distinct kinds: 1. The extensive (or ecologically unique) stable communities having dominants of combinations of two or more non-interbreeding species of Hucalyptus which might be called the primary associations. 2. Those which are of a limited extent and are unstable and occur only in a mixed zone at the junction between the two main species areas, and may therefore properly be described as ecotones. 3. Those resulting from combinations produced by disturbance following settlement which might be described as secondary associations, which are unstable in the absence ot continued interference by man, and which generally (though it is not commonly recognized) contain trees which are members of hybrid swarms and are certainly not as genetically circumscribed as the species characteristic of virgin stands. SUMMARY. There is evidence that interbreeding Hucalyptus species occupy distinctly different ecological situations and that pairs of species which grow together in virgin conditions over substantial areas are reproductively isolated. Evidence is produced to show that hybrids occurred before settlement at the junction of two species-areas, and that this hybrid zone is probably the main source of hybrid swarms which have become prominent following settlement. It is considered that the spread of hybrid swarms has been a direct result of settlement due to the major upset in balance of the plant communities by firing and clearing. The impact of these facts on Hucalyptus systematics and plant sociology is indicated. References. ANDERSON, E., 1949.—Introgressive Hybridisation. New York. BEADLE, N. C. W., and Costin, A. B., 1952.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 61-82. 19 ON AUSTRALIAN HELODIDAE (COLEOPTERA). I. DESCRIPTION OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES. By J. W. T. ARMSTRONG. (Thirteen Text-figures. ) [Read 29th April, 1953.] Synopsis. Three genera and fourteen species are described as new. Hlodes olliffii Blackb., montivagans Blackb., variegata Cart., atkinsoni (Waterh.), cincta Blackb. and costellifera Cart., are found to have characters incompatible with that genus and are transferred to a new one, Pseudo- microcara, to which eleven new species are added. Hlodes tigrina is considered a synonym of variegata Cart. A key is given to the species. One new species is placed in Macrocyphon Pic, thus adding this genus to the Australian fauna. Additional generic characters are given. EBlodes australis (Hr.) cannot remain in that genus and is transferred to a new one, Hetrocyphon, to which a new species is added. The position of Macrodascillus Cart. is commented on and Hlodes scalaris Lea transferred to it. One new species is placed in Peneveronatus, n. gen. The shape of the mesosternal cavity is noted as a very useful taxonomic character, especially in Cyphon. INTRODUCTION. The author has been studying this family for a number of years and had much of the available Australian material before him. He has, also, representatives of most of the older described exotic genera of -the Helodinae, and it soon became evident that many Australian species were misplaced in them. (Elodes does not occur in the Australian fauna.) It was therefore necessary to erect new genera for their reception. The shape of the mesosternal cavity has been found very useful in distinguishing species especially in Cyphon which will be dealt with in a later paper. In measuring the length of the insects the head has been excluded, as its position makes a material difference. The microscope used in preparing the figures reverses the images. PSEUDOMICROCARA, n. gen. Helodinae. Genotype, Pseudomicrocara orientalis, n. sp. Form rather elongate, subdepressed, facies of Microcara. Head covered by prothorax when withdrawn, with quite definite antennal fossae beneath eyes, front lightly convex, produced in a short muzzle. . Hyes moderately prominent. Mandibles simple, wide, sharply pointed, but not long, very slender nor strongly overlapping. Antennae filiform, slender, about half length of body, second joint small, moniliform, third variable, remainder usually becoming progressively narrower. Mazillary palpi moderately slender, terminal joint a little shorter than penultimate. Labial palpi: terminal joint subcylindrical, slender, arising at an angle from end of penultimate. Labrum with apex broadly curved, tending to be constricted at base, separated from frons by a rather wide membranous area. Sie Prothorax about one-third narrower than elytra, semicircular in outline, sides and apex explanate, the latter extending a little over head, base bisinuate, anterior angles merged in general outline. Hlytra usually about four times as long as prothorax. Legs of moderate length, moderately slender. Hind tarsi not bicarinate above, first joint long, second about half length of first, third about half that of second, fourth bilobed. Prosternum very narrow before coxae, prosternal process more or less diamond shaped, extending to about half-way between coxae but not nearly level with them. M esosternum emarginate to receive prosternal process. Metasternum not produced forward between middle coxae. Fore and middle coxae narrowly separated, hind corae contiguous, the latter transverse. : risa " Distinguishing Characters.—This genus is separated from Microcara Thoms. and FElodes Latr. by the terminal joint of the labial palpi arising from ‘the end of the 20 ON AUSTRALIAN HELODIDAL (COLEOPTERA ). I, penultimate, and from the latter also by the hind tarsi not being flat and bicarinate above and the second joint not overlapping. and obscuring part of the third, etc. From Macrohelodes Blackb. it differs in being pubescent, in the metasternum not being produced forward between the middle coxae, and in many other respects. Peneveronatus, n. gen., has toothed mandibles, different palpi and a very differently shaped meta- sternum, ete. Typical species of Cyphon have a very different prothorax, the 4—11th antennal joints shorter in comparison with their width, and the mandibles distinctly toothed. Discussion. Pseudomicrocara orientalis, n. sp., has been chosen as the genotype as it is typical and appears to be the commonest species on the mainland. Six described species are transferred from the palaearctic and North American genus Hlodes Latr., which is a well-characterized genus having the terminal joint of the iabial palpi arising from the side of the penultimate and the hind tarsi bicarinate above with the second joint over- lapping and concealing part of the third. This genus and Microcara also differ from Hlodes conspicuously in the mesocoxae being transverse and narrowly separated, not elongate and contiguous, and in the hind coxae being much less strongly oblique from the transverse. It is noticed that in Microcara testacea L. the lateral prolongation of the posterior coxal plate deviates from the posterior margin of the metasternum. The six species transferred are Helodes atkinsoni (Waterh.), H. olliffi Blackb., H. cincta Blackb., H. montivagans Blackb., Hlodes variegata Cart. (= tigrina Cart.), and #. costellifera Cart. Hleven species are now described as new, making a total of seventeen. Key to the species of Pseudomicrocara. 1-32. Apex of the pronotum rounded, prosternal process more or less diamond shaped, intervals between elytral costae, when these are present, not convex. 2-35 Third antennal: joint aboutvas mone yas) 4thy tees. ce seein reat olliffi (Blackb.). 3- 2. Third antennal joint distinctly shorter than 4th. A= 5, jJPronotum!) testaceous) ‘elytra blacks Vm mee ee eee ene montivagans (Blackb.). 5- 4. Not so. 6-11. Upper surface having a distinctly mottled or spotted appearance. 7- 8. Explanate pronotal margins reflexed, abdominal segments spotted (2-4-4-4-2) with 1} ke) Cater Re ERI Uti 3 6) old SEE Gch bio Gaerne eo OO biclacc ik icld cit Sie oeata ee maculiventris, n. sp. 8- 7. Not so. Man, Wicker, llesrexeis, (G8) WM, oooaocooagsogdocnoodpO8S variegata (Cart.) (= tigrina (Cart.)). oY, IME, Eales, SkoAbadh wm, Gooocodunocsob sdb oomDD OU Hb GoGo DDO DBO ODDO OS picta, n. sp. 11- 6. Upper surface not having a mottled or spotted appearance. 12-17. Without trace of costae on elytra. aS AD b acl joybbavnbbrssy AVKGAy Ime CooeoauuuodcauouonugeUsmoboubouuDS ow atkinsoni (Waterh.). 14-13. Elytral punctures rather coarse, at least on the disc. 15-16. Elytral punctures uneven in size and distribution, size larger ............ dixoni, n. sp. 16-15. Elytral punctures coarse and even, size smaller ...................... infuscata, n. Sp. 17-12. At least three costae discernible on each elytron. 18-23. Size smaller, less than 4:5 mm. 19-20. Pronotum usually dark with pale lateral and apical margins, form elongate ovate lle hy ni aiee mea eu sas nied eaTHe Ut cenre radar tat ert eutena mene M als ae setranteniet octet ey msprewe Eon Mel GUO Mea ey et cae ered Re meme variabilis, n. sp. 20-19. Colour of upper surface uniform, form elongate sub-parallel. 21-22. Pronotum less convex, subobsoletely punctate ...............-++...-.005. minor, nN. Sp. 22-21. Pronotum more convex, finely but visibly punctate ................. elongata, n. sp. 23-18. Size larger, more than 4:5 mm. 24-25. Mesosternal cavity twice as long as wide (length of insect 8 mm.) ...... spencei, n. Sp. 25-24. Mesosternal cavity not longer than wide (smaller). 26-27. Rather wider, red with centre of pronotum near base and disc of each dipicon infuscated ET Sse eee tao OM Oe OS oo OT oOo oT eo ob oo oo aed cincta (Blackb.). 27-26. Narrower, colour of pronotum and elytra uniform. 28-29. Elytra more elongate by comparison with pronotum, mesosternal cavity as wide as Kc) 0 rae are ie ke Ree RE oe ee ee AEE et 1d Boe tain Oto obstc cud tuniovon elstoni, n. Sp. 29-28. Elytra less elongate by comparison with pronotum, mesosternal cavity transverse. 30-31. Elytral punctures fine, eyes more prominent ...................-.--- orientalis, n. sp. 31-30. Elytral punctures rather coarse, eyes less prominent .............. occidentalis, n. sp. 52- 1. Apex of pronotum subtruncate, prosternal process acuminate, elytral intervals between COSTAE: motile a es .. | Amber brown. +4 = aE Ascoccus form. > lacticogenes sf a - 2 = Staats L. @y sts LOM’ occas sect se cuss hs Glee ce se ke Coa Ne ee a ne RE ee Azotobacter. 2. Cysts not formed— (a) Rod with fatty bodies at each end of the cell ..................-. Beijerinckia. Go) eveastlikewovallacellimnnee eee eerie Javtalearel ays) AGRA Meh ene ewe ue Yeas Azotococcus. CONCLUSION. The confusion in the taxonomy of Azotobacter is created by the contradiction between morphology, serology, physiology and chemical composition of the different species. The classification in Bergey’s Manual is not acceptable. The different tests used are not satisfactory if they are used without precautions. The proposed classification is based, as for the species of Cytophaga (Tchan et al., 1948), on the combined morpho- logical, physiological and ecological characters. It has the advantage of leaving the BY Y. T. TCHAN. 89 genera Azotobacter and Azotococcus as a homogenous group. The acid-forming non- symbiotic N-fixing bacteria are excluded and classified separately. The genus Beijerinckia is accepted for Azot. indicum and Azot. lacticogenes. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. The author is indebted to Dr. A. R. Prévot and Dr. J. Pochon, of the Institut Pasteur of Paris, and Dr. H. S. McKee for their criticism and help. His sincere thanks are due to Dr. Kauffmann for sending a culture of Azotobacter lacticogenes. References. Aso, K., and YOSHIDA, R., 1928.—Proc. 1st Int. Cong. Soil Sc., 3: 150-151. BEIJERINCK, M. W., 1901.—Z. Bakt. II, 7: 561-582, and 33-61. DeERxX, H. G., 1950.—Prod. Ned. Akad. V. Wet. Amster., 53: 140. ———,, 1950.—Ann. Bogorienses, Vol. I, Part I: 1. ———.,, 1951.—- Prod. Ned. Akad. V. Wet. Amster., 54: 342. ——, 1'951'.—Td., 54: 625. GREENE, R. A., 1935.—Soil Sc., 39: 327. KAUFFMANN, J., and TOUSSAINT, P., 1951.—C.R. Acad. Sci., 233: 710-11. ——,, 1951.—Rev. Botanique, 58: 553. Kuuyver, A. H., and VAN DEN Bout, M. T., 1936.—Arch. Microb., 7: 261. Kuuyver, A. H., and REENEN, W. J., 1933.—Arch. Microb., 4: 280. KyYLe, T. S., and HIsENSTARK, A., 1951.—Bull. Okla. Agr. Mech. College, 48: 1-49. LANDSTEINER, 1939.—See Traité de l’Immunite dans les Maladies infectieuses par J. Bordet. Masson et Cie, Paris, 1939. LIPMAN, J. G., 1903.—N.J. Agr. Exp. Sta. Ann. Report, 24: 246. LIPMAN, C. B., 1909.—Soil Se., 29: 941. LIPMAN, C. B., and Buresss, P. S., 1915.—Z. Bakt. II, 44: 481-511. LOHNIS, F., and WESTERMANN, T., 1908.—Z. Bakt. II, 22: 234-54. LOHNIS, F., and SMITH, N. R., 1923.—J. Agr. Res., 23: 401-32. SmitH, 1948.—Reported in Bergey’s Manual of Det. Bact., 6th edition, Baltimore. Williams and Wilkins Co. STARKEY, R. L., and Ds, P. K., 1939.—Soil Sce., 47: 329-43. TCHAN, Y. T., 1953.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 78: 83-84. TCHAN, Y. T., POCHON, J., PREvot, A. R., 1948.—Ann. Inst. Past., 74: 394. WINOGRADSKY, S., 1938.—Ann. Inst. Past., 60: 351-400. 9() STUDIES IN THE METAMORPHIC AND PLUTONIC GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGHRY-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, N.S.W. Parr I. INTRODUCTION AND METAMORPHISM OF THE SEDIMENTARY ROCKS. By T. G. VALLANCE, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology.* (Plates v-vi; nine Text-figures. ) [Read 24th June, 1953.] Synopsis. An area consisting mainly of miogeosynclinal sediments (partly, at least, of upper Ordovician age) and plutonic masses is discussed. The sediments, typically pelites and psammo- pelites, suffered a metamorphism which was regional in extent yet had an important thermal aspect. Variations in metamorphic intensity are represented by isogradal lines introducing the several zones established here. The metamorphic -progression is from (1) a low-grade zone (with chlorite-muscovite slates and phyllites) characteristic of the country rocks of the region to (2) a biotite zone, followed by (3) a knotted schist zone (with andalusite and/or cordierite porphyroblasts) which passes into (4) a high-grade zone where the sediments become granulites which, in places, carry sillimanite and potash felspar. The zones are fairly evenly distributed around the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granite masses but do not display any constant relation to the other granites. In proximity to acid veins from the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granites the metasediments may be enriched in brown tourmaline. Late addition of alkalis has caused extensive retrogression in the high-grade rocks whereby the aluminous minerals (except pink andalusite) tend to become altered to muscovite. The zonal sequence (above) is examined in the light of the principle of metamorphic facies, and its relation to the well-known scheme of Barrow is indicated. INTRODUCTION. The Wantabadgery—Adelong—Tumbarumba district is situated in the South-Western Slopes region of New South Wales, nearly 300 miles from Sydney. Text-figure 1 indicates its geographical position. The main centres of population within the district are the townships of Adelong, Batlow and Tumbarumba. The north-western limit of the area examined is about six miles east of the city of Wagga Wagga. No extensive systematic geological mapping had been undertaken previously in this area and thus the accompanying sketch map (Plate v) was compiled as a basis for the subsequent petrological studies (some of the country to the west of the present area has been mapped by Whiting, 1950). Field mapping was carried on at intervals over the period 1949-1952 and, in all, an area of about 900 square miles has been examined in more or less detail. The survey of the southern and south-western parts of the area has been of a reconnaissance nature. The district studied constitutes only a part of a great belt of metasediments and granitic masses which extends from north-eastern Victoria across the Murray River into New South Wales and, trending in a north-north-westerly direction, may be followed (with some breaks) at least as far as Condobolin. At various localities, parts of the southern section of the belt have been examined in some detail, and here should be mentioned the pioneering work of A. W. Howitt (1888) and the later studies of Tattam (1929) and Crohn (1950) in Victoria, and of Joplin (1947) in the Albury—Jingellic region of New South Wales. All of this work displays evidence of the remarkable uniformity shown by many of the rock-types (both metasediments and granites) in this belt. Similar rocks have been found in a smaller, more easterly, parallel-trending belt which is well exposed in the Cooma district of New South Wales (Browne, 1914; Joplin, 1942). * Grateful acknowledgement for a grant to cover certain research expenses is made to the ~ Trustees of the Science and Industry Endowment Fund of the C.S.1.R.O. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 91 GEOLOGICAL SETTING. Of the metasediments and granitic rocks occurring in this area, only the former will be discussed in this paper. The granites are to form the subject of a later contribution but it may be useful to. furnish here a brief account of the general geology of the region. The country rocks are mainly of sedimentary origin and include arenites and argillites, now converted into phyllites, schists, and granulites by a metamorphism which was apparently in some way related to certain large granitic masses. Basic rocks of igneous origin occur in a belt which has been traced in a north-north-westerly direction from Batlow to beyond Adelong. Although intermediate to basic rocks have also been found in isolated bands away to the north-west near Nangus, the “basic belt’ really loses its character just west of Bangandang Trig. Station and, for the most part, gives place to metasediments. Amphibolites and metamorphosed diorites or gabbros are the chief rock types in this “basic belt”. The Adelong norite or hypersthene-gabbro forms a small mass in Adelong township which may be related to the other basic rocks. SOUTH WALES. | SSYONEY (THE AREA DESCAIBED IN THIS PAPER IS SHADED) Text-figure 1.—Locality map. The basic rocks have been invaded by granite-granodiorite of the Hllerslie (west of Adelong, between the Nacka Nacka and Yaven Creeks) and Wondalga plutonic masses. The rocks of these two masses are practically identical and resemble specimens from the smaller Belmore mass (between Westbrook and Tarcutta). For this reason the three masses are grouped together in Plate v. Metamorphic activity at the contacts between these granites and the metasediments appears to have been variable but often relatively slight. Another group of plutonic rocks constitutes the Wantabadgery and Green Hills (west of Batlow) masses. It also includes biotite granite-granodiorite types, but these rocks are lithologically quite distinct from the granites of the other group mentioned above. Highly altered inclusions of the metasediments are common in the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granites and the extensive metamorphism of the original sedimentary terrain was perhaps related to these two masses. The rough parallelism between the limits of the metamorphic zones and the outlines of the granite masses points to some relation between them. Field evidence suggests that the granites of this group were emplaced earlier than the Hllerslie, Wondalga and Belmore granites. It is of interest to note that the EHllerslie-type plutonites are lithologically similar to the rocks of the Murrumbidgee batholith (Browne, 1943) north of Cooma, whilst the _ Wantabadgery—Green Hills-types resemble the Cooma gneiss (Browne, 1914) and the Albury gneiss (Joplin, 1947). A small portion of another plutonic mass (here called the Kyeamba adamellite mass) outcrops within the area mapped, but it has not been studied in detail (more of this mass was mapped by Whiting (1950) ). J 92 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, Tertiary basalt flows overlying auriferous deep-leads occur at Tumbarumba (Anderson, 1890; Booker, 1950). These have not been studied and their outcrop shown on Plate vy is taken mainly from Booker’s maps. Extensive alluvium of probable Tertiary—Recent age is found along the Murrumbidgee River and many of its tributaries. METASEDIMENTS. Variations in metamorphic intensity have wrought important mineralogical and textural changes in the metasediments, but throughout the area these rocks tend to preserve a certain uniformity in chemical composition. Probably the best approach to the study of the results of the metamorphism is by considering the reactions of members of groups of rocks with comparable chemical compositions (isochemical series) to the variations in metamorphic intensity. The terms pelite, psammopelite, and psammite were used by Joplin at Cooma and Albury, and other metamorphic petrologists have also employed them to denote isochemical groups. As understood by sedimentary petrologists, however, these terms denote a grain-size type rather than a chemical one, and to avoid confusion it seems necessary to state clearly the sense in which they are used. In the present case the classification is based on texture, but analytical work indicates that here there is a rough correlation between texture and composition, and so the terms can, for the most part, be taken as indicating chemical groups. Chemically, as well as texturally, there are gradations between the three types. Of the members of the pelite-psammopelite-psammite series, the psammopelites are certainly the most abundant in this area. Pelites are quite common, but sand rocks (psammites) have a somewhat more restricted occurrence. The absence of coarse sediments (conglomerates) has been noted by most workers in this belt. In addition to these groups, red jaspers, a little limestone, and some serpentine-bearing siliceous rocks occur in the Nangus district on the north-eastern side of the present area. These rocks only outcrop within the low-grade zone of metamorphism. Psammopelites and Psammites. The psammopelites, in addition to their abundance, are of interest because of their lithology. They are characterized by an appreciable amount of silt-sand material (mainly quartz, some felspar) in an extensive micaceous matrix (representing the original clay fraction). Sorting has, in places, produced finely banded rocks in which the relative proportions of the silt-sand and clay fractions vary. These are like the banded psammopelites of Joplin (1942). Even in the more advanced stages of meta- morphism such rocks may have their sedimentary banding preserved. The more homogeneous (non-banded) psammopelites are usually more massive and less cleaved than their banded relatives but are equally widespread. In their case, however, there is a greater tendency for metamorphic processes to obliterate the original sedimentary features—as a rule the coarsest types preserving their individuality most tenaciously. The petrography and mineralogy of these rocks will be discussed in connection with the various zones in which they occur, but it may be worth while to note here several salient features. These sediments are characterized by abundant detrital quartz grains, usually rather angular and somewhat poorly sorted. Detrital felspar is widely distributed but is not really abundant (does not exceed 10% by volume). Small rock fragments are not uncommon in the sand fractions along with the quartz and felspar. All of this material is typically held in an argillaceous matrix. Beds of such rock, often from a few inches to a few feet thick, alternate with slaty (pelitic) bands and may show such sedimentation features as current-bedding and graded-bedding. Very few small-scale slump-structures have been seen. The relatively unmetamorphosed representatives of the psammopelitic rocks may be regarded as sub- greywackes following Pettijohn’s (1949, p. 255) definition. Table 1 gives analyses of psammopelites and sandier rocks from this area and from Cooma as well as a subgreywacke from Arkansas (U.S.A.) and an average of 371 sand- stones. No. 10 represents a lime-rich type of sandy rock (now a granulite) from Cooma. Similar rocks have been found in this area near Mundarlo but none of these was analysed. | BY T. G. VALLANCE. 93 TABLE 1. Analyses of Psammopelites and Psammites. 1 2 3 + 5 6 7 8 9 10 SiO, 68-17 69-98 74:59 76°28 79-37 84-21 73°64 74:43 | 84-86 71-26 Al,O3 16-76 14-66 12-71 12:87 11-47 9-12 13-89 11-32 5-96 12-42 Fe2,03 2-34 1:91 0-61 1-68 2:43 0-93 0-70 0-81 1:39 0-68 FeO 2-51 4-45 4-21 1-09 0:56 1-40 4-04 3°88 0-84 4-47 MgO 2:06 2-39 0-78 0-73 0-97 0-88 1:98 1-30 0-52 Qolsies CaO 0:28 0-19 0:67 0-18 0-22 0°37 0-28 ilealy 1:05 7:73 Na,0 0-76 0-50 1-31 0-82 1:02 1-01 oly) 1383 0:76 0-31 K,0 3:08 3°92 3°29 3:67 2-50 1-23 2°88 | 1:74 1-16 0-01 H,O+ 2°59 0-89 1-29 1:90 0:79 0:55 0-42 2-15 1-47 0-19 H,O— 0:38 0-18 0-17 0:36 0:25 0-28 0:07 0-20 0-27 0-02 TiO. 0:88 0-71 0-63 0-27 0-53 0-21 0-63 0-83 0-41 0-47 P.0; 0-22 n.d. n.d. mG 9) Orl@ =) @ealil img 0-18 0-06 abs. MnO 0-05 0-04 0-03 0-05 | MO | mg =) Ore 0-04 tr. 0:55 CO, — aa | 0°48 |) -1-01 0-13 Ete. | | 0-29 | 0-10 = i] | } 100-08 99-82 100-29 99-90 |100-25 /|100-30 | 99-71 (100-45 99-86 |100-37 1. Fine-grained psammopelite (Biotite Zone). Por. 36, Par. of Yabtree, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 2. Cordierite-rich granulite. East side of Por. 35, Par. of Dutzon, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 38. Quartz-rich granulite. Por. 66, Par. of Cunningdroo, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 4. Grey-green phyllite (very fine-grained psammopelite). Por. 187, Par. of Mundarlo, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 5. Psammopelite (subgreywacke). Por. 30, Par. of Yabtree, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance.. 6. Quartz-rich psammite (Knotted Schist Zone). West side of Por. 56, Par. of Yabtree, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 7. Corduroy granulite. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 168. 8. Subgreywacke. Near Mena, Arkansas. Anal. B. Bruun. Pettijohn, “Sedimentary Rocks”, 1949, p. 256. 9. Average of 371 sandstones. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 695, 1920: 539. 10. Amphibole-bearing granulite. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 7, IZ es IOY/, : ° Pelites. The more lowly metamorphosed pelites of this area occur as buff- to grey-coloured slates with good cleavage and fine grain-size. With increase in metamorphic grade they pass into phyllites and schists and finally in places into high-grade granulites. Through- out all these stages the pelites retain a certain chemical uniformity, as may be seen from the analyses of rocks from various parts of the metamorphic progression. In Table 2 pelites from other districts in the metamorphic belt are included for comparative purposes. Examination of the analyses indicates that the pelites have a rather distinctive composition. Text-figure 2 graphically depicts this. A group of 29 analyses of pelites from the metamorphic belt (and from Cooma) has been plotted on an alkali-lime diagram along with analyses of slates and phyllites from various parts of the world, including the U.S.A., Wales, France, Germany, Victoria, and New South Wales. It can be readily seen that the pelites from the metamorphic belt tend to fall in the potash-rich, lime-poor field and are well away from the average shale and slate. Another feature of these pelites is their high alumina content. Emmons and Calkins (1913) noted that the pelites of the Silver Hill formation (Cambrian) of the Phillipsburg area, Montana (see Table 2) were remarkably potash- rich and suggested that the original rocks may have been glauconitic. The composition _ of these rocks is roughly comparable with those now studied, but in view of the lack of an abnormal iron content there appears to be little evidence for a glauconitic origin 94 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, TABLE 2. Analyses of Aluminous Pelites. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SiO, | 56:28 54-01 49-53 54-18 55-49 56-33 60°15 53-29 Al,O; | 23-02 24-41 26-58 25°48 24-45 22-94 16°45 22-38 Fe.05 1-82 1-39 2-17 2-99 2-21 2-19 00 eter FeO 5-84 5:95 6-01 3-08 4-92 4-54 22 90m iG MgO 3-28 2-91 3:15 3-13 2-88 3:27 2-32 2-10 CaO 0-14 0°36 0:37 0-41 0-35 0:25 1:41 0-53 Na,O 1:21 1:09 1:23 0:73 0-54 0-88 1-01 1:11 K.0 4:97 5-45 5:90 5:70 5-21 6-10 3-60 7°43 H.O+ 2-82 2-64 3°79 2-88 2-09 3-07 3-82 EiO= 0-24 0-28 0:31 0:48 0:07 0-80 0:89 iz Ne TiO, 0:77 0:85 1-03 0-73 0-78 — 0:76 0-91 P.0; 0-10 0-15 — 0:07 | 0-20 0-13 0-15 — MnO 0-06 0:07 0:06 0-03 0-09 tr. tr. C — = = 0-34 0:03 — 0-88 Etc. = = = — — 0-62 re 100°55 99°56 | 100-08 100-23 99-61 100-50 100-46 99-02 1. Knotted schist. Por. 65, Par. of Yabtree, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. . Spotted granulite. Mt. Pleasant Creek, Por. 32, Par. of Wallace, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. Spotted granulite. East end of Yaven Creek bridge, Por. 51, Par. of Dutzon, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 4. Chlorite-sericite-schist. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 164. 5. Knotted schist. Albury area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Tbid., 72, 1947: 88. 6. Phyllite. HEnsay area. Anal. A. W. Howitt. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 22, 1886: 68. 7. Average of fifty-one Paleozoic shales (H. N. Stokes). From U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 616, 1916: 546. 8. Slightly altered shale. Phillipsburg area (Montana). Anal. W. T. Schaller. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper no. 78, 1913: 57. bo co for the potash in the present case. It seems reasonable to relate the richness in potash to an original richness in micaceous constituents. Pelites with less than the usual amount of magnesia have been found in this area, as at Albury and in Victoria. In Table 3 some examples of such rocks are given. The rock no. 2 of this table has high alkali values, due mainly to the presence of an abnormal amount of finely-divided sodic felspar. Lime, too, is rather higher than normal here. The dominance of potash over soda is, however, clear in these examples just as in the “normal” pelites. In the low-grade zone, in particular, there is a ,certain development of grey-green to buff coloured slaty rocks which, when analysed, are found to contain much more silica than is usual for apparently comparable rocks of this area. Some of these slates consist of an admixture of fine silty material (mainly quartz) and clay (now represented by mica) and are not unlike the psammopelites in mineralogy and chemical composition. They seem to be merely finer-grained equivalents of the subgreywackes and, if unmetamorphosed, would have probably fallen into the category of “subgreywacke shales” (Dapples, Krumbein and Sloss, 1950). Text-figure 3 is an uncorrected ACF diagram depicting the fields of the so-called “normal” pelites and “siliceous” pelites (from Joplin, 1945). On this have been plotted several analyses of the siliceous rocks in question aS well as some psammopelites from this area and from Cooma. There is an apparent gradation (textural as well as chemical) between the various types. An analysis of a fine-grained psammopelite (it is nearly fine enough to be called a pelite) is given in Table 1 (no. 4). The composition of the grey-green slates is probably not greatly different from this. Texturally these rocks are pelites but chemically they approach psammopelites; they will be referred to here as siliceous, pelites. 3Y T. G. VALLANCE. 95 Black well-cleaved siliceous slates, important at Cooma but absent at Albury, are not very abundant in this area. These rocks may have a different origin from that of the grey-green or buff coloured slates mentioned above. The black, sometimes graptolite- bearing, slates may be derived from volcanic-ash (Joplin, 1945). It seems not improb- able that there are two distinct sedimentary types (the silty “subgreywacke shales” and the carbonaceous black slates) included under the name “siliceous pelite”’ in the literature on the rocks of this metamorphic belt and from Cooma. TABLE 3. ‘ Pelites Poor in Magnesia. 1 2 3 4 SiO, 52-55 57-55 53°88 | 52-91 Al,0, 23-55 21-36 27-95 | 24-49 Fe,0, 5-01 2-60 5-04 5-45 FeO 4-52 1-76 0-69 1-50 Mgo 1-90 O03 | te heen Cad 0-37 1-34 0-19 0-29 Na,O 0-27 3-16 0-34 1-08 K,0 6-64 7-99 5-64 6-60 H.0+ 3-48 2-30 3-44 3-81 H,0— 0-55 0-17 0-72 0-61 TiO, 0-75 0-81 1-12 0-83 P.O, 0-11 a 0-07 0-10 MnO 0-02 0-06 0-03 0-06 BaO aa ue Bee 0-06 C aS Ag 0-53 0-19 99-72 100-08 100-66 99-78 1. Phyllite. Near Humula Trig. Stn., Por. 224, Par. of Umbango, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 2. Phyllite. Por. 194, Par. of Ellerslie, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 3. Dark grey slate. Jingellic area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 72, 1947: 89. 4. Slate. Tallangatta area. Anal. C. M. Tattam. Geol. Surv. Vict, Bull. 52; 1929)2 3)b- (GEOSYNCLINAL ENVIRONMENT. The lithological assemblage just described appears to be fairly typical of what one would expect of sedimentation under miogeosynclinal conditions. The essential rock types are alternating shales (slates) and subgreywackes with only local signs of con- temporaneous igneous activity and one very restricted patch of limestone. Jaspers, which occur in the Nangus area, are probably not original sediments. The association shale(slate)-subgreywacke with no conglomerates and not much orthoquartzitic material suggests that the sediments were deposited towards the axial parts of the miogeosyncline. Sedimentary facies indicative of the marginal and shelf environments have not been recognized. They may be buried beneath later deposits further to the west. It may be noted that the Phillipsburg area referred to above (Kmmons and Calkins, 1913) is also characterized by miogeosynclinal sediments (see Kay, 1951) in which plutonic masses have been emplaced. The metamorphic changes induced in the Phillipsburg pelites are somewhat similar to those to be described here. Such cases are of interest in view of Misch’s (1949) dictum that plutonic activity is confined to eugeosynclinal regions. GENERAL REMARKS ON STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE. Our knowledge of the stratigraphy of this region of New South Wales and north- eastern Victoria is still only fragmentary, mainly because of the rarity of fossils and the overall lithological uniformity of the metasediments. No fossils have been found in the area under discussion, but at several localities in this belt graptolites of upper 96 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, Ordovician (usually Eastonian) age have been recorded. Rather poorly preserved graptolites occur in black slates near Moorong Trig. Station, a few miles west of Wagga Wagga (Joplin, 1945) and at Carboona Gap (about half-way between Tumbarumba and Jingellic; found by R. A. Keble, noted by Sherrard, 1951). Graptolites have been found elsewhere in the same Ordovician belt both in Victoria and in New South Wales (Joplin, 1945). They also occur at Cooma (Browne, 1914). Gradations from graptolitic slates into more intensely metamorphosed sediments have been observed in Victoria and at Cooma, and as a result of such evidence the latter are now regarded as also being in part, at least, of uppei® Ordovician age. .Harly writers have referred these metasediments to a variety of ages, ranging from pre-Cambrian to Silurian and even Devonian. By analogy with other parts of the metamorphic belt it is believed that the metasediments of the present area are also partly of upper Ordovician age. CaO Text-figure 2.—Alkali/lime diagram fer pelites from various parts: of the world. Two average shales (from Clarke, U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 616) are marked by crosses. Pelites from the north-eastern Victoria-N.S.W. metamorphic belt (and from Cooma) are marked by black squares. Text-figure 3.—ACF diagram illustrating chemical relations between normal (i.e. aluminous) pelites and the black siliceous pelites. Psammopelites and at least some of the grey-green siliceous slates fall between the two fields which are taken from Joplin (1945). Point no. 1, This paper, Table 1, no. 4. 2, This paper, Tabie 1, no. 5. 3, This paper, Table 6, no. 8. 4, Joplin (1942), Table 5, no. IV. 5, Joplin (1942), Table 2, no. III. 6, Joplin (1942), Table 2, no. IV. 7, This paper, Table 6, no. 9. No successful attempt has ever been made to subdivide stratigraphically the sediments of this metamorphic belt. At Cooma, Joplin (1942) separated the upper Ordovician into the Coolringdon Beds and the Binjura Beds. The former charac- teristically have black siliceous slate and display low-grade metamorphic features, whilst the Binjura Beds consist of more aluminous pelites and psammopelites and exhibit a much greater range in metamorphic grade. The Coolringdon Beds are regarded by Joplin as lying on top of the Binjura Beds, but the opposite view is favoured by Browne (1943). Possible equivalents of the Binjura Beds were noted at Albury (Joplin, 1947), but analogues of the Coolringdon Beds have not been found. In the Wantabadgery— Adelong—-Tumbarumba area the metasediments have not been subdivided into such units. The higher-grade rocks here are quite similar to the Binjura Beds at Cooma, but there does not appear to be any extensive development of lithological equivalents of the Coolringdon Beds. The thickness of the sediments in the main metamorphic belt (north-eastern Victoria, Albury, Wagga Wagga, etc.) is not known, but it seems reasonable to expect that it is much in excess of that given (2,500 ft.) for the Gisbornian, Eastonian, and Bolindian in the Australian upper Ordovician type-area, north-west of Melbourne. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 97 Over most of the area examined the metasediments display a remarkable uniformity of strike which is, in general, parallel to the north-north-west-south-south-east trend of the whole metamorphic belt. A notable exception to this rule is found along the Murrumbidgee River between Oura and Wantabadgery, where the strike swings round sympathetically with the margin of the Wantabadgery granite mass. Cleavage and/or schistosity have been induced in most of the metasediments but bedding features are rarely destroyed. Bedding and cleavage or schistosity are often coincident but this is not universal (cf. Crohn, 1950). Lineation, though not always common in the low- grade rocks, may become an obvious feature in the knotted schists. Both a-lineation and b-lineation have been seen, though usually not in the same locality. The a-lineation is of some interest. In the Mundarlo district, for example, lineation is almost always at a high angle to the horizontal. Fold axes, where they can be seen, are commonly much more flat-lying and the impression one gains is that the lineation is about normal to the fold axes. Boudinage structures have been noticed in this area (Vallance, 1951) with the flattened “barrels” lying nearly horizontal on the steeply-dipping bedding Text-figure 4.—Fabric diagram based on 200 poles normal to the (001) cleavage of biotite from a knotted schist zone psammopelite. The schistosity plane is marked and the plane of the projection is normal to the lineation. Contour intervals (in percent.) 32-25-20-15-10-8-4-2-1-0. Text-figure 5.—Fabric diagram based on 300 poles of optic axes of quartz from same rock as Text-fig. 4. Contour intervals (in percent.) 3-2-1-0. planes and with a lineation (a-lineation) across the boudins in the direction of extension of the beds. The fabric (Text-fig. 4) of a rock from the same locality as the boudins indicates a remarkable preferred orientation of mica flakes. The patterns displayed by the optic axes of quartz grains (Text-fig. 5) and the mica cleavages suggest some ‘flattening’ of the rock due to pressure across the schistosity. It seems not unreasonable to associate this with the possible development of boudinage due to tectonic flowage in the a-direction (normal to the fold axes). Lack of good, continuous exposures makes it difficult to develop the overall structural picture in this area. In general the evidence points to a high degree of fairly close folding (perhaps not truly isoclinal) in the metasediments. Steep dips are the rule, but often little reliance can be placed on them because of the extensive hill-creep. Despite Tattam’s (1929, p. 10) remarks on the lack of strike faulting in the north- east Victorian metamorphic complex it does appear to have been rather important in the present area. Local small-scale strike faults may be seen in such exposures as road cuttings, although they may not be otherwise apparent on the ground. In the Tumbarumba district there is evidence of a considerable fault which has brought the Green Hills granite and low-grade metasediments into juxtaposition. A remarkably 98 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, straight ridge of siliceous (silicified (?)) sediments trending north-north-west from Tumbarumba probably represents the fault line. From what evidence has been obtained the fault is thought to dip steeply to the east and perhaps dies out along the strike to the west of Westbrook. The suggested fault has removed from sight the middle- and high-grade metamorphic zones, but the extent of the movement may not be very great because of the apparent narrowing of the zones in this region. The very matter of this restriction in width of the zones may be related to further strike faulting (or perhaps to a marked steepening of the margins of the granite mass). Whether the whole area is dominated by a major fold structure on which the local tight folding was superimposed (as suggested by Howitt in Victoria, and by Joplin (1943) at Cooma) is a question which has not been answered. METAMORPHIC ZONES. In the course of this work it has been established that certain mineralogical and textural variations in the metasediments take place with remarkable regularity as some of the granite masses are approached. With increase in metamorphic intensity the slates become more lustrous and micaceous and pass through phyllites into mica schists. These schists may develop porphyroblasts (knotted schists) and eventually grade into granulites or even migmatites. It has been found possible to divide the metasediments of this series into zones based on mineralogical and textural criteria. Under favourable conditions such zones may be plotted on the map. The pioneer in this type of work was George Barrow (1893, 1912), who divided the Dalradian of the south-east Highlands of Scotland into seven zones as follows (from low to high grade): (1) zone of clastic mica, (2) zone of digested clastic mica, (3) zone of biotite, (4) zone of garnet, (5) zone of staurolite, (6) zone of kyanite, and (7) zone of sillimanite. Tilley (1925) later combined (1) and (2) as a zone of chlorite, and made the garnet zone more specific by using almandine as the index mineral. It is interesting to notice, as Joplin (1947, p. 91) has pointed out, that Howitt in 1889, whilst working at Omeo, was thinking along the same lines as Barrow. Barrow’s series was a great advance, but it is quite evident that it can be specific only for a certain isochemical series under the impress of metamorphism comparable with that which affected the Dalradian. As might be expected, Barrow’s sequence has been observed in other parts of the world, but exceptions to it are, at least, equally widespread and numerous. These apparent anomalies make it necessary to consider variations in metamorphic grade against a more comprehensive classification suchsas is provided by the principle of metamorphic facies. In this way Barrow’s sequence acquires its true perspective and it becomes clear that it cannot, by itself, be used as a general classificatory system. On the other hand, a relatively simple system of zones, based on the same style of reasoning as Barrow’s zones, is usually more readily applied in the field than are the more complex mineral facies based on the phase rule. Thus in the present study a series of fairly obvious mineralogical and textural features which can be plotted on the map and correlated with the facies concept have been selected as zonal markers. In the lowest grade of metamorphism in this area, chlorite may be produced along with sericite (muscovite). The zone in which such minerals are stable is here called the low-grade zone (= chlorite zone of Joplin, 1942). Next in the metamorphic sequence brown biotite appears and any chlorite present tends to be converted to biotite; this development of brown biotite marks the outer limit of the biotite zone. Porphyroblasts of andalusite or cordierite may be formed in the two-mica schists and these typically occur in the zone of knotted schists (andalusite zone of Joplin, 1942). Near the Green Hills granite mass the knotted schists pass into more granular rocks in which sillimanite may appear. Against the granites these-granulites may grade into mixed rocks or migmatites. The granular rocks and migmatites correspond to what Joplin (1942) has called the permeation- and injection-zone rocks at Cooma. It has not been considered practicable to separate the high-grade rocks of this area into two comparable BY T. G. VALLANCE. 99 zones and thus they are here regarded as members of one high-grade zone. Correlation of these zones with the facies concept will be attempted after the zones and their characteristic metasediments have been described. I. Low-grade Zone. Low-grade metasediments outcrop over a large part of the Nangus district and extend in a south-easterly direction along the strike to the Tumblong State Forest (just north of Bangandang Trig. Station). Apparently similar rocks are found to the east along the railway line between South Gundagai and Tumblong. On the western side of the area they are developed in a belt extending from Lower Tarcutta through Tarcutta and Humula to Tumbarumba. On the geological map (Plate v) the low-grade rocks occupy all,the area of metasediments outside the biotite isogradal line. (i) Pelites. e Pelites in the low-grade zone are commonly fine-grained, buff- to grey-coloured rocks with a good slaty cleavage. Most of them have acquired a certain lustre as a result of the metamorphism and with increase in grade merge into phyllites and schists. Apart from occasional white mica flakes few of the mineral constituents of these rocks are visible to the naked eye. Sericite (muscovite) and quartz are the chief constituents; chlorite is less common. The platy minerals are characteristically arranged to produce a schistosity. Although the grain-size is very small it would appear that all the mica has been recrystallized. The tiny flakes of sericite are usually colourless to pale green. With increase in grade (i.e. towards the biotite zone) two separate micas may appear; white mica (muscovite) and a greenish type which in the next zone passes into biotite (cf. Tilley, 1925). Increase in grain-size accompanies increase in grade. Fine quartz granules between the mica flakes have presumably been derived from the detrital quartz by recrystallization. Chlorite, where it occurs, is found as dimen- sionally oriented flakes of rather variable size. The pleochroism is usually weak, most commonly from pale green or nearly colourless to yellow-green; 6 = 1:585 (one determina- tion); optical sign doubtful; birefringence varies to ca. 0:008; anomalous brownish - interference colours are not unusual. Such flakes may carry inclusions of iron ore, micas, tourmaline and zircon. Chlorite is not as abundant here as it is in the low-grade pelites at Cooma. The reason for this is not readily apparent. In composition the low-grade rocks resemble those from Cooma, although in some cases the pelites of the present area have a slightly higher soda content. Excess alkalis might tend to give rise to mica (sericite) rather than chlorite when magnesia is not abundant. Barth (1936) found that there was no development of pre-biotite chlorite in Dutchess County, New York. This matter was briefly considered by Bailey (1937), who suggested that it may have been due to a combination of high soda content of the rocks and “exceptionally dry conditions of metamorphism”. Bailey’s suggestion, particularly with regard to the soda content, has not been clearly established. The question is not settled, but the reason for the absence or paucity of chlorite in some cases, at least, may be more physical than chemical. The grey-green to buff siliceous slates and phyllites (page 94) are often not readily distinguishable in hand-specimen from the less siliceous pelites. In the low-grade zone these siliceous rocks are widespread, particularly to the south of Nangus, and south-east of Borambola through Tarcutta to Tumbarumba. The main difference in thin section between these rocks and the normal aluminous pelites is in the proportion of quartz to mica and chlorite. In other respects they resemble the normal pelites. Fine-grained black siliceous rocks occur within this zone near Tarcutta Hill to the south of Yabtree Trig. Station. These rocks are more often blocky and jointed than slaty, and may be associated with cherts. Highly siliceous cherts occur just west of Tumbarumba. The essential minerals of the black rocks are quartz and sericite with varying quantities of such accessories as iron ore and carbonaceous matter. Chlorite is rarely found. Gaps suggesting negative pyrite crystals are sometimes seen L00 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, but fresh pyrite is quite rare. Isotropic material in the base of some of these siliceous rocks may be similar to what Joplin (1942) has suggested to be massive chalcedony or very fine quartz. (ii) Psammopelites and Psammites. Although the psammopelites are the commonest rocks in this area, they may profitably be studied after the pelites. Their mineralogy is similar to that of the pelites (except for the quartz/mica—mineral ratio) and thus they should be expected to reflect the mineralogical changes seen in the pelites. Recrystallization has occurred to varying degrees in all these sandy rocks, but in no case have the signs of their clastic origin been obliterated. Quartz and felspar grains of somewhat irregular shape and size are commonly embedded in a much finer matrix of sericite, quartz, and some chlorite. The matrix behaves much as do the pelites mentioned previously. As a rule the more argillaceous psammopelites acquire cleavage and schistosity before the sandier types. The larger quartz and felspar grains tend to be oriented along the schistosity. The quartz grains may display undulose extinction and with increase in metamorphic intensity they become granulated. This granulation has been noted in the low-grade zone but, as a rule, the larger grains retain their clastic appearance at least as far as the knotted schist zone. Both twinned plagicclase (usually oligoclase or oligoclase- andesine) and untwinned orthoclase may be present in the “sand” fractions of these rocks. Often the felspar is rather fresh, but there is an obvious tendency with increase of metamorphic grade for its conversion to such minerals as sericite and albite. Tourmaline, zircon and iron ores are the chief accessories. (ili) Jaspers. Immediately to the west of the village of Nangus is a low ridge composed in the main of red jaspers. Southwards, these rocks continue across the Murrumbidgee River but gradually fade out along the strike into low-grade rocks laced with quartz veins. It seems probable that the jaspers also die out to the north, but mapping was not extended in that direction. To the east and west these rocks are flanked by low-grade metasediments, but a blanket of alluvium obscures the exact relations between them. The age, origin, and metamorphic significance of the jaspers have not been finally settled, but as they outcrop entirely within the low-grade zone they are considered here. Typically the jaspers are fine-grained, hard siliceous rocks with a rather patchy appearance and varying in colour from bright red to black (even in the same hand- specimen). They outcrop as large blocks showing practically no sign of any regular structure apart from jointing. Slickenside-markings are not unusual on some of the more platy-jointed types. Under the microscope the essential minerals are seen to be quartz and haematite. Sometimes a little magnetite is present. Commonly the haematite is veined by granular quartz and in places the rock has the appearance of a haematite-breccia with the iron ore patches sharply separated by granular quartz. The quartz, though always granular, has a distinctly variable grain-size. Some of it is finely dusted with haematite whilst other, later, quartz may be perfectly clear. The larger grains may show undulose extinction. Haematite occurs mainly as irregular, dark, opaque patches, as smaller opaque grains and occasionally as minute red translucent euhedral plates. Accessory constituents are variable, but perhaps the commonest is a yellow-green chlorite which may be sparsely scattered through these rocks. Apatite has been doubtfully recognized and calcite is present in some cases. One specimen has very fine needles of a pale yellow to orange-yellow; feebly pleochroic mineral with rather high relief and strong birefringence. Extinction angles vary up to about 20°; the needles seem to be length-slow. The mineral may be an iron-rich amphibole, but its presence here is very puzzling in view of the low grade of metamorphism. Amphiboles of the grunerite-cummingtonite series are known from metamorphosed jaspers (Miles, 1946) and other iron-rich rocks, but they are normally produced only in the higher grades of BY T. G. VALLANCE. 101 metamorphism (see Tilley, 1936). There is a possibility that a small mass of hornblende- augite-porphyrite might have locally affected the jaspers at Nangus, but this has not been established. Occasionally specimens have been neted in which haematite wraps around quartz grains, the arrangement giving the impression that the iron oxide is in process of replacing a sandy rock. Generally compact, the jaspers at times have dark porous patches of haematite and limonite along fracture planes. In extreme cases cavities may be lined with botryoidal iron ore. These colloform growths are usually composed of radiating goethite with striking concentric zones. Haematite may form the cores of such growths, which are no doubt due to the hydration of the ferric oxide. One of the jaspers has been analysed and the result is given in Table IV. For comparison, jaspers from Anglesey and Western Australia are included. Analyses 1 and 2 display a remarkably specialized composition—mainly silica and ferric oxide. The third rock quoted has a roughly comparable silica content but is really a quartz-rich ironstone of different origin from the first two. TABLE 4. Jaspers. | iL | 2 3 SiO, 85-51 88-07 77°94 Al,O3 0-21 1:31 0-24 Fe,0O3 12:94 10-75 9:47 FeO 0-61 — CUP MgO tr — 1-91 CaO tr. — oak? Na,O . 0-09 ng ; 0-04 e nil IKGO! a 0-05 Sf 0-10 H.O+ . 0-18 | = 0-41 H,O— 0-20 — 0-20 TiO, nil — nil PSO tr. — 0-09 MnO 0:30 — 0°39 Fes, — — 0-04 CO, nil — 0:79 100-09 100-13 100-51 1. Red jasper. Por. 259, Par. of Tenandra, Co. Clarendon. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 2. Gwna-jasper. Mona complex, Anglesey, Wales. Anal. J. O. Hughes. Geol. Surv. England and Wales, Anglesey Memoir, 1, 1919: 87. 8. Siliceous jaspilite. Southern Cross area (W.A.). Anal. H. Bowley. Geol. Soc. London, Quart. Jour., 102, 1946: 142. 7 The slates and phyllites near the jaspers often have signs of intense deformation and silicification. Plate vi, A, illustrates one such rock which has been contorted and ruptured, apparently after the development of the schistosity. Limonite frequently stains the fractures, which are usually filled by patches of granular quartz. The more intense the deformation, the more granular quartz is deposited. Rocks approaching Silicified phyllite-breccias tend to be produced by this action, but their original sedimentary nature can usually still be recognized. Various theories of origin have been proposed to account for such rocks as jaspers and it appears that the question is by no means uniquely solved. The following are among the hypotheses advanced: (1) Original deposits. This origin was ascribed by Greenly to the Anglesey jaspers which he thought to be radiolarian cherts. The Nangus jaspers have no fossils and no traces of bedding—features often found in original sediments of this type. Sedimentary ironstones for the most part have less silica than these jaspers. (2) Replacement of earlier-formed rocks. (a) Surface effects. Zealley (1918) suggested that certain jaspers in Rhodesia were surface features due to the solution and deposition of silica and iron during weathering. There is no evidence that the 102 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, _ I, Nangus rocks are superficial. (b) Metasomatic action related to magmatic bodies. This theory was applied by Van Hise and Leith (1911) to account for certain jaspers. The jaspers of the Bowling Alley series of the Great Serpentine Belt (N.S.W.) were believed by Benson (1915) to be due to the action of adjacent spilite and keratophyre masses. At Nangus, a few small porphyrite masses are associated with the jaspers but they are hardly extensive enough to have been responsible for the production of all the jaspers. In any case, similar rocks near Oaky Creek, south of Nangus, are associated with more normal metasediments and have not jasperized them. (c) Jasperization related to serpentine. This relation has been suggested by several workers; some of the Woolomin jaspers have had such an origin ascribed to them (see Browne, 1950, p. 206). A small patch of serpentine-bearing rocks has been found south of Nangus, but as these rocks themselves have been silicified and are so limited in extent they could hardly have provided sufficient silica and iron to satisfy the jaspers. Osborne (1950) has noted the association of jasper and serpentine at Wood’s Reef, N.S.W. He believes that “medium to high-temperature (hydrothermal) solutions containing silica and iron’ have caused jasperization of the Tamworth series and stresses the importance of the siliceous nature of the original sediments and their tectonic setting as determina- tive factors in the jasper-formation. This view leads us to (d) solution and re-deposition of silica and iron in the metasediments during a period of dynamic activity. The case has already been cited of the deposition of granular quartz in the deformed and smashed metasediments near the jaspers. -The evidence of the jaspers themselves indicates that the formation of haematite preceded the silicification. It is probable that the silicification affected a greater area than did the haematite enrichment. The reason why all trace of regular directional structures such as schistosity should be obliterated in the jaspers is not known. It is certainly strange that this should be the case if intense dynamic action were involved in the jasperization (a possible explanation of this is that the final stage of the jasperization took place under rather static conditions and complete replacement might mask all such structures; only where silicification alone has taken place do the directional features become apparent). Benson (1918) in discussing the Eastern series jaspers of the Woolomin district, N.S.W., stated that “they result from intense silicification along zones of shattering, and are not primary deposits’. If the Nangus jaspers are iron-enriched, silicified sediments, as is tentatively suggested here, it is a matter of no little difficulty to account for the components of the sediments which would have been displaced. The age of the jasperization is not much more definitely known than is its origin. If the jasperization and the silicification of the neighbouring metasediments are related, then the jasper-formation is post-schistosity, i.e. it occurred at least after the “‘schistosity- forming” phase of the metamorphism. On the other hand, some of the igneous bodies associated with the jaspers have not been jasperized, yet they have suffered low-grade metamorphism. To the south apparently comparable rocks of igneous origin display an increase in grade sympathetically with the metasediments. It is therefore suggested that the jaspers were formed during the pericd of metamorphic activity but’ that they do not belong to the first phases of the action. (iv) Limestone and Serpentine Rock. Limestone has been found at one locality (T.S.R. 44,174, Par. Mundarlo, Co. Wynyard) in this region. It occurs on the south bank of the Murrumbidgee River south of Nangus, and was once quarried and burned for lime. The deposit is recorded by Carne and Jones (1919) but their description is rather inaccurate. Their report classifies the associated rocks as “clayshales, mudstones, and sandstones’, whereas, in actual fact, highly siliceous rocks, often akin to jaspers, occupy the area near the limestone. The limestone appears to form a lens following the major strike of the region, but the rock has not been traced far from the river-bank. A deep red soil covering obscures its southerly continuation. The rock is a white, rather massive, fine-grained marble which, while not dislocated on the same scale as the surrounding rocks, may show some signs of cracking—the BY T. G. VALLANCE. 103 cracks usually being emphasized by limonite stains. A few pyrite cubes may be found at times but, as is indicated by the analysis (Table 5), the limestone is generally a very pure calcium carbonate rock. It is a strange fact that in an area of intense silicification the limestone does not appear to have suffered much addition of silica. In close proximity to the limestone, often between it and the jaspers, there are a few outcrops of a patchy green rock which, although apparently fibrous, is compact and hard. When sheared, the rock develops a poor cleavage and becomes much jointed. Surface weathering produces a red clayey soil and this covering often masks critical boundaries. These fine-grained green rocks consist mainly of fibrous antigorite and chalcedony, with smaller amounts of talc, iron ore, and sometimes carbonate minerals. The antigorite often has a distinctly variable grain-size and not infrequently relatively large aggregates TABLE 5. 1 2 3 4 SIORPTNE THE NS Ohwss 0-44 74:41 46-44 46-44 Al,O; .. its 2-35 10-12 4°85 Fe,0; .. so) eee OPO Bees 3-98 11-75 MeOn eo at me 0-30 8-30 0-61 MgO .. anaes LNETe (OFAIG 10-86 21-32 22-46 CAO cow) Weahatice 55-27 0-22 6-54 0-45 Na,O .. sea ig is 0-03 0-15 0-78 0-30 REO bry eed sus 0-09 0-18 0-28 0-36 H.0+.. A a Saal 4°21 1-41 ne -08 H,0— ae re Ie a 1-87 0-08 if aaiee NSO) ay FU ae ae — tr. Or | MnO .. ve a6 = 0-09 0-12 0-18 COM ta CW oan 43°03 | = — 100-01 100.32 99°57 100-00 | 1. Limestone (fine-grained marble). North-east corner of T.S.R. 44,174, Par. i of Mundarlo, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 2. Siliceous serpentine-bearing rock. North-east corner of T.S.R. 44,174, Par. of Mundarlo. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 3. Ultrabasic inclusion in Wantabadgery granite. Por. 52, Par. of Mundarlo. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 4. Analysis No. 2 recalculated to 100% on the basis of 46-44% SiO,. with common orientation are associated with finer criss-cross patches (as in Plate vi, B). Colourless or stained yellow (optical sign —ve; length-slow; parallel extinction; birefringence about 0-007) the antigorite appears to alter to fine aggregates of a flaky mineral (strong birefringence; parallel extinction; biaxial —ve; small 2V; length-slow) which is probably tale (the paragenesis suggests talc rather than muscovite). The alteration is at best only local and patchy. Silica fills cavities and veins and, in general, gives the impression of having been added to the rocks. It is usually chalcedonic and has an aggregate appearance. The silica-filled cavities are sometimes lined with small concentric growths of an unidentified mineral (colourless; refractive index lower than balsam; high relief; almost isotropic). Limonite commonly stains the antigorite, and magnetite may appear as small granules. Carbonate minerals occur in some cases but often are not abundant. In Table 5 is given an analysis of a rock of this type. The most remarkable feature is the high silica content coupled with an abnormal amount of magnesia. There are perhaps two possible theories of origin: that the rocks are derived (1) from carbonate rocks, or (2) from uitrabasic igneous rocks. Serpentinization of calcium carbonate rocks by magnesia-silica metasomatism has been mentioned by various authors. In the present instance there seems to be no ready source of magnesia necessary to convert the limestone and so this mechanism must be rejected. Eskola (1951) has discussed the derivation of serpentine rocks from dolomites by the addition 104 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, I, of silica to the carbonate rocks. In that case the excess lime is removed as bicarbonate and would be eventually deposited as calcite. Where lime is less free to escape from the system, low-temperature silica metasomatism of dolomite would produce amphibole. At Mundarlo, the carbonate rock now exposed is definitely deficient in magnesia and as far as could be determined in the field there are few reaction features between the limestone and the serpentinous rock. If the latter were derived from dolomite little trace of the parent material remains. There is, however, at least one argument against the serpentine rock being derived from this source. These rocks appear to occur within the low-grade zone which includes pelites characteristic of the muscovite-chlorite subfacies of the Greenschist Facies (see page 118). In such an environment the association dolomite-quartz is stable (Turner, 1948, p. 96). There is no evidence to suggest an increase in metamorphic grade in proximity to the serpentine rocks. The mineralogy of these rocks suggests that the silica content is not all original. If we ignore the high silica it can be seen that the mineral assemblage is such as might be expected to result from the low-grade metamorphism of, say, a silica-poor, magnesia- rich (ultrabasic) igneous rock. The only ultrabasic rock known in this area occurs as a large inclusion in the Wantabadgery granite near Mundarlo (serpentine derived from ultrabasic rocks occurs to the east in the vicinity of Gundagai). The composition of the Mundarlo inclusion is given in Table 5. This rock has been rather strongly metamorphosed and, whilst not being strictly comparable with the siliceous serpentine, it does provide the basis for an interesting comparison. The silica-rich analysis has been recalculated to 100% on the basis of the SiO, content of the inclusion. The result (which is not far from the composition of antigorite, although MgO is rather low), when compared with the analysis of the inclusion, indicates roughly equivalent iron and magnesia but dissimilar alumina and lime contents. In the absence of more definite evidence it is suggested that the antigorite-bearing rock was derived from ultrabasic igneous material in sills by processes of low-grade metamorphism and, later, silicification. The reaction antigorite — talc may have been related to the latter process: Meg,(OH),Si,0; + 2Si0. — Mg,(OH).Si,O,, + H.O antigorite talc G. A. Macdonald (1941) indicates that the conversion of serpentine to tale is the first stage in the progressive metasomatism (i.e. silica metasomatism) of serpentine in the Sierra Nevada of California. II. Biotite Zone. The outermost isogradal line drawn on the map represents the incoming of brown biotite in the phyllites and schists. As a general rule this biotite isograd displays a remarkable parallelism to the margins of the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granite masses. Near the northern end of the Ellerslie mass the isograd turns to the east, apparently following the outline of that mass. Little or no change in the biotite zone seems to occur near the Belmore mass. The zone appears to be widest where it extends across the regional trend of the country. It attains its maximum surface width (about three miles) in the Borambola district. Between Rosewood and Westbrook the zone becomes quite restricted and disappears entirely further south. Biotite has been noticed in phyllites near Humula Trig. Station and to the west near the Kyeamba adamellite. This suggests an increase in metamorphic grade in this area but, as only reconnaissance mapping has been undertaken west of Humula, isogradal lines have not been plotted. ; Biotite zones of comparable metamorphic status have been found at Cooma (Joplin, 1942) and at Albury (Joplin, 1947). At Omeo (Victoria), Crohn (1950) mentions a biotite zone but he has not plotted its limits on the map. } Certain lithological types—jaspers, limestone, and silicified serpentine—found in the low-grade zone do not occur here, but otherwise the rock types of both zones are comparable. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 105 (i) Pelites. By this stage of the metamorphism most of the pelitic rocks merit the title fine- grained mica schist. Cleavage and schistosity are usually obvious; finely plicated schistosity is somewhat unusual. The increase in metamorphic grade generally produces a darker colour (commonly dark olive-green) in these pelites relative to that of the lower-grade pelites. Colour variation is, however, not a sufficiently reliable criterion to be specific as a zonal indicator. In actual fact, the mapping of the biotite isograd has proved to be one of the most tedious operations associated with these studies because the appearance of biotite can only be determined with the aid of a microscope. Mineralogically, these pelites contain biotite, muscovite, quartz, a little felspar and chlorite, and the common accessories zircon, tourmaline, iron oxides and rutile. Biotite, the index mineral for the zone, occurs as small light brown to brown (the colour tends to deepen somewhat with increase in metamorphic intensity) flakes aligned along the schistosity. In the higher-grade parts of this zone there may be a tendency for biotite porphyroblasts to be formed across the schistosity and this feature is most marked in the mica-rich rocks. Pleochroism is strong and for biotite towards the upper (metamorphic) limit of the zone a typical scheme is: X = very pale yellow-brown; Y = dark red-brown; Z = dark red-brown; Z= Y > X. Greenish mica, mentioned as occurring in some low-grade pelites, may continue into the biotite zone but at an early stage gives place to brown biotite. Chlorite, likewise, is almost all converted to biotite quite soon after the biotite isograd is reached. Muscovite is an important constituent of these schists but apart from an increase in grain-size is not much different from its low-grade counterpart. Quartz is finely granular and commonly oriented along the schistosity. Felspar may appear as an accessory. One unusual rock contains an abnormal amount of finely granular felspar (the analysis is given in Table 3, no. 2). The high soda content is accounted for by the presence of small untwinned albite grains. Albite in relatively low-grade schists has been attributed to a variety of causes, including addition of soda (Clough; see Harker, 1939, p. 212). Mica-schists rich in soda and lime occurring at Sulitelma are mentioned by Vogt (1927), who suggested that they were related to an incomplete weathering of the source material. Similar rocks are found elsewhere in the Caledonides of Scandinavia, where, as in Scotland, there appear to be two schools of thought on the matter of their origin. Some authors (e.g. Strand, 1951) favour a metasomatic origin for the sodic felspar in such rocks. In view of the local development of the albite-bearing rocks in the present case the best explanation seems to be that the felspar is of detrital derivation. It is interesting to note that here there is no tendency for albite porphyroblasts to form, whilst in the Dalradian of Scotland such large albites may appear even before biotite (Harker, 1939). Harker apparently associated the porphyroblast development with stress influence. — Odd grains of tourmaline are not uncommon. Variable in colour, the blue-grey is more commonly found than the brown type. Graphite flakes occur in some aluminous pelites. Where carbonaceous material becomes abundant it is usually associated with chlorite and a pale yellowish-green mica as well as sericite, quartz and the common accessories with perhaps a preponderance of iron ore. Such rocks may occur near the non-carbonaceous pelites in which brown biotite and muscovite are abundant. Comparison of the two assemblages suggests a lag in the response to the metamorphic variations in the first case relative to the second. This phenomenon seems reasonably to be explained by the inhibitive action of the carbon (see Harker, 1939, p. 224; and Turner, 1948, p. 158). In general, the siliceous pelites reflect the mineralogical and textural changes observed in the more aluminous types. Brown biotite appears at roughly the same stage in both cases. Hxceptions to this rule are provided by the black siliceous rocks which, as might be expected from their carbon content, show a distinct lag. The black siliceous types are not extensive in the biotite zone but they do pass into it near Tarcutta Hill. Quartz, sericite, chlorite, a little biotite, iron ore and carbonaceous matter constitute 106 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, the greater part of these rocks, which are not unlike their counterparts in the low-grade zone. Biotite is not common and in some cases is quite absent. Occasionally pale greenish mica flakes are apparent. Quartz is the major constituent of all these rocks. It is usually finely granular but distinct grain-size variations are common even in the one thin section. Quartz veins frequently occur and the coarser quartz-rich patches are often associated with them. Some of these veins in the more massive rocks display intricate fold-patterns (cf. ptygmatic veins in granitized regions). Where the car- bonaceous matter is present in patches the carbon-rich portions have the finest-grained quartz associated with them. Local haematite staining is rather common and some, at least, of the iron oxide has been derived from the breakdown of pyrite. (ii) Psammopelites and Psammites. The mineralogical changes typifying the pelites of the biotite zone also occur in the sandier rocks. Chlorite and green mica are converted to biotite just as in the pelites. Most of these sandy rocks have sufficient matrix material available to produce the index mineral biotite and are thus quite useful for zoning purposes. Biotite appears to form in the sandy rocks earlier than in the pelites but the lag is never great. Harker (1939, p. 224) considered that the more psammitic rocks should lag behind the pelites during progressive metamorphism, but the opposite relations found during the present study also obtain at Cooma (Joplin, 1942, p. 170). Ray (1947) suggests that “more quartzose schists are prone to indicate by virtue of their inherent rigidity a slightly lower grade of metamorphism than a pelitic schist showing the same index mineral’. In the present case (as at Cooma) the metamorphism has an important thermal factor (Ray and Harker were considering almost exactly equivalent zonal sequences) which may overcome the “inherent rigidity”. Joplin (1942) suggested that the pelite lag might have been due to enhanced diffusion related to the presence of pore-fluid in the sandy rocks. Quartz is the major constituent of these rocks and is usually associated with muscovite, biotite, chlorite and green mica (near the biotite isograd) and the usual accessories. Epidote has been noted as a rare accessory. As in the low-grade zone the Jarge quartz grains tend to become granulated and recrystallized but original clastic characters often remain (preservation of original features has been observed in the biotite zone of the Woomargama and Burrumbuttock districts at Albury (Joplin, 1947); at Cooma they have usually been obliterated). Detrital plagioclase may survive well into the biotite zone, though it is definitely unstable under these conditions. The general tendency is, however, for the plagioclase to be replaced by albite. Ill. Knotted Schist Zone. With increase in metamorphic intensity the pelitic rocks acquire the appearance of knotted schists by the development of porphyroblasts. These ‘knotted’ rocks are readily recognizable in the field and an isogradal line may be drawn joining the points where the porphyroblasts appear. Such an isograd was used at Cooma and Albury by Joplin to introduce a zone of knotted schists (at Cooma called andalusite zone) and to separate it from the biotite zone. Tattam and Crohn (see Crohn, 1950, p. 16), working on the Victorian end of the metamorphic complex, have noted the development of porphyroblasts of cordierite in biotitic schists. Crohn believes, however, that this feature “cannot be used to define a new zone” because of the difficulty of distinguishing between spots of incipient cordierite and micaceous aggregates due to retrogressive alteration of the cordierite. He therefore considers these rocks as members of the biotite zone rather than as characteristic of a separate zone. Whilst there may be some justification for Crohn’s claim, my experience in this area has been that a knotted schist zone can be defined and mapped without undue ambiguity. The term knotted schist zone is used here rather than, say, andalusite and/or cordierite zone because it is often a matter of some difficulty to prove unequivocally which of these minerals was_ present originally as porphyroblasts. ; BY T. G. VALLANCE. 107 Schists characteristic of this zone are found in proximity to the Wantabadgery mass except at its south-eastern end where high-grade rocks occur. A definite high-grade zone separates the knotted schists from the Green Hills granite mass. As in the case of the biotite isograd, the outer limit of the knotted schist zone roughly parallels the margins of the granite masses. Knotted schists occur along part of the northern end of the Ellerslie mass and have been traced as far as Bangandang Trig. Station. Again, like the biotite zone, this zone appears widest where it transgresses the regional strike of the metasediments. The eastern belt of knotted schists becomes increasingly narrow as one passes from south to north. The western (i.e. to the west of the granites) belt is widest to the east of Tarcutta and is more restricted both to the north and south. The Belmore mass has not had much effect on the knotted schist zone, for in many places knotted rocks do not appear at all and the granite comes into contact with biotite-zone rocks. Where the zone swings round sympathetically with the Wantabadgery granite it increases in width as it passes westwards and finally achieves a surface width of about five miles in the vicinity of Alfred Town. To the south-west of Westbrook the knotted schist zone narrows and finally disappears. South of Tumbarumba, along the valley of Tumbarumba Creek, fragments of knotted schists have been found in the tributaries draining the.country to the west (Mt. Garland area). This seems to indicate that away from the fault line the knotted schists reappear in this southern area. (i) Pelites. The index feature of this zone is displayed typically by the pelites. With approach to the granite masses biotite-bearing schists become spotted by the incipient clots from which form quite rapidly the definite porphyroblasts responsible for the knotted appearance of the pelitic schists. These pelites are highly lustrous and micaceous and not uncommonly display small-scale plications of the schistosity. The lepidoblastic base of these schists, although somewhat coarser, is comparable with the biotite-zone schists. Mineralogically they may be identical. Brown biotite, muscovite and quartz are the essential constituents with the same accessories as were noted in the biotite-zone schists. Biotite as well- developed flakes is of the strongly pleochroic brown or red-brown type: X = pale straw-yellow; Y = dark brown or red-brown; Z = dark brown or red-brown; Z= Y > X; vy = 1:639; 2V very small. Generally the orientation of the flakes is parallel to the schistosity but with advancing recrystallization exceptions to this rule are not unusual. Occasionally large porphyroblasts (up to ca. 2 mm.) occur. Radioactive inclusions with associated pleochroic haloes are sometimes present. Muscovite blades and flakes aligned along the schistosity are abundant though often subordinate to biotite. Untwinned albite is an accessory in the knotted schists (at least in the outer parts of the zone). Potash felspar (untwinned), presumably a relic, has also been recorded on rare occasions. The presence of carbonaceous matter appears to cause a slight lag in the formation of porphyroblasts in the carbon-rich rocks. The porphyroblasts usually stand out as dark knots on weathered surfaces. Traces of original idioblastic outlines are common but deformation has, in some cases, induced oval or almond shapes. The knots increase in size with approach to the granite margins and occasionally reach a length of from three-quarters to one inch. In all cases the porphyroblasts are more or less, often completely, altered to pseudomorphic greyish micaceous aggregates. Where cores of unaltered material have been found the original mineral is a clear, colourless variety of andalusite. The alteration products are mainly sericitic mica, with some biotite and occasionally a little chlorite. Biotite becomes more important in the altered knots of the higher-grade zone and usually has a minor role in the aggregates found in the knotted schist zone. In addition to micaceous aggregates with andalusite cores (and the more abundant comparable aggregates without such relics), pseudomorphs with a distinctly yellowish colour and relict poikiloblastic structure Suggestive of pinitized cordierite are occasionally apparent. Fresh cordierite has, however, not been found in these rocks. Cordierite is recorded as an important constituent of knotted schists at Albury and in the Kiewa region of Victoria (Tattam, K 108 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, 1929), but in view of the extent of alteration in the present case it is difficult to assess the relative importance of cordierite and andalusite as porphyroblast minerals. The impression gained from an examination of thin sections would suggest that andalusite was the commoner of the two minerals. Thin section examination often reveals that the knots have suffered a rotation which has tended to twist them into the plane of the schistosity. Rotation has therefore been greatest in the case of the porphyroblasts elongated directly across the schistosity. Text-figure 6, B, illustrates such a rotated porphyroblast. Patches richer in quartz and Text-figure 6. A. Camera lucida sketch of folds in a banded psammopelite showing undeformed biotite flakes in the crests and troughs of the folds. The dark lines in the pelitic bands represent post-crystalline shears. B. Micaceous pseudomorph after andalusite (?) showing signs of rotation in a somewhat carbonaceous pelite. C. Large pseudomorph after andalusite (?) showing signs of rotation as well as deformation due to post-erystalline shears. Undeformed biotite has, in places, crystallized along the sutured margin of the porphyroblast. of coarser grain-size than the rest of the base are often deveioped on the “protected” sides of the porphyroblasts. Even when alteration to mica is complete the lines of inclusions in the pseudomorphs indicate the degree of rotation. Study of these porphyroblasts leads to some interesting information concerning time relations of crystallization of the various constituents in these rocks. The factors causing deformation of the porphyroblasts may also have produced minor plications in the base of these rocks. Such plications are shown in Text-figure 6, A. It can be seen that on the inside of the folds the biotite has crystallized without distortion, suggesting a para-crystalline environment (cf. Read, 1949, p. 117). Text-figure 6, C, shows a BY T. G. VALLANCE. 109 porphyroblast which has suffered apparent post-crystalline deformation and associated with this are plications in the micaceous base displaying para-crystalline features. This suggests that the porphyroblast crystallized before the final crystallization of mica. Evidence of rotation is also seen in this porphyroblast, but the twisting apparently took place before the final deformation. Local shears in such rocks are not unusual and indicate stress influence even after the final mica crystallization. Although there is a tendency for the porphyroblasts to be aligned along the schistosity or rotated towards that plane, there does not appear to be much orientation of them parallel to the lineation. This may be because the lineation and the schistosity were initiated before the porphyroblasts formed, although it is clear that some stress influence and mica erystallization continued after this stage. The evidence available regarding the growth of these schists seems to point to a sequence of events rather like the following: (a) initial crystallization of micas producing a schistosity, (0) formation of porphyro- blasts, and (c) final (minor) crystallization of mica. The suggested sequence may be related to variations in the thermal/stress balance during the metamorphism with the thermal peak coinciding with the porphyroblast formation. These observations suffice to indicate that the metamorphic processes which affected these rocks were by no means simple and that the knotted schists as seen today were built in stages. It seems logical to regard all these stages as parts of the one overall metamorphism rather than as completely unconnected events. ‘“‘The dictum of our master Becke’’, as Read (1949, p. 106) has remarked, must be rejected, for, in actual fact, simultaneous crystallization in schists is often the exception rather than the rule. It is reasonable to expect that the other rocks here bear cryptic evidence of comparable relations, for all of them have, in a general way, suffered the same metamorphism though they have been affected to different degrees. Garnet has been mentioned as a constituent of certain schists in the Parishes of Cunningdroo and South Wagga Wagga by Whiting (1950). The former locality has been examined during ‘the course of this work, but the occurrence of garnet has not been confirmed. Black siliceous pelites appear to pass into a knotted schist zone environment to the north-west of Yabtree Trig. Station, but elsewhere they do not figure in this zone. Their composition precludes the development of andalusite or cordierite and thus they display no superficial indication of a change in metamorphic grade. Recrystallization merely causes an increased grain-size of the mineral constituents, which are the same as those found in comparable rocks of the biotite zone. (ii) Psammopelites and Psammites. The reaction of the sandier rocks to knotted schist zone conditions has been foreshadowed by the remarks already made. Quartz-rich psammites, poor in alumina, obviously would be unable to develop andalusite or cordierite no matter what the grade of metamorphism. On the other hand, it is quite conceivable that the more aluminous. psammopelitic rocks could provide the materials necessary for the growth of andalusite or cordierite porphyroblasts, and this is exactly what happens in the rocks studied. The mica-rich portions of the banded psammopelites behave in the same manner as do. the pelites themselves. The porphyroblasts make their appearance in such rocks before they do in the more homogeneous psammopelites. In the latter rocks the knots are quite comparable with those in the true pelites, except that where the supply of material is limited the grain-size of the porphyroblasts is diminished. In the absence of ‘knots’, a coarser grain-size is the only feature which might distinguish sandy rocks in this zone from their analogues in the biotite zone. Some of these metasediments still bear witness to their original clastic nature. Irregularities. in size and a certain angularity of the sand grains may persist, but in the more intensely recrystallized parts of this zone such features often disappear. In the banded meta- _ sediments even such fine structures as graded bedding may be preserved into the knotted Schist zone. I 110 GEOLOGY OF THE WAN TABADGERY-ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. T, Quartz remains the dominant component of these rocks but a little felspar (plagioclase and rélict K-felspar) may also be represented in the sand fraction. The orientation of the optic axial directions of quartz grains in a psammopelite from this zone has been represented in a fabric diagram (Text-fig. 5). Not infrequently the quartz grains in these rocks are traversed by lines of minute inclusions. These small inclusions are often opaque but occasionally larger examples are found which are rather irregular in outline and may contain small bubbles suggesting that the inclusions are liquid. Often the lines of inclusions can be proved to be end-sections of planes which display a remarkable constancy of orientation from grain to grain. Text-figure 7 gives sketches of these liquid inclusion planes which here cut across the schistosity. Tuttle (1949) has given an excellent discussion of the subject of liquid inclusions. He = ty =| % a!9 N% g! AN 7 LON , 2) S& 4 i OS) iY \ . * & ; ‘ 5 EQ scuistosty, wv A ath 5 ED i 6 » N ‘ oy S aa esas wee SS ' 1 \ \ 5 0-5 mm. B. 005mm. — Text-figure 7. A. Camera lucida sketch of a knotted schist zone sandy rock showing planes of liquid inclusions, in the quartz grains, cutting across the schistosity. B. Camera lucida sketch giving details of the inclusions in one of the quartz grains. found that, at times, such planes have a remarkably uniform orientation over large areas. In Text-figure 7, B, it will be noted that there are two major orientations of planes of inclusions in these rocks and, applying Tuttle’s (1949, p. 334) criteria, it can be seen that the “subordinate” group (minor trend) is probably of somewhat later age than the “dominant” group. It is quite obvious that there is no uniform relation between the orientation of these inclusion planes and crystallographic directions in the quartz. The planes of inclusions have certainly formed in the rocks after consolidation and cannot have been present in the original clastic grains. Tuttle believed that deformative processes were responsible for the development and uniform orientation of the inclusion planes in the Washington, D.C., area, and the same explanation seems reasonable in this case. No attempt has been made to apply petrofabric methods to this problem, but observations made suggest that such studies would bear fruitful results. In addition to the sandy rocks with admixed clay as matrix material, odd bands ot calcareo-arenaceous rocks are found in this zone. Mineralogically these latter rocks consist mainly of quartz and granular clinozoisite-epidote with subordinate dirty pale green amphibole and iron ore. Rocks of similar composition occur as inclusions in the Wantabadgery granite. It is interesting to note that it is such limy rocks which display boudinage structures at Mundarlo (Vallance, 1951). A few examples of psammopelites with abnormal lime have been found to the west of Bangandang Trig. Station. The development of crystals of pleochroic bluish-green or green amphibole along with brown - biotite indicates an enhanced lime content. A rock containing a few subhedral, colourless BY T. G. VALLANCE. 17a garnets (associated with quartz and small aggregates of colourless amphibole) was also found here. This is the only occurrence of garnet in the country rock metasediments found during this study and is perhaps due to an unusual lime content; the rock has not been analysed. ; IV. High-grade Zone. When discussing the knotted schist zone it was mentioned that, whereas the knotted schists extended almost to the margin of the Wantabadgery granite, these schists were separated from the Green Hills granite by a zone of higher-grade rocks. The latter are typically more granular than the schists and may contain sillimanite. Near the granite contact they may become migmatites or injection rocks. Actually these high-grade rocks do occur at the margin of the Wantabadgery granite mass but they are usually restricted to a zone often only a few feet wide. At the south-eastern end of this mass, however, such rocks are more extensive and a separate high-grade zone is mappable. Continuing southwards along the strike from Yaven Trig. Station, the high-grade zone widens rather remarkably until in the vicinity of Sargood Trig. Station it is about four to five miles across. The zone then narrows to the south, passing between the Green Hills and Belmore masses, and finally disappears some miles to the north of Tumbarumba. From the map it will be seen that the isograd defining this zone roughly follows the western margin of the Green Hills granite mass. Isolated masses of similar metasediments with the appearance of roof pendants occur at Hugel Trig. Station and in the area east of Tumbarumba (for example in the Nurenmerenmong Range). The boundary drawn between the zone of knotted schists and the high-grade zone lacks the precision that characterizes the other isograds because of the personal factor probably involved in its mapping. The isograd has been drawn through points where knotted schists tend to lose their good cleavage and high lustre and acquire a more granular appearance. Joplin (1942) at Cooma was faced with a similar problem and remarked that “the boundary between this [ie. the andalusite or knotted schist zone] and the succeeding permeation-zone was a somewhat arbitrary one, determined in the field by the appearance of slightly more granular and less schistose rocks’. It will be noted that at Cooma the term permeation-zone was used to include the high-grade rocks which did not show injection by tongues of gneiss (injection zone). Because of. the lack of a sharp contrast between these permeation and injection rocks in this area compared with Cooma the two zonal subdivisions have not been used in this study and all the rocks are considered in the one high-grade zone. (i) Pelites. Within the zone defined on the map there is a gradual change in the appearance of the rocks with approach to the granite contact. At the outer edge of the zone the rocks retain some schistosity and have knots apparently comparable with those of the knotted schists. In thin section, however, it may be seen that the knots have a slightly different appearance from those in the lower-grade zone. Typically, the knots, which in the knotted schist zone were composed of fine flakes of sericite, now consist of much coarser aggregates of mica flakes with a base of sericite and iron ore fragments. Muscovite blades are quite common, whilst a gréen biotite (pleochroic from pale yellow-green to medium greenish-brown) may also occur as less well-defined flakes (brown biotite is found in some cases). Both micas in the aggregates show little trace of preferred orientation which is in contrast to the mica of the base of these rocks. Brown pleochroic (pale straw to dark reddish-brown) biotite is the characteristic dark mica of the two-mica base. Occasionally unaltered cores of andalusite (clear and colourless) remain in the knots and the occurrence of both biotite and muscovite replacing it surely indicates an addition of bases from some external source. Compared with the altered porphyroblasts in the knotted schists these knots often have more diffuse boundaries against the micaceous base. Definite K-felspar and oligoclase have not been recorded here and in this respect these rocks differ from the higher-grade types in this zone. 112 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—LTUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. I, These rocks are followed in the metamorphic progression by varieties comparable with the spotted granulites of Cooma. Schistosity is much less obvious and the term eranulite seems quite appropriate for such rocks. Their characteristic appearance is due to the dark micaceous aggregates or spots scattered through a much lighter- coloured base. With increase in grade the spots tend to merge with the base, but right to the granite contact some heterogeneity expressed by a mottled appearance is preserved. Red-brown biotite similar to that of the base becomes commoner in the micaceous patches and along with it may occur sub-radiating patches of pale chlorite flakes (pleochroic, pale yellow-green to mid brownish-green; parallel extinction; +ve (?); sometimes anomalous blue interference tints; length-fast). The chlorite is probably of a later age than the biotite. Blades of muscovite become more numerous and extensive as the granite is approached. Quartz is usually not abundant in the pelites and is commonly interstitial. Andalusite may occur in these rocks as pleochroic (Z, Y = colourless; X = pale pink; pleochroism variable within a single grain) porphyroblasts with markedly ragged and poikiloblastic (mainly quartz and biotite inclusions) margins and almost inclusion- free centres. These porphyroblasts are often surrounded by zones enriched in biotite. Thin wisps and needles of sillimanite may be associated with the andalusite which, in contrast to the colourless andalusite of the knotted schists, shows no sign of alteration to micas. Joplin (1942, p. 180) has suggested that the pink pleochroic andalusite, occurring in a similar environment at Cooma, has been deposited from solution, i.e. it is of metasomatic origin. The colourless andalusite of the knotted schists is certainly of metamorphic origin. Whether any general relation exists between colour and origin of andalusite is not known, but in the literature there does seem to be a tendency for coloured andalusite to be recorded more often in granitic or metasomatic than in purely metamorphic environments (see for example, Hills, 1938; Santos Pereira, 1950). Cordierite poikiloblasts which are sometimes associated with the andalusite in these rocks are always more or less altered. In places the cordierite has subidioblastic outlines against quartz and the mica pseudomorphs have a markedly tabular form. The cordierite is sometimes large enough to be easily visible to the naked eye and may attain a diameter of from one-quarter to one-half inch. That the mica is replacing cordierite may be proved in many cases by the unaltered cores in the aggregates. It will be remembered that fresh cordierite was never found in the knotted schists and although the diagnosis of the mineral in that zone was always rather doubtful, it did not appear to be as abundant as andalusite. In the high-grade zone, _ however, cordierite is quite an important constituent of the pelites. A glance at an ACF diagram (Text-fig. 8) on which the pelites have been plotted suggests that all of them (both knotted schists and high-grade rocks) should have abundant cordierite, yet it seems that the mineral becomes more important in the high-grade rocks. This brings to mind the suggestion of Potgieter (1950), who says that in rocks where both andalusite and cordierite are possible mineral phases the formation of andalusite might be favoured by a slight stress influence which would perhaps prevent crystallization of cordierite (because of its lower crystalloblastic force). It may be that when the knotted schists were formed a certain stress environment existed which favoured the andalusite (it is realized, however, that cordierite is reported to appear abundantly in knotted schists at Albury and in Victoria) whereas cordierite came into its own in the high-grade zone where the stress influence was slight. At this stage of the metamorphism potash felspar may appear, but examination of the role it plays is rendered difficult by the amount of alteration (mainly sericitization) which it has suffered. Commonly, however, there is no extensive development of felspar porphyroblasts as has been described in the high-grade rocks at Cooma and it is not until the granite contact is reached that relatively large felspars are seen. The potash felspar is typically untwinned and is commonly associated with grains of albite-twinned (and some untwinned) oligoclase (Abs; 90). Perthitic intergrowths are a common feature and they become obvious in the perphyroblasts at the granite BY T. G. VALLANCE. 113 contact. Small felspar grains displaying myrmekite have been noted in some high-grade rocks. As both felspar and cordierite tend to be converted to micaceous aggregates it is sometimes difficult to distinguish the completely altered patches. Usually, however, the sericitic aggregates after felspar have a greyish or brownish colour and a more patchy appearance than the alteration products of cordierite, which are often yellowish, have iron oxide-stained cracks and, occasionally, haloes round small inclusions. Both biotite and muscovite are abundant in the high-grade rocks. The biotite is normally of the red-brown, intensely pleochroic variety (Z = dark red-brown; Y = dark red-brown; X = pale straw-yellow; Z > Y > X; vy = 1:637-1:640) characteristically rich in inclusions with pleochroic haloes. Near the granite contacts the biotite often A ANDAWSITE (MUSCOVITE ) 2e3 144_T3, CORDIERITE ANORTHITE BIOTITE ACTINOLITE ANTHOPHYLLUTE MICROCLINE BIOTITE Text-figure 8.—ACF diagram for the cordierite-anthophyllite subfacies of the Amphibolite Facies. Rocks with deficient K,0 and excess SiOs. (After Eskola.) Key: 1-4, This paper, Table 6, nos. 1-4. 5, Joplin (1947), Table 1, no. IV. 6, Joplin (1942), Table 7, no. VII. 7, This paper, Table 6, No. 5. 8, Tattam (1929), Table III, no. 22. 9, This paper, Table 6, no. 6. 10, Joplin (1942), Table 5, no. IV. 11, This paper, Table 6, mo. 8. 12, This paper, Table 6, no. 9. 13, This paper, Table 2, no. 1. 14, Joplin (1942), Table 3, no. IV. 15, Joplin (1947), Table 1, no. I. Nos. 1-12 high-grade rocks; 13-15 knotted schists. Text-figure 9.—AKF diagram for rocks with excess SiO, and A1l,O, in the staurolite-kyanite subfacies of the Amphibolite Facies. (After Turner, 1948.) Key: 1, This paper, Table 2, no. 1. 2, Joplin (1942), Table 3, no. IV. 3, Joplin (1947), Table I, no. 1. 4, Tattam (1929), Table 1, no. 3. 5, Tattam (1929), Table 1, no. 5. 6, Tattam (1929), Table 1, no. 6. 7, This paper, Table 6, no. 1. 8, This paper, Table 6, no. 2. 9, Joplin (1942), Table 7, no. IV. 10, Joplin (1942), Table 7, no. V. 11, Joplin (1947), Table 1, no. IV. 12, Joplin (1942), Table 7, no. VII. 13, This paper, Table 6, no. 5. 14, Tattam (1929), Table 3, no. 22. 15, This paper, Table 6, no. 6. 16, Joplin (1942), Table 5, no. IV. 17, This paper, Table 6, no. 8. 18, This paper, Table 6, no. 9. 19, This paper, Table 1, no. 1. Nos. 1-6 are knotted schist zone rocks, 7-18 are high-grade rocks, 19 belongs to the biotite zone. seems to become unstable and breaks down to chlorite, with the TiO, of the mica being released as rutile forming sagenite webs. Such rutile is sometimes seen in the red-brown biotite (though more common in chlorite), apparently indicating that the TiO, is lost (in part at least) before the mica is changed to chlorite. Contrasted with the behaviour of the coloured mica, muscovite increases in importance near the granite and large plates of white mica are often developed enclosing pre-existing mineral grains. Near the granite contact at the north-western end of the Green Hills mass large porphyroblasts (up to half an inch long) of sillimanite appear in the pelitic granulites. In every case the sillimanite displays extensive alteration to white mica, only small unaltered cores remaining to indicate the original nature of the porphyroblasts. Small rods and needles of the mineral occur further from the granite margin but the porphyroblastic development is quite localized. Biotite has, in some cases at least, 114 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. TI, provided the material for the formation of sillimanite (the change biotite — sillimanite is particularly obvious in the pelitic inclusions in the granite). The production of sillimanite probably represents the peak of the thermal metamorphism. As needles of sillimanite occur in the pink andalusite (Plate vi, F) in some cases it is suggested that the latter formed after the sillimanite. The alteration of sillimanite to mica is probably due to the metasomatic addition of bases (mainly potash) and is reminiscent of the New England region studied by Billings (1938) where sillimanite-schists have been “‘muscovitized” by the introduction of potash. Owing to the absence of analyses of completely “unmuscovitized” high-grade rocks we cannot demonstrate the chemical changes involved as well as Billings did. Table 7 does, however, show that a high-grade rock (2) has a distinctly higher potash/alumina ratio than that of a lower-grade (biotite zone) rock (1) and that the differences are of the same order as those found by Billings (columns A, B, and C). TABLE 6. High-grade Metasediments. | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 8 9 sid, St oe 49-53 54-01 54-63 56°05 | 63:97 69-98 73-64 | 74°59 81-85 Al,O; ae aa 26-53 24-41 PAO B15) 24-91 | 18-13 14-66 13°89 IP ypl 8:75 Fe,0; Qeilvy, 1:39 2:40 1-22 1:92 1-91 0-70 0-61 0-47 FeO 6-01 5-95 4-64 4:76 4-34 4-45 4-04 4-21 2-68 MgO Boal) 2-91 07/5) PAIL moe |) esp) | Teas 0:78 0:82 CaO 0:37 0:36 0:65 0-51 0-19 Mol@) | Wers} 0-67 0-34 Na,O 1-238 1-09 0-62 1:06 | 0-92 0-50 oa, ibogyit 1-19 K,0 5:90 5-45 6:28 Gory | 4-58 3:92 2-88 3:29 2°54 H.O+ 3:79 2-64 10245) 119,233 1:60 0-89 0-42 1:29 0-96 H,O0— 0-31 0-28 0:26 0:22 0:26 0-18 0-07 (0s ya 0-24 TiO, 1:03 0-85 0-86 0:86 0-69 0-71 0-63 0-63 0-25 P.O; — 0-15 0:20 0-14 0:27 — —_— — 0-10 MnO 0:06 0:07 0:05 0-11 0:03 0-04 0-06 0-03 0-05 Ete. — — 0-15 0-09 — — — | = - | 100-08 99-56 100-09 99-79 99-73 99-82 99-71 100-29 100-24 1. Spotted granulite. Hast end of Yaven Creek bridge, Por. 51, Par. of Dutzon, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 2. Spotted granulite. Mt. Pleasant Creek, Por. 32, Par. of Wallace, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 3. Spotted granulite. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 181. 4. Mottled gneiss. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Jbid., p. 181. 5. Granulite. Por. 32, Par. of Wallace, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 6. Cordierite-rich granulite. East side of Por. 35, Par. of Dutzon, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 7. Corduroy granulite. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 168. 8. Quartz-rich granulite. Por. 66, Par. of Cunningdroo, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 9. Granitized quartz-rich granulite. Near granite margin, east side of Por. 228, Par. of Tenandra, Co. Clarendon- Anal. T. G. Vallance. Obviously potash has been concentrated and one explanation of this increase might be by the late addition of K.O from the granite. Billings suggested that potash is derived by the hydrolysis of potash felspar in the plutonic rocks: 6KAISi,0, + 2H.O — 2H.KAI.Si,0,. + 2K.0 + 12Si0. orthoclase muscovite Muscovite does occur in the granites but it would be a matter of difficulty to prove whether it is wholly or partly related to the release of potash to the nearby meta- sediments. The late glassy-quartz veins which cut the high-grade rocks in a tew places may represent the destination of some of the silica freed by such a process as: that postulated by Billings. -Holmes and Reynolds (1947) have suggested a similarity between Billings’ New Hampshire occurrence of ‘“‘muscovitization” of high-grade rocks and certain Dalradian rocks in Donegal in which quartzite is converted to mica schist. They disagree with Billings’ explanation and state that “the migrations involved in the metasomatic metamorphism of the Malin Head Quartzite (and presumably that of the Loon ryt BY T. G. VALLANCE. ial Mountain schists [Billings]) .. . were of the far-travelling type characteristic of migmatite fields and the surrounding zones of regional metamorphism”. In the present case the late muscovite-enrichment in the -high-grade rocks is greatest around the margins of the plutonic masses and mainly occurs in proximity to them. The evidence we have concerning the alteration of the various minerals (sillimanite, cordierite, and felspar) leads to some interesting time relations. The porphyroblasts of the knotted schists must have been altered before the end of the metamorphism because of the variation in the mineralogy of the aggregates which replace them (brown biotite develops in the higher-grade knots whereas nearer the outer limit of the knotted schist zone fine sericite is characteristic). Permeation by alkali-bearing solutions must at some stage have extended out as far as the knotted schist zone. One would naturally expect that these solutions would have been most active in the deeper high-grade zone and the fact that cordierite porphyroblasts, for example, are only partly altered in the high-grade rocks (cf. knotted schists) suggests. TABLE 7. Examples of Potash-enrichment in High-grade Rocks. 1 2 A | B | C K,0 | Fee A: Donal, Oey 0-19 Geile. i. Maen Al,0O; ; | | Na.O | 0-050 ae on03 0-09 mor |. OA KO | K,0+Na,0 | | mares 0:23. | 0-27 0-28 0-240 a-0-36 Al,0, | e . Fine-grained psammopelite (Biotite Zone). This paper, Table 1, No. 1. . Cordierite-rich granulite. The cordierite is now extensively altered to mica. High- grade Zone. This paper, Table 1, No. 2. A. Slate. Low-grade Zone. B. Sillimanite Schist. High-grade Zone. C. N i) Muscovitized Schist. High-grade Zone. ote.—A, B, and C belong to the Littleton Formation (New Hampshire) and are quoted from Billings (1938), Table 4. that they did not suffer this action. Development of brown biotite in the aggregates of the higher-grade rocks is perhaps correlable with the trend towards the sillimanite peak of metamorphism and following this may have come a final ‘‘muscovitization’’. The sillimanite, cordierite and pink andalusite may thus belong to a rather later generation than the porphyroblasts of the knotted schists. Of the two “muscovitizations” only the later one may have been directly related to the presence of the granite. Discrete veins and tongues of leucocratic quartzo-felspathic material occur in the high-grade zone in close proximity to the margin of the Green Hills granite (and to a smaller extent near the Wantabadgery granite). These mixed rocks (migmatites or injection rocks) are similar in many respects to the more extensive injection rocks found at Cooma. In the case of the pelites the metasedimentary host material may he mottled or spotted and granular like the granulites mentioned above. At times the host material becomes coarsely crystalline and there may be a concentration of biotite (a biotite selvedge) in the host near the vein margin. The vein material may carry subordinate muscovite and red-brown biotite in addition to the abundant quartz and felspar. Brown tourmaline may also occur in the veins. It has been seen that the pelites in the high-grade zone tend, in general, to assume the appearance of spotted granulites but the transition to such rocks from the knotted schist stage is rather gradual. This transition suggests a possible development-stage in the history of these rocks which was not recorded at Cooma (Joplin, 1942). There the “spots” were regarded as pelitic fragments which had been disrupted by the formation of orthoclase porphyroblasts. In the present case the spots seem to represent altered porphyroblasts of andalusite and/or cordierite comparable with those that form 116 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. — TI, the knots in the knotted schists. The micaceous spots occur in the granulites even where orthoclase is of minor importance and certainly could have had no extensive mechanical action. The best explanation seems to be that the spots of the granulites (in the outermost parts of the zone at least) are actually highly recrystallized mica- aggregates corresponding to the altered knots of the schists. It is interesting to note that green biotite may occur in the spots of the granulites whereas only the typical red-brown variety is developed in the base of such rocks. Comparison of analyses of pelites and of altered “nodules” from a Victorian knotted schist (see Tattam, 1929, Table I, no. 6; these are the only altered porphyroblasts from knotted schists in this metamorphic belt which have been analysed) will indicate a fairly close correspondence (except for magnesia and to some extent iron). Conceivably both pelite fragments and mica-replaced porphyroblasts could provide the material for the spots in the granulites in different cases. In the higher-grade parts of this zone the dark micaceous spots of the granulites are separated by felspar-rich leucocratic veins or patches and it may be that there the development of felspar has helped to break down the original pelite material. It seems not unreasonable to regard the early-stage spotted granulites as derived from knotted schists by recrystallization whereas with the development of more felspar (perhaps by addition due to metasomatism) internal disruption may accentuate the spotting of the granulites. A summary of the probable history of these rocks might be: (1) production of knotted schists under (mainly) thermal influence, followed by (2) alkali metasomatism causing alteration of the porphyroblasts to mica aggregates, (3) increase in thermal intensity resulting in the recrystallization of the mica aggregates (with the development of biotite, etc.) and the granulitic appearance of the rocks with the micaceous patches remaining as relics. The generation of sillimanite, cordierite, potash felspar, and perhaps pink andalusite belongs to this period. Finally with waning temperature (4) potash-rich solutions caused the breakdown of the high-grade aluminous minerals (except andalusite) to muscovite. The high-grade environment may have been, in part, superimposed on the knotted schists as the metamorphism progressed to its peak (3). Such observations indicate that the metamorphism although in a general sense progressive must have taken place in a number of stages, just as was decided after examining the knotted schists. (ii) Psammopelites and Psammites. The general trend of mineral transformations in the pelitic rocks is also shown by the sandier types, though the metamorphic representatives of the latter in this zone are more quartz-rich and often more granular than the isogradal pelites. As a rule the banded psammopelites preserve their original sedimentary banding till a more advanced stage than the other metasediments. The mottled or spotted pelitic bands in these rocks behave exactly as do the normal pelites whilst the sandier bands are recrystallized to granoblastic aggregates of quartz, red-brown biotite, muscovite, and sometimes felspar. In appearance such banded rocks are similar to the corduroy granulites described from Cooma (Browne, 1914; Joplin, 1942). Towards the granite contact it becomes apparent that the sandy rocks have been more easily permeated than the accompanying pelites. The increase in size of the K-felspar grains with approach to the granite suggests that part, at least, of the necessary material for their formation has come from the granite by some process such as metasomatism. The felspar porphyroblasts near the contact may grow to about half to one inch long and are commonly marked by fine perthitic intergrowths. Oligoclase is a frequent associate of the K-felspar and it exhibits a greater proportion of twinned grains near the granite than away from it. Where the bulk composition permits, cordierite, always more or less altered, may occur as rather regular idioblasts. Andalusite does not usually appear in these more homogeneous rocks but it does occur in the pelitic bands of the corduroy granulites. Regarding the development of cordierite rather than andalusite in this case, there may be some significance in the fact that the psammopelites when plotted on an ACF diagram (Text-fig. 8—points 8-12 BY T. G. VALLANCE. iL 7/ represent psammopelites, the remainder are pelites) tend to fall farther away from the A (andalusite) pole and nearer the F pole than the normal pelites; the separation is, however, never very great. As in the case of the pelites the sandy rocks near the granite may display the features of banded migmatites or injection rocks. The vein material is in general comparable with the leucocratic quartzo-felspathic material mentioned in connection with the pelites. Banded gneisses of mixed origin may thus occur locally along the edge of the Green Hills granite mass. Veins of coarse glassy quartz (later than the quartzo-felspathic veins) occur in such rocks near Hugel Trig. Station. (iii) Tourmalinization of High-grade Metasediments. Metasediments rich in tourmaline are scattered at intervals along the granite contacts and have been studied near Alfred Town, north of Bilda Trig. Station, and near the north-west end of the Green Hills mass. Tourmaline as an accessory is wide- spread in all the metasediments of this region and though variable in colour is most commonly of the blue-grey pleochroic type. The boron-rich rocks on the other hand are quite exceptional and are characterized by pleochroic brown tourmaline. These rocks occur only in close proximity to dykes and veins of the acid phases (aplites or pegmatites) of the granite. All gradations may be seen from the extreme case of pure quartz-tourmaline rocks to little-affected types with only a few brown tourmaline grains associated with the usual minerals of the metasediments. The process of tourmalinization appears to involve the replacement of all the components of the metasediments (except quartz) by tourmaline. Biotite is usually the first mineral to disappear, followed by felspar and then muscovite. The replacing tourmaline is a strongly pleochroic (E = pale fawn; O = very dark brown) variety of schorlite occurring as ragged crystals, often rich in quartz inclusions. In the completely replaced rocks (i.e. the quartz-tourmaline rocks) there is often a marked dimensional orientation of the tourmaline grains. Late erystallization of quartz in veins is not an unusual feature of these rocks. The field relations strongly suggest that these tourmaline-rich rocks ‘are due to the addition of boron from the plutonic rocks. Tourmaline occurs in many of the pegmatites and aplites, though it is in general rather rare in the normal granites and granodiorites. It seems reasonable to regard the association of tourmaline-rich rocks with acid phases of the granite as being of genetic significance. The phenomenon of boron metasomatism is by no means rare and has been often invoked to explain the extensive development of tourmaline-rich rocks in proximity to plutonic masses (Turner, 1948, p. 127). As Turner pointed out, the process leads to a mineralogical convergence whereby a pelite, for example, of rather complex mineralogy is reduced to ‘a. quartz-tourmaline mixture. It is of interest to note here that Howitt, in 1888, described certain tourmaline-bearing rocks from Omeo, Victoria, in the same metamorphic belt as the present area; he ascribed the tourmaline to ‘‘volatile emanations” from plutonic magmas. The evidence available in this area points to a rather restricted extent for the boron metasomatism. In every case where tourmaline becomes important it is near acid phases of the granite, whilst the accessory tourmaline (usually of different colour) of wide distribution in the metasediments may be quite reasonably regarded as being of detrital origin. Contrary to the opinions of some petrologists (see Hutton, 1939), the boron has apparently not travelled far from its source, certainly not as far as the alkali-rich solutions which caused the rather extensive production of late sericite or muscovite in the alumina-rich rocks. REVIEW OF THE METAMORPHISM IN THE LIGHT OF THE FACIES CONCEPT. Now that some picture of the metamorphic progression and of the rocks formed in the various stages has been given it will be useful to attempt briefly. to relate the results to the appropriate metamorphic facies (see Turner, 1948). The metasediments which we have considered belong, for the most part, to a group of rocks with excess silica and alumina and deficient potash (relative to alumina). 118 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. — T, The remarkable uniformity in composition has been reflected in the rather constant mineral assemblages found in the rocks in a given metamorphic grade. The low-grade rocks with the definitive association sericite (muscovite) and chlorite belong to the muscovite-chlorite subfacies of the Greenschist Facies (see Turner, 1948, p. 96). The antigorite-rich assemblage of the silicified serpentine also belongs here. With the development of brown biotite (characteristic of the biotite zone) the grade of metamorphism becomes equivalent to the biotite-chlorite subfacies of the same facies as the low-grade rocks. Andalusite and/or cordierite associated with albitic felspar in the outer part (at least) of the knotted schist zone bespeaks a grade of metamorphism corresponding to the actinolite-epidote hornfels subfacies of the Albite—Hpidote-Amphibolite Facies (Turner, 1948). When more calcie plagioclase (in this case oligoclase) is developed along with the andalusite and/or cordierite in the pelitic schists Amphibolite Facies conditions are indicated. Such conditions probably applied in the more metamorphosed part of the knotted schist zone and certainly applied over a large portion of the high-grade zone. The mineral assemblages suggest that a cordierite-anthophyllite subfacies environment prevailed here. Text-figure 8 shows the positions of various high-grade rocks on an ACF diagram as devised for this subfacies. It can be readily seen that these rocks might be expected to give such mineral assemblages as (a) muscovite-andalusite-cordierite-plagioclase-(quartz), (0) muscovite-biotite-cordierite- plagioclase-(quartz) (see Turner, 1948, p. 79). Such associations do occur here but, as the diagram suggests, plagioclase is subordinate. Potash felspar is unstable in this subfacies in association with andalusite or cordierite. It has been noted, however, that potash felspar does appear in some of the high-grade rocks and it becomes commoner as the granite contacts are approached. Sillimanite also occurs under these conditions. The assemblages in which such minerals occur are not in complete equilibrium but they do suggest a change from’ the cordierite-anthophyllite subfacies. The association potash felspar-sillimanite is a possible one in the sillimanite-almandine subfacies of the Amphibolite Facies, and it may also occur in the Pyroxene Hornfels Facies. Besides certain of the high-grade rocks of the country-rock metasediments this association may also appear in the pelitic inclusions in the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granites. If these high-grade types belonged to the sillimanite-almandine subfacies, then, if equilibrium were attained, almandine garnet should appear in rocks of this composition. Although ideal equilibrium conditions have not been realized there should be some tendency for garnet to appear if such an environment once prevailed here; almandine has not been recorded from these rocks. On the other hand there is equally no tendency for pyroxene to appear in any of the metasediments. No basic rocks which might develop pyroxene under Pyroxene Hornfels Facies conditions occur in close proximity to the high-grade zone. Pyroxene has been noted (associated with amphibole) in a large inclusion in the Wantabadgery granite at Mundarlo; it has also been seen in certain basic rocks from the “basic belt” between Adelong and Batlow. Discussion of the significance of pyroxene in the latter rocks must be deferred, but it may be noted that the mineral tends to develop in some of these rocks as they are followed southwards along the strike, suggesting a possible metamorphic relation to the Green Hills granite and the general metamorphism rather than.to the EHEllerslie-Wondalga. granite with which the pyroxenic rocks may come in contact. Hornblende-pyroxene granulites also occur as xenoliths in the Cooma gneiss (Joplin, 1942, p. 171) which bears much the same metamorphic relations to the metasediments at Cooma as does the Green Hills granite to the metasediments here. All this suggests to me a transition from Amphibolite to Pyroxene Hornfels Facies and it is believed that the high-grade metasediments reflect the same tendency. The introduction of potash and the production of mica in the higher-grade rocks have thrown all the mineral assemblages into disequilibrium. In developing this broad facies picture I have attempted to restore the mineralogy of the various metasediments to what it probably was before these disturbing influences caused the retrogression. ? BY T. G. VALLANCE. 119 It is felt that despite this present disequilibrium the metamorphic facies progression is sufficiently clear to merit our attention. In the Cooma study Dr. Joplin correlated her metamorphic zones with those devised by Barrow (see p. 98) for the Dalradian of Scotland and believed that Barrow’s almandine, staurolite and kyanite zones were missing. She related the high-grade rocks (permeation and injection zones) to Barrow’s sillimanite zone and referred to a “metamorphic unconformity” existing between the biotite and sillimanite zones. Actually there seems to be no need for postulating such a break and from a consideration of the various facies there is not much evidence for it. There was probably a waxing and waning of the temperature/stress ratio and various other complicatory events such as alkali-metasomatism during the metamorphic history of this area but, broadly speaking, the facies involved belong to a series indicating a general increase in grade with approach to the granite masses. Table 8 shows the suggested sequence of TABLE 8. Metamorphic Zones and the Equivalent Facies and Subfacies (partly after Turner, 1948). | Barrow’s Zones. Facies and Subfacies. | Zones Used in this Study. GREENSCHIST FACIES Chlorite Zone Muscovite-chlorite subfacies Muscovite-chlorite subfacies Low-grade Zone Biotite Zone Biotite-chlorite subfacies Biotite-chlorite subfacies | Biotite Zone Temperature/ Stress Increasing > | | s ALBITE-EPIDOTE AMPHIBOLITE FACIES 3 Garnet Zone Chloritoid-almandine subfacies Actinolite-epidote hornfels = (Almandine) | subfacies & | Knotted schist = | Zone = AMPHIBOLITE FACIES SS Staurolite Zone Staurolite-kyanite subfacies S Kyanite Zone | S&S Cordierite-anthophyllite | High-grade Zone | | subfacies | \ Sillimanite Zone | Sillimanite-almandine subfacies H PYROXENE HORNFELS FACIES 7 facies and subfacies encountered in this study (they also occur at Cooma) and the zonal correlation together with Barrow’s zonal series and the appropriate facies and subfacies (mainly after Turner, 1948). In both cases the same facies are involved but, except in connection with the Greenschist Facies, rocks from the two areas (the Grampian Highlands of Scotland and the present area) belong to different subfacies. Barrow’s subfacies equivalents are indicative of a more dynamothermal metamorphism than those referred to in this paper which bespeak a more thermal type (with less stress influence relative to the thermal effect) of metamorphism. This significant difference was noted by Joplin (1942). Fig. 9 (see p. 113) indicates that under the appro- priate physical conditions the metasediments here described would have developed Barrow’s index mineral staurolite (almandine might have been formed at a lower-grade stage) instead of the andalusite and cordierite. I do not believe that the high-grade zones at Cooma and in the Wantabadgery-Adelong-Tumbarumba area are strictly correlable with Barrow’s sillimanite zone (Joplin, 1942, p. 194) which, according to Turner, represents the sillimanite-almandine subfacies of the Amphibolite Facies, but rather that the development of sillimanite represents an incomplete transition to a higher-grade facies. Turner (1948) quotes the work of Tattam (1929) in the north- eastern Victorian complex in connection with the mineral reaction biotite — sillimanite shown by some of the rocks of that area; a similar transition occurs in this area, especially in the pelitic inclusions in the granites but also to some extent in the 120 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. T, country-rocks. Turner suggests that the reaction is typical of the sillimanite-almandine- subfacies, but it seems probable that it is not confined to that particular environment.. The foregoing remarks serve to show that the metamorphic progression described in this paper runs, in a sense, parallel to the Dalradian metamorphic sequence of George: Barrow; they also emphasize the fact that Barrow’s zones represent but one type of metamorphic progression. In the present case the metamorphism was regional in extent but had an important thermal factor. Consideration of the problem of the relation. between the granite masses and the metamorphism must be deferred until the granites, themselves have been described. EXPLANATION OF PLATES V AND VI. Plate v. Geological sketch map of the Wantabadgery-Adelong-Tumbarumba district. Plate vi. A. Banded low-grade siliceous metasediment from the western side of the jasper belt near Nangus. Note the contortions and rupture induced by the deformation after the develop- ment of the schistosity. Granular quartz has been deposited along the lines of fracture. Ordinary light. B. Siliceous serpentine-bearing rock. Patches of fairly coarse fibrous antigorite occur in a matrix of finer antigorite, tale, chalcedony, and calcite. Note the chalcedony vein (dark) with faint marginal radiating growths. Crossed nicols. Cc. A rather coarse sandy psammopelite (subgreywacke) from the knotted schist zone. There is a general orientation of the sand grains (quartz, felspar, and a few rock fragments) in a matrix now consisting of biotite and muscovite. Some of the sand grains show signs of granulation. It is clear that this rock has retained more detrital features than has the isogradal finer-grained type (no. D). Crossed nicols. . D. Psammopelite from the knotted schist zone. Mica flakes are distinctly recrystallized and show a preferred orientation along the obvious schistosity. Ordinary light. KE. Knotted schist (pelite) from near the high-grade zone outer limit. The photograph. shows a lustrous schistosity-plane with large euhedral micaceous pseudomorphs after andalusite (?—most crystals are defaced but andalusite forms (001), (011), and (110) are visible in some cases). The scale is in inches. F. Spotted granulite (pelite) from the high-grade zone. Note the fresh andalusite porphyroblast (right of centre) with a granular marginal zone; the irregular patch in the core is an aggregate of Sillimanite needles. To the left of the big andalusite grain is a ragged porphyroblast of cordierite now completely replaced by a fine mica aggregate. The rock is. distinctly more granular than the lower-grade schists. Ordinary light. Magnification of nos. A, B, C, D, and F is x 138. Photographs by G. E. McInnes. " References. ANDERSON, W., 1890.—Notes on the Tertiary deep lead at Tumbarumba. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 2, pt. 1: 21-26. : BaiLey, E. B., 1937.—American gleanings 1936. Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, 20: 1-16. Barrow, G., 1893.—On an intrusion of muscovite-biotite gneiss in the south-east Highlands: of Scotland. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 49: 330-358. , 1912.—On the geology of lower Deeside and the southern Highland border. Proc. Geol. Assoc. (London), 23: 268-284. BartH, T. F. W., 1986.—Structural and petrologic studies in Dutchess County, New York. Part II. Petrology and metamorphism of the Paleozoic rocks. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer... 47: 775-850. BENSON, W. N., 1915.—The geology and petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of New South Wales. Part IV. The dolerites, spilites and keratophyres of the Nundle district. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 40: 121-1738. , 1918.—Idem. Part VII. The geology of the Loomberah district and a portion of the Goonoo Goonoo estate. Ibid., 43: 320-360. ; Biuuines, M. P., 1938.—Introduction of potash during regional metamorphism in western New Hampshire. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 49: 289-302. Booker, F. W., 1950.—The Laurel Hill-Tumbarumba alluvial deep lead. N.S.W. Dept. Mines; Geol. Repts. 1939-1945, pp. 20-23. BROWNE, W. R., 1914.—The geology of the Cooma district. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W..,. 48: 172-222. ———, 1943.—The geology of the Cooma district, N.S.W. Part ii. The country between Bunyan and Colinton. Jbid., 77: 156-172. (editor), 1950.—David’s Geology of the Commonwealth of Awstralia, vol. I. Arnold. London. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 121. CaRNE, J. E., and Jones, L. J., 1919.—The limestone deposits of New South Wales. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources 25. CrRoHN, P. W., 1950.—The geology, petrology and physiography of the Omeo district, north- eastern Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 62 (for 1949): 1-70. DAPPLES, E. C., KRUMBEIN, W. C., and Stoss, L. L., 1950.—The organization of sedimentary rocks. Jour. Sed. Petr., 20: 3-20. Emmons, W. H., and CALKINS, F. C., 1913.—Geology and ore deposits of the Philipsburg quadrangle, Montana. U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 78. Eskoua, P. E., 1951.—Around Pitkaranta. Ann. Acad. cient. Fennicae, ser. A, III, no. 27, 90 pp. Harker, A., 1939.—Metamorphism. 2nd Edition. Methuen. London. Hiuus, E. S., 1938.—Andalusite and sillimanite in uncontaminated igneous rocks. Geol. Mag., 75: 296-304. Houmes, A., and REYNOLDS, D. L., 1947.—A front of metasomatic metamorphism in the Dalradian of Co. Donegal. Bull. Comm. géol. Finlande, 140. (C.R. Soc. géol. Finlande, 20: 25-65.) HowirTt, A. W., 1888.—Notes on certain metamorphic and plutonic rocks at Omeo. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict., 24: 100-131. Hutton, C. O., 1939.—The significance of tourmaline in the Otago schists. Trans. Roy. Soc. New Zealand, 68: 599-602. JOPLIN, G. A., 1942.—Petrological studies in the Ordovician of New South Wales. I. The Cooma complex. Proc LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67: 156-196. , 1943.—Idem. II. The northern extension of the Cooma complex. Ibid., 68: 159-183. , 1945.—Idem. Ill. The composition and origin of the upper Ordovician graptolite- bearing slates. JIbid., 70: 158-172. ———, 1947.—Idem. IV. The northern extension of the north-east Victorian metamorphic complex. JIbid., 72: 87-124. Kay, M., 1951.—North American geosynclines. Mem. Geol. Soc. Amer., 48. MacponaLtp, G. A., 1941.—Progressive metasomatism of serpentine in the Sierra Nevada of California. Amer. Mineral., 26: 276-287. : Mit#s, K. R., 1946.—Metamorphism of the jasper bars of Western Australia. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 102: 115-155. : i MiscH, P., 1949.—Metasomatic granitization of batholithic dimensions. Part III. Relationships of synkinematic and static granitization. Amer. Jowr. Sci., 247: 673-705. OSBORNE, G. D., 1950.—The structural evolution of the Hunter-Manning-Myall Province, New South Wales. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Monograph 1. PETTIJOHN, F. J., 1949.—Sedimentary Rocks. Harper. New York. PoTciETER, C. T., 1950.—The structure and petrology of the George granite plutons and the invaded pre-Cape sedimentary rocks. Annals Univ. of Stellenbosch, 26, sect. A: 323-412. . Ray, S., 1947.—Zonal metamorphism in the eastern Himalaya and some aspects of local geology. Quart. Jour. Geol. Min. Met. Soc. India, 19: 117-140. Reap, H. H., 1949.—A contemplation of time in plutonism. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 105: 101-156. SANTOS PEREIRA, J. DOS, 1950.—Rochas graniticas portadoras de andaluzite e de silimanite, eolhidas no distrito do Porto. Bol. Assoc. da Filosofia Natural (Porto), 2: 59-66. SHERRARD, K. M., 1951.—HExhibit to Royal Soc. N.S.W., Section of Geology, Meeting 20th April, 1951. StrRAND, T., 1951.—The Sel and Vaga map areas. Geology and petrology of a part of the Caledonides of central southern Norway. Norges Geol. Undersodkelse, no. 178, 117 pp. TaTram, C. M., 1929.—The metamorphic rocks of north-east Victoria. Bull. Geol. Surv. Vict., 52. TinLEy, C. E., 1925.—Metamorphie zones in the southern Highlands of Scotland. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 81: 100-112. ———, 1936.—Eulysites and related rock-types from Loch Duich, Ross-shire. Mineral. Mag.. 24: 331-342. TURNER, F. J., 1948.—Mineralogical and structural evolution of the metamorphic rocks. Memoir Geol. -Soc. Amer., 30. TurrLe, O. F., 1949.—Structural petrology of planes of liquid inclusions. Jour. Geéol., 57: 331-356. VALLANCE, T. G., 1951.—An occurrence of boudinage structure in New South Wales. Jouwr. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 84 (for 1950): 165-168. VAN Hisp, C. R., and LeitH, C. K., 1911..-The geology of the Lake Superior region. Monograph U.S. Geol. Surv., 52. Voer, T., 1927.—Sulitelmafeltets geologi og petrografi. Norges Geol. Undersokelse, no. 121. WHitIneG, J. W., 1950.—The underground water resources of the Kyeamba valley. N.S.W. Dept. Mines, Geol. Repts. 1939-1945: 128-130. ZEALLBY, A. EB. V., 1918.—On certain felsitic rocks, hitherto called “banded ironstones”, in the ancien* schists around Gatooma, Rhodesia. Trans. Geol. Soc. Sth. Africa, 21: 43-52. CYTOLOGY OF SHPTORIA AND SHLENOPHOMA SPORES. By DorotuHy EH. SHAw, Faculty of Agriculture, University of Sydney. (Plate vii; three Text-figures.) [Read 29th July, 1953. Synopsis. The Giemsa stain was used to demonstrate the nuclear condition in macrospores of species of Septoria and Selenophoma, and in species of Ascochyta, Colletotrichum, Fusarium, Gloeosporium, Neurospora and Phyllosticta. One nucleus per cell was recorded for all species except Newrospora. The nuclei in the immature, one-celled spores of Septoria nodorum im consisted of 5-7 fragments. One nucleus, linear in form, was demonstrated in the micro- pyecnidiospores of Septoria tritici. The nuclei in the germ tubes and hyphae of some of the species were also studied, and in many cases were found to be elongated. The small nuclei in hyphae and conidia of Neurospora tetrasperma were rounded. Several other methods, involving different fixatives and stains, were used, and the results obtained with Giemsa were confirmed. No nuclei could be detected in living spores of Septoria and Selenophoma species with the phase contrast microscope. Spores of species of Septoria, Selenophoma and Ascochyta from the field and from culture were stained to demonstrate the amount of fat present and its distribution in the spores. 1. THE NUCLEAR CONDITION. The nuclear condition of species of Septoria and Selenophoma (particularly of those occurring on Gramineae in Australia) was investigated. There is very little information in the literature concerning the nuclear condition of either the spores or the mycelium of these genera. Sprague (1934), when describing the spores of Septoria tritici f. avenae, stated “the contents are homogeneous, with nuclei and nucleoli clearly evident’. Moore (1940) cited the description of Ellis and Martin of S. consimilis on lettuce (held to be similar to S. lactucae) as “‘spores filiform, multinucleate”’. In their detailed study of the structure and germination of Septoria spores, McMillan and Plunkett (1942) noted, however, that “in no protoplast, stained or unstained, has there been any structure that could be construed as a nucleus’. MacNeill (1950) published a preliminary note on a study of S. lycopersici, stating that “the Feulgen stain, modified to suit the type of material at hand, indicates a uninucleate condition of both spore and mycelial cells’. Shaw (1951) found that nuclei were clearly visible in spores and sporophores of S. pepli in sectioned diseased leaves stained with gentian violet-orange G. In this case, however, the septations were not clear, so that the number of nuclei per cell could not be determined. The nuclear condition of the micropycnidiospores in some species of Septoria has not previously been determined. There appear to be only two references to the nuclear condition of species of Selenophoma. Allison (1945) reported that the spores of S. bromigena were slightly guttulate, non-septate and multinucleate. Vanterpool (1947) recorded that the spores ot S. linicola on flax may be either uninucleate or multinucleate. METHODS. A method was sought whereby spores and mycelium could be stained without embedding and sectioning. The aceto-orcein and aceto-carmine methods of McClintock (1945) and the aceto-carmine method of Cherewick (1944) were not successful. The Method 2 of Robinow (1944), of dipping unfixed, air-dried impression preparations for five seconds into boiling N/5 HCl, rinsing and mounting in 0:1% crystal violet in water, was also unsuccessful. The following methods were found to give good results with the organisms tested. In all cases spores were allowed to exude from pycnidia into a drop of tap water on BY DOROTHY KE. SHAW. 123 grease-free slides, or secondary conidia or mycelium were added to the water, direct from cultures. In most tests the water was allowed to evaporate at room temperature. When germinating spores were required, the slides were placed in petri dishes with moist cotton wool, taken out after the required length of time, and allowed to air-dry. The spores or mycelium adhered to the slides throughout all the subsequent treatments. Method 1. This method is a modification of one used by Knaysi, Hillier and Fabricant (1950), whose technique has been used successfully with bacteria by Mr. A. D. Rovira, of the Microbiology Department, Faculty of Agriculture, University of Sydney. The method as adapted for the fungal material is as follows: (i) fix air-dried spores in 95% alcohol for 12-15 minutes; (ii) hydrolyse in N HCl at 60°C. for 6-15 minutes; (iii) wash in tap water for one minute; (iv) stain with 10% Giemsa for approximately one hour; (v) wash in tap water for one minute, and either allow to dry and examine under oil immersion or dehydrate in the acetone/xylol mixtures of Robinow (1944), mount in euparal and examine under oil: or allow to dry, mount in euparal and examine under oil. This method is quick and has given consistently good results. The nuclei stain vivid red-purple, and the cytoplasm stains very faint mauve. Air-drying alone has been used for fixation, e.g., for the study of mitoses in peripheral embryonic blood and for yeast cells, followed by hardening in 95% alcohol (Darlington and La Cour, 1947, p. 67 and p. 61 respectively). Knaysi et al. (1950) considered that fixation with alcohol dissolved lipids and so increased the penetration of the dye into the cellular structures of Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Air-drying was done at room temperature, or at higher temperatures over a microscope lamp. Alcohol was added to the slides while a thin film of moisture remained around the spores, and was then allowed to evaporate. There appeared to be no difference in the results. The time of fixation by 95% alcohol was varied from 1 to 15 minutes without appreciably altering the results. The time of hydrolysis varied from 1 to 15 minutes: best results were obtained with hydrolysis of 6-15 minutes, depending on the species. Best results were obtained when tap water (pH just over 7) rather than distilled water was used for washing. Shaw (1952) used the above method to show the nuclear condition of sporidia of Tolyposporium restifaciens, and it has been the main method used throughout this study. Barratt and Garnjobst (1949) also used an acid Giemsa stain to determine the number of nuclei in macro- and microspores of Neurospora crassa. The other methods were used to determine whether the same picture of the nuclear condition was obtained (a) by using a different fixative and (0) by using another stain. No major differences were detected in the nuclear condition with the other methods. Method 2. (i) Treat the air-dried spores according to Robinow (1944) by fixing in the vapour of 5 ml. of 2% osmium tetroxide for three minutes and allow to dry; (ii) immerse in 70% alcohol for five minutes; (iii) hydrolyse in N HCl at 60°C. for ten minutes; (iv) stain with 10% Giemsa for one hour; (v) subsequent treatment as Method 1. The nuclei stain red and the cytoplasm stains faintly mauve. Method 3. (i) Immerse the air-dried spores in water at 80°C. for 10-20 minutes. This procedure was used by Knaysi et al. (1950) in tests with desoxyribonuclease on M. tuberculosis; (ii) wash several times in water; (iii) stain with 10% Giemsa for one hour; (iv) subsequent treatment as Method 1. The result ‘obtained is not as clear as with Method 1, but proved particularly good for spores of Selenophoma donacis produced in culture. The nuclei stain red and the cytoplasm mauve. L 124 Method 4. CYTOLOGY OF SEPTORIA AND SELENOPHOMA SPORES, As a further check on the nuclear picture, spores were stained by the Feulgen technique. after de Tomasi (1936) and Coleman (1938), as given The leuco-basic fuchsin was prepared according to the modified formula by Darlington and La Cour (1947). Subsequent treatment was mainly as recommended by the Botany Department, University of Sydney: (i) Fix in acetic alcohol (3:1) for ten minutes; (ii) take through the alcohols from absolute to water; (iv) stain in leuco-basic fuchsin for 15-24 hours; times (ten minutes each); (vi) rinse 60%, 80% and absolute alcohol; in distilled \water; (viii) mount in euparal. (iii) hydrolyse in N HCl at 60°C. for six minutes; (v) wash in sulphite water four (vii) take through 20%, This method is longer than the preceding ones, and great care has to be taken in preparing the leuco-basic fuchsin. faint pink. Method 5. The nuclei stain reddish-purple and the cytoplasm For an approximate picture of the nuclear condition, very dilute cotton-blue lacto- phenol can be used. remain unstained. Live spores of species of Selenophoma and Septoria were also examined under the phase contrast microscope, both in phase and with dark field, but no nuclei could be detected. The nuclei stain deep blue, the cytoplasm blue, and the guttulae Examination of stained material was made with a Zeiss microscope using a com- bination of 90X apochromatic objective (N.A. = 1:3) and 20X and 15X oculars. Photo- graphs were taken using the same microscope and objective, and a 12X ocular with trichrome green filter and Process Pan film. Woodward-Smith and these are so specified. Examination was Selenophoma, from the field (F) and from culture (C). made of spores RESULTS. of the following A few photographs were taken by Mr. species of Septoria and Spores of species of Ascochyta, Colietotrichum, Fusarium, Neurospora and Phyllosticta were also included in the tests. Germinating spores and mycelium were studied in the species marked j. Fungus. Septoria avenae. S avenae f. triticea. . bromi. . macropoda. . nodorum. Sy tritici (mMacro- and micro- pycnidiospores). tritici var. lolicola. Septoria sp. S. S. . dianthi. . lactucae. . lactucae. . lycopersici. - pepli. apii-graveolentis. dianthi. Septoria sp. Septoria sp. Septoria sp. Selenophoma donacis. S . S . donacis var. stomaticola. donacis var. stomaticola. Ascochyta sp. Colletotrichum yraminicolum. Fusarium sp. (macro- and micro- spores). Gloeosporium sp. Neurospora tetrasperma. Phyllosticta sp. Host. Avena sterilis. Triticum vulgare. Bromus molliformis. Poa annua. Triticum vulgare. T. vulgare. Lolium multiflorum. Anthoxanthum odoratum. Apium graveolens. Dianthus barbatus. D. caryophyllus. Lactuca sativa. L. scariola. Lycopersicon esculentum. Euphorbia peplus. Erodium cygnorum. Silene gallica Stellaria media. Arundo donaz (2). Agropyron scabrum. Triticum vulgare. Bromus unioloides. B. unioloides. Dichelachne sciwrea. Source. Fy Fy E&C i Ey F & Cy EF & Cy Eee ee ee ee Re & & us EF & Cy | = BY DOROTHY E. SHAW. 125 All the species of Septoria examined had one nucleus per cell, so that the number ot nuclei per spore equalled the number of cells per spore (Plate vii, 1 and 4). The scolecosporous or filiform-spored species of Septoria are generally recognized as typical of the genus. These species usually produce slow-growing yeasty colonies on P.D.A., with or without the production of secondary conidia, the cultures later becoming carbonaceous. The nuclei did not stain as easily or as vividly as the nuclei of that other type still designated by many workers as belonging to the genus Septoria, and typified by S. avenae and S. nodorum. This latter type has cylindrical spores which produce quickly-growing cottony cultures on P.D.A. The nuclei of the spores stained easily and vividly, and in conformity with the wider spore the nuclei were wider than the nuclei in the filiform spores. In many preparations, under the most critical illumination, the nuclei of mature spores of S. nodorum could be resolved into 5-7 fairly circular fragments arranged in a circle. In immature one-celled spores pressed out of pycnidia these rounded fragments were distributed over a larger but still circular area in the centre of the spore, as in Text-figure 3. It is to be noted that in these one-celled spores there is only one area containing the nuclear fragments, so that the four nuclei in mature spores are probably all derived from a single nucleus. The nuclear condition of micropycnidiospores of species of Septoria has: not previously been determined. Microspores of NS. tritici were stained by Method 1, prepara- tions being chosen for study where macropycnidiospores were also present for comparison. One nuclear region occurred per microspore and was linear in shape, conforming to the morphology of the spore, measuring 4—5u long x 0-:8u wide, the spores themselves being usually 8-10u long x 0-8u wide. The nuclear region was not homogeneous, as about five deeply-staining areas occurred close together in sequence (Plate vii, 3; Text-fig. 2). In most cases the nuclei of spores allowed to remain in water for several hours lost some of their vividness as compared with the nuclei of freshly-exuded spores. In spores where germination had commenced from only one or two cells, the nuclei in these cells appeared more diffuse and less deeply stained than in the cells without germ tubes. In preparations showing spores after five hours in water, where more than 90% of the spores had germinated, the ungerminated spores were outstanding because of the vividness of the nuclei. In some germinating cells, however, the nuclei still stained sharply. Nuclei appeared in the germ tubes after approximately four hours (Plate vii, 5). At that time germ tubes of S. nodorum and S. avendae were about 30u long, and there was usually one arising from each end of the spore. The nuclei in the germ tubes in preparations obtained by the methods outlined were always longer than wide, and parallel to the direction of the hyphae. The only more or less circular nucleus detected in preparations of young germinating material was at the junction of two branches. In spores after 5-6 hours in water, two regions of chromatinic reaction, or two linear nuclei, were detected in the germ tubes. Under critical illumination many of these linear nuclei could be resolved into rounded fragments, usually about 5—7 in number, but sometimes more. In older material the nuclei were spaced rather regularly along the hyphae, and all had the linear form. Spores were allowed to remain in water for 24 hours, by which time a weft of hyphae had been produced on the slide. This was allowed to air-dry and was treated as were the spores. The chromatinic areas were easily detected in the hyphae, were rather regularly spaced, and again had the linear form. Mycelium from one-week-old cultures of the cottony Septoria species (S. nodorum, S. avenae, and S. avenae f. triticea) was teased out in water on slides and treated as in Method 1. Linear nuclei were again observed, with others slightly more rounded in outline (Plate vii, 6). 126 CYTOLOGY OF SEPTORIA AND SELENOPHOMA SPORES, Selenophoma Species. Mature spores examined of 8S. donacis and S. donacis var. stomaticola had one nucleus per spore (Plate vii, 8). Conidia of the variety are produced abundantly in culture, and more or less retain the faleate shape. In some spores a septum is laid down at the centre, and in these two nuclei—or one per cell—occurred. Conidia of the species are also produced abundantly in culture, but vary from falcate to linear to sausage-shaped, together with many other abnormal forms. In the falcate-shaped spores the nuclei stained vividly and were regularly rounded in outline, with the cytoplasm only faintly stained. In the abnormally-shaped spores the nuclei were more difficult to differentiate. In dividing spores two nuclei occurred, or one per cell (Text-fig. 1). 3 Text-figures 1-3. 1. Conidia of Selenophoma donacis from culture, stained with Giemsa, showing one nucleus boa x per spore and two nuclei in dividing spores. Spore ‘‘s’” is similar to pycnidiospores from the field. 1000. 2. Micropycnidiospores of Septoria tritici, stained with Giemsa, showing one linear, slightly “beaded” nucleus per spore. x 2000. 3. Single-celled immature spores of Septoria nodoruwm pressed out of pycnidia, showing one region of nuclear activity per cell: three cells with 5-7 fragments and one cell with a nucleus of two parts. Some nuclei in the more mature 2- and 4-celled spores also showing fragments. Stained with Giemsa. x 2000. Other Genera. Spores of Colletotrichum sp., Gloeosporium sp. and Phyllosticta sp. showed one nucleus per cell, i.e, one nucleus per spore, when stained with Giemsa. Spores of Ascochyta sp. also had one nucleus per cell, or two per spore, and spores of Fusarium sp. had one nucleus per cell, so that the microspores had one per spore, and the macrospores had the same number of nuclei as the number of cells in the spores. Conidia of Neurospora tetrasperma had from several to many (exact number not determined) nuclei per cell, and the mycelium had many approximately round nuclei scattered throughout the cells (Plate vii, 7). DISCUSSION. The Feulgen reaction is specific for desoxyribonucleic acid, and Murray et al. (1950) and Tulasne and Vendreley (1947) stated that the Giemsa stain may also be considered to demonstrate the distribution of DNA (desoxyribonucleic acid). DNA is concentrated in the nucleus and there is little doubt, therefore, that the areas stained in these preparations with Giemsa do represent the nuclei. Some workers have recorded that certain macroconidia contain more than one nucleus per cell, e.g., the conidia of Newrospora crassa, where 1-20 are common (Barratt BY DOROTHY E. SHAW. 127 and Garnjobst, 1949), and in Helminthosporium carbonum, where each cell of the 1- to 9-celled mature conidia contains from 1-8 nuclei (Roane, 1952). The present study has shown, however, that the macro- and micropycnidiospores and conidia of the species of Septoria and Selenophoma examined have one nucleus per cell. From the evidence obtained from the one-celled immature spores of Septoria nodorum, where only one area of nuclear reaction was detected, it would seem that the nuclei in the mature spores are all derived from one nucleus. The nuclei of the spores of S. nodorwm can be resolved into 5—7 fragments. This might be an artefact produced by the methods used, or might truly represent 5-7 chromatinic areas carrying a heavier charge of desoxyribonucleic acid. Darlington and La Cour (1940) pointed out that with Trillium the over-nucleated chromocentres of the resting stage are in fact the under-nucleated differential segments of metaphase—they are the heterochromatic parts of the chromosomes. Hillary (1939), in tests with the Feulgen reaction, using tissue of animals, plants, bacteria and fungi, recorded that with fungi (species of Mucor, Geopyxis and Aleurodiscus) there was in most cases a large nucleus with small chromocentres distributed around the nucleolus and the periphery of the nucleus. As the actual division of the nucleus into two was not observed in S. nodorwm, it is impossible to say whether the 5—7 fragments retain their identity in the actively dividing state, or whether they are of a heterochromatinic nature and are undercharged with DNA when the nucleus divides. Elongated nuclei were usual in these preparations of germ tubes and hyphae. Smith (1923) noted “long torpedo-like” nuclei in some parts of the thallus of Saprolegnia, and Wilson (1937) stated that in the spongy framework of the sporophore of Peziza rutilans were “hyphae taking an unusual straight course with septa at infrequent intervals and long spindle-shaped nuclei pressed in single file against their walls. So peculiar did these nuclei appear that some doubt was felt as to their nature until the Feulgen reaction was carried out, when the chromatin threads were brightly coloured. The elongation of the nuclei does not appear to be caused by the narrowness of the hyphae as is the case in the paraphyses.”’ Smith (1923) considered that the constant upward streaming seemed to cause a tension or strain within the semi-liquid cytoplasm, and the nuclei responded to the strain by becoming elongated. It is considered that the linearity of the nuclei of the microspores of S. tritici is due to the conformation of the microspore. The elongated nuclei in the hyphae and germ tubes might also be caused by the narrowness in relation to the size of the nuclei. When the linear nuclei were first observed, it was thought that the linearity might have been caused by the methods of drying and fixing used, but the condition persisted when the speed of drying was altered by varying the temperature and when fixations were carried out without previous drying. It is also to be noted that rounded nuclei in spores occurred in the same preparations as linear nuclei in hyphae and microspores. Also, in the conidia and hyphae of Neurospora tetrasperma, the nuclei, which are small in relation to the cells containing them, are revealed by using Method 1 to be nearly circular, and are similar in appearance to those figured by Cutter (1946) using a completely different technique. The linear nuclei in the microspores and in many of the hyphae have a “beaded” appearance. These ‘beads’? might represent the fragments seen in some of the nuclei of the spores. The difference in the intensity of stain in the nuclei in germinated and ungerminated spores probably indicates a change in the distribution of the desoxyribonucleic acid as the cell begins to germinate. Stained spores were examined in every stage of germination, and it was noteworthy that no nucleus in the many germinating Septoria spores examined was detected in the act of dividing—the nuclei in young germ tubes all appeared at some little distance from the spore nuclei. The closest observed was in the spore shown in Plate vii, 5, 128 CYTOLOGY OF SEPTORIA AND SELENOPHOMA SPORES, Details of mitosis in dividing spores of Selenophoma could not be determined. The nuclei had an amitotic appearance (Text-fig. 1), but as pointed out by Cutter (1946) for other fungal nuclei, this might be an artefact. In an endeavour to observe the mitotic division, living spores of both Septoria spp. and Selenophoma sp. were kept under continuous observation under phase contrast, but, as already noted, no nucleus could be detected, either in phase or with dark field. This confirms the finding of McMillan and Plunkett (1942), who, using bright and dark field microscope, could find no structure that could be construed as a nucleus. Apparently the R.I. of the nucleus in these spores is so similar to the R.I. of the cytoplasm that it cannot be detected even with phase contrast, or else the cytoplasm is so dense that the nucleus is obscured. 2. Far REACTION. Spores ot Septoria, Selenophoma and Ascochyta from the field and from culture were stained to demonstrate the amount of fat present and its distribution. Spores were allowed to exude from pycnidia into water on clean slides, or secondary spores were added to the water from culture and allowed to air-dry. Spores adhered to the slides during all the subsequent treatments. Fat was stained according to the methods outlined below. METHODS. Method 1. Sudan III. A saturated solution of Sudan III in 70% alcohol and pure acetone (1:1) was prepared, and the spores on the slides treated as follows (after Conn, 1936): (i) Fix in the vapour of formaldehyde for 10 minutes; (ii) stain in Sudan III for 10 minutes (in a sealed dish); (iii) dip for an instant in 65% alcohol; (iv) wash in water; (v) mount in glycerine. Method 2. Sudan IV. A saturated solution was prepared in 70% alcohol and the material treated as in Method 1. Both Sudan III and Sudan IV stained fat a vivid orange. Cotton-blue was sometimes used as a counter stain. Spores were also treated with benzol or ether, either (a) before the above staining treatments, to remove the fat (no fat was detected after the subsequent staining treatments); or (0b) after staining. In this case the stained fat disappeared very slowly. Fat can also be demonstrated in spores by treating with cotton-blue without previous air-drying or staining. Fat globules remain unstained. RESULTS. Filuform Septoria Spores, as Septoria tritici. Usually no large guttulae are visible in unstained spores from the field, and, when viewed at high magnifications, only small guttulae in spores stained with cotton-blue. After staining with Sudan, a fat reaction can be detected by a faint orange “speckled” condition over the spore, and very occasionally in very small globules, often near the septa. In culture many of the species produce conidia directly on the mycelium. The conidia vary in shape from symmetrically filiform to asymmetrically bacillar, with a varying number of septa. When grown on P.D.A. an abundance of fatty material can be detected in most conidia, especially from old cultures. It occurs first as fatty globules strung along the spore, later forming patches or blocks, sometimes nearly occupying the whole spore, which loses its identity. It stains a vivid orange colour with Sudan. When counterstained with cotton-blue lacto-phenol, the orange colour remains undisturbed, as if the whole interior of that portion of the cell were a block of fat. BY DOROTHY EF. SHAW. 129 Cylindrical Septoria Spores, as in S. nodorum, 8. avenae. In the unstained spores from the field, and in spores stained with cotton-blue lacto-phenol, large and small guttulae, sometimes nearly the width of the spore, can easily be detected. They are usually situated at both ends of the cells, i.e., clustered around the septa and at the ends of the spores. Staining with Sudan colours the guttulae a deep red-orange. The rest of the cell remains unstained—no “speckling” occurs as in the filiform spores (Plate vii, 10). These species do not, as far as is known, produce conidia in culture, but occasionally pycnidiospores are produced. When stained with Sudan the spores show fat accumula- tion in all stages, from those with guttulae of various sizes clustered at each end of the cells around the septa, to those where the numbers of guttulae have increased and spread from the ends towards the centre of the cells. At a later stage practically the whole spore, except for the septa and an area about the centre of each cell, is coloured a deep orange. At a high magnification this fat is revealed as masses of rather evenly-sized globules. The free area in the centre is probably that occupied by the nucleus. Ascochyta sp. from Bromus unioloides. Fat distribution in these spores is similiar to that in the cylindrical type of Septoria spore, where guttulae are clearly visible in the unstained and cotton-blue stained spores trom the field. After treatment with Sudan, the guttulae stain a deep orange, with the rest of the spore unstained (Plate vii, 9). Selenophoma sp. No guttulae were visible in the spores of most field collections of Selenophoma, either unstained or stained with cotton-blue. With these spores, either no fat, or a faint “speckline”’’ towards the ends of the spore, was detected with Sudan. As with the filiform type of Septoria species, secondary spores are produced directly on the mycelium in culture. When treated with Sudan, well-formed symmetrical young spores gave no fat reaction. Other spores, older and more asymmetrical, had faint pale orange ‘“speckling’, and some had a few circular globules which gave a deep orange colour. Old and knobbly mycelium from culture was packed with large globules and stained vividly with Sudan. DISCUSSION. These tests show that the amount of fat, judged qualitatively, and its distribution, is different in the two types of Septoria spores as they occur in the field. Spores of Ascochyta sp. from Bromus unioloides gave a reaction for fat similar to the cylindrical type of Septoria spores, and spores of Selenophoma gave a reaction similar to the filiform type of Septoria spores. Under cultural conditions favouring high fat synthesis, additional fatty material is stored in the cells to such an extent that very large globules or whole blocks of fat occur, particularly in the filiform spores. Foster (1949) has pointed out that with fungi, while the major deposits of fat obviously are in vacuole globules, some lipide material undoubtedly does exist in the cyto- plasm proper, and some fatty materials are laid down in the cell wall of fungi. In this latter case the fatty material is sometimes protected. Slight differences were detected in the intensity of the stain in some of the spores, particularly in those of Ascochyta sp. The colour varied from bright orange to deep orange. Sudan is reputed to colour “true fats’ intensely, and cholesterin esters, and cholesterin-fatty acid mixtures less intensely. The slight differences in the intensity of the above preparations could be due to differences in the type of fat present, or to differences in the concentration of the fat in the globules. Acknowledgements. The writer is indebted to Professor W. L. Waterhouse and to various members of the Faculty of Agriculture and School of Botany, Sydney University, for comment and advice, and to Mr. S. Woodward-Smith for some of the photographs. 130 CYTOLOGY OF SEPTORLA AND SELENOPHOMA SPORES. References. ALLISON, J. Lewis, 1945.—Selenophoma bromigena leaf spot on Bromis imermis. Phytopath., 35: 233-240. BarRRATT, R. W., and GARNJoBsT, L., 1949.—Genetiecs of a colonial microconidiating mutant strain of Newrospora crassa. Genetics, 34: 351-369. CHPREWICK, W. J., 1944.—Studies on the biology of Hrysiphe graninis D.C. Canad. Jowr, Reés., 22 (©): 52-86. Conn, H. J., 1936.—Biological Stains. Geneva, U.S.A. Cutter, V. M., 1946.—The chromosomes of Newrospora tetrasperma. Mycol., 38: 693-698. DARLINGTON, C. W., and La Cour, L., 1940.—Nucleic acid starvation of chromosomes in Trillium. Jour. Gen., 40: 185-2138. t ——— , 1947.—The handling of chromosomes. London. 2nd Hdition. Foster, J. W., 1949.—Chemical activities of fungi. New York. HILLARY, B. B., 1939.—Use of the Feulgen reaction in cytology. 1. Mffect of fixative on the reaction. Bot. Gaz., 101: 276-300. KNAYSI, G., HILLIER, J., and FABRICANT, C., 1950.—The cytology of an avian strain of Mycobacterium tuberculosis studied with electron and light microscopes. Jour. Baet., 60: 423-447. MAcNEILL, BLAIR H., 1950.—Studies in Septoria lycopersici Speg. Abstr. Phytopath., 40: 18. McCuintrock, B., 1945.—Neurospora. 1. Preliminary observations of the chromosomes of Neurospora crassa. Amer. Jour. Bot., 32: 671-678. McMILLAN, H. G., and PLUNKETT, O. A., 1942.—Structure and germination of Septoria spores. Jour. Agr. Res., 64; 547-559. Moore, W. C., 1940.—New and interesting plant diseases. Trans. Brit. Mycol. Soc., 24: 345-351. Murray, R. G. E., GILLEN, D. H., and Heaey, F. C., 1950.—Cytological changes in Escherichia coli produced by infection with phage T2. Jowr. Bact., 59: 603-615. RoANE, C. W., 1952.—Nuclear cytology and morphologic variation in Helminthosporium carbonum Ullstrup. Abstr. Phytopath., 42: 480. RoBINow, C. F., 1944.—Cytological observations on Bacterium coli, Proteus vulgaris and various aerobic spore forming bacteria with special reference to the nuclear structures. Jour. Hygiene, 43: 413-423. SHAw, D. E., 1951.—A Septoria disease of Huphorbia peplus L. PRoc. LINN. Soc N.S.W., 76: 7-25. , 1952.—Ropy smut of Liverpool Plains grass. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 142-145. SmitH, FRANcIS E. V., 1923.—On direct nuclear divisions in the vegetative mycelium of Saprolegnia. Anal. Botany, 27: 63-73. SPRAGUE, R., 1984.—A physiologic form of Septoria tritici on oats. Phytopath., 24: 133-148. TULASNE, R., and VENDRELEY, R., 1947.—Demonstration of bacterial nuclei with ribonuclease. Nature, 160: 225-226. VANTERPOOL, T. C., 1947.—Selenophoma linicola sp. nov. on flax in Saskatchewan. Mycol., 39: 341-348. Wiuson, J. M., 1937.—A contribution to the study of the nuclei of Peziza rutilans Fries. Ann. Bot., N.S., 1: 655-672. HXPLANATION OF PLATE VII. 1. Spores of Septoria nodorum stained with Giemsa. The nuclei (one per cell) are vividly Stained, the septations clear, and guttulae are visible in the cells as unstained circular areas. x 1000. 2. Micropyenidiospores and portion of a macropycnidiospore of Septoria tritici stained with cotton-blue lacto-phenol. x 1000. 3. Micropyenidiospores and portions of small macropyenidiospores of Septoria tritici from summer material from the field, stained with Giemsa. Note the linear nucleus in each micro- spore, conforming to the shape of the spore, and the rounded nuclei in the macrospores. The cytoplasm in the ends of the microspores is only faintly stained. x 1000. 4. Filiform spores of Septoria lactwcae stained with Giemsa, showing one nucleus per cell and faint septations. x 1000. ). Germinating spore of Septoria avenae stained with Giemsa, showing germ tubes from three cells. The four nuclei in the spore are vividly stained, the linear nuclei in the germ tubes less intensely stained. Photograph by Woodward-Smith. x 900. 6. Hyphae of Septoria sp. from Anthoxanthum odoratum from culture, stained with Giemsa, showing linear nuclei. Photograph by Woodward-Smith. x 900. 7. Conidia of Neurospora tetrasperma stained with Giemsa, showing many small rounded nuclei per spore, the spore walls being out of focus. Photograph by Woodward-Smith. «x 900. 8. Spores of Selenophoma donacis var. stomaticola from culture, stained with Giemsa, showing one nucleus per spore. x 1000. 9. Spores of Ascochyta sp. from the field, stained with Sudan, showing heavily stained fat globules clustered at each end of the cells. Photographed with a blue filter. x 1000. 10. Spore of Septoria nodorum from the field, stained with Sudan, showing heavily stained fat globules distributed as in the Ascochyta spores. Photographed with a blue filter. x 1000. 131 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II. By N. V. Dosrotworsky, Georgina Sweet Fellow in Economic Entomology, and F. H. DrumMonp, Zoology Department, University of Melbourne. (Five Text-figures. ) [Read 29th July, 1953. Synopsis. The Culex pipiens complex in Australia consists of three forms: C. fatigans, C. pipiens form molestus and C. pipiens australicus, n. subsp. An account is given of their morphological and biological characteristics, their distribution in Australia and. their capacity for inter- ‘breeding. These observations provide the basis for a discussion of the taxonomic status of the three forms. In its morphology and biology the Australian molestus conforms to C. molestus as described by Marshall and Staley. The status of this mosquito remains obscure and until its relationships to C. pipiens and C. fatigans are more definitely established, it should be called C. pipiens form molestus. It is recorded from Victoria and northern Tasmania. C. fatigans is widely distributed in Australia but in southern Victoria it is found regularly only in late summer and autumn. It hybridizes freely with C. pipiens form molestus but no permanent populations of intermediates have been found in Victoria. Interbreeding between ©. fatigans and other members of the C. pipiens complex has been recorded from various parts of the world but the available evidence does not seem to justify the reduction of C. fatigans to the status of a subspecies of C. pipiens. C. pipiens australicus, n. subsp., is also widely distributed in Australia. Morphologically it is distinct from other members of the complex; biologically it is very similar to C. pipiens. It is a rural non-man-biting mosquito which is anautogenous, eurygamous and heterodynamic. It has a limited capacity for interbreeding with C. fatigans and C. pipiens form molestus in the laboratory but in nature is reproductively isolated from both these forms. INTRODUCTION. The problems presented by the Culex pipiens complex (Mattingly et al., 1951) concern the relationships of C. pipiens L., C. fatigans Wied. and C. molestus Forskal. Until recently the status of C. pipiens and C. fatigans as distinct species had not been seriously questioned, but there is now evidence from various parts of the world, and particularly from the United States, that where the two forms occur together, they interbreed with the production of permanent populations of intermediates. Hence it has been claimed that fatigans should be treated as a subspecies of C. pipiens L. It is however, not clear that the mosquito involved in these hybridizations is C. pipiens, s.s.; in some cases.there is no doubt that it is actually C. molestus. C. molestus was described by Forskal in 1778 but subsequently was included in the synonymy of C. pipiens L. In 1937 it was again recognized as a distinct species by Marshall and Staley (1937). Over a period of some years the observations of a number of workers had indicated the existence of two biological races of C. pipiens in Europe. ‘One was a man-biting form which was autogenous, stenogamous and homodynamic; the other was anautogenous, eurygamous and heterodynamic and did not attack man. Marshall and Staley (1937) claimed that the two forms presented constant morphological differences and should be regarded as distinct species. For the autogenous form they revived Forskal’s name C. molestus; the name C. pipiens L. they restricted to the anautogenous one. This conclusion has not been universally accepted; some authors follow Marshall and Staley, but others regard molestus as a subspecies, or merely as a biotype, of C. pipiens. Thus the name pipiens as used by some authors, including nearly all the earlier ones, has a wide meaning, as used by others, a narrow one. In order to avoid confusion we shall use the terms pipiens and molestus in the sense in which they were defined by Marshall and Staley (1937). M 132 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II, The C. pipiens complex in Australia consists of three forms: fatigans, molestus and a third form which, as far as is known, is confined to this country. We regard this form as a new subspecies of C. pipiens L. Prior to its formal description, which cannot appropriately be given until its relationships to the other members of the complex have been discussed, we will refer to it as australicus. A. MorrPHOLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MEMBERS OF THE COMPLEX. a. fatigans. The form fatigans has a world-wide distribution in the tropics and subtropics and is the common domestic Culex over the greater part of Australia. In southern Victoria, however, it seems unable to maintain itself permanently. Drummond (1951) stated that in some years it was rare or absent in Melbourne, but detailed observations during 1951-52 indicate that its disappearance is a seasonal phenomenon. During the autumn of 1951 it was abundant in Melbourne but in the following spring could not be found. It was present in small numbers in January, 1952, at which time the other members of the pipiens group were abundant. It increased steadily during February, and in March the larvae were very numerous in all kinds of artificial water containers. Oviposition continued freely until the end of May and on a small scale for another month. However, most of the larvae emerging from eggs laid late in May and in June died before the end of July. A few pupated during the winter and adults emerged from time to time—one emergence was recorded in late August—but apparently they did not establish themselves. Thus in two successive years fatigans was’abundant during the autumn but rare or absent in the spring. C. fatigans is homodynamic and is said to be incapable of hibernation. We have not found hibernating adults but this is not significant, as we have likewise failed to find hibernating australicus, a form which is certainly able to hibernate. In Melbourne, reproduction in fatigans is brought to an end by winter temperatures and even if the adults emerging in June were able to survive the winter they would not have been fertilized because the low night-temperatures of autumn and early winter would inhibit mating. In the laboratory mating will not occur at temperatures below 20°C. Males would not be expected to survive, since they do not do so even in species which are known to hibernate. Resumption of breeding in the spring would then depend upon the survival of adults emerging from the small winter population of pupae; fatigans would thus be rare or absent during early spring. This difference from molestus, which is also homodynamic, can be attributed to the higher temperature requirements of fatigans. A morphological characteristic of fatigans which requires comment here is the siphon index of the larva. Woodhill and Pasfield (1941) gave the index for Australian fatigans as ranging from 3-4 to 6-5. It seems that their material included larvae of australicus which at that time had not been distinguished from fatigans.* In collections from several localities in Victoria the index for fatigans larvae never exceeded 4:8 (Table 1). ; The number of branches on head-seta f varies from two to six with a mean of five. This is greater than the number given by Hopkins (1936). This seta is of no value in distinguishing fatigans from the other members of the pipiens group in Australia. b. molestus. 2 The form molestus was first recorded from Australia by Drummond (1951). At that time it was known from southern Victoria up to sixty miles north of Melbourne but its range now extends to the northern border of the State (Mildura, Albury), and southwards to Tasmania. Although Mattingly (1951, 1952) has described molestus as an urban mosquito it is not restricted to urban situations in Victoria. Here it is common in rural areas in the vicinity of dwellings. *The larvae of australicus were first recognized as distinct from typical fatigans by Dr. HE. N. Marks in 1942. In correspondence she referred to them as ‘“‘long-siphoned fatigans”. BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 133. Morphologically, Australian molestus is indistinguishable from the European as described by Marshall and Staley (1937). The general colour is pale, the basal tergal bands are not constricted at the sides, and the venter is clothed entirely with pale scales. Some specimens collected in the autumn were darker than usual and had the general colour of pipiens. However, the venter was without dark scales and apart from the darker colour these specimens retained all the characteristics of molestus. In the female the first fork cell is long (Table 2); the ratio of cell to petiole varies from 4-4 to 8-5, with a mean of 5-2. In the male the combined length of the first four segments of the palps is less than the length of the proboscis. The dimensions of the palps correspond closely with those given by Christophers (1951) (Table 3). The hypopygium, which is identical with that of the Huropean molestus, will be discussed later. The larvae also agree with the descriptions given by Marshall and Staley (1935) and Jobling (1938). The siphon index varies from 3:3 to 4:9, with a mean of 4:3. TABLE 1. Siphon Index of fatigans from Victoria. Measurements are Expressed in Microns. | Siphonal Index. Length of Siphon. Locality. | No. | a ery Le Nee es | | F Max. Min. | Mean. Max. Min. | Mean. == | | Merbein—horse trough ye 50 4-6 | 3:5 4-3 1350 1098 | 1224 Merbein—rain-water tank ate 48 4:8 | 4-0 4-4 1384 1206 1296 Merbein—goose pond i 50 4-6 3:6 4-2 | 1332 1026 1206 Culgoa—pool .. Na ae 49 | 4-6 3:7 AOS lb AG | 260) 868 Melbourne a Si | 53 4:8 4-0 4-3 | 1530E> || 1260 =| 1296 | | 250 4°8 B.of5) | 4-2 | 1546 1026 1278 | | C. molestus is a stenogamous mosquito; mating will occur in a space of a few cubic inches. In larger cages males may mate with resting females, but more usually mating is initiated while both sexes are in flight and is completed on the floor of the cage. In nature, swarming of males was often observed. It occurs just after sunset, between buildings or above the surface of water in tanks or butts. The swarms consisted of ten to thirty males. A characteristic which has been regarded as highly distinctive of molestus is its capacity for autogenous reproduction. It is now known that in crosses, autogeny behaves. as a simple mendelian recessive and it seems that the gene in question is not limited to molestus (Laven, 1951); in some populations of molestus it may be rare: in Cairo. Knight and Malek (1951) found that only one to four per cent. of females in wild& populations were autogenous. Our earlier observations had indicated that a high proportion of Australian molestus were autogenous but, as Mattingly has pointed out. such a conclusion could have been influenced by unconscious selection in a laboratory colony. However, in the course of a recent experiment a group of thirty-nine females: reared from a natural population of pupae produced thirty-eight autogenous egg rafts. Further. work on the frequency of autogeny is in progress. Several workers have noted that with molestus the egg rafts laid after a blood meal are generally larger than those produced autogenously. The size of the raft is. also influenced by the size of the mosquitoes. A group of females which, because of an unfavourable larval environment, were below normal size and which were fed on human blood, laid rafts containing 50-60 eggs. On the other hand, autogenous rafts from females of normal size may contain 120-130 eggs. In rafts collected at natural breeding places the number of eggs varied from 30 to 178; in the majority the number was 70-125. The rafts are variable in shape; they may be oval, triangular or elongate. In the laboratory molestus will breed without interruption throughout the year. In colonies maintained in outdoor cages emergences of adults, and egg-laying, continued 134 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II, during June and into the early part of July. In natural breeding places also, egg rafts were plentiful until the end of June and during one mild spell (temperature 14°C.) dancing of males was observed. It was noted, however, that attacks on man ceased about the middle of May. This was perhaps due to low night temperatures; it suggests that during the late autumn molestus maintains itself largely by autogeny. Larvae which hatched from eggs laid in outdoor cages in June passed the winter in the third or fourth stage. The majority of larvae hatching in July died; the survivors reached the third stage in August. Hmergence of adults from these colonies and from exposed natural breeding sites commenced in September but in some sheltered places, such as drainage pits, pupae were present during the winter and emergence was complete by the end of August. There is therefore no hibernation; Australian molestus, like the Huropean, is homodynamic. It is a man-biting mosquito and in Melbourne is a troublesome pest. It enters houses and bites at night. In this respect it is active from October until May. Larval Ecology.—Occasionally, and mainly in the autumn, larvae are found in large pools and swamps but the favoured breeding places throughout the year are artificial containers such as water butts and drainage pits. The larvae are tolerant of foul water. TABLE 2. Ratio of Length of the Upper Fork Cell to Its Petiole in the Female Wing. The Length of the Cell was taken as that of its Lower Branch. Upper Fork Cell/Petiole. | No. | | Max. Min. Mean. | | fatigans | 50 | Boz 2} 65) | Row molestus .. 6 a6 | 50 | 8°5 | 4-4 | 5:2 australicus an ge 50 | 4-1 | 2-6 | Obey c. australicus. This is the mosquito referred to by Drummond (1951) as an undescribed member* of the C. pipiens complex in Australia. Previously it had been confused with fatigans, but, in fact, is more closely allied to pipiens. It has a general dark colour, the basal tergal bands are constricted at the sides and the venter has prominent median and lateral patches of dark scales. It is, therefore, readily distinguished from molestus and, with typical specimens, from fatigans also. With material from any one locality australicus and fatigans can be separated by the differences in colour, but with specimens from different areas separation of females is sometimes impossible. The venational character, the ratio of the first fork cell to its petiole, which is useful for distinguishing fatigans from molestus, is of nq value in separating fatigans and australicus (Table 2). Males, however, can be reliably identified by the palps and the hypopygium. Characteristics of the palps of members of the pipiens complex are shown in Table 3. In both the absolute and relative length of the palpal segments australicus is intermediate between pipiens and fatigans but is closer to pipiens. The distinctive feature of the palps of australicus, as is shown in the table, is the abundance of hairs on the shaft. The distal half is densely clothed with long hairs. In fatigans the hairs are sparse and disposed more towards the tip (Fig. 1). A further distinction, seen in * This is the mosquito which in correspondence has been called “fatigans type B” and — “long-siphoned fatigans”. SS —. |= BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 135 living specimens, is that in fatigans the fourth and fifth segments are held approxi- mately at right angles to the shaft; in australicus the fifth segment is bent backwards (Text-fig. 1). ' The male hypopygium is also intermediate between those of pipiens and fatigans but it is sharply distinct from both (Text-fig. 2). The dorsal processes of the mesosome are directed outwards, are thickened distally and are slightly excavated at the tip. In fatigans these processes are upright, i.e. are almost parallel and are pointed. The ventral processes in dustralicus are leaf-like distally and are thus unlike the narrow sickle-shaped processes of pipiens (and molestus). With regard to North American pipiens, however, the position is not clear. The mesosome of the Baltimore pipiens studied by Sundararaman (1941) and Rozeboom (1951) is distinctly different from that of Huropean pipiens. This is shown by TABLE 3. Characteristics of the Male Palps of Members of the pipiens Complex. Measurements are expressed in Millimetres. Measurements of European pipiens and molestus are taken from Christophers (1951). | | | Number of Hairs on Dimensions and Proportions of Palps. Shaft of Palp. Segments Segments Segs. 1-4/ Proboscis. Number of Specimens. Minimum. Maximum. Mean. Number of Specimens. Length of Proboscis Total. We) (=) bo for) (=>) “42 “13 “95 “00 54 | -40 | -06 | cat jeer bo ey) pipiens (Kurope) | australicus at 2 | 100 fatigans (Victoria) | molestus (Kurope) molestus (Victoria) ae |) LOO | mo eH Ww Bee ee Or (0/0) wWwnmp wo w oOo Oo © © an S i=) NDHNwnwb wv bo bo 0 OO for} bo Phi an wd ye) te re lo oa)! S) (=) -50 | top pw wy wo for) SOOrRR Rozeboom’s illustration (Mattingly et al., 1951, p. 347) and by his statement that it “closely resembles” the mesosome of the type specimen of C. comitatus from California for, according to Egwards (1931) and Freeborn (1926), comitatus is identical with C. pipiens pallens from the Orient. Edwards recognized pallens as a separate sub- species because of its distinctive mesosome. Further evidence that the mesosome of Baltimore pipiens is different from that of the Huropean is given by the data of Sundararaman (1949) and Barr (Rozeboom, 1951) on the DV/D ratio. Both these workers found that the ratio was zero or positive. Christophers (1951) pointed out that in his strains of pipiens and molestus the ratio was negative and this was generally true of the Cairo molestus studied by Knight and Malek (1951), where the ratio varied from minus 0:14 to plus 0:02. There is then reason to doubt Sundararaman’s identification of his material as C. pipiens pipiens.* In respect of the structure of the mesosome, australicus approaches pipiens pallens and the Baltimore pipiens, but it. is distinct from both these forms. Little information is available on pipiens pallens, but the observations of Feng (1938) indicate that it is a typical domestic mosquito. In their biology and morphology pallens and comitatus, in contrast to australicus, are closer to fatigans than to pipiens. It is, indeed, not clear why pallens is not regarded as a subspecies of fatigans rather than of pipiens. australicus and Baltimore pipiens differ in their biology, e.g. Baltimore pipiens will * The position is further complicated by the fact that in specimens of Baltimore pipiens sent to us by Professor Rozeboom the mesosome is identical with that of typical pipiens. The siphon index of larvae varied from 3:9 to 4:7, with a mean of 4:2; these values correspond to those of molestus and fatigans. 136 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II, mate in a space of one cubic foot whereas australicus is eurygamous, and also in the structure of the mesosome. This is evident from a comparison of the published figures of the two forms and from the DV/D ratio. In australicus the ratio is higher and searecely overlaps that of Baltimore pipiens. As is shown below, molestus and fatigans will interbreed readily in the laboratory. The mesosome of the hybrids is intermediate between those of the parent forms; the ventral arms are long and broad; the dorsal arms are sometimes pointed but are PER CENT- EXAMPLES ———. FATIGANS X MOLESTUS F 3 AUSTRALICUS Text-fig. 1.—Structure of the male palp. A. fatigans; B. australicus. Text-fig. 2.—Structure of the male mesosome. A. molestus; B. australicus; C. fatigans. Text-fig. 3.—Distribution of DV/D in australicus and in molestus x fatigans hybrids. usually of uniform thickness with a slight hollowing at the tip. The position of the dorsal arms is very variable; sometimes they are almost parallel, as in fatigans, but generally are directed more or less outwardly towards the tips of the ventral processes. Through the courtesy of Professor Rozeboom we have been able to examine specimens of the “Alabama quinquefasciatus’’. The range of morphological variation of the mesosome seems to be the same as in our molestus x fatigans hybrids. This observation supports the contention of Sundararaman (1949) and Rozeboom (1951) that the “Alabama | quinquefasciatus” is a hybrid between pipiens (or molestus) and fatigans. BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 137 The DV/D ratio of this American form, like that of our laboratory hybrids, is very similar to that of australicus (Text-fig. 3); the mesosome of dustralicus, however, is morphologically distinct. In several morphological characters qaustralicus approaches fatigans; biologically it is almost identical with pipiens. It is anautogenous. It is not a man-biting mosquito; adults caught in houses were never freshly engorged and further, when fed, in the laboratory, on human blood, the egg rafts deposited were only about one-third the size of those found in nature (Table 4). Although chickens and canaries were not attacked in the laboratory, birds are evidently normal hosts. Many adults were caught in a chicken house (chickens and ducks) in Melbourne; ten freshly engorged ones had bird blood in the gut; others laid rafts of normal size (Table 4). Unpublished observations of Mr. D. J. Lee show that australicus also attacks rabbits. TABLE 4. Size of Egg Rafts of australicus. The Measurements were made along the Axes of Greatest Length and Greatest Breadth. | | Size in mm. | Number of Eggs. | Number | of ; | Rafts. Min. Max. Mean. Min. Max. Mean. | From natural breeding | places .. he eon 51 2-9x1-4 5-6xX2-1 4-7x1-4 | 136 503 256 From females caught in | | | chicken house | 18 3:0x1-0 6:5x1-3 4-9x1-4 113 380 247 From females fed on | | human blood a 25 1-6x0-6 3-0x1-2 2-3x1-0 30 TAS) 8 australicus is eurygamous and in the laboratory we have not been able to get it to mate regularly. Mating never oceurred in cages of 2400 cubic inches and only rarely in cages of 40 cubic feet. It was no more frequent when several hundred adults were liberated in a room (500 cubic feet). The temperature was maintained at different levels between 20°C. and 25°C., the humidity and intensity of illumination (white and blue lighting) were varied, but over a period of a fortnight only three females out of a hundred examined were fertilized. Judging from the results of cross breeding experiments between members of the pipiens group, the failure to obtain free mating of australicus is due to a disability of the males rather than of the females. Swarming of males in the field has been observed on many occasions. It occurs shortly after sunset in the vicinity of breeding grounds. Swarms consist of 100-150 males which move rhythmically in a vertical direction some five to six feet above the ground. australicus is heterodynamic. Oviposition seems to cease early in April. Adults collected later in this month refused to feed and could only be induced to do so by exposure to artificial lighting for about ten days. Feeding was followed by oviposition. In the field, neither adults nor larvae were found during the winter. A few advanced larvae were present late in August but the numbers were far too small to account for the abundance of adults in early spring. It appears that some females are active in August but that the majority remain in hibernation until late in September. In Melbourne, australicus continues to breed throughout the summer, but some observations at Mildura suggest that in northern Victoria reproduction is interrupted during mid-summer. In early December australicus was found to be the dominant Culex; adults were abundant in chicken houses and larvae were numerous. In early February it was rare except for first stage larvae. Two months later, in mid-April, all the larvae were at the third and fourth stages; few adults were found in chicken houses; 138 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II, presumably they had entered hibernation. These observations, though limited, suggest that in Mildura, australicus has a peak of abundance in spring and early summer and a second one in early autumn. On the other hand, fatigans, after starting rather later than australicus, breeds continuously throughout the summer and autumn. TABLE 5. Breeding Sites of fatigans and australicus at Merbein. Number 3reeding Sites. of Males fatigans. | australicus. ixamined. | { | Goose pond (foul, muddy | water) .. oe ve 70 97 per cent. 3 per cent. Rain water tanks Ay 56 94 - | 6 Bs Horse trough .. 6 50 | 100 * | 0 ip Marsh io a ee 56 18 $5 82 * Flooded pasture oe 35 5 ap 95 A Larval Ecology.—Larvae of australicus are found in a variety of habitats both urban and rural. They may be present in artificial containers and occasionally in polluted water. The favoured breeding sites, however, are pools, swamps or channels characterized by stationary or slowly moving, clean water. The contrast between australicus and fatigans in relation to breeding sites is shown by observations made at Merbein (Table 5). Table 5 was compiled by counting’ males, identified by their hypopygia, which emerged from collections of larvae from the various sites. It will be seen that fatigans predominated in polluted water and artificial containers; australicus was predominant in natural ground water. TABLE 6. Siphon Index and Length of Siphon of Larvae of australicus from Various Localities. Measurements are in Microns. | Siphon Index. Siphon Length. No. Max. Min. | Mean. Max. | Min. Mean. — | Williamstown .. ae 37 6:4 Hoy | 5-6 1710 | 1386 1512 Gunbower he 2as 19 5:8 4-7 Dito) 1854 1458 1620 Undera me ie 25 , 63 D2 S97 1908 | 1476 1674 Inglewood a fe 25 6:3 Dito 15) 9)5) 1710 | 1350 1530 Melbourne suburbs we 100 | 6-3 4-4 3033 1692 1260 1386 206 | 6-4 4-4 Deo) 1908 1260 1494 australicus is a rural or semi-rural mosquito; in this, as in other important biological characters, it is different from fatigans but similar to pipiens. The larvae of australicus are morphologically similar to those of fatigans and molestus but can be distinguished by the siphon index (Table 6; Text-fig. 4). The average value of the index in the three forms is: australicus, 5:5; fatigans, 4-2; molestus,. 4:3. As can be seen from Text-figure 4, there is only a small overiap between australicus and fatigans. The siphon is slightly curved while in fatigans it is straight (Text-fig. 5). The pupa of australicus can be distinguished from those of molestus and fatigans by the trumpet, which in australicus is almost cylindrical and at least five times as 4 long as its greatest width. The paddle is oval and more narrow than in molestus: 4 or fatigans. BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. j 139 B. CROSS-BREEDING WITHIN THE PIPIENS COMPLEX. a. Laboratory Experiments. For cross-breeding experiments we have used (1) australicus from natural popula- tions in the suburbs of Melbourne; (2) molestus from a laboratory colony established from females caught in Melbourne and maintained autogenously; (3) fatigans from a laboratory colony derived from egg rafts collected at Albury. Examination of male genitalia showed that the laboratory colonies were pure strains. Some additional experiments were made with C. globocoxitus which were obtained from natural popula- tions in Melbourne. All the adult mosquitoes used in these experiments had emerged from pupae reared singly in separate tubes. - Os 30 to fo} PER CENT- EXAMPLES iS) 34 36 386 40 42 44 46 48 50 S52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 6.8 a FATIGANS AUSTRALICUS Text-fig. 4.—Siphon of the fourth-stage larva. A, B. australicus; C, D. fatigans ; E. molestus. Text-fig. 5.—Distribution of the siphon index im fourth-stage larvae of australicus and fatigans. The object of the first experiments was to test the mating preferences among the pipiens compiex. Females of molestus, fatigans and australicus were caged together with either molestus or fatigans males and after twenty-four hours were dissected and their spermathecae examined. For molestus males the cage had a capacity of a thousand cubic inches; for fatigans males it was a cubic foot in size. The temperature was 23°-24°C. These experiments showed that molestus and fatigans males did not distinguish between their respective females (Table 7). Mating with australicus was less frequent. In the two experiments only 20 per cent. of these were fertilized as against 80 per cent. of the other two forms. In another experiment of this kind the fatigans females were replaced by globocoxitus females. A group of sixty females, twenty of each form, were caged with forty molestus 140 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. — II, males for four days at 18°-—20°C. Fertilization occurred in twelve molestus, five australicus and four globocowxitus. The infrequent mating of qaustralicus females with molestus and fatigans males, and this was also observed in direct cross-breeding experiments, may possibly be due to the existence of some mechanical barrier to copulation. However, as will be shown later, globocoxvitus males, whose distinctive genitalia might be expected to prove a bar to mating with members of the pipiens complex, mate freely with molestus and fatigans. A more probable explanation lies in the fact that australicus is eurygamous whereas the others are stenogamous. TABLE 7. Preferential Mating within the pipiens Complea. | Number of Females Fertilized. | | Males. No. molestus. fatigans. australicus. molestus a 15 17/20 12/20 3/20 fatigans Me 15 16/20 18/20 5/20 In the laboratory, Melbourne molestus interbreeds readily with fatigans from Melbourne and Albury. Crossing is obtained with either sex and the Fl are vigorous and fertile. australicus, however, does not readily interbreed with either molestus or fatigans. Experiments using australicus females were invariably unsuccessful. In one series, in which a total of 101 females were caged with molestus males, 18 egg rafts were obtained but no eggs hatched. In these experiments no check was made to see if the females TABLE 8. Results of Crossing australicus Females with molestus and fatigans Males. australicus (38) australicus (30) x x molestus (60) fatigans (50) Not Not Fertilized. Fertilized. Fertilized. Fertilized. Refused to feed Sis 1 1 2 9 Fed : E Eggs not laid .. 2 19 1 13 Rafts laid Be 11 3 4 1 Eggs hatched .. 0 0) OF 0 laying the egg rafts had been fertilized. In a later experiment each female, after laying, or after death if no eggs were laid, was dissected and the spermatheca examined. Thirty-eight australicus females were caged with 60 molestus males for two days. After a blood meal the females were placed separately in tubes with water for oviposition. It will be seen from Table 8 that 11 of the 14 females which deposited eggs had been fertilized. None of the eggs hatched. Similar results were obtained in crosses between female australicus and male fatigans (Table 8). Four egg rafts were obtained from fertilized females, but again none hatched. Reciprocal matings were not often successful because, as pointed out above, australicus males rarely mate in the laboratory. Only a few molestus and fatigans BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 141 females were fertilized even when caged with large numbers of australicus males for periods of two to three weeks. However, in contrast to the previous experiments, all the egg rafts deposited were fertile to some degree. In molestus « australicus crosses the hatch in different rafts varied from 21 per cent. to 95 per cent.; in fatigans » australicus crosses, hatching averaged about 80 per cent. In both crosses the F1 larvae appeared to develop normally but there was a heavy mortality in the pupal stage. ‘The viability of the F2 eggs was low; there was never more than a 50 per cent. hatch. Thus crosses between female australicus and male molestus or fatigans were sterile but the reciprocal crosses were fertile. This phenomenon has been observed in various species and subspecies of Aédes (Woodhill, 1949, 1950; Perry, 1950; Downs and Baker, 1949) and also between different races of molestus (Laven, 1951q@). It is clear that in the laboratory the three Australian members of the pipiens complex can interbreed. As far as australicus is concerned this conclusion probably has little relevance to conditions in nature. In the laboratory, even when no choice was possible, australicus mated only infrequently with molestus and fatigans, and when these matings yielded fertile eggs there was a heavy mortality of the Fl pupae. These TABLE 9. Composition of Natural Populations of the pipiens Complex in Melbourne. australicus. | molestus. fatigans. Hybrids. February a Ke 62 19 17 2 May 8 20 42 30 facts, coupled with the differences in larval ecology and mating behaviour between australicus on the one hand and molestus and fatigans on the other, suggest that interbreeding between these forms would ‘occur rarely, if at all, under natural conditions and that no permanent population of intermediates would be established. With molestus and fatigans the situation is entirely different. These two forms exhibit no preferential mating, crosses between them are fully fertile, and the hybrids are vigorous and themselves fully fertile. The two forms have essentially the same larval ecology and mating habits. One would anticipate that molestus and fatigans would interbreed freely in nature. bo. Field Observations. Drummond (1951) noted the occurrence of intermediate forms in Melbourne and suggested that molestus and fatigans were interbreeding. Supporting evidence has come from observations on the mosquito population of a water butt at the Zoology Department. Two large samples of late larvae and pupae were taken, one in February and one in May. From each sample 100 males were reared and.classified on their hypopygia (Table 9). Both australicus and molestus had been established in the water butt for several months prior to taking the first sample, but fatigans which, as stated earlier, is common in Melbourne only during late summer and autumn, was a recent arrival. Only two of the, hundred males of the February sample were hybrids. By the end of May, however, the australicus population had declined, fatigans had become numerous and there were 30 hybrids. Hybrids obtained in the laboratory between. members of the pipiens complex are very similar morphologically and caution must be exercised when assigning the parentage of natural hybrids. However, of the 32 hybrids recorded above, 30 fell within the range of variation found in molestus x fatigans laboratory hybrids. The remaining two were different but were also different from any of the australicus x molestus or australicus x fatigans laboratory hybrids. Their origin remains in doubt. 142 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. ITI, Apart from these two specimens we have found no others which could be regarded as australicus x molestus hybrids, although the two forms are found breeding in close proximity to one another over a wide area in southern Victoria. Melbourne does not provide adequate material for investigating natural hybridization between australicus and fatigans. fatigans does not become numerous until autumn, by which time australicus is declining. However, in northern Victoria the two forms are found together for a large part of the year. Of 300 males of the pipiens complex collected at several localities at Merbein, and classified on their hypopygia, 207 were definitely fatigans and 92 definitely auwstralicus. The remaining specimen was possibly a. hybrid. . Our general conclusion from these laboratory and field observations is that australicus is reproductively isolated from both molestus and fatigans but that the two latter forms interbreed where they come into contact. A permanent population of intermediates has not been found in Melbourne but may become established in the: northern part of the State. As already indicated, C. globocoxzitus, the fourth member of the pipiens group in Australia, will interbreed freely in the laboratory with both molestus and fatigans. The crosses were fully fertile and the larvae developed normally to give a fertile Fl. In crosses with australicus no adult hybrids were obtained. About 80 per cent. of the: eges hatched but the larvae failed to develop. Crossing between globocoxitus and molestus occurs occasionally in nature. Three: specimens have been collected in suburbs of Melbourne which are indistinguishable from. laboratory hybrids between these forms. C. TAxonomMic STATUS OF THE MEMBERS OF THE C. PIPIENS COMPLEX. a. molestus. The discussion on the C. pipiens complex (Mattingly et al., 1951) revealed a wide: divergence of opinion on the status of molestus. Christophers and Shute believe that the morphological and biological differences between pipiens and molestus warrant both being regarded as distinct species. On the other hand, Laven and Mattingly were of the opinion that “in the pipiens-molestus complex we are faced with an assemblage of diverse genetical potentialities, the expression of which is conditioned by the selective- action of the environmeut rather than by any limitation to cross breeding”. The gene concerned with autogeny is not restricted to molestus and is not necessarily of high frequency in all molestus populations. Similarly the other biological charac-- teristics of molestus are not necessarily associated; there are forms known which are- eurygamous and man-biting, stenogamous and non-man-biting. For these reasons. Mattingly (1951, 1951a) concluded that the occurrence of “typical” molestus is a local phenomenon, and, since it had been recorded mainly in large cities, he suggested that it. should be considered an urban biotype and called, if a name were necessary, form. molestus. In Australia the range of molestus extends from the south coast of Victoria and_ northern Tasmania to Mildura, some 400 miles to the north. Throughout this range the’ combination of characters which typify molestus are preserved. It appears, therefore, that either the environmental differences within this area are too small to have any appreciable selective action or we are dealing with a pure molestus stock. All our: observations indicate that in south-eastern Australia we have a mosquito which presents: constantly the morphological and biological characters of molestus as defined by Marshall and Staley. We cannot accept Mattingly’s contention that molestus is a strictly urban biotype.. In Australia it is associated with dwellings, but it breeds in water butts, ditches and. drainage pits, and in such situations larvae are found in rural areas. Our conclusion is that molestus should be distinguished from pipiens and called: C. pipiens L. form molestus, using the term “form” as it is used by Knight and Malek. (1951) to indicate that its relationship to other members of the complex has yet to be: | | BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 143 eletermined. As Mattingly (1951a@) has pointed out, future work may show that molestus has its closest affinities with fatigans rather than pipiens. b. fatigans. The status of fatigans as a species has been questioned because of its ability to interbreed with other members of the pipiens complex. However, the statement in several recent publications that it interbreeds with pipiens requires qualification. In laboratory crosses Weyer (1936) found that molestus and fatigans were inter- fertile but that when pipiens and fatigans were crossed no eggs were produced. In similar experiments Roubaud (1941) obtained eggs from both crosses, but those resulting from pipiens x fatigans matings yielded no fertile hybrids. Farid (1949), Sundararaman (1949) and Rozeboom (1951) have reported complete interfertility in crosses between laboratory strains of pipiens and fatigans but, as pointed out above, their pipiens was not typical. The position seems to be that fatigans will not interbreed with pipiens but will interbreed freely with molestus and with a North American form of pipiens which may itself be a hybrid. Until the status of these latter forms has been determined, it is premature to treat C. fatigans as a subspecies of C. pipiens. c. australicus. This is primarily a rural mosquito. It is widely distributed in Australia but, as far as is known, does not occur elsewhere. This suggests that it is a relatively ancient member of the Australian fauna. The other two members of the pipiens complex appear to be recent introductions. Mackerras (1950) suggests that fatigans was brought in by the early white settlers; molestus has been found here only during the last ten years. australicus has thus been isolated for a long period from other members of the complex and, as shown by laboratory and field observations, is reproductively isolated from molestus and fatigans. In Victoria it exists side by side with molestus without the production of an intermediate population; in New South Wales, Queensland and Western Australia it is in contact with fatigans but the two forms remain distinct. Whether australicus and pipiens would be interfertile is not known; there would be no ethological barrier to mating. If fatigans and molestus were definitely accepted as subspecies of C. pipiens, daustralicus could be regarded as a distinct species. As Mayr (1942, p. 179) has written, “owing to range expansion two formerly allopatric forms begin to overlap and to prove thereby to be good species. If no overlap existed and if we had to classify these forms merely on the basis of their morpohological distinctness, we would probably decide, in most cases, that they were subspecies. But overlap without interbreeding shows that they have attained species rank.” The status of molestus and fatigans, however, is not settled, and to describe australicus as a distinct species would ignore its very close relationship to pipiens. The status of australicus should be determined by this relation- ship rather than by reference to molestus and fatigans. Within the pipiens complex there seem to be two major evolutionary lines: one, represented by molestus and fatigans, leading to domestic, stenogamous, man-biting and homodynamic mosquitoes, the other, represented by pipiens and daustralicus, leading to rural, non-man-biting, eurygamous and heterodynamic mosquitoes. The two lines tend to be isolated ethologically; genetic isolation between them seems to have been largely achieved except as between molestus and pipiens. For these reasons we propose to describe australicus as a new subspecies of Culex pipiens L. A formal description is given below. CULEX PIPIENS AUSTRALICUS, n. subsp. Adult. The male differs from CC. pipiens L. as follows. The general colour is darker, almost black. The upper surfaces of the proboscis, palps and legs, the tergites and the median and lateral patches on the sternites are black-scaled. The shaft of the palp is more hairy than in C. pipiens L. The pleurae, in addition to the usual patches of white scales, 144 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II, have a few post-spiracular scales. The dorsal processes of the mesosome are transparent and are directed outwards. They are thickened distally and slightly excavated at the tip. The ventral processes are long and leaf-like distally. Wing length: 4:0 mm. Specimens from Victoria show little variation in colour, but those from New South Wales, Queensland and Western Australia are lighter. There are no significant variations in the structure of the mesosome. The setae on the ninth tergite vary in number from five to fifteen, with an average of eight. The post-spiracular scales are sometimes absent. The female differs from the male as follows. The pale basal bands on the second to sixth tergites are constricted laterally and on the second to fifth tergites are separated from the white lateral spots. The eighth tergite is pale except for some black scales apically. As in the male, the venter is white scaled with conspicuous median and lateral patches of black scales. Wing length: 4:9 mm. The upper fork cell is 3:3 times the length of its stem. Females show the following variations. A separation of the tergal bands from the lateral spots may be restricted to the second to fourth tergites or may be extended to the sixth. The black patches on the venter are sometimes reduced to a few black scales. Specimens from New South Wales, Queensland and Western Australia, like the males from these areas, are lighter in colour and the patches on the sternites are often inconspicuous. These specimens may be indistinguishable from C: fatigans. Types.—The holotype male and allotype female from Melbourne, a paratype series from the suburbs of Melbourne and from Merbein are in the collections of the National Museum, Melbourne. Larva. The fourth stage larva differs from that of C. pipiens L. as follows. The frontal hairs: the outer has 7-10 branches, the mid 4—5, the inner 4-7. The mental plate has a large central tooth and 8-9 lateral teeth. The siphonal tufts: the first has 4-8 hairs; the second, 3-8; the third, 3-6; the fourth, 2-3. Pecten teeth: 9-13. Comb scales: 31-40. The siphon index varies from 4:4 to 6-4 with a mean ot 5:5. Pupa. The setae are similar to those of C. pipiens L. The paddle is oval; the ratio of breadth to length is about 0:65. The trumpet is almost cylindrical and is at least five times as long as its greatest breadth. The opening is one-third of the length of the trumpet. Distribution.—In addition to the type series, specimens have been examined from various parts of Victoria and from Tasmania: Launceston, 20, 29.3.52; Bothell, 10, 30.38.52. N.S.W.: Coolatai, 1¢, 5.1.44; Terry Hie Hie, 1, 31.9.51 (A. L. Dyce). Western Australia: Marble Bar, 1¢, Aug. 44; Midiand Junction, 1¢ and 19, 3.5.44. Queensland: Coolangatta, 1, 27.11.48; Bundaberg, 1¢ and 19, 3.10.45; Moolyamba, 20, 2.5.48, 29, 9.5.48; Gin Gin, 1g and 19, 4.10.45 (J. L. Wassell) ; Ashgrove, 14, 26.2.47 (EH. V. Grable) ; Wowan, 1¢ and 19, 28.10.45 (M. P. Lawton); Cloy Field, 1¢ and 19, 14.7.48 (L. Angus) ; Samford, 40, 13.9.48, 19, 26.7.44 (H. Marks) ; Sat 19, 24.9.44; Mitchell, 19, 2.11.44. South Australia: Upper South-east, 3¢ and 19, ’ Key to the Culex pipiens group in Australia. Males. 1. Coxites broad, swollen. Palpi short, longer than proboscis by only half the length of the FEV) eantsts}=9 001 2) ol Pee eee eae inion, isi ReM eae Pea eee wlan AS elohon ol cunimns NG. Sudvo corre o Old globocoxitus CORE: MALKOW)) 25 24555 Ses slike Aopen Gaeta eo certo eee SL a Ee IE ERECT Se oe neice PoC ae Re eR oe 2 2. Length of first four segments of palp not exceeding length of proboscis. Shaft with 12-21 Io ol =e) a: 0c, aa a ec eee ene ge ee enc Oh eed le aetna e Shed A eios a B.A copia a ciblu,G:6-0'0.0:8-0,0/0 molestus Hirst rouresesments excecdmlenethwor spLODOSCISHe nn rnin entice riers 3 do. Fifth segment of palp directed backwards. Shaft with dense long hairs. Venter with conspicuous median and lateral patches of black scales ..............+-+45. australicus Fifth segment directed upwards. Shaft with only 6-14 long hairs. Spots on venter InNCONSpPICUOUS Or’ ASEM ie AoA A eee ee tens ee AIA ee rae ere ce fatigans i BY N. V. DOBROTWORSKY AND F. H. DRUMMOND. 145 Females. 1. Basal tergal bands not constricted Deen tenet ete eet ett nett eens 2 Basal tergal bands constricted and separated from lateral spots at least on tergites 2-5 .. 3 2. Tergites almost black with broad creamy basal bands. Ventral side of proboscis with pale scales over entire length. Venter with or without median and lateral patches Or GAM SGAIES coccosccoosodconosov Nooo Do DGU UO UDUO DODD OOOO DIIbaD DOW OOME globocoxitus Tergites brown, bands pale. Ventral surface of proboscis with dark scales at tip. Venter Emitiralhy WANG soocdocvaccoconcssdcndoouvens bocce boausoLaDUOdOHU DOO U DDO DODGOC molestus 8. Dark. Venter with median and lateral patches of dark scales ................. australicus Lighter. Patches on venter usually absent, rarely conspicuous ................... fatigans CONCLUSIONS. 1. The OC. pipiens complex in Australia consists of three forms: C. fatigans, C. pipiens form molestus, and C. pipiens australicus, n. subsp. 2. CO. fatigans is widely distributed in Australia but is not permanently established in southern Victoria. Here it can be found regularly only during late summer and autumn. On the evidence available at present C. fatigans should be regarded as specifically distinct from C. pipiens. 3. In morphology and biology the Australian molestus contorms to C. molestus as described by Marshall and Staley. In view of its uncertain taxonomic position this mosquito should be called C. pipiens form molestus. It occurs in Victoria and Tasmania. 4. GO. pipiens australicus, n. subsp., is widely distributed in Australia. Morpho- logically it is distinct from other members of the pipiens complex; biologically it is very similar to C. pipiens pipiens. It is a rural non-man-biting mosquito which is anautogenous, eurygamous and heterodynamic. 5. O. fatigans and C. pipiens form molestus interbreed freely in the laboratory and in the field, but no permanent population of intermediates has been found in Victoria. 6. CO. pipiens australicus, n. subsp., has a limited capacity for interbreeding with C. fatigans and C. pipiens form molestus in the laboratory but in nature is reproductively isolated from both these forms. Acknowledgements. For the gift, or loan, of material and for much valuable advice we wish to thank Mr. D. J. Lee, University of Sydney; Dr. HE. N. Marks, University of Queensland; Mr. P. F. Mattingly, British Museum (N.H.), London; Professor Lloyd EH. Rozeboom, Johns Hopkins University, U.S.A.; and Mr. F. N. Ratcliffe, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra. We are further indebted to Mr. Lee for permission to refer to his unpublished observations. References. CHRISTOPHERS, S. R., 1951.—See Maitingly et al., 1951. DoBRoTWORSKY, N. V., 1953.—The Culex pipiens Group in South-eastern Australia. I. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 357-360. Downs, W. G., and Baker, R. H., 1949.—Experiments in Crossing Aédes (Stegomyia) aegypti L. and Aédes (Stegomyia) albopictws Skuse. Science, 109: 200-201. DRUMMOND, F. H., 1951.—See Mattingly et al., 1951. Epwarps, F. W., 1921.—A Revision of the Mosquitoes of the Palaearctic Region. Bull. Ent. Res., 12: 263-351. Farip, M. A., 1949.—Relationships between certain Populations of Culex pipiens Linnaeus and Culex quinquefasciatus Say in the United States. Amer. J. Hyg., 49: 83-100. Fence, L. C., 1938.—A Critical Review of Literature regarding the Records of Mosquitoes in China. Part II. Subfamily Culicinae, Tribes Megarhinini and Culicini. Peking Nat. Hist. Bull., 12: 282-318. FREEBORN, S. B., 1926.—The Mosquitoes of California. Univ. Calif. Publ. Ent., 3: 333-460. HopxKIns, G. H. E., 1936.—Mosquitoes of the Ethiopian Region. Part 1. Larval Bionomics of Mosquitoes and Taxonomy of Culicine Larvae. British Museum (N.H.). JOBLING, B., 1938.—On two Subspecies of Culex pipiens L. (Diptera). Trans. R. Ent. Soc. Lond., 87: 193-2i6¢. KNIGHT, K. L., 1951.—See Mattingly eft ai., 1951. KniecHt, K. L., and Matex, A. A., 1951.—A Morphological and Biological Study of Culex pipiens in the Cairo Area of Egypt. Bull. Soc. Fouad Ter Hnt., 35: 175-185. Laven, H., 1951.—See Mattingly et al., 1951. , 1951a.—Crossing Experiments with Culex Strains. Hvolution, 5: 370-375. 146 THE CULEX PIPIENS GROUP IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA. II. MACKERRAS, I. M., 1950.—The Zoogeography of the Diptera. Aust. J. Sci., 12: 157-161. MARSHALL, J. F., and Stauey, J., 1985.—Some Adult and Larval Characteristics of a British “autogenous” strain of Culex pipiens L. Parasitology, 27: 501-506. —__—, 1937.—Some Notes Regarding the Morphological and Biological Differentiation of Culex pipiens L. and Clulex molestus Forskal (Diptera, Culicidae). Proc. R. Ent. Soc. Lond., (A), 12: 17-26. MATTINGLY, P. F., RozpBpoom, Lioryp E., KNIGHT, K. L., LAvEN, H., DrRumMoNnpD, F. H., CHRISTOPHERS, S. R., and SHuTE, P. G., 1951.—The Culex pipiens Complex. Trans. R. Ent. Soc. Lond., 102: 331-382. MarrineLy, P. F., 1952.—The Problem of Biological Races in the Culex pipiens Complex. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., 163: 53-55. Mayr, E., 1942.—Systematics and the Origin of Species. Columbia University Press. 334 pp. Perry, W. J., 1950.—Biological and Crossbreeding Studies on Aédes hebrideus and Aédes pernotatus. Ann. Hnt. Soc. America, 43: 123-136. Rovupaupb, E., 1941.—Phenomenes d’amixie dans les intercroisements de Culicides du groupe pipiens. C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris., 212: 257-259. RozEBOoM, Luoyp H., 1951.—See Mattingly et al., 1951. SUNDARARAMAN, S., 1949.—Biometrical Studies on Integration in the Genitalia of certain Populations of Culex pipiens and Culex quinquefasciatus in the United States. Amer. J. Hyg., 50: 307-314. Weryer, F., 1936.—Kreuzungsversuche bei Steckmucken (Culex pipiens und Culex fatigans). Arb. physiol. angew. Hnt., 3: 202-208. WoopHILL, A. R., 1949.—A Note on experimental Crossing of Aédes (Stegomyia) scutellaris scutellaris Walk. and Aédes (Stegomyia) scutellaris katherinensis Woodh. (Diptera, Culicidae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 74: 224-226. , 1950.—Further Notes on experimental Crossing within the Aédes scutellaris group of species (Diptera, Culicidae). Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 75: 251-253. —-———, and PASFIELD, G., 1941.—An Illustrated Key to some common Australian Culicine Mosquito Larvae, with notes on the Morphology and Breeding Places. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 66; 201-222. 147 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES. XII. SPECIALIZATION WITHIN UROMYCES STRIATUS SCHROET. ON TRIGONELLA SUAVISSIMA LINDL. AND MEDICAGO SATIVA L. By W. L. WATERHOUSE, The University of Sydney. (Plate viii.) [Read 26th August, 1953.] Synopsis. Uromyces striatus Schroet. on Trigonella suavissima Lindl. in western New South Wales -was found to attack lucerne (Medicago sativa L.). Comparisons of the reactions of several species of Trigonella from overseas with those of numerous species of Medicago show that the two rusts represent distinct physiologic races. There is evidence that they are also different from the U.S.A. rust. In many cases individual plant progenies of a species gave quite different results. All four groups of the possible combinations of resistance and susceptibility to the two races were found. No correlation was found between these groups and the recognized botanical groups of these species. A striking case of variegation in a plant of M. hispida Gaertn. occurred, and the progeny of one of the shoots yielded albinotic seedlings. INTRODUCTION. In 1939 a collection of Trigonella suavissima Lindl. at the flowering stage was forwarded from Lake Menindie, N.S.W., for examination because of heavy rust attack on leaves and stems. A similar submission was made in 1950. Determinations showed that the rust conformed to the description of Uromyces striatus Schroet. A culture was maintained first on the original host plants which had been sent in the growing condition, and later on seedlings of 7. suavissima in pots, in order that the host range might be studied. SPECIALIZATION STUDIES. Uredospores transferred to lucerne (Medicago sativa L.) growing in pots gave full infections, and from these, transfers back to the Trigonella were made. The susceptibility of lucerne was unexpected. Because of the importance of lucerne as a crop and pasture plant, and of the medics in pastures, it is important to know the host ranges of pathogens that attack them. For comparative studies, a culture of lucerne rust from an infected crop at Lismore, N.S.W., was maintained on lucerne in a different plant house. For these preliminary studies, seed of Trigonella spp. from overseas was used, together with a quantity of host material of Medicago spp. that was kindly made available by Mr. F. W. Hely, of the C.S.I.R.O. Over a period of years he has studied an extensive collection obtained from world sources, sorting out variants, and making many single plant selections. All the seed used came from single plants he had saved. In no case was there any evidence of heterogeneity in the rust reactions shown. Seed was scarified with sandpaper, germinated between blotting paper, and then transferred to pots, and kept in the plant house until the seedlings had reached the inoculation stage. The leaves were atomized with water, uredospores transferred to the wetted leaves, and the pots then kept in a saturated atmosphere for 36—48 hours, after which they were placed on the plant house benches. Rust development was at its best after about three weeks, but weather conditions caused variations in this time. In both rusts there was a noticeable slowing-down of rust development in the winter, but comparisons between summer and winter readings showed no differences in the type of susceptible or resistant reactions that developed. N 148 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES. XII, For recording the results it was not necessary to adopt any elaborate scheme, as for example that which is generally used for the cereal rusts (Stakman and Levine, 1922).* Nothing of the “mesothetic” type was found. Three types were recognized: (i) immunity, as shown by absence of any effect of inoculation; (ii) resistance, as shown by production of “flecks” or small pustules borne on necrotic areas; and (iii) susceptibility, as shown by production of normal pustules without any killing action upon the host (Plate viii). In the classifications that follow, (i) and (ii) are grouped together as “resistance”. In Table 1 are given the results when the two rusts were used to inoculate available species of Trigonella. TABLE 1, Comparison of Reactions shown on Seedlings of Trigonella spp. by the Rusts from T. suavissima and Medicago sativa. | Reaction to Rust from Host. Source. T. suavissima. M. sativa. T. suavissima .. | Lake Menindie, N.S.W. Susceptible. Susceptible. T. corniculata .. | Italy. Resistant. Resistant. T. arabica NT .. | Israel. Resistant. Resistant. T. spicata an .. | Armenia, U.S.S.R. Resistant. Resistant. ‘T. noeana As .. | Iran. Resistant. Susceptible and Resistant. The material received direct from Iran in 1951 was in the pod. Seeds were shelled from selected pods so there is little likelihood that extraneous seed was included in the sowing. There has not been time to pure-line plants showing each rust reaction for further tests. This Trigonella result is not unlike that of many of the Medicago spp., where single plant progenies of a particular species give very diverse rust reactions, showing that genetic variation within the species is common. The other three overseas species were kindly supplied by Mr. W. Hartley, of C.S.1.R.0. The results of inoculating the available species of Medicago with the two rusts are set out in Table 2. These results may be grouped as follows, the number in the brackets representing the number of plant progenies involved: Rust Group 1. Susceptible to Both Rusts. M. arabica (1), M. orbicularis (8), M. ciliaris (1), M. littoralis (1), M. gaetula (1), M. soleiroleii (1), M. rugosa (1). Rust Group 2. Susceptible to Trigonella but Resistant to Lucerne Rust. M. tuberculata (2), M. turbinata (8), M. minima (2), M. tribuloides (2), M orbicularis (1), M. rigidula (2), M. scutellata (2). Rust Group 3. Resistant to Trigonella but Susceptible to Lucerne Rust. M. arabica (1), M. tribuloides (1), M. orbicularis (1), M. intertexta (1), M. rigidula (1), M. laciniata (1), M. coronata (1), M. littoralis (1). Rust Group 4. Resistant to Both Rusts. M. tuberculata (2), M. hispida (8), M. tribuloides (1), M. obscura (1), M. rigidula (1), M. lupulina (1). It is clear that the two rusts represent distinct physiologic races. 8.52 . 9.52 - 9.52 24.10.52 24.10.52 24.10.52 31.10.52 14.11.52 12.11.52 18.11.52 18.11.52 8.12.52 8.12.52 8.12.52 8.12.52 17.12.52 4, 15. 3.53 5.53 Pycnidiospores. Collector. Host. Locality. Pycnidia. F. C D.S. Stipa aristiglumis. Piallaway, N.S.W. — 12-20 | 12-20 D.S. Phleum pratense. Kosciusko, N.S.W. 40-100 10-14 | 12-16 DS. ** Poa caespitosa.” Kosciusko, N.S.W. 60— 90 12-16 — D.S. Agropyron scabrum. Kosciusko, N.S.W. 80-100 14-20 — D.S. Danthonia penicillata. | Kosciusko, N.S.W. 50— 70 12-16 8-14 G. Wade. ** Poa caespitosa.”’ Cressy, Tas. 60-— 80 16-18 — T. W. Atkinson. | Festuca elatior. Glen Innes, N.S.W. — 12-20 = A. B. Costin. ** Poa caespitosa.”’ Kosciusko, N.S.W. 50-— 90 10-20 — I. A. Watson. Stipa sp. Tichborne, N.S.W. 70— 90 10-14 | 12-16 A. T. Pugsley. Triticum vulgare, | Adelaide, S.A. — 12-18 9-16- ** Scimitar ’’. I. A. Watson Amphibromus Neesii. | Tichborne, N.S.W. 50- 90 10-16 | 10-16. D.S Vulpia Myuros. Temora, N.S.W. 60- 80 8-12 | 10-16 D.S. Danthonia caespitosa. | Temora, N.S.W. 50- 80 12-18 | 10-18 J. Begg. Dactylis glomerata. Canberra, A.C.T. 60-100 12-16 | 10-20 E. J. Breakwell. | ‘‘ Poa caespitosa.”’ Canberra, A.C.T. 60-120 12-14 | 12-16 P. G. Valder. Stipa aristiglumis. Gunnedah, N.S.W. — 14-20 — DS. Anisopogon | Oatley Park, N.S.W. 50- 90 10-16 | 10-16 avenaceus. D.S. ** Poa caespitosa.”’ Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 60- 90 12-16 | 10-20 D.S. Agropyron scabrum. Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 80-100 12-16 = DS. Danthonia sp. Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 50-80 12-16 | 10-16 DS. Amphibromus Neesii. | Sullivan’sCk., A.C.T. 60— 90 12-16 | 14-20: R. A. Perry. Neurachne Muelleri. | Gallipoli Station, 60— 90 10-14 == N.Territ. D.S. Phleum pratense. Kosciusko, N.S.W. 80-120 12-16 | 12-18. D.S. Aristida vagans. National Park, — — 14-16 N.S.W. DS. Aristida vagans. Mary’s Mount, | 100-120 14-16 — N.S.W. D.S. Agropyron - wheat | Botanic Gardens,} 75-120 10-14 | 10-18 hybrid. N.S.W. EK. G. Wingrave. | Dactylis glomerata. Huonville, Tas. —_— — 10-18. F. Robertson. Microlaena stipoides. | Sublime Point, — — 10-14 N.S.W. F. Robertson. Dichelachne rara. Sublime Point, 70-100 10-16 | 10-16 N.S.W. D.S Danthonia caespitosa. | Temora, N.S.W. 60-— 80 12-16 | 13-18 D.S Amphibromus Neesii. | Temora, N.S.W. 40-— 90 14-16 | 10-16. D.S Stipa variabilis. Temora, N.S.W. 60— 90 12-18 — D.S Anisopogon | Kellyville, N.S.W. 60— 80 10-16 —_ avenaceus. D.S. Microlaena stipoides. | Mt. Tomah, N.S.W. 60-100 10-14 | 10-17 D.S. Dactylis glomerata. Orange, N.S.W. 70— 90 12-14 | 10-20 G. Sullivan. Microlaena stipoides. | Bilpin, N.S.W. 75-100 10-14 | 10-20 G. Sullivan. Danthonia racemosa. | Meadow Flat,N.S.W.| 50- 90 14 — G. Sullivan. Amphibromus Neesii. | Sullivan’s Ck., A.C.T.| 50- 60 12-16 | 16-20 G. Sullivan Agropyron scabrum. Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 60— 80 14-18 | 10-20 G. Sullivan ** Poa caespitosa.”’ Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 50— 60 12-16 | 10-15 G. Sullivan Deyeuxia monticola | Mt. Ainslie, A.C.T. 50-100 14-20 | 16-23 var. valida. G. Sullivan Danthonia pallida. Gunning, N.S.W. 50- 95 13-20 | 14-20 DS. Sporobolus capensis. | Cronulla, N.S.W. 50— 95 — 14-18 D.S Sporobolus elongatus. | Camden Park, 50- 70 12-15 | 12-16 N.S.W. 156 THE GENUS SELENOPHOMA ON GRAMINEAE IN AUSTRALIA, Spores were uninucleate (Plate ix, 4), or binucleate in dividing spores produced in culture (Shaw, 1958). Cultures from all isolates were at first mucous, pale cream to faint pink, and produced masses of conidia directly on the mycelium. Old cultures became leathery or carbonaceous, and the texture varied considerably. They were variously coloured, but were mainly black with yellow or pink, with or without yellow or rose pigmentation ot the medium. The colour of the colonies and the intensity of the medium pigmentation varied with the age of the colony and the amount of exposure to light. Cultures were mainly of three types: 1. Coloured yellow or yellow and black, with bright yellow pigmentation of the medium. (Isolates from Amphibromus Neesii and Agropyron scabrum. The isolate from Dactylis glomerata was also of this type, but it had been isolated from old faded leaves.) 2. Cultures black, pink, or black and pink, with rosaceous pigmentation of the medium. (Isolates from Triticum vulgare, Phleum pratense, Microlaena stipoides and Agropyron-wheat hybrids.) 3. Cultures without medium pigmentation under the conditions during which the tests were carried out. Isolate from Wheat. In September, 1951, leaves of “Scimitar” wheat received from the Waite Institute, South Australia, were infected with Septoria tritici, and also with a few lesions of the eyespot type which were not typical of the speckled leaf blight. Upon examination it was found that the lesions were caused by a Selenophoma with small spores. Pure cultures of the organism were established. As mentioned previously, the Selenophoma from wheat in the United States was first reported as the var. stomaticola, but was later placed in the species proper, mainly because of the shape of the spores which were reported as being 16-21 x 2-2-3-5u (Sprague, 1950). The spores in the collection from South Australia measured 12-18 x 2u, and from culture measured 9-16 x 2u. When produced on “‘Rhodesian”’ wheat in the glasshouse they measured 10-18 x 2-2:5u. The measurements, which are all in the same range, are slightly smaller than those given by Sprague, but his drawings of spores on leaf fragments from Australia which were intercepted by Pollock, and of spores from Idaho (1950, his fig. 22, B and C) are very similar to those of the present collection, except that the latter are slightly narrower and slightly more pointed. The organism resembled the small spored variety on grasses rather than the large spored species on Arundo donaxz. While it is realized that the wheat Selenophoma in the U.S.A. was transferred to the species proper only after much consideration, it is felt that the South Australian organism is more accurately assigned to the var. stomaticola than to the species (Plate ix, 5-10). Sprague (1949, 1950), in inoculation tests with the American organism, could obtain only sterile leaf spots. When inoculated in the glasshouse, the Australian isolate produced on wheat, leaf spots with abundant pycnidia and spores. It is, perhaps, a more virulent strain. The pycnidia produced after artificial inoculation, however, were not heavily pigmented and could not be discerned with the naked eye. Inoculations were carried out on the following plants in several series of tests, using spores from culture: Avena sterilis algeriensis “Algerian”, Bromus inermis, Dactylis glomerata, Festuca elatior, Holcus lanatus, Hordeum distichon ‘“Kinver”, Phlewm pratense, “Poa caespitosa’, Secale cereale, Triticum vulgare “Federation”. In every test, lesions with pycnidia and spores occurred on “Federation” wheat, but no infection could be obtained on the other grasses or cereals. This confirms Sprague’s finding that the wheat isolate is confined to wheat. Various species of wheat and those varieties either agronomically popular in Australia or being used as sources of resistance to other diseases, e.g., leaf and stem ~ rust, were tested in the glasshouse for their reaction to the Selenophoma isolate. fd BY DOROTHY E. SHAW. 157 Sprague (1949) noted that resistance varied in the field from the highly susceptible varieties “Rex” and “Orfed’” to the highly resistant varieties “Kharkof”, “Comanche” and “Hymar x Elgin 3 (F4 composite)”’. " Wheats tested were divided into the following categories: Resistant. Mod. Resistant. Mod. Susceptible. Susceptible. Very Susceptible. “Triticum monococcum. T. timococcum. T. vulgare ; T.. compactum ; T. dicoceum ; “7. monococcum var. T. vulgare ; Brolga. Little Club. Khapli. © flavescens. Democrat. Celebration. T. vulgare ; T. vulgare ; Exchange. Charter. Bordan. Dundee. Hofed. Chinese x (Chinese Egypt 1228. Festival. M.D. 1303. x Agropyron Federation. Kenya 744. Mentana. elongatum). Resistant. * Rhodesian. Eureka. Bencubbin. Yalta. Fedweb. Gular. Kendee. Marquillo. Mediterranean. R.A.C. 170. Thew. Timopheevi der. 1656. *Uruguay 1064. * * Rhodesian ’’ and “ Uruguay ”’ are shown in Plate ix, 2 and 3. ‘Organisms from Various Hosts. The results of pathogenicity tests which it has been possible to make to date are -as follows: : Agropyron— Aristida Dactylis Phleum Triticum Wheat hyb. vagans. glomerata. pratense. vulgare. _Agropyron scabrum .. Fs Be zd Amphibromus Neesii ne ae — Aristida vagans Sf aft oa S _Arrhenatherum elatius ae Bic — == = ae uae Avena sterilis algeriensis .. Pe — = 2s = a Bromus inermis ae ats Bs — _— Dactylis glomerata .. o.0 Ate — — S aes we Danthonia caespitosa aa ve — =e meh Dichelachne sciurea .. ae ax aed Festuca elatior ae we a — — — a wats -Holcus lanatus Get ve pn — = — =a — Hordeum distichon .. te en — = cots ps — Phileum pratense a ans oc — — — S: ee “© Poa caespitosa”’ .. Be se — — = a nes Poa compressa ee, ae ae — 25 fod Secale cereale aie es < — = ek ss aa Triticum vulgare a a ae L = = — S Vulpia Myuros BS ee as — S = Susceptible ; L = Lesions only ; — = Immune. All the grasses inoculated are recorded hosts of Selenophoma here or overseas. Hach isolate tested was specific for its own host. Infection was easily obtained on timothy ‘and wheat with the respective isolates, but difficult to obtain with the other isolates even on the hosts from which they were obtained. It is possible that the conditions favouring infection were not present or that there were genetic differences in clones of the same grass species. Tsiang (1944) found highly significant differences in reaction to Selenophoma bromigena between clones of Bromus inermis. Economic IMPORTANCE. Selenophoma donacis and S. donacis var. stomaticola have been identified on both native and introduced grasses throughout the eastern half of Australia. It is not known how long the organisms have been present in this country: whether they are indigenous on the native grasses or whether they were imported here from overseas on introduced grasses and have since spread to the native species. 158 THE GENUS SELENOPHOMA ON GRAMINEAE IN AUSTRALIA, Some of the grasses collected were heavily diseased, but, as the cross-inoculation: tests to date indicate a great deal of specificity for the host, it is probable that the disease will be serious only on particular species in certain localities. The first world record of a Selenophoma on wheat was on Australian wheat examined at Quarantine Station at California in 1944. It was not recorded elsewhere until 1948, at Pullman, Washington, but Sprague has since stated that it had been collected at Pullman in 1915, but not then determined (1950). The only known field occurrence in Australia is that on “Scimitar” leaves from South Australia (S:U. Ace. 595). However, it is instructive to examine the proportions. of the well-known pathogenic fungi in the five shiploads of wheat identified at the: Californian Quarantine Station (Pollock, 1945), viz.: Number of Fungus. Lots. Urocystis triticr aA = a A uh Puceinia rubigo-vera var. tritici be ic 17 Puccinia graminis var. tritici a6 He 5 Tilletia caries Ae ws mig Ne i Tilletia foetida .. = Ne 8 2s 1 Selenophoma sp. re F % 5 Septoria tritici .. te oes one ate 17 The writer has not been able to determine the season in which this wheat was: grown or from what parts of the wheat belt it came. It is evident, however, that the disease was present in the field somewhere prior to 1944. It should be noted that many of the varieties of wheat which are grown com- mercially in Australia, or used as sources of resistance to other diseases, proved susceptible to the South Australian isolate in glasshouse tests. Thus the varietal composition of the wheat belt makes it a suitable medium for the organism, although environmental conditions in the field might be operating against high incidence and. widespread distribution. Acknowledgements. Grateful thanks are extended to Professor W. L. Waterhouse for his unfailing: interest and advice, to Miss J. W. Vickery for identifying many of the grasses, to Mr. S. Woodward-Smith for some of the photographs, and to Mr. C. S. Christian, of the: C.S.1I.R.0., for permission to examine the grass collections of the Northern Territory Land Regional Survey for diseases. The help of all those collectors who forwarded. specimens from New South Wales and the other States is also gratefully acknowledged. References. ALLISON, J. L., 1939.—Studies of monosporous cultures of Septoria bromigena. Phytopath..,. 29: 554-556. , 1945.—Selenophoma bromigena leaf spot on Bromus inermis. Phytopath., 35: 233-240. Connors, I. L., and SAviutn, D. B. O., 1943.—23rd annual report of the Canadian plant disease survey. Abstr. R.A.M., 24: 4. FISCHER, G. W., SPRAGUE, R., JOHNSON, H. W., and HArDISON, J. R., 1942.—Host and pathogen indices to the diseases observed on grasses in certain Western States during 1941. Pl. Dis. Reptr. Suppl. 137. FRANDSEN, N. O., 1943.—Septoria-arten des Getreides und anderer Gradser in Danemark. Meddel. f. Plantepatol. Afd. d. Kgl. Vet. og Landbrohojsk. Kobenhaun No. 26, 92 pp. Abstr. R.A.M., 25: 155-157, 1946. Grove, W. B., 1935.—British stem- and leaf-fungi. (Coeleomycetes) Sphaeropsidales. Vol. 1, 488 pp. Cambridge. J@RSTAD, I., 1924.—Report on agricultural and horticultural plant diseases 1922-23. IV. Agri- cultural crops and vegetables. Christiania, Grdndahl & Sgns, Boktrykkeri. Abstr. R.A.M., 4: 16-18, 1925. , 1930.—Report on plant diseases in agriculture and horticulture. Vi. Diseases of cereals and meadow grasses. Oslo, Grgndahl & Sé¢gns, Boktrykkeri. Abstr. R.A.M., 9: 624-625, 1930. Mair, R., 1906.—Contributions a4 l’étude de la flore mycologique de l’Afrique du Nord. Bul. Soc. Bot. France, 53: clxxxvii-cexv. (Verbatim extract supplied by the C.M.I., Kew, England. ) BY DOROTHY E. SHAW. 159 McKay, R., 1946.—A study of Septoria oxyspora Penz. & Sacc. isolated from diseased barley. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc., 24: 99-110. Morsz, G. v., 1941.—Neue Pilze aus Lettland. Bot. Kozl., 38, 1-2: 68-73. Abstr. R.A.M., 25: 474, 1946. PETRAK, F., 1947.—Kritische Bemerkungen uber einige, in letzter Zeit als neu beschriebene Askomyzeten und Fungi Imperfecti. Sydowia (Ann. mycol., Berl. Ser. 2), i, 1-3: 61-79. Abstr. R.A.M., 27: 99-100, 1948. Pouiock, F. H., 1945.—Fungi found on imported Australian wheat. Pl. Dis. Reptr., 29: 213-214. ‘SAMPSON, K., and WESTERN, J. H., 1941.—Diseases of British grasses and herbage legumes. Cambridge Uni. Press. SHaw, DorotHy E., 1953.—Cytology of Septoria and Selenophoma spores. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 78: 122-130. SPRAGUE, R., 1949.—Selenophoma spot, a new wheat disease in North America. Abstr. Phytopath., 39: 23. , 1950.—Diseases of cereals and grasses in North America. New York. SPRAGUE, R., and JOHNSON, A. G., 1940.—Selenophoma on grasses. Mycol., 32-415. ———, 1945.—-Selenophoma on grasses, II. Mycol., 37: 638-639. ——_, 1947.—Selenophoma on grasses, III. Mycol., 39: 737-742. , 1950.—Species of Selenophoma on North American grasses. Oregon State College, Corvallis, Oregon. ‘SSTAPLEDON, R. G., WILLIAMS, R. D., SAMPSON, K., and JENKINS, T. J., 1922.—Preliminary investigations with herbage plants. Bull. Welsh Plant Breeding Station. Aberystwyth Ser. 4, No. 1: TSIANG, Y. S., 1944.—Variation and inheritance of certain characters of brome grass, Bromus inermis Leyss. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron., 36: 508-522. WEISS, F., 1950.—Index of plant diseases in the U.S. Special Publ. Plant Dis. Survey, 1, part IIT: 382-529. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IX. 1. Phleum pratense with ‘“frog-eye’” type lesions caused by Selenophoma donacis var. stomaticola after artificial inoculation. x1. 2. “Rhodesian’’ wheat, a very susceptible variety, with lesions and yellowing caused by S. donacis var. stomaticola after artificial inoculation. x1. 3. “Uruguay” wheat, a moderately susceptible variety, with lesions caused by S. donacis var. stomaticola after artificial inoculation. x1. 4. Spores of S. donacis var. stomaticola from Sporobolus éelongatus stained with Giemsa to show one nucleus per cell. x 900. 5. Spores from culture of S. donacis from Arundo donax, stained with cotton-blue. x 600. 6. Spores from field collection of S. donacis from Arundo donagx, stained with cotton-blue. x 600. 7. Spores from culture of S. donacis var. stomaticola from wheat, stained with cotton-blue. x 600. 8. Spores from glasshouse collection of S. donacis var. stomaticola from wheat, stained with cotton-blue. x 600. 9. Spores from culture of S. donacis var. stomaticola from Phleum pratense. x 600. 10. Spores from field collection of S. donacis var. stomaticola from Phleuwm pratense. x 600. Photos 4-10 by Woodward-Smith. 160 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE. Il. THE VARIATION OF THE ALGAL POPULATION IN SANDY SOILS. By Y. T. TcHan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, and JILL A. WHITEHOUSE, Teaching Fellow in Microbiology, Sydney University. (Plate x, figs. 1, 2; four Text-figures.) [Read 26th August, 1953.] INTRODUCTION. The algal population in the soil has previously been studied mainly from a floristic point of view, but little information is available concerning the number and variation of algae in the soil, which is partly due to the lack of an adequate rapid technique. This difficulty has been overcome by fluorescent microscopy introduced by one of us (Tchan, 1952) and, using this new technique, the population of algae in the soil was. studied in its natural conditions, and experiments were carried out to explain some of the direct observations obtained in studying the daily variation and vertical distribution of the algae in soil. I. TECHNIQUE. The technique has been fully described in a previous paper (Tchan, 1952) and no modification is introduced in the present work. The sensitivity of the method may be tested as follows. A counting chamber of 0:2 mm. depth and a surface area of 1:5 x 1:65 cm. has 2 volume of 0-05 c.c. Since the soil suspension can be concentrated by centrifuging to 1:5 (soil: water), then this volume represents 0:01 g. of soil. It is found with suitable replicates that the technique can estimate an algal population of the order of 1,000 cells per gramme. A reasonable estimation of a population of about 100 cells per gramme can be obtained by using McCrady’s statistical table (Calmette et al., 1948). In fact, estimations using the statistical table allow for a theoretical possibility of a population as low as 20 cells per gramme of soil. In practice, little interest or significance is attached to such a low algal population in the soil. The technique used is described as. follows. A suspension of algal cells was counted over the whole chamber. A series of dilutions (1 c.c. in 9 c.c. of water) was used (five replicate counts for each dilution) until the last dilution was free of algae, e.g., one suspension contained 80 cells per chamber. In the first dilution the replicates gave five positive countings; the second dilution gave three; and the third dilution was free of algae. According to the statistical table the above results give characteristic numbers of 553 or 530, which correspond respectively to 90 and 80 cells calculated to be present in the original suspension. This gives a good correlation with the initial count made on the undiluted suspension. In another suspension which gave a theoretical number of 500 cells, the results were as follows: Characteristic number tee RO ANEW SO aoe 4 Acs pA) aL 511 451 503 .. Cells in suspension (calculated from table) .. .. 500 850 450 500 600 The use of the statistical technique was found to be necessary when the algal population was at a very low level. For higher numbers the direct count of the suspension was quite adequate. In order to compare this direct microscopy technique with a culture method the following experiments were carried out. BY Y. T. TCHAN AND JILL A. WHITEHOUSE. 161 A sandy soil was used to prepare a soil-water medium according to Pringsheim (1950). Potassium nitrate and potassium phosphate buffer adjusted to the same pH as that of the original soil were added to the medium. The algal population in a suspension was first estimated by the direct microscopy technique. A series of dilutions of this original suspension was then inoculated into the soil-water medium, using five replicate tubes for each dilution prepared. The number of algae present after incubating at 25°C. with two fluorescent lamps for several weeks to three months, was calculated by using McCrady’s table, and depended on the number of tubes in each dilution in which growth was evident when examined either by naked eye or microscopically. The results are summarized as follows. Number obtained by direct micro- scopy Ae Be: ts AG 1,000 1,400 2,000 4,000 | 23,000 | 29,000 | 438,000 | 40,000 Number obtained by culture tech- nique .. a ae Be a 600 1,500 1,500 4,500 | 13,000 | 30,000 | 30,000 | 45,000 culture Ratio —————_ Me ae ar 0:6 1:07 0:75 1-12 0:56 1-03 0-70 1:12 microscopy Culture technique shows : Less as So ye: St 40% 25% 44% 30% More 2 = SS ae 1% 12% 3% LAM e The above table shows that significant differences between the two techniques occurred when the culture technique gave a lower number than obtained by direct microscopy. When the culture technique gave a higher number, the difference was only of the order of 12%. The rapidity of the direct microscopy is very appreciable, and for this reason the culture technique was not used in any of the other experiments carried out, except on rare occasions. II. Dainty VARIATIONS IN THE ALGAL POPULATION OF THE SOIL. For the following experiments described a garden soil from Sydney University was used. The soil was apparently homogeneous as a result of previous cultivation. Samples were prepared by mixing five small amounts of soil taken at random from within a square metre. The experiment was set up at 11 a.m. in May on a sunny day. The following variations in the algal population were recorded at intervals during the day: Time le ae BS 11 a.m. 2 p.m. 5 p.m. 7 p.m. 8 a.m. 12 noon No. algae per gramme a 4,750 2,100 5,300 4,500 1,300 2,500 Several factors account for these variations. Using the direct microscopy technique it was evident that some nematodes, displaying a white-green fluorescence, had eaten several algae, as seen by the red fluorescent areas within their bodies. Likewise, several protozoa contained algal inclusions. The number of nematodes and protozoa, however, was not high enough to have much effect on the number of algae. Other factors must be taken into consideration. In winter, water condenses on the surface of the soil during the night; on the following morning the temperature of the surrounding soil rises with the increase in sunlight. Algae thus have a suitable condition in which to multiply; then during the day the soil may dry out, resulting in the death of some of the algae. To support this hypothesis the following experiments were carried out. Firstly, an experiment was set up to determine the minimum water content of the soil in which the multiplication of algae was possible. A sandy soil sample was air dried and five grammes placed in the lid of a Petri dish. Sufficient water was added to bring the moisture content of the soil to 12, 24, 30, 45, 60 and 100 per cent. of its water-holding capacity. The lids of the dishes were then covered by the base of the Petri dish so that the bottom of the dish rested on the soil in the lid. The space between the Petri dish and lid was thus reduced to a 162 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE, II, minimum. The apparatus was sealed to prevent the loss of water during incubation, and the Petri dishes were incubated at 25°C. for a few hours with two fluorescent tubular lamps, and then the algal cells were counted. Examination showed that there was no growth of algae below 12% of the water- holding capacity of the soil. From 24% to 30% the number rose from 2,500 per gramme to 4,200 per gramme. At 45% the number was 4,700, and from 60% to 100% the number of algae was approximately constant at 6,000. The following points are evident from the foregoing results, and apply at least to the sandy soil used in the experiment. (1) When the soil is moistened to 60% of its water-holding capacity the optimum condition is reached for the growth of algae. Further addition of water does not increase their growth over the short period of our experiment. (2) When the soil nears its air-dried condition the number of algae in the soil becomes constant. (3) The minimum moisture needed for the growth of algae is between 12% and 24% of the water-holding capacity, which is indeed very low. The object of the second experiment was to determine the effect of drought on the algal population. A sandy garden soil rich in algae waseused. Five replicates of 10 grammes of soil were placed in a Petri dish and allowed to dry in the open air and light. Every two hours samples were taken to make estimations of the algal population and the loss of water from the soil. The algal population was estimated by both direct microscopy and a culture technique using soil-water media described above. The loss of water was determined by change in weight of the soil sample. Graph I shows the correlation between the loss of water and the variation of the algal population. The experiment was set up with soil moistened to 100% of its water-holding capacity. After two hours the number of algae rose from 23,000 to 44,000 (direct microscopy) or 12,500 to 30,000 (culture technique), and the soil moisture content had dropped by 58%. After four hours the count had dropped and risen respectively in the two techniques to 40,000 and 45,000, whilst the moisture content was as low as 12°3% of its original water-holding capacity. From this time both techniques showed a drop in the number of algae (28,000 by direct microscopy and 30,000 by culture technique) and the soil was practically air dried. After three days the soil contained a practically constant number of algae. i Two points are clear from these results: (1) At low moisture levels the growth of algae was not inhibited, but when the soil was almost air-dried (below 12% of its water-holding capacity) the number of algae diminished very quickly; (2) When conditions were suitable algal populations could be doubled in a few hours. From these observations it is possible to assume that, at least for the sandy soil in question, the daily variation in the algal population is affected by the change in the moisture content of the soil. There is a critical quantity of water which controls the algal population in the soil. This was found to be 12% of the water-holding capacity of the sandy soil used. Below this level no growth could be detected and some algae may have died. Above this level growth recommenced. Ill. THE VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF ALGAE IN THE SOIL. For these observations soils from Kuring-gai Chase Reserve (Mount Colah, N.S.W.) and from Warrah Fauna and Flora Sanctuary (near Woy Woy, N.S.W.) were used. These sandy soils have never been subjected to agricultural treatment or interference. During the winter and early spring of 1952 soils were sampled from different depths. Precautions were taken to avoid the possible mixture of surface soil with the subsoil. A block of soil was cut out and test tubes pushed horizontally into the block from different levels. On extracting the tube only the portions of the soil near the opening BY Y. T. TCHAN AND JILL A. WHITEHOUSE. 163 of the tube were used. This corresponded with the central portion of the soil in the block. The chance of mixing the soil was thus reduced to a minimum. If the soil was water-saturated, the block of soil was cut into slices, which were separated and suspended in water in order to count the algae present. It is clear that in the water-saturated condition most of the algal population was confined to the top few millimetres. The number dropped very quickly and at a depth of 1 cm. it became insignificant compared with the large surface population. In the soil which was not water saturated (Mount Colah) the surface soil contained more algae than the lower layers, but the difference was not so sharp. Also a reasonable quantity of algae could be found in a relatively deep part of the soil. ODA | OG | Ores | sb eR Bea Gang | cm. | cm. | cm. | cm. | cm. cm. cm. | | i | | ! | | | Mt. Colah after rain... ae = e200 900 | 300 | <150 Woy Woy I | 300,000 10,000 BNO 4s als) ee Sig el eee Woy Woy II 27 | she : | 5,000 15,000 4,000 <150 Woy Woy I—water logged, with macroscopic growth of algae on surface. Woy Woy Il—water saturated, macroscopic growth of algae on surface. Several questions arise from these observations: (1) Why is the algal population confined to the top layers of the soil when the soil is- water-saturated? (2) Is light necessary for the growth of algae in water-saturated sandy soils, as* indicated by the presence of algae in relatively larger numbers insthe surface soils? (3) If light is necessary for the growth ot algae in sandy soils, how far is it able to penetrate into the soils? (4) It is well known that algal growth occurs in the dark if a suitable energy source is provided (Bristol Roach, 1927, 1928). If this is so, can they grow anaerobically in a water-saturated soil? Several experiments were set up in order to obtain information concerning these questions. The first experiment aimed to determine the aerobic and anaerobic states in water- saturated sandy soil; the vertical distribution of algae under the experimental con- ditions; and the effect of light on their distribution. Use was made of the filter paper technique introduced by one of us (Tchan, 1945), in which dyes were used as rH, indicators. This technique was successfully used for the study of the aerobic-anaerobic relationship in the decomposition of cellulose in the soil (Pochon and Tchan, 1947). Pieces of filter paper 4” x 6”, which had been previously stained in vertical strips with four dyes of different rH. values, were moistened and pressed flat against the sides of seven one-litre beakers, so that the colour change of the dyes could be seen during the course of the experiment. The range of rH, values given by the different dyes is as follows: methylene blue rH, = 14, Nile blue rH, = 9, pheno-safranin rH, = 5°8, neutral red rH, = 3:8. A washed river-sand practically free of algal cells was added in a wet state to the beakers and shaken down well as it was added, in order to avoid air bubbles to a certain extent. The control was set up with tap water. To the second sample Derx’s mineral solution was added (Derx, 1950) containing KNO, as a nitrogen source. The third sample contained Derx’s mineral solution plus 1% glucose as organic matter. The fourth was a duplicate of the second and the fifth was a duplicate of the third, but the beakers were wrapped with black paper so that the light could only penetrate from the surface (surface light). The sixth and seventh were duplicates of the second and third respectively, except that they were kept entirely in the dark. All beakers were kept in a glasshouse. is) 164 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE. JI, The results obtained from the experiment are summarized below. I. The control (No. 1). After 3 days: The methylene blue strip was reduced throughout the lower 4 cm. After 6 days: The methylene blue strip was reduced throughout the entire length except for the top 1:5 cm. The Nile blue strip was partially reduced in all but the top 1:5 cm. The neutral red strip was irregularly reduced at 3 cm., 5:5 em., 10°5 em. and 13 cm. After 7 days: There was no appreciable change. After 14 days: The soil was slightly dry and the subsequent entry of oxygen re-oxidized the dyes as far down as 4 cm. Some fungal growth was visible on the filter paper. There was a macroscopic growth of algae on the surface of the soil. II. Soil and Derx’s mineral solutions (Nos. 2, 4, 6). After 3 days: In the light: no reduction was evident. Surface light: no reduction was evident. In the dark: no reduction was evident. After 6 days: In the light: a thin green algal layer had appeared on the soil surface. Methylene blue was reduced from 2-5 cm. to 10 cm., Nile blue was reduced from 2:5 cm. to 10 cm. and neutral red was reduced from 5-5 cm. to 8:5 cm. Surface light: a thin green algal layer had appeared on the soil surface and the reduction of the dyes was similar to that in the light. In the dark: the soil was very moist; there was no macroscopic growth of algae on the surface and the reduction of the dyes was similar to the previous two cases. After 7 days: In the light: there was no change in the dyes; a heavy growth of algae was present on the surface of the soil and also in the air spaces throughout the soil in parts which were within the reduction zone and exposed to the light at the edge of the beaker. Surface light: there was no further reduction in the dyes, the surface algal growth was greater. In the dark: there was no further reduction in the dyes and no algal growth. After 14 days: In the light: the surface algal growth had increased and the large areas of algal growth which were made possible by the presence of air bubbles in contact with the light had regenerated sufficient oxygen by photosynthesis to re-oxidize completely the dyes in the immediate vicinity of the algal zone. Surface light: a thick green mat of algae had further developed on the surface but, due to the absence of light below the surface, there was no re-oxidation in this case. In the dark: no further change had occurred. An entirely new experiment was set up in which the dye pheno-safranin, which had proved unsatisfactory in our case, was replaced by Janus green (rH. = 5:2), and in which the large air bubbles, so prominent in the former experiment, were avoided by careful shaking of the soil on addition to the beaker. It was then found that, in the absence of air bubbles, the algae grew only on the surface, below which the dyes remained permanently reduced. BY Y. T. TCHAN AND JILL A. WHITEHOUSE. 165 III. Soil and Derx’s mineral solution and glucose (Nos. 3, 5, 7). After 3 days: In the light: methylene blue was reduced from 0 cm. to 2:5 cm. and again from 7:5 cm. to 10 cm. Surface light: methylene blue was reduced from 0 ecm. to 7:5 em. In the dark: methylene blue was reduced from 0 cm. to 7:5 cm. All beakers were completely swamped to the brim with water due to the raising of the water level by the gas formed as a result of fermentation. There was a very strong smell typical of an anaerobic fermentation and a heavy surface scum on the water. After 6 days: In the light: methylene blue was reduced completely from 4 cm. to 6:5 cm. and from 10 cm. to 15 cm. while partial reduction occurred at 0 em. to 4 cm. and 6-5 cm. to 10 cm. The Nile blue was partially reduced at 1:5 cm. to 2:0 cm. and the neutral red was reduced at 7-5 cm. to 15 cm. Surface light: methylene blue was reduced at 2:5 cm. to 7°5 em. and partially reduced at 7-5 cm. to 15 cm. The Nile blue was reduced at 2:5 cm. to 12-5 cm. and partially reduced at 12:5 cm. to 15 cm. In the dark: there was complete reduction of the methylene blue and Nile blue. In the three beakers the odour of fermentation still persisted; there was a marked -irregularity and pocking in the soil due to the liberation of gas from the soil and the subsequent lowering of the water level to replace the gas. Water was added where “needed. After 7 days: As at 6 days, but the odour of fermentation had disappeared in all cases. There was no sign of any algal growth. After 10 days: No change in the reduction of dyes but the surface of the soil showed signs of the beginning of algal growth in the presence of light only. After 14 days: There was a definite algal growth in the presence of light only. Soil samples were taken at this stage. The qualitative tests with Fehling’s reagent did not show the presence of any reducing substances in the beakers to which glucose had originally been added. The algal populations were estimated by the direct fluorescence microscope technique for all samples. Results are summarized in the Graph II. Two beakers (Nos. 3 and 5) showed practically no growth of algae. When algae were present, most were confined to the top 5 mm. and yet algae could be found at 1-5 em. depth, but in such low numbers that it was doubtful if this was not due to washing down with water when the samples were taken. Two days after this stage -a growth of algae was noticed in beaker No. 5, which had been supplied with added glucose. A green surface layer was formed within five days. In the experiment kept completely in the dark there was no algal growth visible on the surface of the sand, even after 45 days. It has already been shown that the growth of algae in the dark, even in the presence of organic matter, is most unlikely. Therefore, was the presence of algae at 1-5 em. below the surface of the soil due to the penetration of air and light to this depth or to the effect of washing down by water or a combination of both factors? PRECIPITATION OF ALGAE BY WATER. A river sand was washed with water until it was practically free of algal cells. A large filter funnel was plugged with glass wool and filled with the sand. A complete water column was set-up in the sand by allowing water to filter through until all air bubbles were excluded, leaving a surface layer of about 1 cm. head of water, and blocking the exit by means of a clamped rubber tube. A few c.c. of a suspension of a pure culture of algae, which had been examined to ensure that all the cells were well distributed throughout the water, was added to the water layer above the sand and well mixed with it. The funnel was opened for about five minutes and the water allowed to drain 00 166 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE. II, away slowly into a beaker until all the free water had filtered off. The centre of the sand was cut into a small block and the number of algal cells deposited at different levels was counted. In order to determine the distribution of different morphological types of algae through the soil three pure cultures were used, namely, Chlorella (9 x 8u), Chlamydomonas (20 x 1384), and Haematococcus (50u diameter). The results may be seen in Graph III. Algal cells were found throughout the top 6 cm. of the soil, but Chlorella cells were present in the water which had filtered through the 20 cm. column of the sand into the CRAPH N°] GRAPH N° TL ° CULTURE x DIRECT COUNT ee + PERCENTAGE LOSS of WATER Pe CHHORE MEA bid 10040 © ----~CHLAMYDOMONAS Anes HREMATOCOCCUS > D Tims yi 50> 2 ut m =) i= Cc S 2 = = Ww D A = 25% = fo) 1 3 W iS) (aw w ——s a Olo 3 10 : 2 E2) a) 30 ah TIME (Hours) GRAPH N° IT. RAPH N° Ty 200. j : 200. ; t23000 fo 3000 f CONTROL x DERX’S + LIGHT we + . + SURFACE LIGHT yf] fo) + GLUCOSE + LIGHT nd F Se Wen : + SURFACE T DRY SOIL = 24 Hours \ LIGHT IL DRY SOIL - SHORT \ fe EXPOSURE i eal IL WET soit _- SHoRT ; Exposure ay \ 1 a i) i 41 Mt NOILWY1NdOd e, 1 DEPTH Graphs I-IV. beaker. It may thus be seen that the smallest algal cells are more readily distributed into the deeper layers of the soil by the downward movement of water. This observation could account for the presence of algae at depths of 1:5 cm. below the main zone of distribution of algae at the surface of the soil. PENETRATION OF LIGHT INTO THE SOIL. Photographic plates (extra-rapid panchromatic) were buried into a large square container of dry sand at an angle of about 30°, and the soil left exposed in the open for 24 hours. The plates were subsequently developed and the penetration of light into the soil was estimated by measuring the intensity of light transmitted through the plate by means of a Weston-Master exposure meter. In a similar experiment using wet sand, the results were not significant owing to the injurious effect on the photographic BY Y. T. TCHAN AND JILL A. WHITEHOUSE. 167 plate of a 24-hour subjection to water-saturated soil. However, in order to obtain some kind of comparison, shorter term experiments were set up and the readings obtained were then extrapolated to obtain comparable results. In the dried sand it was found that the light could penetrate down to 1:5 cm. This is in agreement with the results obtained by directly counting the algae in the different layers of the soil. However, it is known that with very little light a plate becomes fully exposed within a day, and the light intensity measured at a depth of 1:5 cm. may be inadequate for the growth of algae. At 2:9 cm. it was found that there was no penetration of light at all. It can be seen by extrapolation from the short exposure of plates in wet and dried sand that the light penetration does not vary to any significant amount in the two conditions (see Graph IV). Thus it may be safely assumed that the penetration of light into the sandy soil in the water-saturated condition as used in the first experiment was limited to the top centimetre. DISCUSSION. To the best of our knowledge the daily variation of the algal population of the soil has not been recorded in detail before. The cause of this variation is not completely understood, but it seems that the presence of nematodes and protozoa, and the changes in the water content of the soil may contribute. In the work presented here, nematodes and protozoa did not seem to play any significant role, since they were present in such low numbers. The important factor seemed to be the water content of the soil— an aspect which has been studied previously in some detail. The remarkable resistance of algae to desiccation was demonstrated early in this century by Bristol Roach (1919). Further experiments by Petersen (1935) confirmed this observation. Petersen has shown that periods of very slow desiccation (of about one month’s duration) of a soil may kill quite a considerable number of vegetative algal cells. However, this slow drying process is not of very common occurrence in sandy soils, and it is possible that any such slow-drying soils may induce the algae to produce resistant forms which would not be found in conditions where quick drying is possible. Bristol Roach (1919, 1920), using an intensive desiccation method, has shown that algae survived desiccation. The variation in the algal population in the present work occurred. within a matter of hours, and the number of algae appeared to remain at a constant level of about 65% of the total algal population once the soil had reached the air-dried state. Bristol Roach’s results did show the presence of resistant forms of algal cells. However, such severe desiccation is not of very common occurrence in nature. Therefore the present results approximate more closely to the normal state of a soil system. This resistance to drought by algae is still far from being completely understood. The minimum and maximum water levels needed for the growth of the algal flora in a sandy soil were examined and about 12% of the water-holding capacity (or 3% by weight) was required as the minimum amount needed for active growth. It may be possible that such a small amount of moisture, while inadequate for the growth of algae, could activate them into a state in which they could immediately start to grow and divide on the addition of extra water. This suggestion of activation is only hypothetical, since it is practically impossible during the experiment to keep the soil at a constant moisture level when such small amounts of water are involved. It may be presumed that under the experimental conditions the air immediately above the soil was 100% humid. Sometimes it was noted that a drop of water had condensed against the wall of the Petri dish, and if a soil particle had been in contact with it, the water content of the soil at this point would be much higher than the theoretical 3% of the experiment. It was observed by Schroder (1886) that diatoms died in soil containing 9:05% of water, but Petersen (1935) pointed out that the diatoms used by Schroder were hydrophilous species, and by using Hantzschia amphioxys and Navicula mutica he (1935) was able to show that full activity in the soil of these two species was. 168 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE. II, possible at a moisture level of 5:2%. This is comparable with the results obtained above. Thus the variation in the water content of the soil is an important factor in connection with the algal population of the soil. It was only when near the air-dried state that the algal population decreased remarkably, whilst above this point it increased quickly to a constant steady level, which was finally independent to a certain extent of the excess water added. Between these two limits the water content of the soil plays a part in controlling the rate of the algal growth. DISTRIBUTION OF ALGAE IN THE SOIL. Direct observation showed that in water-saturated soil the algal population was confined to the top few millimetres of the soil. When in an unsaturated state more algae could be found in the few centimetres immediately below the surface. Our experiments have shown that when the sand was saturated with water an anaerobic condition was established just below the surface (as indicated by the reduction of the rH, indicators). The influence of mineral salts on the speed of reduction of the dyes will be published in a separate paper, for which work is in progress. Direct counting of the algae confirmed the accumulation of the algal population to the top few millimetres under natural conditions. It would be expected that the anaerobic conditions present just below the surface would prevent the growth of algae, but it was found that if a small air bubble had been originally included in the soil, it provided enough oxygen for algae to grow in the anaerobic zone below the top few millimetres, and since there was photosynthetic regeneration of oxygen by the algae, it became a centre of re-oxidation and provided a suitable condition for other aerobic organisms to grow. This micro-ecological condition could only be produced with the presence of light. (In the dark the presence of air bubbles was not sufficient to re-oxidize any of the dyes which had become reduced during the early part of the experiment.) Experiments with photographic plates showed that light only penetrated the top centimetre of the soil. The penetration of light of different wave lengths in sand as recorded by Hoffmann (1949) with a photoelectric cell is very suggestive, and results were similar to ours. Since photographic plates require very little light to be fully exposed with long exposure time (a complete sunny day), it is doubtful whether this light intensity would be sufficient to ensure the growth of algae at depths greater than 1 cm. from the surface. Since coarse sandy soil is the most transparent to light and permeable to air, the present observation may be extended to other types of soil without involving any significant errors. Nevertheless, it must be remembered that in certain conditions where the soil is covered with water, e.g. rice fields, the presence of air bubbles below the water would provide a suitable starting point for algae to regenerate the oxygen needed by the root system. j One of us has shown (Pochon and Tchan, 1947) that in an unsaturated soil the top few centimetres were not under anaerobic conditions. If light cannot penetrate to this depth it may be possible that algae can grow heterotrophically, using the available air and an external organic carbon supply. Bristol Roach (1927, 1928) used sugars, and Treboux (1905) used :organic salts to grow pure cultures of algae in the dark. The natural occurrence of sugar in the soil has always been doubted, and the use of organic salts by algae in the dark and in the soil has not been confirmed by direct experiments under natural conditions (Moore and Karrer, 1919, and Pugmaly, 1924). Petersen (1935) has shown that in the dark the presence of 0:-5% of glucose did not increase the algal population. His work was done with a pure culture and sterile soil. With fresh unsterilized soil Petersen showed that algae did not multiply in the dark. Generally speaking, algae in pure culture are able to grow in the dark when suitable organic matter is provided. As Winogradsky (1932) has pointed out, the pure culture experiments have no absolute value in soil studies if the results are not confirmed by direct observation in the soil. Work with the total flora of the soil in natural conditions and with pure cultures has not at all times produced similar results, and modifications of one or the other have been evident. One of us has shown (Pochon, REISS SE Fee BY Y. T. TCHAN AND JILL A. WHITEHOUSE. 169 Tchan, Wang, Augier, 1950) that the addition of fibrous cellulose into the soil induced the growth of the cellulose-decomposing bacterium, e.g. Cytophaga, but that with pre- cipitated cellulose no growth occurred. Both forms of cellulose, however, were attacked by Cytophaga in pure culture. Therefore, if such a specific substance with only a slight modification of ‘structure can induce two different microbiological reactions, then this conception may also be valid in the case of algae, as shown by results in both pure culture and our results in the natural conditions, when glucose was the added factor in both cases. Our experiments showed that in seminatural conditions the addition of glucose was not only unable to increase the algal population in the dark, but that even in the light the algae could not grow to any significant degree. In the deeper parts of the soil, where the anaerobic conditions were present, it was expected that no algal growth would occur, but even on the surface where the soil was in permanent contact with the air, the growth of algae was not noticeable. The microbial fermentation of glucose in these cases was indicated by a quick reduction of the rH. indicators and a characteristic smell. This fermentation seemed to be responsible for the inhibition of any algal growth, since once the fermentation had ceased (indicated by the absence of any smell and a negative test with Fehling’s reagent for sugar) the growth of algae became noticeable in the soil kept in the light and formed a green cover on the surface within a few days. In the soil kept in the dark the growth was insignificant, which indicated that in the natural conditions, in the presence of the total flora of the soil, not only were the algae unable to compete with other micro-organisms for the sugar but there was an antagonistic effect produced by these organisms which seemed to prevent the algal growth. It may be that under special circumstances when available nitrogen is absent, only nitrogen-fixing organisms (bacteria or blue-green algae) would be able to grow, in which case the competition would be limited. After the fermentation of sugar had ceased and only organic salts remained, no evidence was produced to support the theory that growth of algae in the dark can proceed by utilizing organic salts, aS was suggested by Treboux. Thus all experiments have suggested that there was no growth of algae in the dark under natural conditions and that the subterranean algae are washed down from the surface. By filtering algae through sand it was obvious that the smaller sized algae can pass through 10 cm. of sand in a single filtration. Under natural conditions a heavy shower of rain could easily bring about such a condition. These results agree well with those of Petersen (1935) working with algae, and Burges (1950) with fungi. CONCLUSION. Using a method of fluorescent microscopy, the daily variation of the algal population in sandy soils was recorded. Hypotheses proposed to account for this variation were tested experimentally. The quick growth and the physiological behaviour of the algae in a soil should benefit the soil in a number of ways: namely, by providing organic matter from photosynthetic activity; by a fast formation of a surface covering over the soil, thus diminishing erosion effects due to water and wind; and by the fixation by algae of soluble mineral nutrients which would otherwise be lost to the soil by drainage. This latter point has a bearing on the work done by Fuller and Rogers (1952), who found that algae in certain cases proved a favourable source of phosphate. Experiments dealing with the vertical distribution of algae under natural conditions in the soil and their presence in the subterranean layers did not support the theory that the growth of algae in the dark is possible, even with the addition of an organic matter supply. Furthermore, it seems evident from the experimental data that the presence of glucose could create an antagonistic action which would inhibit the growth of algae in the soil. This hypothesis is a likely one, but is not yet fully understood. The studies of algal physiological behaviour in the soil, using pure cultures, do not necessarily provide the complete solution to this problem. Algae must be studied, like other organisms, in the presence of the total flora of the soil to understand their role and behaviour in such a situation. 170 STUDY OF SOIL ALGAE, If. Acknowledgements. The authors wish to thank Dr. J. McLuckie, Dr. N. C. W. Beadle, and Dr. and Mrs. ¥. Moewus, of the University of Sydney, and Dr. H. S. McKee, of the C.S.1I.R.0., for their valuable criticism and help. References. BRISTOL, B. M., 1919.—New Phytol., 18: 92. —, 1920.—Ann. Bot., 34: 35. BrRistoL RoacH, B. M., 1927.—Ann. Bot., 41: 509. , 1928.—Ann. Bot., 42: 317. Burees, A., 1950.—Trans. Brit. Mycol. Soc., 33: 142. CALMETTE, A., BoGunt, A., NeGRE, L., BRETEY, J., 1948—Manuel technique de Microbiologie et Serologie, pp. 249-252. Masson et Cie, Paris. Derx, H. G., 1950.—Ann. Bogoriense, 1: 1-11. FULLER, W. H., and RoceErs, R. N., 1952.—Soil Sec., 74, 6: 417. HOFFMANN, C., 1949.—Planta Bot., 36, 5: 48-56. ~ Moore and KARRER, 1919.—Ann. Miss. Bot. Gard., 6: 281. PETERSEN, J. B., 1935.—Dansk. Bot. Ark., 8. PocHON, J., and TCHAN, Y. T., 1947.—Ann. Inst. Past., 73: 29. PocHON,, J.,. TCHAN, Y. T., WANG, S. L., AuGIER, J., 1950.—Ann. Inst. Past., 79: 376. PRINGSHEIM, EK. G., 1950.—The culturing of Algae. The Charles F. Kettering Foundation. PUGMALY, A. DE, 1924.—Diss. Bordeaux. ScHRODER, G., 1886.—Untersuch. Bot. Inst. Tubingen, 2: 1. TCHAN, Y. T., 1945.—C. R. Soc. Biol., November. ———, 1952.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 265. TREBOUX, O, 1905.—Ber. d.d. bot. Geés., 23: 432. WINOGRADSKY, S., 1932.—Ann. Inst. Past., 48: 89. EXPLANATION OF PLATE X, FIGS. 1, 2. 1. Filter paper technique.—The dyes from left to right are: neutral red, pheno-safranin, Wile blue, methylene blue. Left beaker: When tap-water alone was added to the soil the reduction of the dyes was continuous within the anaerobic zone, and both methylene blue and Nile blue strips were reduced from within the top few centimetres to the bottom. Centre beaker: When Derx’s solution was added to the soil, the growth of algae took place more readily and was initiated by air bubbles in the soil. The products of algal growth in these areas oxygenated the soil to such an extent that re-oxidation of the dyes occurred in small areas which coincided exactly with these zones of growth. Such areas are visible in the Nile blue and methylene blue strips on the filter paper. Right beaker: When a 1% glucose solution was added to the soil the reduction of the dyes was pronounced, due to the increase in anaerobic fermentation. Algal growth was inhibited and no re-oxidation areas were evident. 2. Centre beaker, one week later. The re-oxidation of the dyes by algal growth was very pronounced in the methylene blue strip and was just evident in the Nile blue strip. The zone of algal growth exceeded the space occupied by the original air bubble, which initiated its growth, due to the production of oxygen from photosynthesis. STUDIES OF N-FIXING BACTERIA. V. PRESENCE OF BEIJERINCKIA IN NORTHERN AUSTRALIA AND GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION oF NON-SYMBIOTIC N—FIx1INGc MICRO-ORGANISMS. By Y. T. TcoHan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. (Plate x, figs. 3, 4; one Text-figure. ) [Read 26th August, 1953.] The distribution of aerobic N-fixing bacteria has been very intensively investigated in Australia except the northern part of this continent (Collins, 1952; Jensen, 1940; Jensen and Swaby, 1940; McKnight, 1949; Swaby, 1939). The species present are mostly Azot. chroococcum, occasionally Azot. beijerinckii and Azot. vinelandii. Azot. beijerinckii var. acido-tolerans has been isolated in the Sydney district (Tchan, 1953). No Beijerinckia species have been reported. On the other hand, countries and islands near Northern Australia are inhabited by species of Beijerinckia. They have been isolated by Derx (1950) in recent years. The intensive movements of animals and human populations, and transport of dirt by wind could be a constant contaminating source of Australian soil by micro-organisms of the islands surrounding the country. The present paper is aimed to answer the following two questions: (1) Are there any species of Beijerinckia in Northern Australia? (2) What is their geographic distribution and their ecology? MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUE. -Soil samples: Samples were collected in a small sterile container at their natural moisture content. They were not a random sample. Most of them were collected along the roadside. Samples took two months to reach the laboratory. These consisted of 48 samples collected by the 1952 Australian Museum expedition; 15 samples around 19-5° latitude (Ayr, Queensland) collected by the Division of Plant Industry of C.S.1I.R.O. were sent to me by air mail and immediately examined. 0-1 g. of each sample was inoculated into Derx’s medium and Winogradsky’s medium with sucrose as organic matter. After two months of incubation at 30°C., samples were considered as negative when no aerobic N-fixing bacterial colonies appeared. Positive samples were then analysed quantitatively by the liquid solid media technique described in an earlier paper (Tchan, 1952). Chemical analyses were made for the C content by Walkley and Black’s method. pH was determined by a glass electrode potentiometer with 1:10 soil water ratio. The P was estimated colorimetrically. Two extractions were used: (1) Burd’s (Burd, 1948) contact equilibrium technique with water as solvent: (2) 3% citric acid at pH 3-5. As the Beijerinckia gave a final pH of 3-5 in their culture, this pH value was chosen for extraction. Since samples were of small quantities (10-50 g.) it was impossible to make an extensive chemical analysis. DISCUSSION. The results from this investigation showed for the first time that the soils of Northern Australia are inhabited by Beijerinckia. The number of positive samples is 17 over a total of 48 collected by the Australian Museum Expedition. It is very similar to the percentage of soils containing Azotobacter in the other parts of Australia. The importance of these organisms in the N-economy of the soil cannot be discussed, since the 1952 drought and the long period between the time of collecting and analysis made the discussion very difficult. However, one sample gave 4,000 cells p.g. of soil. STUDIES OF N-FIXING BACTERIA. V, TABLE 1. Date, Localities, Soil. Geological Forma- tion of Soil. | | ’ | Azoto- | bacter p.g. of Soil. | Beijer- | inckia | p.g. of Soil. pH. G./kg. of Soil. Cc (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) Western Australia. 20.5.52. 42 miles north of Hall’s Creek on Wyndham Road, eastern Kimberleys. Residual red-brown soil. Flat savannah. 20.5.52. 18 miles south of Mabel Creek, eastern Kimberleys. Red- brown residual. Taken from about roots of Mitchell grass in open eucalypt country. 22.5.52. 20 miles south of Wyndham. Black sandy soil. From grass roots beneath eucalypt in open savannah. 26.5.52. Forrest River Mission, 15 miles south-east of Wyndham. Muddy soil from dry waterhole. 26.5.52. Forrest River Mission. Sandy loam. Collected from plain at base of quartzite hill. 12.6.52. Ivanhoe Station, northern Kimberleys. Black alluvium. Lightly timbered plain. Specimen from base of tree. 12.6.52. Ivanhoe Station. Black alluvium. Lightly timbered black soil plain. Specimen from base of grass clump. 13.6.52. Newry Station between Ivanhoe and Auvergne. Brown soil from weathered quartzites and slates (Pre-Cambrian). Lightly timbered country. From amongst grass and tree roots. 13.6.52. Auvergne Station. Black residual. Sparsely timbered open country. Northern Territory. 13.6.52. Timber Creek near Victoria River Depot, Victoria River. Limy brown alluvium. Amongst grass roots 4-1” below surface. 14.6.52. 72 miles north of Victoria River Downs Station. Basaltic soil. Lightly timbered plain with moderate grass development. Sample from bank of small water- course. 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission. Fine clay from bank of spring. Bank overhung by grass but clay collected did not appear to have been invaded by roots. 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission. Man- grove mud. Specimen from amongst mangrove roots exposed at low tide. 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission. Weathered ferruginous Permian sandstone soil. From amongst Pandanus roots near surface, in Pandanus-grassy hillside. Basalt Basalt Sporadic 100 500 800 Sporadic Sporadic Sporadic 6°65 6°25 7:42 6-08 5:58 5-88 oO 2-5 0:5 25 26 28 bo bo -70 -00° 90 -20- -40? “10 “40 “15 +25 Fk i BY Y. T. TCHAN. TABLE 1.—Continued. Date, Localities, Soil. (15) 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission. Black silt from marsh. Tea-tree marsh adjoining mangroves. (16) 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission garden. Black silt. From base of banana tree. (17) 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission area. Black soil and mould of fallen leaves. Light rain forest adjoining mangrove-fringed stream. 2” below surface. (18) 28.6.52. Port Keats Mission. Black soil and leaf mould. Light rain forest adjoining mangrove-fringed stream. Depth: 6’. (19) 30.6.52. 60 miles south of Darwin on Rum Jungle road. Sandy fer- Tuginous soil. Open forest with undercover of sorghum. Specimen from roots of gum sapling. (20) 30.6.52. 60 miles south of Darwin on Rum Jungle road. Sandy fer- Tuginous. Open forest with sor- ghum. From amongst roots of sorghum. (21) 30.6.52. Stapleton Creek, 65 miles south of Darwin. Soil weathered from Pre-Cambrian metamorphosed sediments. Savannah. From foot of grass clump. (22) 30.6.52. Stapleton Creek. As above. From roots of scrub (light rain forest) along creek. Depth: 2”. (23) 30.6.52. 105 miles south of Darwin. Sandy soil. Dry sclerophyll. Amongst eucalypts of adjoining small creek. (24) 30.6.52. Katherine. Limy soil. Open forest with drying grass. Sample from grass and tree roots. (25) 30.6.52. Katherine. lLimy sand. Dry sclerophyll (gum). Taken from soil amongst fallen leaves. (26) 30.6.52. 19 miles south of Katherine. Depth: 2”. Ferruginous soil. Gum saplings with thick grass. Taken at sapling base amongst eucalypt and grass roots. (27) 30.6.52. Maranboy tinfield, 30 miles south-east of Katherine. Sandy soil (weathered porphyry). Lightly timbered eucalypt forest with grass. (28) 30.6.52. Mataranka. Ferruginous sandy soil. Lightly timbered gum forest with grass. (29) 30.6.52. 30 miles north of Daly Waters. Black sandy soil. Lightly timbered forest. (30) 30.6.52. 30 miles north of Daly Waters. Dried mud from depression. Collected from amongst roots of dead grass. 173 Geological | Azoto- Beijer- C. Forma- bacter inekia pH. | G./ke. tion of p.g. of p.g. of (1) (2) of Soil. Soil. Soil. Soil. Mg./kg. | Mg./kg. — — — 5°38 — — 2-25 — - — 5-5 — — 2-30 Clay — 4000 By o'%/ 0-8 ID 2-0 Clay -= Sporadic 5:6 0-6 12-0 3:0: Granite — Sporadic 501595) 0-6 20-0 2-0: — — = Of) — — 0:35: Schist — Sporadic 5°83 1-0 12-5 2-9 — — — 5-5 — — 1-9 Granite Sporadic 500 7-62 — — 1-65: = — — 5-1 — — 2-25. Limestone | Sporadic | Sporadic 6:2 —_ — 2-25- — — — 5-42 — — 0-90: — —_— — 5-4 = — 1:4 “= = — 4-65 = = 2-1 Sand- —_— Sporadic 5°5 0-6 75 3:0 stone — — _ 5:15 — — 0:45: 174 STUDIES OF Date, Localities, Soil. N-FIXING BACTERIA. TABLE 1.—Continued. Geological Forma-" | tion of Soil. Azoto- bacter p.g. of Soil. Beijer- inckia p.g. of Soil. (31) 1.7.52. Dunmara. Ferruginous sandy soil. Mallee thicket. Taken at tree base. (32) 1.7.52. 110 miles south of Daly Waters. Red sandy soil. Semi- desert scrub. Taken amongst roots. (33) 3.7.52. 50 miles east of Frewena on Barkley Highway. Ferruginous sandy soil (Cambrian). Semi-desert plain with moderate degree of shrubbery. Taken from grass roots. (34) 3.7.52. 25 miles west of Soudan Station on Barkley Highway. Fer- ruginous sandy soil (weathered Cambrian). Semi-desert plain with rank grass and scattered shrubs. Taken from amongst roots. Queensland. (35) 12.7.52. 25 miles south-east of Normanton. Red sandy soil. Lightly timbered open country. (36) 12.7.52. Norman River, 16 miles west of Normanton. Damp river alluvium (water’s edge). Riverside serub. (37) 12.7.52. Norman River, 16 miles west of Normanton. Dry river alluvium. Amongst riverside scrub 30 feet from water’s edge. (38) 13.7.52. 5 miles east of Gilbert River crossing, bank of tributary. River alluvium. River bank amongst light timber. (39) 13.7.52. 20 miles west of George- town, Queensland, Granitic soil. Dry open forest. (40) 14.7.52. Hinasleigh River (near Einasleigh, Queensland). River alluvium. Amongst tea-tree roots on bank. (41) 18.7.52. 35 miles W.N.W. of Innisfail, Atherton Tableland (2,500 feet). Basaltic soil. Rain-forest floor litter. (42) 19.7.52. 15 miles north of Cardwell. Litter of decaying leaves. Rain forest. Height probably about 500 feet. (43) 19.7.52. 15 miles north of Cardwell. Grassy mud at streamside adjacent to rain forest. Alluvial soil. (44) 21.7.52. 10 miles south of Ingham. Black alluvium. Grasslands adjoin- ing canefields. (45) 24.7.52. 50 miles south of Charters Towers. Brown sandy soil. Dry lightly-timbered open forest with grass (from base of grass clump). Alluvium Granite Granite ? Basalt ? Basalt Granite 150 Sporadic Sporadic Sporadic 500 500 Sporadic Sporadic 150 V, pH. C. G./kg. of Soil. 0:7 0-5 2-0 2:5 1:0 25 37°5 76-0 37°5 76-0 0:14 0:10 0:5 0-4 1:0 25-0 26-0 13-0 28-0 21-0 20-0 2-0 BY Y. T. TCHAN. 175 TABLE 1.—Continued. ] | | | P. Geological | _Azoto- Beijer- | | C. Date, Localities, Soil. Forma- | bacter | inckia | pH. | | G./kg. tion of | pg. of | pg. of | Fo (2) | of Soil. Soil. | Soil. | Soil. | Mg./kg. | Mg./kg. | | | (46) 29.7.52. 20 miles south of Rock- — | —_ | — | e8} | — — 25-0 hampton. Alluvial soil adjoining | | dam. Open semi-cultivated land | | | with light timber. | | | | | (47) 29.7.52. 20 miles north of Glad- | — | — | — 5017 | = = 20-0 stone. Brown shale. Coastal open | | forest with grass. | | | (48) 27.7.52. 40 miles north of Clare- | = | = | — | 5°75 | == = BS°b) mont. Black (?) alluvial soil. Dry | | | sclerophyll forest. | | | The soil samples were collected from that portion of the route from the eastern Kimberleys, north-west coast, sclerophyll woodlands southwards along the Stuart Highway and semi-desert terrain eastwards on the Barkley High- way, western Queensland, to the rain forests of north-east Queensland. The geographic distribution of Beijerinckia in Australia seems to be limited at 17-18° latitude. Of the 15 samples collected around the 19-5° latitude only one gave positive growth of Beijerinckia. It is possible that no Beijerinckia was detected south of 20° latitude. It should be kept in mind that the soil samples examined were in limited number for such a big area. However, if McKnight’s results are compiled with the present investigation, it seems that Beijerinckia does not occur south of the Tropic of Capricorn. It is important and very desirable to test more soil samples between 17° and 20° latitude in Australia before a definite conclusion can be made. The limit of 17-18° latitude may be used as a starting point for further investigations. TABLE 2. % Soil Containing Authors. Localities. Azotobacter. Beijerinckia. Jensen ae .. | New South Wales aie 25 = McKnight .. .. | Queensland. . Bre Be 43°15 = Swaby a .. | Victoria ae, a a 26-15 — Tchan ee .. | Sydney 2 Ne ug 22 = Tchan a .. | Northern Australia Se 15 35 The ecological conditions of Beijerinckia in Australia are not understood. The soil ‘type and its parent material in positive cases are indeed very variable (see Table 1). The analysis of C, P content and pH of soil samples did not show any correlation between presence and absence or number of Beijerinckia per g. of soil. On the other hand, Azotobacter did not occur at pH less than 5:5 except in one case of sporadic ‘presence of Azotobacter at pH = 5:1. The climatic environments have no apparent influence on the presence of Beijerinckia. It is clear that Beijerinckia can survive in low rainfall countries. The drought of 1952 in Northern Australia provided an example. Also in high rainfall country outside the tropical zone (Brisbane, Sydney, etc.) Beijerinckia seems to be absent (see Text- figure 1). Temperature cannot be considered as an important ecological factor in its distribution, since the occurrence of Beijerinckia took place in certain places where the 176 STUDIES OF N-FIXING BACTERIA. V, mean minimum temperature of 57-2°F. (14°C.) is lower than certain places outside the tropic zone, e.g. Brisbane 59:7°F. (15:4°C.). Under the experimental conditions Beijerinckia (isolated from Northern Australia) inoculated into soil and kept in a refrigerator (+4°C.) survived after 36 days. As along certain parts of the east coast of Australia (Queensland, N.S.W.) the winter temperature never goes much below that limit, there is no apparent reason to believe that Beijerinckia could be killed during the winter. Complete desiccation (with CaCl.) in the laboratory did not destroy Beijerinckia in soil after 36 days, but such a severe desiccation is not likely to occur in the temperate places of the east coast of Australia. This may suggest that Beijerinckia may survive in air-dried soil at normal humidities. TABLE 3. (Data compiled from Meteorological data, C.S.I.R.O., Melbourne, 1933. Pamphlet 42.) Mean Temperature (°F.). | Rainfall. Soil Sample No. Humidity. (Inches per +° max. +° min. Year.) 32 89-4 65-3 36 14-72 7 92 63-9 41 20°84 10) 145 17, 18; 23,25; 29). 94 | 66-7 51 26-48 38, 39, 40 0 oD ob 89-9 64-8 52 arr 41 ad oe ae Hs 78 57-2 74 51-84 NGS Pal oa 60 a oN 90 74-3 68 60-45 44 ia is ae ai 82-2 65:5 81 142-61 Bowen .. st BY. se 82-6 67-2 69 39-88 Rockhampton .. a6 aa 83°5 62°8 67 39°75 Brisbane as ae i 78-1 59-7 68 45-27 Sydney .. Ye aft ve 70:2 56-2 70 47-50 If the chemical and meteorological factors could not explain the absence of Beijerinckia outside the tropical zone of Australia, the only remaining hypothesis will be that Beijerinckia is a young genus which may have been introduced to this country very recently and has not had enough time to reach the rest of the continent. This hypothesis may not be considered as a valid one, since the movement of animal and human transport in Queensland is so intensive that the contamination from Northern Queensland can be realized in a matter of months. Furthermore, information in the literature shows that Beijerinckia has been found only in tropical countries. Altson (1936) in Malaya was probably the first person to detect Beijerinckia; later it was found in Indian soils by Starkey and De (1939), in Indonesia and Pacific islands by Derx et al. (1950), in Africa (Kauffmann, 1953) and in South America (Derx, 1952). Outside the tropical zone the Beijerinckia has been sought but unsuccessfully (Northern Africa (Derx, 1952); Southern France (Derx, 1950); N.S.W. (Jensen and Swaby, 1940; Tchan, 1952)). From these data one may conclude that if Beijerinckia has spread so widely in the tropics, including very long distances separated by oceans, it is not likely that it needs more time to reach the Australian soils south of the tropics. It is likely that the hypothesis mentioned above has no important value. : BY Y. T. TCHAN. iP It is not clear why Beijerinckia is a genus confined to tropical countries. This geographic limitation of Beijerinckia can be extended to the distribution of other N-fixing micro-organisms in the world. The distribution of Rhizobium is excluded in this paper because it is practically a question of distribution of legumes. The non- symbiotic N-fixing soil micro-organisms can be classified into four groups: blue-green algae (Nostoc and Anabaena), Clostridium, Azotobacter and Beijerinckia. (1) In the tropical countries the four groups of organisms have been detected. (2) In the temperate zone the absence of Beijerinckia reduces the number to three groups. (3) In the arctic and antarctic zones the early workers have reported the presence of Azotobacter. Rountree (1939) reported the presence of Azotobacter in Matquarie Island soils, but more recently Bunt could not confirm this result with soil samples collected in most suitable conditions. Also he reported that on the N-free media the Macquarie Island soil samples gave some colonies similar in appearance to Azotobacter. NS - = N ROCKHAMPTON ~.4( € BRBANE 4 - as f f Text-figure 1—Map showing distribution of Beijerinckia, the latitudes and the rainfall. aya reueneu sie positive soil; —...... negative soil. The early positive results may be due to contamination of soil samples. On the other hand, in Greenland, the search for Azotobacter has been always negative (Barthel, 1922; Jensen, 1951). .- The absence of Azotobacter in the very cold regions could be partly explained by the death of Azotobacter (including cysts) at a prolonged low temperature. Wang (1949) has reported that Azotobacter is killed if the culture is kept in a refrigerator for a prolonged period. So the very cold regions contain only two groups of non-symbiotic N-fixing micro-organisms (blue-green algae and Clostridium). This division of the world, according to the distribution of non-symbiotic N-fixing micro-organisms, into three zones is still at a purely hypothetical stage. It could only be established with some certainty if a very extensive survey in different regions could be carried out. At the present stage this suggestion may provide a starting point for future research work. CONCLUSION. The present results have contributed to our knowledge by showing that: (1) Beijerinckia is present in Northern Australia. To the best of my knowledge it is the first time that these organisms have been detected in this country. 178 STUDIES OF N-FIXING BACTERIA, V. (2) The distribution of Beijerinckia in Australia seems to be limited to the north of 17-18° latitude. It is likely to be absent south of the 20° latitude. (3) The ecological factors of the distribution of Beijerinckia in Australia are still not understood. Some chemical, geological and climatic factors are discussed. (4) A suggestion has been made to divide the world into three zones, according to: the distribution of non-symbiotic N-fixing micro-organisms: (@) tropical zone with the presence of Beijerinckia, Azotobacter, Clostridium and blue-green algae; (0b) temperate zone with Azotobacter, Clostridium and blue-green algae; (c) arctic and antarctic zone: with Clostridium and blue-green algae. This suggestion is purely hypothetical but may provide a starting point for future research. Acknowledgements. The author is indebted to Dr. H. S. McKee for his help and criticism; to Mr. H. Fletcher, leader of the Australian Museum Central and North-West Expedition, and particularly to Mr. J. A. Keast, who collected the soil samples; also to Mr. Lovett, of C.S.1I.R.0., for sending 15 soil samples from Queensland. This work would have been impossible without their collaboration. His sincere thanks are extended to Dr. W. R. Browne for geological information, to Professor H. G. Derx for his private communica- tions and to Dr. A. B. Walkom for his help. References. ALTSON, R. A., 1936.—J. Ag. Sc., 26: 268. BARTHEL, C., 1922.—Medd. om Gr@nland, 64: No. 1. Bunt, J. S., 1953.—Private communication. Burp, J. S., 1948.—Soil Sc., 65: 227. CoLuins, FE. M., 1952.—Aust. J. Hap. Bio. Med. Sc., 30: 587. Derx, H. G., 1950.—Proc. Kon. Ned. Akad. V. Wet., Amsterdam, 53: 140. ——., 1950.— An. Bog., 1: 1. ———,, 1952.—-Private communication on the isolation of Beijerinckia in South America and North Africa. JENSEN, H. L., 1940.—PrRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 65: 1. ———, 1951.—Meddel. om Groéniland, 142, 8: 23. , and Swapsy, R. J., 1940.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 65: 557. KAUFFMANN, J.—See Y. T. Tchan, 19538. McKnicuT, T., 1949.—Q/ld. J. Agr. Sci., 6: 11. RouUNTREE, P. M., 1939.—B.A.N.Z.A.R.H. Reports S.A., Vol. II, p. 7, pp. 125. STARKEY and Dr, 1939—Soil Sci., 47: 329. 5 Swasy, R. J., 1939.—Aust. J. Hap. Biol. Med. Sci., 17: 44. TCHAN, Y. T., 1952.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 89. , 1952.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 77: 92 —————" (1953) PROCs abIININe (SOC INESSWe, Sie Sse WANG, T. L., 1949.—Thesis Université de Paris. BXPLANATION OF PLATE X, FIGS. 3, 4. Fig. 3.—Photomicrograph of Bejijerinckia in mixed culture. Fig. 4.—Top: Colonies of Beijerinckia on N-free medium three weeks old. Lower right: Colonies of Azotobacter, same age. Lower left: Colonies of other bacteria. 179 A NEW SPECIES OF PSHUDOPHRYNE FROM VICTORIA. By Joun A. Moore, Fulbright Research Scholar, Sydney University. (One Text-figure. ) [Read 29th July, 1953.] The Australian Museum has in its collections an undescribed Pseudophryne of a most striking kind. It is represented by a single specimen. The basing of a new species on a single specimen is a hazardous procedure, but in this instance I think it is justified in view of the unusual characteristics shown by the specimen. There is no other Pseudophryne that has even a remote resemblance. PSEUDOPHRYNE CORROBOREE, N. Sp. Type: R13103, a male in the Australian Museum, Sydney. Collected by Ossie Rixon at Towong Hill Station, Corryong, Victoria. Donated by T. W. Mitchell. The type locality is near the Victoria-New South Wales border, about 25 miles north-west of Mount Kosciusko. | . | Pseudophryne corroboree in dorsal (left) and ventral (right) views. Approximately twice natural size. Description: A Pseudophryne having the same general structural features as P. australis (Gray) and P. bibroni Gtinther. Body length 24 mm.; tibia 7-9 mm.; width of head at posterior end of jaws 7:0 mm.; tip of snout to centre of nares 1:1 mm.; centre of nares to anterior corner of eye 1:7 mm.; anterior-posterior dimension of eye 2-2 mm. The three dimensions last given were obtained by viewing the specimen laterally under a binocular microscope and the measurements made with an ocular scale. The fourth toe reaches the snout when the leg is extended along the side of the body. The shape of the head and the structure of the hand and foot are the same as in P. australis and 180 A NEW SPECIES OF PSEUDOPHRYNE FROM VICTORIA, P. bibroni. A detailed description of these and other members of the genus will be found. in Parker (1940). This species differs from all others of the genus in its unusual dorsal pattern, which can be best appreciated by reference to the figure. In the type the dark bands are black and the light areas pale yellow. Dark and light areas of similar tones cover the entire body. The tubercles at the base of the fingers and on the metacarpals are light, contrasting strongly with the dark background. Many of the tubercles of the foot, including the inner metatarsal tubercle, are likewise light in colour against a dark background. The postfemoral glands cannot be distinguished externally, but the’ area where they occur in other species of Pseudophryne is light in colour. Diagnosis: Pseudophryne corroboree can be distinguished from all other species of the genus and from all other Australian frogs by the boldly contrasting dark and light stripes on the dorsal surface. The specific name was suggested by the resemblance of the dorsal pattern of P. corroboree to the body paintings used by some Australian aboriginal tribes in their corroborees. When specimen R13103 was received at the Australian Museum, Mr. Kinghorn realized that it was an undescribed species and attempted to secure more information and specimens. No additional specimens have been received, but this excerpt of a letter from Mr. Mitcheli is of interest: “It was found at the foot of a fence post at the foot of the Round Mountain. After getting your letter asking for information I questioned the finder, one Ossie Rixon. He said that he has seen them before about the Round Mountain and also about the Fifteen Mile. He said ‘they are rare but you do see them... generally about the cattle pads .. . they don’t hop like a frog but sort of go along on all fours right up on their toes... they don’t squat like a frog .. .’.” This type of locomotion is common in other species of Pseudophryne. I am indebted to Mr. Kinghorn for allowing me to describe this species. Literature Cited. PARKER, H. W., 1940.—The Australian frogs of the family Leptodactylidae. Novitates Zoologicae, 42: 1-106. Proc. Linx. Soc. N.S.W., 1953 PLATE y. 4 af C27Riambeth —)\ -comatawa TERTIARY ~ RECENT. SAM ITES QL ADAMEL LITE Seanco QUARTZ FELSPAR POR PHY a oan - x etictarl poaatecfeniye € + + + HeLLenscie, seLwone = Le JA WOMDALGA MASSES. XU al OOD DIOTITE. GRATE — \ GRANODIORITE — 1M X | wanTABADGERY ano (i SEO ae t ef) x—_wJ RR Scteoal ADELONG MORI TE Messceceee METAMORPHOSED BASIC ROCKS AMPHIBOLITES ETC. PP 20817 can000 © ses) = IN UPPER onDONcUN —3— asen | ne A A Stake ano oe oF scope 1M METASEOIMEN TS WITH TREND AND PLUNGE OF LINEATION CO sramx ano pe oF cuxvace : IN METASEOIMENT: Ail Vornusontelce FOLIATION OR SCHLIEREN IN GRANITES c m= CRUSH BANOS IW GRANITE orm” FAULT INFEARED 5 f ee oe _—¥ me — Le x x ATumbarumba —A x A x OUTER LIMIT OF BICTITE ZONE enemy pe en KNOTTED SCHIST ZONE wm sp 7 HIGH GRADE IONE sameeren ort me a v Courabyra TUMBLONG x x €x ». Fortiow gS x mK x KUNAMA) GEOLOGICAL SKETCH MAP OF THE WANTABADGERY ADELONG TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. SCALE ey zZ 4 Sunes — Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1953. PLATE Itt. Eucalyptus sideroxylon and H#. albens, and hybrids. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1953. PLATE Iv. Anthers of Eucalyptus sideroxylon and E. albeis.~ Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1953. PLATE VI. PO Tg (hae AP Se hs co. RE ree ny o <= ———————————— | PLATE YII, Proc, Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 1953, Spores of Septoria and Selenophoma, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1958, SUESSERSESRAC RVR ees eaaea ee TTitiLitisii list ftiliiitiiiit i BRSRSRORARASARAS SR aeeeeseseee TrTTittiiitiiitiiitittiiiiiiittiitt st itty Bd he Rhed derdietadhicinclpachainaleothatbehenbedeahorheoldtod atbopeheterdodudhadedooted TT ttricitiftititct tt ilittisiliitisyiiti iit MAREK ESSeesee WRRARAKARAKESAR BATRA Se PTD Ade dacdach hood odhecbedhctondeds RRVSSHRS See eseeeese VSRASSe see eaese BRU esChaewresneseneeee 2 cleebadh nbd dedbe dade Beckecbeaiachebedocksecbndhoded SRRSBHSKPR RSAC Ree RRS 22 SRT SR Bets esee StaeSeeseer eee ; SkOc eee reaeeae oe # RSCHKGSEKRAR SCRE S ees RESGSCRRREReS aes Sneuaesenne>~ aesserar ’ eesterae. | yo a ie SRERESHR SE. eegeenee SOS eeeea: SVSsee nas Sassen ews RESRAR EEE, Beeesgege SR eneeawe Pee sere ee & es erenaee Seeuseenens PE EEEE EP ET ES Leaves and seedling plant of Medicago, PLATE VIII. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 19538, ~. + 6 s e110 Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia, PLATE IX. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1953. PLATE X. 1, 2: Growth of soil algae. 3: Beijerinckia in mixed cuiture; 4: Beijerinckia, Azotobacter, and other bacteria. Va oe 181 STUDIES IN THE METAMORPHIC AND PLUTONIC GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, N.S.W. Part IJ. INTERMEDIATE—BASIC ROCKS. By T. G. VAtiance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plate xi; two Text-figures.) [Read 30th September, 1953.] Synopsis. The intermediate to basic rocks of igneous origin in this area are confined to a relatively narrow belt running from near Nangus to south-east of Batlow. A metamorphic progression from low-grade Greenschist Facies rocks in the north to amphibolites and (locally) pyroxene granulites in the south is noted. This progression is more or less equivalent (as far as metamorphic grade is concerned) to that shown by the metasediments of this region (see Part I of these Studies). A number of the rocks of igneous origin do not fit into this progression and it is suggested that they post-date the metamorphism. Two other rocks, not in the “basic belt’’, viz., the ‘“kersantites’’ and norite-gabbro at Adelong, are briefly discussed. INTRODUCTION. In Part I of these studies (Vallance, 1953) attention was mainly confined to the metasediments and the manner in which the metamorphism had affected them. Brief mention was, however, made of the fact that in the Adelong—Batlow area and to the north-west, near Nangus, rocks of igneous origin occurred in a more or less definite belt running parallel to the strike of the metasediments. The rocks of this belt form the subject of this paper. Although not so clearly demonstrated as with the meta- sediments the evidence of metamorphic variations in this case is still of some interest. ROcKS OF THE “BASIC BELT’’. In the northern part of the belt the rocks of igneous parentage are often rather fine-grained and mostly occur as small discontinuous lenses among the metasediments. Poor exposures often make it impossible to determine definitely whether the rocks are extrusive or intrusive; the restricted nature of the outcrops perhaps suggests that they are intrusive. Metasediments usually predominate in this part of the belt, the ‘“‘igneous” rocks playing a minor réle, but to the south-east this situation is reversed. South of Bangandang Trig. Station the rocks of igneous parentage are, as a rule, coarser, often less or non-schistose, and outcrop along a tract of country several miles wide separating the Ellerslie granite on its western side from the Wondalga granite to the east. Minor bands of sandy sediments are associated with the basic rocks in this part of the belt. Because of the predominance of basic rocks over metasediments in the southern part of the belt it alone has been marked distinctively on the map (see Plate v of Part I). The belt has not been traced to the south of Batlow, but about 34 miles away, at Tumut Pond, on roughly the same line of strike, basic to ultrabasic rocks (serpentines, etc.) have been mapped by the geologists of the Snowy Mountains Hydro-Hlectricity Authority. Many of the rocks of this belt are more or less altered or metamorphosed. Low- grade rocks occur near Nangus, whilst, further south, the metamorphism becomes more intense, the metamorphic grade of many of the basic rocks increasing with it. At the upper extreme of the metamorphic series these rocks are represented by amphibolites and pyroxene-bearing types. The basic rocks with a metamorphic status in accord with that of the metasediments may be regarded, in general, whether extrusive or intrusive, as ante-dating the general metamorphism which affected this region. There is a possibility, however, that a few of the rocks considered may be post-metamorphic in age. Some of the types from the southern end of the belt still display features P 182 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, characteristic of igneous rocks (diorites-gabbros); these will be considered after the amphibolites. In this study no attempt has been made to examine each metamorphosed igneous. rock in terms of its parent material. Most of the rocks are sufficiently close chemically to be considered as a group, for it must be realized that relatively small differences in the mineralogy of the parent rocks will be obscured by the mineralogical convergence induced by the metamorphism. The lack of convenient index minerals or distinctive textural features precludes any detailed subdivision of these rocks into metamorphic zones, whilst the almost complete absence of pelitic metasediments from the southern part of the belt prevents any extension of the previously-used zonal system to include the basic rocks. A twofold metamorphic grouping will be adopted here. The lower grade rocks (from the northern part of the belt) are regarded as greenschists (they have Greenschist Facies assemblages, though not all are markedly schistose) and will be considered separately from the more southerly basic rocks which include more highly metamorphosed types representative of the Epidote-Albite Amphibolite and Amphibolite Facies (Turner, 1948). The greenschist group embraces the metamorphic equivalents of the low-grade and biotite zones as established for the metasediments. The second group includes types (not all of the second group rocks conform to this) which are correlable with the metasediments in the knotted schist and high-grade zones. GREENSCHISTS. In the vicinity of Nangus village masses of rocks grouped as greenschists occur along the regional strike and are associated with jaspers and low-grade siliceous metasediments. Mostly small, the masses may range up to about 30 feet in thickness; they are usually rather restricted laterally. Typically the rocks are greenish-grey, dark green, or even black, fine-grained crystal- line varieties characterized in almost every case by the rather abundant development of sodic felspar. Both massive and schistose types are found and, although their mineralogical constitutions may be, in general, comparable, the schistose rocks tend to have fibrous amphibole whilst the more massive varieties are often chlorite-rich. Deformative forces have frequently produced a “rolled-out” effect in the schists and traces of original phenocrysts (particularly pyroxene) may remain as relics. Signs of original sub-ophitic or intersertal textures are still evident in some of the more massive rocks. Albite (Abys1o) usually occurs as laths or subhedral tabular grains and apparently replaces earlier, more calcic, plagioclase. There is no obvious tendency for large albite porphyroblasts to develop. The felspar is often somewhat dusted and included epidote granules are common. Associated with the albite may be found augite, hornblende, actinolite, epidote, chlorite, calcite, sphene, and iron oxides (mainly magnetite), though usually not all occur together. Pyroxene and hornblende are unstable in this environment and occur here as relics from the original rocks. Colourless to grey subhedral or anhedral grains of pyroxene (+ve, Z*e up to 42°; augite) usually have patchy surfaces due to alteration to uralitic amphibole and epidote. Occasionally, as in the altered hornblende-augite porphyrite, about three-quarters of a mile south-west of Nangus village, subhedral pyroxene grains may show less alteration than the accompanying amphibole phenocrysts. Hornblende crystals up to half an inch long occur here, but these are not typical of the rocks in this area; in many cases they are absent. Alteration of this hornblende (2V very large; —ve; Z*c = 25°; X = pale yellow-green, Y = yellow-brown, Z = yellow-brown) to sea-green chlorite and epidote is, in some cases, complete. The conversion of hornblende to fibrous actinolite occurs in many of the more completely reconstructed types, particularly in the schists. In fact, pale fibrous amphibole, with epidote and felspar, constitutes the major part of the base of such greenschists. Faint pleochroism from almost colourless to pale green or bluish-green is characteristic; Z*c varies up to about 19°. As a rule, where this amphibole is abundant chlorite is either reduced in importance or actually BY T. G. VALLANCE. 183 absent. A darker, more strongly pleochroic actinolite (X = pale yellow-green, Y = yellow- green, Z = deep leaf-green; Z*c = 19°) is prominent in a few rocks where it takes the place of the paler variety. Epidote, usually granular, is widespread both in the base and in the phenocrysts of these rocks. Aggregates of epidote grains at times give the impression of pseudo- morphing earlier ferromagnesian minerals. In the schists the epidote granules are often grouped in bands. Both pleochroic (pale yellow-brown to colourless) common epidote and colourless clinozoisite occur in these rocks; the former is by far the more important. Coarse, brilliantly pleochroic (X = colourless, Y = greenish-yellow, Z = pale lemon-yellow) epidote sometimes occurs with quartz in veins in the more massive rocks. TABLE 1. 1 A B SiO. 57-24 56-65 59°59 Al,03 16-63 20-37 17°31 Fe,0, 2-46 1-24 3-33 FeO 4-21 3-28 3-13 MgO 3-06 3-20 2-75 CaO 4-50 4-31 5-80 Na,O 5-83 5-65 3-58 K,0 1-24 2-75 2-04 H,0+ 1-51 1-43 H,0— 0-48 0-11 } bea TD) ease on he hare ee 0-95 0-67 0:77 Hy Ome Met d tite yet eters n.d. 0-29 0-26 MOR eee as SAO AT DOE 0-04 0-08 0-18 CO, Paani: biTh. Vo aE 2-05 — - 100-20 100-03 100-00 1. Albite-epidote-chlorite-calcite rock (greenschist group). Por. 85, Par. of Nangus, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. A. Augite-hornblende andesite. Wellington district, N.S.W. Anal. M. J. Colditz. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 81, 1948, p. 192. B. Average of 87 rocks called andesites (calc. by Daly). Quoted from Johannsen (1937), vol. III, p. 168. In the chloritic rocks the distinctive mineral is usually widely distributed througm both base and phenocryst-relics whilst patches of it may fill interspaces between felspars.. The colour is somewhat variable but most flakes are pleochroic in shades of pale yellow-green to darker green or brownish-green. Where determinable the optical sign: is positive; birefringence weak (up to about 0-006); anomalous interference tints (blues, purples, and even browns) are typical; the chlorite is probably a variety of pennine. Although typical of the rather massive rocks, several examples of chlorite-bearing schists have been noted. The latter seem to have no regular distribution. Calcite may locally become important in the low-grade rocks but normally occurs only as an accessory. The analysed specimen (Table 1, no. 1) has about 2% CO, due to the presence of calcite. Accessories such as sphene and iron-ore have a wide distribution. Small quantities of quartz are present in some cases. From their mineral constitution it is believed that these rocks were derived frone igneous rocks of from intermediate to basic nature. Only one rock from the northern part of the belt has been analysed and its composition is quoted in Table 1. It is not far from an andesite in composition. Some of the types not analysed may be a little more basic than this. Despite the apparently wide variety of rock types in this group, the essentiaFk mineral assemblages involved are relatively few and simple. Such accessories as 184 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, quartz, iron oxides, and sericite (rather rare) are omitted from the following groups for the sake of simplicity. The main mineral assemblages are: (@) albite-epidote- chlorite; (0) albite-epidote-chlorite-actinolite (not as common as the others); (c) albite- actinolite-epidote (sphene); (d) albite-chlorite-epidote-calcite (sphene). Such associations are quite well known from low-grade metamorphic terrains. All are, in fact, typical of the Greenschist Facies (see Turner, 1948; Billings and White, 1950). There is a tendency for the formation of simple assemblages such as albite- chlorite: (and occasionally albite-actinolite) in some cases but they are rarely, if ever, extensively developed. Turner (1948, p..97) has suggested that such an assemblage as albite-chlorite owes its origin to the existence of an open system whereby circulating solutions were able to influence the mineralogical arrangement in a rock which, in a closed system, would acquire a stable assemblage of the type albite-epidote-actinolite- sSphene. Although many of these rocks may be confidently assigned to the Greenschist Facies, division into subfacies is not readily attained. Assemblages such as those mentioned above are, in general, just as typical of the biotite-chlorite subfacies (Turner) as of the muscovite-chlorite subfacies. Thus it will be seen that no marked change should be expected where these rocks pass from a region characterized by muscovite- chlorite (in the rocks of appropriate composition) to the biotite zone (as defined by the pelites). Wiseman (1934) has shown that in the south-eastern Highlands of Scotland there is no marked difference between the epidiorites of the chlorite and biotite zones. Where the composition does permit, biotite may appear in relatively basic rocks in the biotite zone, but such conditions are more often satisfied by basic sediments than by rocks of igneous origin (see Phillips, 1930; Macdonald, 1944). The so-called kersantites at Adelong carry biotite due to their richness in K.O, but biotite has not been found in any of the greenschists examined from the “basic belt’. An important matter arises in the interpretation of the genesis of the mineral assemblages of these rocks; it applies particularly to the massive types. Such minerals as albite, chlorite, epidote, and actinolitic amphibole are commoniy found in Greenschist Facies rocks and may be produced by low-grade dynamic metamorphism; they may, however, result from late-magmatic or deuteric activity. Some of the massive rocks discussed here may post-date the general metamorphism and could well have been affected by deuteric action alone. The presence or absence of schistosity in the low-grade rocks is probably not a completely reliable guide upon which to base any relative age determination. Nevertheless it seems possible that all the rocks considered in this section may not be of the same age nor have had the same background. AS far as mineral assemblages are concerned, the results of the two processes, low-grade dynamic metamorphism or deuteric alteration of later rocks, are roughly convergent, although there may be a tendency in the present suite of rocks for chlorite to appear rather than amphibole where the latter process has dominated. Although it might be argued that the deuterized rocks are non-metamorphic and therefore do not belong strictly to the Greenschist Facies, it is expected that not all Greenschist Facies mineral assemblages result exclusively from low-grade dynamic metamorphism. RocKS FROM THE SOUTHERN PART OF THE “BASIC BELT’. (ant Amphibolites and Pyroxene Granulites. Passing southwards from Nangus along the strike it can be noticed that the common amphibole-bearing rocks become darker and more recrystallized. The effect is seen to advantage along the north-eastern contact of the Ellerslie granite and to the south the contrast may still be well marked. At the actual contact the basic rocks have been injected by granitic material on a small scale and locally hybrids are developed. In the Greenbank area (the Monaro Highway crosses Nacka Nacka Creek at this locality) the basic rocks tend to become true amphibolites characterized by the assemblage green hornblende-plagioclase. These amphibolites are dark, compact rocks, some. with granoblastic structure, sometimes variable in grain size, and occasionally a A Oe BY T. G. VALLANCE. 185 veined by quartzo-felspathic material when near the granite. Typically they consist of abundant euhedral to subhedral green aluminous hornblende grains in a finely granular base of plagioclase (see Plate xi, B). The amphibole (X = pale yellow-brown, Y = brownish-green, Z = dark green; Zc = 25°; a = 1:661, y = 1:678) is distinctly different from the amphibole (actinolite) of the greenschists. Odd fragments of paler, more actinolitic amphibole may occur in the amphibolites but in at least some cases they are related to local retrogression. In the somewhat schistose amphibolites the amphibole porphyroblasts may be slightly rotated. Plagioclase in the amphibolites is° granular, twinned, and is often remarkably clear. Large felspar areas (up to about 0-3 mm.) between the amphiboles resemble porphyroblasts but are usually aggregates of fine grains (smaller felspar porphyroblasts do, however, occur in a number of cases). The felspar is more calcic than that of the low-grade rocks and though oligoclase is the most usual type it may grade as far as andesine. Quartz is of variable development; at times it is quite absent, whilst locally it may appear as an important accessory. Epidote-clinozoisite is not common in the amphi- bolites but rocks rich in this mineral do occur in this part of the belt. Frequently the epidote-rich rocks are obviously banded.» The felspar associated with the epidote in such cases is usually very finely granular and untwinned but appears to be more calcic than albite. In general, there seems to be an inverse relation between the epidote minerals and hornblende in this locality (cf. Harker, 1939, p. 269). The reason for the appearance of epidote in the banded rocks is probably chemical, and chemical variations are also responsible, no doubt, for the rare occurrences of biotite (brown or green) and, even less commonly, of muscovite in a few of the rocks of the Greenbank area. The mica-bearing rocks must be richer in alkalis than are the normal amphi- bolites but this has not yet been confirmed by analysis. It is not clear whether these micaceous rocks are strictly of igneous parentage or whether they were derived from basic sediments intruded by or interbedded with the amphibolites. One specimen of amphibolite has been analysed with the result given in Table 2 (no. 1). The most remarkable features are the rather low MgO and high CaO contents, whilst it is readily seen that in composition the rock approaches a basalt. It is a matter of no little interest to note that the rock is chemically close to certain amphibole- bearing granulites and amphibolites from the Cooma district. Joplin (1942) was struck by the distinctive composition of these latter rocks. Somewhat similar types have also been found at Albury. The Albury and Cooma examples were compared by Joplin (1947), but it can be seen that on an ACF diagram (Text-fig. 1) the former fall outside the field which Dr. Joplin drew to include the Cooma representatives of this group. On this diagram the analysed rock from the present area falls within the “Cooma” field. Other rocks plotted on this diagram include the “andesitic’ type from Nangus (Table 1, no. 1). When calculated without regard for CO, it also appears-within the enclosed field as does the ‘‘kersantite’ from Adelong when treated in the same way. Near the granite contact at George’s Hill, about three miles west of Adelong, a few of the basic rocks are characterized by large (up to 6 mm.) crystals of amphibole, some of which, at least, are derived from pyroxene (+ve; Zc = 44°). The amphibole is’ usually a pale green, feebly pleochroic type with extinction angles up to 24°. On occasions it may be recrystallized to aggregates of more strongly pleochroic hornblende like that in the normal amphibolites. Epidote and sphene are common in these rocks and oligoclase normally is associated with granular amphibole in the base. As amphi- bole and not pyroxene characterizes the metamorphosed basic rocks in this part of the belt it seems probable that the latter mineral, now partly replaced, is primary. Pyroxene does, however, become a constituent of certain metamorphosed rocks further to the south, near the village of Sharp’s Creek (about three miles west of Wondalga). These rocks are typically dark grey, fine-grained, compact granulites consisting of rhombic pyroxene, plagioclase, quartz, biotite, and magnetite. The pyroxene is grey in colour, non-pleochroic, optically negative (hypersthene), and occurs as small, ragged, sometimes poikiloblastic grains which occasionally form narrow bands or 186 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, II, strings through the rocks. Plagioclase is granular, of variable size, the larger grains (about 0-4 mm.) often being rich in tiny quartz inclusions; it is only occasionally twinned. Its composition is more calcic than that of the felspar of the amphibolites and ranges down to labradorite (Ab,,). Strongly pleochroic biotite (X = straw yellow, Y = red-brown, Z = dark red-brown) flakes are less common but still widespread. This mineral association hypersthene-labradorite (probably indicative of Pyroxene Hornfels Facies metamorphism; evidence of Granulite Facies conditions is quite lacking in this area) in strongly recrystallized rocks has not been found extensively, in fact it seems to be represented only on the western side of the basic belt in this more TABLE 2. 1 | A B Cc D E 210. .. ac 48-41 49-50 48-25 48-76 49-07 47-24 Al,O3; .. ee 16-78 16:47 16:67 14-96 21-76 18°55 Fe,0; 2-90 0-72 2:66 1:91 3°44 6-02 FeO 9-03 9-10 6-09 6°75 8-74 4-06 MgO .. Oc 5°35 7-47 7:65 7°34 3°65 5°24 CaO o's 13°33 14-79 9-22 10:00 10-32 11-72 Na,0 1:89 0:47 1:67 1:03 1-03 2-42 K5 Orci: 0-47 0-32 0-84 0-95 0-37 0-15 H,0+ .. 0-44 0:57 3°17 2-97 0:62 2-24 H,O- .. 0-27 0-03 0-25 0°35 0-14 0:21 ‘TiO, ilpalts) 0:75 0-78 0-65 0-69 1:46 P.O; n.d. 0-05 0-26 0-13 tr. 0-26 Mno... ae 0-32 0-16 0-15 0-17 n.d 0°31 CO, Be 5:0 = = 1-88 3-40 = 0-19 BOGS: = aie s'0 — — = 1:09 = 0-05 100-38 100-40 99-52 100-46 99-83 100-12 1. Amphibolite. Top of George’s Hill, Por. 58, Par. of Ellerslie, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. A. Hornblende granulite (with trace of pyroxene). Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942, p. 172. B. Altered basic rock. Albury area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. . Ibid., 72, 1947, p. 90. f. “ Trachytic rock.’”’ Hume Reservoir (Albury area). Anal. W. A. Greig. Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1924, p. 105. D. “ Amphibolite ’”’ xenolith. Murrumbucca Creek at Gap Road crossing (Cooma area). Anal. G. A. Joplin. Un- published analysis by courtesy of the analyst. H. Basalt (porphyritic central type). Mull, Scotland. Anal. E. G. Radley. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland, “‘ Mull’’, 1924, p. 24. (Called porphyritic basic augite andesite lava in Swmm. Progress for 1915, p. 26.) southerly part of its outcrop and even there it is not very widespread. It is interesting to note that the apparent facies progression from Amphibolite Facies to Pyroxene Hornfels Facies takes place in rocks which are all roughly in equivalent positions relative to the Ellerslie granite. Normal pelites do not occur near this part of the belt, but the suggestion is made that these pyroxenic rocks and the amphibolites are more or less isogradal with the high-grade and knotted-schist-zone metasediments. (0) Rocks of Doubtful Metamorphic Status. The greater part of the belt from near Adelong to Batlow consists of amphibole- and, in some cases, pyroxene-bearing rocks which are usually coarser (fine-medium grain size) than the types discussed in the preceding section and are of somewhat doubtful metamorphic status. Most of them probably ante-date the Hllerslie and Wondalga granites, but frequently their textural aspect is more like that of an igneous rock than one which has suffered much metamorphism. Amongst the members of this group a certain amount of diversity with regard to mineral content and texture exists. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 187 Hypersthene-labradorite rocks (these are quite different from the pyroxene-granu- lites mentioned above) characterized by laths of twinned felspar and subhedral pleochroic (pink to grey-green) hypersthene have been found to the east of Adelong Creek in the southern part of the Parish of Adelong and further to the west near the Sharp’s Creek road. Olivine has not been encountered in these rocks which otherwise are similar to certain finer-grained phases of the Adelong norite. A feature of these rocks is the presence of ragged grains of magnetite of apparently late crystallization. Pleochroic green hornblende is sometimes moulded on to the pyroxene. Brown biotite flakes are not uncommon. The relation of these rocks to the following has not been established, but as they all occur in the same belt they are considered together here. Many of the intermediate to basic rocks display evidence of progressive mineralogical changes with the development of minerals such as green hornblende and, in places, actinolite at the expense of pyroxene and brown hornblende. All gradations are found from rocks typically carrying the former minerals to those with pyroxene and/or brown hornblende which may retain an “igneous” appearance. In addition to being directly derived from pre-existing pyroxene or amphibole the green hornblende also occurs as needles and blades in the base of such rocks. Rarely the amphibole of the base may be granular. Rocks particularly rich in fibrous tremolite-actinolite are locally found in shear-zones; a good example occurs near the southern boundary of the Parish of Adelong on the Adelong-Wondalga road. Colourless pyroxene, somewhat granular or in prismatic crystals, is often less altered to green amphibole than is the accompanying brown hornblende. The pyroxene (+ve; Zc = 43°) is a diopsidic augite. Granular clinozoisite occurs with it in places. Most of the rocks of this group carry felspar, about andesine in composition. Twinning is common and irregular extinction features due to strain or even actual ruptures may occur, particularly in the larger grains. In general, the felspar of these basic dioritic rocks is quite fresh, but occasionally it may be replaced by albite—perhaps as a result of deuteric alteration. The albite-bearing rocks are not widespread. Of the accessories in the rocks of this whole group the most important are apatite, sphene, and magnetite; quartz rarely plays more than an accessory role. Near the top of the ridge on the Sharp’s Creek road a few rocks are marked by the presence of large (up to 10 mm.) euhedral pyroxene crystals, sometimes rendered patchy by partial alteration to amphibole, set in a granular matrix consisting essentially of pyroxene, green-brown hornblende, andesine-labradorite, brown biotite, and iron-ore. The pyroxene of the large crystals is augitic, whilst hypersthene is represented in the base. Rhombic pyroxene has, in places, grown on the margins of the augite (Plate xi, C), but elsewhere the clinopyroxene may have an amphibole-mantle. The reason for these apparent anomalies is not clear, but the presence of hypersthene mantles might suggest a metamorphic origin. Diopside grains fringed with granular hypersthene occur in certain basic charnockites in Sweden (Quensel, 1951) as well as in India and Uganda. In such cases the reaction diopside — hypersthene is almost certainly related to the deep-seated plutonic environment in which the charnockites were formed. It might be argued that the Sharp’s Creek road rock has suffered a metamorphism of the type which affected the pyroxene granulite (see p. 185) about one and a half miles away, but there is not much evidence upon which to establish this. Late hypersthene associated with hornblende and biotite also occurs in the Adelong norite-gabbro (in the latter the hypersthene crystallized over a considerable period relative to the clino- pyroxene), a rock which does not appear to have suffered much metamorphism. This introduces a doubt as to whether the rock under discussion owes its appearance today to metamorphic recrystallization or to an unusual type of primary igneous crystalliza- tion; at present no really satisfactory answer suggests itself. Wilson (1952) records hypersthene of metasomatic origin replacing and mantling clinopyroxene and associated with biotite, but there is little evidence to support the view that the hypersthene in the present case is metasomatic. 188 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, Two relatively small masses of dioritic-gabbroic rocks, in many respects similar to the aforementioned basic diorites, occur in the neighbourhood of Bangandang Trig. Station. One of these masses is enclosed by the Ellerslie granite, and the second, roughly in the line of strike of the belt, invades low-grade metasediments. Poor exposures are typical of the contacts of both of these masses; the second does not seem to have had much thermal effect on the metasediments. The rocks of these two masses are more or less massive with a dark colour and medium grain size and consist mainly of amphibole and plagioclase. The zoned plagioclase crystals (andesine-labradorite) often have epidotized cores. The average grain size of the felspar in the more northerly mass is distinctly less than that of the large hornblende crystals (3-4 mm.). The grain size is more uniform in the mass enclosed by the granite. Interstitial quartz (Sometimes in graphic intergrowth with felspar) is a rare accessory; other accessories are apatite, sphene, and iron-ore. Small relict patches of pyroxene (both rhombic and monoclinic, but mainly the latter) fringed by brown hornblende (pleochroic from pale straw to dark brown; Zc = 26°) occur in some cases. Brown hornblende also appears as well-formed crystals and grains mantled by green hornblende (X = pale yellow-green, Y = medium yellow-green, Z = bluish-green). Some of the brown hornblende patches have a subophitic aspect. Pale green fibrous -actinolite is not uncommon; frequently it grows on the margins of the green hornblende. The series pyroxene — brown hornblende — green hornblende — actinolite (uralite) may be regarded (see Erdmannsdorffer, 1947; Nickel, 1952) as a normal scheme associated with the cooling of dioritic or gabbroic magmas, although similar mineral changes could conceivably be brought about by metamorphic agencies (cf. the concept of magmatic-metamorphic convergence; see Hrdmannsdorffer, 1948). Brown hornblende may develop in certain metamorphosed basic rocks in proximity to plutonic masses (Egeler, 1947; Deer, 1953), but, as Hskola (1939) has said, ‘der braunen Hornblenden hoherer Temperaturbereiche der Magmagesteine und der gemeinen griinen Hornblenden, wie sie charakterischerweise in den Gesteinen der Amphibolitfazies und noch in manchen Epidotamphiboliten”. In the present case the brown hornblende occurs both near to and away from the EHllerslie granite mass and the area of true amphibolites; there can be little doubt that the mineral is primary and magmatic. Similar green hornblende also occurs in the two masses, one of which, as was said, is remote from the higher- grade part of the region, and it is reasonable to expect that it, too, may have been part of a magmatic reaction series associated with cooling (probably the same is true of the hornblendes in the basic diorites of the ‘basic belt”). When we come to the actinolitic amphibole there is not sufficient clear evidence to prove definitely whether it belongs strictly to this cooling series or whether it is related to some later low-grade metamorphism... Although the rocks are apparently massive, their felspar often shows signs of fracture which may have been related to some period of low-grade metamorphic activity. The difficulty in assessing the extent of the metamorphism which affected these rocks, together with the rest of the members of this group, is the reason for their being discussed under the heading “of doubtful metamorphic status”. In many cases it seems that the metamorphism (sensw stricto), if any, which affected. them was not intense. (c) Concluding Remarks. To conclude, it is suggested that there are two main groups of basic rocks in the southern part of the belt. The first includes the granulitic green hornblende-plagioclase rocks (amphibolites) and hypersthene-plagioclase granulites. Associated with these, near Greenbank, are some epidote- and biotite-bearing banded rocks which may be of sedimentary origin. Rocks at Cooma, chemically similar to the amphibolites here, were thought by Joplin (1942, p. 173) to represent contemporaneous flows or small sills among the Ordovician metasediments. In the present case their real nature has not been established. The metamorphism which left its mark on these rocks was not strictly related to the Hllerslie granite because the metamorphic grade appears to increase to the south; it is clear from field evidence, however, that these basic rocks BY T. G. VALLANCE. 189 ante-dated this granite. The second group includes rocks of greater diversity. Texturally they are usually coarser than the above-mentioned types and often have an “igneous” appearance. The second-group rocks frequently display signs of the mineral series pyroxene—brown hornblende—green hornblende—actinolite; a sequence apparent in both massive and somewhat deformed types. In some cases the series seems to be due to progressive changes in the cooling environment of these rocks during their magmatic stage; there may, however, be an overlap between such a process and rather low-grade metamorphic activity. The second-group rocks in general also ante-date the Hllerslie- Wondalga granite but they have come later than the members of the first group. The relatively coarse nature of the later rocks, and the apparent scope for reaction of pyroxene with residual magmatic material to give hornblende, ete., rims suggest a rather long cooling period probably more in keeping with an intrusive environment than with the rocks being extrusive. Two possibilities suggest themselves as reasons for the development of metamorphic pyroxene in the granulites and for the general increase in metamorphic grade in the greenschists and first-group rocks towards the south. They are that the effects are due largely (1) to the thermal influence of the second-group basic rocks on the earlier types or (2) to the metamorphism with which the Green Hills granite mass was associated (it will be remembered that this granite was linked with the highest-grade metamorphism of the metasediments—see Vallance, 1953). The increase in grade in the metamorphosed basic rocks occurs with approach to this granite but it is also in this part of the belt that the second-group basic rocks are most common. The patchy development of the pyroxene granulites might suggest local thermal action by the later basic rocks (pyroxenic rocks, in many respects similar to the granulites here, occur locally in Scotland as high-grade contact-metamorphosed products derived from Tertiary igneous rocks—see MacGregor, 1931). It should be noted, however, that such granulites are typically formed on the western side of the belt, i.e. nearest the Green Hills mass. As none of the basic rocks are found in contact with this granite no definite age- relations can be established with it. At Cooma (Joplin, 1942), the granulites, similar to the amphibolites here (see p. 185), occur as inclusions in the Cooma gneiss which is ‘elosely comparable with the Green Hills granite. No basic inclusions have been found in the latter, but if the lithological correlation with Cooma is valid and has age significance then the amphibolites here may ante-date the Green Hills granite. Whether the second-group basic rocks ante-date or post-date this granite is not really known. As these second-group basic rocks do not appear, as a rule, to have suffered the general metamorphism which affected certain greenschists as well as the amphibolites and metasediments, they may post-date the Green Hills, for that granite seems to be closely associated with the general metamorphism. “KERSANTITES.” Of doubtful relation to the other basic rocks are the small bodies, regarded by Harper (1916) as dykes, in the granite at Adelong. They were called -kersantites by Card, but the diagnosis must have been based primarily on chemical composition. No opportunity was available to examine these rocks in the field because they appear to be commonly recognized only in the underground workings of the old gold-mines. These mines are not being worked at the present day. However, a fairly representative collection of these rocks, assembled by Harper, is housed in the Mining Museum, Sydney, and was kindly made available for study. In the following brief remarks mention will be made of the mineralogy of these rocks, although little can be added to Harper’s statement on their field occurrence. Harper refers to dykes of different ages, only the earlier group of which has suffered dynamic action. Both schistose and massive varieties are in the Mining Museum collection, but all are alike in showing extensive recrystallization. Both types often have comparable mineralogical constitutions, most commonly consisting of muscovite, biotite, quartz, calcite, felspar, with chlorite, epidote, amphibole, sphene, and pyrite on occasions. The rocks display few lamprophyric characters. ; 190 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, The schistose types commonly carry two micas and calcite but variations in composition are reflected in the development of pale green or blue-green pleochroic amphibole (X = very pale yellow, Y = pale yellow-green, Z = mid-bluish-green; Zc = 21°) in a few cases. Most of the ferromagnesian minerals tend to form clots which, in the schistose rocks, are elongated along the schistosity. Biotite flakes (X = pale yellow- brown, Y = mid-greenish-brown, Z = very dark brown or greenish-brown) may grow either across or along the schistosity. Occasionally biotite becomes the major component in these rocks. Twinned calcite grains (up to 1 mm. in the coarser types) are widespread and their presence distinguishes the two-mica schists here from the pelitic schists described in Part I of these studies. The felspar, whére determined, appears to be oligoclase or albite, more commonly the latter. TABLE 3. 1 A B C SiO, 49-66 53°04 47-79 50-76 Al,0. 17-44 15-68 18-23 12-20 Fe,0; 1-00 4-25 2-76 1-19 FeO 6-75 4-41 9-18 6-65 MgO 4-71 5-79 5-23 Lakers CaO 7-10 6-02 6-32 6-26 Na,O 2-69 3°28 2-66 2-16 K.0 3°85 3-10 4-10 4-79 H,0 + 1-53 SG asoara 2-15 0-66 H,0— 0-09 Wf 0-08 0-22 TiO, 1-22 0-73 1-35 0-76 P.O; 0-22 0-30 0-42 0-28 MnO 0-11 — 0-20 0-30 CO, 3-00 0-88 0-0 1-39 Ete 0-59 0-14 0-21 0-41 99-96 100-11 100-68 99-78 1. Kersantite. Gibraltar Mine, Adelong. Anal. W. A. Greig. Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1916, p. 225. A. Average of 54 rocks called kersantites. Quoted from Johannsen (1937), vol. III, p. 190. B. Biotitplagioklasschiefer. Seidenbuch (Odenwald). Anal. Hartwig. In Erdmanns- dorffer, Heidelberger Beit. Min. Pet., 1, 1947, p. 66. C. Biotite-hornblende-schist (lamproschist). 1 mile S.E. of Glencalvie Lodge, Ross & Cromarty, Scotland. Anal. E. G. Radley. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland, 1912, ““ Ben Wyvis, Carn Chuinneag, Inchbae and the surrounding country ’’, p. 125. As far as mineral assemblages indicate, both massive and schistose varieties seem to have suffered fairly comparable degrees of metamorphism, at least equal to the biotite-chlorite subfacies of the Greenschist Facies, although they might belong to the Epidote-Albite Amphibolite Facies (Turner, 1948). The presence of these assemblages in rocks which are supposed to intrude and thus post-date the granite (Wondalga granite) suggests that there was some post-granite metamorphism. Hven the massive types show few signs of relict igneous textures although they have not suffered any dynamic action. In view of the present inaccessibility of these rocks the problem of why the massive types should have a mineralogy similar to that of the schistose varieties cannot be solved. Perhaps here again late-magmatic and dynamothermal metamorphic effects were convergent as far as the development of new mineral phases was concerned. The chemical composition of the analysed rock (Table 3, no. 1) is comparable with that of a kersantite. The rock is plotted on an ACF diagram (Text-fig. 1, points no. 15) both with and without regard to CO,. The two points obtained are joined in the BY T. G. VALLANCE. 191. diagram. From the diagram it can be seen that the “kersantite”’ is not far removed from the amphibolites (it should be noted, however, that the latter ante-date the Wondalga granite whilst, according to Harper, the “kersantites’” post-date it). The remarkably high potash content of the “kersantite” is reflected in the large amounts of mica usually present. A schistose rock, from the Odenwald, with a somewhat similar composition and consisting essentially of biotite and plagioclase is quoted in Table 3 for comparison. Dynamothermally metamorphosed lamprophyres have been described from various parts of Scotland (Peach et al., 1912; Harker, 1939) and some of them have mineral assemblages comparable with the Adelong “kersantites’’. THE ADELONG NoRITE-GABBRO. Practically confined to the town area at Adelong is a small mass (about 1 x 4 mile), elongated roughly north-west-south-east, composed of medium-grained basic rocks referred to as gabbros by Harper (1916). These rocks occupy a low area and their outcrop is variable. In places (particularly near the south-eastern margin of the mass) they appear as tors, but elsewhere isolated boulders and soil-type differences are the only clues available in delimiting the extent of the basic mass in the dominantly granitic terrain. Adelong Creek flows round the eastern side of the mass which has apparently controlled the course of the stream. At the south-eastern end of the mass a small quarry has been opened to exploit the rock for monumental purposes. The rock is holocrystalline and, though obviously rich in plagioclase, where fresh has a distinctly dark colour. Altered patches are greenish; this alteration is in most eases related to zones of dislocation and is not merely due to atmospheric effects. In the fresh material long laths of clear plagioclase often display a preferred orientation; dark pyroxene crystals are usually also visible macroscopically. Coarse and irregular patches, with felspars up to one inch long, obvious brown hornblende and biotite in addition to pyroxene, are randomly distributed through the mass. Basic clots enriched in olivine and pyroxene, often to the exclusion of felspar, are also present in places. Mineralogically these latter clots appear to be closely related. to their host rocks and may merely represent fragments of an early phase of the norite-gabbro. The mode of a fairly typical specimen of the rock is given in Table 4. Plagioclase is abundant in all these rocks as twinned (albite, pericline, and carlsbad laws mainly) labradorite (Ab,,) laths remarkably free from inclusions. A few tiny olivine grains may be included, but equally often the felspar is included in the olivine. The laths display intricate undulose extinction patterns and often have small-scale ruptures. When bent, transverse cracks appear in the laths and these cracks may be filled by later felspar. Subhedral to anhedral olivine may be found in all stages of alteration to serpentine but in the fresh rocks it is largely unaltered. Magnetite inclusions, either as bands of fine granules or as larger skeletal aggregates, are a feature of much of the olivine. The olivine grains are sometimes mantled by brown hornblende or biotite but the mantles are irregular and rarely complete. Two pyroxenes are typical but their relative proportions vary a good deal; as a result the rocks range in composition from olivine-augite norites to olivine-hypersthene gabbros. Rhombic pyroxene invariably occurs as pleochroic (X = bright pink, Y = straw, Z = pale yellow-green) subhedral or anhedral grains. Optically negative, the grains occasionally exhibit oblique extinction (up to 16°—cf. Johannsen, 1937, vol. III, p. 212). Fine schiller inclusions may occur in this mineral but they are never as abundant as in the clinopyroxene. The latter commonly is polysynthetically twinned and has typical pyroxene cleavages. The grains are greyish, non-pleochroic, optically positive, and have Ze up to 49°, corresponding to augite. The schiller inclusions produce a dirty brown coloration whilst local alteration to amphibole gives rise to patchy extinction effects in the pyroxene. The four minerals labradorite, hypersthene, augite, and olivine constitute the main part of the mass but locally, as was mentioned above, patches with more complex mineralogy occur. In column 2 of Table 4 it will be seen that practically all the members of Bowen’s well-known reaction series may be present in such cases. Olivine 192 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, is typically less abundant in these more acid phases and may actually be absent. Augite and hypersthene occur and are often partly mantled by hornblende; patches of brown amphibole may appear in the augite. Separate hornblende (Z*c up to 29°) grains at times have ophitic relations to the felspar laths. In general, there is a colour zoning from brown-green to green or blue-green from the interior to the margins of the hornblende grains. Large plates of brownish biotite (X = pale straw yellow, Y = dark brown or greenish-brown, Z = dark brown to greenish-brown) up to 3-4 mm. across may also occur with the hornblende. A distinctly different biotite (X = pale straw yellow, Y = bright leaf-green, X = dark leaf-green; —ve; 2V very small) occasionally mantles pyroxene grains but is much less important than the brown variety. The latter type may have inclusions of calcite along the cleavages. Sometimes biotite appears to grow on hornblende which has itself grown on pyroxene. Muscovite is a rare accessory. Quartz is also rare (the 0:7% of quartz in the mode quoted is rather exceptional). TABLE 4. Modes of Rocks in the Adelong Norite-Gabbro Mass. 1 2 Quartz — 0:7 Labradorite 58-3 41-0 Apatite ie 0-1 0-1 Biotite (brown) .. 0-1 8-5 (green) — 0-6 Hornblende 0-2 15-5 Hypersthene 18-2 10-2 z Augite 8-7 14-0 Olivine 12-1 2-1 Magnetite PAPAL 1-0 Muscovite. . — tr Actinolite a) ot5) Serpentine tr 0-4 99-8 99-6 1. Olivine-augite norite. 2. Quartz- and olivine-bearing biotite-hornblende-hypersthene gabbro. Pale green actinolitic amphibole may appear as an alteration product of the pyroxene or hornblende. Locally, in zones of dislocation, the reaction is carried to extremes. Even structurally unaltered rocks from the vicinity of the crush bands may show signs of this change. The actinolite (X = very pale yellow-green, Y = yellow-green, Z = mid-green or blue-green; Z*c = 18°) occurs both as needles and as uralitic patches directly replacing the earlier ferromagnesian minerals. Chlorite sometimes appears with the actinolite. In view of the field association there can be little doubt that the green actinolite-rich rocks developed from the norite-gabbro by localized low-grade dynamic metamorphism. Whilst the actinolite may be explained away as being of metamorphic origin such was probably not the case with the green and brown hornblendes and biotites in the patches already described. These latter minerals may mantle the pyroxenes and olivine and appear to have formed later than these, though still probably during the magmatic period. Of the pyroxenes, hypersthene appears to have finished crystallizing last (it sometimes mantles augite, cf. p. 187), but as it also occurs as inclusions in the augite it probably had a lengthy crystallization period. Plagioclase must have separated at an early stage and it is interesting to note that whereas the plagioclase twins are often twisted and even ruptured, such features are very rarely displayed by the twins BY T. G. VALLANCE. 193 in the pyroxene grains. Perhaps the development of rhombic pyroxene in the norite and gabbro was related to the early crystallization of plagioclase. Olivine also was of early formation and was followed by the two pyroxenes, hornblende, and finally biotite. The most reasonable explanation for this sequence seems to be given in terms of the reaction series, with the hornblende and biotite mantling pyroxene and olivine being in the nature of reaction rims (Bowen, 1928). The presence of accessory quartz in the more acid, coarser patches adds plausibility to this explanation based on progressive changes in environment leading to differentiation during consolidation of the magma. TABLE 5. 1 A B C | | SiO. .. 3.0 o6 52-54 50-04 55-05 57-18 Al,O; ore 06 16-94 18-68 14-15 14-13 Fe,0; 2-10 0-80 1-80 1:90 FeO 4-77 6:91 5°31 5°85 MgO 9-05 7:79 8:07 7:00 CaO 10°44 9-88 9-36 7:64 Na,O 2-92 2-35 2-82 2°36 K.0 0-44 0:12 0-72 2°30 H.O+ 0-45 1:74 1:46 0-45 H,O— 0-07 0-28 0-22 0-07 TiO, 0-40 0-80 0-57 0-60 P20; 0-04 0-16 0-06 0-21 MnO 0-12 0-14 0-22 0-11 Co, 0-11 0:27 0-02 abs Ete. tr 0-62 0-06 0-22 100-39 100-58 99-89 100-02 | 1. Norite. Adelong village. Anal. H. P. White. Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1916, p. 225. A. Diorite. Murgatroyd’s Tunnel, Hillgrove area, N.S.W. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Records, 8, 1907, p. 216. B. Diorite. Hillgrove area. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye. Ibid., p. 214. C. Quartz monzonite. Kiandra, N.S.W. Anal. W. A. Greig. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 56, 1923, p. 269. In 1923 Browne and Greig described from Kiandra (about 45 miles south-east of Adelong) an olivine-bearing quartz monzonite which displays several features in common: with the Adelong norite-gabbro. The sequence olivine, rhombic pyroxene, clinopyroxene, hornblende, and biotite is observed in both places. The clinohypersthene reported from Kiandra has not been found at Adelong, although hypersthene with apparent oblique extinction due to the chance orientation of thin sections has been noted in this study (p. 191). Potash felspar was not found in the Adelong basic rocks. The Adelong norite-gabbro is surrounded by granite related to the Wondalga mass and the only age relations we have are with that granite. Harper (1916) stated that the basic rock “intrudes the granite, for round its edges wherever bedrock is exposed, tongues of gabbro, varying in width from a few feet up to many yards, are seen to be extending into the granite’. In view of the freshness of the norite and the crumbly nature of much of the granite (due in large measure to cataclasis) this age relation might be expected but, in actual fact, as far as I have determined, the opposite state of affairs exists. Examination of the contacts (where exposed) west of the town suggests that the granite has actually invaded the norite and that the “tongues” of basic rock are really relics of the original mass. Fine granitic veins and very local felspathization of the norite indicate that the granite post-dates it. The granite seems merely to have proved more susceptible to the dynamic action than did the norite- 194 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, gabbro. Little thermal effect on the basic rock appears to have been caused by the granite but, in view of the rather restricted contact features associated with this granite-type elsewhere, this is not really surprising. It is interesting to note that Watt (1899), at Wyalong, found norite, somewhat similar to the Adelong rock, ante-dating a gneissic “granite” which, though more basic, is in many respects like the granite of the Ellerslie and Wondalga masses. Although Wyalong is about 100 miles north-west of Adelong, it lies on the same line of strike and the rock-associations in the two places may be more than accidental. Cc Text-fig. 1.—Point 1, This paper, Table 2, no. 1. 2, Joplin (1942), Table 6, no. II. 3, Joplin (1942), Table 6, no. I. 4, Joplin (1947), Table 4, No. I. 5, Joplin (1947), Table 4, no. II. 6, A.R.D.M. for 1924, p. 105, no. 1065/24. 7, This paper, Table 2, no. D. 8, 9, 10, 11, Cooma amphibolites, Joplin (1939). 12, This paper, Table 1, no. 1. 138, This paper, Table 1, no. B. 14, This paper, Table 1, no. A. 15, This paper, Table 3, no. 1. 16, This paper, Table V, no. 1. 17, This paper, Table I, no. C. 18, This paper, Table 5, no. A. 19, This paper, Table 5, no. B. (The enclosed field is taken from Joplin (1942), Fig. 5.) Text-fig. 2.—Point 1, This paper, Table 5, no. 1. 2-4, Johannsen (1937), vol. III, Table 79 (average olivine gabbros). 5-9, Johannsen (1937), vol. ITI, Table 80 (average norites and olivine norites). In Table 5 an analysis of the Adelong norite is quoted. The Hillgrove rocks noted for comparison are of interest because they are associated with gneissic granite chemically and lithologically similar to the granite at Adelong. Certain amphibolites at Cooma (Joplin, 1939) have the composition of gabbros or norites but any correlation between these and the Adelong norite-gabbro cannot be more than highly speculative. In Text-figure 1 it can be seen that the Adelong norite falls near the Cooma amphibolites. At Cooma these rocks ante-date the Cooma gneiss, which is, I believe, equivalent to the Green Hills granite in this area. It is thought that the Green Hills is itself older than the Hllerslie and Wondalga granites. However, if the basic rock ante-dated the Green Hills granite it should have suffered the general metamorphism; of this there is little indication. In David (1950) the norites of Adelong and Wyalong are tentatively referred to the late Silurian (Bowning) orogeny. Chemically, the only analysed specimen from the Adelong basic mass is more closely allied to gabbros than to norites. In Text-figure 2 it will be seen that average BY T. G. VALLANCE. 195 norites and olivine norites tend to group themselves away from average olivine gabbros and that the Adelong rock falls with the gabbro group. No definite statement is possible at present concerning the origin of the Adelong norite-gabbro. If the distinctive features are related to contamination of a basic magma by aluminous sediments (Bowen, 1928; Read, 1931) all trace of it has disappeared. There is thus no clear evidence upon which to decide whether the rocks were formed by the addition of aluminous material to a basic magma or by direct crystallization (without contamination) from a magma of the appropriate composition. Certain basic masses in various parts of the world have, in recent years, been regarded as representing “fronts” related to processes of granitization. However, in the present case insufficient evidence of large-scale and intense granitization which would have been necessary to produce the basic mass is available. Until this is definitely established, it seems preferable to continue to regard the norite-gabbro as having been magmatic and intrusive. References. Biuuines, M. P., and WHITE, W. S., 1950.—Metamorphosed mafic dikes of the Woodsville quadrangle, Vermont and New Hampshire. Amer. Mineral., 35: 629-6438. BoweENn, N. L., 1928.—The Evolution of the Igneous Rocks. Princeton Univ. Press. BROWNE, W. R., and GREIG, W. A., 1923.—On an olivine-bearing quartz monzonite from Kiandra, N.S.W. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 56: 260-277. Davip, T. W. E., 1950.—Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia. Vol. i. Arnold, London. DeEsrR, W. A.,.1953.—The diorites and associated rocks of the Glen Tilt complex. III. Hornblende- schist and hornblendite xenoliths in the granite and diorite. Geol. Mag., 90: 27-35. Heever, C. G., 1947.—Contribution to the petrology of the metamorphic rocks of western Celebes. In Geological Explorations in the Island of Celebes (pp. 175-346) by H. A. Brouwer et al. North Holland Publishing Co., Amsterdam. ERDMANNSDORFFER, O. H., 1947.—Beitr’ége zur Petrographie des Odenwaldes. II. Die Diorite des Bergstrisser Odenwaldes und ihre Entstehungsweise. Heidelberger Beitr. Min. Petr., 1; 37-85. , 1948.—Aus dem Grenzgebiet Magmatisch-Metamorph. (Mit Beispielen aus Schwarzwald, Odenwald und Alpen.) JZeits. Deut. Geol. Gesell., 100: 204-212. EsKkoLa, P. E., 1939.—Die metamorphen Gesteine. Part 3 of Die Hntstehung der Gesteine by Barth, Correns, and Eskola. Springer Verlag. Berlin. Harker, A., 1939.—Metamorphism. 2nd Hdit. Methuen, London. HARPER, L. F., 1916.—The Adelong Goldfield. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources, no. 21. JOHANNSEN, A., 1937.—A Descriptive Petrography of the Igneous Rocks. Vol. Ill. Univ. of Chicago Press. JOPLIN, G. A., 1939.—Studies in metamorphism and ,assimilation in the Cooma district of N.S.W. Part I. The amphibolites and their metasomatism. Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 73: 86-106. , 1942.—Petrological studies in the Ordovician of New South Wales. I. The Cooma complex. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67: 156-196. , 1947.—Idem. IV. The northern extension of the north-east Victorian metamorphic complex. IJbid., 72: 87-124. MAcpONALD, R. D., 1944..—-Regional metamorphism in the Kenogamisis River area. Jour. Geol., 52: 414-423. MacGrecor, A. G., 1931.—Scottish pyroxene-granulite hornfelses and Odenwald beerbachites. Geol. Mag., 68: 506-521. NICKEL, E., 1952.—Die mineralfazielle Stellung der Hornblendegabbros im Gebirgszug von Heppenheim-Lindenfels (Odenwald). Heidelberger Beitr. Min. Petr., 3: 97-123. PracH, B. N., et al., 1912.—The geology of Ben Wyvis, Carn Chuinneag, Inchbae and the surrounding country. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland. PuHiuuires, F. C., 1930.—Some mineralogical and chemical changes induced by progressive metamorphism in the Green Bed group of the Scottish Dalradian. Mineral. Mag., 22: 239-256. QUENSEL, P., 1951.—The charnockite series of the Varberg district on the south-western coast of Sweden. Arkiv fér Mineralogi och Geologi, 1, no. 10: 227-322. Reap, H. H., 1931.—On corundum-spinel xenoliths in the gabbro of Haddo House, Aberdeenshire. Geol. Mag., 68: 446-453. TURNER, F. J., 1948.—Mineralogical and structural evolution of the metamorphic rocks. Geol. Soc. Amer., Mem. no. 30. VALLANCE, T. G., 1953.—Studies in the metamorphic and plutonic geology of the Wantabadgery- Adelong-Tumbarumba district, N.S.W. Part I. Introduction and metamorphism of the sedimentary rocks. Proc. “Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 78: 90-121. 196 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. II, Warr, J. A., 1899.—Report on the Wyalong gold-field. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources no. 5. Wiuson, A. F., 1952.—Occurrence of metasomatic hypersthene, and its petrogenetic significance. Amer. Mineral., 37: 633-636. WISEMAN, J. D. H., 1984.—The central and south-west Highland epidiorites: A study in progressive metamorphism. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 90: 354-417. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. A.—Greenschist from Por. 157, Par. of Ellerslie. A fine-grained rock consisting mainly of actinolite, epidote, and albite. Much of the actinolite is arranged parallel to the obvious schistosity which is further accentuated by iron-staining. Ordinary light. x13. B.—A granular amphibolite from near the granite contact at George’s Hill (Por. 58, Par. of Ellerslie). Obvious green hornblende is set in a base of clear plagioclase. A little epidote is present. Note the vague traces of banding and the occasional hornblende porphyroblasts in this specimen. Ordinary light. x13. C.—Granular basic rock from the western side of the ‘“‘basic belt’? on the Sharp’s Creek road (Por. 67, Par. of Nacka Nacka). Large clinopyroxene grains (sometimes patchy due to partial alteration to amphibole) may have discontinuous rims of rhombic pyroxene. Granular rhombie pyroxene and plagioclase occur in the base with some clinopyroxene, hornblende and biotite. Ordinary light. x13. All photomicrographs by Mr. G. E. McInnes. 197 STUDIES IN THE METAMORPHIC AND PLUTONIC GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT, N.S.W. Part III]. Tuer Graniric Rocks. By T. G. Variance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. (Plate xii; ten Text-figures.) [Read 30th- September, 1953.] Synopsis. The plutonic rocks of this area are divided into three main groups. Representatives of two of these groups are here discussed in some detail. The earlier of the two is related to the period during which the essentially miogeosynclinal sediments were metamorphosed (see Vallance, 1953a). It is suggested that these granites were not formed in their present environment but have been derived (whether by anatexis or syntexis) from a deeper level, not yet exposed, of the metamorphic complex. Sedimentary material seems to have contributed a good deal to their formation. The second-group granites post-date the metamorphism but show interesting local reaction features with basic rocks. The rocks of these two groups are correlated with similar types at Cooma and elsewhere in New South Wales. INTRODUCTION. Granitic rocks of various types occupy a considerable part of the area examined and display many interesting relations to the rocks amongst which they occur. It is the purpose of this paper to describe these plutonic rocks and to discuss their relations to the metamorphism which affected the region. On a lithological basis, the rocks have been separated into three groups. We shall be concerned with only two of these. Not much attention has been given to the third, designated here the Kyeamba adamellite; it occurs on the western side of the area and only a very small part of the mass has been mapped. More of it has been covered by Whiting (1950). Where examined, the rock is a massive, medium-grained, hornblende- free type which appears to be in a different metamorphic environment from the members of the other two plutonic groups; it is thought to be younger than these. Of the other granitic groups, the members of the first are characterized by a medium grainsize, fairly massive appearance (some are slightly gneissic), roughly euhedral biotite flakes and a general absence of hornblende. Rocks of the second group also contain biotite as the chief melanocratic mineral but may, at times, carry amphibole as well. They may be somewhat coarser grained than the first group rocks and are often rather gneissic, sometimes markedly so. In general, the areas of highest grade metamorphism are associated with the first-group granites rather than with the second. ' Although both groups include types ranging from granite to granodiorite, it is usually not very difficult to separate them in the field. At Cooma, where metamorphism similar to that observed here has also left its mark, two main types of plutonic rocks occur and they are similar to those distinguished in this paper. GRANITES OF THE FIRST GROUP. By way of introduction it should be made clear that the term granite will often be used here in a broad sense to include granodiorite. To the first group have been assigned the rocks of two large plutonic bodies, the Wantabadgery and the Green Hills (named after the Green Hills State Forest, which is largely situated on this rock type) masses. The Wantabadgery granite occupies the south-eastern end of a large batholith which, according to the Geological Map of the State, extends to the north-west to near Methul West (about 16 miles south-east of Ardlethan). The batholith is depicted as having an irregular outline, yet with a distinct elongation parallel to the strike of the Q 198 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, metasediments. The dimensions of the mass as marked on this map are about 60 x 25 miles. Whether the mass is uniform throughout is not known, but in the area examined by the author the granite has a remarkable overall sameness (ignoring purely local features such as variations in biotite content). Specimens from Junee and Wagga Wagga can be readily matched with others from Wantabadgery. Lithologically similar material was recorded by Raggatt (1933) from Junee Reefs and Sebastopol. Plate v of Part I of these Studies (Vallance, 1953a@) indicates that the Wantabadgery granite covers a large area north of the Murrumbidgee River in the Oura—Wantabadgery district and passes across the river near Tenandra. South of Tenandra it forms a prolongation parallel to the strike of the country rocks and occupies the valley of lower Yaven (or Hillas) Creek. South-west of Oura the granite again crosses the river and forms the low ridge on which Kiambeth Trig. Station is situated. Similar granite occurs on the eastern side of Willan’s Hill near the city of Wagga Wagga. Although a large part of the granite-metasediment contact appears to transgress the regional strike, detailed work has shown that, in the vicinity of the contact, the strike of the metasediments is deflected sympathetically with the granite. Near its margin the granite tends to have a more gneissic appearance than elsewhere and the foliation typically follows the trend of the margin. The metasediments near the Wantabadgery granite belong, as a rule, to the knotted schist zone (Vallance, 1953a). High-grade rocks are normally confined to within a few feet of the contact; they are, however, more extensive just north of Yaven Trig. Station. Contrasted with this is the wide high-grade zone near the other member of this group, the Green Hills granite. Like the Wantabadgery granite, the lithologically similar Green Hills granite mapped during the course of this work occupies only a portion (the northern portion) of a large batholith of rather uncertain dimensions. The Green Hills mass has an interesting prolongation to the north-west (cf. the south-east end of the Wantabadgery mass) and has been traced along the upper Yaven Creek and upper Oberne Creek valleys and through the Green Hills Forest to the main Batlow—Tumbarumba road, where it appears just south of Batlow. Except where interrupted by Tertiary basalt near Laurel Hill, the granite can be followed to Tumbarumba. During a hasty reconnaissance south of Tumbarumba, what appeared to be the same granite was followed as far as Tooma and Welaregang and was seen to occur across the Murray River in Victoria. From observations made on the Victorian side of the river it would seem that this granite is at least partly responsible for the large bulk of the Corryong batholith (Edwards and Easton, 1937). To the west of Tumbarumba there is reason to believe that the granite margin is faulted. The granite seems to be identical with, and may be continuous with, the rock called by Mr. L. Hall, of the N.S.W. Geological Survey, the New Maragle granite, which occurs to the east of Tumbarumba. North of Batlow the Green Hills granite is apparently separated from the “basic belt” (Vallance, 1953b) by a somewhat gneissic granite belonging to our second group. This large mass has thus been traced for nearly 50 miles along the regional strike of the country rocks but lack of data on the location of the eastern margin south of Batlow precludes any reliable estimate of its maximum width. Mr. K. R. Sharp has found similar granite on and east of the Tumut River near the S.M.H.E.A.’s Tumut Pond Power Station site. This occurrence is conceivably continuous with the Green Hills or New Maragle granites but the intervening country has not been examined because of its inaccessibility. In addition to the lithologically comparable Cooma gneiss (Browne, 1914; Joplin, 1942) at Cooma, similar granites have been found on the Murray River, south-west of Mt. Kosciusko (Browne et al., 1946), at Albury (Joplin, 1947), and in parts of north- eastern Victoria (Howitt, 1888; Tattam, 1929). At Hugel Trig. Station a patch of high-grade metasediments occurs on top of the granite. A similar, and larger, patch is to be found in the Nurenmerenmong Range, east of Tumbarumba. The elevation of these patches above the surrounding granite country ae. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 199 suggests that they are remnants of the original roof now isolated by erosion. By way of contrast it might be mentioned that no such remnants have been found in the Wantabadgery mass, although it, like the Green Hills granite, contains many included fragments of the country rocks. The boundary between the granite and the highly metamorphosed sediments of the roof patches is usually rather vague. Similar gradational contacts occur betwen the Green Hills granite and the high-grade country rocks along its western margin; this is particularly true of the contact north of Bago Trig. Station. In contrast to this, the contacts around the Wantabadgery granite are less diffuse (except near Yaven Trig. Station), although here, too, it is difficult to locate exactly the granite-metasediment junction. The granites of both masses may display a slight, steeply dipping, foliation but they are often fairly massive (cf. Joplin’s (1942, p. 186) remarks on the Cooma gneiss). As at Cooma, the foliation in these rocks is usually indicated by trails of biotitic schlieren or by the rarer sub-parallelism of included rock fragments. The foliation, in general, follows the regional trend of the country rocks except where the granite contacts cut across this direction; there the foliation is locally parallel to the margins of the mass. Away from the margins the foliation resumes its regional trend. Aplitic, pegmatitic, and milky quartz dykes and veins are often associated with these granites, particularly near their margins. A remarkably large quartz dyke forms the Rocky Knob at Oura. Dykes of doleritic and bostonitic rocks have also been found in the granites. Pegmatites and Aplites. The pegmatites, often with graphic texture, show few unusual features. In addition to the abundant quartz and K-felspar (orthoclase or microperthite) they usually carry tourmaline, muscovite, and a little acid oligoclase. The tourmaline crystals (up to two inches long) are often fractured across their length and the breaks are typically healed by granular quartz. The pegmatite dykes sometimes have a marginal graphic zone bordering an inner zone, rich in felspar, itself flanking a central region composed largely of quartz and tourmaline (cf. Joplin, 1942, p. 187). The aplites are fine- to medium-grained rocks with obvious quartz, felspar, and muscovite. Acid oligoclase may be important in addition to the K-felspar. Myrmekitic intergrowths have been observed and small flakes of colourless mica may also replace the felspar. Tourmaline is not as abundant as in the pegmatites. The formation of tourmaline here seems in many cases to have post-dated the crushing which some of these aplites suffered. Pinkish garnet has been found in a few dykes near Oura. The grains (up to 2 mm. across and often rich in quartz inclusions) display rough crystal outlines with slight alteration to chlorite along cracks. There are few signs of much reaction between the aplite material and the garnets, and the origin of the latter is somewhat puzzling. At Albury, oligoclase granites, rather similar to the rocks here grouped with the aplites, also contain garnet (Joplin, 1947); it is believed to be pyrogenic. The garnet in the Oura district has not been analysed but one garnet-bearing rock so studied contains little manganese (Table 2, no. 6). This suggests, though it does not prove, that the garnet is not spessartine-rich. In general, garnets occurring as stable phases in such acid rocks tend to be manganiferous because Mn*+ does not replace Fet+ or Mg*+ in biotite from granites and pegmatites (Ramberg, 1945) and thus the expected reaction (FeMg),Al1.Si,0,.+ 2KAISi,0O, + 2H,0 — K(FeMg),A1Si;0,,(0H), + KA1,Si,0,,(O0H). + 3Si0, garnet K-felspar biotite muscovite may not take place if the garnet is rich in manganese. Where almandine occurs in aplitic rocks with sufficient K.O (e.g. see Sugi, 1930) it often shows some signs of conversion to biotite. Spessartine-rich garnets may in many cases be pyrogenic but almandines occurring in similar acid rocks are perhaps more often xenocrystal. In view of the low MnO in the rock, which had sufficient K.0 to form free K-felspar, it seems 200 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, somewhat doubtful whether the garnet is pyrogenic in this case. There is, however, no apparent source for the mineral if it is to be regarded as xenocrystal and no clear reason why it should not have reacted more extensively with its environment. Granite-Granodiorite. The largest parts of the Wantabadgery and Green Hills masses are composed of rocks which fall into this category. In both masses the rocks outcrop as large boulders and tors which, despite their resistant appearance, are typically very extensively weathered. When fresh the rock is distinctly greyish. In places it may be porphyritic, as a rule the most porphyritic parts being associated with patchy, biotite-rich phases of the granite. Often, however, the rocks have a fairly even, medium-grain size. TABLE 1 Modes of Plutonic Rocks and of a Basic Patch. 1 2 3 Quartz .. as 5% a 34:6 B13}933 22-2 K-felspar ae ee Ae 30°4 05) 1:6 Plagioclase AK He ot 12-6 38°7 24-4 Biotite >. 8 Ay 5 8-9 20-4 42-3 Hornblende she ee yi abs. abs. | abs. Muscovite (+sericite) .. Seal 118393} 1-6 8-4 Accessories ae a ee 0:2 0-4 1-0 | 1. Biotite granite (sericite-rich). Por. 235, Par. of Oura, Co. Clarendon. (or analysis see Table 2, no. 1.) . Granodiorite. Quarry, north-eastern side of Willan’s Hill, Wagga Wagga. (For analysis see Table 2, no. 3.) 3. Biotite-rich patch in the Wantabadgery mass near Tenandra Trig. Station. (For analysis see Table 2, no. 5.) bo Modes of two of these rocks are given in Table 1. Quartz, felspar, and biotite, with some muscovite, are the chief constituents. Quartz is abundant and normally occurs as irregular grains often faintly dusted with small inclusions. Minute needles of rutile and sillimanite have been noted in the quartz, the sillimanite occurring most commonly near the remnants of metasediment inclusions. Locally, the quartz may show intense strain features. K-felspar appears mainly as orthoclase or microperthite and may or may not exceed plagioclase in abundance (cf. columns 1 and 2 in Table 1). Some of the felspar has microclinic gridiron-twinning, a feature commonest in the granite near biotite-rich broken-down metasediment relics. The K-felspar may form either euhedral phenocrysts or anhedral grains. Phenocrysts up to one inch long often have good Carlsbad twinning and, sometimes, marginal zones of biotite inclusions. The large felSpars are commonly microperthitic with needles and rods of intergrown albite. Similar large felspars may also be developed in the metasediment inclusions. Some of the K-felspar in the granite is myrmekitized; this is another feature which tends to become more obvious near the disrupted inclusions (see Plate xii, A). Muscovite often is abundant near the myrmekite indicating, perhaps, the destination of some of the released potash. Plagioclase may also occur as phenocrysts or smaller anhedral grains. As at Cooma (Joplin, 1942), it has been found impracticable to distinguish between the relatively plagioclase-rich and plagioclase-poor types in the field. The plagioclase is usually an oligoclase or acid andesine (Ahb,;-,.) and even in the most basic (biotite-rich) phases of the rocks it does not become much more calcic. Some of the plagioclase is roughly zoned and where the mineral has been fractured and healed by later crystal- lization the zones have an irregular distribution. Parts of certain zoned grains have been completely separated before the final consolidation. Twinning is typical and among the twin-varieties recorded is a rather large group of laws included by Gorai BY T. G. VALLANCE. 201 (1950, 1951) in his C-twins. Albite and pericline laws (Gorai’s A-twins) are also represented. Biotite is the most important melanocratic constituent in these rocks. The black, lustrous, almost euhedral flakes are obvious in hand specimen. The dark mica is of the strongly pleochroic red-brown variety (vy = 1:643, X = very pale yellow-brown, Y = dark red-brown, Z = dark red-brown) and typically has haloes round certain small inclusions. Some of these appear to be zircon; others may be monazite. Rutile, iron-ore, and apatite are also included; the latter has not had much effect on the host (cf. Hutton, 1947). The biotite usually resists weathering processes but occasionally it is altered to muscovite and chlorite, excess TiO, being released as rutile to form sagenite webs (this alteration is probably more often related to late hydrothermal activity than to normal weathering). Bundles of sillimanite needles are common in biotite near strewn metasediment relics. Muscovite is found as large blades and also sericitic aggregates. The larger muscovite flakes have 2V about 38° and 8 = 1-597. The aggregates are usually associated with myrmekite and altered felspar; they seem to be of late origin. Muscovite-quartz and biotite-quartz symplektites, associated with myrmekite, occur in certain metasedi- ment inclusions as well as in the nearby granite itself. The association of the three types of intergrowth is always close and cases have been noted where the vermicular quartz of one passes, without interruption, into an adjacent intergrowth. Crushing is rarely observed near these features. Hills (1933) noted the association of myrmekite and biotite-quartz symplektite at Marysville (Victoria) and, following Vayrynen, sug- gested that it was related to the “crystalloblastic development of biotite from potash felspar, in which change plagioclase and quartz are liberated’. This explanation is different from Sederholm’s well-known hypothesis (see, for example, Drescher-Kaden, 1948; Seitsaari, 1951). Du Rietz (1938) attributed muscovite-quartz symplektites at Muruhatten (Sweden) to the ‘“muscovitization” of microcline. Rest solutions attacked the microcline and the change to mica released SiO. to crystallize as quartz. The extensive development of sericitic mica from cordierite, sillimanite, and felspar in the high-grade metasediments of the country rocks (see Vallance, 1953a@) may be related to the alteration to mica of felspar in the granites. Apatite, zircon, rutile, iron-ore, tourmaline, and sillimanite may all occur as accessories in these rocks. A few grains of colourless andalusite have also been noticed (cf. the pink variety in the Cooma gneiss). Joplin (1942, p. 188) believes the colourless andalusite to be xenocrystal. Card (1895) recorded pieces of colourless to brown-red or blue andalusite, up to one pound weight, in Burra Creek, south of Tumbarumba. These may have come from a contaminated phase of the granite or pegmatite. Detrital monazite reported from Batlow and Tumbarumba (Card, 1920) may have been shed from the Green Hills granite. Curran (1896) mentioned topaz, garnet, and kyanite from Tumberumba [sic] as well as sapphire, ruby, and spinel (the last three are probably derived from the Tertiary basalts). Kyanite has not been found in any of the rocks of this district but apparently blue-grey tourmaline has been mistaken for this mineral (old slides in the Mining Museum, Sydney, labelled kyanite contain tourmaline). Curran’s description of his “kyanite”’ does not tally with tourmaline, but his find has not been confirmed. Chemical Data. Six representatives of this group of rocks have been analysed—a granite, an adamellite, two granodiorites, a garnet-bearing anplitic rock, and a basic patch (inclusion) with the mineralogy of a quartz-mica diorite. These are all given in Table 2 together with comparable rocks from other parts of the great metamorphic belt and from Cooma. The granites from Oura, Cooma, and Albury all have SiO, in the range 70-73% and most of them have low lime contents. Where plagioclase becomes more important. the lime content increases. The granodiorite from Willan’s Hill, Wagga Wagga, is. ‘compared with the Woomargama gneiss (Joplin, 1947) near Albury. The Woomargama gneiss is believed to be related to the Albury gneiss, its higher lime content being 202 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, regarded by Joplin as due to contamination by lime-bearing material. The specimen from the Corryong batholith (no. HE) is chemically not unlike the Woomargama gneiss and the granodiorite from Willan’s Hill. - The garnet-bearing aplite is similar in composition to the oligoclase granites of Joplin (1947, Table 6). The biotite-rich patch (no. 5) represents a greatly altered sedimentary inclusion occurring in the granodiorite (no. 4); its composition will be discussed later (p. 204). TABLE 2. First-Group Plutonic Rocks and Similar Types. 1 A B Cc 2 3 D E 4 5 6 F SiO, 72-58 | 71:93 | 70:65 | 70:44 | 71-33 | 66:98 | 66-43 | 67-67 | 67-74 | 54-86 | 75-53 | 76-10 Al,O3 14:57 | 14°62 | 15:25 | 15-84 | 14-82 | 16-83 | 17-53 | 14-50 | 14-77-| 18-32 | 15-88 | 15-95 FeO; 0:74 0-83 0°83 0:53 1-99 1:18 0-15 0-87 iloeal 2-01 0:46 i FeO 2-02 2-25 3:45 3°35 2-3 3°58 3°76 3° 4-52 8-01 0-40 ? MgO 1-04 1°18 1-63 1-24 0-99 1:84 1-91 221 1:62 4:16 0-29 0-11 CaO 0:70 0-91 0-94 0-73 1-60 2-88 2°55 2°18] 1-58 1:95 0:65 0-23 Na,O 2°25 1:98 Lo7(7/ 1-70 2°61 2°12 ROBT 2:38 1:97 2:46 2-80 2:90 K,0 4:96 5-03 4-63 4-09 3°39 3°22 3022 3:42 4-44 5:22 3°19 3:27 H,O+ 0:72 0:75 0-60 0:62 0:89 0-80 0-61 1-81 0-89 130 1-01 ly 16 H,O — 0-11 0-34 0:09 0:09 0-12 0-14 0-21 0-11 0-26 0-22 0:09 |S TiO, 0:42 0-33 0:65 0:66 0:52 0°67 1-10 0-61 0-70 1:18 | abs. — P20; 0:09 | 0-22} 0-12} 0-22 tr. — 0:07 tr. —- — 0-15 — MnO 0:04 0:03 0:05 tr. 0-04 0:05 — tr. 0-05 0-14 0-04 — Ete. a 0:02 tr: — — — 100:19 |100-42 |100-66 | 99-51 |100-61 {100-29 | 99-91 | 99-54 | 99-85 | 99-83 |100-49 | 99-72 1. Biotite granite. Por. 235, Par. of Oura, Co. Clarendon. Anal. T. G. Vallance. A. Granite. Mt. Wagra (Victoria). Anal. C. M. Tattam. Bull. Geol. Surv. Vict., 52: 38. B. Cooma gneiss (with plagioclase phenocrysts). Cooma. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 188. C. Albury gneiss. Albury. Anal. G. A. Joplin. JIbid., 72, 1947: 117. 2. Biotite-adamellite. Creek bed, Por. 224, Par. of Oura, Co. Clarendon. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 3. Granodiorite. Quarry, north-east side of Willan’s Hill, Wagga Wagga. Anal. T. G. Vallance. D. Two-mica gneiss. Woomargama (Albury district). Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 72, 1947: 118. E. Grey biotite-granite. Par. of Cudgewa, Victoria. Corryong batholith. Anal. F. F. Field. Proc. Roy. Soc. VAreing, OS IBY S ER ; 4. Granodiorite. Near Tenandra Trig. Station, Por. 218, Par. of Tenandra, Co. Clarendon. Anal. T. G. Vallance. 5. Biotite-rich patch in the granodiorite near Tenandra Trig. Station (no. 4). Anal. T. G. Vallance. 6. Garnet-bearing aplite. Por. 168, Parish of Bilda, Co. Clarendon. Anal. T. G. Vallance. F. Muscovite granite. Omeo, Victoria. Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., 24, 1888: 110. On the Or.Cor:Ab:An.Fem diagram (Text-fig. 1) the plutonic rocks of the first group (Wantabadgery—Green Hills type) are somewhat widely spaced. They fall roughly into three classes, the acid phases (near the Or.Cor:Ab edge), the potash felspar-rich granites, and the more plagioclase-rich adamellites and granodiorites. Point no. 21 in this figure represents a hypothetical rock with two parts of granite with one part of a lime-bearing psammite (cf. Joplin, 1947, Tables 11 and 13). The rocks have also been plotted on an ACF diagram (Text-fig. 2) and, for comparison, the diagrams for the second-group plutonic rock and similar types have been placed below. To summarize, the chief chemical features of these granitic rocks of the first group are the excess of potash over soda and the fairly general low lime content. Even when the CaO content is relatively high, most of it must be held in plagioclase because hornblende and other lime-bearing ferromagnesian minerals are absent. Inclusions in the First-Group Granites. Inclusions, ranging in size from tens of feet or more to a few inches across, are common in both the Wantabadgery and Green Hills masses. Most of the inclusions BY T. G. VALLANCE. 203 Ab An.Fem Ab AnFem C F A ANORTHITE CwoLLASTONITE) DIOPSIDE HYPERSTHENE Text-figures 1-5. Text-figures 1, 2.—Point.no. 1, This paper, Table 2, no. 2. 2, This paper, Table 2, no. 1. 3, This paper, Table 2, no. A. 4, This paper, Table 2, no. B. 5, This paper, Table 2, no. C. 6, This paper, Table 2, no. 3. 7, This paper, Table 2, no. D. 8, This paper, Table 2, no. EB. 9, This paper, Table 2, no. 6. 10, This paper, Table 2, no. F. 11, This paper, Table 2, no. 4. 12, This paper, Table 2, no. 5. 13, Joplin, 1942, Table 8, no. II. 14, Joplin, 1942, Table 8, no. Ill. 15, Joplin, 1942, Table 8, no. IV. 16, Joplin, 1947, Table 12, no. III. 17, Joplin, 1947, Table 6, no. I. 18, Joplin, 1947, Table 6, no. Il. 19, Joplin, 1947, Table 6, no. III. 20, Joplin, 1947, Table 11, no. III. 21, Two parts of rock (point 2) with one part of limy metasediment (Joplin, 1942, Table 4, no. II). 22, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 5. 23, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 6. 24, Vallance, 1953a, Table 6, no. 8. 25, Vallance, 1953a, Table 6, no. 9. 26, Joplin, 1942, Table 5, no. IV. The metasediments (nos. 22-26) indicate the close relationship between certain psammopelites and the granitic rocks. Text-figures 3, 4.—Point no. 1, This paper, Table 5, no. A. 2, This paper, Table 5, no. B. 3, This paper, Table 5, no. C. 4, This paper, Table 5, no. 1. 5, This paper, Table 5, no. D. 6, This paper, Table 5, no. H. 7, This paper, Table 5, no. F. -8, This paper, Table 5, no. H. 9, Joplin, 1943, p. 171, no. V. 10, Tattam, 1929, Table III, no. 21. Text-figure 5.—ACE diagram showing certain possible Pyroxene Hornfels Facies assemblages. Where silica is deficient spinel may appear as an extra phase. Point 1 (plotted without correction for spinel) corresponds to the analysis no. 1 in Table 3. Point 2 represents the Cooma ultrabasic rock (Table 3, no. A). 204 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, can be readily related to metasediment types occurring among the country rocks. Iv general, sillimanite is commoner in the inclusions in the Wantabadgery granite than in the metasediments around it. A fairly large mass of ultrabasic rock is included in the granite at Mundarlo. Quartz nodules are not uncommon as inclusions and may exhibit a tendency to have narrow marginal felspar-rich zones developed. The great bulk of the inclusions belong to the series pelite-psammopelite-psammite. Alumina-rich rocks are characterized in this environment by the presence, often in abundance, of sillimanite. These inclusions do not appear to acquire a hornfels texture; in general, they resemble the high-grade zone rocks (Vallance, 1953a). The usual mineral assemblage in these inclusions is biotite, sillimanite, muscovite, quartz, and felspar, in varying proportions dependent upon the original composition. Tourmaline occurs in places. The felspar is often untwinned and may be intergrown with vermicular quartz. Complete equilibrium has rarely been attained in these rocks. A few inclusions, rich in muscovite and having patches of greenish biotite and chlorite, probably once contained cordierite. Dark biotitic selvedges are often seen around the metasediment inclusions. Sillimanite occurs here as felted masses or, less frequently, as clear, colourless porphyroblasts (see Plate xii, B). Sometimes it is concentrated in quartz giving the well-known faserkiesel. Andalusite does not often appear in the inclusions. The characteristic mineral reaction in the pelitic inclusions is biotite — sillimanite (fibro- litization). As the first stage, sillimanite fibres and needles develop at the margins of the red-brown biotite and finally mats of sillimanite cover the whole flake. Hven when the reaction has gone to completion it is sometimes possible to see the outlines of the original biotite. The displaced potash probably gives rise to K-felspar and perhaps, ultimately, muscovite. In some inclusions muscovite is also converted to sillimanite. At a later stage in the history of these inclusions the sillimanite becomes unstable and may be converted to micas. The sillimanite development may be largely a metamorphic effect but perhaps volatile constituents related to the granite had some influence. Williams (1934) suggested that in Stewart Island (N.Z.) the formation of sillimanite in a sillimanite- tourmaline paragenesis was related to boron-bearing solutions. Tourmaline is associated with sillimanite in some of the inclusions here; occasionally, however, it appears to replace the sillimanite. It is interesting to note that recently Michel-Lévy (1950) has synthesized sillimanite from Al,0O, + SiO. mixtures with borax solutions at 400—450°C. and water vapour pressure of 50 kg/cm?. The exact amount of material added to these inclusions is difficult to assess, but that such action has taken place in many cases is indicated by the increase in felspar content near the margins of the inclusions and by the obvious quartzo-felspathic veins, sometimes arranged lit-par-lit fashion, in certain examples. As in the high-grade zone rocks, some of the felspar here may have been derived by purely metamorphic means but clearly a large part of it came from an external source. Increase in felspar content (both K-felspar and oligoclase occur in these metasomatized inclusions) usually is accompanied by a decrease in sillimanite; the latter often passes back to mica. Mechanical breakdown of the inclusions is assisted by the development of felspar porphyroblasts. The gradation from normal metasediment inclusion through felspathized inclusion to contaminated granite and granite is complete. Field evidence suggests that the psammopelite inclusions are more readily granitized than are the highly aluminous pelites. However, with increasing intensity of granitization it becomes more difficult to determine the original nature of the inclusions. Only one metasediment inclusion has been analysed (Table 2, no. 5), but this gives us some interesting information. In hand specimen the rock has the appearance of a mica diorite but in the field it is obviously an inclusion and seems to be derived from a sediment. Its composition, however, shows that it has undergone considerable chemical re-organization. When plotted on a von Wolff diagram (Text-fig. 10, point no. 5) it can be seen that this rock is displaced, relative to the metasediments, away BY T. G. VALLANCE. 205 from the Q pole due to the abundance of L and M (as a result of the biotite present). Reynolds (1946) has shown that pelitic rock fragments in granite tend to become basified as part of a geochemical sequence leading to granitization. It is difficult to generalize from one analysis, but it seems evident that here the basic patch displays a marked excess of Fe, Mg, and Ti over that characteristic of either the metasediments or the granites. Reynolds suggests that in the conversion of pelites to granitic rocks two processes are important, basification, followed by granitization. Psammitic rocks may be converted to granitic material by granitization without much basification. Thus in the present case the rocks of sandy nature are readily made over into granitic types by the process of felspathization. With these changes in mind it is interesting to look back for a moment to the country rock metasediments. They, too, are plotted on Text-figure 10, but in them we do not see any clearly-defined geochemical culminations of the type noted above. Certain of the high-grade rocks are displaced away from Q relative to the lower-grade types but the displacement is not very great (cf. p. 214). There is no evidence of an important basic culmination (basic front) in the country rocks near the granite margins. In addition to the numerous representatives of the aluminous pelite-psammopelite- psammite series discussed above, a few psammitic rocks with calcareous matrices occur as inclusions. Comparable types are not common among the country rocks. These inclusions are typically pale-coloured, often with green or yellow-green spots, and although traces of bedding or schistosity may be visible the rocks are often granulitic. The essential minerals of these limy inclusions are quartz and xenoblastic patches of clinozoisite-epidote. Green amphibole, garnet, felspar, iron-ore and, rarely, white mica may also be developed. The clinozoisite-epidote has a dirty-brown colour and displays either normal epidote interference colours or anomalous blues. Amphibole may occur as ragged green porphyroblasts and is apparently actinolitic (Z*c = 20°). Felspar is not abundant but both plagioclase (andesine-labradorite) and K-felspar have been noted in a few cases. Where felspar is developed, clinozoisite-epidote tends to disappear. Part, at last, of the Na and K required for the felspars must have been derived from the granite. Some of the inclusions carry ragged colourless garnets which, from their environment, are believed to be grossular-rich. The metamorphic grade of these calcareous rocks does not seem to be as high as that indicated by the other metasediment inclusions. In Scotland, zoisite normally gives place to anorthitic plagiociase in the almandine zone but the reaction does not seem to have proceeded far here in rocks associated with others showing at least Amphibolite Facies. assemblages. Hpidote-quartz-actinolite-bearing inclusions in a granodiorite at Kozarovice (Hejtman, 1951) typically show marginal alteration to diopsidic pyroxene and hornblende in reaction rims. Such a scheme might be expected here but it has not been recognized. ; An unusual mass of ultrabasic material, about 50 feet or more across, has been found in the Wantabadgery granite about half a mile east of Mundarlo homestead. In hand specimen the inclusion is a fine-grained, dark, dense granulitic rock. It-consists essentially of amphibole, pyroxene, and green spinel, with a little talc, sphene, and iron-ore (see Plate xii, C). The pyroxene is a hypersthene (colourless; —ve; apparent oblique extinction to 15°, but mostly straight) and occurs as ragged grains, not infrequently penetrated by amphibole blades. The amphibole is a pale, feebly pleochroic (X = colourless, Y = very pale yellow-brown, Z = pale yellow-brown; y = 1:646; Z*c up to 19°) variety occurring as aggregates of small blades or as individuals up to about 0-5 mm. long. Both positive and negative signs have been obtained (sections with two cleavages are often positive, with one they may be negative). Apart from differences in sign the amphiboles seem to be indistinguishable. The positive sign suggests that the mineral is cummingtonite, although y is rather low (Simpson, 1932, has a cummingtonite with low refractive index; see also Winchell, 1951). The negative sign suggests a tremolite-actinolite which, from 206 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. IIT, the paragenesis, must be a magnesian type. A fine flaky mineral (tale ?) occurs in patches. Small bright-green translucent grains of spinel are a common feature of these rocks. The high magnesia content of this rock marks it as typically ultrabasic. No other ultrabasic rocks have been found in this area and as the only possibly related types are the silicified serpentines south of Nangus (Vallance, 19538@) the origin of this large inclusion is unknown. From what can be seen in the field the rock has been recrystal- lized without much reaction with the granite or much internal change -in composition. Rocks of similar chemical composition occur at Cooma (Joplin, 1942) as masses of chlorite amphibolite (see Table 3) within the zones of granitized schists. Ultrabasic types also occur as inclusions in the gneiss at Cooma; these are recorded as having what may be amphibole pseudomorphs after pyroxene. Mikkola and Sahama (1936) have described a metamorphosed ultrabasic rock (see Table 3) from Lapland consisting of rhombic pyroxene, amphibole (intermediate between hornblende and magnesia-rich tremolite-actinolite), green spinel, and a carbonate mineral. TABLE 3. | 1 A B SiGe phe weyiie. x ue 46-44 16-36 43-97 IO sper eels... 2. Hi Rea ee 10-12 10-38 10-43 HerOsaecnedn> CLeVtOn er. TAIN: 3-98 5-68 1-47 LEO ch Ma Ma aa i 8-30 3-24 7-14 MgO < MOB am Aca teN. lh 2 21-32 24-69 23-44 Ca 6-54 5-08 6-84 NGO Be-ombuee (aad, ake 0-78 0-46 0-30 GON Ae Se rr 5 Se 0-28 0-05 0-19 H,0+ 1-41 3-39 0-77 H.0— 0-08 0-19 0-05 TiOW PAG, » feAnaaa thy ed 0-20 0-22 0-22 POUR ate AN ba ee — 0-03 0-09 MnO. Mp enor. Ra aN 0-12 0-42 0-20 COM ear nnte tana conker abs. — 4-74 99-57 100-19 | 99-85 1. Ultrabasic inclusion in the Wantabadgery granite. Por. 52, Par. of Mundarlo, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. A. Chlorite-amphibolite. Pine Valley, Por. 70, Par. of Binjura. Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67, 1942: 191. B. Spinel-bearing pyroxene-amphibole-calcite rock. Kussuolinkivaara, Sodankyla (Finnish Lappland). Anal. L. Lokka. Bull. Comm. Géol. Finlande, no. 115, 1936: 366. It seems clear from the rocks themselves that their present mineral assemblage is not in complete equilibrium. Hypersthene and spinel.may be relics of the highest grade reached in the metamorphism. In the Pyroxene Hornfels Facies the rock should acquire a stable association of the type hypersthene-diopside-plagioclase-spinel. It will be seen from Text-figure 5 that diopside and plagioclase are not likely to be important here; neither has been definitely recognized. (In rocks of this composition similar mineral assemblages might be formed under either Pyroxene Hornfels or Granulite Facies conditions. The absence of garnet in the metasediments suggests the former here.) If hypersthene-spinel represents the metamorphic ‘peak’, the assemblage shows some relation to that of Tilley’s (1924) Class I Mg ii b hornfelses. Sedimentary hornfelses belonging to this class have been noted by Stewart (1946). The development of amphi- bole and tale may be related to a later retrogressive effect. These minerals are, in places, obviously derived from pyroxene and the reactions may be parallel to the late-stage conversion of the anhydrous high-grade mineral sillimanite to mica in some ef the pelitic inclusions. BY T. G. VALLANCE. 207 Dynamically-altered Granite. Although signs of a fairly weak stress environment are not uncommon in the granite masses it is somewhat rare to find indications of intense dynamic action. Crush bands up to about 200 yards wide have, however, been found in the Oura—-Wantabadgery -district. They commonly trend about 15° east of north and may be traced for ‘considerable distances in almost straight lines. Superficially they resemble long slate inclusions. The crushing is a wholly post-consolidation effect. A complete gradation exists from normal granite to rocks with good cleavages (phyllonites—Knopf, 1931) or even to mylonites. Micaceous minerals in the granite yield to the stress by slipping and often develop intricate contortions across the -cleavages. Biotite is converted to stretched-out patches of chlorite and sericite, often iron-stained. Any sillimanite present is converted to sericite. Quartz and felspar are more resistant and with intensification of the crushing may stand out as porphyroclasts. Usually, however, they develop cracks which lead to disruption of the grains. The felspar becomes sericitized whilst the quartz typically has undulose extinction. Narrow granular crush-bands may be set diagonally across the larger quartz grains and these lead to complete disintegration. Plate xii, D, shows the result of progressive crushing. ‘Many of the rocks acquire an obvious slaty cleavage whilst a diagonal slip cleavage “may also appear. The final product may have the assemblage sericite, finely-granular quartz, and some chlorite; this is a typical Greenschist Facies association. In some cases the frictional heat developed during the crushing has been sufficient to weld together completely the crushed material. This is in marked contrast to the crumbly nature of the crush-rocks in the Hllerslie granite. GRANITES OF THE SECOND GROUP. The chief representative of this plutonic group forms the Ellerslie granite mass which occupies the floor of the open valley accommodating both Nacka Nacka and Yaven ‘Creeks. Within the Parish of Hllerslie this granite is widespread. The mass has a somewhat irregular outline and comes into contact with a variety of rock types. AS a rule the granite is more easily eroded than are the surrounding rocks. With a broad, rounded north-western end (near the locality known as Clearmont), the mass gradually tapers to the south-east, becoming quite narrow near Sharp’s Creek village (west of Wondalga). It apparently persists, however, as far as Peel’s Creek (west of Batlow) and Batlow. The maximum length is more than 20 miles and the width about 5 miles. There is quite a variation in the appearance of the rocks of the Hllerslie mass. Often they are markedly gneissic biotite-bearing granites and granodiorites but more massive (usually still with traces of foliation) phases are not rare. The distribution of the two types is irregular and they have not been mapped separately. Similar to the Ellerslie granite are the rocks outcropping along Adelong Creek north of Adelong and, to the south, near Wondalga. This mass is traversed by the ‘Tumbarumba road from near Adelong to within three miles of Batlow, where it passes off into unmapped country to the east. It is proposed to refer to this mass as the Wondalga granite mass. Although it is separated from the Hllerslie granite by the “basic belt” (Vallance, 19530) the two rocks are so similar that they are believed to be of roughly the same age and to have had the same petrogenetic background. A small mass, named the Belmore mass (after the Parish of Belmore), occurs between Tarcutta and Westbrook. It is composed of rocks of the Hllerslie type but has not been studied in detail. Lithologically similar granitic rocks occur near Tumut Pond, whilst there are many interesting analogies with the gneissic granites of the Kosciusko plateau, with the Murrumbidgee batholith rocks north of Cooma, and with certain granites in central-western New South Wales. Aplites and Pegmatites. Fine- to medium-grained aplites and acid granites occur as dykes and veins in these granites. They are quite abundant near Adelong : elsewhere they may be more dispersed. 208 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. ITI, Sometimes acid veins are given off into the country rocks. In the basic rocks, especially, such veins may be ptygmatically folded. The acid dyke rocks are more resistant to erosion than is the host granite. Some of the dykes show post-consolidation crushing. Mineralogically, the acid rocks consist of quartz, K-felspar, and some acid oligoclase, with small amounts of muscovite, biotite, chlorite, and pyrite. The quartz is often strained and occurs both as irregular grains (0:5 to 1 mm. across) or as aggregates of tiny grains arranged in interstitial patches or in bands around the larger grains (e.g. felspar) in the rocks. There is a slight, but not a general, tendency for the quartz to be intergrown graphically with felspar. Felspar is often altered to sericite or kaolin. The K-felspar is commonly microperthitic, the intergrown albite being of the patch- or stringer-type. The plagioclase grains may be zoned; signs of fracturing and later healing are not uncommon. Muscovite, excluding sericite, is not common, whilst the little biotite present is often partly or wholly altered to chlorite. In a few cases the dark mica is merely recrystallized to finer aggregates of itself. Pyrite occurs in these rocks near Adelong. Coarser-grained pegmatites also occur in the granites. The K-felspar of these is. often microperthitic and some of the dykes have graphic margins with quartz-rich central zones. Tourmaline crystals about two inches long may be present. Compared with the aplites these rocks are not very abundant. There seems to be little or no mineral- ization associated with them and, in places, they have escaped the crushing which affected the granites and aplites. Granite-Granodiorite. As in the first-group rocks, a complete gradation exists here between granite and granodiorite; local, more basic, phases occur and will be mentioned later. The rocks are fairly even, medium-grained types, although sometimes small felspar phenocrysts appear. Normally the rocks are greyish but near Peel’s Creek school (three miles west of Batlow) a reddish phase occurs. The gneissic foliation in the Ellerslie and Wondalga masses is generally arranged north-west—south-east; dips are usually steep. In places the granites have been crushed to cleaved, crumbly material along bands traversing the masses. Crushed granites are extensive along Adelong Creek near Wondalga. Whether they be gneissic or almost massive, the rocks have a fairly uniform mineral association, consisting of quartz, plagioclase, K-felspar, and biotite together with some muscovite and accessories (see mode in Table 4). Hornblende occurs near the contact with the basic rocks. The quartz may have a faintly bluish colour and usually forms irregular grains with sutured margins against felspar. Strain features are to be seen even in the quartz of the fairly massive rocks. In some of the foliated granites the quartz grains may be recrystallized to aggregates of smaller granules. These granules are at times arranged in bands strung out along the foliation; such bands may be wrapped around felspar crystals which, although sometimes fractured, are never granulated in the same way as the quartz. The feature suggests that the quartz has undergone plastic flow and recrystallization. Such bands and lenses of quartz stand out on the weathered surfaces. Watt (1899) recorded similar quartz in the “granite” at Wyalong, an area which has many analogies with Adelong. Watt believed this quartz deformation to be a post-consolidation effect and it seems difficult to explain it in another way. Vermicular quartz in myrmekitic intergrowths hardly ever occurs in these rocks (cf. p. 201). Subhedral to euhedral crystals of plagioclase (oligoclase-andesine, up to Ab,) are common, often exceeding K-felspar in abundance. Albite, carlsbad, and pericline twin- laws are represented. Zoning is common and the more calcic cores are typically more altered than the margins. The felspar may be somewhat strained and, if fractured, is often healed by later felspar or granular quartz. Both untwinned and twinned (micro- clinic) types of K-felspar may appear as ragged grains, sometimes moulded onto plagioclase. Microperthitic intergrowths are common. With a decrease in K-felspar content the rocks grade towards quartz-mica diorites. my BY T. G. VALLANCE. 209 The chief mica is a strongly pleochroic biotite (X = pale yellow- or greenish-brown, Y = very dark brown, Z = very dark brown, almost black; 2V very small; 6 = 1-648). More rarely the biotites are of the reddish-brown type. Inclusions with pleochroic haloes are commoner in the latter variety. In some rocks the biotite is clotted and recrystallized to aggregates of smaller flakes. The mica may wrap round felspar crystals in the rocks with abundant granular quartz (p. 208); the biotite here often projects across the grain boundaries into the felspar. Epidote and sphene are often associated with biotite. Fine sericite as an alteration product is more extensive than primary muscovite. Bright green chlorite often occurs after biotite but, in addition, well-formed, pleochroic (pale yellow to bright green) chlorite flakes with anomalous blue or purple interference colours exist independently of the biotite. Apatite, sphene, zircon, calcite, epidote, and iron-ore are accessories. The sphene may be reddish-brown, feebly pleochroic, and optically positive with a small 2V. Allanite, a rare accessory, is represented by one zoned, pleochroic brown crystal found in the granite at Gadara (east of Adelong but still of the Wondalga type). Allanite also occurs in the Murrumbidgee batholith. TABLE 4. Mode of Specimen of Ellerslie Granite. Quartz 16°8 Orthoclase Be ie fe ae ayo Plagioclase .. cb as io ae 39-1 Biotite a et 42 we 21-4 Hornblende .. a Se oe Na: nil Muscovite as oe me 0-3 Accessories .. on cfs Sts oe 0:3 Granodiorite. Por. 62, Par. of Wallace, Co. Wynyard. (For analysis, see Table 5, no. 1.) Chemical Data. Only one representative of this plutonic group has been analysed (see Table 5) so little can be said about the chemistry of this group. For comparison, however, a compilation of analyses of more or less similar rocks from analogous environments has been made. All of these rocks are regarded by Dr. W. R. Browne (see David, 1950) as being related to his Bowning orogeny. These analyses have been plotted on Or.Cor:Ab:An.Fem and ACF diagrams (Text- figs. 3 and 4) which are placed, for comparative purposes, below the corresponding diagrams for the first-group rocks. The more calcic members of the first group fall near many of the types included here with the second group. Ji the rocks plotted on Text-figure 3 do, in fact, belong to one plutonic series they show little variation in Ab over a considerable range of Or.Cor. The most basic member (from Wyalong) probably owes its present composition to reaction with basic igneous material; similar hybrid rocks are formed here along the contacts between the “basic belt” and the Ellerslie and Wondalga granites. These basified rocks are in marked contrast to the biotitic inclusion (Text-fig. 1, point no. 12) which would be roughly equivalent to the most basified phase of the first-group granites. Marginal Features of the Second-Group Granites. Brief mention has already been made of the fact that the Hllerslie and Wondalga granites come into contact with a variety of country rocks. On its western side the Hllerslie granite abuts high-grade metasediments some of which are migmatitic. Remarkably shallow (25°-30°) westerly dips occur in Turner’s Creek near the granite but these rapidly steepen away from the granite. To the north- west in Mt. Pleasant Creek the granite has a clear-cut contact against migmatites and does not appear to have been responsible for the veining. The granite is fairly massive here and shows no important grain size or compositional changes near the contact. Some of the contact rocks show gentle folds sympathetic with the granite margin; 210 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, these may be related to plastic flow associated with the relatively active period of the granite’s invasion. The independence of the high-grade rocks and the Ellerslie granite is emphasized to the north-east where the same granite comes into contact with knotted schists or even lower-grade pelites without knots. Such rocks, together with isogradal sandier metasediments, outcrop in Nacka Nacka Creek along the northern part of the Ellerslie mass. Further east and along its eastern margin the granite occurs alongside the “basic belt”. The increase in metamorphic grade to the south-east along this belt has already been described (Vallance, 19530). On the eastern side of this belt, the Wondalga granite appears. Tongues of granite and acid granite, ranging from large prolongations down to veinlets, are given off into the basic rocks. Ptygmatie folds in some of these veins may indicate a certain plasticity in the host rocks during injection (Wilson, 1952). TABLE 5. A B C 1 D B F G H SiO, 58-93 63°35 67°64 67-67 68:92 69°55 70°31 74-99 76-08 Al,O3 17-48 16-92 15-66 16-02 16-21 14-16 18°68 10°44 12-93 Fe,0; 1-73 1-23 1-12 0-56 0°57 0-60 0-63 5-58 0°70 FeO 5-01 4°58 3°31 3°79 2-42 3°33 1°83 n.d 0-90 MgO 4-33 3-08 1°55 2-20 1-04 1°45 1-10 0-09 0°53 Cad 7-08 4-45 2-14 2-12 2°31 2-20 2-22 0-50 0°52 Na,0 2-91 1-90 3-03 2-86 2-43 3-14 1:37 2-66 2-31 K,0 1-34 2-28 3°58 3°41 4-36 4-09 3-32 4°82 5-26 H,O+ 0-73 0 86 0-90 0°57 0-93 0-30 0-65 0-52 0°33 H,O— 0-13 0-09 0-30 0-18 0-08 0-20 0-09 0-17 0-19 TiO, 0-52 0-84 0-62 0-71 0-52 0-54 0°35 tr. 0°35 P.O; 0-14 tr. 0-13 = 0-30) 0-12 0-06 = 0-12 MnO tr = 0-12 0-08 0-03 0-23 = tr. 0:06 Ete. tr = 0-20 = 0-04 | 0-22 a _ a 100-33 99:53 | 100-30 | 100-12 | 100-16 | 100-13 | 100-61 99:77 | 100-28 Quartz-mica diorite. Klondyke Mine, Wyalong. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Min. Res. no. 5, 1899: 14. . Quartz-mica diorite (hornblende-free). Cooma area. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 68, 1943 = 171. Granite. Hillgrove area. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 8, 1907: 217. Granodiorite. Creek bed, Por. 62, Par. of Wallace, Co. Wynyard. Anal. T. G. Vallance. . Granite. Koetong mass (north-east Victoria). Anal. C. M. Tattam. Bull. Geol. Surv. Vict., 52,1929: 38. Granite. Hillgrove township. Anal. W. A. Greig. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 8, 1907: 215. Coarse biotite-granite. A phase of the “‘ Blue gneiss ’’-Murrumbidgee batholith. Shannon’s Flat, W.N.W. of Cooma. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Unpublished analysis by courtesy of the analyst. White gneiss. Bunyan. Anal. G. A. Joplin. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., 68, 1943: 172. . Granite. Wyangala Dam, Lachlan River, 19 miles south of Woodstock. Anal. W. A. Greig. Dept. Mines N.S.W., Ann. Rept. for 1932: 96. we Aa oS © Hi > Local reaction is typical of the contact between the granites and basic rocks. As. far as the granite is concerned, the most obvious result is a basification with the development of hornblende. In extreme cases hornblende completely displaces biotite as the chief melanocratic mineral; the resultant rocks tend to become dioritic in composition. The basic rocks become somewhat recrystallized and large amphiboles may be developed. Felspar also increases in these rocks near the contact and probably contributes to their mechanical breakdown. Biotite, too, may appear in the acidified basic rocks. The whole process appears to be one of hybridization, involving reciprocal reaction between the two parents. Some splendid examples of the results of this process. are to be seen in the quarry near the swimming pool at Batlow, where granite veins. invade the amphibolite. Plate xii, EH, illustrates one of the reaction rocks carrying a good deal more hornblende than biotite. The amphibole of these rocks is variable in BY T. G. VALLANCE. PALA colour, grey, greenish, and brownish-green types being common; as a rule the strongly greenish type mantles the others. All the amphiboles are negative and have Z*c greater than 20° (up to 28°). Some of the large hornblende grains enclose rounded felspars or have sutured margins against felspar. Occasionally these big amphiboles are rifted apart along the cleavages and granular quartz fills the resulting wedge-shaped cavities. Felspars, too, may be cracked and healed. Some of the larger felspars have granular quartz and ferromagnesian minerals wrapped round them. A complete gradation exists from granite through basified granite and acidified amphibolite to normal amphibolite. In many cases, however, the modified “granitic” veins may be readily distinguished from the essentially basic host material. The Hllerslie granite comes into contact with the Green Hills granite along a front extending from near Batlow to Yaven Creek. Sharp junctions have not been found and the usual occurrence is a gradation over a couple of hundred yards between the two types. Each granite shows signs of foliation roughly parallel to the direction of the contact in the vicinity of the contact but, away from it, it resumes its normal parallelism to the strike of the country rocks. Directional structures are more obvious in the Green Hills mass along this contact than elsewhere within that mass. The gradational rocks are variable even in hand specimen, but they commonly display a roughly gneissic appearance. They are frequently biotite-rich and have an uneven yet medium grain size. As both granites are broadly comparable in mineralogy no marked mineral change is to be expected in the gradational rocks. Felspar, biotite, and quartz remain the chief constituents. Andesine (about Ab,;) occurs as euhedral or subhedral grains up to 5 mm. across. These grains are twinned and may be zoned; they are often fractured and healed by later felspar (note the patchy appearance of the felspar in Plate xii, F). The felspars are roughly oriented in the plane of the foliation and may have biotite wrapped round them. A little K-felspar has been found and, rarely, myrmekitic intergrowths; the latter are typical of the Green Hills granite but not of the Ellerslie granite. The abundant mica is a strongly pleochroic red-brown biotite, often concentrated in clots. Muscovite is not common. Quartz is usually much strained and cracked but may not be as extensively granulated as some of the quartz in the Ellerslie mass itself. ‘The evidence of fractured and healed felspar suggests dynamic action at some stage before the final consolidation of these rocks. Similar gradational contacts have been found between the analogous granite-types in the area north of Cooma. THE PROBLEM OF THE AGES OF THE GRANITES. The relative ages of the two granite groups appear to be the same here as in the Cooma area where the Cooma gneiss ante-dates the Murrumbidgee batholith rocks. The second-group Ellerslie granite, along its north-western margin, cuts across high-grade rocks and metamorphic zones which are related to the Green Hills and Wantabadgery granites. It seems reasonable to believe, therefore, that the Ellerslie granite is younger than these first-group rocks. The Hllerslie granite is more extensively crushed than the first-group types, but this feature may have resulted merely from the greater resistance of the latter. Little information on relative ages is obtainable from the- gradational contact between the Green Hills and Ellerslie granites. That the gradation was due to reaction related to the advent of the Hllerslie granite before the Green Hills mass was quite cold and consolidated is considered unlikely because the former obviously post-dates the metamorphism (and its thermal environment) with which the latter was closely associated. There may not, however, have been a very great time-interval between the emplacement of the two granites. Perhaps a stress environ- ment existing during the introduction of the Ellerslie granite weakened the Green Hills type along its margins and thus facilitated reaction with the later granitic material. The local foliation parallel to the contact in the Green Hills mass may be related to this postulated stress environment. As the Wantabadgery and Green Hills granites bear roughly the same relations to the metamorphic zones it is assumed that they are not greatly different in age. 212 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG—TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, The general similarity of the so-called second-group masses suggests that they, too, may be fairly closely related in time. Of the absolute ages of the granite we know nothing definite. Harper (1916) believed that the granite at Adelong (second-group type) was Carboniferous and claimed that it could be traced for 25 miles to the south-east, where it intruded fossiliferous Devonian rocks. This does not seem to have been adequately confirmed. Dr. W. R. Browne (in David, 1950) suggested that the granite between Batlow and Tumbarumba (here regarded as part of the Green Hills mass) should be “very tentatively grouped as late middle Devonian but may be Carboniferous”. Edwards and Haston (1937) believed the Corryong batholith to be either post lower or post middle Devonian in age. The Cooma and Albury gneisses which are almost identical with the first-group rocks here both in appearance and environment are regarded (see Joplin, 1947) as epi- Ordovician in age. The Murrumbidgee batholith rocks, similar to the second-group types, are considered to be of epi-Silurian age (Joplin, 1943). No fossils have been recorded from the area studied, but at two localities not far away, Moorong Trig. Station near Wagga Wagga, and Carboona Gap on the Tumbarumhba- Jingellic road, upper Ordovician (Hastonian ?) graptolitic remains have been found. Both occurrences are in rocks affected by granite. The writer has not been to Moorong Trig. Station, but at Carboona the granite is lithologically identical with the Green Hills type granite. A little to the west of the black (carbonaceous) graptolitic sediments at Carboona normal pelites show metamorphic features typical of the high grade of metamorphism as described here (Vallance, 1953a). These Carboona rocks were placed by Joplin (1947) in her zone of sills. The granite is thus in much the same meta- morphic setting as the Green Hills mass and as both occur in the same belt they are regarded as probably being related in age. If the graptolites are of Hastonian age there surely could not have been a great deal of cover if the granite were of late Ordovician and pre-Silurian age. The presence of extensive metamorphic zones suggests that the first-group granites, associated with them, belong to a fairly deep zone (cf. Joplin, 1948). If the heat flow, conductivity of the roof rocks, and the temperature difference between the granite and the surface at the time of emplacement were known, the thickness of the cover above the granite might be obtained from the equation (Birch et al., 1942) aT dQ = K.—.dS dn (where dQ is the quantity of heat conducted in unit time across an area dS; K is the conductivity; and dT/dn is the temperature gradient normal to the surface dS). These values are not available here, but a rough estimate may be obtained by substituting hypothetical data. Birch (1950), in a granitic terrain, obtained heat-flow values ranging from 1:6 x 10° to 1:9 x 10° cal/em?.sec; in active orogenic regions the values would conceivably be higher. Studies on sillimanite (Michel-Lévy, 1950) and granitic felspars (Barth, 1951) indicate that these minerals can form at about 450-500°C. It is not unreasonable to expect that the granite would have been at about that temperature. Assuming a temperature difference of the order of 400°C., heat-flow about twice Birch’s values, and a roof with the conductivity of slate, a depth-of-cover value of about 10,000 feet is obtained. Raguin (1946) quotes values of from 1500 to 3000 metres for the depth of burial of migmatites in the Pyrenees region. A cover of the order of that noted above seems to be thicker than could reasonably be expected of the Bolindian (uppermost Ordovician) rocks alone. To overcome the depth problem it seems necessary to postulate sedimentation continuing, without break at the end of the Ordovician, into the Silurian in the metamorphic belt. Just how far into Silurian times this progressed is not known. There is no definite evidence of an orogeny at the close of the upper Ordovician in this region. The closest limit we have is to be found in the Wombat Creek area of north- eastern Victoria where sediments variously called upper Silurian or lower to middle tan’ = BY T. G: VALLANCE. 213 Devonian (David, 1950; Crohn, 1950) unconformahbly overlie upper Ordovician rocks. If the unconformity was related to an epi-Ordovician Benambran orogeny (David, 1950) this folding could well have occurred in lower or middle Silurian times. As it seems clear that the first-group granites were related to the metamorphism which, in a broad sense, accompanied the folding they, too, may belong to the early or middle Silurian. At the southern end of the metamorphic belt the analogues of both granitic groups here described ante-date middle Devonian rocks (Crohn, 1950, p. 25) and perhaps the same time-relations exist here. The second-group rocks may thus post-date the middle Silurian and ante-date the middle Devonian. They are perhaps to be referred to the epi-Silurian Bowning orogeny (cf. the Murrumbidgee batholith rocks—see Joplin, 1943). REMARKS ON THE ORIGIN AND SIGNIFICANCE OF THE GRANITES. The First-Group Granites. Because of the close relationship in the field between the extensive metamorphic zones and the rocks of this group the question of the genesis of the latter is of considerable interest. Like the same question asked of so many other granitic masses, however, it has as yet no completely satisfying answer. It seems reasonable to believe that pre-granitic basic rocks may have occurred in this region, but whether or not they were related genetically to the granites has not been established (at Cooma, Joplin (1942) suggested that the chlorite amphibolite, for example, was related to the Cooma gneiss). The absence of plutonic rocks of inter- mediate type (apart from purely local biotite-rich patches) associated with the first- group granites rather suggests that the latter were not immediately derived from basic magma by differentiation. If we compare the compositions of the granitic rocks and the metasediments we ‘find several interesting points. Of the metasediments, the psammopelites come nearest to the granites in composition (cf. Text-fig. 1). Psammopelites predominate among the metasediments and the approximate proportions, obtained from a section near Alfred Town, pelites (20%), psammopelites (60%), and psammites (20%), are roughly repre- sentative of the metasediments as a whole. An average rock calculated on this proportional basis would be still like a psammopelite because the excess of AIl.O, and K,O of the normal pelites would be offset by the excess SiO, in the psammites. Compared with the plutonic types such a rock would be deficient in alkalis (particularly Na.O) and CaO, whilst having rather more Al,O, and ferromagnesian constituents than the granites. The actual differences are, however, not very great; addition of soda alone to the metasediments would give a composition not unlike a granite. Formation of granitic rocks from sediments by metamorphic-metasomatic processes (often involving addition of soda) is nowadays a commonly invoked petrogenetic scheme. We must enquire whether there is any evidence of its action here. If metasomatism were applicable on a regional scale one would expect progressive changes in composition to accompany changes in grade in the metasediments. That such changes may take place in some cases has been elegantly established by Lapadu-Hargues (1945). Using mole percentages of various constituents he demonstrated several interesting progressions in rocks ranging from slates to granites. The granitic rocks from this area as well as metasediments have been plotted on mole percentage variation diagrams (Text-figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9). In the alkali/alumina diagram it is clear that the metasediments, irrespective of metamorphic grade (they range up to spotted granulites and mottled gneisses), roughly fall along a straight line. The granitic rocks form a series running in opposition to the sedimentary variation. The granite curve, if extended, would meet the other curve in the region of the psammopelites. Lapadu-Hargues’ curve is parallel to the granite curve. Somewhat similar features are also exhibited in the soda/potash (Text-fig. 7), lime/alumina (Text- fig. 8), and magnesia/alumina (Text-fig. 9) diagrams. The variation pattern for iron is similar to that for magnesia. Although the arrangement is rather irregular in the soda/potash diagram the plutonic rocks all have high Na,O relative to the metasediments. no. I. 7, Tattam, 1929, Table IIT, no. 19. 138, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 4. 18, Vallance, 1953a, Table 6, no. 6. Table 6, no. 9. 22, Joplin, 1942, Table 7, no. I. Table 7, no. V. curve in Text-fig. 6 is from Lapadu-Hargues (1945). types. variation. do the marginal country rocks (see p. 205). 214 GLOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, These results suggest that the present compos**ions of the metasediments are, in the main, directly related to their original compositions and that there has been little apport chimique. Actually, there may be a slight tendency for the highest-grade rocks CJ 6 fo} | oO. \ a. ~ Q ols— \oz Ou Oo 72 oO oIr or, § 0% ~ - ola” Y eae aa a eS us O17 =< Oa 2%) m4 o®, Les x 20 = ot = oft o° Xx] eee 2 ou 7 a e ss rs} e2 ° 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 '6 Me S. A e4 A.umina mol “Io e * oF O f omueh ol oom é 1 o 010 on 583 8 09 On 022 o® on SS o ol2 S s 2 i ° 1 2 3 4 5 S Potash mo/ To _™~ AY ; 70° O or) 023 on CRP (ey ly See en ot P2022 OS 22 - = -93 — “ol8 — aa on ae ol4 © o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 6 r) 20 fon Alumina mo! Io on 020 eo oo 7 199 09 on 6 O'S q 9 OH OH 2 °° on Be O16 3%, 5 17 ©23 rs} ©. 120022 O14 § i OD 248916 \ 3 4 o}8) - 15 o'2 oO oo Cc ms Ley ® % 3 30... «40 so > M S 4006 a 10 Alumina mol % Text-figures 6-10. Point no. 1, This paper, Table 2, no. 2. 2, This paper, Table 2, no. 1. 3, This paper, Table 2, no. 3. 4, This paper, Table 2, no. 4. 5, This paper, Table 2, no. 5. 6, Joplin, 1942, Table 8, 9, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 1. 10, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 5. 11, Vallance, 1953a, Table 1, no. 6. 12, Vallance, 1953a, Table 3, no. 1. 14, Vallance, 1953a, Table 2, no. 1. 15, Vallance, 19538a, Table 6, no. 1. 16, Vallance, 1953a, Table 6, no. 2. 17, Vallance, 19538a, Table 6, no. 5. 19, Vallance, 1953a, Table 6, no. 8. 20, Vallance, 1953a, 23, Joplin, 1942, Table 7, no. IV. 24, Joplin, 1942, The dotted circles represent metasediments and the black circles granitic rocks. The dotted to have alkali/alumina and soda/potash ratios a little higher than those of the low-grade The increase is never great and is certainly not on the scale of Lapadu-Hargues’ The inclusions in the granites show more advanced stages in this series than Joplin (1942, p. 181) concluded that there BY T. G. VALLANCE. 215 was a small addition of soda in the formation of the highest-grade rocks at Cooma. Detrital albite in some of the lower-grade rocks introduces an element of doubt when assessing the amount of Na.O added to the higher-grade metasediments. The increase in K,O content due to the muscovitization in certain high-grade rocks near the granites is a further complication. The evidence available in the present case suggests to me that, if the granites were derived from the metasediments, then the critical granitization stages are not clearly represented in the variation curves. This may be because actual granitization took place at deeper levels not yet exposed. There certainly seems to be more reason to believe that the granites of the Green Hills and Wantabadgery masses were introduced into their present position than that they were formed in situ. The small amount of apport chimique even in the high-grade rocks suggests a break in the granitization series. The differences in the metamorphic environments associated with the Wantabadgery granite (mainly knotted schists, localized high-grade rocks) and the Green Hills granite (extensive high-grade zone) suggest that the lithologically identical granites) did not form in their present positions. Displacement seems to have been of some importance in the emplacement of the Wantabadgery granite; the deflection of the strike of the country rocks in the Oura-Wantabadgery district (see p. 198) may have been due to displacement. The plagioclase twins represented in the granites of this group include Gorai’s (1950, 1951) C-twins (see p. 200). Gorai believes that granitic rocks with plagioclase in which his C-twins are important (his I-granites) are of igneous origin, having passed through a mobile stage. From the abundance of metasediment inclusions in the granites it seems clear that a good deal of sedimentary material has been added to them even if the granites were not largely derived from the metasediments at a lower level. Whether the granites were formed by extensive contamination of a magma or by extensive granitization (anatexis essentially) of the metasediments, the final products would tend to be similar and to approach the bulk composition of the sediments. Joplin (1948) believes that both processes were active in the similar environments at Cooma and Albury. Oligoclase granite magma, derived from the base of the Sial is regarded as an active agent and Dr. Joplin considers that orthoclase-bearing gneisses are formed as a first-stage granitization of the metasediments, ahead of the advancing granite; ultimately a potash-enriched syntectic granite is produced. At Cooma and Albury representatives of the oligoclase granite and syntectic granite are found. In this area some aplitic dyke rocks have compositions similar to the oligoclase granite type (see p. 201), the main varieties in the first-group plutonic masses are akin to Joplin’s syntectic or contaminated granites. The postulated primary oligoclase granite magma would be a convenient source of soda required in the making-over of the sedimentary material. An important control in determining the metamorphic and plutonic history of this metamorphic belt must have been the miogeosyncline in which the sediments were deposited. Sinking of the geosynclinal belt must have led to folding of the sediments and, as the action progressed, the rocks doubtiess acquired cleavage and schistosity. — Associated with the sinking was a relative rise in the geothermal surfaces with a great increase in thermal activity at the base of the geosyncline. The thermal activity might have been related to the sinking of the geosyncline, to igneous activity at its base, or to a combination of both. Although the initial thermal gradient may have been rather steep, it is suggested that a primary thermal zoning was established in the geosynclinal sediments (cf. Kennedy, 1948). The deepest and highest-grade zone was in the region of greatest activity where, according to Joplin’s (1948, 1952) theory, oligoclase-granite magma was able to react extensively with the metasediments. Looked at from the sediments’ angle, an important feature of this zone was probably the addition of soda. Above this postulated granitization zone was the highest-grade zone at present visible (characterized by spotted granulites, etc.). With the steep thermal gradient this zone was probably overlain by more restricted knotted schist and biotite zones. At Cooma we may have exposed a deeper level than that represented by the high-grade zone in this 216 GEOLOGY OF TITHE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. III, area. The extensive migmatites in what is known as the injection zone at Cooma have only restricted equivalents here. Although it has been assumed that these Cooma rocks are arterites (due to magmatic injection) it may be that they are in part venitic. Locally produced (contact) migmatites at higher levels are probably more arteritic than are those of a granitization zone proper. The explanation given at Cooma (Joplin, 1943) that on low-grade metamorphic rocks a later contact thermal metamorphism was imposed is only roughly followed here in the idea of an advancing thermal front as the metamorphism progressed. The complete metamorphic series demonstrated (Vallance, 19538a) in these rocks stresses the essential unity of the whole process. The suggested primary thermal zoning was probably modified when the granitic material produced in the deeper levels was rendered capable of movement and was able to escape upwards in the “thermal envelope’. Although it is believed that the Green Hills granite is not in its place of origin, it may not have travelled far and still had sufficient energy available to migmatize locally the metasediments amongst which it came to rest. Such a granite might be called parautochthonous (Read, 1951). The high-grade zone rocks present evidence of a stage-wise metamorphism with signs of a thermal “peak” superimposed on somewhat less metamorphosed rocks. The Wantabadgery granite was able to escape further from the postulated granitization zone and its final roof must have been above the level of the high-grade zone and within the knotted schist zone. With the initial steep thermal gradient the knotted schist and biotite zones may have been narrower than they are now; their limits were perhaps extended by the thermal ‘‘front” associated with the intruding granite. Locally, along its margins, the Wantabadgery granite effected migmatization on a small scale. Tourmalinization of the contact rocks was also related to the presence of granitic material (see Vallance, 19538a). The variations in the state of the country rocks near these identical granites have led to the latter being regarded not as the cause of the metamorphism (i.e., that the metamorphism is not purely a contact effect due to the presence of the granites), but that both metamorphism and granites were related to the same ultimate causes, bound up with the history of the geosyncline. At the levels we now see, the results of this action were mainly metamorphic but the more intense conditions of the deeper zones were probably conducive to extensive metasomatic reaction and granitization. The granites, whether broadly syntectic or anatectic, belong to the deeper level and it is only as a result of their mobility that they are now visible. The granites were, however, probably able to exert some contact thermal influence on the rocks which they invaded. Variations in the width of the knotted schist zone and, to a less extent, the biotite zone near the Wantabadgery granite may be partly related to differences in the slope of the granite contacts. The lack of strong foliation in many of these first-group granites suggests that no very great stress influence was involved during their crystallization. That a stress environment of a rather weaker nature did exist, however, is indicated by the rough orientation of some inclusions and schlieren, and by the fact that with the Wantabadgery granite, at least, the thermal effect was not sufficiently great to overcome the schistosity of the metasediments. Schistose contact rocks are, of course, quite well known (Grout, 1933). The first-group granites probably came to rest soon after a tectonic maximum; they are in this sense late synkinematic. The Wantabadgery and Green Hills masses show features characteristic of Browne’s (1931) synchronous batholiths.. That plutonic activity has occurred in a miogeosynclinal environment is itself quite interesting, though not exceptional; Marshall Kay (1951) mentions several examples of this association. Compared with the eugeosynclines there is, however, a general lack of plutonic activity in miogeosynclinal regions. The sediments of this miogeosyncline are characterized by appreciable potash and, in general, fairly low lime contents. It is probable that such features do not typify all similar geosynclines, but there is reason se BY T. G. VALLANCE. PALI to expect that they are more characteristic of miogeosynclinal than of eugeosynclinal sediments. In Part I of these Studies (Vallance, 1953a, Text-fig. 2) the restricted chemical composition of the pelites of this metamorphic belt relative to pelites from other parts of the world, and presumably from various geosynclinal environments, was clearly demonstrated. The potassic granites of the type found in this area and which probably derived a good deal of their source material from the metasediments could only be the “most universal” (Joplin, 1948, p. 38) where there is an overall sedimentary uniformity of the type found here. The Second-Group Granites. These rocks have not received as much attention as the other types because they lack the close relations to the general metamorphism shown by the first-group granites. It seems clear that the second-group rocks were emplaced later than those already discussed, but how much later it is not possible to say. They may have followed fairly soon after the earlier group but it is possible that some of the rocks of the “basic belt” (Vallance, 19530) were intruded during the time between the emplacement of the first- and second-group granites. In any case, the latter definitely post-date the metamorphism. Field evidence suggests that the Ellerslie granite invaded to a higher level in the crust than did the neighbouring Green Hills granite (the latter still has roof remnants, the former is quite unroofed). According to Joplin (1948) the second- group granite equivalent at Cooma also belongs to a higher level than the Cooma gneiss. The Murrumbidgee batholith does not display typical synchronous batholith features nor yet those characteristic of a subsequent batholith (Browne, 1931); Joplin (1948) refers to it aS a quasi-synchronous batholith. The lack of extensive metamorphic-metasomatic features at the margins of such large bodies as the Ellerslie and Wondalga masses surely suggests that, in general, the granites were not very active when they crystallized and that they were not formed in place. They seem to be hardly in the right setting for wholesale granitization in. situ. The most outstanding marginal effect of these granites is their reaction on a local scale with the basic rocks (p. 210). Joplin (1948) has drawn attention to the evidence of reaction between the Murrumbidgee batholith rocks and amphibolite inclusions in the area north of Cooma. The theory was advanced that the reaction is a reciprocal effect and this is contrasted with basic inclusions being recrystallized without much reaction in the Cooma gneiss. Dr. Joplin believed that strong compression prevented reaction in the latter case but that, as the Murrumbidgee batholith was “emplaced during waning compression’, hybridization was possible there and was, in fact, of considerable importance. Whether this theory be true or not there is nevertheless a marked contrast between the attitudes of members of the two granite groups in the present area to basic inclusions (and basic country rocks). Joplin considered that hybridization of the primary oligoclase-granite magma by reaction with the pre-existing basic rocks was responsible for the more basic phases of the Murrumbidgee batholith. Hybridization has occurred locally with the Ellerslie and Wondalga granites and the “basic belt” rocks, but as the hornblendic phases are largely confined to the contacts it is difficult to say how important this reaction has been in determining the nature of the second-group rocks. At Cooma, the White gneiss (Joplin, 1943) is regarded as representing the relatively “pure” (i.e. unhybridized) oligoclase-granite-magma type; a similar rock has not been found in this area unless it occur among the types classed as aplites, none of which have been analysed. In the case of the second-group granites there are few instances of much reaction with metasediments although inclusions of such rocks occur in the granites. The second-group granites often display gneissic features indicative of a stress influence. The fact that non-gneissic acid pegmatite veins may be associated with the gneissic granite suggests stress waning before complete consolidation. Many crush- bands, however, bear witness to post-consolidation shearing. Parts of the Ellerslie 218 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY—ADELONG—-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. ITT, mass are relatively massive, indicating, no doubt, that directed pressure was not exerted uniformly through the mass. If the granites of this group were associated with a separate epi-Silurian orogeny (see p. 213) there are not many signs of its effect on the earlier-metamorphosed rocks. This later folding must have closely followed the trends of the earlier folding if the gneissic foliation in the second-group granites is any indicator of the contemporary stress pattern. However, although the granites often have a distinct foliation, this is no real reason for postulating an intense folding associated with them. If these granites were derived from primary oligoclase-granite magma by reaction with the country rocks this must have largely taken place at a lower level. In view of the chemical similarity between certain first- and second-group granitic rocks (cf. Text-figs. 1-4) it is possible that the earlier granites may have contributed to the development of the second-group types. A renewal of activity in the deeper levels may have resulted in this contribution not being a purely passive one based on assimilation of solid granite by a later, active magma. A certain “rejuvenation” of the earlier granitic material may have been one phase in the development of the later type. The dominance of biotite in many of the second-group granites, for example, might be related to the contribution of the earlier plutonic types and/or to deep-level granitization of sedimentary material. It is clear, however, that any postulated renewal of deep-level activity was unable to affect greatly the metamorphic picture, related to the earlier activity, which we can trace at the present level of exposure. The distinctly calcic phases of the second-group granites are perhaps most reasonably to be connected with addition of hornblendic rocks. The association and hybridization of similar gneissic granites with analogous basic rocks at Cooma, Adelong, Wyalong, and Hillgrove, amongst other places, are probably of more than casual significance in determining the nature of the gneissic granites. References. BartH, T. F. W., 1951.—The feldspar geologic thermometers. Neues Jahrb. f. Min., Abh., 82: 148-154. Bircu, F., 1950.—Flow of heat in the Front Range, Colorado. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 61: 567-634. , et al., 1942..—Handbook of physical constants. Geol. Soc. Amer., Special Paper 36. BROWNE, W. R., 1914.—The geology of the Cooma district. Jowr. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 48: 172-222. ———, 1931.—Notes on bathyliths and some of their implications. Ibid., 65: 112-144. , et al., 1946—Report to the Trustees of the Kosciusko State Park on a reconnaissance natural history survey of the Park, Jan.-Feb., 1946. Unpublished report of the Joint Scientific Committee of the Linnean Soc. of N.S.W. and the Roy. Zoological Soc. N.S.W. Carp, G. W., 1895.—Mineralogical notes. No. 3. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 4: 130-134. ——,, 1920.—Idem. No. 12. Ibid., 9: 105-107 CroHN, P. W., 1950.—The geology, petrology and physiography of the Omeo district, north- eastern Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 62 (for 1949): 1-70. CurRRAN, J. M., 1896.—On the occurrence of precious stones in New South Wales, and the deposits in which they are found. Jowr. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 30: 214-271. Davin, T. W. E., 1950 (edited by W. R. Browne).—Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia. Volume I. Arnold, London. DRESCHER-KADEN, F. K., 1948.—Die Feldspat-Quarz-Reaktionsgeflige der Granite und Gneise. Min. u. Petr. in Hinzeldarstellungen, I. Springer-Verlag. Berlin. Du Ruierz, T., 1938.—The injection metamorphism of the Muruhatten region and problems suggested thereby. Arsb. Sveriges Geol. Undersok., 32, no. 6. Epwarps, A. B., and Easton, J. G., 1937.—The igneous rocks of north-eastern Benambra. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 50: 69-96. GoopsPEED, G. E., 1948.—Xenoliths and skialiths. Amer. Jour. Sci., 246: 515-525. Goral, M., 1950.—The features of plagioclase twinning in various granitic rocks. Jour. Geol. Soc. Japan, 56: 515-518. , 1951.—Petrological studies on plagioclase twins. Amer. Mineral., 36: 884-901. Grout, F. F., 1933.—Contact metamorphism of the slates of Minnesota by granite and by gabbro magmas, Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 44: 989-1040, BY T. G. VALLANCE. 219 Harper, L. F., 1916.—The Adelong goldfield. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources 21. HeESTMAN, B., 1951.—Inclusions in the granodiorite of Kozarovice. Bull. Internat. Acad. Tchéque des Sciences, 50 (for 1949): 357-369. Hiuus, BH. S., 19338.—An unusual occurrence of myrmekite, and its significance. Geol. Mag., 70: 294-301. Howitt, A. W., 1888.—Notes on certain metamorphic and plutonic rocks at Omeo. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 24: 100-131. Hutton, C. O., 1947.—The nuclei of pleochroic haloes. Amer. Jour. Sci., 245: 154-157. JOPLIN, G. A., 1942.—Petrological studies in the Ordovician of New South Wales. I. The Cooma complex. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 67: 156-196. , 1943.—Idem. II. The northern extension of the Cooma complex. TIbid., 68: 159-183. , 1947—Idem. IV. The northern extension of the north-east Victorian metamorphic complex. Jbid., 72: 87-124. , 1948.—On the question of interaction between primary granitic and primary basaltic magma under varying tectonic conditions. Unpublished D.Se. thesis, Univ. of Sydney. ———, 1952.—The granitization process and its limitations as exemplified in certain parts of New South Wales. Geol. Mag., 89: 25-38. Kay, M., 1951.—North American geosynclines. Mem. Geol. Soc. Amer., 48. KENNEDY, W. Q., 1948.—On the significance of thermal structure in the Scottish Highlands. Geol. Mag., 85: 229-234. f Knopr, /. B., 1931.—Retrogressive. metamorphism and phyllonitization. Amer. Jour. Sci., ser. 5, 21: 1-27. LAPADU-HARGUES, P., 1945.—Sur l’existence et la nature de l’apport chimique dans certaines series cristallophylliennes. Bull. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 5, 15: 255-310. MicHEL-LkEvy, M. C., 1950.—Réproduction artificielle de la sillimanite. C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 230: 2213-2214. MIKKOLA, E., and SAHAMA, T. G., 1936.—The region to the south-west of the “‘granulite series” in Lapland and its ultrabasics. Bull. Comm. Géol. Finlande, 115: 357-371. RaGceGattr, H. G., 1933.—Geology and gold deposits of the Sebastopol-Junee Reefs area. Dept. Mines N.S.W., Ann. Rept. for 1932: 89-90. RAGUIN, E., 1946.—Géologie du granite. Masson. Paris. RAMBERG, H., 1945.—Petrological Significance of sub-solidus phase transitions in mixed crystals. Norsk Geol. Tidsskr., 24: 42-73. Reap, H. H., 1951.—Metamorphism and granitisation. Geol. Soc. Sth. Africa, du Toit Memorial Lecture No. 2, Annexure to vol. 54 of the Transactions. REYNOLDS, D. L., 1946.—The sequence of geochemical changes leading to granitization. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 102: 389-446. SEITSAARI, J., 1951.—The schist belt northeast of Tampere in Finland. Bull. Comm. Géol. Finlande, 153: 120 pp. : Simpson, E. S., 1932.—Contributions to the mineralogy of Western Australia. Series VII. Jour. Roy. Soc. W.A., 18: 61-74. Stewart, F. H., 1946.—The gabbroic complex of Belhelvie in Aberdeenshire. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 102: 465-498. Suei, K., 1930.—On the granitic rocks of Tsukuba district and their associated injection-rocks. Jap. Jour. Geol. Geogr., 8: 29-112. Tatram, C. M., 1929.—The metamorphic rocks of north-east Victoria. Bull. Geol. Surv. Vict., 52. TILLEY, C. E., 1924.—Contact metamorphism in the Comrie area of the Perthshire Highlands. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 80: 22-71. VALLANCE, T. G., 1953a.—Studies in the metamorphic and plutonic geology of the Wantabadgery- Adelong-Tumbarumba district, N.S.W. Part I. Introduction and metamorphism of the sedimentary rocks. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 78: 90-121. ———,, 1953b.—Idem. Part II. Intermediate-basic rocks. Ibid., 78: 181. Wart, J. A., 1899.—Report on the Wyalong gold-field. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Mineral Resources No. 5. WHITING, J. W., 1950.—The underground water resources of the Kyeamba valley. N.S.W. Dept. Mines, Geol. Repts. 1939-1945. 128-130. .WituraMs, G. J., 1984.—A granite-schist contact in Stewart Island, New Zealand. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, 90: 322-353. Witson, G., 1952.—Ptygmatic structures and their formation. Geol. Mag., 89: 1-21. WINCHELL, A. N., and WINCHELL, H., 1951.—Elements of Optical Mineralogy. An introduction to microscopic petrography. Part II. Wiley. New York. 220 GEOLOGY OF THE WANTABADGERY-ADELONG-TUMBARUMBA DISTRICT. ITI, HXPLANATION OF PLATE XII. A.—Granitized metasediment relic in the Wantabadgery granite showing myrmekitic inter- erowths and traces of biotite-quartz symplektite (near centre). Crossed nicols. x 45. B.—Pelitic inclusion in the Wantabadgery granite showing sillimanite needles and euhedral erystals developed at the expense of biotite. Ordinary light. x 13. C.—Ultrabasic inclusion in the Wantabadgery granite showing blades and aggregates of amphibole surrounding ragged hypersthene grains (higher relief). The dark granules are green spinel. Ordinary light. x13. i D.—Dynamically-altered Wantabadgery granite. From top right to bottom left there is a gradation from crushed granite with ruptured quartz and felspar grains to completely rolled-out quartz-mica-chlorite aggregates. Note the development of schistosity and the disappearance of large quartz-grains with increase in intensity of dynamic action. Ordinary light. x 13. E.—Basified second-group granite from Batlow. Note the development of hornblende with a definite reduction in the biotite content. The reaction occurs where the granite comes into contact with the basic rocks. Ordinary light. x13. F.—Granite-granite hybrid rock from the zone between the Ellerslie and Green Hills masses. Note the irregularities in the felspar grain, and the strained appearance of the quartz. A small biotite-clot can be seen at the top (right). Crossed nicols. x 13. All photomicrographs by Mr. G. E. McInnes. 221 THE OCCURRENCE OF VARVED CLAYS IN THE KOSCIUSKO DISTRICT, N.S.W. By T. G. VALLANCE, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. Plate xiii; one Text-figure.) [Read 30th September, 1953.] Synopsis. Varved clays occurring in the valley of Trapyard Creek in the Kosciusko district are described. The clays were deposited in a small, short-lived lake formed behind a moraine bar deposited by the Trapyard glacier during the Pleistocene glaciation. These sediments are remarkable for their content of unaltered minerals, particularly micas, derived from the local granite country rocks. The banded clays represent the first Pleistocene varved glacial deposits found on the mainland of Australia and are probably the most recent yet discovered in the Commonwealth. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL REMARKS. The discovery of banded clays in the floor of the Trapyard Creek Valley was made in January, 1951, by Dr. W. R. Browne and Mr. D. G. Moye (chief geologist, S.M.H.E.A.) during a natural history survey of the Kosciusko region by a party of which the author was a member. Further exposures were found during the next summer. The waters of Trapyard Creek flow through a straight, open U-shaped valley about one mile long to join Spencer’s Creek at a point about one mile east of the Chalet at Charlotte’s Pass (see Text-fig. 1). The combined stream passes round the eastern end of the David moraine (Taylor, Browne and Jardine, 1925), a great mound partially blocking the glacial valley system, and flows down the Lower Spencer’s Creek valley to meet the Snowy River. The literature on the glacial features at Kosciusko is, as yet, not extensive, although the district shares with Tasmania the only definite evidence of Pleistocene glaciation so far found in the Commonwealth. The most recent account of glaciological studies at Kosciusko is given by Browne (1952) in which passing mention is made of the varved clays. : Differential movement due to what is known as the Kosciusko Uplift at the end of Pliocene times caused the elevation of much of eastern Australia. The effect was particularly marked in the Kosciusko district, where the highest country in Australia (Mt. Kosciusko, 7316 feet) bears witness to this uplift. It is probable that this area was essentially an isolated uplifted plateau at the beginning of Pleistocene times, a feature characteristic of it at the present day. During part of Pleistocene times glacial conditions prevailed at Kosciusko and these have left their mark on the physiography of the region. From the physiographic record Dr. W. R. Browne (1952) has pieced together a sequence of three stages during the glaciation. During the earliest stage Dr. Browne believes that much of the area down to at least 4800 feet was covered by an ice-sheet or ice-cap of variable thickness in which there was movement of ice for the most part in an easterly direction from the vicinity of the Main Divide. Occasionally erratics which indicate such movement have been found but, because most of the region is occupied by granite, such evidence is somewhat rare. Dr. H. Rutledge and the present writer tend to regard the early-stage glacial features as related to an extensive névé-field environment rather than to an ice-cap, but all workers are agreed on the widespread effect of the earliest glaciation. The extensive ground moraine deposited over the area is largely related to this phase. re ie) bo bo bo VARVED CLAYS IN THE KOSCIUSKO DISTRICT, Following this stage, and separated from it by an unknown time-interval, came a period in which valley glaciers flourished. These valley glaciers in certain cases must have followed the trends of the pre-glacial streams which survived the first phase. The glaciers deepened existing open valleys and in many ways modified the landscape already smoothed by the earlier glaciation. Some of the valley glaciers headed in steep-walled cirque-hollows whilst others, like the Trapyard Creek glacier, headed in low cols (called ice-divides by Dr. W. R. Browne) with the ice supply augmented by hanging tributary glaciers. Evidence of the work of the valley glaciers is clear in the U-shaped profiles of the valleys today and in the moraine material left by the ice as it retreated to the heads of the valleys. F A e The Chalet ee Text-fic. 1.—Map of the Upper Spencer’s Creek basin area showing Trapyard Creek and the banded clay locality. During the third stage the ice was much more restricted in extent and its erosive action was largely confined to cirque-cutting. This final glacial stage modified the heads of the “‘valley-glacial’ valleys in the higher parts of the region but otherwise did not greatly affect the previously-glaciated landscape. Trapyard Creek valley, in which the banded clays have been found, remains as a relic of the second phase of the glaciation. Towards the end of this stage, as the ice retreated up the valleys of Spencer’s Creek and its tributaries (including Trapyard Creek), moraine barriers were deposited across them. The great mass of the David moraine is the largest of these recessional moraines; smaller examples occur at intervals further up the valleys. Water ponded by the moraine barriers formed small lakes which, following the breaching of the moraines, were drained and now appear as flat, boggy-areas through which the modern streams meander. Lines of erratic blocks may now indicate the former moraine bars from which the finer material has been washed. Lake Sitissmilch (David, 1908) came into existence immediately behind the David BY T. G. VALLANCE. 223 moraine and apparently extended across the junction of the Trapyard Creek and Spencer’s Creek valleys. In the Upper Spencer’s Creek valley above Lake Siissmilch recessional moraines were responsible for the damming of Lake Mackie and Lake Lendenfeld (David, 1908). Traces of clays have been found in these lake-floors but, in general, the fine material is mixed with gritty granite detritus which constitutes the greatest proportion of the material underlying the peaty bogs on the old lake floors. Above Lake Stssmilch in the Trapyard Creek valley a small lake was apparently formed behind a now much-dissected moraine bar and it was upon the floor of this that the banded clays here discussed were laid down. The absence of a distinct clay horizon in many of the test holes sunk by the §.M.H.E.A. in the Trapyard Creek valley indicates that the lake was quite restricted in extent. THE CLAYS. The clays are best seen in sections where the meandering Trapyard Creek has cut down through the sediments in the floor of the valley. They are apparently not extensive and only two important exposures, about 100 yards apart, have thus far been discovered. Typically the clays are associated with decomposed granite and gritty granite-rubble derived from the country rocks by mechanical breakdown. Such granite detritus occurs both above and below the clay band in the exposures examined- Occasionally small erratic blocks may be encountered in the creek banks. As a rule the clays are confined to a single horizon although locally it may be divided by discontinuous, narrow gritty bands. Where the floor upon which the clays were deposited was. irregular, small-scale slump folds are common at the base of the clay band (see Plate xiii, D). Sharply-defined fault dislocations are sometimes associated with the slump folds. Typically the clays have an overall greyish colour but they may appear buff-coloured due to iron-staining. Alternating bands of fine and coarser (silty) material are found in many cases, though not all of the Trapyard Creek clays show this feature clearly. As a rule, in the banded clay a coarser band is broader than its finer-grained partner. Normally the total thickness of the clay deposit does not exceed 1-14 feet. The banding of the clays suggests a seasonal deposition such as is often found in varved glacial sediments. In view of the evidence of Pleistocene glaciation in the Kosciusko region it seems natural to associate these clays with a glacial origin. A feature of the clays is their richness in micaceous minerals and chlorite. Both biotite (green or green-brown) and muscovite occur, and these were no doubt derived, without much chemical alteration, from the granite, in the first instance by the mechanical action of the ice. The high mica content is particularly striking in thin section where it can be seen that both fine and coarser bands contain micas. In fact, the mineralogy of the bands is fairly consistent, the variation chiefly producing the characteristic banding being that of grain size. Quartz and felspar occur as well as the micas and chlorite, and crystalline kaolinite has also been noted. A few ‘“‘heavy’” mineral grains, including tourmaline and zircon, have also been derived from the granite. The richness in micaceous minerals has led to the development of a distinctive fabric due to the preferred orientation of many flakes in the plane of deposition. In the silt bands the larger mica flakes and quartz and felspar grains settled before the finer silt so producing graded bedding (see Plate xiii, C). Graded bedding is often also present in the fine clay bands. Kuenen and Migliorini (1950) recently showed that many cases of graded bedding are due to the action of turbidity currents. Since then Kuenen (1951) has applied turbidity currents to explain the origin of glacial varves. The graded bands in the Trapyard Creek varves, however, with their depositional fabric due to micas laid parallel to the surface of deposition, do not show many signs of the action of turbidity currents. These currents would surely produce a more haphazard arrangement of the mineral grains in such sediments. 224 VARVED CLAYS IN THE KOSCIUSKO DISTRICT, - Compared with the parent granitic material there seems to be an enhanced content of mica minerals relative to quartz and felspar in these sediments. Perhaps there has been some concentration of the flaky minerals by virtue of their being more easily transported than the quartz and felspar grains of equivalent size. The exposed clay sections are all rather near to what is regarded as the remains of the old moraine dam and may be relatively remote from the point where the sediment-bearing meltwater entered the lake. Thus there may have been opportunity for some differentiation (i.e. concentration of micas relative to quartz and felspar) in the detrital material as it was transported in suspension across the small body of water. All evidence available points to a rather local origin for the material in the clays, even though there may have been some sorting before deposition; deposition so near the source would effectively prevent much chemical breakdown of the mica minerals. The total amount of clay and silt deposited in this lake was not great. Important factors in determining this were the restricted source area and the apparently short life of the lake. Even if only the major alternating fine and coarser bands are related to seasonal variations it is clear that not much sediment was added to the lake in most years. A total of 112 pairs of bands has been counted in the best-exposed creek- section, but as many of the pairs are very narrow (the maximum thickness of the silt bands is about 6 mm.; most bands are much thinner than this, often being less than 1 mm.) they may be related to fluctuations in the environment within a single season. A period of 112 years should be regarded as no more than the maximum possible duration of the conditions under which the clays were deposited. As many of the narrow bands may be sub-seasonal the actual number of years is-probably less than 112. The increased amount of meltwater produced as a result of the gradual amelioration of the glacial conditions led to the extinction of the lake by breaching the moraine dam, thus causing the lake to be drained. Locally-derived granite sand and gravel washed down on top of the clays helped to preserve them, but the erosive effect of Trapyard Creek in cutting back to a base level has now again exposed these banded sediments. AGE OF THE BANDED CLAYS. These varved clays of the Kosciusko area obviously post-date the glaciers which carved such valleys as that of Trapyard Creek. They are most reasonably associated with the retreat of the valley glaciers and thus may ante-date the local, late cirque- cutting glaciation. By correlation with Tasmania (see David, 1950, p. 629) the clays might belong to the period following the Yolande glacial stage. (Three Pleistocene glacial stages, the Malannan (oldest), Yolande, and Margaret (youngest) stages, each separated by interglacial periods, have been recognized in Tasmania—see A. N. Lewis, 1945.) The only other recorded occurrence of Pleistocene glacial clays is in western Tasmania. The Tasmanian varves belong to the period of waning of the ice sheet related to the Malannan or first-stage glaciation. Thus the Trapyard Creek varved clays are probably the most recent so far recorded in the Commonwealth of Australia. References. BROWNE, W. R., 1952.—Pleistocene glaciation in the Kosciusko region. Sir Douglas Mawson Anniversary Volume, Univ. of Adelaide, pp. 25-41. Davip, T. W. E., 1908.—Geological notes on Kosciusko, with special reference to the evidences of glacial action. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 33: 657-668. , 1950 (edited by W. R. Browne).—The Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia. Volume I. Edward Arnold. London. KUENEN, Ph. H., 1951.—Mechanics of varve formation and the action of turbidity currents. Forh. Geol. féren. Stockholm, 73: 69-84. See also Jowr. Geol., 1951, 59: 507-508. , and MIGLIORINI, Cc. I., 1950.—Turbidity currents as a cause of graded bedding. Jour. Geol., 58: 91-127. Lewis, A. N., 1945.—Pleistocene glaciation in Tasmania. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania for 1944: 41-56. TAYLOR, G., BROWNE, W. R., and JARDINE, F., 1925.—The Kosciusko Plateau. SSS {eyes iS Bret, % a Rap escatiecth ee SA = be Cea ee we ia wy wh Paey SOFEzs anata: een fa Ey si MMQy Ne yen/ Fig. 2—Agriopocoris chadwicki, sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view (antennae and legs omitted) ; B, Head and thorax, lateral view; C, Antenna (apical segment missing) ; D, Anterior leg; E, Pygophore, dorsal view; F, Harpago; G, Apex of abdomen, Q, dorsal view. AGRIOPOCORIS CHADWICKI, sp. nov. (Fig. 2) Colour.—Dull ferruginous. Tibiae, segment 7 of abdomen suffused with stramineous. Rostrum, bucculae, apical margin of acetabula stramineous; acetabula also with dark brown suffusion adjacent to stramineous area. Lobes of gland orifices whitish. Femora, apex of carinae on segments 4 and 5 of abdomen blackish. Structure.—Resembles preceding species, but differs mainly in smaller size and narrower habitus, more strongly elevated carinae on segments 4 and 5 of abdomen, more 236 NEW AUSTRALIAN HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA, strongly elevated external apical angles of connexival segments, tuberculately produced lateral margin of segment 7 of abdomen and in genitalia of. both sexes. Total length: ¢, 10-00 mm. Q, 11-00 mm. 1 ¢ (type), 1 2 (paratype), Australia; Mt. Wanyambilli, N.S.W., 14.8.1948, C. HE. Chadwick, in the Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, New South Wales. The 2 paratype is much darker in coloration. AGRIOPOCORIS PORCELLUS, sp. nov. (Fig. 3) Colour.—Dull ferruginous. Abdomen ventrally testaceous. Tibiae with stramineous suffusion. Structure.—Smaller than A. chadwicki and differs mainly in the lateral margin of the 7th abdominal segment being almost straight and in the genitalia. The rudimentary Fig. 3.—Agriopocoris porcellus, sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view (legs omitted) ; B, Head and thorax, lateral view; C, Anterior leg; D, Harpago; H, Pygophore, dorsal view. Fig. 4.—Agriopocoris macilentus, sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view (legs omitted); B, Head and thorax, lateral view; C, Pygophore, dorsal view; D, Harpago. hemelytra extend to the middle of the metanotum. Differs from A. chadwicki and A. froggatti in regular external margin of connexivum, the external apical angles of the segments of which are not at all elevated, and in the femora not having long tubercles. The ocelli are lacking in this species, a condition not uncommon in entirely apterous species. ; Total length: ¢, 8-30 mm. 1 ¢ (type), Australia; Southport, Queensland, 16.10.1901, W. W. Froggatt, in the Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, New South Wales; 1 ¢ (paratype), Southport, Queensland, 16.10.1901, W. W. Froggatt, in the British Museum (Natural History), London. BY N. C. E. MILLER. bo (Se) J AGRIOPOCORIS MACILENTUS, Sp. nov. (Fig. 4) Colour.—Pale ferruginous. Bucculae dark stramineous. Segments 2 and 3 of abdomen apically mid-dorsally with a small elevated spot, femora and tibiae with suffused spots, pale stramineous. Apex of carinae on segments 4 and 5 of abdomen dorsally, blackish; segment 7 with pale yellow suffused areas. Structure.—Segment 2 of antennae half as long as segment 1; remaining segments missing. Vertex with a median, sub-ovate depression anteriorly; epicranium with a shallow, oblique sulcus in front of ocelli and a short, transverse sulcus joining a short, longitudinal suleus behind eyes. Tylus anteriorly with moderately long tubercles. Ocellar interspace a little less wide than distance from an ocellus to an eye. Pronotum with a median, longitudinal sulcus not reaching anterior margin. Rudimentary hemelytra broadly rounded apically, extended to middle of metanotum. Segment 7 of abdomen with lateral margins sinuate; segment broadly rounded apically. Anterior femora with four or five setigerous tubercles, more erect and longer than remaining tubercles. ; Total length: J, 9:00 mm. 1 g (type) New Mecklenburg (New Ireland), Bismarck Archipelago, 31.10.1887 (name of collector illegible), (under bark). Type in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, South Australia. Similar to A. porcellus, but differs in the more slender form, the sculpture of the dorsal surface of the abdomen (in this new species the carinae on segments 4 and 5 are less prominent), the shape and sculpture of the pygophore and the shape of the harpagones, which are regularly curved with the extreme apex sub-acute. Family REDUVIIDAE. Subfamily HARPACTORINAE. AUSTROCORANUS, gen. nov. Micropterous. Basal segment of antennae longer than head. Postocular longer than anteocular. Antennal tubercles remote from eyes. Anteocular and postocular tuberculate. Basal segment of rostrum shorter than segment 2. Anterior lobe of pronotum longer than posterior lobe. Scutellum produced apically. Segments 1 and 2 of abdomen dorso-laterally with an oblique carina; apical margins medially of segments 3-6 elevated. Anterior and median femora incrassate; all femora nodulose. Apical segment of tarsi longer than segments 1 and 2 together. -Head, thorax and legs with sub-erect setae; head and body also with abundant adpressed setae. Type species, Austrocoranus mundus. AUSTROCORANUS MUNDUS, sp. nov. (Fig. 5) Colour.—Black. Antennae brown: basal segment dark brown basally. Tibiae brown, darker basally and apically and with a sub-basal yellowish annulation. Segments 2-6 of connexivum with a sub-apical, marginal dark yellow spot. Setae greyish and piceous. Abdomen ventrally light brown with a median, longitudinal, narrow, dark brown stripe. Structure.—Basal segment of antennae longer than segments 2 and 3 together. Transverse sulcus on vertex arcuate; median sulcus very short and narrow. Basal segment of rostrum extending to middle of eyes. Ocelli small, elevated, directed forwardly and laterally. Anterior lobe of pronotum rugose, except sulcate areas smooth; posterior lobe strongly rugose with an oblique carina sub-dorsally anteriorly and some tubercles. Scutellar spine rounded apically, oblique, concave on lower surface basally. Hemelytra extending to base of abdomen. Apical margin of segments 3-6 of abdomen dorsally thickened; segment 7 medially with a large, rounded, circular elevation. Total length: ¢, 12-50 mm. 9, 11-13-00 mm. Greatest pronotal width: g, 2-20 mm. Q, 2-00-2-20 mm. 1 J (type), Australia; Armadale, Western Australia, UA AB IK. Ik, INGmAIsS il G, Beverley, Western Australia, 9.5.1913, F. H. du Boulay; 2 99, Beverley, Western Australia, 1913, W. W. Froggatt, (paratypes) in the Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., T 238 NEW AUSTRALIAN HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA, Canberra, Australian Capital Territory; 1 ¢@ (paratype), Armadale, Western Australia, 12.5.1934, K. R. Norris, in the British Museum (Natural History), London. This new genus appears to be closely allied to Coranus Curtis (1833, Ent. 10), from which it differs in the slender segments 2 and 3 of the antennae, in the head being longer than pronotum and having tubercles on anteocular and postocular, in the relatively shorter basal segment of rostrum and in the position of the antennal tubercles which are remote from and not close to the eyes. aya » Fig. 5.—Austrocoranus mundus, gen. et sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view; B, Head, pronotum aid scutellum, lateral view; C, Claw of anterior tarsus. Fig. 6.—Dicranurocoris victoriae, gen. et sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view (legs omitted) ; B, Head and pronotum, lateral view; C, Apex of abdomen; D, Ovum. *DICRANUROCORIS, gen. Nov. Elongate. Micropterous. Basal segment of antennae sub-equal in length to head. Tylus and vertex acutely produced. Antennal tubercles with a lateral tubercle. Head with low, rounded tubercles and with longer tubercles sub-basally. Ocelli small. Eyes moderately prominent. Rostrum straight; basal segment a little more than half as long as segment 2. Anterior margin of pronotum laterally produced; anterior lobe of - pronotum longer than posterior lobe and with a low tubercle anteriorly on each side of mid-dorsum; posterior lobe with a low carina anteriorly on each side of mid-dorsum. Scutellum triangular, longer than wide, produced apically. Hemelytra extending to 2nd abdominal segment. Prosternum laterally anteriorly with a short projection. Anterior femora moderately incrassate and with a spine on lower surface near apex. Segment 8 of abdomen bilobate. Type species, Dicranurocoris victoriae. * dixpavos = forked. oUpa = tail. kopis = bug. BY N. C. E. MILLER. 239 DICRANUROCORIS VICTORIAR, Sp. nov. (Fig. 6) Colour.—Stramineous, except head, brown. Vertex with two sub-parallel, longitudinal piceous stripes. Basal segment of antennae suffused with brown; remaining segment yellowish. Apical segment of rostrum piceous. Segments 2-5 of connexivum apically laterally with a small brownish spot. Structure.—Basal segment of antennae thick in basal half, narrower towards apex; shorter than remaining segments together. Ocellar interspace equal to width between an ocellus and an eye. Lateral projections on collar directed forwards, feebly curved apically. Dise of scutellum with a shallow, irregular depression; produced portion feebly elevated, rounded. Connexivum narrowly sulcate laterally. Total length: 9, 13-00 mm, Fig. 7.—Dicranurocoris canberrae, sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view (legs omitted) ; B, Head, pronotum, elytron and scutellum, lateral view; C, Apex of abdomen; D, Ovum. Fig. 8.—Dicranurocoris tasmaniae, sp. n. A, Whole insect, dorsal view; B, Head and pronotum, lateral view; C, Pygophore, dorsal view; D, Apex of abdomen, , dorsal view. 1 2 (type), 3 99 (paratypes), Australia; Toora, Victoria, 16.12.1937, R. V. Fyfe, in the Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, Australian Capital Territory; 1 2 (paratype), Toora, Victoria, 16.12.1937, R. V. Fyfe, in the British Museum (Natural History), London. The nearest ally of this new genus is Dicrotelus Er. (1842, Arch. Naturgesch. 8 [1], p. 284), which it resembles in that the head has projections anteriorly and in the bilobate 8th segment of the abdomen. Dicrotelus, however, has strongly tuberculate legs and head, spinose anterior lobe and postero-lateral angles of posterior lobe of pronotum, tuberculate scutellum and connexiyum, TT 240 NEW AUSTRALIAN HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA. Mature ova dissected from the abdomen of the type are cylindrical, feebly curved at opercular end, and smooth with minute reticulation. The colour dark yellow. For a small insect, the ova are relatively large, being approximately 2-50 mm. in length. DICRANUROCORIS CANBERRAER, Sp. nov. (Fig. 7) Closely resembles the preceding species, but differs in smaller size and in coloration, being generally darker. In structure it differs in the more acute projection on the vertex, the more strongly tuberculate legs, basal segment of antennae and postocular, and the lenticular shape of the ocelli; projections on anterior lobe of pronotum distinctly tuberculate and posterior lobe with median and lateral depressions, disc of scutellum more deeply impressed; lobes of segment 8 of abdomen narrower. Total length: 9, 11-50 mm. 1 @ (type), Australia, Canberra, A.C.T., Dec. 1929, H. J. Willings, in the Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, A.C.T. An ovum dissected from this specimen resembles that of D. victoriae, but is a little longer. DICRANUROCORIS TASMANIAE, sp. nov. (Fig. 8) Colour.—Testaceous. Head and basal segment of antennae in basal half suffused with brown. Pleura paler. Posterior femora piceous. Abdomen ventro-laterally with suffused piceous spots. Apical segment of rostrum piceous. Abdomen dorsally with brownish elevated spots on segments 3 and 4. Tubercles and spine on anterior and median femora brown. Pubescence pale greyish. Structure.—Basal segment of antennae with low tubercles mainly on upper surface. Produced portion of vertex acute and curved downwards feebly; produced portion of — tylus trilobate, the upper lobe moderately long and sub-acute. Anterior lobe of pronotum with scattered tubercles; posterior lobe with a low, rounded oblique carina sub-dorsally and with lateral area somewhat strongly depressed. Head with low rounded tubercles particularly on postocular. Prosternum laterally and propleural episternum with some tubercles. Total length: dg, 11-00 mm. 9, 12-50 mm. 1 g (type), 1 2 (paratype), Tasmania; New Norfolk, Lea (in tussocks), in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, South Australia; 1 9 (paratype), New Norfolk, Tasmania, Lea (in tussocks), in the British Museum (Natural History), London. Allied to both the preceding species, but perhaps more particularly to D. canberrae as regards structure and sculpture of head and legs. 241 A NEW GENUS OF THE PLECTASCALES. By Liv1an FRASER, Department of Agriculture, New South Wales. (Plate xv; twenty-nine Text-figures. ) [Read 28th October, 1953.] Synopsis. An Ascomycetous fungus of a reduced or primitive type, obtained in culture from mouldy stick licorice, is described. It is placed in the Plectascales as the type of a new genus, and the name Xeromyces bisporus is proposed for it. It forms abundant cleistocarps in culture, which originate as lateral three-celled branches on the mycelial threads. Two-spored asci are produced directly from cells resulting from the division of the central cell of the branch, and the wall is formed by the growth of branches from the basal cell of the branch. Stages in the development of the fructification are described. In 1946, Mr. W. J. Scott of the C.S.I.R.O. Food Preservation Laboratory, Homebush, obtained in culture a fungus from mouldy stick licorice. This fungus was unusual in that it grew with moderate luxuriance on partly dried out media, on media rich in carbohydrates and at comparatively low relative humidity, but was unable to grow on ordinary laboratory media at high humidity. ' Preliminary examination showed it to be an ascomycete of a primitive or reduced type and of some interest phylogenetically as well as physiologically. A more detailed investigation was therefore undertaken. An elucidation of the main outline of its life cycle revealed no relationship with already described ascomycetes sufficiently close to justify its inclusion in a defined genus. It is therefore described as the type of a new genus and placed tentatively in the Plectascales. METHODS OF EXAMINATION. 1. The fungus grew fairly rapidly and produced ascocarps very abundantly on a malt extract medium,* and Petri dishes poured with 20 ml. of this medium were inoculated and incubated at 25°C. Fragments of No. 0 microscope cover glass flamed and placed on the agar surface allowed the growth of the fungus somewhat sparsely over them. This growth adhered fairly well to the glass and could thus be fixed and stained with the minimum of disturbance. 2. The fungus also grew well in drop culture of liquid medium** on glass slides over saturated solution of potassium bromide. The fixative most generally used was Craf 1 (Sass, 1940). Stains used were aceto- ecarmine, Harris’ haematoxylin and Heidenhain’s iron alum haematoxylin. Feulgen’s fixative and stain as modified by Jones (1947) were also used to confirm nuclear detail. Cotton blue in lacto-phenol was useful for gross morphology. THE FUNGUS. Mycelial Characters. The mycelium in a carbohydrate-rich medium is rather coarse, septate, the cells multinucleate, the nuclei very minute and scattered. The young hyphae are densely granular, becoming vacuolate with age. Occasional inflated beaded densely protoplasmic cells are present. The colony in culture is radiating, at first white, closely adherent to the agar surface and not growing much above it, later becoming creamy because of the maturation of the ascocarps which are densely crowded on the surface of older colonies, giving them a finely granular appearance. * Malt extract 50 gm.; Powdered agar 10 gm.; Water 50 ml.. ** Dextrose 50 gm.; Malt extract 10 gm.; Water 50 ml. bo ~ bo A NEW GENUS OF THE PLECTASCALES, Text-figures 1-16. 1, A-F, Aleuriospores showing variation in size and shape. x 900. 2, Hypha showing initial stage of development of ascocarp branch (A), and later stage (B), in which terminal and central cells have been cut off. x 1,080. 3, Young ascocarp branch prior to cell wall formation. x 900. 4, Young ascocarp branches, at the stage of the first division. x 1,080. 5, Young ascocarp branch showing initiation of first branch from basal cell. x 900. 6-7, A slightly later stage than that shown in fig. 5, three branch initials visible. x 1,080. 8-13, Stages in development of branches from the basal cell, to form a wall around the central cell (C), one branch pushing between it and the terminal cell (A). x 1,080. 14-15, Ascocarp branch, optical section showing wall structure, central cell (C) and terminal cell (A). x 1,320. 16, Vertical view of ascocarp branch showing wall structure and central cell. x 1,080. ‘ BY LILIAN FRASER. 24 Cc Bx @2® iE © «8 A a: | 2g ED Text-figures 17-29. 17-24, Stages in division of central cell: 17, Vertical view of ascocarp showing first division of central cell. x 1,080. 18, Lateral view of ascocarp showing first division of central cell. Shape of central cell suggests immanence of second division. x 900. 19, Second division of central cell. x 900. 20, Second division of central cell, subsidiaries cut off from opposite sides. x 1,080. 21, Vertical view showing 3 subsidiary cells cut off from different faces of eentral cell. x 900. 23-24, Division of central cell showing three to four subsidiaries of varying size. x 1,080. 25-28, Further division of central cell with production of subsidiaries and small ascus initials, rounded off and lying free within ascocarp wall. 25, 26, 28 x 1,080; 27 x 1,320. 29, A-G, Stages in development of asci and ascospores. x 1,080. A, Binucleate ascus initials; B, Later stage in growth of ascus, showing increased size and 4 to 6 nuclei; C, Developing asci with 8 nuclei; D, Developing ascus, showing non-staining circular areas associated with deeply staining granules (probably nuclei) which may be ascospore initials; E, Developing ascus, two ascospores in process of growth, other granular material, possibly disintegrating spore initials, erushed against wall; F, Ascus with young ascospores; G, Mature thick-walled fusiform ascospores still held together by ascus wall. o ce 1 244 A NEW GENUS OF THE PLECTASCALES, Accessory Spores. Conidium-like spores which appear to be aleuriospores (Mason, 1933) are produced in culture at relative humidities below about 85%. They are borne terminally on lateral branches of the mycelium and are usually one-celled and more or less globose to pyriform, but occasionally two- or three-celled (Plate xv, fig. 1; Text-fig. 1, A-F). The spore wall is somewhat thicker than the wall of the mycelial cells and is highly refractive. The spores are not abstricted from the hyphae on which they develop and usually remain attached. However, spores which have become detached by the breaking of the hypha immediately below them are occasionally seen. When a fragment of mycelium bearing aleuriospores is transferred to fresh medium the spores germinate by the production of a germ tube. Development of the Ascocarp. Ascocarps arise as short stout lateral branches on the young hyphae. The branch is at first a non-septate projection (Text-figs. 2A, 3). A terminal and a central cell are cut off from a basal section which remains part of the subtending mycelial cell (Text-figs. 4, 2B). The cells are densely protoplasmic, multinucleate and the nuclei are minute and scattered. Four rather stout branches then grow out from the basal cell just below the wall separating it from the central cell (Text-figs. 5, 6, 7). One or two of these branches usually develop more quickly than the others (Text-figs. 8, 9, 10, 11). They grow up and enclose the central cell, one pushing between it and the terminal cell (Text-figs. 8-13). They are at first continuous with the basal cell, but as they grow, cell walls appear (Text-figs. 11, 12, 13). Stout blunt branches are produced (Text-fig. 13) which finally form a complete pseudo-parenchymatous wall several cells thick around the central cell, which, at this stage, stains very deeply (Text-figs. 14-16). Throughout the subsequent growth of the ascocarp the terminal cell remains attached to the wall and stains faintly. No evidence of fusion between any of the wall cells and the central cell has been seen, so that if one of them is an antheridium its function has evidently become lost. The central cell becomes somewhat enlarged and flattened, and cuts off one and then several somewhat smaller cells (Text-figs. 17-25). In some aspects these have the appearance of a compressed spiral (Text-figs. 22-24) as though they were cut off successively from the same part of the central cell. Other preparations (Text-fig. 21), however, show clearly that these cells are cut off from different faces of the central cell, probably successively but in rapid succession, since few stages intermediate between ascocarps containing a solitary central cell and those containing a central cell and several subsidiaries in addition are seen in any preparation. These cells separate from each other and lie free within the ascocarp wall. Further cells of smaller size are then produced, evidently as outgrowths cut off, either from the subsidiaries or from these and the original central cell as well. These small cells do not remain attached to each other, but round off and lie free (Text-figs. 25-28). Smeared ascocarps at this stage of development disgorge a mass of small cells which are mostly quite separate, occasional paired cells or small cells attached to the larger subsidiaries indicating their probable method of formation. It could not be determined with certainty whether, after the formation of the subsidiaries, all subsequent growth took place by the cutting off of cells from them, whether the original central cell contributed directly to the production of the small cells also, or whether the small cells themselves divided. The central cell and its subsidiaries are multinucleate and the nuclei are scattered. The ascocarp wall continues to grow to accommodate its increasing contents, apparently by intercalary division of the wall cells. When nearly mature the ascocarp contains free within this wall the mass of small cells and a number of larger cells, distorted and fainty staining, which are the central cell and its first formed subsidiaries. The number of these varies from 1 or 2 in small ascocarps to about 6 in larger fructifications. BY LILIAN FRASER. 245 The small cells which develop in great quantity appear at first to be bi-nucleate (Text-fig. 29, A). These small cells function directly as asci. They enlarge and the number of nuclei increases (Text-fig. 29, B). A maximum of 8 very densely staining small bodies which are interpreted as nuclei have been seen in these cells (Text-fig. 29, C). The appearance of the developing asci just prior to spore formation suggests that at least four, and possibly eight, spores start to form, but almost at once all but two cease further development and are crushed against the ascus wall (Text-fig. 29, D, E). The earliest sign interpreted as the beginning of ascospore formation is the appearance of non-staining circular areas associated with densely staining small granules, probably nuclei (Text-fig. 29, D). The spores elongate, becoming fusiform (Text-fig. 29, G) with thick refractive walls at maturity. By the time all spores are mature, the ascocarp wall has become very thin and fragile and appears to disintegrate without any special line of dehiscence, leaving the mass of spores free (PI. xv, fig. 2). In media rich in carbohydrates, ascocarps are large and produce numerous spores. Smaller ascocarps, containing only a few spores, are produced under starvation conditions. Relationships. The very reduced and simplified nature of the reproductive system makes purely speculative any interpretation of the structure and any suggestion of possible relation- ships. The terminal cell of the ascocarp initial may be regarded as a vestigial trichogyne. The central cell clearly functions as an ascogonium, and the subsidiary cells cut off from it and the subsequently developed mass of cells which function as asci may be regarded as components of ascogenous hyphae which, instead of remaining attached, separate from each other as soon as they are formed. Direct functioning of cells of the ascogenous hyphae as asci has been described by Emmons (1985) in a number of species of Penicillium. In these, chains of 5-6 asci develop directly from cells of the ascogenous hyphae. A more precise picture of nuclear behaviour in the developing ascogonium and asci is required to throw further light on the relationships of this fungus. Acknowledgements. The fungus was obtained in culture by Mr. W. J. Scott, and to him I wish to express my grateful thanks for permitting this study to be made. The development of the aleuriospores was first observed by Mr. P. R. Maguire, technologist of the C.S.I.R.O. Food Preservation Laboratory, in the course of studies on the growth of the fungus at different relative humidities. I wish to express my grateful thanks to him for drawing them to my attention and for providing a number of photographs illustrating their development. I also wish to thank Miss E. M. Wakefield for her advice and suggestions. Literature Cited. Emmons, C. W., 1935.—The Ascocarps in species of Penicillium. Mycologia, xxvii; 128-150. JonNEs, R. C., 1947.—The Feulgen Reaction as a Cytological Technique with Allomyces arbusculus. Mycologia, xxxix; 109-112. : Mason, E. W., 1933.—Annotated account of Fungi received at the Imperial Mycological Institute, List II (2). Sass, J. E., 1940.—Elements of Botanical Microtechnique. McGraw Hill Book Co. XEROMYCES BISPORUS, gen. et sp. nov. Mycelium in culture white, radiate; hyphae 4-10u wide, average 5-6y, septate, multinucleate; nuclei minute. Aleuriospores terminal on lateral branches 20—40u long, occasionally longer; usually i1-celled, but occasionally 2-38 celled; unicellular spores globose to pyriform, smooth with moderately thick wall, 15-18 x 11-14y. Multicellular spores 17-385 x 11-15y. 246 A NEW GENUS OF THE PLECTASCALES. Ascocarps pale yellow, 55-150u (average 110”) in diameter, the wall fragile at maturity, disintegrating without definite line of dehiscence. Asci 8-12u in diameter at maturity, spherical. Ascospores 2 per ascus, fusiform, 9-11 x 4 x by (average 10 x 4 x 5u), smooth with moderately thick walls (average 1-54), pale yellow in mass. Ascocarp arising as a short lateral branch of 3 cells, a cap cell, a central cell and a stalk cell. The stalk cell producing 4 branches which enfold and form a wall around the central cell. Asci produced by division of the central cell, few to many per ascocarp. Antheridium absent. Mycelium in cultura album, radiatum; hyphae 4-10y, latae, septatae, multinucleatae; nuclei minute. Aleuriosporae in ramis lateralibus terminales, 20—40u longa, plerumque unicellulares sed aliquando 2—38-cellulares; sporae unicellulares globulares vel pyriformes, 15-18 x 11-14y, laeves parietibus crassiusculis, sporae multicellulares 17-35 x 11—15y. Ascomata pallido-flava, 55-1504 diametro, parietibus in maturitate fragilibus, sine linea distincta dehiscentiae disrumpentia; asci in maturitate 8-12u diametro, globosi; — ascosporae in quoque asco duae, fusiformes, 10 x 4 x 5u, in cumulo pallido-flavae, laeves, parietibus crassiusculis. Ascoma ut ramus brevis lateralis natum, cellarum trium compositum nempe pilei- cellulae, cellulae mediae et pediculi-cellulae; cellula basalis ramos quattuor ferens, cellulam mediam amplectentes et circa eadem parietem formantes; asci divisione cellulae mediae producti, in quoque ascomati pauci vel multi; antheridium nullum. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV. Fig. 1.—Mycelium and aleuriospores. x 200. Fig. 2.—Mature ascocarps in process of disintegration and liberation of spores. x 400. 247 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L. By H. B. Kerr, Faculty of Agriculture, University of Sydney. (Plates xvi-xvii; twenty-two Text-figures. ) [Read 25th November, 1953.] Synopsis. Abnormalities noted in Linwm wsitatissimum during genetical investigations of rust resis- tance at Sydney University are briefly described and illustrated with text figures and photographs. These include polyembryos, leaf and cotyledon abnormalities, abnormalities of the stem and chlorophyll deficiencies, etc. All but the leaf abnormalities appear to be more common in hybrids than varieties. It is suggested that this reflects genetic imbalance in the hybrids. Introduction. Abnormalities were noted during genetical investigations at Sydney University of rust resistance in Linum usitatissimum L. Busse and Burnham (1930), Shibuya (1939), and Millikan (1951) have reported stem abnormalities, and Crooks (1933) described compound leaves in this species. Other abnormalities have been reported frequently in other species (White, 1945, the biology of fasciation, and Waterhouse, 1953, polyembryony in cereals). The abnormalities observed in double cross, F, and varietal material during 1952 are dealt with below. ; POLYEMBRYONY. _ ; neh Twin embryo seeds were detected, soon after germination on blotting paper, by the emergence of two roots (Plate xvi, fig. 14.). The twins were always separate and gave identical rust reactions when tested with races to which the source material was segregating in ratios of 1:1 or 3:1 resistant:susceptible (Table 1). One was sometimes sturdier than the other, and neither was as sturdy as normal seedlings for the first few weeks. They may be due to single fertilization followed by splitting of the young zygote, or result from double fertilization of two female by two male gametes. The identical rust reactions indicate genetic identity of the female gametes if more than one is involved, but gives no indication of single or double fertilization, since the pollen parent of the double cross seed was non-segregating F257. But single fertilization followed by twinning is the more probable process in Linum (Hames, personal communication). The one occurrence in F2 material which could have refuted this process, rather confirmed it. Waterhouse (1953) has attributed polyembryos in the cereals to the same process. CoryLEDON ABNORMALITIES. There were two types of abnormalities: (1) Those with three (Plate xvii, figs. 15a, 15b, 16a) and (2) those with four cotyledons (Plate xvii, figs. 3, 4; Text-figs. 11-14) completely separated from each other or fused together in pairs for varying lengths from the base (Plate xvii, 16a). Each cotyledon had its own vascular system and an axillary bud. One type 2 seedling with two pairs of cotyledons united at the base had an interesting arrangement of two pairs of axillary buds (Text-fig. 14) vertically opposed to each other in the two axils. Difect of Cotyledon Complex on Phyllotaxy. This effect, as distinct from the usual environmentally induced deviations from the norm, could be assessed in those sowings in which all seedlings with normal cotyledons had a normal decussate arrangement at the lower nodes. There was no significant 248 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L., deviation from the norm in seedlings with fused cotyledons (Plate xvii, fig. 16a; Text-fig. 1). In those with complete separation of the cotyledons the phyllotaxy varied from normal decussate (Plate xvii, fig. 150) to whorls of three leaves (Plate xvii, fig. 15a), with intermediate types alternating single or whorls of three leaves with the usual opposite pairs (Text-figs. 2 to 10). In others the arrangement was spiral, and sometimes quite irregular. Formation of Cotyledon Abnormalities. Type 1 abnormal seedlings with three equal sized cotyledons evenly disposed about the stem, and successive whorls of three leaves, probably commenced as tripartite embryos. The others must have commenced as bipartite embryos, laying down two primary cotyledon primordia and establishing the tendency to a decussate phyllotaxy. One cotyledon primordium has then over-differentiated. The complex has usually separated along the mid-line giving rise to two cotyledons of equal size, often closely appressed to each other. Lateral separation has occurred at least once, and possibly accounts for the small cotyledons sometimes observed (Plate xvii, fig. 18). In a Walsh hybrid seedling one of the three cotyledons was separated from the other two by a distinct internode (Plate xvii, fig. 7). Since it lay in the same radius as one above it, it could scarcely have derived from the bifurcation of one of two original primordia, but must rather have been a premature and unrelated primordium. TABLE 1. Details of Polyembryos. Expected Ratio Race of _ Reaction of of Resistant Pedigree of Polyembryos. Rust. Seedlings. to Susceptible Plants. (Ottawa 770B x Bison) x F257! ss 2 Both immune. 1:1 (Bison x Ottawa 770B) x F257 Bre Rs 2 Both immune. alee (Bison x Ottawa 770B) x F257 Ke sf Not |tested. Two sets of twins. (Argentine F11 x Bison) x F257 ah ae 2 Both immune. 3:1 (Italia Roma x JWS) x F257 .. : ts 6 Both susceptible. i131 (Bolley Golden x Bison) x F257 2 ae 6 Both immune. 1:1 (Argentine F11 x Ottawa 770B) x F257 ate Not |tested. (Argentine F11 x Newland)x F257 .. Se Not |tested. Punjab x Concurrent .. as abe ite 6 Both susceptible. Oil! Ottawa 770B .. Ee es aH bie Not |tested. : F257 oh oe Be ibs ae sth Not |tested. 1257 susceptible to all Australian races of rust. Pedigree of affected seedlings. Type 1.—(Koto x Punjab) x F257, (Argentine F1l x F257) x F257, (Morye x Abyssinian) x F257, (Bolley Golden x Koto) x F257, 2 (Italia Roma x Bison) x F257, (Abyssinian x Tammes’ Pale Blue) x F257, (Ottawa 770B x Argentine F11) x F257, (F257 x Ottawa 770B) x F257, (J. W. S. x Newland) x F257, (Argentine F1l x Bison) x F257, Williston Golden x Bison, Very Pale Blue Crimped x Koto, Very Pale Blue Crimped x Bison, F257 x Williston Golden, Very Pale Blue Crimped x F257, Punjab x Very Pale Blue Crimped, Walsh x F257, Leona x F257, Morye x F257. Type 2.—(Argentine F1l x Corer) x F257, (Morye x Abyssinian) x F257, Ottawa 770B x Morye. Lear ABNORMALITIES. Three types of leaf abnormalities were noted: Compound leaves, Whorls of three or more leaves, Cone- and fan-shaped abnormalities. The first two have received a brief mention (Crook, 1933); reference to the last group is made by Forsyth and Schuster (1948). BY H. B. KERR. 249 Compound leaves showed varying degrees of differentiation into component subleaves, from slight terminal indentation (Plate xvi, fig. 10) to almost complete separation to the base (Plate xvi, fig. 12). Hach subleaf had its own vascular system. There were usually two or three subleaves and rarely more than four. Compound leaves were often associated with another compound leaf or one or two normal leaves at the Same node. But the number of subleaves and leaves together rarely exceeded four and never exceeded six. S hi eS Zoe SS SD) ZED <> Gap) SS I 2 3 ee 5 O O Q O Ree eC ates I5 1S I7 19 20 Zl 22 Text-figures 1-22. 1 to 10. Varying effects of cotyledon complex on phyllotaxy. 1 and 2, Normal decussate; 3, Irregular; 4, Three-leaf whorls with leaves slightly displaced along the vertical axis; 5, Alternation of 3-leaf whorls, single leaves and opposite pairs; 6, Alternating 3-leaf whorls and opposite pairs (up to the thirteenth node); 7, Even 3-leaf whorls; 8, Basal 3-leaf whorl, spiral above; 9, Irregular; 10, Whorl of three cotyledons, one very small. Even 3-leaf whorls above. 11. Whorl of four cotyledons, two large and two small, and two growing points. 12. Two pairs of partially united cotyledons with two basal leaves. 13. Two pairs of almost completely united cotyledons, showing lateral separation of one pair. 14. Two pairs of partially united cotyledons and two pairs of vertically opposed axillary buds. 15-19. Skewed phyllotaxy resulting from apparent fusion or incomplete separation of contiguous leaf primordia. 20, 21. Apparent bifurcation of a single leaf primordium with no appreciable effect on phyllotaxy. 22. Walsh seedling showing terminal bifurcation of one cotyledon and the two leaves immediately above in the same radius. Text-figures 11-14, x 1; others x 0-8 approx. Whorls of three or four leaves and rarely five, were often associated with bifurcated and fasciated stems, but were common on normal seedlings. Cones consisted of a complete whorl of four undeveloped leaves (Plate xvi, figs. 6a, 66) with only the slightest terminal separation. The tissue sometimes seemed to have U 250 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L., been under strain, resulting in rupture from the base to varying degrees (Plate xvi, fig. 5), culminating in an everted cone (Plate xvi, fig. 11). The shoot continued to grow up through the cone without any marked distortion (Plate xvi, fig. 1). Cone and fan abnormalities were noted by Forsyth and Schuster (1943) among seedlings seed-treated with spergon at a frequency regulated by the dose of the fungicide. The seedlings dealt with in the present paper were not treated with spergon, and the abnormalities could not be attributed to the action of any chemical. Seedlings with abnormalities at two nodes (Plate xvi, fig. 10) were not uncommon. Those with three were rare. One plant had six affected nodes. TABLE 2. Internode Length of Normal and Abnormal Seedlings in ¢@¢”, Noted 10.8.51. F257. | Seedlings with Fan Type Seedlings with Cone | Normal Seedlings. Abnormalities Above Abnormalities Above First Internode. First Internode. First. Second. First. Second. First. Second. Average internode length .. 1-4 15:1 4-0 14:7 4-5 20-3 Number of seedlings. . et 18 10 6 | Range of length Pe a 1-3 8-22 2-6 9-23 3-6 15-25 Localization of Leaf Abnormalities. Whorls of leaves and compound leaves occasionally occurred on secondary, par- ticularly fasciated, side shoots. Cones were always restricted to the primary shoot. The three groups were mostly confined to the first five nodes and seldom found above the seventh (Table 5), but compound leaves with slight terminal indentations have been found at higher levels, e.g., single plants in hybrid lines of Very Pale Blue Crimped x Punjab and Morye x Newland; at node 9 in the former and 8” up the stem in the latter. TABLE 3. Length of Internodes in Centimetres of Eleven Normal and Sia Abnormal Seedlings: of an F6 Line of Walsh Parentage, Sown 22.7.52. Second Third Fourth Internode. Internode. Internode. Average and range of length of internodes 2-8 01131 1:9 contiguous with abnormality. 2°38 1-9 to 2-5 1-7 to 2-4 Average and range of length of internodes 2-17 1-65 1:39 non-contiguous with abnormality. 1:6 to 2-8 1:4 to 2-1 1-2 to 1-8 1 Several with abnormalities at more than one node. Associated Features. Internodes contiguous with cone and fan type abnormalities were generally longer than usual (Plate xvi, figs. 7, 8). The internode between the cotyledons and first leaf pair in F257 was usually hardly visible. But all F257 seedlings with cone- and fan-shaped abnormalities at the first node in 1951 had a distinct internode (Plate xvi, fig. 2) below, and a markedly longer than normal internode above the affected nodes with cones (Plate xvi, fig. 4a, c; Table 2). : The internodes contiguous to cone and fan abnormalities in an F6 line of Walsh parentage were again longer than normal (Table 3). BY H. B. KERR. 251 Varietal Differences. a. Frequency.—Compound leaves and whorls (Plate xvi, fig. 8) occurred in all hybrids and varieties. But there was a distinct difference in frequency between varieties, clearly borne out by the rust increase varieties Punjab, Walsh, F257 and Ottawa 770B, sown at about fortnightly intervals from March to September, 1952. The seedlings were checked when 24” to 34” high. Ottawa 770B, with an average of 40%, was consistently more affected than the others; Punjab with fewer off types, 12%, was always more affected than F257 and Walsh averaging 2% and 3% respectively (Table 4). TABLE 4. Difference Between Varieties in the Frequency of Plants with Leaf Abnormalities. Number of Affected Seedlings Among Total Examined. | ; | | Ottawa | la OB: Punjab. | Walsh. F257. 1.2.52 eer ae alte oee ole gg) eh ee 0/300 14.3.52 ts ae | 20/76 6/120 | 0/150 1/215 8.4.52 a6 ak | 10/47 1/34 0/58 0/154 April, 1952 ats ue ee 43/81 16/220 1/86 11/337 May, 1952 ae aS ee 22/63 | 29/171 | 0/17 | 9/74 June, 1952 oe Re | 40/76 24/209 0/39 10/97 July, 1952 Bie te oy 34/66 | 53/202 8/95 23/225 August, 1952 .. as fel 12/24 | 13/43 | = 1/54 September, 1952 es de 6/19 1/63 0/32 0/67 October, 1952 ok us: 20/51 10/103 2/30 3/106 1952 total bc a = 207/503 153/1165 |- 11/507 58/1629 1.4.53 af ate ps9 19/126 5/190 4/140 1/136 | | = Cones were generally restricted to one or two varieties. The three varieties, Punjab, Walsh and Concurrent, sown in 1950, were severely affected, but only two of twenty varieties, F257 and Very Pale Blue Crimped, developed cones in 1951. Several plants of Rust Resistant Norfolk Earl and an F6 line of Walsh parentage were affected in 1952. Other varieties sown at the same time and grown in the same position showed only a low percentage of compound leaves. TABLE 5. Number of Seedlings with First Abnormality at the Following Nodes. Ottawa 770B. Punjab. Walsh. F257. Date Sown, 162, |W BPS S| Gy a) Sy 2) BS | By Siew Ss aes eB tes hs eh GS | | March .. 1}, a 33 i il AYO TI eer SY) 7 jah Negba iL || i) at 1 3 4/3 May A 14| 3 3 16} 3 3 i || a Wo) ab | |) BB June Me 31) 6 3 1@} 2 |) 2) Sy) By a 1 4 | 3 1 July so WL eA BS |] By Be ee eal Bay ee) al yTis ys a PAL WT TE eG PB By By aL August .. 10) 2 12) 1 Tl September 5] 1 il October éW Bj) al 10 2 B} ) ipeyeil .. |} aL [REG BYO) |) Zo jai) By Pee) Be nO} IE) BS WEE as Pa Bs GG ab ah ab) Gy tS ales ley yy ak |) a I 252 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L., b. Node at which the first abnormality appeared.—_Varieties showed a slight difference in the node at which the first compound leaf or whorl appeared. It was usually the second node in Ottawa 770B and Punjab, the third node in Walsh, and the second, fifth and sixth nodes in F257 (Table 5). There was no marked difference between varieties in the ratio of seedlings affected at one and more than one node. The latter constituted 22%, 15%, 18% and 9% of the total number of affected seedlings in Ottawa 770B, Punjab, Walsh and F257 respectively. The low figure for F257 is scarcely significant considering the few plants affected (Table 6). Multiple leaves occurred in all lines. There was no significant difference in the ratio of multiple to compound leaves between the varieties. TABLE 6. Number of Seedlings with Abnormalities at_More than One Node. Ottawa 770B. | Punjab. Walsh. F257. Number of seedlings with abnormalities 207 153 itil 58 Number of seedlings with two affected nodes... nee ak ate a 40 20 2 5 Number of seedlings with three affected | nodes... ts “ ae ae 6 3 = | = Percentage of seedlings with more than | one affected node among abnormal seedlings ae os - ae | B® 15 18 9 Abnormalities in Hybrid Populations. The frequeney of abnormalities in hybrids was no greater than in varieties, and was often surprisingly low, e.g. Williston Golden and Very Pale Blue Crimped hybrids. There were more in Ottawa 770B hybrids (Table 7), but even in the most affected cross, Ottawa 770B x Argentine F11, the number was well below the frequency in Ottawa 770B. The very low frequency in Ottawa 770B x Walsh may be the result of the dominance of the latter variety. The first abnormality tended to appear over a wider range of nodes in the Ottawa hybrids than in Ottawa itself, in which it usually appeared at the second node. Effect of Abnormalities on Rust Reaction. There was no detectable effect on the rust reaction. Ottawa 770B always gave normal reactions despite its high frequency of abnormalities. In Plate xvi, fig. 13, the reaction of a normal and compound leaf on the same seedling is seen to be identical. TABLE 7. Number of Seedlings with Abnormal Leaves in Hybrid Populations. Number of Seedlings with First Abnormality at the Following Nodes. Date Pedigree. Total. Sown. 2 3 4 5 6 ia 8 9 16.5.52 (Ottawa x Argentine F11) 85/244 8 8 8 14 1 2 i (Ottawa x Walsh) BS 29/234 | 6 2 6 10 5 (Ottawa x Morye) = 48/249 | 4 8 15 16 1 3 1 1 (Ottawa x Italia Roma) .. 46/25/10 ees 15 3 11 3 4 1 1 Total = of heal tenes He 26 33 32 51 | 10 7 4 2 BY H. B. KERR. 253 Effect of the Environment. Compound leaves and whorls occurred at most times of the year, but were less common in sowings made in the warmer months. A trial sowing of Ottawa 770B kept in the fluorescent-light rooms, with a moderately high and fairly constant temperature, was remarkably free from abnormalities, although growth was otherwise rather abnormal. Only one in 669 F257 seedlings had a compound leaf in sowings made between 1st February and 8th April, 1952. There was a marked increase in later sowings. Thirty of 123 Ottawa 770B seedlings sown 14th March and 8th April, 1952, and only 19 in 126 sown Ist April, 1953, had abnormal leaves. The frequency doubled in later sowings (Table 4). Cones and typical fan off types, with two exceptions, appeared during midwinter, after periods of prolonged, and consistently low temperatures. Since they appeared simultaneously in the varieties affected, usually at the same node, in the open, under cold frames and in unheated glasshouses, temperature, rather than light intensity, degree of hardiness of the seedling, etc., seems to be the responsible factor. The Nature of the Cone Abnormalities. Cones were. always quadrate. The absence of the expected leaf pair at the next node, clearly demonstrated in affected F257 seedlings (Plate xvi, figs. 2, 4), confirmed the fact that two pairs of leaf primordia had become fused at the one node. There must therefore be a strong tendency for leaf primordia to associate in groups of two pairs prior to their separation by an internode. This is a fluid association which must readjust itself each time one of the pairs is removed from the primitive growing point by elongation of the internode. It is not an association of successive groups of four primordia, since this would preclude any association of the second and third, or fourth and fifth leaf pairs, realized at least once. It can also be inferred from the association of the first and second leaf pairs in the F257 cone abnormalities that no internode develops prior to germination. Formation of the Leaf Abnormalities. These abnormalities seem to be the product of a complex interaction between the variety, stage of seedling development and temperature, resulting finally in suppressed differentiation of primordia. In the cones, four leaf primordia have failed to separate, and developed as a solid crown of tissue with slight terminal separation of the primordia. Since the basic quadrate association of primordia is not disturbed, subsequent phyllotaxy is usually normal. The internode has been completely suppressed, but this has been compensated by longer internodes contiguous with the affected node. In the leaf whorls the primordia have separated completely, but an internode has been suppressed. Most of the compound leaves seem to be due to fusion or inadequate separation of contiguous primordia. The distortion of the quadrate association is reflected in the subsequently skewed phyllotaxy (Plate xvi, fig. 9; Text-figs. 15-19). But some compound leaves must be due to over-differentiation. In a Walsh seedling with slight terminal bifurcation of one cotyledon, the two leaves immediately above in the same radius were similarly affected and must have resulted from the same process of over-differentiation (Text-fig. 22). The normal decussate phyllotaxy of the Ottawa 770B and Punjab seedlings (Text-figs. 20, 21) typical of many others is difficult to explain if the compound leaves are fused contiguous primordia. It is quite natural if they are bifurcated primordia, which would not affect the quadrate association of the original primordia. STEM ABNORMALITIES. At least 5% of out-of-season field-sown Concurrent F2 hybrids, Concurrent x Ottawa 770B, Concurrent x Tammes’ Pale Blue and their reciprocals, were abnormal. The stems were fasciated, flat and ribbony, for lengths upwards of a foot. The symptoms persisted into the inflorescence, usually reduced to a small club head, and produced bifurcated 254 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L., flowers, fused anthers, filaments, styles and capsules. None of the F2 seedlings in crosses Punjab x Koto, Punjab x Ottawa, Punjab x Tammes’ Pale Blue and reciprocals, were abnormal. There were three types of abnormalities among pot sown seedlings: (1) Fasciated epicotyl elongating without branching (Plate xvii, fig. 11); (2) Fasciated epicotyl branching into (a@) a normal and fasciated shoot (Plate xvii, fig. 8), (b) two fasciated shoots (Plate xvii, fig. 13a), (c) two normal shoots (Plate xvii, fig. 12); and (3) Shoot branching into two normal shoots without any obvious prior fasciation (Plate xvii, figs. Spall) ie The phyllotaxy, particularly in type’1 and 2 abnormalities, was most irregular. The leaves of the first two groups were often unusual compound forms. Multiple leaf clusters were common just below the point of bifurcation of type 3 seedlings. Primary shoots were usually affected, but each type also occurred on side shoots. Mechanical Induction of Fasciation and Bifurcation. The growing point and all the lateral buds of eight seedlings were damaged or destroyed by a grub. These, without exception, after a period of suppressed growth under optimal growing conditions, gave rise to very abnormal fasciated and bifurcated shoots with unusual compound leaves. Only one abnormal shoot was detected on twelve partially damaged seedlings, with several buds left intact. Bifurcation and fasciation may thus result from suturing, or mechanical injury of meristematic tissue. In the absence of a normal, undamaged bud, the sutured tissue yields to the growth pressure and develops abnormal shoots. These conditions may well obtain in young seedlings, in which the growing point must be rather exposed to damage. If damaged by internal or external forces, growth continues along the only active axis then available and an abnormal shoot develops. At a later stage the growing point should be better protected, while other growing points could resume growth if the main shoot were damaged. Pedigree of abnormal seedlings. Type 1.—F391 x Newland. Type 2.—(Ottawa 770B x Walsh) x F257, (Ottawa 770B x Kenya) x F257, (Ottawa 770B x Bison) x F257, (Argentine F1l1 x Abyssinian) x F257, (Bison x Kenya) x F257, (Bolley Golden x Newland) x F257, (Bolley Golden x Koto) x F257, (Argentine F1l1 x Newland) x F257, (Tammes’ Pale Blue x Abyssinian) x F257, Newland x Akmolinsk, Ottawa 770B, Akmolinsk. 4 Type 3.—(Ottawa 770B x Bison) «x F257, (Argentine F1l1 x Ottawa 770B) x F257, Akmolinsk x Abyssinian, Kenya x Abyssinian, Punjab x Concurrent, Very Pale Blue Crimped. CHLOROPHYLL DEFICIENCIES. (Ottawa 770B x Walsh) x F257 (Plate xvii, fig. 6; Plate xvi, fig. 3).—The first Symptoms appeared in a leaf at the third node of the primary shoot. Most of the subsequent leaves were affected, and the shoot finally died. The deficient tissue radiated from the leaf base in broken and unbroken lines of varying width. None of the secondary shoots were affected. (Walsh x Bison) x F257 (Plate xvii, fig. 5)—The symptoms commenced about 12” up the stem of a secondary shoot. The chlorotic sectors were more clearly defined than the above specimen, and generally radiated from the base in a single strip. Fewer leaves were affected, and the symptoms-persisted into the inflorescence. They were finally restricted to a small branch of the inflorescence, which failed to set seed. None of the other shoots were affected. (Bison x Kenya) x F257 (Plate xvii, fig. 1).—A cotyledon deficiency, which did not persist into the shoot. The deficient sectors were confined to two thin lateral strips identically placed on both cotyledons. A specimen of unknown pedigree (Plate xvii, fig. 2) showed an interesting medial band of deficient tissue on both cotyledons and the first leaf pair. The other leaves were normal. BY H. B. KERR. 255 MISCELLANEOUS ABNORMALITIES. Divided Hypocotyl. (Argentine F11l x Bison) x F257 (Plate xvii, fig. 17).—The hypocotyl had split medially along an axis at right angles to the cotyledons. The two leaves at the cotyledon node were missing. There seemed to be a minute epicotyl at the base of the cleft but it failed to develop. The root was also bifurcated. An Aquatic Bud. (Ottawa 770B x Bison) x F257 (Plate xvii, fig. 14).—This seedling developed a type 3 bifurcated shoot, which was excised, and left in an almost full, 4-pint cream-jar in a moderately lighted section of a glasshouse. After about three weeks, a very unusual bud was noticed below the surface, just beneath the point of bifurcation. It had thick, very closely appressed, bract-like green leaves, and was much larger than normal. Despite careful efforts to maintain it, the bud failed to develop further. Young buds, and occasionally young shoots grow aquatically, if left in well aerated vessels. But nothing like the above bud has ever developed. TABLE 8. Approximate Frequency of Abnormalities in F2, Double Cross and Varieties. Double Type of Abnormality. nA, Crosses. | Varieties. Polyembryos Ae ahs Be = 1/3,000 9/6,0001 2/3,000 Cotyledon abnormalities . . A ” 21/5,000 11/5,000 3/6,000 Fasciation and bifurcation of the stem 8/5,000 10/5,000 3/6,000 Chlorophyll deficiencies A Ba 0/5,000 3/5,000 0/6,000 Compound leaves, etc. .. ae ae No more frequent in hybrids than varieties. 1 Three of these were found in the crosses (Ottawa 770B x Bison) x F257 and reciprocal, among about 150 seeds. This very high frequency was the only indication of specific genetic control of the abnormality. But 200 seeds from one pair were quite normal. Bifurcated Basal Leaves and Growing Point. (Akmolinsk x Abyssinian) x F257 (Plate xvii, figs. 9, 10).—A single anticlinal suture seemed to have completely split the first two leaves medially, partially split the internode along the same axis, and produced two normal shoots, each carrying one of the two leaves normally expected at the second node. The medial splitting of the growing point is reflected in the spiral single leaf phyllotaxy of the derived shoots. Fusion of Leaves at Different Nodes. Two leaves at contiguous nodes were fused together medially, along their lateral margins (Plate xvi, fig. 15). Bifurcation of a Leaf in Two Planes. (Walsh x Koto) x F257.—The compound leaf consisted of two identical units fused together along the midrib. Hach unit was slightly bifurcated distally. Leaf-like sectors of tissue were appressed to the outer surface of some of the cone and fan type abnormalities noted in F257 seedlings in 1951, but this was the only occurrence of such a kind. DISCUSSION. With the exception of the leaf abnormalities, all the aberrant types have either been confined to or been more frequent in hybrid lines than varieties (Table 8). There must, therefore, be some genetic factor operating with other external or internal forces initiating these abnormalities. They are either the product of some genetic complex occasionally realized in hybrid populations, or result from genetic imbalance. There is not much evidence for the former. No one variety seemed to have a greater frequency of hybrid abnormalities than any other (but see footnote, Table 8), and progeny of several abnormalities, carried on to maturity, were normal. 256 ABNORMALITIES IN LINUM USITATISSIMUM L., The theory of genetic imbalance is more probable. The hybrids were derived from Flor’s series of rust differential varieties, selected for their morphological and physio- logical diversity. Three of the major types of abnormality, polyembryony, cotyledon abnormalities, and fasciated epicotyls, and at least some of the fourth major group, leaf abnormalities, are probably produced by a common process, rather than unrelated processes. There seems to have been a proliferation of meristematic tissue, resulting in an enlarged growing face. The tissue has bifureated and produced a double primordial complex, which has either continued development as a single fused unit, or separated into two normal and distinct primordia. This separation may occur early or late in development, and probably depends upon prior suturing of the complex. Several abnormalities have resulted from suturing without prior over-differentiation. This process of over-differentiation, bifurcation and separation occurs from the earliest embryonic period to the late seedling stage, producing successively, polyembryos,. split hypocotyledon, bifurcated cotyledons, fasciated and bifurcated epicotyls, and some bifurcated leaves. The effect is generally localized to a single primordial segment, but may be more: extensive, affecting simultaneously cotyledon and leaf type or phyllotaxy, leaf, internode and growing point, etc. The compound leaves, cones, and whorls are a different phenomenon, resulting from suppressed separation of leaf primordia, and, by contrast with the other abnormalities, are as frequent in varieties as hybrids. CONCLUSION. Linum usitatissimum L. seems prone to a wide range of abnormalities. The major types seem to be an expression of genetic imbalance in hybrid populations, with internal stresses resulting in over-differentiation and bifurcation of meristematic tissue. Some of the most common abnormalities, compound leaves, seem to derive from this process. But many compound leaves are the end-product of a distinctly different process, suppressed separation of leaf primordia. Acknowledgements. This work was done during tenure of a Thomas Lawrance Pawlett Scholarship at Sydney University. I am deeply indebted to Professor W. L. Waterhouse for his unfailing encouragement and advice, particularly in compiling the photographic records. References. Busse, W. F., and BURNHAM, C. R., 1930.—Some effects of low temperatures on seeds. Bot. Gaz., 90: 399-411. Crook, D. M., 1933.—Histological and regenerative studies on the flax seedling. Bot. Gaz.. 95: 209-239. ForsytH, D. F., and ScHusTER, M. L., 1943.—Abnormal leaf formation on flax seedlings caused by spergon. J. Amer. Soc. Agron., 35: 733-735. MILLIKAN, C. R., 1951.—Diseases of flax and linseed. Fasciation. Technical Bulletin No. 9, Department of Agriculture, Victoria. SHIBUYA, T., 1939.—The occurrence of fasciation in flax stems in relation to environment. Jour. Soc. Trop. Agric. (Taiwan), 11: 227-236. Biol. Abs., 15:1377; 1941. WATERHOUSE, W. L., 1953.—Australian Rust Studies, XI. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 78: 1-7. WHITE, O. E., 1945.—The biology of fasciation and its relation to abnormal growth. Jour. Heredity, 36: 11-22. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVI-XVII. Plate xvi. 1. Seedling with fan and cone type abnormalities. x 1:3. 2. a, b, Seedlings with cones at the first node and short internode below; second leaf pair at right angles to cotyledons. c, Normal F257 seedling with second leaf pair in same radius as cotyledons. x 1. 3. Chlorophyll deficient primary shoot. x 0-7. 4. a, c, Seedlings (F257) with cones at node 1. Note longer internode above and obvious lack of a leaf pair. b, Normal seedling. x 0-6. ‘ 5. A cone slightly sutured from the base. x 1:8. 6. a, Undeveloped cone at node 1. b, Expanded cone showing quadrate structure. ec, Normal seedling. x 1 toe BY H. B. KERR. 257 > 7. Seedling with fan showing rather long contiguous internodes. x 0-5 8. Seedling with cone showing rather long contiguous internodes. x 0°5 9. Abnormal seedling showing skewed phyllotaxy following fusion of contiguous leaf primordia. x 1-7 10. Compound leaf with slight terminal differentiation at same node with a normal leaf. Note bifurcated leaf at next node. x 1:4 11. An everted cone. x 1:6 12. Compound and normal leaf at same node, showing varying degrees of separation of subleaves. x 1-4 13. Identical susceptible rust reactions on normal and compound leaves. x 1:7 14. Polyembryo with two roots emerging from germinating seed. x 1 15. Fusion of two leaves at contiguous nodes. x 1:6 Plate xvii. 1. Chlorophyll deficient cotyledons with lateral strips of completely deficient tissue. x 2-1 2. Chlorophyll deficient cotyledons and first leaf pair with medial and distal deficient sectors. x 1:3 3. Type 2 cotyledon abnormality with four subcotyledons. x 1:6. 4. A side view of the same abnormality. x 1-4. 5. Chlorophyll-deficient leaves from a side shoot, showing clearly defined radial deficient sectors. x 1-1 6. Chlorophyll-deficient leaves with radial sectors of varying intensity and size (see also Plate xvi, fig. 3). x 0:8. 7. A seedling with an extra cotyledon separated from the two normal cotyledons by a short internode. x 1:2 : 8. A fasciated shoot bifurcating into a normal and fasciated shoot. Note the abnormal leaves. x 1:1 9. A seedling, in which the epicotyl has been split medially without prior fasciation. The bottom internode has been partially sutured separating the two leaves at the second node, which now appear separately at the same level, still oppositely placed on the derived shoots. x 0-7. 10. The same seedling with the two basal leaves split medially. x 1-6. 11. A type 1 fasciated shoot, elongating without bifurcation. x 0-7. | 12. Two fasciated side shoots from the same seedling with one branching into two normal shoots. x 0-5. 13. A fasciated seedling showing various types of branching, (a@) into two fasciated shoots, (b) into a normal and fasciated shoot. x 0:6. 14. An aquatic bud, with large, bract-like leaves, observed just below the point of bifur- cation of the primary shoot. Note the small normal bud at the base of the shoot. x 1:2. 15. a, An abnormal seedling with a whorl of three cotyledons and three leaves. b, An abnormal seedling with three cotyledons, two of which are closely appressed together and seem to have been derived by suturing of one of the two original cotyledon primordia. Note only two leaves at the bottom node. x 1:1. ’ 16. a, Slight terminal bifurcation of a cotyledon. b, A normal pair of cotyledons. x 1-1. 17. An abnormal seedling with a split hypocotyledon. x 1°8. 18. A seedling with three cotyledons, and three basal leaves. One cotyledon is much smaller than the other two. x 1-4. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNINAE. J. ARIPHRON BICOLOR ERICHSON. By B. B. GIVEN, Entomological Research Station, Nelson, New Zealand. (Communicated by Dr. A. J. Nicholson.) (Fifteen Text-figures. ) [Read 25th November, 1953.] Synopsis. Basie references to the species and its synonymy are given, followed by a concise description of both sexes, with the distribution range and flight period. The life-cycle is outlined as far as known, and the second instar larva and cocoon are described. The first instar larval characters are also described as far as possible from the exuvium. The more important adult and pre-adult features are illustrated by line drawings. This paper will introduce a series of short descriptive notes on the Thynninae of Australia, with particular emphasis on the figuring of species concerned. The keys of Turner (1907, 1908, 1910) cannot be interpreted, and the bulk of his specific and generic descriptions are extremely difficult to follow, largely on account of lack of illustration of characters described. Consequently it is felt that emphasis should now be placed on clear figuring of the more important characters, with a minimum of word description. Only species of certain identity will be described in this series of papers and, where possible, information on host records, flight periods, general habits and distribution will be included. ARIPHRON BICOLOR HRICHSON, 1842. Arch. f. Naturgesch. Berlin, 8:264 (9).—rigidulus Turner, 1907, Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 32:274 (9); 1913, Proc. Linn Soc. N.S.W., 38:610 (synonymy). $.—Colour remarkably constant in the four specimens examined, and very distinctive for the species. Black; antennae, palpi, legs except for coxae and trochanters, abdomen except for segments 5, 4 and posterior portion of 3, and tegulae, rufo-testaceous. Wings very slightly fumose, with darker areas below and distad of stigma. Gross structure as in Text-figures 1, 3, 4, and 10. Note particularly area “a” in Text-figure 4, which is smooth and without vestiture. The presence of this area is characteristic of Australian members of the tribe Thynnini, and its shape is in many cases highly diagnostic of genera and species. Coarse rugose puncturing on most of vertex and frons including supra-antennal prominence, much finer on clypeus and genae. Vestiture of head sparse except for clypeus which is clothed with decumbent grey hairs. Thorax rather sparsely and irregularly punctured; abdomen almost impunctate. ?.—Head, thorax, legs and terminal abdominal segments ferruginous; remainder of abdomen and eyes darker red-brown to black. Gross structure as in Text-figures 2, and 5-9. Note particularly basal prominence on head, pronotal depressions, form of mesopleurae, and flange-structures of abdominal terminalia. Coarse puncturing on frons and anterior part of vertex, fine, sparse puncturing on thorax, obsolete sculpture on abdomen. No rugosity or carinae on abdominal segments. Material excamined.—2 males, 1 female from Cavendish, Victoria; 2 males, 1 female from Hast Warburton, Victoria, Coll. F. E. Wilson. Flight period.—January, February. Distribution.—Tasmania and Southern Victoria. Note.—The subspecies propodealis Rohwer has not been seen by the writer. “ec BY B. B. GIVEN. 259 Life cycle of Ariphron bicolor Hrichs. The entire life-cycle of this thynnid is not known, but the following remarks summarize information so far obtained. Turner (1913, p. 610) makes the following remarks: ‘I took several males at Haglehawk Neck in Tasmania, flying round and settling on a fallen Eucalyptus log, which contained a nest of Myrmecia ants. I searched the ants’ nest as far as possible hoping to find the female, but was not successful.” Early in 1952, Mr. F. E. Wilson of Melbourne noted parallel occurrences at East Warburton, and succeeded in taking one male and a copulating pair. Text-figs. 1-4.—Ariphron bicolor EHErichs. entire sy 5) 2) enicuine ©; 3, head, anterodorsal, &; 4, head, ventral, J. In January 1947, the writer made similar observations at Cavendish in Western ‘Victoria, and on visiting the same log in January 1948, found males again ranging over it. On this occasion the log was split with an axe, and larvae and adults of a lucanid beetle were taken. The adults were identified by Mr. F. E. Wilson as Syndesus cornutus Fabr. One larva was found to have a second instar hymenopterous larva attached to its ventral surface, and a hymenopterous cocoon was taken, with the head-capsule of a luecanid larva loosely attached to its outer fibres. In another section of the log, an Ariphron bicolor female was found in a tunnel also containing a Syndesus larva, on the ventral surface of which was a typical thynnid egg. On this evidence it is assumed that the larva and cocoon herein described and figured, are those of Ariphron bicolor, and that a host of this thynnid is the lucanid Syndesus cornutus Fabr. It is unfortunate that no final instar larvae of the parasite were collected, the only larva taken being in its second instar. 260 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNINAE. I, Description of second instar larva and cocoon of Ariphron bicolor. The second instar larva is illustrated feeding on its host in Text-figure 11. The loose: envelope covering the larva is the first instar cast skin. The head capsule is well formed and sub-spherical, with powerful, toothed mandibles.. No traces of antennae or palpi were detectable in slide mounts of the stained capsule,. S== SS SS Text-figs. 5-15.—Avriphron bicolor Erichs. 5, head, ventral, Q; 6, head, dorsal, 9; 7, thorax, lateral, Q; 8, abdominal terminalia, dorsal, 9; 9, abdominal terminalia, lateral, 9; 10, abdominal terminalia, dorsal, a 11, larval instar 2 on host; 12, cocoon; 13, larval instar 2, head, ventral; 14, larval instar 2, spiracle;, 15, larval instar 1, mandible. BY B. B. GIVEN. 261 cand no traces of vestiture.or sculpture were noted on any portion of the body. The tentorium is of somewhat complex structure, and is illustrated by stippling in Text-figure 13. Oral lobes possibly representing labrum, labium and maxillae are well developed, and buccal and salivary openings are well defined. Spiracles are all similar, and as illustrated in Text-figure 14. The cocoon (Text-figure 12) is typical of the subfamily, consisting of a thin inner envelope, a compact, extremely tough, fine-textured main envelope, and an outer layer of fine, loose fibres. At the narrower (posterior) end is a small somewhat absorbent pad, which was in close contact with the tunnel wall. This pad, which evidently consists partly of larval faeces and is the only markedly water-absorbent part of the cocoon, appears to play a part in the moisture-conditioning of the cocoon interior. The first instar larva. The first instar skin was mounted and a mandible is illustrated in Text-figure 15. First instar spiracles are identical with those of second instar, except for size. References. ‘TURNER, R. E., 1907.—PrRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 32: 206-290 (Ariphron bicolor, pp. 271-4). 1908.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 33: 70-256. 1910.—Gen. Ins., 105: 3, 5, 10-16. 1913.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 38: 610. bo for) bo A NOTE ON THE GEOLOGY OF PANUARA AND ANGULLONG, SOUTH OF ORANGH, N.S.W.* By N. C. STEVENS, Geological and Mining Museum, Sydney. (Three Text-figures. ) [Read 25th November, 1953.] Synopsis. Mapping of this area links the Ordovician, Silurian and Devonian formations of Four Mile Creek and Cliefden Caves. Further details are given of the Ordovician Malongulli Formation and Angullong Tuff. Silurian strata ranging from Lower Llandovery to Wenlock, overlain by unfossiliferous shale and rhyolite, rest unconformably on Angullong Tuff. Upper Devonian ~ Black Rock Sandstone overlies the rhyolite with unconformity. Monzonitic and syenitic rocks: have invaded Ordovician strata south of Cadia, and flows of Tertiary trachyte and basalt are: found at altitudes above 2000 feet. 1. INTRODUCTION. Panuara and Angullong Estates are situted about 20 miles south-south-west of Orange and 15 miles west-north-west of Carcoar, between Panuara Rivulet and Cadiangullong Creek, south-flowing tributaries of the Belubula River. Panuara Hstate has recently been subdivided for closer settlement, and the new roads and portions are shown on a map issued by the N.S.W. Department of Lands (1950). The only reference to the geology of the district is a brief report by Booker (1950) on the Angullong Deep Lead. The map accompanying the report also shows Silurian sediments (including limestone near Cobbler’s Creek) and Upper Devonian rocks to the west. To the north, the geology of Four Mile Creek has been described by Stevens and- Packham (1953), and a small area near the Cadia mines has been reported upon by Raggatt (1939). To the south and west, the country around Cliefden Caves and Cargo has been studied by the writer (Stevens, 1952; 1950). The present work clarifies the relations between Palaeozoic formations defined in papers on Cliefden Caves and Four Mile Creek. 2. STRATIGRAPHY. Ordovician. Of the four Ordovician formations of the Cliefden Caves district, only two, the Malongulli Formation and the Angullong Tuff, can be definitely recognized in the area shown on the map (Text-fig. 1). The limestone bed marked with a question mark in the south-western corner of the map may possibly represent the northernmost extension of the Cliefden Caves Limestone, but it adjoins Silurian limestone on the west and until more fossils are collected its age must remain in doubt. Malongulli Formation.—This formation, originally defined in the Cliefden Caves paper (Stevens, 1952), was later recognized at Four Mile Creek (Stevens and Packham, 1953). It is now known to extend south to the Belubula River, and graptolites have been collected at five new localities. The lithology of the formation is much the same as in the areas to the north and south, consisting mainly of thinly-bedded siltstone, black and often calcareous when fresh, and grey and slaty when weathered. Z In the northern part of the area the following graptolites have been found: Locality g,, Mesograptus foliaceus, Glyptograptus teretiusculus (?) var. euglyphus; Locality g., G. teretiusculus; Locality g;, Diplograptus apiculatus or M. foliaceus. * Published by permission of the Under-Secretary for Mines. 263 N. C. STEVENS. BY MILES | [e} GEOLOGICAL MAP of PANUARA a ANGULLONG ESTATES = TERTIARY (@ | LIMESTONE in Panuara Formation BASALT Ses XX XX XEX UPPER ORDOVICIAN FAH TRACHYTE 4 Tuff Angu/long Lamprophyre ZY Malongulli Formation Eee xy s LAVAS ANDO TUFES YY) ‘\ HK WOE AA ASS + SS > vRYy CAIN i ee aN V Intrusions 4 AWK S \\ DWN NITE & RELATED INTRUSIVES g Graptolite Localities a Anticlinal Axes ELSPAR PORPHYRY POST ORDOVICIAN MONZO ZZC'KNGULLONG” ov 5 & 5 ” BS = v 2 aac o cae » a a) x ° Si ace ae Zl o % He 9 AS Zix 2 eS Ole = Ss) & woe g & aa a Q o re ca <—_______ | @e@e@ anny vig@®eeeeseeve Seceees MOB I/LINIVW FORO Bo IOI Eee IOI Glo GOO OU OO SO OO00 UO 1.—Geological Map of Panuara and Angullong Hstates. Text-fig. 264 THE GEOLOGY OF PANUARA AND ANGULLONG, N.S.W., M. foliaceus (sensu stricto) is confined to zone 8 of the Ordovician (zone of G. teretiusculus), so that the strata at g, are one zone lower than the graptolite beds in the Malongulli Formation near Cliefden Caves. At g, structural evidence indicates a higher zone than zone 8, so that the graptolite is more likely to be D. apiculatus. South-west of Cadia, cherts and some andesitic tuffs are interbedded with the siltstones near the top of the formation on either side of the belt of Angullong Tuff. To the west near “Ashleigh” (Text-fig. 1), the country is gently undulating with few outcrops, but good exposures of banded siltstones are to be seen to the south in Cadiangullong and Swallow Creeks. The banded siltstones which outcrop in Swallow Creek east of Angullong are interbedded with andesitic tuffs and felspathic sandstones. The boundaries between fine and coarse sediments are irregular, and lenticular shale fragments are notable in some of the sandstones. These features are probably due to contemporaneous slumping and erosion of shaly beds. Some andesitic rocks are present in this area, but it is not clear whether they are part of the Malongulli Formation or the Angullong Tuff, as the strata are highly folded and faulted. . a) a ae ene DAS SS ee OS SS rr gk2 = 5 1 Text-fig. 2.—Geological Section A B across map. Text-fig. 3.—Geological Section C D. 1, Malongulli Formation; 2, Angullong Tuff; 2A, Andesite; 2C, Conglomerate and breccia; 3, Panuara Formation; 3A, Bridge Creek Lime- stone; 4, Wallace Shale; 5, Bulls’ Camp Rhyolite; 6, Black Rock Sandstone; 7, Monzonite; 8, Tertiary trachyte. In Cadiangullong Creek most of the formation is made up of dark calcareous siltstones with occasional beds of felspathic sandstone and impure limestone. The siltstones exhibit regular bedding of dark fine-grained and coarser felspathic sediment. Near the top of the formation (at g,) diplograptid graptolites, including a possible Cryptograptus, are associated with ostracods and fragments of trilobites and brachiopods. This part of the formation is probably not younger than Caradocian (zone of Dicranograptus clingani). To the south, near the confluence of Merrimalong Creek and the Belubula River (at g,;), Glyptograptus cf. teretiusculus has been found in dark grey siltstones which probably belong to the Malongulli Formation, although they are a little to the west of the main outcrop. This area is rather complex and has not yet been fully investigated.' Angullong Tuff—The Angullong Tuff, which overlies the Malongulli Formation, outcrops over most of the southern part of the Panuara-Angullong area, as well as between “Ashleigh” and Cadia. The main rock types are andesitic tuffs, andesites, conglomerates, breccias and siltstones. In the type area near Cliefden Caves the formation consists mainly of tuffs with some andesite flows, overlain by banded siltstones. At Four Mile Creek, where a “sequence is difficult to establish, andesites are more prominent, and conglomerates and pebbly tuffs appear near the base of the formation. Between these two localities all these rock types are present. BY N. C. STEVENS. 265 On Panuara Rivulet and Cobbler’s Creek, andesitic conglomerates and breccias with beds of dark siltstone and tuff underlie andesites. Similar rocks outcrop one mile north of “Panuara” and along the Belubula River south-east of Angullong, but their distribution is irregular. Graptolites found in the siltstone beds at g, and g, include species of Climacograptus with thecae showing mesial flanges, indicating a zone near the top of the Ordovician. The siltstones are probably of the same zone as the graptolite-bearing siltstones on the Belubula River south of “Carlton” (Stevens, 1952). Andesites, which apparently overlie the conglomerates, are found east and north of the Silurian limestone on Cobbler’s Creek, and similar lavas, interbedded with tuffs and breccias, make up most of the formation around “Panuara”’ and “Ashleigh”. Both augite- and hornblende-andesites have been noted. In the Panuara-Angullong area and to the east, there are difficulties in distinguishing between andesites of the Angullong Tuff and the older Walli Andesite, and between siltstones of the Malongulli Formation and the siltstones in the Angullong Tuff. Silurian. Panuara Formation.—All the fossiliferous Silurian sediments of Four Mile Creek, ranging from Lower Llandovery to Upper Wenlock, are included in this formation. It extends south and south-east towards the upper part of Cobbler’s Creek, and also occurs in an isolated basin resting uncomfortably on Angullong Tuff west of Angullong. In the north-western part of the map, immediately south of the area mapped by Stevens and Packham (1953), the Panuara Formation is faulted against the Angullong Tuff and the basal limestone does not appear, but it outcrops two miles further south on either side of Panuara Rivulet. The limestone is more massive and not as fossiliferous as the Bridge Creek Limestone Member to the north, but Favosites and Halysites have been collected from the south-eastern outcrop. Another lens of limestone is found at the base of the Panuara Formation 13 miles north of Angullong. Nearer Panuara Rivulet, red, brown and green shales with some siltstones and fine-grained tuffs overlie the limestone. Graptolites found in the shales at g, include Monograptus flemingi var. primus, M. priodon or M. marri, and (?)Retiolites sp. This association suggests a zone in the Lower Wenlock (g, of Four Mile Creek). Ina west-flowing tributary of Panuara Rivulet near “Ashleigh”, dark grey calcareous shales contain poorly-preserved graptolites at two localities (g, and g,), probably the same horizon repeated by folding. The graptolites are Monograptus cf. variabilis or nudus, indicating an Upper Llandovery age, but structure and lithology suggest a higher zone. South-east of Dam Creek, outcrops of the Panuara Formation are infrequent, and the lithology changes from shales to micaceous sandstones and siltstones. East of the Angullong Road these resemble sediments of the adjoining Malongulli Formation. In the basin of Silurian sediments west of Angullong, limestone again occurs at the base of the Panuara Formation and outcrops along the eastern, southern and northern sides of the basin. On the south-western side, two limestone beds are separated by about 250 feet of brown and grey shales and siltstones. A bed of conglomerate, eight to 10 feet thick, with andesite boulders, underlies the upper limestone. The lower limestone bed is similar to the Bridge Creek Limestone. Fossils found in it include Halysites (two species), Heliolites, Favosites, Mycophyllids, Streptelasmids, Pentamerids and bryozoa. Colonies of Hofletcheria “very like subparallela’ (according to Dr. Hill) are notable. This coral has been described from the zone of Dicranograptus clingani in Norway (Hill, 1953), but in this district there is evidence that it is of Lower Llandovery age. Graptolites have been found at three localities in the overlying shales. From the lowest locality (g.,) Mrs. Sherrard identified Monograptus intermedius, M. triangulatus and (?) Rastrites longispinus. Later a more comprehensive collection was obtained, Vv 266 THE GEOLOGY OF PANUARA AND ANGULLONG, N.S.W., from which Mr. G. Packham has identified the following (zone ranges are given in brackets): Glyptograptus sp., G. tamariscus (18-21), G. sinuatus (19), Mesograptus sp., Petalograptus sp. (19-22), Orthograptus insectiformis (19-20), Rastrites aff. approximatus (19-21) and Climacograptus hughesi (16-21). The forms belong to the zone of Monograptus gregarius, zone 19 of the British succession (Lower Llandovery, equivalent to g, of Four Mile Creek). The upper limestone contains, besides corals, Conchidium sp., which is found in abundance in Cobbler’s Creek, on the north-western side of the basin. Overlying strata are shales and siltstones with some fine-grained sandstones. At the southern end of the basin the limestones join and diverge again to the south, where possible Ordovician limestone appears. Between Gleeson’s Creek and the basalt to the west, at g,., fossiliferous Silurian limestone adjoins shales with Climacograptus sp. and Monograptus cf. gregarius, suggesting an extension of the Lower Llandovery strata. Upper Silurian or Devonian. Wallace Shale—Red and green shales of this formation overlie the Panuara Formation along Panuara Rivulet north-west of “Ashleigh”. Beds of coarse micaceous arkose with irregular lenses of black shale are prominent in this area, and the base of the formation is marked on the southern side by a grey tuff with angular fragments of quartz and felspar. Bulls’ Camp Rhyolite—The uppermost beds of the Wallace Shale grade into tuffs with pebbles and boulders of andesite which dip north under the rhyolite north of “Ulah”. The rhyolite disappears to the west under Upper Devonian sandstones. Upper Devonian. Black Rock Sandstone.—The lithology of this formation has been noted in previous papers (Stevens, 1950; Stevens and Packham, 1953). Ripple marks and current bedding are shown in the excellent exposures on Panuara Rivulet, but no fossils have been found in this area. it Tertiary. Trachyte——A flow of trachyte extends south towards Angullong from the foothills of Mt. Canobolas. It is confined to the higher country between Panuara Rivulet and Cadiangullong Creek, and the base of the flow slopes southwards to an elevation of 2100 feet at the southern end. East of “Ashleigh”, hills of Malongulli Formation. rise to about 100 feet above the present upper surface of the flow. The maximum thickness is about 100 feet. The trachytes: are dark blue-grey and resinous when fresh, and pale grey and platy wnen weathered. Phenocrysts are of sanidine and the ferromagnesian mineral is probably aegirine-augite. : Basalt.—Tertiary basalt caps the ridge west of Cadia at an altitude of 2800 feet, and several outliers are present at a lower level at Angullong (2000 feet). Some basalt and trachyte also occur in the valley of Cadiangullong Creek south of Cadia, several hundred feet below the basalt and trachyte on the ridge. Tertiary gravels beneath the basalt at Angullong have been worked for gold (Booker, 1950). A flat-topped hill west of Gleeson’s Creek represents an area formerly covered by basalt. 7” 3. INTRUSIVE Rocks. Monzonite and Related Intrusives. Monzonite, associated with syenite-aplite, has been noted at Cadia (Raggatt, 1939). In mapping the district to the south, smaller intrusions of monzonite porphyry and syenite and a larger intrusion of syenitic rock have been found. The monzonite porphyries are related to the main mass of monzonite, and are similar to types collected by Raggatt from Cadia. BY N. C. STEVENS. ‘ 267 The western part of the larger syenitic intrusion is made up of a pink syenite ‘consisting mainly of orthoclase and sodic plagioclase with chlorite from original amphibole or possibly biotite. Hast of the Angullong Road, the intrusive is a grey-green. monzonite porphyry or porphyrite with phenocrysts of albitized and epidotized plagioclase and some augite in a deuterically altered felspathic groundmass. A small intrusion of augite-syenite with a notable amount of zeolite outcrops among Silurian sediments north-east of Angullong, and an epidotized diorite has invaded the Malongulli Formation on the Belubula River south of Cadiangullong. Creek. Other Intrusions. An intrusion of felspar-porphyry forms a gorge in the lower part of Cadiangullong Creek. The rock is conspicuous in the gravels of the Belubula River because of the large pink felspar phenocrysts. Quartz and hornblende are present in the groundmass. Several small dykes of lamprophyre and uralitic dolerite have invaded the Malongulli Formation north of the Orange-Angullong Road (see Text-fig. 1). Some of these intrusions, associated with porphyrite, are shown in the south-eastern corner of the Four Mile Creek map. The age of these intrusions cannot be placed more precisely than post-Ordovician,. pre-Tertiary, except for the syenite which has invaded the Silurian sediments north-east of Angullong. Raggatt (1939) suggested a Kanimblan age for the Cadia monzonite. 4. STRUCTURE. Where Ordovician sediments are well-exposed (as in Swallow and Cadiangullong Creeks), the structure is seen to be complex, with numerous minor folds and faults. Three major folds have been recognized between Panuara Rivulet and Cadiangullong Creek, with axes trending west-north-west. Many smaller folds are probably present, but they cannot be proved because of lack of outcrops or bedding. In the western part of the area, angles of dip are gentle in both Ordovician and Silurian rocks, and there appears to be a conformity, but in other places the unconformity is evident. At Four Mile Creek, the Panuara Formation, the Wallace Shale and the Bulls’ Camp Rhyolite dip to the west, but further south, a number of close folds appears in the lower formations. Still further south the angles of dip become more gentle and the structure is seen to be a syncline with minor undulations, plunging north-west. The three formations disappear west under the Upper Devonian sandstones, and the disposition of these rocks indicates that the Panuara Formation, the Wallace Shale and the Bulls” Camp Rhyolite are all conformable. The unconformity between them and the Black Roce Sandstone is quite obvious. The two most important faults are those between the Panuara Formation and tne Angullong Tuff at “Ashleigh”, and the fault separating the Angullong Tuff and the Malongulli Formation on Swallow Creek, with its possible extension on the Belubula River. At “Ashleigh” the basal limestones of the Panuara Formation are missing and the Silurian rocks are heavily sheared at the contact with the Angullong Tuff. To the south, beds of the Panuara Formation appear to dip east under the tuff. The fault om Swallow Creek has overfolded siltstones, and on the Belubula River there is a wide zone of sheared rocks south of this point. Acknowledgements. Opportunity to carry out most of the field work was made available by the Under Secretary for Mines, Mr. E. J. Kenny, and the Government Geologist, Mr. C. St. J. Mulholland. Reconnaissance trips to the area were made in company with Messrs. G. Packham, R. Cater, H. J. Pemble and W. Jopling. Palaeontological assistance has been given by Mrs. K. Sherrard and Mr. G. Packham, who determined the graptolites, and by Dr. D. Hill. 268 THE GEOLOGY OF PANUARA AND ANGULLONG, N.S.W. References. Booker, F. W., 1950.—The Angullong Deep Lead. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Geological Reports (19389-1945): 24. HiIuu, D., 1953.—Middle Ordovician of the Oslo Region, Norway. Part 2. Some Rugose and Tabulate Corals. Norsk. Geol. Tidsskr., 31: 143. RaGGAtTT, H. G., 1939.—Cadia Iron-Ore Deposits. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., unpublished report. STEVENS, N. C., 1950.—Geology of the Canowindra District. Part 1. The Stratigraphy and Structure of the Cargo-Toogong District. J. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 82: 319. , 1952.—Ordovician Stratigraphy at Cliefden Caves, near Mandurama, N.S.W. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S:W., 77: 114. and Packham, G. H., 1953.—Graptolite Zones and Associated Stratigraphy at Four Mile Creek, South-West of Orange, N.S.W. J. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 86: 94. 269 GUSTAVUS ATHOL WATERHOUSE, 1877-1950. (Memorial Series, No. 14.) (With Portrait,* Plate xviii.) Gustavus Athol Waterhouse was born at Waverley, Sydney, on 21st May, 1877. The old home in which he spent his early years is now portion of the War Memorial Hospital, Waverley. His first school was the Waverley Public School where he received from the Headmaster (Mr. Harrison) a thorough grounding in mathematics. He went on to the Sydney Grammar School in 1890 and had there a distinguished scholastic record, gaining. the Medal for Trigonometry at the Senior examination in 1895. He was brought up in an atmosphere of natural history. His father, Gustavus John Waterhouse, was an enthusiastic collector of Pacific Island weapons and implements, and his mother was a noted collector of shells from the beaches in the neighbourhood of Sydney. He, with his two younger brothers, took part in this shell collecting and paid many visits to such localities as Watsons Bay, Bottle and Glass Rocks, Little Manly, Balmoral and Botany Bay. During one of these excursions in search of cowries, he levered up a large slab of rock and was in such a position that, had he relinquished his. hold on the rock, he would have been caught under it and probably severely injured. The effort of holding the rock until assistance was forthcoming resulted in such a strain on his heart that he later had to give up his participation in active sport on account of it. He had taken a keen interest in cricket and in tennis, and for a time his love of sport overshadowed his passion for natural history field work and collecting. During his. years at Sydney Grammar School he spent many lunch hours in the galleries of the Australian Museum, which adjoins the school. In the list of exhibits at the Third Annual Exhibition of the Field Naturalists” Society of New South Wales, held in 1893, there is an entry “Master Athol Waterhouse— collection of Australian Shells’. The Council of the Society about that time included a group of naturalists that must have been a wonderful inspiration to a boy such as Waterhouse with a keen interest in collecting the local fauna. This group included A. H. S. Lucas, Charles Hedley, W. W. Froggatt, J. P. Hill, W. J. Rainbow, Thomas Steel and T. Whitelegge, each a noted name in the annals of natural history in Australia. Waterhouse went on to the University of Sydney in 1896, and graduated Bachelor of Science in 1899 with First Class Honours in Geology and Palaeontology, and Bachelor of Engineering in 1900. Under the guidance of Professor Edgeworth David he made a special study of the voleanic dykes intruding the Triassic Rocks of the Sydney district and prepared a detailed map of the distribution of the dykes. In 1924 he obtained the degree of Doctor of Science, with University Medal, for a thesis based on his extensive work on hybridization in butterflies of the genus Tisiphone. In 1900 he was appointed to the assay staff of the Sydney branch of the Royal Mint, and he remained on that staff until the branch was closed in 1926 when he retired. In 1928 he joined the newly-formed Division of Economic Entomology of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research as one of its first officers—with the title of Curator and Administrative Officer. He played a very important part in all phases of the early organization of this Division. With characteristic enthusiasm and vigour he hunted for staff, with considerable success, and he arranged temporary accommodation until the permanent building was erected on the slopes of Black Mountain, Canberra. He was largely responsible for the planning of this building and for the provision of scientific equipment. He also helped in the design of several large glasshouse insectaries which: * Portrait taken 1924. 270 GUSTAVUS ATHOL WATERHOUSE, are still in use. After occupying a truly key position during this early formative period he resigned when the Division became fully established in Canberra in 1930. After graduation he commenced active participation in the affairs of scientific societies—an interest which he expanded and maintained for nearly forty years, when indifferent health compelled him to relinquish the last of his honorary offices. The Field Naturalists’ Society of N.S.W. had ceased active existence in 1898, and Waterhouse took an active part in its revival as the Field Naturalists’ Club in 1900. He was Honorary Secretary of this Club from 1900 to 1905, Vice President and Honorary Librarian in 1905-06, and President 1906-07. While he was President he offered a prize, for the best collection of insects, to Junior Members of the Club; collections submitted by Sydney Members to be from the County of Cumberland, and by country Members from their own districts. The Club later became the Naturalists’ Society of New South Wales and Waterhouse was elected President for 1914-15. He joined the Linnean Society of New South Wales in 1897, and was a member of the Council from 1912 to 1943. He was President for two years, 1921-23, Acting Secretary in 1927, and Honorary Treasurer 1926-28 and 1930-43. During his term as President he made one of the first public suggestions of a central home for the scientific societies in Sydney. Replying to the toast of the Visitors at the annual dinner of the Royal Society of New South Wales he reminded the assemblage that Burlington House in London was a building which housed a number of kindred societies, and drew attention to the coincidence that the function at which he was speaking was taking place in the Burlington Cafe. Might that, he said, be an omen that the time was ripe for some move to be made in Sydney to bring together the scientific societies in a suitable building. It may be that this speech crystallized ideas which had been mentioned informally from time to time. Whether or not that was so, discussions were held during the next few years, the Government was approached and asked to make available a suitable piece of land, and ultimately an Act was passed by Parliament granting to the Royal Society of New South Wales, the Linnean Society of New South Wales, and the Institution of Engineers, Australia, jointly the piece of land in Gloucester Street on which Science House was built. Waterhouse took an active part in these preliminary negotiations and he was a member of the Management Committee of Science House in its earlier years. He took also an active part in the administration of the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales, of which he was a Member of Council for many years and President in 1924-25. Of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science he was Hon. General Treasurer from 1934 to 1946, and was President of Section D (Zoology) at the Auckland meeting in 1937. He was a member of the Australian National Research Council from 1926 till his death, and a member of the Executive ‘Committee for some years. He joined the Royal Society of New South Wales in 1921 and for two years (1923-25) acted as Honorary Secretary in order to free Mr. R. H. Cambage for work connected with the Second Pacific Science Congress which was held in Australia in 1923. He was Honorary Entomologist to the Australian Museum from 1919, an Hlective Trustee from 1926 to 1947, and President of the Board of Trustees in 1930. This is an outstanding record of voluntary service in the cause of science in Australia and there are few who can claim to have made such a continuous and ‘successful contribution. The Royal Entomological Society of London conferred on him the unusual distinction of Honorary Life Fellowship—an honour of which he was justifiably very proud. His lifelong interest in zoology was mostly concentrated in collection and study of the Butterflies of Australia. His collection which ultimately became the finest existing collection of Australian species was commenced in 1893 while he was still at school. It is now preserved in the Australian Museum, to which he presented it about 1935. Of nearly 350 known Australian species, only four species are not represented in this ‘collection. The Australian Museum collection contains all except 16 of the 888 specimens used as illustrations in “The Butterflies of Australia”. The collection also contains all MEMORIAL NOTICE. 271 of Waterhouse’s own types except one which is in the Macleay Museum, University of Sydney, and a few described with G. Lyell which are in the National Museum, Melbourne. In addition to specimens collected by himself during trips to every State, his collection contains valuable specimens from many well-known collectors such as H. Elgner (Cape York), F. P. Dodd (Kuranda), R. E. Turner (Mackay, Kuranda and Cape York), L. Franzen and R. Illidge (Brisbane), G. M. Goldfinch (Sydney), and F. L. Whitlock (Western Australia). There are five drawers of the magnificent species of Ogyris, most of the species being represented by long series of bred material. This genus, with the exception of a few New Guinea species, is confined to Australia. The collection also includes some thousands of specimens of Indo-Malayan species as well as specimens from Ceylon, Japan and the Pacific Islands. Other unique features include the 300 specimens of the first, second and third generations of the crosses of Tisiphone abeona referred to below, a considerable number of colour aberrations, mosaic gynandromorphs, and other abnormal specimens, as well as.a large amount of larval and pupal material. Waterhouse prepared extensive notes on this material and on the details of life histories, but unfortunately little of this information has been published. Waterhouse began collecting butterflies at the age of 16, and 10 years later (1903) had amassed sufficient data to publish a catalogue of Australian butterflies containing 329 species, of which 283 species were represented in his own collection. This published list contained 79 species more than in Miskin’s 1891 catalogue. The comprehensive nature of this work is illustrated by the fact that, by 1914, the number of species had been increased by only four, and by 1942 by only a further eight species. Only one new species has been described since 1942. Thus, in the last 50 years, only about a dozen new species have been added to a fauna of nearly 350 species. During the same time well over 100 new subspecies were described by Waterhouse from a vast amount of material collected from many parts of Australia. Waterhouse’s extraordinary thoroughness as a taxonomist may be illustrated by the fact that he examined in detail and made careful notes on about 480 types of Australian butterflies, including species and subspecies. Of the 134 remaining it is definitely known that 51 are lost and it is highly probable that a further 40 no longer exist. His determinations were made, therefore, with a vast background of knowledge, which extended beyond the Australian species to include the Pacific, Malayan and Indo-Malayan butterfly faunas. He described about 16 species of Australian butterflies and well over 100 geographical subspecies. It is probable that very few new species of butterflies remain to be found in Australia, except perhaps in the relatively uncollected far north-west. Few groups, therefore, of the Australian insect fauna are as thoroughly described as butterflies. Waterhouse’s Presidential Addresses to the Linnean Society of New South Wales in 1922-23 detailed the results of breeding experiments in respect of hybridization of certain species of butterfly. These experiments were mainly with the satyrid genus Tisiphone and were carried out in the grounds of his own home where he built special cages to which he transplanted specimens of the food plant of the species. His notebook and card catalogue with details of these experiments are preserved in the library at the Australian Museum. This work is an excellent example of his very broad taxonomic interests. Between 1914 and 1928 he made extensive collections of the geographical subspecies of 7. abeona and in 1921 was able to cross the subspecies abeona and morrisi. These crosses were carried to the third generation and the offspring approached closely the extremely variable suspecies joanna which occurs around Port Macquarie. Later by studying the progeny of single female joanna he demonstrated that this variability was due to the hybrid nature of this subspecies. In addition, the results of crosses between the subspecies abeona and rawnsleyi suggested that the latter (the more northern subspecies) was derived from morrisi. 272 GUSTAVUS ATHOL WATERHOUSE, This study (summarized in Aust. Zool., 5:217, 1928) was a pioneer work in experimental taxonomy and even today there are few examples of the “laboratory” synthesis of a naturally-occurring hybrid subspecies. It is unfortunate that these important studies have not become better known. Almost all of Waterhouse’s published scientific work deals with butterflies and includes, besides papers in the publications of scientific societies, the Catalogue of Rhopalocera of Australia (1903), The Butterflies of Australia (1914, with G. Lyell), and What Butterfly is That? (1932). His own first-printed interleaved copy of ‘What Butterfly is That?” in which his subsequent notes and annotations are written, together with his scientific books are preserved in the library of the Australian Museum. His Presidential address to Section D, delivered at the 1937 meeting of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science, gave a comprehensive account of the biology and taxonomy of Australasian butterflies. This address contained many of the results of his observations on type specimens and early literature made during a visit to England in 1936. During this visit to England he worked almost daily at the British Museum (Natural History) examining types and other material, including the Banks Collection. The Museum had asked him to come to London to classify its collection, which began with specimens collected by Sir Joseph Banks and Captain Matthew Flinders. He also spent some time examining Lord Rothschild’s Collection at Tring and Meyrick’s Collection of Lepidoptera at Marlborough. For any ordinary man it might be expected that an absorbing interest in Lepidoptera and intense activity in scientific societies would occupy all the leisure time available. But Waterhouse was remarkably active, both physically and mentally, and always had some interests in addition to those mentioned. About 1900 he was interested in the distribution of basic volcanic dykes in the Triassic Hawkesbury Sandstone Series in the Sydney district; for many years he collected Mollusca, of which his mother presented a fine collection to the Australian Museum; and he was a keen philatelist. He was a director of EH. Vickery & Sons Pty. Ltd. for about fifteen years, and also took an active part in the management of The Coal Cliff Collieries Ltd., of which he was a director for many years and Chairman of Directors 1938-1948. From 1943 onwards his health compelled him to relinquish gradually his scientific activities and this was a source of great disappointment to him. He did rally for a period in 1946-47 when it became known that butterfly collections in a number of Australian museums had been subject to a series of ingenious thefts. The collections affected included that which he had presented to the Australian Museum. Most of the specimens were recovered and from his personal knowledge of the specimens in his collection and the localities from which they came he was able to remedy much of the confusion resulting from changed locality labels and thus render a final important contribution to his own special subject. This task would have proved impossible were it not for the excellence of the Register of the collection, in which details of every specimen in the collection were meticulously recorded. In 1914 he was rejected for military service, but for a period during World War I he put aside his entomological work and devoted his spare time to war service in his own district. He was instrumental in organizing the Roseville Rifle Club and as Captain of the Club drilled and marched over hill and road, exchanging his butterfly net and other collecting paraphernalia for a rifle. Waterhouse was in the widest and truest sense a very learned man. Apart from science the breadth of his learning was amazing and his brain a storehouse of knowledge which was encyclopaedic. In his younger days he was deeply interested, among other things, in ancient history and always kept within easy reach his favourite volumes— the works of Bryce, Gibbon and Macaulay. Throughout his life he answered a continuous stream of questions coming from old and young alike. His questioners never failed to receive full and satisfying answers, except on those rare occasions when, if he did not know, he said so with conviction. It was axiomatic within his family and outside it MEMORIAL NOTICE. 273 that the information he gave would be precise and complete. He was a master of detail and his mental energy was tireless in seeking the truth. His knowledge, though profound, was unobtrusive, and his great learning intensified his natural humility. His contributions to Science, and particularly to Australian Science, extend far beyond the tangible results of his published work and his unsurpassed collection of Australian Lepidoptera. His membership of many scientific societies and the very active part he played in their affairs has already been mentioned. Quite exceptional and outstanding has been his influence on amateur collectors. He had an amazing capacity for instilling enthusiasm, as well as a knowledge of sound taxonomic methods and of collecting techniques, into many of those with whom he came in contact. It was seldom that he went on collecting trips unaccompanied by one or more enthusiasts, some youthful, some elderly, many of whom, because of his inspiration and early training, have themselves made important contributions to Australian entomology. He himself was gratified by the additions to his own butterfly collection donated by many of those whose interest in the subject had been stimulated by him. Till the last he encouraged their enthusiasm by keeping up a prolific correspondence with naturalists—both young and old—throughout Australia and in the United Kingdom. His letters reveal the painstaking care and exactitude with which he replied to all their questions and he never failed to enrich his replies by adding something of scientific value which he had alighted upon from his own observation and experiment. Although primarily interested in butterflies he collected vast numbers of insects of other groups. He possessed a seemingly innate discrimination of what was new or rare, and a large number of new species have been described by other workers using his material. He, as much as any other person in his time, was responsible for the maintenance of a high standard among amateur collectors and for a very great increase in their ranks. His kindly personality and the high esteem in which his colleagues held him made it possible for him -to influence other collectors to leave their valuable collections of insects to various museums. Notable examples are the Turner collection of Lepidoptera which is now housed in the Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Canberra, and the Barnard collection of moths which went to the Queensland Museum. He died on 29th July, 1950, after a period of about seven years of continuous ill health. He is survived by his widow, two sons and two daughters; one son was killed on active service in New Guinea during World War II. A.B.W. A.J.N. List oF PUBLICATIONS BY G. A. WATERHOUSE. * 1897. The Genus Heteronympha in New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc: N.S.W., xxii, pt. 2: 240-243. The Life-History of Apaustus lascivia, Rosenstock. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxii, pt. 2: 244. The Rhopalocera of Lord Howe Island. Proc LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxii, pt. 2: 285-287. 1900. Descriptions of New Species of Australian Rhopalocera. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxv, Diteelecso =e 1902. Notes on Australian Rhopalocera: Lycaenidae. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, pt. 3: 331-342: 1903. Notes on Australian Rhopalocera: Lycaenidae. Part II. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, pt. 4: 648-653. Notes on Australian Rhopalocera: Lycaenidae. Part III. Revisional. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxXvili, pt. 1: 132-275. Descriptions and Notes of Australian Hesperidae, chiefly Victorian. Vict. Nat., xx: 52-57. Catalogue of the Rhopalocera of Australia. Mem. N.S.W. Naturalist’s Club, No. 1. 1904. On a New Species of Heteronympha and a new variety of Tisiphone abeona, Don. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, pt. 3: 466-468. : Notes on Hesperidae described by Mabille and reputed to be Australian. Vict. Nat., xxi, pt. 8: 109-110 (with R. E. Turner). * Wor this list we are indebted to Mr. A. Musgrave, of the Australian Museum, Sydney. 1907. 1908. 1909. iyyibale 1912. 1918. 1914. 1915. 1920. 1922. 1923. 1925. 1927. 1928. 1931. 1932. 1933. 1934. 1936. 1937. GUSTAVUS ATHOL, WATERHOUSE, Note on Libythea geoffroyi nicevillei, Olliff. Hnt. Month. Mag., xli: 13-14. Notes on Australian Rhopalocera: Lycaenidae. Part IV. Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, pt. 4: 798-804 (with R. E. Turner). The History of Papilio aegeus. Austr. Nat., i: 91-99. A new form of Papilio for Australia. Vict. Nat., xxv: 118-120. Some Dimboola Butterflies. Vict. Nat., xxiv: 165-166 (with G. Lyell). New and rare Australian Butterflies of the Genus Miletus. Vict. Nat., xxvi: 110-116 (with G. Lyell). The Identity of the Butterfly Miletus euclides, Miskin. Vict. Nat., xxvii: 157-158. With the Winter Butterflies of North Queensland. Austr. Nat., ii: 52-56. The Life-History of Wiletus hecalius, Miskin. Austr. Nat., ii: 78-79. A second Account of the Winter Butterflies of North Queensland. Austr. Nat., ii: 126-129. Descriptions of and Notes on some Australian Hesperidae. Vict. Nat., xxviii: 223-228 (with G. Lyell). Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part V. Proc. LINN. Soc N.S.W., xxxvii, pt. 4:698-702 (Part IV in collaboration with R. E. Turner). Preliminary Notes on Myrmecophilus Lycaenid Larvae. Austr. Nat., ii: 177-178. Description of a New Lycaenid Butterfly, with Notes upon its Life-History. Vict. Nat., xxix: 156-160 (with G. Lyell). A Monograph of the Genus Tisiphone, Hiibner. Austr. Zool., i, pt. 1: 15-19. Lepidoptera. Suborder Rhopalocera. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., xxxviii. The Butterflies of Australia. Sydney. Further Notes on the Genus Tisiphone. Austr. Zool., i, pt. 2: 50-51. Descriptions of new forms of Butterflies from the South Pacific. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xlv, pt. 3: 468-471. Presidential Address. An account of some Breeding Experiments with the Satyrine Genus Tisiphone. Proc. LINN. Soa N.S.W., xlvii, pt. 1: i-xvii. Presidential Address. A further account of Breeding Experiments with the Satyrine Genus Tisiphone. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii, pt. 1: i-xxiv. Presidential Address. Preliminary list of the butterflies found in the National Park. Austr. Zool., iv, pt. 2: 38-42. Butterflies. The Illustr. Austr. Hncycl., i: 225-227. Australian Hesperidae. Part i. Notes and Descriptions of new forms. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lii, pt. 3: 275-2838. A Second Monograph of the Genus TVisiphone, Hiibner. Austr. Zool., v, pt. 3: 217-240. Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part VI. Proc. LInNn. Soc. N.S.W., liii, pt. 4: 401-412. Butterflies and Ants. Austr. Mus. Mag., iv, pt. 7: 219-221. Australian Hesperiidae. Part II. Notes and Descriptions of new forms. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lvii, pts. 3-4: 218-238. Notes on Australian Papilionidae. Part I. Papilio aegews, Donovan. Descriptions of a new female form and two aberrations. Austr. Zool., vii, pt. 3: 195-197. New Genera of Australian Hesperiidae and a New Subspecies. Austr. Zool., vii, pt. 3: 198-201. What Butterfly is That? A Guide to the Butterflies of Australia. Illustrated by Neville W. Cayley, F.R.Z.S. Angus & Robertson, Sydney. Australian Hesperiidae. Part III. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lvii, pts. 5-6: 409-410. Notes on the type specimens of Hesperiidae (Lepidoptera) in the Museums in Australia, with special reference to those in the South Australian Museum. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., v, pt. 1: 49-62. Australian Hesperiidae. Part IV. Notes and Descriptions of New Forms. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lviii, pts. 5-6: 461-466. Australian Hesperiidae. Part V. Notes and Description of a New Form. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lix, pts. 5-6: 410-415. Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part VII. Descriptions of New Races. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lix, pts. 5-6: 416-420. i Note on the Genus Xeniconympha Novickij (Lepid.). Proc. R. Ent. Soc. Lond., (B), v, dts ~—$) gale. Note on Hesperia lucanus Fabricius (Lepidoptera). Proc. R. Ent. Soc. Lond.,- (B), vi, Dt Ge Australian Hesperiidae. Part VI. Descriptions of New Subspecies. Proc. LINN. Soc. NESW, L938, xi Ipts, 1-2) 2=34" Australian Hesperiidae. Part VII. Notes on the Types and Type Localities. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixii, pts. 3-4:107-125. 4 On the Identity of the Butterfly known in Australia.as Heteronympha philerope Boisd., 1832. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 1937, lxii, pts. 5-6: 253-258. 1938. 1940. 1941. 1942. MEMORIAL NOTICE. 275 The Biology and Taxonomy of the Australasian Butterflies. Rpt. Austr. & N.Z. Ass. Adv. Sci., xxiii: 101-133. The Rothschild Collections. Aust. J. Sci., i, pt. 3: 99-100. Notes on Jones’ Icones (Lepidoptera). With footnotes and Appendix by Sir Edward B. Poulton. Proc. R. Ent. Soc. Lond., (A) xiii, pts. 1-3: 9-17. Some Additional Information on the Dates of Publication of Hewitson’s “Illustrations Exot. Butterflies’. J. Soc. Bibl. Nat. Hist., i, pt. 5: 143-144. Australian Hesperiidae. Part. VILE Descriptions of New Forms. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixiii, pts. 5-6: 451-452. Notes on Australian Butterflies in the Australian Museum. No. 1. Ree. Aust. Mus., Kx, pt. 3: 217-222. : Australian Hesperiidae, Part IX. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lxv, pts. 5-6: 568. The Small Cabbage White Butterfly. Austr. Mus. Mag., vii, pt. 8: 255-256. Butterflies attracted by Brilliant Colours. Austr. Mus. Mag., vii, pt. 9: 323-324. Butterflies and Ants. Austr. Mus. Mag., vii, pt. 10: 351-352. Australian Hesperiidae. Part X. On Hesperilla donnysa Hewitson, 1868. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixvi, pts. 3-4: 215-218. Notes on Australian Lycaenidae. Part VIII. On Ogyris zosine Hew. and O. genoveva Hew. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., Ixvi, pts. 3-4: 234-238. Notes on Australian Butterflies in the Australian Museum, No. 2. Rec. Austr. Mus., xxi, pt. 2:122-125. 276 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I. A CHECK LIST OF THE AUSTRALIAN AND AUSTRO-MALAYAN THYNNIDAE. By K. E. W. Satter, Department of Zoology, The University of Sydney. [Read 25th November, 1953.] Synopsis. All systematic references to the Australian and Austro-Malayan Thynnids are listed; synonymy is based on the conclusions made by Rowland E. Turner in his numerous publications. He recognized 39 genera and approximately 480 species from this region. INTRODUCTION. Rowland E. Turner published his revision of this family in two parts during 1907 and 1908. This was followed in 1910 by his attempt to devise a suitable classification of the many species into subfamilies and genera. He then recognized three subfamilies, gave descriptions with keys of thirty-eight genera from Australia and listed the species in each genus. From 1910 to 1940 one new genus and more than a hundred new species were added by R. E. Turner and there were also notable contributions made by S. A. Rohwer (1910, 1925) and by Montet (1922). The authorship of the family Thynnidae was attributed to Erichson (1842) by Louis Agassiz (1842-1846); however, in the present paper, Shuckard (1840, 1841) is acknowledged as being the first to use the title ‘Family Thynnidae’”’, thus priority is credited here to Shuckard. The relationship of the Thynnid Wasps to their immediate allies, viz., the Brady- nobaenids, Myrmosids, Anthoboscids, Tiphiids, Myzinids and Methocids, was discussed by V. S. L. Pate in 1947. He considered that all such groups, together with the Thynnids, should rank as subfamilies of the Family Tiphiidae, hence on this basis Thynninae Pate is synonymous with Thynnidae Shuckard. The taxonomic category of family is retained in the present check list. Turner appears to recognize four hundred and eighty species, though it is doubtful whether all are valid. His authority is acknowledged here for the synonymy of the species listed and for their grouping into genera. This check list should be regarded as the first step towards a general monographic revision of the family Thynnidae and such a work is in preparation by the author. Family THYNNIDAE Shuckard, 1840. Family Thynnidae Shuckard, 1840, Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopaedia, 176-7: 405; Shuckard, 1841, Grey’s Journal of Expeditions: 470; Erichson, 1842, Fam. Spheges, Trib. Thynnidae, Arch. f. Naturgeschichte: 2538, 254; Erichson’s Bericht, 1842: 64, 1843: 86, 1844: 98; Louis Agassiz, 1842/1846 (F. Thynnidae Erichson), Nomenclator Zoologicus: 34; Lepeletier, 1845: Pl. 35; Ashmead, 1903: 95; Schulz, 1908: 451; Turner, 1910, Gen. Insectorum; Subfamily Thynninae, Pate, 1947: 118. Subfamily DIAMMINAE. Genus 1. Diamma Westwood. Subfamily RHAGIGASTERINAE Ashmead. 1. Dimorphothynnus Turner. 2. Rhagigaster Guérin. 3. Eirone Westwood. Subfamily THyNNINAR. 1. Ariphron EHErichson. 2. Tachynomyia Guérin. 3. Megalothynnus Turner. 4. Oncorhinothynnus, nn. 5. Psammothynnus Ashmead. 6. Phymatothynnus Turner. 7. Glaphyrothynnus Turner. 8. Aulacothynnus Turner. 9. Neozeleboria Rohwer. 10. Agriomyia Guérin. 11. Asthenothynnus Turner. 12. Leiothynnus Turner. 13. Aspido- BY K. E. W. SALTER. Pentti thynnus Turner. 14. Gymnothynnus Turner. 15. Epactiothynnus Turner. 16. Timeso- thynnus Turner. 17. Thynnoturneria Rohwer, 1910. 18. Acanthothynnus Turner. 19. Doratithynnus Turner. 20. Encopothynnus Turner. 21. Catocheilus Guérin. 22. Hemi- thynnus Ashmead. 23. Lophocheilus Guérin. 24. Macrothynnus Turner. 25. Thynnoides Guérin. 26. Hlidothynnus Turner. 27. Campylothynnus Turner. 28. Lestricothynnus Turner. 29. Belothynnus Turner. 30. Leptothynnus Turner. 31. Guérinius Ashmead. 32. Pogonothynnus Turner. 33. Zaspilothynnus Ashmead. 34. Thynnus Fabricius. 35. Iswaroides Ashmead. Subfamily 1. DiaAmMMINAE Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 212. Genus 1. DiamMa Westwood, 1835. Westwood, 1835: 53. Psamatha, Shuckard, 1837: 68. Tachypterus, Guérin, 1830/39: 217. Diamma, Guérin, 1830/39: 234. Psammatha, Westwood, 1844: 103. Tachypterus, Smith, 1859: 64. Diamma, Smith, 1859: 65. Trachypterus, D.T., 1897: 119. Diamma, Ashmead, 1903: 157; Turner, 1907: 212. 1. DIAMMA BICOLOR Westwood, 1835. Westwood, 1835: 53 (9) New Holland. Psamatha, Shuckard, 1837: 68 (dd). P. chalybea, Shuckard, 1837: 69 (¢), Pl. 8, f. 1. Diamma bicolor, Guérin, 1838/9: 235 (9). Tachypterus fasciatus, Guérin, 1830/9: 217 (g¢); Guérin, 1842: 3, Pl. 99, figs. 7-13 (¢). Psammatha chalybea, Westwood, 1844: 19-20, 102, Pl. 54, fig. 5 (¢). Tachypterus fasciatus, Smith, 1859: 64 (¢). JT. australis, Saussure, 1867: 109 (0), T. 2, f. 27. T. albopictus, Smith, 1868: 237 (¢). T. bicolor, D.T., 1897: 119 (¢). Diamma bicolor, Ashmead, 1903: 157 (g and @). T. bicolor, Schulz, 1906: 162 (g, 2). Diamma bicolor, Turner, 1907: 212 (¢, 2). T. fasciatus, Bequaert, 1926: 188. Sydney, N.S.W.; Melbourne, Vict.; Adelaide, S.A.; Tasmania. Subfamily 2. RHAGIGASTERINAE Ashmead, 1903. Ashmead, 1903: 156 and 97. Genus 1. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Enteles, Westwood, 1844: 148. Dimorphothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 5. Type species, Dimorphothynnus haemorrhoidalis (Guér.) (= Dimorphothynnus bicolor Westwood). 1. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS BARNARDI (Turner), 1907. Enteles barnardi, Turner, 1907: 246 (¢). Duaringa, Queensland. Type Species 2. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS BICOLOR (Westwood), 1844. Rhagigaster haemorrhoidalis, Guérin, 1842: Pl. 99, f. 1 and 2. Enteles bicolor, Westwood, 1844: 144 (°). Rhagigaster haemorrhoidalis, Westwood, 1844: 102, 105 (3); Guérin, 1845: 431. Thynnus zingerlei, D.T., 1897: 119 (¢). T. lecheri, D.T., 1897: 110 (3). Hnteles bicolor, Ashmead, 1903: 104. H. haemorrhoidalis, Turner, 1907: 242 (4, Q). Dimorphothynnus bicolor, Turner, 1916: 120. Rhagigaster haemorrhoidalis, Quiglia, 1948; 177. Perth, W. Aust. 3. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS CONJUGATUS (Turner), 1907. Enteles conjugatus, Turner, 1907: 243 (¢). Queensland. Type in Oxford Museum. 4, DIMORPHOTHYNNUS DECEPTOR (Smith), 1879. Thynnus deceptor, Smith, 1879: 169 (¢); D.T., 1897: 104 (¢). EHnteles deceptor, Turner, 1907: 245 (¢). N.W. Australia. 5. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS DIMIDIATUS (Smith), 1859. Rhagigaster dimidiatus, Smith, 1859: 62 (g, 2). Thynnus ottenthalii, D.T., 1897: 112 (g, 2), nec Halliday. Enteles dimidiatus, Turner, 1907: 244 (¢, 9). Sydney. STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE, I, bo =] [o/<) 6. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS FIMBRIATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus fimbriatus, Smith, 1859: 42 (9). Rhagigaster apicalis, Smith, 1859: 63 (o) (mec Guérin). Thynnus fimbriatus, D.T., 1897: 106 (9). T. ottonis, D.T., 1897: 112 (g). Enteles haemorrhoidalis, Turner, 1907: 242 (g, 9). Dimorphothynnus fimbriatus, Turner, 1916: 120. Perth, W.A.; Adelaide, S.A. 7. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS INTEGER (Fabricius), 1775. Thynnus integer, Fabricius, 1775, Syst. Hntom.: 360; Fabricius, 1781, Spec. Insect.: 457; Fabricius, 1787, Mantissa Ins.: 284; Gmelin Lin. 1799: 2739. Vespa integra, Christ, 1791: 228. T. integer, Fabricius, 1793, Entom. Syst.: 245; Fabricius, 1804, Syst. Piez.: 231; Donovan, 1805: Plate 41; Guérin, Duperrey, 1830/39, ii, 2: 229. Rhagigaster integer, Westwood, 1844: 105; Smith, 1859: 60. TT. integer, D.T., 1897: 109. Hnteles integer, Turner, 1907: p. 245. (¢) Probably Cooktown, Q. 8. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS MORIO (Westwood), 1844. Rhagigaster morio, Westwood, 1844: 105 (¢); Smith, 1859: 61 (¢). Thynnus serripes, Smith, 1859: 44 (2). Rhagigaster morio, Saussure, 1867: 114, Taf. 4, f. 67 (¢); Saussure, 1869: 58 (2). Thynnus morio, D.T., 1897: 111 (6, 2). T. serripes, D.T., 1897: 115 (9). Enteles morio, Turner, 1907: 246 (g, 2). Dimorphothynnus morio, Turner, 1910c: 6, Pl. 1, f. 8-11. Sydney. 9. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS SIMILLIMUS (Smith), 1865. Rhagigaster simillimus, Smith, 1865b: 390 (nec Smith, 1859) (¢). Thynnus wolframii, D.T., 1897: 119 (¢). Enteles simillimus, Turner, 1907: 244 (¢). Dimorpho- thynnus simillimus, Turner, 1910c: 6 (¢). North-west Australia. 10. DimMoRPHOTHYNNUS TESTACEIPES (Turner), 1907. Enteles testaceipes, Turner, 1907: 244 (¢). Dimorphothynnus testaceipes, Turner, 1910c: 6 (¢). Australia. Type in Oxford Museum. 11. DIMORPHOTHYNNUS TRUNCISCUTIS Turner, 1916. Turner, 1916: 121 (¢'). Brisbane. Genus. 2. RHAGIGASTER Guérin, 1842. -Guérin, 1830/39, Duperrey: 214 (R. unicolor, Port Jackson); Westwood, 1844, Arc. Ent., ii, 2: 104; Saussure, 1867, Reise d. Nov. Zool., ii, 1, Hym.: 110; Ashmead, 1903, Canad. Ent., xxxv, June: 157. Turner, 1907, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1907: 214. Rhytidogaster, Turner, 1907, ibid.: 229; Guérin, 1842: 2, Pl. 99, f. 2. Type species, Rhagigaster unicolor Guérin. 1. RHAGIGASTER ACULEATUS Saussure, 1867. Saussure, 1867: 113 (¢). Thynnus aculeatus, D.T., 1897: 101 (¢). Rhagigaster aculeatus,. Turner, 1907: 2385 (0). Sydney, Mittagong, N.S.W.; Victoria. R. st. acutangulus, Turner, 1907: 235 (g, 2). South Australia. R. aculeatus, Turner, 1910b: 264 (2). Woodford, N.S.W. 2. RHAGIGASTER ALEXIUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 230 (¢, 9). Cape York. 3. RHAGIGASTER ANALIS Westwood, 1844. Westwood, 1844: 106 (2). R&R. tristis, Smith, 1859: 61 (2). R. nitidus, Smith, 1859: 63 (2). Thynnus demattioi, D.T., 1897: 104 (9). TT. exneri, D.T., 1897: 106 (9). Rhagigaster analis, Turner, 1907: 225 (2); Turner, 19100: 260 (g and @ in cop.). Western Australia. 4. RHAGIGASTER APPROXIMATUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 219 (¢, 2). Cairns, Queensland. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 279 5. RHAGIGASTER ARUENSIS Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912: 533 (¢, 9). Aru Island. Type in B.M. 6. RHAGIGASTER AURICEPS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 220 (dg, 2). Cairns, Q’ld. 7. RHAGIGASTER BIDENS Saussure, 1867. Saussure, 1867: 112 (g). Thynnus semperi, D.T., 1897: 115 (¢). T. bidens, Schulz, 1906: 160 (¢).. Rhytidogaster bidens, Turner, 1907: 233 (¢, 9). JT. bidens, Turner, 1909: 140. Sydney (Coll. Froggatt). 8. RHAGIGASTER BREVIUSCULUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 236 (¢, 9). Mackay, Q’ld. 9. RHAGIGASTER CASTANEUS Smith, 1859. Smith, 1859: 63 (9); D.T., 1897: 103 (9); Turner, 1907: 234 (9); Turner, 1910): 263 (6), (¢, @ in cop.). South Perth, W. Aust. 10. RHAGIGASTER CINERELLUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 260 (¢). Cape York, Q’land. Type in Berlin Museum. 11. RHAGIGASTER COMPARATUS Smith, 1859. Smith, 1859: 69 (¢, 2). Rhagigaster rugosus, Smith, 1879: 176 (dg, nec 2). Thynnus comparatus, D.T., 1897: 104. TT. rugosus, D.T., 1897: 115. Rhagigaster comparatus, Turner; 1907: 238 (¢, 2). Adelaide; Melbourne. 12. RHAGIGASTER CONSANGUINEUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 240 (g, ¢). Albany, Western Australia. Types in Oxford Museum. : 118. RHAGIGASTER CORNUTUS Turner, Is Turner, 1907: 233 (¢). Australia. 14. RHAGIGASTER CORRUGATUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910b: 262 (¢, 2). Woodford, N.S.W. 15. RHAGIGASTER CRASSIPUNCTATUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 222 (¢, 2). Mackay, Q’land. 16. RHAGIGASTER DECEMBRIS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 177 (¢@). South Australia. 17. RHAGIGASTER DENTICULATUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 232 (0, 2). Mackay, Q’land. 18. RHAGIGASTER DISCREPANS (Turner), 1908. Fi iojaster discrepans, Turner, 1908: 254 (g, 9). Fremantle, W.A. 19. RHAGIGASTER DISSOCIATUS Turner, 1940. Turner, 1940: 102 (¢). Southern Cross, W. Aust. 20. RHAGIGASTER ELONGATUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 225 (¢). Queensland. Type in Oxford Museum. 21. RHAGIGASTER FULVIPENNIS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 224 (¢, 9). Cape York. 22. RHAGIGASTER FUSCIPENNIS Smith, 1879. ; Smith, 1879: 175 (g¢). Thynnus fuscipennis, D.T., 1897: 107 (¢). Rhagigaster gracilior, Turner, 1907: 223 (fg, 9). Mackay, Q. R. fuscipennis, Turner, 19100: 260::° ° 23. RHAGIGASTER IRACUNDUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 237 (4). Melbourne. 280 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 24. RHAGIGASTER INTERSTITIALIS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 261 (¢). Hermannsburg, Central Australia. 25. RHAGIGASTER JUBILANS Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 608 (¢). Borroloola, Northern Territory. Type in Victorian National Museum. 26. RHAGIGASTER LAEVIGATUS Smith, 1879. Smith, 1879: 176 (¢, 9). N.W. Aust. Thynnus levigatus, D.T., 1897: 110 (9, ¢). Rhagigaster laevigatus Turner, 1907: 226 (¢, 9); Turner, 1910c: Pl. 3, f. 59 and 60. Townsville, Q’land. 27. RHAGIGASTER LATISULCATUS Turner, 1911. Turner, 1911: 602 (¢, 9). Kuranda, Q’land. 28. RHAGIGASTER MANDIBULARIS Westwood, 1844. Westwood, 1844: 105 (4, 2), Pl. 74, 1 and 2; Smith, 1859: 61 (g). Thynnus mandibularis, D.T., 1897: 110 (¢, 9). Rhagigaster mandibularis, Turner, 1909: 131; Turner, 1910a: 7; Saussure, 1868: 112. Australia. 29. RHAGIGASTER NEPTUNUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 227 (¢). Port Essington, Victoria. Type in Oxford Museum. 30. RHAGIGASTER NIGRITULUS Turner, 1907. Rhagigaster fuscipennis, Turner, 1907: 218 (9, ¢) (nec Smith). Rhagigaster nigritulus, Turner, 19100: 260. Mackay, Queensland. 31. RHAGIGASTER NOVARAE Saussure, 1867. Saussure, 1867: 112 (¢); Hutton, 1881: 110 (¢). Thynnus heideri, D.T., 1897: 108 (g). T. novarae, Schulz, 1906: 160 (¢). Rhagigaster novarae, Turner, 1907: 228 (9). New Zealand. 32. RHAGIGASTER OBTUSUS Smith, 1859. Smith, 1859: 62 (¢). Adelaide; Turner, 1907: 226 (¢).. Adelaide. 33. RHAGIGASTER PINGUICULUS Turner, 1908. Turner, 1907: 238 (¢). Mackay, Q’land. 34. RHAGIGASTER PROTHORACICUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 239 (¢, 2). Mackay, Q’land. 85. RHAGIGASTER PUGIONATUS Saussure, 1867. Saussure, 1867: 113 (¢). Cumberland. Thynnus scalae, D.T., 1897: 115 (nec Guérin). Rhagigaster pugionatus, Turner, 1907: 234 (2). Tasmania; Turner, 1915)d: 538. Cumberland, N.S.W. 36. RHAGIGASTER REFLEXUS Smith, 1859. Smith, 1859: 62 (¢); D.T., 1897: 114 (g); Turner, 1907: 226 (¢). Swan River, W.A. 37. RHAGIGASTER RUGIFER Turner, 1937. Turner, 1937: 150 (3g, 2). Dongarra, W.A. 38. RHAGIGASTER THYMETES Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 179. Australia. 39. RHAGIGASTER TRISTIS Smith, 1859. Smith, 1859: 63 (¢). Thynnus hammerlei, D.T., 1897: 108 (¢). Rhagigaster tristis, Turner, 1907: 232 (¢). Western Australia. 40. RHAGIGASTER TUMIDUS Turner, 1908. Turner, 1907: 2386 (¢, 2). Melbourne; Swan River; Tempe, N.S.W. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 281 41. Type Species. RHAGIGASTER UNICOLOR Guérin, 1838. Guérin, 1838: 214 (¢). Diamma ephippiger, Guérin, 1838: 235 (2); Guérin, 1842: eel (synonymy), Pl. 103, f. 1-6. Thynnus unicolor, Klug, 1842: 23. Rhagigaster uwnicolor, “Westwood, 1844: 105 (¢). Diamma ephippiger, Westwood, 1844: 105 (2). Rhagigaster mandibularis, Westwood, 1844: 105, Pl. 74,f.1=¢,f.2=9. R. binotatus, Westwood, 1844: 105 (2). &. unicolor, Smith, 1859: 61 (¢). R. mandibularis, Smith, 1859: 61 (¢). R. binotatus, Smith, 1859: 61 (2); Saussure, 1867: 111 (¢, 9). R. mandibularis, Saussure, 1867: 111 (¢). R&. unicolor, Saussure, 1867: 111 (¢, 9), T. 4, f. 66. R. aethiops, Smith, 1879: 175 (¢), nec Klug. _R. uberhorstii, D.T., 1897: 117 (¢). R. binotatus, D.T., 1897: 102 (2). R&R. mandibularis, D.T., 1897: 110 (9, ¢). R. unicolor, D.T., 1897: 117 (9, 8); Ashmead, 1903: 157 (9, g); Turner, 1907: 217 (synonymy); subspec. mandibularis, Turner, 1907: 217; subspec. ephippiger, Turner, 1907: 218; subspec. lyelli, Turner, 1910): 260. R. unicolor, Turner, 1910c: 6, Pl. 1, f. 20; Guiglia, 1948: 177. N.S.W.; Victoria; South Australia; Western Australia. 42. RHAGIGASTER (?) PYxIDATUS (Turner), 1908. Rhytidogaster pyxidatus, Turner, 1908: 255 (¢). Western Australia. 43. RHAGIGASTER DEPRAEDATOR Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910a: 107 (¢). Cooktown, Q. Type in Hungarian National Museum. Genus 3. HErrone Westwood, 1844. Aelurus, Klug, 1840/2: 42 (nec Aelurus Smith). Hirone, Westwood, 1844: 144. Aelurus (pars) Turner, 1907: 247; Saussure, 1868: 163. Aelurus (Lepteirone), Turner, 1907: 249; Aelurus (Hirone), Turner, 1907: 258. Hirone, Ashmead, 1903: 157; Turner, MONO CIES: Type species, Hirone dispar Westwood. 1. EIRONE ARENARIA (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone arenaria, Turner, 1907: 253 (¢). Victoria. 2. EIRONE ALBOCLYPEATA Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 63 (¢, 2). Yallingup, W.A. 38. EITRONE ALICIAE Turner, 1937. Turner, 1937: 148 (¢, 2). Tambourine Mt., Queensland. 4, HIRONE BASIMACULATA Turner, 1919. Turner, 1919: 170 (¢). Hobart, Tas. Type, S.A. Museum, No. 10’ 10800. 5. EIRONE BRUMALIS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 182 (#'). Hirone brumalis, subspec. denticulatus, Montet, 1922: 184 (Jd). 6. HIRONE CAROLI (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone caroli, Turner, 1907: 252 (¢). Victoria. Hirone caroli, Turner, 1910c: 9 (g). 7. HIRONE CASTANEICEPS Turner, 1907. Gurner, 19072 269) (gp Purner, 1910¢: Pl 3st) ol 4). Mackay, @: 8. EIRONE CELSISSIMA Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 609 (g, 9); Turner, 19150: 540 (g). Mt. Wellington, Tasmania. 9. HIRONE coMES (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone comes, Turner, 1907: 255 (¢). Victoria. Hirone comes, Turner, UBUOES f). 10. EIRONE CRASSICEPS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 267 (¢). Cape York, Q. 11. EIRONE CUBITALIS (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone cubitalis, Turner, 1907: 257 (g, 2). Victoria. Type in Coll. Froggatt. Ww bo co bo STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 12. Type Species. ErRoNE DISPAR Westwood, 1844. Westwood, 1844: 144, Pl. 82, (¢) f. 5, (9) f. 6. Thynnus (Hirone) dispar, Smith, 1859: 41 (gf, 2). (2?) TZ. (Agriomyia) brevicornis, Smith, 1859: 39 (¢). TT. dispar, D.T., 1897: 105 (¢). TT. brevicornis, D.T., 1897: 1038 (¢). Hirone dispar, Turner, 1907: 260 (synonymy); Ashmead, 1903: 157; Turner, 1915b: 540. Adelaide, S. Aust. 13. ETRONE ExILIS Turner, 1915. Turner, 19150: 539 (¢). Haglehawk Neck, Tasmania. 14. ETRONE FALLAX (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) fallax, Smith, 1859: 35 (¢). T. fallax, D.T., 1897: 106 (¢). Lepteirone fallax, Turner, 1907: 256 (2). Adelaide, S. Aust. 15. EIRONE FERRUGINEICEPS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 268 (¢). Sydney. 16. ETRONE FERRUGINEICORNIS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 265 (8), Pl. xxxi, fig. 3; Hermannsburg, Central Australia. Turner, 1915a: 64 (2). 17. EIRONE FULVICOSTALIS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 263 (0, 2). Mackay, Q. 18. EIRONE GRANDICEPS (Turner), 1907. Aelurus, Klug, 1840/1842: 42, nec Aelurus Smith. Aelurus grandiceps, Turner, 1907: 248 (3g, 9). Sydney. Hirone grandiceps, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 1, fig. 15. 19. EIRONE ICHNEUMONIFORMIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) ichneumoniformis, Smith, 1859: 39 (¢). T. ichneumoniformis, D.T., 1897: 108. Lepteirone ichneumoniformis, Turner, 1907: 252 (¢, 9). H. ichneumoni- formis, Turner, 1915b: 540. Melbourne. 20. EIRONE INCONSPICUA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 262 (¢). Cairns, Q. 21. EITRONE LEAI Turner, 1915. Turner, 19150: 540 (4). Waratah, Tas. 22. EIRONE LUCIDA (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) lucidus, Smith, 1859: 36 (¢). T. lucidus, D.T., 1897: 110. Eirone lucida, Turner, 1907: 266 (¢); Turner, 19150: 540 (2). Eagle Hawk Neck, Tasmania. 28. EIRONE LUCIDULA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 266 (¢, 2); Turner, 1910c: Pl. 3, figs. 62 and 63. Wagga, N.S.W.; Victoria; South Aust.; Mackay, Q. 24. ETRONE MAJOR Turner, 1919. Turner, 1919: 171 (¢). Forest Reefs, between Bathurst and Orange, N.S.W. Type in South Australian Mus., No. I. 10801. 25. EIRONE MARGINICOLLIS Turner, 1911. Turner, 19110: 604 (¢, 9). Port Darwin. 26. EIRONE MONTIVAGA Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 266 (4, 2). Woodford, N.S.W. 27. EIRONE MUTABILIS Turner, 1908. Turner, 19086: 80 (¢). Adelaide River, Northern Territory. 28. EIRONE oPpAcA (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone opaca, Turner, 1907: 255 (4). Victoria. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 285 29. EITRONE OSCULANS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 264 (¢). Mackay, Queensland. 30. EIRONE PARCA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 262 (¢, 2). Mackay, Queensland. 31. EIRONE PSEUDOSEDULA (Turner), 1907. Lepteirone pseudosedula, Turner, 1907: 251 (¢). Adelaide. 32. EIRONE RUFICORNIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) ruficornis, Smith, 1859: 34 (¢), nec Guérin. T. haerdtli, D.T., 1897: 108. Hirone ruficornis, Turner, 1907: 265 (¢). Swan River, W.A.; Turner, -19100: 265 (9). Claremont, W.A. 33. EIRONE RUFICRUS (Turner), 1907. Aelurus ruficrus, Turner, 1907: 249 (¢@). Kenthurst, N.S.W. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 34. EIRONE RUFOPICTA (Smith), 1879. Thynnus rufopictus, Smith, 1879: 159 (¢); D.T., 1897: 115 (¢). Lepteirone rufopicta, Turner, 1907: 251 (¢). Adelaide; Melbourne. 35. EIRONE RUFODORSATA Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 64 (¢). Herberton, N. Queensland. 36. HEIRONE SCHIZORHINA Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 264 (¢). N.S.W. Type in Berlin Mus. 37. EIRONE SCUTELLATA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 265 (3, 2). Mackay, Q., Cape York, Queensland. 38. EIRONE SUBACTA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 254 (g, 2). Adelaide. Types in Oxford Univ. Museum. 39. EKIRONE SUBPETIOLATA Turner, 1916. Turner, 1916: 122 (¢). Brisbane, Q’land. 40. EIRONE TENEBROSA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 261 (¢, 9). Melbourne. Types in Oxford Museum. 41. EIRONE TENUIPALPA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 260 (¢, 2). Mackay, Q. 42. EKIRONE TRISTIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) tristis, Smith, 1859: 34 (¢). YT. tristis, D.T., 1897: 117. Lepteirone tristis, Turner, 1907: 256. Australia. 43. EIRONE TUBERCULATA (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Hirone) tuberculatus, Smith, 1859: 41 (¢, 9). T. tuberculatus, D.T., 1897; 117 (9, g). Hirone tuberculata, Turner, 1907: 265 (g, 9). Lower Plenty, Victoria. 44, HIRONE VITRIPENNIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Hirone) vitripennis, Smith, 1859: 41 (¢, 2). T. vitripennis, D.T., 189T: 118 (9, g); Turner, 1907: 264 (g). Lower Plenty, Victoria. (Type appears lost.) Subfamily THYNNINAE Ashmead. Subfamily Thynninae, Ashmead, 1903: 96, 97; Turner, 1907: 213 (part); (nec Pate, 1947: 116). aime Genus 1. ArrpHRON Hrichson, 1842. Erichson, 1842: 264 (9); Smith, 1859: 58; Ashmead, 1903: 157 (2); Turner, 1907: 269 (g, 2); Turner, 1910c: 26 (¢, 9). Type species, Ariphron bicolor Hrichson, 1842. 284 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN TEYNNIDAE, I, 1. Type Species. ARIPHRON BICOLOR Erichson, 1842. Erichson, 1842: 266, T. 5, fig. 8, 8a. (9); Westwood, 1844: 146 (2); Smith, 1859: 58 (2), Pl. 3, fig. 18. Thynnus bicolor, D.T., 1897: 102 (9). Ariphron bicolor, Turner, 1907: 271 (9). A. rigidulus, Turner, 1907: 274 (g). A. rigidulus and bicolor, Turner, 1910: 26, Pl. 3, figs. 64 and 65. A. bicolor, Turner, 1913: 610 (g, @ in cop.); Turner, 1915b: 541; Rohwer, 1925: 415. A. bicolor subspec. propodealis, Rohwer, 1925: 415 (2). A. bicolor, Erichson, 1844: 99; Ashmead, 1903: 157. 2. ARIPHRON BLANDULUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 273 (¢, 2). Berwick, Vic. Types in Coll. Froggatt. 3. ARIPHRON ExcIsuS Turner, 1909. Turner, 1909: 185 (2). South Australia. 4. ARIPHRON HOSPES Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 272 (¢). Australia. Type in Oxford Museum. 5. ARIPHRON NUDULUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 274 (g, 2). Tweed River, N.S.W. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 6. ARIPHRON PALLIDULUS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 276 (¢). Cairns, Queensland. 7. ARIPHRON PAUSERIS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 197 (¢). Sydney. 8. ARIPHRON PETIOLATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) petiolatus, Smith, 1859: 36 (¢). T. petiolatus, D.T., 1897: 113 (¢). Ariphron petiolatus, Turner, 1907: 271 (¢); Turner, 1910c: 26, Pl. 1, f. 19; Turner, 1913: 610 (¢); Hacker, 1913: 98 (¢). Cairns, Queensland; Hunter River, N.S.W.; Melbourne, Victoria. 9. ARIPHRON RIxXOSUS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus rixosus, Smith, 1879: 168 (¢); D.T., 1897: 114 (¢). Ariphron rizxosus, Turner, 1907: 274 (¢). Champion Bay, W. Aust. 10. ARIPHRON TRYPHONOIDES (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) tryphonoides, Smith, 1859: 34 (g), 68 (9). T. tryphonoides, D.T., 1897: 117 (g, 9). Ariphron tryphonoides, Turner, 1907: 275 (dg, 9). Adelaide, S. Aust.; Victoria. 11. ARIPHRON vAGULUS (Turner), 1907. Thynnus vagulus, Turner, 1907: 271 (¢). Victoria. Genus 2. TACHYNOMYIA Guérin, 1842. Guérin, 1842: 6 (nec Ashmead). Aelurus, Westwood, 1844: 122 (nec Klug); Smith, 1859: 53. Pseudaelurus, Ashmead, 1903: 99. Tachynomyia, Turner, 1907: 276; Turner, 1910c: 27; Rohwer, 1910a: 346; Saussure, 1868: 124. Type species, Tachynomyia abdominalis Guérin. 1. Type species. TACHYNOMYIA ABDOMINALIS (Guérin), 1842. Agriomyia (Tachynomyia) abdominalis, Guér., 1842: 5 (¢). A. (Tachynomyia) spinolae, Guér., 1842: 6 (¢). Thynnus fervidus, Hrichson, 1842: 263 (¢). Aelurus abdominalis, Westwood, 1844: 122 (¢); Smith, 1859: 53 (¢). Thynnus abdominalis, D.T., 1897: 100 (¢). Tachynomyia spinolae, Ashmead, 1903: 99 (3b). Tachynomyia abdominalis, Turner, 1907: 279 (Q); Turner, 1910c: 27, Pl. 1, f. 16 (g, 9). T. spinolae, Rohwer, 1910a: 346. T. abdominalis, Turner, 1915b: 541. Agriomyia abdomindalis, Guiglia, 1948: 176. A. spinolae, Guiglia, 1948: 176; Guérin, Duperrey, 1838: 229. Victoria; Tasmania. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 285 2. TACHYNOMYIA ABSTINENS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 284 (4). Victoria. 3. TACHYNOMYIA ADUSTA (Smith), 1859. Thynnus adustus, Smith, 1859: 48. Aelurus pilosulus, Smith, 1859: 56. TJ. adustus,. D.T., 1897: 101. Thynnus pilosulus, D.T., 1897: 113. Tachynomyia adusta, Turner, 1907: 286. Tachynomyia pilosula, Turner, 1907: 285. TT. adusta, Turner, 1909: 136; Turner, 1910c: 27 (2). Victoria and New South Wales. 4. TACHYNOMYIA AGILIS (Smith), 1865. Aelurus agilis, Smith, 18650: 390 (¢). Thynnus wildaueri, D.T., 1897: 118 (2) (nec Smith). Tachynomyia agilis, Turner, 1907: 284 (¢). Swan River, W. Aust. 5. TACHYNOMYIA ANTHRACINA (Smith), 1879. Aelurus anthracinus, Smith, 1879: 174 (8, 2). Thynnus mulleri, D.T., 1897: 111 (2, 6). Tachynomyia anthracina, Turner, 1907: 287 (¢, 2); Turner, 1910c: Pl. 3, figs. 66 and 67. 6. TACHYNOMYIA AURICOMATA Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 268 (¢). Endeavour River, Queensland (?) or Victoria. Type in Berlin Museum. e 7. TACHYNOMYIA AURIFRONS (Smith), 1859. Aelurus aurifrons, Smith, 1859: 54 (¢). Thynnus aurifrons, D.T., 1897: 102 (3); Tachynomyia aurifrons, Turner, 1907: 285 (g%); Turner, 1913: 611 (2) (¢, 2 in cop.). Albany, W. Aust. 8. TACHYNOMYIA BARBATA (Smith), 1859. Aelurus barbatus, Smith, 1859: 57 (¢, 9). Thynnus barbatus, D.T., 1897: 102 (9, ¢). Tachynomyia barbata, Turner, 1907: 290 (¢, 9). Australia. The type appears to be lost. 9. TACHYNOMYIA BASALIS (Smith), 1859. Aelurus basalis, Smith, 1859: 55, T. 3, f. 6 (¢). Thynnus sennhoferi, D.T., 1897: 115 (¢). Tachynomyia basalis, Turner, 1907: 281 (¢). Australia. 10. TACHYNOMYIA COMATA (Smith), 1864. Aelurus comatus, Smith, 1864: 27 (¢). Thynnus comatus, D.T., 1897: 103 (¢)- Tachynomyia comata, Turner, 1910a: 122. Waigiou, Malaya. - 11. TacHYNOMYIA COMBUSTA (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) combustus, Smith, 1859: 32 (¢). Thynnus combustus, Dit, 1897: 104 (¢). Tachynomyia combusta, Turner, 1907: 285 (¢). Moreton Bay, Queensland. 12. TACHYNOMYIA CONCOLOR Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 280 (¢), (2 unknown). Berwick, Victoria. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 13. TACHYNOMYIA DISJUNCTA Turner, 1910. Turner, 19106: 267 (g, 2). Perth, W.A. (¢, 2 in cop.). 14. TACHYNOMYIA EVELINAE Turner, 1940. Turner, 1940: 95 (¢). Mondo, Papua. 15. TACHYNOMYIA FASCIPENNIS Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 288 (g, 2). Cairns, Q’ld. 16. TACHYNOMYIA FERVENS Smith, 1859. Aelurus fervens, Smith, 1859: 58 (¢). Thynnus pernteri, D.T., 1897: 113 (2). Tachynomyia fervens, Turner, 1907: 284; Turner, 1912: 534 (9). Woodford, N.S.W.; Brisbane, Queensland; Victoria; South Australia. 5 17. TACHYNOMYIA FLAVOPICTA (Ritsema), 1876. Aelurus flavopictus, Ritsema, 1876: 185 (¢). Aru. Thynnus seemulleri, D.T., 1897: 115. Tachynomyia flavopicta, Turner, 1907: 289 (¢, 9). Mackay, Q’land (0, 9 in cop.) ; Cairns, Cape York, Q’land; Turner, 1940: 92. Cyclops Mt., Dutch New Guinea. STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 18. TACHYNOMYIA FRAGILIS (Smith), 1865. Aelurus fragilis, Smith, 1865a: 78 (¢). Thynnus fragilis, D.T., 1897: 106 (¢). Tachynomyia fragilis, Turner, 1907: 290 (0). Morty Island. IMBELLIS Turner, 1908. 19. TACHYNOMYIA Turner, 1908: 254 (4). Perth, W.A. 20. TACHYNOMYIA INSULARIS (Smith), 1864. Thynnus insularis, Smith, 1864: 26 (9). Mysol, Malaya. D.T., 1897: 109 (Q). ‘Turner, 1907: 290 (9). 21. TACHYNOMYIA MACULIVENTRIS Turner, 1915: Turner, 1915a: 63 (4). Cunderdin, W.A. 22. TACHYNOMYIA MEGACEPHALA Turner, 1909. Turner, 1909: 137 (¢). Cape York, Q’land. TACHYNOMYIA MOCSARYI (see below, No. 33). 23. TACHYNOMYIA MOERENS (Westwood), 1844. 53- (d). Aelurus moerens, Westwood, 1844: 124 (¢). A. incanus, Smith, 1859: T. moerens, Turner, 1908: 286 (¢). Shoalhaven, N.S.W.; A. moerens, Smith, 1859: 53. Wictoria. 24. TACHYNOMYIA OBLITERATA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 282 (4). S. Aust. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 25. TACHYNOMYIA PARADELPHA Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 281 (4). Victoria. 26. TACHYNOMYIA PUNCTATA (Smith), 1859. Aelurus dentatus, Smith, 1859: 57 (¢, 9) Thynnus punctatus, Smith, 1859: 44 (9). {nec Fab.). A. incanus, Smith, 1859: 69 (9 nec g). Thynnus kaltenbrunneri, D.T., 1897: Adelaide, S.A. 109. Tachynomyia punctata, Turner, 1907: 283 (3, 9). 27. TACHYNOMYIA RUBELLA (Smith), 1859. Thynnus friedrichii, D.T., 1897: 107 (¢). Aelurus rubellus, Smith, 1859: 56 (¢). Tachynomyia rubella, Turner, 1907: 281 (¢). Lower Plenty, Victoria. 28. TACHYNOMYIA SEDULOIDES Turner, 1907. Turner, 1907: 283 (¢). Berwick, Victoria. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 29. TACHYNOMYIA SENEX (Smith), 1859. Aelurus senex, Smith, 1859: 54 (¢). Thynnus schroederi, D.T., 1897: 115 (dg). Tachynomyia senex, Turner, 1907: 282 (¢); Turner, 1910c: 28, Pl. 1, fig. 18. Wagga, N.S.W.; Melbourne, Vic. 30. TACHYNOMYIA SUBFRAGILIS Turner, 1940. Turner, 1940a: 95 (¢). Kokoda, Papua. 31. TACHYNOMYIA VOLATILIS (Smith), 1868. Aelurus volatilis, Smith, 1868: 237 (¢) (nec 1859). Thynnus mayri, D.T., 1897: 111 {o). Tachynomyia volatilis, Turner, 1907: 284. South Australia. 32. TACHYNOMYIA VULPINA (Smith), 1859. Aelurus vulpinus, Smith, 1859: 54 (¢) (mec Klug, 1842). TJ. vulpina, Turner, 1909; 136 (¢) (nec T. moerens, Turner, 1907: 286). N.S.W. and Victoria. 33. TACHYNOMYIA MOCSARYI Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910a: 108 (¢). Mt. Victoria, N.'S.W. Type in Hung. Nat. Mus. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 287 Genus 3. MErGALOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus, Auctorum. Megalothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 28. Type species, Megalothynnus klugii (Westwood). 1. Type Species. MEGALOTHYNNUS KLUGII (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus kluggii, Westwood, 1844: 140, Pl. 82, f. 1 (¢). T. gravidus, Westwood, 1844: 141 (9); D.T., 1897: 107 (9, ¢). T. friedrichii, D.T., 1897: 107 (3g, 9). T. (Macro- thynnus) friederici, Turner, 1908: 196 (g, 2). Megalothynnus klugii, Turner, 1910c: 28 (dg, 2). T. gravidus Turner, 1909: 140 (2). Swan River, W. Aust. 2. MEGALOTHYNNUS POULTONI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Macrothynnus) poultoni, Turner, 1908: 197 (¢). Megalothynnus poultoni, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 2, fig. 46. Champion Bay, W. Aust. Genus 4. ONCORHINOTHYNNUS, nom. nov. Oncorhinus, Shuckard, 1841: 470; Erichson, 1843: Bericht, 86; Westwood, 1844: 103; Smith, 1859: 65; Ashmead, 1903: 157; Turner, 1907: 213; Turner, 1910c: 29. As the generic name Oncorhinus of Shuckard is preoccupied by the generic name Oncorhinus of Schonherr (1833), Family Curculionidae, Oncorhinus xanthospilus is left without a valid generic name, consequently the new name Oncorhinothynnus is. proposed. Type species, Oncorhinothynnus xanthospilus (Shuckard). See further, Hagen, 1862-3, and Horn and Schenkling, 1928-1929. Type species. ONCORHINOTHYNNUS XANTHOSPILUS (Shuckard), 1841. Oncorhinus xanthospilus, Shuckard, 1841: 471 (¢); Westwood, 1844: 103 (¢); Smith, 1859: 65 (¢), Pl. 3, fig. 15. Thynnus sxanthospilus, D.T., 1897: 119 (6). Oncorhinus xanthospilus, Turner, 1907: 214 (¢); Turner, 19100: 283 (¢, 2 in cop.), Pl. 31, f. 7 (9); Turner, 1910c: Pl. 3, fig. 74 (¢); Erichson, 1843: Bericht, 86. South Perth, W. Aust. ns Genus 5. PsamMoTHYNNUS Ashmead, 1903. Ashmead, 1903, xxxv, April: 102; Turner, 1908, xxxiii, March: 96; Turner, 1910c, Fase. 105: 29. Type species, Psammothynnus depressus (Westwood). 1. Type Species. PSAMMOTHYNNUS DEPRESSUS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Agriomyia) depressus, Westwood, 1844: 107 (¢, 2), Pl. 74, fig. 5 (¢), 6 (2). King George Sound; Smith, 1859: 23. (?) Thynnus trisulcatus, Smith, 1859: 45 (2). Zeleboria depressa, Saussure, 1867: 131. Thynnus depressus, D.T., 1897: 105 (2, gd). Psammothynnus depressus, Ashmead, 1903: 102 (¢), 106 (2). Thynnus (Psammothynnus) depressus, Turner, 1908: 97 (synonymy). Psammothynnus depressus, Turner, 1910c: 29; Turner, 19156: 543. Albany, W. Aust.; Hobart, Tasmania. 2. PSAMMOTHYNNUS FULVOPILOSUS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus fulvopilosus, Smith, 1879: 160 (¢, 2). Rhagigaster rugosus, Smith, 1879: 176 (9, nec go). T. fulvopilosus, D.T., 1897: 107. T. rugosus, D.T., 1897: 115. T. (Psammo- thynnus) fulvopilosus, Turner, 1908: 97 (g¢, 2) (synonymy). Adelaide, S. Aust. 3. PSAMMOTHYNNUS KERSHAWI Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 613 (¢). King Island, Bass St. Type in Victorian National Mus. 4, PSAMMOTHYNNUS RUBRICANS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 60 (g¢). Yallingup, South-west Australia. 5. PSAMMOTHYNNUS (?) TRISULCATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus trisulcatus, Smith, 1859: 45 (9). South Australia. 288 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, Genus 6. PHYMATOTHYNNUS Turner, 1908. Thynnus, subgenus Phymatothynnus, Turner, 1908: 98. Phymatothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 30. Type species, Phymatothynnus monilicornis’ (Smith). 1. PHYMATOTHYNNUS ARATUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Phymatothynnus) aratus, Turner, 1908: 94 (6, 2). Phymatothynnus aratus, Turner, 19400: 99 (g, 2). Mittagong, N.S.W.; Tambourine Mt., S.H. Queensland. 2. PHYMATOTHYNNUS DERELICTUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 19150: 542 (¢, 9). Haglehawk Neck; Mt. Wellington, Tas. 3. Type Species. PHYMATOTHYNNUS MONILICORNIS (Smith), 1859. ; Thynnus (Agriomyia) monilicornis, Smith, 1859: 39 (¢, 2). TT. monilicornis, D.T., 1897: 111 (9, ¢). Phymatothynnus monilicornis, Turner, 1908: 938 (6, 2 in cop.); Turner, 19150: 542. Melbourne, Vic.; Tas.; Bombala, N.S.W. 4. PHYMATOTHYNNUS PYGIDIALIS Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 611 (¢, 9). Melbourne. Type in Vict. Nat. Mus. 5. PHYMATOTHYNNUS PYGIDIOPHORUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 62, Pl. 1, figs. 13-14. (, 2 in cop.). 6. PHYMATOTHYNNUS TONSORIUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 61 (¢, 9 in cop.). Yallingup, S.W. Australia. 7. PHYMATOTHYNNUS Victor Turner, 1940. Turner, 1940: 100 (¢, 9 in cop.). Dongarra, W. Aust. 8. PHYMATOTHYNNUS ZENIS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 200 (¢). Australia. 9. PHYMATOTHYNNUS (?) DISTINCTUS (Guérin), 1842. Lophocheilus distinctus, Guérin, 1842: 12, Pl. 108, figs. 14-15 (¢). Thynnus (Lopho- cheilus) distinctus, Smith, 1859: 40 (¢). T. (Phymatothynnus) distinctus, Turner, 1908: 95. Lophonocheilus distinctus, Guiglia, 1948: 176. Australia. 10. PHYMATOTHYNNUS (?) NITIDUS Smith, 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) nitidus, Smith, 1859: 30 (¢). TT. nitidus, D.T., 1897: 112. Phymatothynnus nitidus, Turner, 1908: 96 (¢). Adelaide and Perth. P. (?) nitidus, Turner, 1910: 269 (2). Claremont, W.A. Genus 7. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS Turner, 1908. Zeleboria, Saussure (pars), 1867: 131; Ashmead, 1903: 102. Thynnus, subgenus Glaphyrothynnus, Turner, 1908: 108. Glaphyrothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 31. Zeleboria Saussure, Rohwer, 1910a: 347. Rohwer, 1910: “Thynnus carinatus Smith and Thynnus xanthorrhoei Smith, the genotypes of Zeleboria and Glaphyrothynnus respectively, are congeneric so Glaphyro- thynnus Turner is a synonym of Zeleboria Saussure.” Type species as designated by Turner, Glaphyrothynnus xanthorrhoei (Smith). 1. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS CARINATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus carinatus, Smith, 1859: 29 (¢). JZeleboria carinata, Saussure, 1867: 131 (g, 2). Thynnus carinatus, D.T., 1897: 103 (g, 2). T. (Glaphyrothynnus) carinatus, Turner, 1908: 111 (¢, 2). Glaphyrothynnus carinatus, Turner, 19100: 272. T. (Zeleboria) carinatus, Ashmead, 1903: 102, 106; Rohwer, 1910a: 347. Queensland; N.S.W.; South Aust.; W. Aust. : 2. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS CONTIGUUS Turner, 1908. Thynnus (Glaphyrothynnus) contiguus, Turner, 1908: 109 (¢). Shoalhaven, N.S.W. Type in Coll. Froggatt. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 289 3. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS FLAVESCENS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) flavescens, Smith, 1859: 68 (g, 9). T. flavescens, D.T., 1897: 106 (9, g). T. (Glaphyrothynnus) flavescens, Turner, 1908: 111 (2, 9). Adelaide, S. Aust. Glaphyrothynnus flavescens, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 2, figs. 38-39. 4, GLAPHYROTHYNNUS FUSIFORMIS (Saussure), 1867. Zeleboria fusiformis, Saussure, 1867: 132 (¢). Thynnus fusiformis, D.T., 1897: 107 ($). Glaphyrothynnus fusiformis, Turner, 1910b: 272 (¢). South Perth, W. Aust. 5. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS MARGINALIS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Agriomyia) marginalis, Westwood, 1844: 120, Pl. 76, fig. 3 (dg). 7. marginalis, D.T., 1897: 110 (¢). T. (Glaphyrothynnus) marginalis, Turner, 1908: 110 (6, 2). Albany, Perth, W. Aust. 6. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS SEDULUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) sedulus, Smith, 1859: 35 (¢). T. sedulus, D.T., 1897: 115. T. (Glaphyrothynnus ?) sedulus, Turner, 1908: 112 (¢). Swan River. 7. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS SITIENS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Glaphyrothynnus) sitiens, Turner, 1908: 112 (¢). Glaphyrothynnus sitiens, Turner, 191006: 270 (¢, 2). South Perth, W. Aust. 8. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS TRIFIDUS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Agriomyia) trifidus, Westwood, 1844: 119, Pl. 77, fig. 4 (¢); Smith, 1859: 24. Zeleboria imitatriz, Saussure, 1867: 132 (¢), T. 4, f. 72. T. imitatrix, D.T., 1897: 108 (go). T. imitator, Schulz, 1906: 161 (4). T. (Glaphyrothynnus) trifidus, Turner, 1908: 110. Glaphyrothynnus trifidus, Turner, 19106: 271 (0, 9 in cop.). South Perth, Albany, W. Aust. 9. Type Species. GLAPHYROTHYNNUS XANTHORRHOEL (Smith), 1859. Thynnus xanthorrhoei, Smith, 1859: 28; D.T., 1897: 119 (¢). T. planifrons, Smith, 1859: 46; D.T., 1897: 113 (9). ? 7. plebejus, Saussure, 1867: 123; D.T., 1897: 113 (9). Zeleboria xanthorrhoei, Saussure, 1869: 60 (0, 9). Thynnus (Glaphyrothynnus) vanthorrhoei, Turner, 1908: 109 (¢, 9). Glaphyrothynnus xanthorrhoei, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 4, figs. 77-78; Rohwer, 1910a: 347. Sydney, N.S.W. Genus 8. AULACOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus (pars), Smith, 1859: 40. Thynnus, subgenus Zeleboria (pars), Turner, 1908: 105. Aulacothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 32. Type species, Aulacothynnus femoratus (Turner). 1. AULACOTHYNNUS CALCARATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) calcaratus, Smith, 1859: 40 (¢). Thynnus calcaratus, D.T., 1897: 103 (¢). 7. (Zeleboria) calcaratus, Turner, 1908: 105 (¢). 6 (2p a Lomeso- thynnus humilis, Turner, 1915b: 547 (4, 9). 4. TMESOTHYNNUS INGREDIENS Turner, 1916. Turner, 1916: 118 (¢, 9). Brisbane. 5. TMESOTHYNNUS IRIDIPENNIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) iridipennis, Smith, 1859: 38 (3g, 2). T. strangulatus, Smith, 1879: 166 (0g, ¢). T. iridipennis, D.T., 1897: 109 (9, go). T. strangulatus, D.T., 1897: 116 (9, g). T. (Aeolothynnus) iridipennis, Turner, 1908: 132 (2, Q). Adelaide, S.A.; Lower Plenty, Victoria. 6. TMESOTHYNNUS PLATYCEPHALUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 191006: 275 (Jg, °). South Perth, W.A. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 297 7. TMESOTHYNNUS TRUNCATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) truncatus, Smith, 1859: 38 (¢). TT. truncatus, D.T., 1897: 117. JT. (Aeolothynnus) truncatus, Turner, 1908: 1381 (d@). Lower Plenty, Victoria (Type lost). 8. Type Species. TMESOTHYNNUS ZELEBORI (Saussure), 1867. Thynnus (Agriomyia) zelebori, Saussure, 1867: 117 (¢). TT. zelebori, D.T., 1897: 119 (g). T. (Aeolothynnus) zelebori, Turner, 1908: 130 (2). Sydney; Blue Mts. Genus 17. THYNNOTURNERIA Rohwer, 1910. Aeolothynnus, Ashmead, 1903: 101 (Aeolothynnus multiguttatus Ashmead). Thynnus, ‘subgenus Aeolothynnus, Turner, 1908: 113. Aeolothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 39. Turnerella, Rohwer, 1910a: 349. Thynnoturneria, Rohwer, 19100: 474. Hurohweria, Turner, 1911b: 608. Thynnoturneria, Turner, 1912a: 49. Type species, Thynnoturneria cerceroides (Smith). 1. THYNNOTURNERIA ABLATA (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) ablatus, Turner, 1908: 148 (¢, 2). South Australia. 2. THYNNOTURNERIA ARMIGER (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) armiger, Turner, 1908: 152 (¢, 9). Mittagong, N.S.W. Types in Coll. Froggatt. 3. THYNNOTURNERIA ATERRIMA (Smith), 1879. Thynnus aterrimus, Smith, 1879: 164 (¢); D.T., 1897: 102 (g¢). T. (Aeolothynnus) aterrimus, Turner, 1908: 154 (¢). Swan River, W. Aust. 4. THYNNOTURNERIA BACCATA (Smith), 1868. Thynnus (Agriomyia) baccatus, Smith, 1868: 236 (¢). T. baccatus, D.T., 1897: 102 (go). T. (Aeolothynnus) baccatus, Turner, 1908: 147 (¢). Champion Bay, W. Aust. 5. THYNNOTURNERIA CENTRALIS Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912a: 50 (¢). Hermannsburg, Central Australia. 6. Type Species. THYNNOTURNERIA CERCEROIDES (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) cerceroides, Smith, 1859: 34 (¢). T. perelegans, Smith, 1879: 167 (¢). TT. cerceroides, D.T., 1897: 103 (¢). T. perelegans, D.T., 1897: 113 (¢). T. (Aeolothynnus) cerceroides Turner, 1908: 149 (¢, 9). Aeolothynnus cerceroides, Turner, 1910c: 39. Turnerella, n.n. for Aeolothynnus, Rohwer, 1910a: 349. Thynnoturneria, n.n. for Aeolothynnus, Rohwer, 19100: 474. Hurohweria, n.n. for Aeolothynnus, Turner, 1911: 608. Sydney, Mackay, Cairns, Cape York. 7. THYNNOTURNERIA COMPRESSICEPS (Turner), 1911. Hurohweria compressiceps, Turner, 1911: 611 (g, 2). Kuranda, Q’land. 8. THYNNOTURNERIA. CRENULATA (Turner), 1910. Aeolothynnus crenulatus, Turner, 19100: 274 (¢), Pl. 31, fig. 8. Hermannsburg, Central Australia. 9. THYNNOTURNERIA DECIPIENS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus decipiens, Westwood, 1844: 105, 124 (¢); Smith, 1859: 18 (¢). Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) decipiens, Turner, 1908: 150 (¢). Aeolothynnus decipiens, Turner, 1910c: 39 (¢). Thynnoturneria decipiens, Turner, 19150: 547 (¢). Tasmania. 10. THYNNOTURNERIA DIMIDIATUS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Thynnoides) dimidiatus, Westwood, 1844: 121, Pl. 76, f. 5. JT. dimidiatus, Smith, 1859: 17 €¢). TJ. heinricheri, D.T., 1897: 108 (¢). T. (Aeolothynnus) dimidiatus, Turner, 1908: 137 (¢). Albany, W. Aust. 11. THYNNOTURNERIA HALOPHILA (Turner), 1909. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) halophilus, Turner, 1909: 1389 (¢). Cape York, Queensland. 298 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 12. THYNNOTURNERIA ILLUSTRIS (Kirby), 1898. Rhagigaster illustris, Kirby, 1898: 207 (g¢). Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) ‘illustris, Turner, 1908: 148 (¢). Aeolothynnus illustris, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 4, fig. 81 (¢). 13. THYNNOTURNERIA IMMITIS (Turner), 1911. Eurohweria immitis, Turner, 1911: 612 (dg, 9). Kuranda, Queensland. 14. THYNNOTURNERIA MYOLA (Turner), 1911. Eurohweria myola, Turner, 1911: 609 (¢, 9). Kuranda, Queensland. 15. THYNNOTURNERIA PENTADONTA (Turner), 1911. Eurohweria pentadonta, Turner, 1911: 608 (¢, 2). Kuranda, Queensland. 16. THYNNOTURNERIA PERTURBATA (Turner), 1910. Aeolothynnus perturbatus, Turner, 19100: 274 (2). Hermannsburg, Central Australia. 17. THYNNOTURNERIA SANGUINOLENTA (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) senguinolentus, Turner, 1908: 151 (¢, Q). Liverpool, N.S.W. ‘Types in Coll. Froggatt. 18. [aN ORG Een SAUNDERSI (Turner), 1908. Bae oe 2s Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) saundersi, Turner, 1908: 155 (¢). Adelaide (?). Type in Oxford Museum. 19. THYNNOTURNERIA (oy bo ioe Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912a: 49 (¢). Hermannsburg, Central Australia. 20. THYNNOTURNERIA UMBRIPENNIS (Smith), 1859. Phyanus (Agriomyia) wumbripennis, Smith, 1859: 31 (¢). TT. umbripennis, D.T., 1897: 117 (¢). T. (Aeolothynnus) umbripennis, Turner, 1908: 153 (4). Wimmera, Victoria. 21. THYNNOTURNERIA XEROPHILA Turner, 1940. Turner, 19400: 101 (6, 9). Dedari (Coolgardie), W. Aust. 22. THYNNOTURNERIA (?) EYRENSIS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) eyrensis, Turner, 1908: 146 (¢). Killalpanima, S. Aust., 100 miles east of Lake Hyre. Genus 18. ACANTHOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910: ay Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) pars, Turner. Acanthothynnus, Turner, 1910: 40. Type species, Acanthothynnus sannae Turner. 1. ACANTHOTHYNNUS CLEMENTI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) clementi, Turner, 1908: 145 (¢). Nickol Bay, W. Aust. 2. Type Species. ACANTHOTHYNNUS SANNAE (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) sannae, Turner, 1908: 142 (¢, 2). Acanthothynnus sannae, Turner, 1910: 40, Pl. 1, f. 25-26, Pl. 2, f. 44. Cape York, Queensland (0, 2 in cop.). Genus 19. DorATITHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus (Agriomyia) pars, Smith, 1859. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) pars, Turner, 1908. Doratithynnus, Turner, 1910c: 41. Type species, Doratithynnus doddit Turner. 1. DoRATITHYNNUS BIDENTATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) bidentatus, Smith, 1859: 32 (¢). T. bidentatus, D.T., 1897: 102 (g). TT. (Aeolothynnus) bidentatus, Turner, 1908: 143 (¢); subspec. orientalis, Turner, 1908: 144 (¢). Wimmera, Victoria. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 29 2. Type Species. DoRATITHYNNUS DODDII (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Aeolothynnus) doddii, Turner, 1908: 144 (g, 2). Townsville, Queensland- 3. DORATITHYNNUS SPRAYI Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 615 (¢). Kychering Soak. S. Aust. Genus 20. ENcopotHyNNUS Turner, 1915: Turner, 1915a: 52. Type species, Encopothynnus spinulosus Turner. 1.. ENCOPOTHYNNUS ATRIFACIES Turner, 1937. Turner, 1937: 147 (¢, 2). Merredin, W. Aust. 2. Type Species. ENCoporHYNNUS SPINULOSUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 52 (¢, 9), Pl. 1, figs. 9,10. Kalamunda, Darling Ranges, South-west Aust. , Genus 21. CATOCHEILUS Guérin, 1842. Guérin, 1842: 8, Pl. 102, figs. 1-14; Westwood, 1844: 103; Ashmead, 19038: 100; Turner, 1908: 168; Turner, 1910c: 41. Type species, Catocheilus klugii Guérin. 1. CATOCHEILUS IMMODESTUS (Turner), 1908. i Thynnus (Lophocheilus) immodestus, Turner, 1908: 187 (0, 2). Swan River, W.A. 2. Type Species. CATOCHEILUS KLUGII Guérin. Guér., 1842: 8 (¢, 2), Pl. 102, f. 1-14; Westwood, 1844: 140. Thynnus (Catocheilus) diversus, Smith, 1859: 41. JT. perplezus, Smith, 1879: 164 (g, 9). T. klugii, D.T., 1897: 109 (9, ¢). T. perplexcus, D.T., 1897: 113 (9, g). T. (Catocheilus) klugii, Turner, 1908: 168; Ashmead, 1903: 100 (3), 104 (9). Catocheilus perplexus, Turner, 1910: 42 (3, 9). Pl. 2, f. 45. C. klugii, Guiglia, 1948: 176. Swan River, W. Aust. Genus 22. HemirHyNNUS Ashmead, 1903. Ashmead, 1903: 101. Myrmecodes, Ashmead, 1903: 100 (nec Latreille). Thynnus, Auctorum (pars). Hemithynnus, Turner, 1910c: 42. Type species, Hemithynnus apterus (Olivier). Synonym for dH. hyalinatus: (Westwood). 1. HEMITHYNNUS AFFINIS (Guérin), 1838. Thynnus affinis, Guér., 1830 (1839): 226 (3). Port du Roi Georges; Klug, 1842: 18: (g); Westwood, 1844: 102 (¢); Smith, 1859: 12 (gf); D.T., 1897: 101 (g). T. (Lopho- cheilus) affinis, Turner, 1908: 198. Hemithynnus affinis, Bequaert, 1926: 189. Agriomyia afinis, Guiglia, 1948: 176. Thynnus affinis, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Albany, W. Aust. 2. HEMITHYNNUS ANNULATUS (Kirby), 1818. ‘ Thynnus annulatus, Kirby, 1818: 476 (¢). TT. brownii, Leach, 1819: 178 (g)- Myrmecodes australis, Griffith, Pidgeon and Gray, 1832: 516 (2). Thynnus annulatus, Guérin, 1838: 228 (¢). T. grayi, Guérin, 1838: 231 (9). T. annulatus, Klug, 1840/2: 17 (g). T. australis, Klug, 1840/2: 18 (9). T. annulatus, Westwood, 1844: 102. T. brownii, Westwood, 1844: 1138, Pl. 76, fig. 1 (¢). TJ. annulatus, Smith, 1859: 14 (¢). T. brownii, D.T., 1897: 103 (¢). T. annulatus, D.T., 1897: 101 (¢). TT. (Lophocheilus) annulatus, Turner, 1908: 193 (¢, 9). Hemithynnus annulatus, Turner, 1910c: 43; Bequaert, 1926: 189. South-west Australia. 3. Type Species. HEMITHYNNUS APTERUS (Olivier), 1811. Myzine aptera, Olivier, 1811: 137 (2). Thynnus dentatus, Jurine, 1807: 179 (¢)- T. variabilis, Kirby, 1818: 476 (¢); Leach, 1819: 178 (6). Myrmecodes flavoguttatus, Latreille, 1819: 143 (9). Thynnus variabilis, MacLeay, 1826: 127 (¢). T. apterus, Guérin, 1830/39: 230 (2). T. variabilis, Guérin, 1830/39: 223 (¢). T. flavoguttatus, 300 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, ‘Guérin, 1830/39: 230 (¢). TJ. variabilis, Klug, 1840/42: 16 (fg, 9%). T. olivieri, Hrichson, 1842: 262 (3,9). T. variabilis, Guérin, 1842: 6 (¢, 2), Pl. 101; Westwood, 1844: 102 (¢). Myrmecodes flavoguttatus, Westwood, 1844: 102 (9 of above). Thynnus apterus, West- wood, 1844: 102 (Q of above). JT. hyalinatus, Westwood, 1844: 106, Pl. 74, f. 3-4. T. olivieri, Westwood, 1844: 146 (¢, 9). VT. westwoodi, Lepeletier, 1845, 568, Pl. 35, f. 6 (3). Myrmecodes olivieri, Lepeletier, 1845: 588 (2). Mutilla (Myrmecodes) olivieri, Blanchard, 1849: T. 118, f. 9. Thynnus hyalinatus, Smith, 1859: 16 (¢, 2). T. variabilis, Smith, 1859: 12 (g, 9). TJ. olivieri, Smith, 1859: 18 (¢, 2). T. variabilis, Macleay, 1863: vi; Hinds, 1863: vii (¢). JT. audax, Smith, 1868: 234 (¢). VT. apterus, D.T., 1897: 101 (2, d). T. audax, D.T., 1897: 102 (g). T. hyalinatus, D.T., 1897: 108 (2, o). T. olivieri, D.T., 1897: 112 (9, dg). T. graffi, D.T., 1897: 107 (0). Hemithynnus hyalinatus, Ashmead, 1903: 101 (¢), 107 (2). Thynnus (Lophocheilus) apterus, Turner, 1908: 191. T. (Lopho- cheilus) hyalinatus, Turner, 1908: 192. Hemithynnus hyalinatus, Turner, 1910c: 42. Hi. olivieri, Turner, 19156: 548. Southern Australia, from Albany to Southern Queensland. 4, HEMITHYNNUS AUSTRALIS (Boisduval), 1833. Thynnus australis, Boisduval, 1833: 655, Pl. 12, fig. 2 (¢); Guérin, 1830 (1839): 228; Westw., 1844: 102. JT. (Lophocheilus) australis, Turner, 1908: 187. Port Western. 5. HEMITHYNNUS CAELEBS (Saussure), 1867. Tachynomyia caelebs, Saussure, 1867: 125 (¢). Thynnus wieseri, D.T., 1897: 118 (dg). T. (Lophocheilus) wieseri, Turner, 1908: 178 (4). Hemithynnus caelebs, Turner, 1910c: 43 (¢). Australia. 6. HEMITHYNNUS CONNECTENS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus connectens, Smith, 1859: 45 (9); D.T., 1897: 104 (9). ZT. (Lophocheilus) connectens, Turner, 1908: 188 (9). Perth, W.A. T. oppositus, Smith, 1879: 162 (¢); D.T., 1897: 112 (¢). VT. (Lophocheilus ?) oppositus, Turner, 1908: 191 (¢). Hemi- thynnus connectens, Turner, 19406: 99. Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 7. HEMITHYNNUS CRINITUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) crinitus, Turner, 1908: 184 (3g, 2). Melbourne, Victoria. 8. HEMITHYNNUS EXCORIATUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) excoriatus, Turner, 1908: 177 (¢, °). Australia; N.S.W. and Victoria. Types in Coll. Froggatt. 9. HEMITHYNNUS FLAVIFRONS (Smith), 1865. Rhagigaster flavifrons, Smith, 1865b: 390 (9). Thynnus flavifrons, D.T., 1897: 106 (2). T. (Lophocheilus) flavifrons, Turner, 1908: 180 (2). Swan River, W.A. 10. HEMITHYNNUS FLAVIPENNIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus flavipennis, Smith, 1859: 21 (¢); D.T., 1897: 106 (¢). TT. (Lophocheilus) flavipennis, Turner, 1908: 190 (¢, 2). New South Wales. ‘ 11. HEMITHYNNUS HAMLYN—HARRISI Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912: 538. Brisbane, Q’land. 12. HEMITHYNNUS INCONSTANS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) inconstans, Smith, 1859: 26 (g); D.T., 1897: 108. T. signatus, Smith, 1859: 44 (9); D.T., 1897: 116; Saussure, 1867: 121 (2). TV. (Lophocheilus) inconstans, Turner, 1908: 189 (¢, 2). South-east Australia. 13. HEMITHYNNUS KIRBYI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) kirbyi, Turner, 1908: 182 (0, 2). Cumberland County, N.S.W. : 14. HrmMirHyNNUS LiIBES Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 205 (¢). Australia. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 30L 15. HEMITHYNNUS MACULOSUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus maculosus, Smith, 1859: 16 (¢); D.T., 1897: 110 (¢). T. (Lophocheilus) maculosus, Turner, 1908: 192. Australia. 16. HEMITHYNNUS OPPOSITUS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus oppositus, Smith, 1879: 162 (¢); D.T., 1897: 112 (¢). T. (Lophocheilus ?) oppositus, Turner, 1908: 191 (¢). Swan River, W. Aust. 17. HEMITHYNNUS PETULANS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus petulans, Smith, 1879: 164 (4); D.T., 1897: 113 (¢). T. (Lophocheilus) petulans, Turner, 1908: 178 (¢). Hemithynnus petulans, Turner, 19100: 282, Pl. XX XI, figs. 5 and 6 (¢). Swan River, W. Aust. 18. HEMITHYNNUS PRAESTABILIS Turner, 1910. Hemithynnus praestabilis, Turner, 19100: 281 (¢). West Australia. 19. HEMITHYNNUS PROTERVUS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus protervus, Smith, 1879: 159 (¢, 9); D.T., 1897: 114 (0, 9). TT. (Lopho- cheilus) protervus, Turner, 1908: 178. Australia. 20. HEMITHYNNUS RUFIVENTRIS (Guérin), 1838. Thynnus rufiventris, Guérin, 1830/39: 227 (¢); Klug, 1840/42: 19 (¢); Westwood,. 1844: 102 (¢); Smith, 1859: 13 (¢, 9); D.T., 1897: 115 (¢, 9). T. (Lophocheilus) rujfiventris, Turner, 1908: 185 (3g, 9). Hemithynnus rufiventris, Bequaert, 1926: 188. (date, Guérin in Duperrey). Thynnus rufiventris, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Sydney, Goulburn, N.S.W. . 21. HEMITHYNNUS SENEX (Smith), 1859. Thynnus senex, Smith, 1859: 19 (¢). W. Australia; D.T., 1897: 115 (¢). T- (Lophocheilus) senex, Turner, 1908: 188 (¢). Western Australia. 22. HEMITHYNNUS TILLYARDI Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912: 536 (9, ¢). Dorrigo, N.S.W. 23. HEMITHYNNUS TUBERCULIVENTRIS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus tuberculiventris, Westwood, 1844: 118, Pl. 76, f. 2 (¢); Smith, 1859: 17 (go); D.T., 1897: 117 (g). T. (Lophocheilus) tuberculiventris, Turner, 1908: 184 (¢)- Albany, W. Aust.; Victoria. 24. HEMITHYNNUS WALLISII (Smith), 1859. Thynnus wallisii, Smith, 1859: 14 (g, 2); D.T., 1897: 118 (g, 9). T. (Lophocheilus): wallisii, Turner, 1908: 186 (9). Hemithynnus wallisii, Turner, 19100: 283. Sydney and. Melbourne. Genus 23. LOPHOCHEILUS Guérin, 1842. Guérin, 1842: 11, Pl. 103, figs. 7-13; Westwood, 1844: 103; Ashmead, 1903: 158; Turner, 1908: 168; Turner, 1910c: 44. Type species, Lophocheilus villosus Guérin. 1. LOPHOCHEILUS ANILITATIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) anilitatis, Smith, 1859: 37 (¢, 2). TT. anilitatis, D.T., 1897: 101 (¢, 2). T. (Lophocheilus) anilitatis, Turner, 1908: 171 (9). Melbourne. 2. LOPHOCHEILUS FERVENS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) fervens, Smith, 1859: 31 (¢). T. fervens, D.T., 1897: 106 (g)- T. (Lophocheilus) fervens, Turner, 1908: 170 (¢). Australia. 3. LOPHOCHEILUS FROGGATTI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) froggatti, Turner, 1908: 181 (0, @). 302 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 4, LOPHOCHEILUS LAEVICEPS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus laeviceps; Smith, 1859: 44 (9). Australia; D.T., 1897: 110 (9). JT. (Lopho- cheilus) laeviceps, Turner, 1908: 181 (2). Lophocheilus laeviceps, Turner, 1915a: 50 (3d, 9). Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 5. LOPHOCHEILUS MAMILLATUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) mamillatus, Turner, 1908: 171 (0). Lophocheilus mamillatus, Turner, 1915: 49 (2). Fremantle, Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 6. LOPHOCHEILUS OBSCURUS (Klug), 1842. Thynnus obscurus, Klug, 1842: 22, Tab., f. 4 (¢). TT. (Thynnoides) obscurus, Westwood, 1844: 138, Pl. 82, f. 2 (¢). TT. obscwrus, Saussure, 1867: 122 (9); D.T., 1897: 112 (9, #). TT. (Lophocheilus) obscurus, Turner, 1908: 180 (0, 2); Kirby, 1898: 207. Victoria; Blue Mts., N.S.W. : 7. LOPHOCHEILUS RUBROCAUDATUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 51 (¢, 9), Pl. 1, figs. 7 and 8. Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 8. LOPHOCHEILUS RUFICEPS Rohwer, 1925. Rohwer, 1925: 415 (9). Dlawarra, N.S.W. Type in U.S. Nat. Mus. 9. LOPHOCHEILUS SYLVANUS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 209 (¢). Australia. 10. Type Species. LOPHOCHEILUS VILLOSUS QGuérin, 1842. — Guérin, 1842: 12, Pl. 103 (4); Westwood, 1844: 103. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) villosus,° Smith, 1859: 40. TT. niger, Smith, 1859: 30. 7. villosus, D.T., 1897: 118. T. niger, D:T., 1897: 111. Lophecheilus villosus, Ashmead, 1903: 158 (4). Thynnus (Lophocheilus) villosus, Turner, 1908: 169 (¢, 9). UL. niger, Turner, 1915b: 548. Lophonocheilus villosus, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Tasmania. 11. LOPHOCHEILUS (2) AMBIGUUS (Turner), 1908. : Thynnus (Lophocheilus) ambiguus, Turner, 1908: 172 (3g, 9). Australia (W. Macleay). Type in Oxford Museum. 12. LOPHOCHEILUS (?) SAGUINEIVENTRIS Schulz, 1908. Enteles sanguineiventris, Schulz, 1908: 455 (dg, 9); Turner, 1910c: 44. Western Australia. ; Genus 24. MacrotHynnus Turner, 1908. Thynnus, subgenus Macrothynnus, Turner, 1908: 72, 194. Thynnus Smith, partim. Macrothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 44. Type species, Macrothynnus simillimus (Smith). 1. Macroruynnus rnstenis (Smith), 1859. Thynnus insignis, Smith, 1859: 15 (¢); D.T., 1897: 109 (¢). TT. (Macrothynnus) insignis, Turner, 1908: 195 (¢, 2). Swan Rv. (Smith). ; 2. MACROTHYNNUS I0LIEUS Montet, 1922.. Montet, 1922: 212 (9). Australia, occidentale. 3. Type Species. MAcROTHYNNUS SIMILLIMUS (Smith), 1859. i Thynnus simillimus, Smith, 1859: 15 (¢); D.T., 1897: 116. TT. molitor, Smith, 1859: 43 (2); D.T., 1897: 111. VT. (Macrothynnus) simillimus, Turner, 1908: 194 (¢, Q). Sydney to Brisbane. Macrothynnus simillimus, Turner, 19100: 283 (¢). South Perth. Genus 25. THYNNOIDES Guérin, 1838. Guérin, 1838: 214 and 232. Thynnus (Thynnoides), Westwood, 1844: 102. Thynnoides, Ashmead, 1903: 99; Turner, 1910c: 45. Thynnidea, Rohwer, 1910a: 347. Type species, Thynnoides fulvipes Guérin. 1. THYNNOIDES BERTHOUDI Turner.’ Turner, 19120: 540 (¢). E BY K. E. W. SALTER. 303 2. Type Species. THYNNOIDES FULVIPES Guérin, 1838. Thynnus (?) rubripes, Guérin’s Atlas, 15/11/1831: Pl. 8, fiz. 9. Thynnoides fulvipes, Guérin, 1838: 233 (¢). Thynnoides rubripes, Guérin, 1830/1839: 233 (4)... Thynnus rubripes, Klug, 1840/1842: 22 (2). _Thynnus fulvipes, Klug, 1840 (1842): 22 (¢). Thynnus labiatus, Klug, 1840 (1842): 23 (¢). Thynnoides rubripes, Guérin, 1842: 10, Pl. 102, f. 18. Thynnoides fulvipes, Guérin, 1842: 10, Pl. 102, figs. 15,17 (g). Thynnoides rubripes, Westwood, 1844: 102.. Thynnoides fulvipes, Westwood, 1844: 102-3 (¢). Thynnus (Thynnoides) fulvipes, Smith, 1859: 22 (¢). Thynnus (Agriomyia) moestus, Smith, 1859: 36 (¢). Thynnus labiatus, D.T., 1897: 109. Thynnus maestus, D.T., 1897: 110. Thynnoides fulvipes, Ashmead, 1903: 99; Turner, 1908: 247 (4, 2); Turner, 1910: 45, 46; Rohwer, 1910a: 347; Guiglia, 1948: 177. T. rubripes, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Blue Mountains; N:S. WEE iy ; 3. THYNNOIDES FUMIPENNIS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Thynnoides) fumipennis, Westwood, 1844: 108 (¢, 2). Thynnus fumi- pennis, Smith, 1859: 22 (¢, 9°); D.T., 1897: 107 (3,9). Thynnoides fumipennis, Ashmead, 1903: 98 (gf); Turner, 1908: 248 (¢); Rohwer, 1910a: 347. Melbourne to Sydney. 4. THYNNOIDES FUSCOCOSTALIS Turner, 1912. Turner, 19120: 540 (¢, 2); Turner, 1915a: 48 (J, 2). Brisbane. 5. THYNNOIDES GRACILIS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Thynnoides) gracilis, Westwood, 1844: 139, Pl. 83, f. 2-3 (¢, 2); Smith, 1859: 22. T. (Thynnoides) bidens, Saussure, 1867: 118, T. 4, f. 68 (fg, 2). T. viduus, Saussure, 1867: 123, T. 4, f. 70 (34, 9). T..bidens, D.T., 1897: 102 (¢). T. gracilis, D.T., 1897: 107 (9, ¢). TT. viduus, D.T., 1897: 118 (9). T. dallatorrei, Schulz, 1906: 160. T. gracilis, Turner, 1908: 249. 7. bidens, Turner, 1909: 140. Thynnoides gracilis, Turner, 1910c: 46, Pl. 2, f. 52. Adelaide (River Murray). 6: THYNNOIDES LANIO Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 286 (3, 2). South Perth, W.A. 7. THYNNOIDES MESOPLEURALIS Turner, 1912. Turner, 19120: 539 (¢, 2). Brisbane, Q’land. 8. THYNNOIDES NEPHELOPTERUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 285 (fg, 9). South Perth, W.A. 9. PheNNROMIDS PREISSIZ Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 284 (¢). Western Australia. 10. THYNNOIDES PUGIONATUS Guérin, 1838. Guérin, 1830/39: 234 (¢). Nouvelle Hollande. Thynnus pugionatus, Klug, 1840/42: 23 (g). Thynnoides pugionatus, Westwood, 1844: 102 (¢). Thynnus (Thynnoides) pugionatus, Smith, 1859: 22 (¢). Thynnus pugionatus, D.T., 1897: 114 (¢); Turner, 1908: 249 (¢, 9). Thynnoides pugionatus, Bednaert 1926: 189 (date Duperrey) ; Guiglia, 1948: 177. Sydney. 11. THYNNOIDES RUFI-ABDOMINALIS Rayment, 1G E35, Rayment, 1935: 741, 198, Pl. 25c. 12. THYNNOIDES RUFITHORAX Turner, 1910. ~Turner, 19100: 284 (9). Ararat, Victoria. 13. THYNNOIDES SENILIS (Hrichson), 1842. Thynnus (Rhagigaster) senilis, Hrichson, 1842: 263 (CED) T. (Agriomyia) senilis, Smith, 1859: 25 (¢). TJ. senilis, D.T., 1897: 115 (4); Turner, 1908: 248'(¢). Thynnoides senilis, Burrell, 1935: 20 (¢); Turner, 19150: 549. Tasmania and Vict. 14. THYNNOIDES WATERHOUSEL (Turner), 1908. Ghynnus waterhousei, Turner, 1908: 244 (¢, 2). Woodford, Blue Mts.,:.N.S.W. 304 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, Genus 26. EriporHynNuSs Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910: 46. Type species, Hlidothynnus melleus (Westwood). 1. ELIDOTHYNNUS aAGiLIs (Smith), 1859. Thynnus agilis, Smith, 1859: 20 (¢); D.T., 1897: 101 (8); Turner, 1908: 225 (9); Turner, 19100: 288. Swan River (Smith); Sydney, N.S.W. (Froggatt). 2. EHLIDOTHYNNUS BASALIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Thynnoides) basalis, Smith, 1859: 23 (¢). T. vastator, Smith, 1879: 158 (2, 6). T. basalis, D.T., 1897: 102 (¢). T. vastator, D.T., 1897: 118 (9, ¢). T. basalis, Turner, 1908: 230 (¢, 9). Hlidothynnus basalis, Turner, 19100: 290 (¢); Turner, 1910c: 46, Pl. 4, figs. 88-89. N.S.W.; Victoria; South Australia; Western Australia. 3. ELIDOTHYNNUS cCRUCIS Turner, 1937. Turner, 1937: 146 (¢, 2). Southern Cross, W. Aust. 4. ELIDOTHYNNUS FRENCHI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus frenchi, Turner, 1908: 226 (¢). Melbourne, Victoria. - 5. ELIDOTHYNNUS FUMATIPENNIS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 47 (¢, 9). Cunderdin, W.A. 6. ELIDOTHYNNUS INSIDIATOR (Smith), 1879. Thynnus insidiator, Smith, 1879: 168 (Jf, 9); D.T., 1897: 108 (g, 2); Turner, 1908: 227 (8, 9). Swan Rv., W.A. 7. ELIDOTHYNNUS IRRITANS (Smith), 1868. Thynnus (Agriomyia) irritans, Smith, 1868: 235 (¢). T. irritans, D.T., 1897: 109 (fg); Turner, 1908: 228 (¢). Champion Bay. 8. Type Species. HLIDOTHYNNUS MELLEUS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus (Agriomyia) melleus, Westwood, 1844: 118 (¢), Pl. 76, fig. 4. JT. melleus, Smith, 1859: 67 (9), 24 (¢); D.T., 1897: 111 (2); Turner, 1908: 227 (¢, 2). LHlido- thynnus melleus, Turner, 1910c: 47, Pl. 2, fig. 42. Champion Bay, W. Aust., to Duaringa, Queensland. 9. ELIDOTHYNNUS MOBILIS (Turner), 1910. Turner, 19100: 288 (¢, 9). Guildford, W.A. 10. ELIDOTHYNNUS PSEUDOMELLEUS (Turner), 1909. Thynnus pseudomelleus, Turner, 1909: 140. Glen Innes, N.S.W. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 11. ELIDOTHYNNUS SUBINTERRUPTUS (Smith), 1868. Thynnus subinterruptus, Smith, 1868: 235 (¢). 7. frater, D.T., 1897: 106 (¢). T. subinterruptus, Turner, 1908: 229 (¢). Champion Bay, N.W. Coast, W.A. 12. ELIDOTHYNNUS TUBERCULIFRONS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus tuberculifrons, Smith, 1879: 161 (¢); D.T., 1897: 117 (8); Turner, 1908: 231. Swan Rv., W.A. 13. ELIDOTHYNNUS (?) ULTIMUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus ultimus, Turner, 1908: 246 (g, 9). Mackay, Queensland. 14. ELIDOTHYNNUS (?) MULTIGUTTATUS (Ashmead), 1903. Aeolothynnus multiguttatus, Ashmead, 1903: 101; Rohwer, 1910a: 348. Type in U.S. Nat. Mus. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 305 Genus 27. CAMPYLOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus (pars), Smith. Type species, Campylothynnus flavopictus (Smith). 1. CAMPYLOTHYNNUS ASSIMILIS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus assimilis, Smith, 1859: 20 (¢). T. flavofasciatus, Smith, 1859: 45 (9); D.T., 1897: 106 (9). TJ. assimilis, D.T., 1897: 102 (¢); Turner, 1908: 225 (¢). T. flavo- fasciatus, Turner, 1908: 224 (9). Campylothynnus assimilis, Turner, 1910b: 287 (J, Q). South Perth, W.A. 2. Type Species. CAMPYLOTHYNNUS FLAVOPICTUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus flavopictus, Smith, 1859: 21 (¢); D.T., 1897: 106 (¢); Turner, 1908: 223 (3g, 2). Campylothynnus flavopictus, Turner, 1910c: 47, Pl. 2, fig. 51. S.W. Australia. 3. CAMPYLOTHYNNUS LUNDYAE Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 46 (3, 2), Pl. 1, f. 17-18. Cunderdin, W. Aust. Genus 28. LESTRICOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910c: 48. Type species, Lestricothynnus nubilipennis Smith. 1. LESTRICOTHYNNUS DROSILLUS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 217 (2). Rockhampton, Queensland. 2. LESTRICOTHYNNUS EXTRANEUS Turner, 1919. Turner, 1919: 169 (¢, 9). Port Lincoln, South Australia. 3. LESTRICOTHYNNUS FRAUENFELDIANUS (Saussure), 1867. Thynnus (Agriomyia) frauenfeldianus, Sauss., 1867: 120 (¢). T. frauenfeldianus, D.T., 1897: 107 (¢); Turner, 1908: 240 (9 noted but undescribed). Sydney. 4. LESTRICOTHYNNUS HEGIAS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 213 (¢). Sydney. 5. LESTRICOTHYNNUS ILLIDGEI Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910b: 291 (g, 2). Mooraree, Brisbane, Queensland. 6. Type Species. LeESTRICOTHYNNUS NUBILIPENNIS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus nudilipennis, Smith, 1879: 167 (3g, 2); D.T., 1897: 112 (9, ¢); Turner, 1908: 239 (¢, 2). Mackay, Q. Lestricothynnus nubilipennis, Turner, 1910c: 48, Pl. 2, f. 50. _7. LESTRICOTHYNNUS oprimMus (Smith), 1859. Thynnus optimus, Smith, 1859: 29 (¢). 7. sulcatus, Smith, 1859: 42 (2). JT. optimus, D.T., 1897: 112 (¢). 7. sulcatus, D.T., 1897: 116 (@). ZT. (Aeolothynnus) optimus, Turner, 1908: 125 (¢). YT. (Aeolothynnus) sulcatus, Turner, 1908: 125 (Q). Lestrico- thynnus optimus, Turner, 1910b: 291; Turner, 1912b: 542 (¢, 2 in cop.). Dorre Island, W.A. 8. LESTRICOTHYNNUS SUBTILIS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 293 (¢, 2). Claremont, W. Aust. 9. LESTRICOTHYNNUS TENUATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) tenuatus, Smith, 1859: 31 (¢). JT. tenuatus, D.T., 1897: 116 (g). T. (Lophocheilus) tenuatus, Turner, 1908: 173 (¢). Lestricothynnus (?) tenuatus, Turner, 19100: 294 (9); 1910c: 56. South Perth, W.A. (d, 2 in cop.) 10. LESTRICOTHYNNUS THOE Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 216 (?). Australia. 11. LESTRICOTHYNNUS (?) coGNATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus cognatus, Smith, 1859: 28 (¢); D.T., 1897: 108 (¢). ZT. (Lophocheilus) cognatus, Turner, 1908: 174 (¢). South-eastern Australia; Sydney—Brisbane. 306 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 12. LkSTRICOTHYNNUS (?) constricrus (Smith), 1859. Thynnus constrictus, Smith, 1859: 19 (¢). Swan River, W.A.; D.T., 1897: 104 (3); Turner, 1908: 241 (#). Lestricothynnus constrictus, Turner, 1910b: 290 (2). , South Perth, W.A. (0, 2 in cop.) 13. LESTRICOTHYNNUS (7?) LUBRICUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus (Lophocheilus) luwbricus, Turner, 1908: 175 (g, 2). Cairns, Queensland. 14. LeSTRICOTHYNNUS (?) MODESTUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus modestus, Smith, 1859: 19 (¢); D.T., 1897: 111 (4); Turner, 1908: 240 (fd, 2). Swan Rv., W.A. 15. LESTRICOTHYNNUS (?) MOECHUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus moechus, Turner, 1908:. 234 (¢, 2). Sydney. Types in Coll. Froggatt. 16. LESTRICOTHYNNUS (?) VIGILANS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Agriomyia) vigilans, Smith, 1859: 28 (¢). fT. vigilans, D.T., 1897: 118 (go). T. (Lophocheilus) vigilans, Turner, 1908: 173 (¢, 2). Melbourne, Victoria. (Type in Oxford Mus.) aks . aoe ee Genus 29. BrenrorHynnus Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910c: 49. Type species, Belothynnus unifasciatus Smith. 1. BELOTHYNNUS BINGHAMI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus binghami, Turner, 1908: 244 (¢). Australia. 2. BELOTHYNNUS IMPETUOSUS (Smith), 1868. Thynnus impetuosus, Smith, 1868: 233 (¢); D.T., 1897: 108 (4); Turner, 1908: 242 (¢). South Australia. ; 3. BELOTHYNNUS MELANOTUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus melanotus, Turner, 1908: 243 (¢). Type in Oxford Museum. 4. BELOTHYNNUS NOVELLUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 48 (¢, 2). Brisbane. 5. Type Species. BELOTHYNNUS UNIFASCIATUS (Smith), 1873. Thynnus unifasciatus, Smith, 1873: 458, Pl. xliii, fig. 1 (¢), 2 (9); Turner, 1908: 242 (8). Belothynnus unifasciatus, subspec. niger, Montet, 1922: 220. Mackay, Queensland. Genus 30. LEPTOTHYNNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus (pars), Westwood, 1844: 143. Thynnus, subgenus Lophocheilus (pars), Turner, 1908: 176. Leptothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 49. i it Type species, Leptothynnus purpureipennis (Westwood). 1. Type Species. LEPTOTHYNNUS PURPUREIPENNIS. (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus purpureipennis, Westwood, 1844: 143, T. 83, f. 10 (¢); Smith, 1859: 18 (dg); Saussure, 1869: 58 (g); D.T., 1897: 114 (¢). T. (Agriomyia) maurus, Smith, 1859: 37 (g). TT. maurus, D.T., 1897: 110 (g). T. (Lophocheilus) purpureipennis, Turner, 1908: 176 (¢, 9). N.S.W. ; ; at 2. LEPTOTHYNNUS (?) PELTASTES Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912: °542 (4, 2). Dorrigo, N.S.W. BY K. E..W..SALTER..) 307 Genus 31. Gurrinius Ashmead, 1903. Ashmead, 1903: 100. Type, Thynnus. flavilabris Guérin (original designation). Tachynothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 50 (Thynnus shuckardi Guérin).. Guérinius, Rohwer, 1910a: 349 (synonymy). Type species, Guérinius flavilabris (Guérin). 1. GuERINIUS conrUsUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus confusus, Smith, 1859: 13 (¢). T. sulcifrons, Smith, 1859: 43 (9). T. confusus, D.T., 1897: 104 (¢). TT. sulcifrons, D.T., 1897: 116 (9). T. confusus, Turner, 1908: 214 (¢). TT. sulcifrons, Turner, 1908: 214 (2). Tachynothynnus confusus, Turner, 1910c: 50 (g). Tachynothynnus sulcifrons, Turner, 1910c: 51 (9). Gwuérinius confusus, Turner, 1913: 616 (g, 9 in cop.). Albany, Swan River, W. Aust. 2. Type Species. GUERINIUS FLAVILABRIS (Guérin), 1842. Thynnus flavilabris, Guérin, 1842: 8 (4); Westwood, 1844: 103 (g); Smith, 1859: 18; D.T., 1897: 106. Guérinius flavilabris, Ashmead, 1903: 100 (¢). Thynnus flavilabris, Turner, 1908: 219 (¢). Tachynothynnus flavilabris, Turner, 1910c: 50 (¢). Guérinius flavilabris, Rohwer, 1910a: 349. (Guérinius Ash. = Tachynothynnus Tur.). Sydney. 3. GUERINIUS FLAVIVENTRIS (Guérin), 1838. Thynnus flaviventris, Guérin, 1830/39: 229 (¢); Klug, 1840/42: 19 (¢); Guérin, 1842: 7, Pl. 101, f. 1-23; Westwood, 1844: 102 (4); Smith, 1859: 16 (4); D:T., 1897: 106 (¢); Turner, 1908: 222 (g). Guérinius flaviventris, Bequaert, 1926: 189 (date of Duperrey). Swan River, W. Aust. 4, GUERINIUS GUERINII (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus guérinii, Westwood, 1844: 137 (Sg Smiths 859507 (Cs) 7 Did, 1890s Ore Turner, 1908: 221 (9). Melbourne; Albany, W. Aust. oe 5. GUERINIUS MAMMEUS (Montet), 1922. Tachynothynnus mammeus, Montet, 1922: 221 (2). Aust. mér. Gowlertown. 6. GUERINIUS OBSCURIPENNIS (Guérin), 1838. Thynnus obscuripennis, Guérin, 1830/9: 227 (fo); Klug, 1840/2: 18 ($); Westwood, 1844: 102 (¢); Smith, 1859: 13 (4) D.T., 1897: 112 (¢); Turner, 1908: 220. Guérinius obscuripennis, Bequaert, 1926: 189 (date of Duperrey). Australia. 7. GUERINIUS PICIPES (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus picipes, Westwood, 1844: 114 (¢), Pl. 77, f. 2. T. pubescens, Lepelet., 1845: 569 (¢). T..picipes, Smith, 1859: 17 (4). T..oblongus, Smith, 1868: 232 (¢). T. blasii, D.T., 1897: 108 (g). T. picipes, D.T., 1897: 113 (¢); Turner, 1908: 220 ().. Tachynothynnus picipes, Turner, 1910b: 295 (d, 2 in cop.). Melbourne; Albany, Cottesloe, ‘W. Aust. 8. GUERINIUS SHUCKARDI (Guérin), 1842. Thynnus shuckardi, Guérin, 1842: 7, Pl. 100, f. 13; Westwood, 1844: 103, 136, Pl. 83, f.5 (2) (= T. ferrugineus Leach MSS.); Smith, 1859: 17 (¢, 2); D.T., 1897: 116 (9, fg); Turner, 1908: 221 (4, 2). Tachynothynnus shuckardi, Turner, 1910c: 50 (¢, 9), Pl. 2, fig. 538. Thynnus shuckardii, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Sydney, N.S.W. 9. GUERINIUS VARIPES (Smith), 1859. Thynnus varipes,. Smith, 1859: 67 (g). T. vespoides, Smith, 1879: 165 (¢). T. indistinctus, Smith, 1879: 169 (¢). T. varipes, D.T., 1897: 118 (g). T. indistinctus, D.T., 1897: 108 (¢). T. vespoides, D.T., 1897: 118 (g). T. substitutus, Schulz, 1906: 160 (Jd). T. varipes, Turner, 1908: 222 (¢). Adelaide, S.A.; Western Australia. 10. GUERINIUS (?) ANCHORITES (Turner), 1908. Thynnus anchorites, Turner, 1908: 212 (¢). Killalpanima, South Aust. (100 miles east of Lake Hyre). : 308 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, Genus 32. PoaonotHynNUS Turner, 1910. Thynnus, Auctorum. Pogonothynnus, Turner, 1910c: 51. Type species, Pogonothynnus fenestratus (Smith). 1. Type Species. POGONOTHYNNUS FENESTRATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus fenestratus, Smith, 1859: 18 (¢). Swan Rv. (Smith). T. crassipes, Smith, 1859: 44 (9). TT. fenestratus, D.T., 1897: 106 (¢). TT. crassipes, D.T., 1897: 104 (9). T. fenestratus, Turner, 1908: 218 (2, 2). Champion Bay, W.A. 2. POGONOTHYNNUS FULVOHIRTUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 45 (0, 9), Pl. 1, figs. 5, 6. Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 3. POGONOTHYNNUS MOROSUS (Smith), 1879. Thynnus morosus, Smith, 1879: 168 (¢); D.T., 1897: 111 (¢); Turner, 1908: 219 (g). Champion Bay, W.A. Pogonothynnus morosus, Turner, 19400: 99 (2). Mingenew, W.A. (¢, 2 in cop.). 4, POGONOTHYNNUS VESTITUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus vestitus, Smith, 1859: 15 (¢); D.T., 1897: 118 (¢); Turner, 1908: 209 (2). Pogonothynnus vestitus, Turner, 1910b: 296 (3, 9). South Perth. 5. POGONOTHYNNUS (?) WALKERI (Turner), 1908. Thynnus walkeri, Turner, 1908: 236 (¢). Fremantle. Pogonothynnus (?) walkeri, Turner, 19100: 295 (2). South Perth. (3, 2 in cop.) Genus 33. ZASPILOTHYNNUS Ashmead, 1908. Thynnus, Auctorum. Zaspilothynnus, Ashmead, 1903: 99; Turner, 1910c: 52. Type species, Zaspilothynnus interruptus (Westwood) (= Z. leachiellus Westwood). 1. ZASPILOTHYNNUS ANDREANUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus andreanus, Turner, 1908: 231 (¢, 9). N.S.W. 2. ZASPILOTHYNNUS ATROCIOR (Turner), 1909. Thynnus atrocior, Turner, 1909: 142 (¢). Gippsland, Victoria. 3. ZASPILOTHYNNUS BIROI (Turner), 1910. Thynnus biroi, Turner, 1910a: 117 (¢). Zaspilothynnus biroi subspecies pratti, Turner, 1911a, Vol. vii: 302; Turner, 1912a: 51 (¢). Facfac, S.W. New Guinea. 4, ZASPILOTHYNNUS CAMPANULARIS (Smith), 1868. Thynnus campanularis, Smith, 1868: 232 (¢); D.T., 1897: 103 (¢). T. leachiellus, Olliff, 1889: 98 (wrongly identified by Olliff), (nec Westwood). J. campanularis, Turner, 1908: 213 (¢). Zaspilothynnus campanularis, Turner, 1913: 616 (¢). Sydney; Lord Howe Island. 5. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CARBONARIUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus (Thynnoides) carbonarius, Smith, 1859: 23 (¢). TT. caelebs, Saussure, 1867: 122 (2). T. clypearis, Saussure, 1869: 59 (9?, g). Rhagigaster clypeatus, Smith, 1879: 177 (fo) (nec Klug). T. hirnii, D.T., 1897: 108 (¢). TT. caelebs, D.T., 1897: 103 (2). TT. clypearis, D.T., 1897: 103 (6, 2); Schulz, 1906: 161 (g, 9). T. carbonarius, Turner, 1908: 233 (g, 2 in cop.) (synonymy). Sydney; Adelaide. 6. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CHEESMANAE Turner, 1940. Turner, 1940: 92 (¢). Cyclops Mts., Dutch New Quinea. 7. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CLELANDI Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 305, Pl. XXXI, fig. 14 (¢'), 15 (9). Strelley River, N.W. Australia. 8. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CONATOR (Turner), 1910. Thynnus conator, Turner, 1910a: 115; Turner, 191la: 302. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 309 9. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CRUDELIS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus crudelis, Turner, 1908: 238 (¢). Swan Rv., W.A. (?) HEnteles wagneri, Schulz, 1908: 452 (¢@). Zaspilothynnus crudelis, Turner, 19106: 298 (9). Perth, W.A. (3g, 2 in cop.) 10. ZASPILOTHYNNUS CYANEIVENTRIS Rohwer, 1925. Rohwer, 1925: 416, Pl. 1, f. 2-3. New Guinea. Types in U.S. Nat. Mus. 11. ZASPILOTHYNNUS DILATATUS (Smith), 1859. Thynnus dilatatus, Smith, 1859: 438 (9); D.T., 1897: 105 (9). ZT. (Macrothynnus) dilatatus, Turner, 1908: 197 (2). TT. atrox, Turner, 1908: 237 (fg). Zaspilothynnus dilatatus, Turner, 19100: 300 (fg, 2 in cop.). South Perth, W.A. Zaspilothynnus dilatatus subspecies spiculifer, Turner, 1915a: 43 (4, 2). Southern Cross, W.A. 12. ZASPILOTHYNNUS EXCAVATUS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus excavatus, Turner, 1908: 216 (¢, 2). Zaspilothynnus excavatus, Turner, 1910c: Pl. 4, figs. 91, 92; Turner, 1916: 117. Kuranda, Cairns and Cooktown, North Queensland. 13. ZASPILOTHYNNUS GILESI Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 303, Pl. XXXI, figs. 12, 13 (g, 2). South Perth, W.A. 14. ZASPILOTHYNNUS HACKERI Turner, 1912. Turner, 19120: 543 (¢, 2). Brisbane. 15. ZASPILOTHYNNUS LASIUS Montet, 1922. Montet, 1922: 223 (¢). N.S.W. 16. Type Species. ZASPILOTHYNNUS LEACHIELLUS (Westwood), 1844. Thynnus leachiellus, Westwood, 1844: 135, Pl. 83, f. 4 (2). TT. interruptus, Westwood, 1844: 115, Pl. 77, f.1 (¢). T. leachiellus, Smith, 1859: 17 (¢, 9); D.T., 1897: 109 (9, 3g). Zaspilothynnus leachiellus, Ashmead, 1903: 99 (¢). Thynnus leachiellis, Turner, 1908: 210 (3, 2). Zaspilothynnus interruptus, Turner, 1910c: 52 (3g, 9). Sydney; Moreton, Bay, Queensland. 17. ZASPILOTHYNNUS LIGNATUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 299 (3g, 2). South Perth, W.A. 18. ZASPILOTHYNNUS MATURUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 304 (2). South Perth, W.A. 19. ZASPILOTHYNNUS MULTISTRIGATUS (Turner), 1909. Thynnus multistrigatus, Turner, 1909: 143 (9). Richmond, N.S.W. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 20. ZASPILOTHYNNUS NEGLECTUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 300 (d, 9). N.S.W. 21. ZASPILOTHYNNUS NIGRIPES (Guérin), 1842. Thynnoides nigripes, Guérin, 1842: 10 (¢); Westwood, 1844: 103 (¢). Thynnus (Thynnoides) nigripes, Smith, 1859: 22 (¢). Thynnus nigripes, D.T., 1897: 111; Turner, 1908: 2388 (¢). Zaspilothynnus nigripes, Turner, 1910b: 301 (ee Qin cop.). T. nigripes, Guiglia, 1948: 177. Swan River, W. Aust. 22. ZASPILOTHYNNUS NOVARAE (Saussure), 1867. Thynnus (Thynnoides) novarae, Saussure, 1867: 119 (¢, 2). T. novarae, D.T., 1897: 112 (9, g). TT. remissus, Schulz, 1906: 161 (9, ¢). TT. novarae, Turner, 1908: 235. Sydney, N.S.W. 23. ZASPILOTHYNNUS OBLIQUESTRIATUS Turner, 1911. Turner, 19110: 613 (¢, 2). Kuranda, Queensland. 24. ZASPILOTHYNNUS OCHROCEPHALUS (Smith), 1868. Thynnus ochrocephalus, Smith, 1868: 231 (¢); D.T., 1897: 112 (¢); Turner, 1908: 205 (¢); Kirby, 1896: 207. Champion Bay, W.A. 310 STUDIES ON :AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 25. ZASPILOTHYNNUS PICTICOLLIS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus picticollis, Turner, 1908: 216 (9); Turner, 1909: 144 (2); Turner, 1910c: 53, Pl. 4, fig. 90 (2). Swan Rv., W.A: 26. ZASPILOTHYNNUS PSEUSTES (Turner), 1908, Thynnus pseustes, Turner, 1908: 2385 (0,9). Sydney. Types in Oxford Museum. 27. ZASPILOTHYNNUS RADIALIS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 302, Pl. XXXI, fig. 11 (¢). Hermannsburg, Central Aust. 28. ZASPILOTHYNNUS RHYNCHIOIDES Turner, 1913. Turner, 1913: 616. Borroloola, Northern Territory. Type in Victorian Nat. Mus. 29. ZASPILOTHYNNUS RUBROPICTUS Turner, es Turner, 19387: 144 (¢, 2). Dongarra, W. Aust. 30. ZASPILOTHYNNUS RUGICOLLIS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 43 (¢, 2). Yallingup, S.W. Aust. 31. ZASPILOTHYNNUS SEDUCTOR (Smith), 1868. Thynnus seductor, Smith, 1868: 234 (¢); D.T., 1897: 115 (¢); Turner, 1908: 215 (3, 2). Champion Bay, W.A. 32. ZASPILOTHYNNUS Siccus (Turner), 1908. Thynnus siccus, Turner, 1908b: 66 (¢). Central Australia. B38}, ZASPILOTHYNNUS SIMPLEX (Smith), 1879. Thynnus simplex, Smith, 1879: 167 (¢); D.T., 1897: 116 (¢); Turner, 1908: 238 (¢). Champion Bay, W.A. 34. ZASPILOTHYNNUS STRATIFRONS Turner, 1917. Turner, 1917: 58 (dg, ). Stradbroke Island, Moreton Bay. 35. ZASPILOTHYNNUS TRILOBATUS Turner, 1910. Turner, 19100: 297 (¢, 2). South Perth, W. Aust. 36. ZASPILOTHYNNUS UNIPUNCTATUS Turner, 1915. Turner, 1915a: 41 (3, 2), Pl. 1, figs. 1, 2. Yallingup, South-west Aust. 37. ZASPILOTHYNNUS. VERNALIS (Turner), 1908. Thynnus vernalis, Turner, 1908: 210 (¢, 2); 1910c: 538, Pl. 2, figs. 31, 32. Mackay, Q. 38. ZASPILOTHYNNUS RUFOLUTEUS (Turner), 1910. Thynnus rufoluteus, Turner, 1910a: 114; Turner, 191la: 302 (92). Cooktown, Queensland. Genus 34. THyNNuUS Fabricius, 1775. Thynnus, Fabricius, 1775. Myrmecodes, Latreille, 1809. Homalothynnus, Enderlein, 1904. Type species, Thynnus dentatus Fab. 1. THYNNUS ALBOPILOSELLUS CED Oia 1906. Cameron, 1906: 215 (¢). New Guinea. 2. THYNNUS ATRATUS Smith, 1862. Smith, 1862: 51 (¢); Smith, 1865: 77 (2); D.T., 1897: 102 (g, 9); Turner, 1908: 250. Halmaheira; Gilolo. 3. THYNNUS BAKERI Rohwer, 1925. Rohwer, 1925: 418, Pl. 1, f. 4-5. Philippine Islands (Luzon ?). 4. THYNNUS BRENCHLEYI Smith, 1873. Smith, 1873: 456, T. 43, f 2.(¢); D.T., 1897: 103 (4); Turner, 1908: 204 (dg, 2); Turner, 1910a: 117. Cooktown, Q.; Champion Bay, W.A. (Smith); Narrabri, N.S.W.: Mackay, Q. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 311 5. THYNNUS BRISBANENSIS Turner, 1909. Turner, 1909: 145 (2). tradbroke Is., Moreton Bay. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 6. THYNNUS DARWINIENSIS Turner, 1908. Turner, 1908: 206 (¢). Port Darwin. 7. Type Species. THYNNUS DENTATUS Fabricius, 1775. Fabricius, 1775: 360 (¢); Fabricius, 1781: 475 (¢); Fabricius, 1787: 284 (2); Roemer, 1789: 59 (¢);. Gmelin, 1790: 2739 (¢). Vespa dentata, Christ, 1791: 228 (2). 1. dentatus, Fabricius, 1793: 244 (); Fabricius, 1804: 231 (¢); Donovan, 1805: Pl. 41, Cf. 1 (¢); Latreille, 1805: 278 (¢); Latreille, 1806: Pl. 13, f. 2-4 (¢); Jurine, 1807: 179 (¢); Latreille, 1809: 111 (¢); Lamarck, 1817: 109; Latreille, 1818: 77 (¢); Lepeletier, 1825: 645, Pl. 106, f. 17; Lamarck, 1835: 324; Guérin, 1838: 222 (¢); Blanchard, 1840: 375 (¢); Klug, 1840/2; 15 (¢); Westwood, 1844: 102 (4); Lepeletier, 1845: 570 (2); Smith, 1859: 11 (0); D.T., 1897: 105 (¢); Ashmead, 1903: 98 (¢); Turner, 1908: 199 (3, 2); Turner, 1910c: 54 (dg, 2), Pl. 2, figs. 35, 36, Pl. 4, figs. 93, 94. Cooktown, Cairns, Lizard Island. ; 8. THYNNUS ELGNERI Turner, 1908. Turner, 1908: 207 (¢). Cape York. Type in Coll. Froggatt. 9. THYNNUS EMARGINATUS Fabricius, 1775. Fabricius (? in error) see references quoted for Thynnus dentatus from 1775 to 1805; Guérin, 1838: 229 (4); Westwood, 1844: 102 (g); Smith, 1859: 16 (¢); D.T., 1897: 105 (¢ in error); Turner, 1908: 202 (¢). Cooktown, North Queensland. 10. THYNNUS ERRATICUS Smith, 1860. Smith, 1860: 114 (¢); D.T., 1897: 105 (¢); Turner, 1908: 251 (¢). Batchian. 11. THYNNUS LUGUBRIS Smith, 1864. Smith, 1864; 25 (4); D.T., 1897: 110 (¢); Turner, 1908: 250 (¢); Turner, 1910a: 118 (9). Ceram. 12. THYNNUS LUZONICUS Turner, 1908. Turner, 1908b: 65 (dg, 9); Rohwer, 1925: 419, Pl. 1, fig. 6. Polillo Island (off coast of Luzon). 13. THYNNUS MUTANDUS Turner, 1912. Turner, 1912: 544 (9, ¢). Aru Island. 14. THYNNUS OLIVACEUS Turner, 1908. Tas 1908: 251 (fg, 9); Turner, 1940: 91 (2). Kokoda, New Guinea. 15. THYNNUS PEDESTRIS (habriciey? 1775. Tiphia pedestris, Fabricius, 1775: 354; Fabricius, 1781: 452; Fabricius, 1787: 280; Gmelin, 1790: 2742. Sphex pedestris, Christ, 1791: 267. Tiphia pedestris, Fabricius, 1793: 228; Fabricius, 1804: 235. Myrmecodes pedestris, Latreille, 1809: 118. Mutilla myrmecodes, Lamarck, 1817: 100. Myrmecodes pedestris, Lepeletier, 1825: 654. Thynnus pedestris, Guérin, 1838: 231 (2). Mutilla myrmecodes, Lamarck, 1835: 316. Thynnus pedestris, Klug, 1840/2: 16 (2). Myrmecodes pedestris, Lepeletier, 1845: 587 (9). Thynnus pedestris, Westwood, 1844: 102; Smith, 1859: 16; D.T., 1897: 113 (2); Turner, 1908: 203 (2); Ashmead, 1903: 100, 107. Australia (Banks). 16. THYNNUS PLACIDUS Smith, 1864. Smith, 1864: 26 (¢); D.T., 1897: 113 (3); Turner, 1908: 251 (¢). Waigiou. 17. THYNNUS PULCHRALIS Smith, 1859. Sitti tsps (Gis Smith Neda aso th) Dal Leo: Id (Sis murnen, 1908: 200. Adelaide to Cooktown. 18. THYNNUS PULLATUS Smith, 1864. Smith, 1864: 26 (¢); D.T., 1897: 114 (¢); Turner, 1908: 251. Bouru. 312 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. I, 19. THYNNUS SABULOSUS Turner, 1908. Turner, 1908: 208 (2); Turner, 1909: 144 (2). Adelaide River, Northern Territory. 20. THYNNUS SERRIGER Sharp, 1900. Sharp, 1900; 888 (iv), Pl. xxxv, fig. 18 (2); Turner, 1908: 251; Turner, 1910a: 119. New Britain. 21. THYNNUS VENTRALIS Smith, 1865. Smith, 1865: 389 (9). T. conspicuus, Smith, 1873: 457, Pl. 438, fig. 3 (¢) (nec T. conspicuus, Smith, 1868). TT. smithii, Froggatt, 1891: 16 (¢); D.T., 1897: 118 (2). T. ventralis, D.T., 1897: 118. JT. wackernellii, D.T., 1897: 118. Homalothynnus eburneus, Enderlein, 1904: 468. 7. ventralis, Turner, 1908: 201 (¢, 2); Turner, 1909: 146; Turner, 1910c, Pl. 2, figs. 33, 34. King George Sound, Roebourne, North-west Aust. 22. THYNNUS ZONATUS Guérin, 1838. Guérin, 1838: 222 (¢); Klug, 1840: 15 (¢); Guérin, 1842: 7, Pl. 100, figs. 8-12 (¢); Westwood, 1844: 102 (¢); Smith, 1859: 12 (¢). T. nigropectus, Smith, 1879: 165 (3). T. zonatus, D.T., 1897: 119 (¢). TT. nigropectus, D.T., 1897: 112 (¢). T. zonatus, Turner, 1908: 207 (¢). Swan River, Roebourne. North-west Aust. 23. THYNNUS cooKII Turner, 1910. Turner, 1910a: 116 (9). Cooktown, Q. Genus 35. IswarompEs Ashmead, 1899. Ashmead, 1899: 50-51; Ashmead, 1903: 98; Turner, 1908: 253. Type species, Iswaroides koebelei Ashmead. 1. ISWAROIDES KOEBELEL Ashmead, 1899. Ashmead, 1899: 50 (¢, 2); Ashmead, 1903: 98; Turner, 1908: 253; Turner, 1910c: 55; Rohwer, 1910a: 349-51. Australia. Bibliography. AGASSIZ, J. Louis R., 1842 to 1846.—Nomenclator Zoologicus, continens nomina systematica generum Animalium tam viventium quam fossilium.... Auctore L. Agassiz. ASHMEAD, W. H., 1896.—Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., xxii: 179, 180. ———., 1899.—_J. N.Y. Ent. Soc., vii, Mar.: 50-51. , 1903.—Classification of the Fossorial, Predaceous and Parasitic Wasps, of the Super- family Vespoidea (continued). Canad. Ent. xxxv, January 5: 3-8; February 6: 39-44; April 1: 95-107; June 4: 155-158; July (June 380): 199-205; November 6: 303-310; December 4: 323-332. : BrEQUAERT, JOSEPH C., 1926.—The date of publication of the Hymenoptera and Diptera described by Guérin in Duperrey’s “Voyage de la Coquille’. Hnt. Mitt., Berlin, xv, Marz 20: 186-195. BLANCHARD, C. E., 1849.—In Cuvier, G., L.C.F.D., Le Régne Animal (Ed. 3). Les Insectes. 4to. Paris. Vol. vi. ‘Disciples’ Edition’’. BOIsDUVAL, J., 1832.—Faune Entomologique de 1]’Ocean Pacifique, avec l’Illustration des Insectes nouveaux recueillis pendant le Voyage. Pt. ii. Voyage de découvertes de L’Astrolabe... pendant . . - 1826-29: 655. CAMERON, P., 1906.—Hymenoptera of the Dutch Expedition to New Guinea, 1904-1905. Part i. Tijdschr. v. EHnt., 49: 215. New Guinea. , 1909.—Hymenoptera. Nova Guinea, ix: 187. CHRIST, 1791.—Naturg. d. Insect.: 288. Vesper dentata. DaLLA TORRE, K. W. VON, 1897.—Catalogus Hymenopterorum hucusque descriptorum syste- maticus et synonymicus. 8vo. Lipsiae. (G. Engelmann). Fossores (Sphegidae). Vol. Vili: 99-119. DoNovAN, E., 1805.—An Epitome of the Natural History of the Insects of New Holland, New Zealand, Otaheite, and other Islands in the Indian, Southern, and Pacific Oceans: including the Figures and Descriptions of One hundred and fifty-three Species, ete. 4to. London. lene I, Illes SIUM, sale, il, EWNDERLEIN, G., 1904.—Homalothynnus, eine neue Thynniden-Gattung. Zool. Anz., xxvii: 466-470. HrRIcHSon, W. F., 1842, 1843, 1844.—Bericht tiber die Wissenschaftlichen Leistungen im Gabiete der Entomologie wahrend des Jahres, 1840, 1841, 1842: 64, 86, 98. BY K. E. W. SALTER. 313 HRICHSON, W. F., 1842.—Beitrag zur Fauna von Vandiemensland mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die Geographische Verbreitung der Insecten. Arch. f. Naturg. (Wiegmann), viii: 83-287. Fapricius, J. C., 1775.—Systema Entomologiae, sistens Insectorum Classes, Ordines, Genera, Species, adiectis Synonymis, Locis, Descriptionibus, Observationibus. 8vo. Flensburgi et Lipsiae. Pp. 1-832. (This work contains the descriptions of the insects taken in Australia by Banks and Solander, the naturalists on Captain Cook’s Hndeavour, when on the return journey to England. ) , 1781.—Species Insectcrum exhibentes eorum Differentias, Specificas, Synonyma auctorum, Loca Natalia, Metamorphosin adiectis Observationibus, Descriptionibus. 8vo. Hamburgi et Kilonii. Vols. i-ii. , 1787.—Mantissa Insectorum sistens eorum Species Nuper Detectas adiectis Characteribus, Genericis, Differentiis, Specificis, Hmendationibus, Observationibus. S8vo. Hafniae. Vols. i-ii. ———, 1793.—Entomologia Systematica. 8vo. Hafniae. Vols. i-iv, 1792-94. Suppl. Jbid., 1798. ———, 1804.—Systema Piezatorum. $8vo. Brumnsvigae, pp. 231 and 235. FrRoGGAtTT, W. W., 1891a.—Catalogue of the described Hymenoptera of Australia. Part I. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W. (2) v, 1890, 4 (March 23, 1891): 689-762. 1891b.—Notes on a small collection of Hymenoptera from Narrabri, N.S.W. PROC. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vi, 1 (September 9): 13-16. ——, 1893.—Hymenoptera (of the Elder Expedition). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xvi, June: 69-73. GMELIN, J. F., 1790.—Caroli a Linne. Systema Naturae. Editio decima tertia aucta reformata cura J. F. Gmelin. 3 Tom. (in 7). 8vo. Lipsiae, 1788-93. Tom. 1, Pt. 5. Insecta, pp. 2739 and 2742. GRIFFITH, E., PIDGEON, E., and GRAy, G., 1832.—The Animal Kingdom arranged in conformity with its Organization by the Baron. Cuvier, with Supplementary Additions to each Order by Edward Griffith. 8vo. London. 16 vols. illustr., 1827-35. Vol. XV, p. 516, Plate 71, ommoe GUERIN-MENEVILLE, F. E., 1830.—Atlas. Ins: ese xscie In Duperrey, Voyage Autour du Monde... . La Coquille. Livraison 26, Pl. 8, 15 November, 1831. ———, 1838.—In Duperrey, Voyage Autour du Monde sur.... La Coquille... . 1822-1825, ete. Zool., ii, 2, Div. 1, Chap. xiii, Insectes, pp. 57-302. , 1842.—Matériaux sur les Thynnides: destinés 4 faire suite 4 un travail publié dans le VUE? autour du Monde du Capitaine Duperrey. Mag. de Zool., (2) iv, Insectes, Pl. 99-105, pp. 1-15. , 1844-5.—Iconographie du Regne Animal de G. Cuvier. III, Insectes, pp. 1-559: Table Alphabétique des Genres, Sous-genres et Espeéces figués ou décrits, ete., pp. 561-576. S8vo. Paris. 1829-45. GuiIcLia, D., 1948.—I tipo di Imenotteri del Guérin esistenti nelle collezioni del Museo di Genova. Annali Mus. Stor. nat. Genova, 63: 176-7. HAGEN, H. A., 1862 and 1863.—Bibliotheca Entomologica. Die Litteratur tiber das ganze gebiet der Entomologie bis zum Jahre, 1862. 8vo. Leipzig. 2 Bd. Erster Band A-M, 1862; Zweiter Band N-Z. Mit einem Systematischen Sachregister, 1863. Horn, W., and SCHENKLING, S., 1928 and 1929.—Index Litteraturae Entomologicae. Serie I: Die Welt-Literatur tiber die gesamte HMntomologie bis inklusive 1863. Berlin. 1928. Hutton, 1881.—Catalogue of N.Z. Diptera, p. 110. JURINE, L., 1807.—Nouvelle Méthode de Classer les Hyménoptéres et les Diptéres. Hymeén- opteres. Tome 1. 4to. Genéve. Pp. 179%. ; IKkirBy, W., 1818.—A description of several new species of Insects collected in New Holland by Robert Brown, Esq., F.R.S., Lib. Linn. Soe. Trans. Linn. Soc., London, xii: 476. KirBy, W. FORSELL, 1898.—Hymenoptera. In Report on the Work of the Horn Scientific Expedition in Central Australia. Part I, Supplement, pp. 203-209. Kuue, J. C. F., 1842.—Ueber die Insectenfamilie Heterogyna Latr., und die Gattung Thynnus F. insbesondere. Abh. Konigl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1840 (1842): pp. 1-44, 399-400, mit 1 col. Taf. LAMARCK, J. B. P. A. DE M. DE, 1817.—Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertébres. (Premier Edition, 1817; Deuxiéme Edition, 1835.) LATREILLE, P. A., 1802.—Histoire Naturelle des Fourmis, et recueil de Mémoires et d’Observations sur les Abeilles, les Araignées, les Faucheurs, et autres insectes. 8vo. Paris. , 1805.—Histoire Naturelle des Crustacies et Insectes. Tome Treizieme. P. 278. Genre ecelxxvii® Thynne. , 1806 to 1809.—Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum secundum ordinem naturalem in familias disposita, iconibus exemplisque plurimus explicata. 8vo. Parisiis et Argentorati. 4 Tom. illustr. 5 ——_—, 1818.—Nouveau Dictionnaire d'Histoire Naturelle, etc., Nouvelle Edition. S8vo. Paris 36 Toms. Tom. xxii, 1818: 77. LeacH, W. E., 1819.—Description de deux espéces de Thynnus F. découvertes dans la Nouvelle Hollande par Rob. Brown. J. de Physique, 1xxxviii, Feb.: 178. (Thynnus brownii, Th. variabilis. ) ; 314 STUDIES ON AUSTRALIAN THYNNIDAE. 1, LEPELETIER, A. L. M. (Comte de Saint Fargeau), 1825.—Hncyclopédie Méthodique, x. Histoire Naturelle Entomologie. Tome x, p. 645. , 1845.—Histoire Naturelle des Insectes. Hyménoptéres. Tome iii, p. 571. No. 2. TT. 35, F. 6. MAcCLEAY, W. S8., 1826.—Annulosa, Catalogue of Insects, collected by Captain King, R.N. In Captain Phillip P. King, Narrative of a Survey of the Intertropical and Western Coasts of Australia performed between the years 1818 and 1822. Vol. ii (April 18, 1826, teste Sherborn), Appendix B, pp. 4388-469, tab. B. Montet, 1922.—Thynnides nouveaux du Museum d’Histoire Naturelle de Généve. Rev. Suisse Zool. Geneva, 29: 177-226. MusGRAVE, A., 1930.—Bibliography of Australian Entomology, 1775-1930. Sydney. NpAVE, S. A., 1950.—Nomenclator Zoologicus. 8vo. London. Oncorhinus III: 419. Ouivier, A. G., 1811.—Encyclopédie Méthodique. Insectes. Tome viii, p. 137, n. 7. OuuirrF, A. S., 1889.—The Insect Fauna of Lord Howe Island. Mem. Austr. Mus., ii, No. 4: 75-98, pl. vi. Pate, V. S. L., 1947.—A conspectus of the Tiphiidae with particular reference to the Nearctic Forms. J. N.Y. Ent. Soc., LV, June, 1947: 115-143. RAYMENT, TARLTON, 1935.—A Cluster of Bees. RITsEMA, C., 1876.—-Descriptions of Exotic Aculeate Hymenoptera. Hntom. Mag., xii: 185. ROEMER, J. J., 1789.—Genera Insectorum Linnaei et Fabricii. Iconibus Illustrata. 4to. Vitoduri Helvetiorum. Pp. 1-viii, 1-86. Index Tabularum and Index Generum. Pp. 1-3. Tab. i-xxxvii, col. and 6 col. figs. frontispiece. (Thynnus dentatus Fab., p. 59, n. 121, Tab. xxxv, fig. 8. New Holland.) RouHwer, S. A., 1910.—Turner’s Genera of the Thynnidae with notes on Ashmeadian genera. Ent. News. Philadelphia, xxi, No. 8: 345-351 and 474. ———., 1925.—New Thynnid Wasps from the Oriental and Australian Regions. Philippine J. Sci., xxvi, 3 (March): 415-420, pl. SAUSSURE, H. L. F., 1868.—Hymenoptera. Familien der Vespiden, Sphegiden, Pompiliden, Crabroniden und Heterogynen. Reise der... Fregatte Novara wm die Erde... 1857-59, Zool. Th., Bd. ii, 1 Abth. A. 2, pp. 2-138, 4 Tafl. SS pigod pane non ures divers du Musée Godeffroy. Ent. Zeitung Stettin, xxx, No. 1-3: Jo- 5 i ScHONHERR, C. J., 1833.—Gen. et Sp. Cur. I (i) 22: (Oncorhinus). ScHuuz, G. L., 1908.—Fossores. Die Fauna Sitidwest-Australiens, hrsg. v. W. Michaelsen u. R. Hartmeyer. Bd. I, Lfg. 138, Jena (G. Fischer), pp. 447-488. : ScHuLZ, W. A., 1906.—Spolia Hymenopterologica. SHaArP, D., 1900.—Willey’s Zool. Results, Vol. 4: 388. SuHucKARD, W. E., 1838.—Descriptions of new Exotic Aculeate Hymenoptera. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., ii, 1 (February 5): 68-82, Pl. viii. ———, 1840.—See Swainson and Shuckard, 1840. ——, 1841.—Hymenoptera. Oncorhinus Shuck. Family Thynnidae Shuckard. In George Grey, Journals of two Eapeditions of Discovery in North-west and Western Australia, during . . . 1837-38, vol. ii, Appendix F, pp. 470-471. (Oncorhinus xanthospilos, p. 471, King George’s Sound. ) SmitTH, F., 1859.—Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects in the Collection of the British Museum. 12mo. London. Part vii. Dorylidae and Thynnidae. Pp. 1-76, Pls. i-iii. ————, 1859b.—Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects collected by A. R. Wallace. J. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., iii: 151. Myzine tenwicornis. —~—-—, 1862.—Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects collected by A. R. Wallace. J. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., V1: 51. ———, 1864.—Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects collected by A. R. Wallace. J. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., vii: 25-27. ———, 1865a.—Deseriptions of new species of Hymenopterous Insects. . . . collected by A. R. Wallace. J. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., viii: 77-8. , 1865b.—Descriptions of some New Species of Hymenopterous Insects belonging to the Families Thynnidae, Masaridae, and Apidae. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., (3) ii, 5 (September 27): 389-399, Pl. xxi. , 1868.—Descriptions of Aculeate Hymenoptera from Australia. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1868, Pt. ii (July 13): 231-258. (Material collected by Mr. Du Boulay in the neighbour- hood of Champion Bay, W. Australia.) , 1873.—Natural History Notices. Insects, Hymenoptera aculeata. In J. L. Brenchley’s Jottings during the Cruise of H.M.S. Curagoa among the South Sea Islands in 1865, pp. 456-463. , 1879.—Descriptions of new species of Hymenoptera in the Collection of the British Museum. S8vo. London. Pp. i-xxi, 1-240. SWAINSON, W., and SHUCKARD, W. E., 1840.—On the History and Natural Arrangement of Insects. In D. Lardner’s The Cabinet (Cyclopaedia). 8mo. London. Pp. 1-406, text-figs. TURNER, R. E., 1907.—A Revision of the Thynnidae of Australia. Hymenoptera. Part I. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxii, 2 (August 20): 206-290. ry BESET AE ty op = BY K. E. W. SALTER. 315 TURNER, R. E., 1908a.—A Revision of the Thynnidae of Australia. Hymenoptera. Party pile Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiii, 2 (March 28, 1908): 70-208; l.c., 3 (August 14): 209-256. , 19086.—Notes on the Thynnidae, with remarks on some aberrant genera of the Scoliidae. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1908, Pt. i (June 5): 63-87. , 1909.—Remarks on some new or little known species of Thynnidae (Hymenoptera). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) ili, February: 131-146. , 1910a.—New Species of Thynnidae from the Australian and Austro-Malayan Regions in the Collection of the Hungarian National Museum. Ann. Hist. Nat. Mus. Nat. Hung., viii, 1 (June 20): 107-124. , 1910b.—Additions to our Knowledge of the Fossorial Wasps of Australia. Proc. Zool. SoG vonds 1905 Pt une 25) 2 259-3016) Pls) xa xxii. , 1910e_—Hymenoptera. Fam. Thynnidae. Genera Insectorum, fasc. 105: 1-62, Pls. i-iv. ———, 191la.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera. lii. Thynnidae. Ain. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) vii, April: 301. — , 1911b.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera. V. Further notes on the Thynnidae and Scoliidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) viii, November: 602-624. , 1912a.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera. IX. On some New Species from the Australian and Austro-Malayan Regions. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) x, July: 48-63. , 1912b.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera. XI. On some new Australian and Austro- Malayan Thynnidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) x, November: 533-546. , 1914.—New Fossorial Hymenoptera from Australia and Tasmania. PRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii, 1913, 4 (March 23, 1914): 608-623. , 1915a.—Descriptions of New Fossorial Wasps from Australia. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1915, 12 1 OMiewaea 7G)) 3 ZhleGO, Ie i , 1915b.—Notes on Fossorial Wasps. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) xv: 537-559. , 1916.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera. XIX. On New Species from Australia. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) xvii, January: 116-136. , 1917.—New Species of Hymenoptera in the British Museum. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1917, Pt. i (November 24): 58. , 1919.—Description of three New Species of Thynnidae (Hymenoptera). Rec. S. Austr. Mus., i, No. 3 (August 30): 169-171. , 1937.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera—Thynnidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10) xix, September: 144-150. , 1940a.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera New Guinea Thynnidae, collected by Miss Cheesman. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) 5, (25) Jan.: 91-95. ———, 1940b.—Notes on Fossorial Hymenoptera—On New Australian Species—Thynnidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (11) 5, (25) Jan.: 96-103. WeESTWoop, J. O., 1835.—Diamma bicolor, Description of. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 111: 53. , 1844a.—Illustrations of some Genera of Fossorial Hymenopterous Insects, belonging to the Family Sphegidae. Arcana EHntomologica, ii, January 1: 65-68, Pl. Ixv. , 1844b.—TIllustrations of some species of Australian Thynnideous Insects. Arcana Entomologica, ii, May 1: 101-110, Pls. lxxiv-]lxxv. , 1844¢—Further Illustrations of the Thynnideous Insects of Australia. Arcana Entomologica, ii, September 1: 135-146, Pls. Ixxxi-lxxxiii. ———_, 1851.— Trans. Hint. Soc. Lond., (2) I, 7: 288, T. 7, f. 5. ———— 1881.—Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond.: 133, T. 7, f. 5. ee ow i 1) at ae > \ “4 ne 1 Me ; 1 i t f ie gst t on up v i ity ty ] i \ A i ‘ur Te ee os fi er WT ae i oe bese then A eh 15s py ale Fons / 14 Era Ti einen User MrT rn Aaek! rs - ‘ ' tA shh, Mle Kita oe) 7h avai ‘oubiiwine ‘ ‘ Ty 1 a ow ne fee ae geet terotiy Flee TET oe hot ieae: Tat: f wirebitd bd ten 2 pout to%. ant ih, | Ms t i ; oath pe bint HAbinawT ey wetuacree MPGh Lees NTR aetna FY . a Es riety eT i iaivemitobh-uds. To suse, SAP a ; peta OR on hs Ff “tri Bb , ; , . i } Lat ie Satire tes OF airs ae jc eg) WARE I a Oe Oe See {itses) hee UA ARE gE s dHaberuritnaEeee AN “deere Ley aE an i te y eye Notes nev: 4 : a eS Se | is yA re pee ra 4 pniowiis i [AttORsp™) 400 wore ALL ¥ 1h Areata aay Po ter CAMP tie Ave i “SEN he nti i Be Oe y Wena tye¥ syne Be Lia eee Dele) igs? eae ees mfoe rivlatenoress A Dae poe iy fit ee aay ts td ts BA ret ia, | pak Le eee G a Wey i kg . ’ \ iy ee, Bas sf: ore els | a ih Pet jl: eeyies yes ee . ths vir TAY etd Y ‘ih vie Pe se erect ; et Oe Te) ta sess AREGL jes Se, fae 3 oa A ae bate a int Ps ; ta . AS Nei rar J pe | (in ce. ese eS aoe ea tke ene ie Ai i a, rate m : Poa ey i wat theo a hon piseioaaniele [key oa J 5 otyi i ‘ mut, ft joRaATy PL fed ree eaec™ 5 ae . An CELT Ga EEE Ade ye yer ae - ea fea ag OTF td eT aid TOA PE ie a LTE ke ari ye niald jrronact Cordonaet 4h Rt ae oe? Aree i) MARRS a ay 1h ey 2 | S00 4 i a ue TL aetel 3 y Aare tt xli ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ORDINARY MONTHLY MERTING. 25th Marcu, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, in the chair. Library accessions amounting to 59 volumes, 360 parts or numbers, 18 bulletins, 11 reports and 10 pamphlets, total 458, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ (by title only). 1. Australian Rust Studies. XI. Experiments in Crossing Wheat and Rye. By W. L. Waterhouse. 2. Genetic Control in Hucalyptus Distribution. By L. D. Pryor. 3. A New Subspecies of Cermatulus nasalis (Westwood) (Hemiptera-Heteroptera: Pentatomidae). By T. E. Woodward. (Communicated by F. A. Perkins.) ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 29th Aprin, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council had elected the following office-bearers for the 1953-54 session: Vice-Presidents: Dr. A. R. Woodhill, Mr. D. J. Lee, Mr. A. N. Colefax and Mr. S. J. Copland; Honorary Treasurer: Dr. A. B. Walkom; Honorary Secretaries: Dr. W. R. Browne and Dr. A. B. Walkom. The following were elected Ordinary Members of the Society: Mr. D. E. Edwards, B.Se.Agr., Division of Wood Technology, Sydney; Dr. A. T. Hotchkiss, Sydney University; Dr. E. J. Reye, M.B., B.S. (Univ. Qld.), Yeerongpilly, Queensland; Miss Hilda R. Simons, B.Sc., Killara, N.S.W.; and Miss Jill A. Whitehouse, B.Sc., Strathfield, N.S.W. Congratulations were offered to Mr. P. H. Durie, Mr. J. A. Keast, Miss Elizabeth N. Marks, Miss Alison A. Millerd, Miss Dorothy EH. Shaw and Dr. D. F. Waterhouse on obtaining the degrees of M.Sc., M.Se., Ph.D., Ph.D. (Syd.), M.Se.Agr., and D.Sc. respectively. Library accessions amounting to 18 volumes, 141 parts or numbers, 5 bulletins, 1 report and 2 pamphlets, total 167, had been received since the last meeting. The papers taken as read at the March Ordinary Monthly Meeting were discussed. PAPERS READ. 1. A New Species of Austroasca Lower (Cicadellidae, Homoptera). By Harry F. Lower. 2. A New Species of Pelecorhynchus (Diptera, Tabanoidea) from the Dorrigo Plateau, New South Wales. By I. M. Mackerras and M. J. Mackerras. 3. Factors worth considering when making Measurements of Trombiculid Larvae. By Carl HK. M. Gunther. 4. On Australian Helodidae. Part I. Descriptions of New Genera and Species. By J. W. T. Armstrong. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Professor John A. Moore, Fulbright Professor, from Columbia University, N.Y., on Experimental Studies on the Evolution of Australian Frogs. xlii ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 27th May, 1953. Dr. A. B. Walkom occupied the Chair. Mrs. Beatrice Mary Errey, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 17 volumes, and 90 parts or numbers, total 107, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Anther Shape in Hucalyptus Genetics and Systematics. By L. D. Pryor. 2. Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. III. Azotobacter beijerinckii (Lipman, 1903) var. acido-tolerans (Tchan, 1952). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 3. An Undescribed Species of Grevillea from the Rylstone District. By H. S. McKee. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Dr. Y. T. Tehan gave a short account of the life of S. N. Winogradsky (1856-1953), whose outstanding contributions to science opened new fields, not only in microbiology but also in physiology, biochemistry, agronomy and soil science. Mr. John Bunt exhibited some specimens of the Ascomycete Lachnea scutellata, identified from material collected at Macquarie Island during 1951. The fungus forms small bright red ascomae on the soil surface. The same species has also been recorded from Tasmania and Tierra del Fuego, and a closely related species occurs in New Zealand and Kerguelen Island. The Macquarie Island representatives have probably had their origin in New Zealand. Rev. R. G. Palmer exhibited three female specimens of filariae, probably Diplotriaena clelandi Johnston, from the right auricle of the heart of a magpie, Gymnorhina tibicen, from Glen Davis, 21st March, 1953. The specimens had been submitted to Dr. M. J. Mackerras, who made the following comment: “The specimens which you have discovered in the heart are the only female worms found so far.’ Filarial worms occur in very odd places and are notoriously hard to find. The commonest site is in the peritoneal cavity in the walls of the air sacs. They have been found in the pericardium, heart, under the skin of the neck, behind the eye, and in the thigh muscles. Mr. T. G. Vallance exhibited a number of colour slides illustrating the Barrier Ranges region, N.S.W. The main rock types of the Willyama complex (Archaean), the Proterozoic Torrowangee Series and the Mootwingee Series were illustrated, as well as - certain siliceous mesa cappings near Fowler’s Gap. Dr. W. R. Browne exhibited a Kodachrome slide of the Snowy Mts. area, illustrating its character of a highly dissected elevated peneplain with residuals. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 24th Jung, 1958. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. Messrs. D. S. Simonett, M.Sc., Artarmon, N.S.W., and KE. T. Smith, Sunshine, Melbourne, Victoria, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 11 volumes, 73 parts or numbers, 2 bulletins, 1 report and 2 pamphlets, total 89, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Australian Fungi. New Species and Revisions. I. The Meliolaceae of Australia. By C. G. Hansford. si, ea ees ae xli ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 25th Marcu, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, in the chair. Library accessions amounting to 59 volumes, 360 parts or numbers, 18 bulletins, 11 reports and 10 pamphlets, total 458, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ (by title only). iL, Australian Rust Studies. XI. Experiments in Crossing Wheat and Rye. By W. L. Waterhouse. 2. Genetic Control in Hucalyptus Distribution. By L. D. Pryor. 3. A New Subspecies of Cermatulus nasalis (Westwood) (Hemiptera-Heteroptera: Pentatomidae). By T. E. Woodward. (Communicated by F.. A. Perkins.) ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 29th Aprin, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council had elected the following office-bearers for the 1953-54 session: Vice-Presidents: Dr. A. R. Woodhill, Mr. D. J. Lee, Mr. A. N. Colefax and Mr. S. J. Copland; Honorary Treasurer: Dr. A. B. Walkom; Honorary Secretaries: Dr. W. R. Browne and Dr. A. B. Walkom. The following were elected Ordinary Members of the Society: Mr. D. EH. Edwards, B.Se.Agr., Division of Wood Technology, Sydney; Dr. A. T. Hotchkiss, Sydney University; Dr. E. J. Reye, M.B., B.S. (Univ. Qld.), Yeerongpilly, Queensland; Miss Hilda R. Simons, B.Sce., Killara, N.S.W.; and Miss Jill A. Whitehouse, B.Sc., Strathfield, N.S.W. Congratulations were offered to Mr. P. H. Durie, Mr. J. A. Keast, Miss Elizabeth N. Marks, Miss Alison A. Millerd, Miss Dorothy E. Shaw and Dr. D. F. Waterhouse on obtaining the degrees of M.Sc., M.Se., Ph.D., Ph.D. (Syd.), M.Se.Agr., and D.Sc. respectively. Library accessions amounting to 18 volumes, 141 parts or numbers, 5 bulletins, 1 report and 2 pamphlets, total 167, had been received since the last meeting. The papers taken as read at the March Ordinary Monthly Meeting were discussed. PAPERS READ. 1. A New Species of Austroasca Lower (Cicadellidae, Homoptera). By Harry F. Lower. 2. A New Species of Pelecorhynchus (Diptera, Tabanoidea) from the Dorrigo Plateau, New South Wales. By I. M. Mackerras and M. J. Mackerras. 3. Factors worth considering when making Measurements of Trombiculid Larvae. By Carl EH. M. Gunther. 4. On Australian Helodidae. Part I. Descriptions of New Genera and Sopecies. By J. W. T. Armstrong. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Professor John A. Moore, Fulbright Professor, from Columbia University, N.Y., on Experimental Studies on the Evolution of Australian Frogs. xlii ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 27th May, 1953. Dr. A. B. Walkom occupied the Chair. Mrs. Beatrice Mary Errey, N.S.W. University of Technology, Sydney, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 17 volumes, and 90 parts or numbers, total 107, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Anther Shape in Hucalyptus Genetics and Systematics. By L. D. Pryor. 2. Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. III. Azotobacter beijerinckii (Lipman, 1903) var. acido-tolerans (Tchan, 1952). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. a 3. An Undescribed Species of Grevillea from the Rylstone District. By H. S. McKee. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Dr. Y. T. Tehan gave a short account of the life of S. N. Winogradsky (1856-1953), whose outstanding contributions to science opened new fields, not only in microbiology but also in physiology, biochemistry, agronomy and soil science. Mr. John Bunt exhibited some specimens of the Ascomycete Lachnea scutellata, identified from material collected at Macquarie Island during 1951. The fungus forms small bright red ascomae on the soil surface. The same species has also been recorded trom Tasmania and Tierra del Fuego, and a closely related species occurs in New Zealand and Kerguelen Island. The Macquarie Island representatives have probably had their origin in New Zealand. Rev. R.G. Palmer exhibited three female specimens of filariae, probably Diplotriaena clelandi Johnston, from the right auricle of the heart of a magpie, Gymnorhina tibicen, from Glen Davis, 21st March, 1953. The specimens had been submitted to Dr. M. J. Mackerras, who made the following comment: “The specimens which you have discovered in the heart are the only female worms found so far.” Filarial worms occur in very odd places and are notoriously hard to find. The commonest site is in the peritoneal cavity in the walls of the air sacs. They have been found in the pericardium, heart, under the skin of the neck, behind the eye, and in the thigh muscles. Mr. T. G. Vallance exhibited a number of colour slides illustrating the Barrier Ranges region, N.S.W. The main rock types of the Willyama complex (Archaean), the Proterozoic Torrowangee Series and the Mootwingee Series were illustrated, as well as certain siliceous mesa cappings near Fowler’s Gap. Dr. W. R. Browne exhibited a Kodachrome slide of the Snowy Mts. area, illustrating its character of a highly dissected elevated peneplain with residuals. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEBRTING. 24th JUNE, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. Messrs. D. S. Simonett, M.Se., Artarmon, N.S.W., and H. T. Smith, Sunshine, Melbourne, Victoria, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 11 volumes, 73 parts or numbers, 2 bulletins, 1 report and 2 pamphlets, total 89, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Australian Fungi. New Species and Revisions. I. The Meliolaceae of Australia. By C. G. Hansford. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xliii 2. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery—Adelong— Tumbarumba District, N.'S.W. I. Introduction and Metamorphism of the Sedimentary Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 3. Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. IV. Taxonomy of Genus Azotobacter (Beijerinck, 1901). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Miss K. English exhibited two larvae of Tabanidae collected in a garden at Roseville. One was a very large stout larva, mottled brown in colour, collected under decaying weeds and leaves; from a similar larva the Pangonine Scaptia vicina Taylor was obtained. The other was a smaller larva found when digging up part of a neglected lawn; this has not yet been bred through so it is not known to which species of Tabanid it belongs. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Mr. F. A. McNeill, of the Australian Museum—‘“A Search for Rarities along the Great Barrier Reef from Gladstone to Cairns”. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 29th Juny, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. Mr. W. R. Frame, Port Moresby, Papua-New Guinea, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 12 volumes, 82 parts or numbers, 3 bulletins. 3 reports and 2 pamphlets, total 102, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS. READ. 1. The Culex pipiens Group in South-eastern Australia. II. By N. V. Dobrotworsky and F. H. Drummond. (Communicated by D. J. Lee.) 2. A New Species of Pseudophryne from Victoria. By John A. Moore, Fulbright Research Scholar, Sydney University. (Communicated by L. OC. Birch.) 3. Cytology of Septoria and Selenophoma Spores. By Dorothy H. Shaw. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Dr. L. C. Birch, entitled “The Importance of Light in Animal Eeology”’. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 26th Ateust, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President. occupied the Chair. Mr. N. V. Dobrotworsky, M.Sc., University of Melbourne, Carlton, Victoria, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 63 volumes, 141 parts or numbers, 57 bulletins, 3 reports and 8 pamphlets, total 272, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Australian Rust Studies. XII. Specialization within Uromyces striatus Schroet. on Trigonella suavissima Lindl. and Medicago sativa L. By W. L. Waterhouse. 2. Studies of N-fixing Bacteria. V. Presence of Beijerinckia in Northern Australia and Geographic Distribution of Non-symbiotic N-fixing Microorganisms. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 3. Study of Soil Algae. II. The Variation of the Algal Population in Sandy Soils. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, and Jill A. Whitehouse. 4. The Genus Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia. By Dorothy HE. Shaw. Xliv ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Dr. Y. T. Tchan demonstrated a simple arrangement for a suitable lamp to provide uniform illumination for routine microscope work. It passes light through a cuvette containing very dilute suspension of milk in water, the size of the light source being controlled by a cardboard diaphragm. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Dr. B. J. Ralph, entitled “Oxidative Mechanisms in the Wood-rotting Fungi’. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 30th SEPTEMBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from 1st January, 1954, from qualified candidates. The range of actual salary is £650-£800, according to qualifications. Applica- tions should be lodged with the Hon. Secretary not later than Wednesday, 4th November, 1953. The President announced that Dr. Julian Huxley, who will be visiting Sydney in November next, will give an address to biologists at the University of Sydney at 8 p.m. on 11th November on “Evolution and Polymorphism”. The President also announced that an invitation to members had been received to attend the Annual Meeting of the Wild Life Preservation Society of Australia to be held in the Men’s Lounge, Fifth Floor, Federation House, 166 Phillip Street, Sydney, on Thursday, 22nd October, 1953, at 8 p.m. The business meeting will be followed by the screening of two films: ‘Australia’s Coral Wonderland” and “The Loon’s Necklace’. Library accessions amounting to 1 volume, 16 parts or numbers, and 50 bulletins, total 67, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery-Adelong- Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part II. Intermediate-Basic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 2. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery-Adelong- Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part III. The Granitic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 8. The Occurrence of Varved Clays in the Kosciusko District, N.S.W. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. \ LECTURETTE. Dr. N. C. W. Beadle gave a lecturette on “Death of the Mulga, and Decline in Soil Fertility in the West Darling Country”. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 28th OcToBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from 1st January, 1954, from qualified candidates. The range of actual salary is £650-£800, according to qualifications. Applications should be lodged with the Hon. Secretary not later than Wednesday, 4th November, 1953. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlili 2. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery—Adelong— Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. I. Introduction and Metamorphism of the Sedimentary Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 3. Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. IV. Taxonomy of Genus Azotobacter (Beijerinck, 1901). By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Miss K. English exhibited two larvae of Tabanidae collected in a garden at Roseville. One was a very large stout larva, mottled brown in colour, collected under decaying weeds and leaves; from a similar larva the Pangonine Scaptia vicina Taylor was obtained. The other was a smaller larva found when digging up part of a neglected lawn; this has not yet been bred through so it is not known to which species of Tabanid it belongs. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Mr. F. A. McNeill, of the Australian Museum—‘‘A Search for Rarities along the Great Barrier Reef from Gladstone to Cairns”. ORDINARY MONTHLY MERTING. 29th Jwny, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. Mr. W. R. Frame, Port Moresby, Papua—New Guinea, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 12 volumes, 82 parts or numbers, 3 bulletins. 3 reports and 2 pamphlets, total 102, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. The Culex pipiens Group in South-eastern Australia. II. By N. V. Dobrotworsky and F. H. Drummond. (Communicated by D. J. Lee.) 2. A New Species of Pseudophryne from Victoria. By John A. Moore, Fulbright Research Scholar, Sydney University. (Communicated by L. C. Birch.) 3. Cytology of Septoria and Selenophoma Spores. By Dorothy EH. Shaw. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Dr. L. C. Birch, entitled ‘“‘The Importance of Light in Animal Ecology”. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 26th Ateust, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. .Mr. N. V. Dobrotworsky, M.Se., University of Melbourne. Carlton, Victoria, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. Library accessions amounting to 63 volumes, 141 parts or numbers, 57 bulletins, 3 reports and 8 pamphlets, total 272, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Australian Rust Studies. XII. Specialization within Uromyces striatus Schroet. on Trigonella suavissima Lindl. and Medicago sativa L.' By W. L. Waterhouse. 2. Studies of N-fixing Bacteria. V. Presence of Beijerinckia in Northern Australia and Geographic Distribution of Non-symbiotic N-fixing Microorganisms. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 3. Study of Soil Algae. II. The Variation of the Algal Population in Sandy Soils. By Y. T. Tchan, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, and Jill A. Whitehouse. 4. The Genus Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia. By Dorothy E. Shaw. xliv ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Dr. Y. T. Tchan demonstrated a simple arrangement for a suitable lamp to provide uniform illumination for routine microscope work. It passes light through a cuvette containing very dilute suspension of milk in water, the size of the light source being controlled by a cardboard diaphragm. LECTURETTE. A lecturette was given by Dr. B. J. Ralph, entitled “Oxidative Mechanisms in the Wood-rotting Fungi’. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 30th SEPTEMBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from 1st January, 1954, from qualified candidates. The range of actual salary is £650-£800, according to qualifications. Applica- tions should be lodged with the Hon. Secretary not later than Wednesday, 4th November, 19538. The President announced that Dr. Julian Huxley, who will be visiting Sydney in November next, will give an address to biologists at the University of Sydney at 8 p.m. on 11th November on “Evolution and Polymorphism”’. The President also announced that an invitation to members had been received to attend the Annual Meeting of the Wild Life Preservation Society of Australia to be held in the Men’s Lounge, Fifth Floor, Federation House, 166 Phillip Street, Sydney, on Thursday, 22nd October, 1953, at 8 p.m. The business meeting will be followed by the screening of two films: “Australia’s Coral Wonderland’ and ‘The Loon’s Necklace’. Library accessions amounting to 1 volume, 16 parts or numbers, and 50 bulletins, total 67, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery-Adelong- Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part II. Intermediate-Basic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance. Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 2. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wantabadgery-Adelong- Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part III. The Granitic Rocks. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. 3. The Occurrence of Varved Clays in the Kosciusko District, N.S.W. By T. G. Vallance, Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology. LECTURETTE. Dr. N. C. W. Beadle gave a lecturette on “Death of the Mulga, and Decline in Soil Fertility in the West Darling Country”. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 28th OcToBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the Chair. The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from ist January, 1954, from qualified candidates. The range of actual salary is £650-£800, according to qualifications. Applications should be lodged with the Hon. Secretary not later than Wednesday, 4th November, 1953. f ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlv Library accessions amounting to 11 volumes, 110 parts or numbers, 34 bulletins, 3 reports and 11 pamphlets, total 169, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. A New Subfamily and New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera- Heteroptera. By N. C. E. Miller. (Communicated by T. G. Campbell.) 2. Australian Rust Studies. XIII. Specialization of Uromyces phaseoli (Pers.) Wint. in Australia. By W. L. Waterhouse. 3. A New Genus of the Plectascales. By Lilian Fraser. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. J. M. Vincent presented an exhibit showing the action of bacteriophage on a Rhizobium trifolii. The phage is one of several isolated by Mr. K. C. Marshall from soil at the University of Sydney. This appears to be the first record of the isolation of Rhizobium bacteriophage from an Australian soil. LECTURE. A lecture entitled “Journeyings in North Australia’, illustrated by kodachrome slides, was given by Professor J. Macdonald Holmes. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 25th NoveEMBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the chair. Miss Patricia M. McDonald, B.Sec., Dip.Ed., Dee Why, N.S.W., and Mr. A. W. Parrott, Nelson, New Zealand, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. The President announced that Miss Nola J. Hannon, B.Sc., and Miss Ruth Simons, B.Sc., had been appointed to Linnean Macleay Fellowships in Botany for the year 1954. The President informed members that the Society has for a number of years made a donation to the Zoological Society of London towards the cost of production of the Zoological Record. Library accessions amounting to 12 volumes, 104 parts or numbers, 6 bulletins, 7 reports and 1 pamphlet, total 130, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Notes on Australian Thynninae. I. Ariphron bicolor Erichson. By B. B. Given. (Communicated by Dr. A. J. Nicholson.) 2. Abnormalities in Linum usitatissimum L. By H. B. Kerr. 3. A Note on the Geology of Panuara and Angullong, south of Orange, N.S.W. By N. C. Stevens. 4. Studies on Australian Thynnidae. I. A Check List of the Australian and Austro-’ Malayan Thynnidae. By K. E. W. Salter. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Misses Isobel Bennett and Elizabeth Pope exhibited two specimens of the seastar, Astrostole insularis, from the New South Wales coast and showed Kodachrome records of their colour patterns in life. This species was first described from Lord Howe Island in 1938 by H. Lyman Clark, who subsequently also stated in his “Echinoderm Fauna of Australia” (1946), ‘Although it has not yet been reported from the Australian coast, it is possible that specimens have been taken and confused with the following species [Coscinasterias calamaria], which it resembles superficially.’ xlvi ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The two present specimens were collected between tidemarks. The first, Australian Museum registered number J.6832, was taken at Wellington Rocks, near the mouth of the Nambucca River in the northern part of the State, 1.11.1947, and the second, J.6833, was collected at Long Reef, near Collaroy, New South Wales, in August, 1953. Several additional specimens have now also been seen, so that it seems likely that the species has been overlooked in the past, as suggested by Clark. LECTURETTE, A lecturette entitled “The Role of Henri Derx in Tropical Biology” was given by Professor L. G. Baas-Becking. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlv Library accessions amounting to 11 volumes, 110 parts or numbers, 34 bulletins, 3 reports and 11 pamphlets, total 169, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. A New Subfamily and New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera- Heteroptera. By N. C. E. Miller. (Communicated by T. G. Campbell.) 2. Australian Rust Studies. XIII. Specialization of Uromyces phaseoli (Pers.) Wint. in Australia. By W. L. Waterhouse. 3. A New Genus of the Plectascales. By Lilian Fraser. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. J. M. Vincent presented an exhibit showing the action of bacteriophage on a Rhizobium trifolii. The phage is one of several isolated by Mr. K. C. Marshall from soil at the University of Sydney. This appears to be the first record of the isolation of Rhizobium bacteriophage from an Australian soil. LECTURE. A lecture entitled “Journeyings in North Australia’, illustrated by kodachrome slides, was given by Professor J. Macdonald Holmes. ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 25th NoveEMBER, 1953. Mr. J. M. Vincent, President, occupied the chair. Miss Patricia M. McDonald, B.Sc., Dip.Ed., Dee Why, N.S.W., and Mr. A. W. Parrott, Nelson, New Zealand, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. The President announced that Miss Nola J. Hannon, B.Sc., and Miss Ruth Simons, B.Sc., had been appointed to Linnean Macleay Fellowships in Botany for the year 1954. The President informed members that the Society has for a number of years made a donation to the Zoological Society of London towards the cost of production of the Zoological Record. Library accessions amounting to 12 volumes, 104 parts or numbers, 6 bulletins, 7 reports and 1 pamphlet, total 130, had been received since the last meeting. PAPERS READ. 1. Netes on Australian Thynninae. I.. Ariphron bicolor Erichson. By B. B. Given. (Communicated by Dr. A. J. Nicholson.) 2. Abnormalities in Linum usitatissinmum L. By H. B. Kerr. 3. A Note, on the Geology of Panuara and Angullong, south of Orange, N.S.W. By N. C. Stevens. 4. Studies on Australian Thynnidae. I. A Check List of the Australian and Austro- Malayan Thynnidae. By K. BE. W. Salter. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Misses Isobel Bennett and Hlizabeth Pope exhibited two specimens of the seastar, Astrostole insularis, from the New South Wales coast and showed Kodachrome records _ of their colour patterns in life. This species was first described from Lord Howe Island in 1938 by H. Lyman Clark, who subsequently also stated in his “Echinoderm Fauna of Australia” (1946), ‘Although it has not yet been reported from the Australian coast, it is possible that specimens have been taken and confused with the following species [Coscinasterias calamaria], which it resembles superficially.’ xlvi ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The two present specimens were collected between tidemarks. The first, Australian Museum registered number J.6832, was taken at Wellington Rocks, near the mouth of the Nambucca River in the northern part of the State, 1.11.1947, and the second, J.6833, was collected at Long Reef, near Collaroy, New South Wales, in August, 1953. Several additional specimens have now also been seen, so that it seems likely that the species has been overlooked in the past, as suggested by Clark. LECTURETTE. A lecturette entitled “The Role of Henri Derx in Tropical Biology” was given by Professor L. G. Baas-Becking. 1940 1227 1940 1922 1927 1952 1912 xlvii LIST OF MEMBERS. (15th December, 1953.) ORDINARY MEMBERS. (An asterisk (*) denotes Life Member.) Abbie, Professor Andrew Arthur, M.D., B.S., B.Se., Ph.D., c.o. University of Adelaide. Adelaide, South Australia. *Albert, Michel Francois, ‘‘Boomerang’’, 42 Billyard Avenue, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney. *Allman, Stuart Leo, B.Sc.Agr., M.Sc., Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney. Anderson, Robert Henry, B.Sc.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. *Armstrong, Jack Walter Trench, “Callubri’’, Nyngan, N.S.W. Ashton, David Hungerford, B.Sc., 92 Warrigal Road, Surrey Hills, H.10, Victoria. Aurousseau, Marcel, B.Sc., c.o. Mr. G. H. Aurousseau, 229 Woodland Street, Balgowlah, N.S.W. Baas-Becking, L. G. M., Ph.D., D.Se, C.S.I.R.O., Division of Fisheries, P.O. Box 21, Cronulla, N.S.W. Backhouse, Thomas Clive, M.B., B.S., D.P.H., D.T.M. & H., F.R.A.C.P., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Baddams, Miss Greta, B.A., B.Sec., New Engiand University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Baehni, Professor Charles, Dr.sc., Conservatoire botanique, Université de Genéve, 192, rue de Lausanne, Geneve, Switzerland. Baker, Eldred Percy, B.Se.Agr., Ph.D., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. *Barber, Professor Horace Newton, M.A., Ph.D., Department of Botany, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania. Barrett, Mrs. Judith Hope, M.Se. (née Balmain), 31 Holt Avenue, Mosman, N.S.W. *Beadle, Noel Charles William, D.Sc., Botany School, Sydney University. Bearup, Arthur Joseph, 66 Pacific Avenue, Penshurst, N.S.W. Beattie, Joan Marion, D.Sc. (née Crockford), ¢c.o. Lake George Mine, Captain’s Flat, N.S. W. Bennett, Miss Isobel Ida, Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Benson, Professor William Noel, B.A., D.Sec., F.G.S., University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand. ' Besly, Miss Mary Ann Catherine, B.A., 7 Myra Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. Birch, Louis Charles, D.Ag.Sec., M.Se., Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Blake, Stanley Thatcher, M.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Brisbane, Queensland. Boardman, William, M.Sc., Zoology Department, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. Brett, Robert Gordon Lindsay, B.Sc., 7 Petty Street, West Hobart, Tasmania. Brown, Kenneth George, 6 Dolphin Street, Randwick, N.S.W. Browne, Ida Alison, D.Sc. (née Brown), Department of Geology, Sydney University. Browne, Lindsay Blakeston Barton, Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Browne, William Rowan, D.Sc., Department of Geology, Sydney University. Bunt, John Stuart, B.Se.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. Burden, John Henry, 1 Havilah Street, Chatswood, N.S.W. *Burges, Professor Norman Alan, M.Sc., Ph.D., Professor of Botany, University of Liver- pool, Liverpool, England. 3 ‘ Burkitt, Professor Arthur Neville St. George Handcock, M.B., B.Se., Medical School, Sydney University. Campbell, Thomas Graham, Division of Economic Hntomology, C.S8.1.R.O., P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. *Carey, Professor Samuel Warren, D.Sc., Geology Department, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania. Carne, Phillip Broughton, B.Agr.Sci. (Melb.), 7 Thames Street, Sunbury-on-Thames, Middlesex, England. *Chadwick, Clarence Earl, B.Sc., Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney. Christian, Stanley Hinton, Malaria Control, Department of Public Health, Banz, Western Highlands, via Lae, New Guinea. *Churchward, John Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 1 Hunter Street, Woolwich, N.S.W. Clark, Laurance Ross, M.Sc., c.o. C.S.I.R.O., Division of Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. Clarke, Mrs. Muriel Catherine, M.Sc (née Morris), 122 Swan Street, Morpeth, N.S.W. xlviil LIST OF MEMBERS. 1901 Cleland, Professor John Burton, M.D., Ch.M., 1 Dashwood Road, Beaumont, Adelaide. South Australia. 1942 Cleland, Kenneth Wollaston, M.B., Department of Anatomy, Sydney University. 1931 Colefax, Allen Neville, B.Sc., Department of Zoology, Sydney University. 1946 Colless, Donald Henry, 9 Eng Neo Avenue, Singapore 21, Malaya. 1942 Copland, Stephen John, M.Sc., Chilton Parade, Warrawee, N.S.W. 1947 Costin, Alec Baillie, 12 Barambah Road, Roseville, N.S.W. 1908 Cotton, Professor Leo Arthur, M.A., D.Se., 113 Queen’s Parade Hast, Newport Beach, N.S.W. 1950 Crawford, Lindsay Dinham, B.Sc., 4 Dalton Avenue, West Hobart, Tasmania. 1945 Davis, Mrs. Gwenda Louise, Ph.D., B.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S. W. 1936 Day, Maxwell Frank, Ph.D., B.Se., C.S.I.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. 1984 Day, William Eric, 23 Gelling Avenue, Strathfield, N.S.W. 1925 de Beuzeville, Wilfred Alexander Watt, J.P., ““Melamere’’, Welham Street, Beecroft, N.S.W. 1937 Deuquet, Camille, B.Com., 126 Hurstville Road, Oatley, N.S.W. 1953 Dobrotworsky, Nikolai V., M.Sc., Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. 1948 Drover, Donald P., Institute of Agriculture, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, W.A. 1946 Durie, Peter Harold, M.Se., C.S.I.R.O., Veterinary Parasitology Laboratory, Yeerongpilly. Brisbane, Queensland. 1952 Dyce, Alan Lindsay, B.Sc.Agr., C.S.I.R.O., Division of Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. 1948 Ealey, Eric H. M., Girrawheen, Duffy Avenue, Thornleigh, N.S.W. 1953 Edwards, Dare William, B.Se.Agr. (Hons.), Forestry Commission of N.S.W., Division of Wood Technology, 96 Harrington Street, Sydney. 1949 Elliott, John Henry, ‘‘Greengates’”’, Pennant Hills Road, Beecroft, N.S.W. 1947 Endean, Robert, M.Se., Department of Zoology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. 1930 English, Miss Kathleen Mary Isabel, B.Sc., 2 Shirley Road, Roseville, N.S.W. 1953 HErrey, Mrs. Beatrice Mary, Department of Biological Sciences, N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. 1953 Frame, William Robert, c/- G. G. Smith & Co. Ltd., P.O. Box 17, Port Moresby, Papua- New Guinea. 1948 Fraser, Ian McLennan, Ph.D. (Cambridge), 8 Kiogle Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. 1930 Eraser, Miss Lilian Ross, D.Sc., ‘““Hopetoun’, 25 Bellamy Street, Pennant Hills, N.S.W. 1950 Garden, Miss Joy Gardiner, B.Sc.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 1935 *Garretty, Michael Duhan, D.Sc., “Surrey Lodge’, Mitcham Road, Mitcham, Victoria. 1944 Greenwood, William Frederick Neville, 11 Wentworth Avenue, Waitara, N.S.W. 1946 “Griffiths, Mrs. Mabel, B.Sc. (née Crust), 2 Carden Avenue, Wahroonga, N.S.W. 1936 Griffiths, Mervyn Edward, M.Sc., Australian Institute of Anatomy, Canberra, A.C.T. 1939 *Gunther, Carl Ernest Mitchelmore, M.B., B.S., D.T.M., D.T.M. & H. (England), Bulolo Gold Dredging Limited, Bulolo, Territory of Papua—New Guinea. 1928 Hamilton, Edgar Alexander, 16 Hercules Street, Chatswood, N.S.W. 1952 Hannon, Miss Nola Jean, B.Sc., 22 Leeder Avenue, Penshurst, N.S.W. 1952 *Hansford, Clifford Gerald, M.A., Se.D. (Cantab.), D.Se. (Adel.), F.L.S., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Private Bag, G.P.O., Adelaide, South Australia. 1917 Hardy, George Huddleston Hurlstone, ‘““‘Karambi’’, Letitia Street, Katoomba, N.S.W. 1947 Harker, Miss Janet Elspeth, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.E.S., Girton College, Cambridge, England. 1951 Hewitt, Bernard Robert, c.o. Box 177, Kempsey, 2C, N.S.W. 1930 Heydon, George Aloysius Makinson, M.B., Ch.M., Flat 5, 79 O’Sullivan Road, Rose Bay, N.S.W. 1988 Hill, Miss Dorothy, M.Se., Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. 1943 Hindmarsh, Miss Mary Maclean, B.Se., 79 Onslow Street, Rose Bay, N.S.W. 1930 Holmes, Professor James Macdonald, Ph,D., B.Sc., F.R.G.S., F.R.S.G.S., Department of Geography, Sydney University. 1943 Horowitz, Benzoin, Eng.Agr.S., Dr.Agr.Se. (Cracow, Poland), C.S.I.R.O., c.o. Waite Institute, Private Mail Bag, Adelaide, South Australia. 1932 Hossfeld, Paul Samuel, M.Sc., 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, South Australia. 1953. Hotchkiss, Arland Tillotson, M.S., Ph.D. (Cornell), Department of Botany, Sydney ; University. 1942 Humphrey, George Frederick, M.Se., Ph.D., Department of Biochemistry, Sydney University. 1940 1227 1940 1922 1927 1952 1912 xlvii LIST OF MEMBERS. (15th December, 1953.) ORDINARY MEMBERS. (An asterisk (*) denotes Life Member.) Abbie, Professor Andrew Arthur, M.D., B.S., B.Se., Ph.D., c.o. University of Adelaide. Adelaide, South Australia. *Albert, Michel Francois, ‘‘Boomerang”’, 42 Billyard Avenue, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney. *Allman, Stuart Leo, B.Se.Agr., M.Sc., Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney. Anderson, Robert Henry, B.Se.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. *Armstrong, Jack Walter Trench, ‘‘Callubri’, Nyngan, N.S.W. Ashton, David Hungerford, B.Se., 92 Warrigal Road, Surrey Hills, E.10, Victoria. Aurousseau, Marcel, B.Sc., c.o. Mr. G. H. Aurousseau, 229 Woodland Street, Balgowlah, N.S.W. Baas-Becking, L. G. M., Ph.D., D.Se., C.S.I.R.O., Division of Fisheries, P.O. Box 21, Cronulla, N.S.W. Backhouse, Thomas Clive, M.B., B.S., D.P.H., D.T.M. & H., F.R.A.C.P., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Baddams, Miss Greta, B.A., B.Sc., New Engiand University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Baehni, Professor Charles, Dr.sc., Conservatoire botanique, Université de Geneve, 192, rue de Lausanne, Genéve, Switzerland. Baker, Eldred Percy, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. *Barber, Professor Horace Newton, M.A., Ph.D., Department of Botany, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania. Barrett, Mrs. Judith Hope, M.Sc. (née Balmain), 31 Holt Avenue, Mosman, N.S.W. *Beadle, Noel Charles William, D.Se., Botany School, Sydney University. Bearup, Arthur Joseph, 66 Pacific Avenue, Penshurst, N.S.W. Beattie, Joan Marion, D.Sc. (née Crockford), c.o. Lake George Mine, Captain’s Flat, N.S.W. é Bennett, Miss Isobel Ida, Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Benson, Professor William Noel, B.A., D.Sc., F.G.S., University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand. Besly, Miss Mary Ann Catherine, B.A., 7 Myra Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. Birch, Louis Charles, D.Ag.Se., M.Sc., Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Blake, Stanley Thatcher, M.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Brisbane, Queensland. Boardman, William, M.Sec., Zoology Department, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. Brett, Robert Gordon Lindsay, B.Sc., 7 Petty Street, West Hobart, Tasmania. Brown, Kenneth George, 6 Dolphin Street, Randwick, N.S.W. Browne, Ida Alison, D.Sc. (née Brown), Department of Geology, Sydney University. Browne, Lindsay Blakeston Barton, Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Browne, William Rowan, D.Sc., Department of Geology, Sydney University. Bunt, John Stuart, B.Se.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. Burden, John Henry, 1 Havilah Street, Chatswood, N.S.W. *Burges, Professor Norman Alan, M.Sce., Ph.D., Professor of Botany, University of Liver- pool, Liverpool, England. Burkitt, Professor Arthur Neville St. George Handcock, M.B., B.Se., Medical School, Sydney University. Campbell, Thomas Graham, Division of Economie Hntomology, C.S.1I.R.O., P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. *Carey, Professor Samuel Warren, D.Se., Geology Department, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania. Carne, Phillip Broughton, B.Agr.Sci. (Melb.), 7 Thames Street, Sunbury-on-Thames, Middlesex, England. *Chadwick, Clarence Earl, B.Sc., Entomological Branch, Department of Agriculture, Farrer Place, Sydney. Christian, Stanley Hinton, Malaria Control, Department of Public Health, Banz, Western Highlands, via Lae, New Guinea. *Churchward, John Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 1 Hunter Street, Woolwich, N.S.W. Clark, Laurance Ross, M.Sc., c.o. C.S.I1.R.O., Division of Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. : Clarke, Mrs. Muriel Catherine, M.Sc (née Morris), 122 Swan Street, Morpeth, N.S.W. xlvili LIST OF MEMBERS. 1901 1942 1931 1946 1942 1947 1908 1950 1943 1930 Cleland, Professor John Burton, M.D., Ch.M., 1 Dashwood Road, Keaumnnt, Adelaide South Australia. Cleland, Kenneth Wollaston, M.B., Department of Anatomy, Sydney University. Colefax, Allen Neville, B.Se., Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Colless, Donald Henry, 9 Eng Neo Avenue, Singapore 21, Malaya. Copland, Stephen John, M.Sc., Chilton Parade, Warrawee, N.S.W. Costin, Alec Baillie, 12 Barambah Road, Roseville, N.S.W. Cotton, Professor Leo Arthur, M.A., D.Sc., 113 Queen’s Parade East, Newport Beach, N.S.W. Crawford, Lindsay Dinham, B.Sc., 4 Dalton Avenue, West Hobart, Tasmania. Davis, Mrs. Gwenda Louise, Ph.D., B.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Day, Maxwell Frank, Ph.D., B.Se., C.S.1I.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. Day, William Eric, 23 Gelling Avenue, Strathfield, N.S.W. de Beuzeville, Wilfred Alexander Watt, J.P., ““Melamere’’, Welham Street, Beecroft, N.S.W. Deuquet, Camille, B.Com., 126 Hurstville Road, Oatley, N.S.W. Dobrotworsky, Nikolai V., M.Sce., Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. Drover, Donald P., Institute of Agriculture, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, W.A. Durie, Peter Harold, M.Sc., C.S.I.R.O., Veterinary Parasitology Laboratory, Yeerongpilly. Brisbane, Queensland. Dyce, Alan Lindsay, B.Sc.Agr., C.S.I.R.O., Division of Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. Ealey, Eric H. M., Girrawheen, Duffy Avenue, Thornleigh, N.S.W. Edwards, Dare William, B.Sc.Agr. (Hons.), Forestry Commission of N.S.W., Division of Wood Technology, 96 Harrington Street, Sydney. Elliott, John Henry, ‘““Greengates’, Pennant Hills Road, Beecroft, N.S.W. Endean, Robert, M.Se., Department of Zoology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. English, Miss Kathleen Mary Isabel, B.Sc., 2 Shirley Road, Roseville, N.S.W. Errey, Mrs. Beatrice Mary, Department of Biological Sciences, N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. Frame, William Robert, c/- G. G. Smith & Co. Ltd., P.O. Box 17, Port Moresby, Papua- New Guinea. Fraser, Ian McLennan, Ph.D. (Cambridge), 8 Kiogle Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. Fraser, Miss Lilian Ross, D.Se., ‘““Hopetoun’’, 25 Bellamy Street, Pennant Hills, N.S.W. Garden, Miss Joy Gardiner, B.Sc.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. *Garretty, Michael Duhan, D.Sc., ‘“‘Surrey Lodge’, Mitcham Road, Mitcham, Victoria. Greenwood, William Frederick Neville, 11 Wentworth Avenue, Waitara, N.S.W. *Griffiths, Mrs. Mabel, B.Sc. (née Crust), 2 Carden Avenue, Wahroonga, N.S.W. Griffiths, Mervyn Edward, M.Sc., Australian Institute of Anatomy, Canberra, A.C.T. *Gunther, Carl Ernest Mitchelmore, M.B., B.S., D.T.M., D.T.M. & H. (England), Bulolo Gold Dredging Limited, Bulolo, Territory of Papua—New Guinea. Hamilton, Edgar Alexander, 16 Hercules Street, Chatswood, N.S.W. Hannon, Miss Nola Jean, B.Se., 22 Leeder Avenue, Penshurst, N.S.W. *Hansford, Clifford Gerald, M.A., Se.D. (Cantab.), D.Sc. (Adel.), F.L.S., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Private Bag, G.P.O., Adelaide, South Australia. Hardy, George Huddleston Hurlstone, ‘‘Karambi’’, Letitia Street, Katoomba, N.S.W. Harker, Miss Janet Elspeth, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.E.S., Girton College, Cambridge, England. Hewitt, Bernard Robert, c.o. Box 177, Kempsey, 2C, N.S.W. Heydon, George Aloysius Makinson, M.B., Ch.M., Flat 5, 79 O’Sullivan Road, Rose Bay, N.S.W. Hill, Miss Dorothy, M.Se., Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. Hindmarsh, Miss Mary Maclean, B.Sc., 79 Onslow Street, Rose Bay, N.S.W. Holmes, Professor James Macdonald, Ph,D., B.Se., F.R.G.S., F.R.S.G.S., Department of Geography, Sydney University. Horowitz, Benzoin, Eng.Agr.S., Dr.Agr.Se. (Cracow, Poland), C.S.I.R.O., c.o. Waite Institute, Private Mail Bag, Adelaide, South Australia. Hossfeld, Paul Samuel, M.Sc., 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, South Australia. Hotchkiss, Arland Tillotson, M.S., Ph.D. (Cornell), Department of Botany, Sydney University. Humphrey, George Frederick, M.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Biochemistry, Sydney University. 1917 1938 1952 1947 1945 1937 1930 1933 1949 1951 1937 1938 1938 1949 1939 1952 1946 1952 1946 1932 1934 1936 1943 1949 1951 1952 1948 1922 1931 1948 1948 1905 1933 1951 1932 1948 1952 1947 Qa) 1944 1947 1949 1938 1948 1947 1946 1949 1952 B44 LIST OF MEMBERS. xlix Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, c.o. Mr. Gordon Holmes, “Orton Park’, Yetman, N.S.W. Jacobs, Maxwell Ralph, D.Ing., M.Sc., Dip.For., Australian Forestry School, Canberra, A.C.T. Jessup, Rupert William, M.Sc., 38 Taylor Street, Armidale, N.S.W. Johnson, Lawrence Alexander Sidney, B.Sc., c.o. National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Johnston, Arthur Nelson, B.Sc.Agr., 99 Newton Road, Strathfield, N.S.W. Jones, Mrs. Valerie Margaret Beresford, M.Sc. (née May), Mooloolabel Esplanade, Narrabeen, N.S.W. Joplin, Miss Germaine Anne, B.A., Ph.D., D.Sc., Department of Geophysics, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T. Judge, Leslie Arthur, 87 Eastern Road, Turramurra, N.S.W. Keast, James Allen, M.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Kerr, Harland Benson, B.Sc.Agr., 41 Badminton Road, Croydon, N.S.W. Kesteven, Geoffrey Leighton, D.Se., c.o. F.A.O. of United Nations, Viale delle Terme di Caracalla, Rome, Italy. Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, D.Sc., M.D., Maroochydore, Queensland. Kinghorn, James Roy, C.M.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Kooptzoff, Miss Olga, 322 Moore Park Road, Paddington, N.S.W. Langford-Smith, Trevor, M.Se., School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T. Langley, Miss Julia Mary, B.Sc., 17 Clifford Street, Gordon, N.S.W. Larcombe, Miss Pauline Gladys, B.Sec., 17 Hthel Street, Burwood, N.S.W. Latter, Barrie Dale Hingston, B.Sc.Agr., 25 Abbott Street, Coogee, N.S.W. *Lawrence, James Joscelyn, B.Sc., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Lawson, Albert Augustus, 9 Wilmot Street, Sydney. Lee, Mrs. Alma Theodora, M.Se. (née Melvaine), Manor Road, Hornsby, N.S.W. Lee, David Joseph, B.Se., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Lothian, Thomas Robert Noel, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide, South Australia. Lower, Harold Farnham, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide, Private Mail Bag, G.P.O., Adelaide, South Australia. Lowery, Edwin Sanders, M.A., 13 Francis Street, Northmead, N.S.W. Macdonald, Colin Lewis, 39 Cole Street, Goulburn 2S, N.S.W. Macintosh, Neil William George, M.B., B.S., 32 Benelong Crescent, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. Mackerras, Ian Murray, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Herston Road, Valley, Brisbane, Queensland. Mair, Herbert Knowles Charles, B.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Manefield, Tom, Department of Agriculture and Stock, P.O. Box 65, Nambour, Queensland. Marks, Miss Elizabeth Nesta, M.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Entomology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. Mawson, Sir Douglas, D.Se, B.E., F.R.S., University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South Australia. Maze, Wilson Harold, M.Sc., University of Sydney. McAlpine, David Kendray, 12 St. Thomas Street, Bronte, N.S.W. McCulloch, Robert Nicholson, D.Se.Agr., B.Se., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Rose- worthy, South Australia. McKee, Hugh Shaw, B.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.), c.o. C.S.I.R.O., Private Bag, Homebush P.O., N.S.W MeMichael, Donald Fred, B.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. MeMillan, Bruce, 171 Lawson Street, Hamilton, Newcastle, N.S.W. McPhail, Miss Isabel Jean, B.Sc., 128 Kedron Park Road, Wooloowin, Brisbane, Queensland. Mercer, Frank Verdun, B.Se., Ph.D. (Cambridge), Botany School, Sydney University. Messmer, Mrs. Pearl Ray, 64 Treatts Road, Lindfield, N.S.W. *Miller, Allen Horace, B.Sc., Dip.Ed., 1281 Canterbury Road, Punchbowl, N.S.W. Miller, David, Ph.D., M.Sc., F.R.S.N.Z., F.R.E.S., Cawthron Institute, Nelson, New Zealand. Millerd, Miss Alison Adele, Ph.D., M.Se., 12 Gillies Street, Wollstonecraft, N.S.W. Millett, Mervyn Richard Oke, B.A., 19 Avoca Street, South Yarra, Vic. Millington, Richard James, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Private Mail Bag, Adelaide, South Australia. Minter, Philip Clayton, 49 Cotswold Road, Strathfield, N.S.W. Monro, John Malcolm, New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Moye, Daniel George, B.Sc., Dip.Ed., 6 Kaling Place, Cooma, N.S.W. ] LIST OF MEMBERS. 1939 Moye, Mrs. Joan, B.Se. (née Johnston), 6 Kaling Place, Cooma, N.S.W. i926 Mungomery, Reginald William, c.o. Bureau of Sugar Experiment Stations, Department of Agriculture and Stock, Brisbane, B.7, Queensland. 1949 Murray, Professor Patrick Desmond Fitzgerald, M.A., D.Se., Department of Zoology, University of Sydney, N.S.W. 1920 Musgrave, Anthony, F.R.E.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 1949 Myers, Kenneth, C.S.I.R.O., Wildlife Survey Section, Field Station, 598 Affleck Street, Albury, N.S.W. 1947 Nashar, Mrs. Beryl, B.Sc., Ph.D., Dip.Ed. (née Scott), 9 San Francisco de Soles 5°C, Moncloa, Madrid, Spain. 1925 Newman, Ivor Vickery, M.Sec., Ph.D., F.R.M.S., F.L.S., 1 Stuart Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. 1922 Nicholson, Alexander John, D.Se., F.R.HE.S., C.S.1.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. 1935 *Noble, Norman Scott, D.Sec.Agr., M.Se, D.I.C., C.S.I.R.O., 314 Albert Street, Bast Melbourne, C.2, Victoria. 1920 Noble, Robert Jackson, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 324 Middle Harbour. Road, lindfield, N.S.W. 1912 North, David Sutherland, 42 Chelmsford Avenue, Lindfield, N.S.W. 1948 O’Farrell, Antony Frederick Louis, A.R.C.Sc., B.Se., F.R.E.S., New England University College, Armidalé, N.S.W. 1950 O’Gower, Alan Kenneth, B.Se., 59 Brighton Street, Harbord, N.S.W. 1927 Oke, Charles George, 34 Bourke Street, Melbourne, C.1, Victoria. 1927 Osborn, Professor Theodore George Bentley, D.Sce., F.L.S., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South Australia. 921 Osborne, George Davenport, D.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Geology, Sydney University. 1950 Oxenford, Reginald Augustus, B.Sc., 26 Bishopsgate Street, Singleton 3N, N.S.W. 1952 Packham, Gordon Howard, 61 Earlwood Avenue, Earlwood, N.S.W. 1952 Palmer, Rev. Robert George, Box 13, P.O., Glen Davis, 6W, N.S.W. 1940 *Pasfield, Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., 20 Cooper Street, Strathfield, N.S.W. 1948 Pearson, Mrs. Judith A., M.Sc. (née Fraser), 14 Milray Avenue, Wollstonecraft, N.S.W. 1922 Perkins, Frederick Athol, B.Sc.Agr., Department of Entomology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. 1947 Phillips, Miss Marie Elizabeth, M.Se., Ph.D., 4 Morella Road, Clifton Gardens, N.S.W. 1987 Plomley, Kenneth Francis, ¢c.o. Division of Forest Products, C.S.I.R.O., 69 Yarra Bank Road, South Melbourne, S.E.1, Victoria. 1985 Pope, Miss Blizabeth Carington, M.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 19388 Pryor, Lindsay Dixon, M.Sc., Dip.For., Parks and Gardens Section, Department of the Interior, Canberra, A.C.T. 1949 Purchase, Miss Hilary Frances, B.Sc.Agr., 19 Hampden Avenue, Cremorne, N.S.W. 1929 Raggatt, Harold George, D.Sc., 60 Arthur Circle, Forrest, Canberra, A.C.T. 1951 Ralph, Bernhard John Frederick, B.Se., Ph.D. (Liverpool), A.A.C.I., N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. 1952 Ramsay, Mrs. Helen Patricia, M.Sc. (née Lancaster), Box 4, Post Office, Wallerawang, N.S. W. 1950 Rickwood, Frank Kenneth, B.Sc., Department of Geology, Sydney University. 1953 Reye, Eric James, M.B., B.S. (Univ. Qld.), c/- C.S1R.O., Veterinary Parasitology Laboratory, Fairfield Road, Yeerongpilly, Queensland. 1946 Riek, Edgar Frederick, B.Sc., C.S.1.R.O., Division of Economic Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. 1936 Roberts, Noel Lee, 43 Hannah Street, Beecroft, N.S.W. 1932 Robertson, Rutherford Ness, B.Sc., Ph.D., Food Preservation Research Laboratory, C.S.1.R.O., Private Mail Bag, Homebush, N.S.W. 1245 Ross, Donald Ford, c.o. Ross Bros. Pty. Ltd., 545-547 Kent Street, Sydney. 1925 Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, B.Sc., F.R.Z.S., 5 Coolong Road, Vaucluse, N.S.W. 1932 Salter, Keith Eric Wellesley, B.Sc., ““Hawthorn’’, 48 Abbotsford Road, Homebush, N.S.W. 1919 *Scammell, George Vance, B.Sc., 7 David Street, Clifton Gardens, N.S.W. 1951 Seccombe, Mrs. Lorraine, B.A., 28 Fairweather Street, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. 1950 *Sharp, Kenneth Raeburn, B.Sc., Eng. Geology, S.M.H.H.A., Cooma, 4S, N.S.W. 1948 Shaw, Miss Dorothy Edith, M.Se.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. 19380 Sherrard, Mrs. Kathleen Margaret, M.Sc., 43 Robertson Road, Centennial Park, Sydney. 1947 Shipp, Erik, 59 William Edward Street, Longueville, N.S.W. f 1953 Simonett, David Stanley, M.Sc., Department of Geography, University of Maryland, College Park, Maryland, U.S.A. 1917 1938 1952 1947 1945 1937 1930 1933 1949 1951 1937 1938 1938 1949 1939 1952 1946 1952 1946 1932 1934 1936 1943 1949 1951 1952 1948 1922 1931 1948 1948 1905 1933 1951 1932 1948 1952 1947 1949 1944 1947 19/49 1938 1948 1947 1946 1949 1952 1944 LIST OF MEMBERS. xlix Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, c.o. Mr. Gordon Holmes, “Orton Park’, Yetman, N.S.W. Jacobs, Maxwell Ralph, D.Ing., M.Se., Dip.For., Australian Forestry School, Canberra, INS OMAN, Jessup, Rupert William, M.Se., 38 Taylor Street, Armidale, N.S.W. Johnson, Lawrence Alexander Sidney, B.Sc., c.o. National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Johnston, Arthur Nelson, B.Sce.Agr., 99 Newton Road, Strathfield, N.S.W. Jones, Mrs. Valerie Margaret Beresford, M.Sc. (née May), Mooloolabel Esplanade, Narrabeen, N.S.W. Joplin, Miss Germaine Anne, B.A., Ph.D., D.Se., Department of Geophysics, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T. Judge, Leslie Arthur, 87 Eastern Road, Turramurra, N.S.W. Keast, James Allen, M.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Kerr, Harland Benson, B.Sc.Agr., 41 Badminton Road, Croydon, N.S.W. Kesteven, Geoffrey Leighton, D.Se., c.o. F.A.O. of United Nations, Viale delle Terme di Caracalla, Rome, Italy. Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, D.Sc., M.D., Maroochydore, Queensland. Kinghorn, James Roy, C.M.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Kooptzoff, Miss Olga, 322 Moore Park Road, Paddington, N.S.W. Langford-Smith, Trevor, M.Sc., School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T. Langley, Miss Julia Mary, B.Sc., 17 Clifford Street, Gordon, N.S.W. Larcombe, Miss Pauline Gladys, B.Sc., 17 Ethel Street, Burwood, N.S.W. Latter, Barrie Dale Hingston, B.Sc.Agr., 25 Abbott Street, Coogee, N.S.W. *Lawrence, James Joscelyn, B.Sc., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Lawson, Albert Augustus, 9 Wilmot Street, Sydney. Lee, Mrs. Alma Theodora, M.Sc. (née Melvaine), Manor Road, Hornsby, N.S.W. Lee, David Joseph, B.Sc., School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney University. Lothian, Thomas Robert Noel, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide, South Australia. Lower, Harold Farnham, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide, Private Mail Bag, G.P.O., Adelaide, South Australia. . Lowery, Edwin Sanders, M.A., 13 Francis Street, Northmead, N.S.W. Macdonald, Colin Lewis, 39 Cole Street, Goulburn 25S, N.S.W. Macintosh, Neil William George, M.B., B.S., 32 Benelong Crescent, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. Mackerras, Ian Murray, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Herston Road, Valley, Brisbane, Queensland. Mair, Herbert Knowles Charles, B.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Manefield, Tom, Department of Agriculture and Stock, P.O. Box 65, Nambour, Queensland. Marks, Miss Elizabeth Nesta, M.Se., Ph.D., Department of Entomology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. Mawson, Sir Douglas, D.Se., B.E., F.R.S., University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South Australia. Maze, Wilson Harold, M.Se., University of Sydney. McAlpine, David Kendray, 12 St. Thomas Street, Bronte, N.S.W. McCulloch, Robert Nicholson, D.Se.Agr., B.Se., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Rose- worthy, South Australia. McKee, Hugh Shaw, B.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.), c.o. C.S.I.R.O., Private Bag, Homebush P.O., N.S.W McMichael, Donald Fred, B.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. MeMillan, Bruce, 171 Lawson Street, Hamilton, Newcastle, N.S.W. McPhail, Miss Isabel Jean, B.Sc., 128 Kedron Park Road, Wooloowin, Brisbane, Queensland. Mercer, Frank Verdun, B.Sc., Ph.D. (Cambridge), Botany School, Sydney University. Messmer, Mrs. Pearl Ray, 64 Treatts Road, Lindfield, N.S.W. *Miller, Allen Horace, B.Se., Dip.Ed., 1281 Canterbury Road, Punchbowl, N.S.W. Miller, David, Ph.D., M.Sc., F.R.S.N.Z., F.R.E.S., Cawthron Institute, Nelson, New Zealand. Millerd, Miss Alison Adele, Ph.D., M.Sc., 12 Gillies Street, Wollstonecraft, N.S.W. Millett, Mervyn Richard Oke, B.A., 19 Avoca Street, South Yarra, Vic. Millington, Richard James, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Private Mail Bag, Adelaide, South Australia. Minter, Philip Clayton, 49 Cotswold Road, Strathfield, N.S.W. Monro, John Malcolm, New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Moye, Daniel George, B.Sc., Dip.Ed., 6 Kaling Place, Cooma, N.S.W. 1947 1925 1922 1935 1920 1912 1948 1950 1927 1927 LIST OF MEMBERS. Moye, Mrs. Joan, B.Se. (née Johnston), 6 Kaling Place, Cooma, N.S.W. Mungomery, Reginald William, c.o. Bureau of Sugar Experiment Stations, Department of Agriculture and Stock, Brisbane, B.7, Queensland. Murray, Professor Patrick Desmond Fitzgerald, M.A., D.Se., Department of Zoology, University of Sydney, N.S.W. Musgrave, Anthony, F.R.E.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Myers, Kenneth, C.S.I1.R.O., Wildlife Survey Section, Field Station, 598 Affleck Street, Albury, N.S.W. Nashar, Mrs. Beryl, B.Se., Ph.D., Dip.Ed. (née Scott), 9 San Francisco de Soles 5°C, Moncloa, Madrid, Spain. Newman, Ivor Vickery, M.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.M.S., F.L.S., 1 Stuart Street, Wahroonga, N.S.W. Nicholson, Alexander John, D.Sc., F.R.E.S., C.S.1.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. *Noble, Norman Scott, D.Sec.Agr., M.Se, D.1.C., C.S.I.R.O., 314 Albert Street, Hast Melbourne, C.2, Victoria. Noble, Robert Jackson, B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., 324A Middle Harbour Road, Lindfield, N.S.W. North, David Sutherland, 42 Chelmsford Avenue, Lindfield, N.S.W. O’Farrell, Antony Frederick Louis, A.R.C.Se., B.Se., F.R.E.S., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. O’Gower, Alan Kenneth, B.Sc., 59 Brighton Street, Harbord, N.S.W. Oke, Charles George, 34 Bourke Street, Melbourne, C.1, Victoria. Osborn, Professor Theodore George Bentley, D.Sc, F.L.S., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South Australia. Osborne, George Davenport, D.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Geology, Sydney University. Oxenford, Reginald Augustus, B.Sc., 26 Bishopsgate Street, Singleton 3N, N.S.W. Packham, Gordon Howard, 61 Earlwood Avenue, Harlwood, N.S.W. Palmer, Rev. Robert George, Box 138, P.O., Glen Davis, 6W, N.S.W. *Pasfield, Gordon, B.Sc.Agr., 20 Cooper Street, Strathfield, N.S.W. Pearson, Mrs. Judith A., M.Se. (née Fraser), 14 Milray Avenue, Wollstonecraft, N.S.W. Perkins, Frederick Athol, B.Sc.Agr., Department of Entomology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland. Phillips, Miss Marie Elizabeth, M.Sc., Ph.D., 4 Morella Road, Clifton Gardens, N.S.W. Plomley, Kenneth Francis, ¢c.o. Division of Forest Products, C.S.I.R.O., 69 Yarra Bank Road, South Melbourne, S.E.1, Victoria. Pope, Miss Blizabeth Carington, M.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Pryor, Lindsay Dixon, M.Sc., Dip.For., Parks and Gardens Section, Department of the Interior, Canberra, A.C.T. Purchase, Miss Hilary Frances, B.Sc.Agr., 19 Hampden Avenue, Cremorne, N.S.W. Raggatt, Harold George, D.Se., 60 Arthur Circle, Forrest, Canberra, A.C.T. Ralph, Bernhard John Frederick, B.Se., Ph.D. (Liverpool), A.A.C.I., N.S.W. University of Technology, Broadway, Sydney. : Ramsay, Mrs. Helen Patricia, M.Sc. (née Lancaster), Box 4, Post Office, Wallerawang, N.S. W. Rickwood, Frank Kenneth, B.Sc., Department of Geology, Sydney University. Reye, Eric James, M.B., B.S. (Univ. Qld.), c/- C.S.1.R.O., Veterinary Parasitology Laboratory, Fairfield Road, Yeerongpilly, Queensland. Riek, Edgar Frederick, B.Sc., C.S.I.R.O., Division of Economic Entomology, P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. Roberts, Noel Lee, 43 Hannah Street, Beecroft, N.S.W. Robertson, Rutherford Ness, B.Se., Ph.D., Food Preservation Research Laboratory, C.S.1.R.O., Private Mail Bag, Homebush, N.S.W. Ross, Donald Ford, c.o. Ross Bros. Pty. Ltd., 545-547 Kent Street, Sydney. Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, B.Sc., F.R.Z.S., 5 Coolong Road, Vaucluse, N.S.W. Salter, Keith Eric Wellesley, B.Sec., ““Hawthorn’’, 48 Abbotsford Road, Homebush, N.S.W. *Scammell, George Vance, B.Sc., 7 David Street, Clifton Gardens, N.S.W. Seccombe, Mrs. Lorraine, B.A., 28 Fairweather Street, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. *Sharp, Kenneth Raeburn, B.Sc., Eng. Geology, S.M.H.H.A., Cooma, 4S, N.S.W. Shaw, Miss Dorothy Edith, M.Sc.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. Sherrard, Mrs. Kathleen Margaret, M.Sc., 43 Robertson Road, Centennial Park, Sydney. Shipp, Erik, 59 William Edward Street, Longueville, N.S.W. : Simonett, David Stanley, M.Se., Department of Geography, University of Maryland, College Park, Maryland, U.S.A. ~ LIST OF MEMBERS. li Simons, Miss Hilda Ruth, B.Sc., 43 Spencer Road, Killara, N.S.W. Slade, Milton John, B.Sc., 10 Bent Street, Wingham, N.S.W. Smith, Hugene Thomas, 22 Talmage Street, Sunshine, Victoria. Smith, Miss Vera Irwin, B.Sc., F.L.S., “Loana’’, Mt. Morris Street, Woolwich, N.S.W. Smith-White, Spencer, B.Sc.Agr., 15 Berowra Road, Mt. Colah, N.S.W. Southcott, Ronald Vernon, M.B., B.S., 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, South Australia. Spencer, Mrs. Dora Margaret, M.Sc. (née Cumpston), Moorabinda, Tenterfield, N.is.\V. Stanley, George Arthur Vickers, B.Sc., c.o. Messrs. Robison, Maxwell and Allen, 19 Bligh Street, Sydney. Stead, David G., ““Boongarre’’, 14 Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay, N.S.W. Stead, Mrs. Thistle Yolette, B.Sc. (née Harris), 14 Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay, N.S.W. ,stevens, Neville Cecil, B.Se., 12 Salisbury Street, Hurstville, N.S.W. Still, Professor Jack Leslie, B.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Biochemistry, Sydney University, N.S. W. Sullivan, George Emmerson, M.Sc. (N.Z.), Department of Zoology, Sydney University. *Sulman, Miss Florence, 11 Ramsay Street, Collaroy, N.S.W. Taylor, Keith Lind, B.Sc.Agr., c.o. Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C.T. Tchan, Yao-tseng, Dr., és Sciences (Paris), Botany School, Sydney University. Thorp, Mrs. Dorothy Aubourne, B.Se. (Lond.), “Carinya”’, Tara Street, Kangaroo Point, Sylvania, N.S.W. i Thorpe, Ellis William Ray, B.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Tindale, Miss Mary Douglas, M.Sc., 60 Spruson Street, Neutral Bay, N.S.W. Tipper, John Duncan, A.M.1.E.Aust., Box 2770, G.P.O., Sydney. *Troughton, Ellis Le Geyt, C.M.Z.S., F.R.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Tugby, Mrs. Elise Evelyn, B.Sc. (née Sellgren), 1203 Hoddle Street, East Melbourne, Victoria. 3 Valder, Peter George, B.Sc.Agr., Biological Branch, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Box 36, G.P.O., Sydney. Vallance, Thomas George, B.Sc., 57 Auburn Street, Sutherland, N.S.W. Veitch, Robert, B.Sc., F.R.E.S., Department of Agriculture and Stock, William Street, Brisbane, Queensland. Vickery, Miss Joyce Winifred, M.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Vincent, James Matthew, B.Sc.Agr., Dip.Bact., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. *Voisey, Alan Heywood, D.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Walker, John, B.Sc.Agr., Biological Branch, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Box 36, G.P.O., Sydney. Walkom, Arthur Bache, D.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Wallace, Murray McCadam Hay, B.Sc., Institute of Agriculture, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Australia. Ward, Mrs. Judith, B.Sc., Lilac Cottage, Invergarry, Inverness-shire, Scotland. Ward, Melbourne, Gallery of Natural History and Native Art, Medlow Bath, N.S.W. Wardlaw, Henry Sloane Halero, D.Sc., F.R.A.C.I., 71 McIntosh Street, Gordon, N.S.W. Waterhouse, Douglas Frew, D.Sc., C.S.I.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. Waterhouse, John Teast, B.Sc., Department of Botany, Sydney University. Waterhouse, Professor Walter Lawry, D.Sc.Agr., M.C., D.I.C., 30 Chelmsford Avenue, Lindfield, N.S.W. Watson, Irvine Armstrong, Ph.D., B.Sec.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. Whaite, Mrs. Joy Lilian, c/- Department of Main Roads, Deniliquin 6S, N.S.W. Wharton, Ronald Harry, B.Se., Institute for Medical Research, Branch Laboratory, Kuantan, Pahang, Federation of Malaya. Whitehouse, Miss Jill Armson, B.Sc., 83 The Boulevarde, Strathfield, N.S.W. *Whitley, Gilbert Percy, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Wilkins, Miss Marjorie Jessie, M.Sc., 33 Muston Street, Mosman, N.S.W. Williams, Owen Benson, M.Agr.Sc. (Melbourne), 47 George Street, Deniliquin, N.S.W. Willis, Jack Lehane, M.Sc., A.A.C.I., 26 Inverallan Avenue, Pymble, N.S.W. Winkworth, Robert Ernest, Botany Department, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. Womersley, Herbert, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum, Adelaide, South Australia. Wood, Edward James Ferguson, C.S.I.R.O., Marine Biological Laboratory, P.O. Box 21, Cronulla, N.S.W. Woodhill, Anthony Reeve, D.Sc.Agr., Department of Zoology, Sydney University. Zeck, Emil Herman, F.R.Z.S., 694 Victoria Road, Ryde, N.S.W. Zeck, Mrs. Nance (Anne), 694 Victoria Road, Ryde, N.S.W. lii b ite) bo iJ) LIST OF MEMBERS. HONORARY MEMBER. Hill, Professor James Peter, D.Sc., F.R.S.Z., F.Z.S., F.R.S., ‘“Kanimbla’’, Dollis Avenue, Finchley, London, N.3, England. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. Jensen, Hans Laurits, D.Se.Agr. (Copenhagen), State Laboratory of Plant Culture, Department of Bacteriology, Lyngby, Denmark. Rupp, Rev. Herman Montague Rucker, B.A., 32 Neville Street, Willoughby, N.S.W. ASSOCIATE MEMBER. Seccombe, John Edwin, 28 Fairweather Street, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. 1927 1941 1949 1946 1953 1926 1946 1952 1950 1947 1934 1949 LIST OF MEMBERS. Simons, Miss Hilda Ruth, B.Sc., 43 Spencer Road, Killara, N.S.W. Slade, Milton John, B.Sc., 10 Bent Street, Wingham, N.S.W. Smith, Eugene Thomas, 22 Talmage Street, Sunshine, Victoria. Smith, Miss Vera Irwin, B.Sc., F.L.S., ‘“Loana’’, Mt. Morris Street, Woolwich, N.S.W. Smith-White, Spencer, B.Sc.Agr., 15 Berowra Road, Mt. Colah, N.S.W. Southcott, Ronald Vernon, M.B., B.S., 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, South Australia. Spencer, Mrs. Dora Margaret, M.Se. (née Cumpston), Moorabinda, Tenterfield, N.iS.\V. Stanley, George Arthur Vickers, B.Se., c.o. Messrs. Robison, Maxwell and Allen, 19 Bligh Street, Sydney. Stead, David G., ‘““Boongarre’’, 14 Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay, N.S.W. Stead, Mrs. Thistle Yolette, B.Sc. (née Harris), 14 Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay, N.S.W. Stevens, Neville Cecil, B.Se., 12 Salisbury Street, Hurstville, N.S.W. Still, Professor Jack Leslie, B.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Biochemistry, Sydney University, N.S.W. Sullivan, George Emmerson, M.Sc. (N.Z.), Department of Zoology, Sydney University. *Sulman, Miss Florence, 11 Ramsay Street, Collaroy, N.S.W. Taylor, Keith Lind, B.Sc.Agr., c.o. Division of Entomology, C.S.I.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. Tchan, Yao-tseng, Dr., es Sciences (Paris), Botany School, Sydney University. ~ City, Thorp, Mrs. Dorothy Aubourne, B.Se. (Lond.), ‘“‘Carinya”’, Tara Street, Kangaroo Point, Sylvania, N.S.W. Thorpe, Ellis William Ray, B.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Tindale, Miss Mary Douglas, M.Sc., 60 Spruson Street, Neutral Bay, N.S.W. Tipper, John Duncan, A.M.I.H.Aust., Box 2770, G.P.O., Sydney. *Troughton, Ellis Le Geyt, C.M.Z.S., F.R.Z.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Tugby, Mrs. Elise Evelyn, B.Sc. (née Sellgren), 1203 Hoddle Street, East Melbourne, Victoria. Valder, Peter George, B.Sc.Agr., Biological Branch, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Box 36, G.P.O., Sydney. Vallance, Thomas George, B.Sc., 57 Auburn Street, Sutherland, N.S.W. Veitch, Robert, B.Sc., F.R.E.S., Department of Agriculture and Stock, William Street, Brisbane, Queensland. ' Vickery, Miss Joyce Winifred, M.Sc., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Vincent, James Matthew, B.Sc.Agr., Dip.Bact., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. *Voisey, Alan Heywood, D.Sc., New England University College, Armidale, N.S.W. Walker, John, B.Sc.Agr., Biological Branch, N.S.W. Department of Agriculture, Box 36, G.P.O., Sydney. Walkom, Arthur Bache, D.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Wallace, Murray McCadam Hay, B.Sc., Institute of Agriculture, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Australia. Ward, Mrs. Judith, B.Se., Lilac Cottage, Invergarry, Inverness-shire, Scotland. Ward, Melbourne, Gallery of Natural History and Native Art, Medlow Bath, N.S.W. Wardlaw, Henry Sloane Halcro, D.Sec., F.R.A.C.I., 71 McIntosh Street, Gordon, N.S.W. Waterhouse, Douglas Frew, D.Se., C.S.I.R.O., Box 109, Canberra, A.C.T. Waterhouse, John Teast, B.Sc., Department of Botany, Sydney University. Waterhouse, Professor Walter Lawry, D.Sc.Agr., M.C., D.1.C., 30 Chelmsford Avenue, Lindfield, N.S.W. Watson, Irvine Armstrong, Ph.D., B.Se.Agr., Faculty of Agriculture, Sydney University. Whaite, Mrs. Joy Lilian, c/- Department of Main Roads, Deniliquin 6S, N.S.W. Wharton, Ronald Harry, B.Sec., Institute for Medical Research, Branch. Laboratory, Kuantan, Pahang, Federation of Malaya. Whitehouse, Miss Jill Armson, B.Sc., 883 The Boulevarde, Strathfield, N.S.W. *Whitley, Gilbert Percy, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. Wilkins, Miss Marjorie Jessie, M.Se., 33 Muston Street, Mosman, N.S.W. Williams, Owen Benson, M.Agr.Sc. (Melbourne), 47 George Street, Deniliquin, N.S.W. Willis, Jack Lehane, M.Sc., A.A.C.I., 26 Inverallan Avenue, Pymble, N.S.W. Winkworth, Robert Ernest, Botany Department, University of Melbourne, Carlton, N.3, Victoria. Womersley, Herbert, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum, Adelaide, Australia. South Wood, Edward James Ferguson, C.S.1.R.O., Marine Biological Laboratory, P.O. Box 21, Cronulla, N.S. W. Woodhill, Anthony Reeve, D.Sc.Agr., Department of Zoology, Sydney U Zeck, Emil Herman, F.R.Z.S., 694 Victoria Road, Ryde, N.S.W. Zeck, Mrs. Nance (Anne), 694 Victoria Road, Ryde, N.S.W. | ya | lil 1923 1949 1942 LIST OF MEMBERS. HONORARY MEMBER. Hill, Professor James Peter, D.Sc., F.R.S.Z., F.Z.S., F.R.S., “Kanimbla’’, Dollis Avenue, Finchley, London, N.3, England. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. Jensen, Hans Laurits, D.Se.Agr. (Copenhagen), State Laboratory of Plant Culture, Department of Bacteriology, Lyngby, Denmark. Rupp, Rev. Herman Montague Rucker, B.A., 32 Neville Street, Willoughby, N.S.W. ASSOCIATE MEMBER. Seecombe, John Edwin, 28 Fairweather Street, Bellevue Hill, N.S.W. LISTS OF NEW SUB-FAMILY, GENERA, SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES. VoL. 78. Sub-family. Agriopocorinae (Fam. Coreidae) .. .. .. page 233 Genera. Page Agriopocoris (Agriopocorinae).. .. 234 Austrocoranus (Harpactorinae) 56 ABE Dicranurocoris (Harpactorinae) .. 238 Heterocyphon (Helodinae) yee Pal’) Oncorhinothynnus, new name Oncorhinus (Thynninae) Peneveronatus (Helodinae) Pseudomicrocara (Helodinae) Xeromyces (Plectascales) Species and Subspecies. Page acmenae (lrenina) A eS, Ar ect OS! alectnyomisn CVIELIOl@) sa) mse (ee ll anobioides (Pseudomicrocara) .. .. 28 AUSEAiaNe, CHRAOMG)) so bs 8so ao OY australicus (Culex pipiens) Sere vn aS: australis (Peneveronatus) .. .. .. 32 pallet CWCHOUW) oc ~s0° oa 00 oo US DISMOGUSH(CMEnOMYCeS)\.. 9 2. 92. 2. 240 bouchardatiae (Meliola) .. .. .. T4 brisbanensis (Meliola) Tee meats AOS canberrae (Dicranurocoris) Este oe DAO ceratopetali (Meliola) .. .. .. .. 53 chadwicki (Agriopocoris) .. .. .. 2385 cissi-antarcticae (Meliola) .. .. .. 80 CHROME (WEHOUD) oo ce os oo oy corroboree (Pseudophryne) wrwemual 49), daphnandrae (/renina) ike k Veme eam: GliOgjoraenCOle, (WIGAMOG) 65 55 20 56 oo diospyri-pentamerae (Meliola) .. .. 55 dixoni (Pseudomicrocara) .... .. 25 GIOCOMECEK® (COREE) oo cs 0co sor US duboisiae (dinenina) = 52 5.) se 2. 80 dysoxyli (Melola) Si URSRON & CSE Poe dysoxylicola (Meliola) stone By kom athe a (O77 elongata (Pseudomicrocara) .. .. 26 elstoni (Pseudomicrocara) .. .. .. 26 emmenospermatis (Meliola) a petites eucalyptorum (/renina) Sadana. eae a!) Evansiana (Grevillea) coe steal Wee ee ZA fieldiae (lrenopsis) BoA? PA MRS Sie ee IOS fraser (UIGOUD) os 16 oo oo eo 08 Z froggatti (Agriopocoris ) guioae-semiglaucae (Meliola) hedycaryae (irenina) infulata (Austroasca) infuscata (Pseudomicrocara) leptospermi (Meliola) lomandrae (Meliola) lunulatus (Pelecorhynchus ) macedonensis (Heterocyphon) .. macilentus (Agriopocoris) .. maculiventris (Pseudomicrocara) megalongensis (/rene) melodini (Meliola) minor (Pseudomnicrocara) mundus (Austrocoranus) notelaeae (Meliola) occidentalis (Pseudomicrocara) orientalis (Pseuwdomicrocara) petalostigmatus (Meliola) picta (Pseudomicrocara) porcellus (Agriopocoris) prostantherae (Meliola) pseudomori (Meliola) ripogoni (Meliola) : rufusensis (Cermatulus nasalis) spencei (Macrocyphon) spencei (Pseudomicrocara) tasmaniae (Dicranurocoris) variabilis (Pseudomicrocara) victoriae (Dicranurocoris) wormiae (Meliola) lit Page 27 Be Zoyll . 236 liv LIST OF PLATES. PROCEEDINGS, 1953. j-ii—Crosses of Wheat and Rye. jiii—EHucalyptus sideroxylon and EH. albens, and hybrids. iv.—Anthers of Hucalyptus sideroxylon and EH. albens. y.—Geological sketch map of the Wantabadgery-Adelong-Tumbarumba District. vi.—Rocks of the Wantabadgery-Adelong-Tumbarumba region. vii.—Spores of Septoria and Selenophoma. viiiiLeaves and seedling plant of Medicago. ix.—Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia. x.—l1, 2: Growth of soil algae; 3: Beijerinckia in mixed culture; 4: Beijerinckia, Azoto- bacter, and other bacteria. xi-xii— Rocks of the Wantabadgery-Adelong-Tumbarumba region. xiii—Varved clays in the Kosciusko district. xiv.—Bean leaves and seedlings affected by rust. xv.—Xeromyces bisporus, gen. et spec. nov. xvi-xvil— Abnormalities in Linum usitatissimum L. xviii— Gustavus Athol Waterhouse. INDEX. (1953.) Page Abnormalities in Linum usitatissi- POOLED Dag on RGR GOR SO Re aero CBee 247 Abstract of Proceedings ........ xli-xlvi Algae, Soil, Study of, IT .......... 160 Angullong, Panuara and, A Note on hic Geology Obs ni ees hes 262 Anther Shape in Hucalyptus Genetics andmsoystemabics; 58635 75. sae cee 43 Armstrong, J. W. T., On Australian FUCTOGIMAVO MN ei Sek. sacead a apa she 19 Australian Fungi, New Species and Revisions. I. The Meliolaceae of PANTS GT NTA bee b iS st ck sos ike cdeaseuien sess 51 Australian Helodidae. I. Descrip- tions of New Genera and Species 19 Australian Hemiptera-Heteroptera, A New Sub-family and New Genera ElinG! SHORES) GE Googeccecoupnoae es 233 Australian, Herpetology, Recent .... Vv Australian Rust Studies. XI. Experi- ments on Crossing Wheat and Rye, 1. XII. Specialization within Uromyces striatus Schroet. on Trigonella suavissima Lindl. and Medicago sativa L., 147. XIII. Specialization of Uromyces phaseoli (Pers.) Wing. in Aus- tralia, 226. Australian Thynnidae, Studies on, I 276 Australian Thynninae, Notes on, I .. 258 Austroasca Lower, A New Species of 33 Baas-Becking, L. G., see Lecturettes. Bacteria, Studies of Nitrogen-fixing, INL, BBS ING sO Waal Balance Sheets for the Year ending 28th February, 1953 ...... XXXViii-xl Beadle, N. C. W., see Lecturettes. Bennett, Isobel, see Exhibits. Birch, L. C., see Lecturettes. Browne, W. R., elected Honorary Sec- retary, xli, see Exhibits. Bunt, J., see Exhibits. Burges, Prof. N. A., resignation from SOU GH, Whe Bera Sys eis oread SONG Ghee ii Carne, W. M., obituary notice ...... iv Cermatulus nasalis (Westwood), A New Subspecies of ............. 41 Colefax, A. N., elected a Vice-Presi- SMSO Nias pate CRG Fee RSr Riee mece xli Congratulations to Members .. ii, iii, xli Copland, S. J., Recent Australian Her- petology (Presidential Address), v; elected a Vice-President, xli. Culex pipiens Group in South- eastern AUS CT ALIA ede eset cot Hee oh aera has 131 Cytology of Septoria and Selenophoma SPOKES we Me Werte ae emesis 122 ZZ Page Dixson, Sir W., obituary notice .... Vv Dobrotworsky, N. V., elected a mem- DO Salers Ja We oa SER CeO eiekcreua le ioehe xliii Dobrotworsky, N. V., and Drummond, F. H., The Culex pipiens Group in South-eastern Australia, II .. 131 Drummond, F. H., see under Dobrot- worsky, N. V., and Drummond, Jn, BL Edwards, D. E., elected a member .. xli MICCtHONS ree ss XXXvVii, xli-xlv English, Kathleen, see Exhibits. Errey, Beatrice M., elected a member xlii Eucalyptus Distribution, Genetic Con- LF) XO) USE OL eee ke iis cs 1 ROEM Perec eeaee oct oe 8 Hucalyptus Genetics and Systematics, AnthersShaperzins isan Ae sae 43 Exchange relations .......:........ i Exhibits: Bennett, Isobel, and Pope, Elizabeth —Two specimens of the seastar, Astrostole insularis, from the N.S.W. Coast and kodachrome records of their colour patterns 10 TODD HSY Yanan id QPEL HRS Pc roibio ae o-oo xlv Browne, W. R.—A kodachrome slide of the Snowy Mts. area ........ xlii Bunt, J.—Specimens of the asco- mycete Lachnea scutellata identi- fied from material collected at Macquarie Island during 1951 .. xlii English, Kathleen—Two larvae of Tabanidae collected in a garden at Roseville, N.S.W. ........... xliii Palmer, Rev. R. G.—Three female specimens of filariae, probably Diplotriaena clelandi Johnston .. xlii Pope, Elizabeth, see under Bennett, Isobel, and Pope, Elizabeth. Tchan, Y. T.—Demonstration of a simple arrangement for a suit- able lamp to provide uniform illu- mination for routine microscope work, xliv; Short account of the life of S. N. Winogradsky, xlii. Vallance, T. G.—Colour slides illus- - trating the Barrier Ranges NESTON? INESHWiss ao vorssecereatenecc oereus xlii Vincent, J. M.—Presentation of an exhibit showing the action of bacteriophage on a Rhizobium (HEU OIA shee asec Ce ONO ROO GEA C IONE xlv Factors worth considering when making Measurements of Trom- biculid Larvae ..........-4...6. 35 Frame, W. R., elected a member so ed Sabah lvi Page Fraser, Lilian, A New Genus of the Plectascalest wo teustraeocutreictenctere 241 Fungi, Australian, New Species and REVISIONS. Tr sedeoetekoruakche orn 51 Genetic Control in Hucalyptus Dis- tri bwbions «soaks ae oe 8 Genus Selenophoma on Gramineae in INUStT AMT A. Se cy ue egurscetaepenea ean 151 Geology, Metamorphic and Plutonic, of the Wantabadgery-Adelong- Tumbarumba District, N.S.W., Studies in the .......... 90, 181, 197 Given, B. S., Notes on Australian AU oinaanaulae yen Mawes seals Shas etatruoracalorac 258 Grevillea, An Undescribed Species of, from the Rylstone District .... 49 Gunther, C. E. M., Factors worth con- sidering when making Measure- ments of Trombiculid Larvae ... 35 Hannon, Nola J., appointed Linnean Macleay Fellow in Botany for OA RRS Seen) ahaa dA ee ks Ee xlv Hansford, C. G., Australian Fungi. New Species and Revisions. I... 51 Helodidae, Australian. I ........... 19 Hemiptera-Heteroptera, Australian, A New Sub-family and New Genera Ande SPeCClESHOL ese ae eee 233 Herpetology, Recent Australian .... Vv Hindmarsh, Mary M., Linnean Mac- leay Fellow in Botany— Reappointed for 1952 ............. ili Summiaiwyayol awiOlkewerenisci eis lili Reappointed for 1953 ............ iii Holmes, Prof. J. M., see Lecture. Hotchkiss, A. T., elected a member .. xli Kerr, H. B., Abnormalities in Linum DS CKRHSSOMOUIO Mis’ 5 400000 bible be cic 247 Kosciusko District, N.S.W., The Occurrence of Varved Clays in ENG? 55 PSE ar Men ri ee 221 Kosciusko Region, fourth Natural History Survey made ........... li Lecture: Holmes, Prof. J. M.—Journeyings ime North Austrailia qe sy. xiv Lecturettes: Baas-Becking, L. G.—The Role of Henry Derx in Tropical Biology xlvi Beadle, N. C. W.—Death of the Mulga and Decline in Soil Fer- tility in the West Darling COMMER. ioe BR. ce AE Ee Suede xliv Birch, L. C.—The Importance of Light in Animal Ecology ...... xliii McNeill, F. A-——A Search for Rari- ties along the Great Barrier Reef from Gladstone to Cairns ...... xlili Moore, Prof. J. A.—Experimental Studies on the Evolution of Aus- WEAN INOS 6s Bo booobouoooooc xli Ralph, B. J.—Oxidative Mechanisms in the Wood-rotting Fungi ..... xliv INDEX. Page Lee, D. J., elected a Vice-President .. xli Library accessions ............ i, xli-xlv Linnean Macleay Fellowships: Reappointments for 1952 ......... iii Reappointments for 1953 ........ ili Applications for 1954 invited .... xliv Appointments for 1954 .......... xiv Linum usitatissimum L., Abnor- IMANTCIES: Sim Zohan cs seas eeyeweretede 247 Lists of New Sub-family, Genera, Species and Subspecies ......... liii ist Of SPIAtes! ey ie. arora cio ee liv Lower, H. F., A New Species of Austroasca Lower ............. 33 Mackerras, I. M., and Mackerras, M. J., A New Species of Peleco- rhynchus (Diptera, Tabanidae) from the Dorrigo Plateau, N.S.W. 38 Mackerras, M. J., see under Mac- kerras, I. M.,and Mackerras, M. J. Macleay Bacteriologist, see under Tchan, Yao-tseng. McDonald, Patricia M., elected a member "ein, va aS als oes xlv McKee, H. S., An Undescribed Species of Grevillea from the Rylstone District. fos vere Mas See Sera ee 49 McNeill, F. A., see Lecturettes. Members, List of ......:........ xlvii-lii Memorial Series, No. 14 (Gustavus Athol Waterhouse) ............ 269 Miller, N. C. E., A New Sub-family and New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera-Hetero- DUCKY uch pey cede cones acreyspehee one fei 233 Moore, J. A., A New Species of Pseudophryne from Victoria, 179 —see Lecturettes. New Genus of the Plectascales ...... 241 New Species of Austroasca’ Lower (Cicadellidae, Homoptera) ..... 33 New Species of Pelecorhynchus (Dip- tera, Tabanidae) from the Dorrigo Plateau, N.S.W. ........ 38 New Species of Pseudophryne from VilCtORiaT TOA OES: FOS Te hee netted 179 New Sub-family and New Genera and Species of Australian Hemiptera- Heteroptera sees sls cts cea de oto 233 New Subspecies of Cermatulus nasalis (Westwood) (Hemiptera-Hetero- ptera: Pentatomidae) .......... 41 Note on the Geology of Panuara and Angullong, south of Orange, INES ee ae eg Renee ae 262 Notes on Australian Thynninae. I. ~ Ariphron bicolor Hrichson ...... 258 Obituaries: Woe Mise Carnie nie: nt ety hs Apo deeaenn iv Sir W..Dixsom 2...2c.ckb eae Vv Occurrence of Varved Clays in the Kosciusko District, N.S.W. ...... 221 INDEX. Page Palmer, Rey. R. G., see Exhibits. Panuara and Angullong, A Note on the Geology of Parrott, A. W., elected a member .... Pelecorhynchus (Diptera, Tabanidae), A New Species of, from the Dorrigo Plateau, N.S.W. Plates, List of Plectascales, A New Genus of the .... Pope, Elizabeth, see Exhibits. Presidential Address Pryor, L. D., Genetic Control in Eucalyptus Distribution, 8. Another Shape in Hucalyptus Genetics and Systematics Pseudophryne from Victoria, A New Species of Ralph, B. J., see Lecturettes. Recent Australian Herpetology Reye, E. J., elected a member Rust Studies, Australian. NOTA PXeTNl 21216) Salter, K. EH. W., Studies on Aus- tralian Thynnidae. I Science House, Net return from .... Selenophoma Spores, Cytology of SGDUOMEG BIOG a bro Ala oboe yo APR Selenophoma, the Genus; on Grami- neae in Australia Septoria and WSelenophoma Cytology of Shaw, Dorothy E., Cytology of Sep- toria and Selenophoma Spores, 122. The Genus Selenophoma on Gramineae in Australia Simonett, D. S., elected a member .. Simons, Hilda Ruth, elected a mem- ber, xli; Appointed Linnean Mac- leay Fellow in Botany for 1954 .. Smith, H. T., elected a member .... Stevens, N. C., a Note on the Geology of Panuara and Angullong, south of Orange, N.S.W. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the Wanta- badgery - Adelong - Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. Part I—Intro- duction and Metamorphism of the Sedimentary Rocks, 90; Part II —Intermediate-Basic Rocks, 181; Part III—The Granitic Rocks, Ore Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. III. Azotobacter beijerinckii (Lip- man 1903) var. acido-tolerans (Tchan 1952), 83; IV. Taxonomy of Genus Azotobacter (Beijerinck 1901), 85; V. Presence of Bei- jerinckia in Northern Australia and Geographic Distribution of Non-symbiotiec N-fixing Micro- organisms, 171. Studies on Australian Thynnidae. I. A Check List of the Australian and Austro-Malayan Thynnidae. . Spores, xiv 122 122 151 xiii xlv xlii 262 276 lvii Page Study of Soil Algae. II. The Varia- tion of the Algal Population in Sandy Soils Tchan, Yao-tseng, Macleay Bacteri- ologist: Summary of work, 1952-53 See Exhibits. Studies of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria. INE, 338 I ye We, Iqale Tchan, Yao-tseng, and Whitehouse, Jill A., Study of Soil Algae. II.. Thynnidae, Australian, Studies on. I Thynninae, Notes on Australian, I .. Trombiculid Larvae, Factors worth considering when making Mea- surements of Undescribed Species of Grevillea from the Rylstone District Vallance, T. G., Linnean Macleay Fellow in Geology: Reappointed for 1952 Summary of work Reappointed for 1953 See Exhibits. Studies in the Metamorphic and Plutonic Rocks of the Wanta- badgery - Adelong - Tumbarumba District, N.S.W. I, 90; II, 181; It, 19% The Occurrence of Varved Clays in the Kosciusko District, N.S.W., 221. Varved Clays in the Kosciusko Dis- trict, N.S.W., The Occurrence of Vincent, J. M., elected President. Xxxvii. See Exhibits. Walkom, A. B., elected Honorary Treasurer and Honorary Sec- retary Wantabadgery -Adelong -Tumbarumba District, N.S.W., Studies in the ol smeiielelfeiiegeWeolel oleliohelichc\lofieiieliviie! is Metamorphic and Plutonic Geology of the. I, 90; II, 181; INO, ae Waterhouse, G. A. (Memorial Series, INO RpIKA) Sais: Sane aecee eR ease toys ace'S) 6 Waterhouse, W. L., Australian Rust Studies. XW 1: xa, 1472 XT, 226. Whitehouse, Jill A., elected a mem- ber, xli. See under Tchan, Yao- tseng, and Whitehouse, Jill A. Woodhill, A. R., elected a _ Vice- PGES IGEN apa mena rare site the a's aie mec Woodward, T. H., A New Subspecies of Cermatulus nasalis (West- A/OUYOW) Sen 0.6.0 wicks 6-0/0 Cols SaREeneaa Zoological Record, Announcement that a donation towards the cost of production has been made for a number of years 49 ili iii iii 221 . xii 269 xli 41 eee dae ake DAS ea a 1A TAY co oh ‘ % f ye at) ; ‘ ABA | 7 Hl 4 rv ney, oh Tt naps. [leet ley Hinde * lh hy Fo pet oe j tT "I Tit se 8! ed Th ae Tz, dig i aie" re 5 a a eh pth pepe en AP aba ae iy 1 ae, whee oh re, 5 Tita ate ed We CY tt Be ‘a i neh ees , \. Nat rh ree P nit Aa pth 1 i ‘Stee nolTeh vareat-oet) sei ro eee: 4 “yt ‘ rast ag ee Ey cs) ire 7 \ REA aor thins Say it (ere 4 é seh fe he i } . hat | Tate AER BOR 0S a ed fs weaeay nant Bi Bhs PP eR AY Ne WA ANI Ps, tue 1 ORI OG Re ee ye pad ei qo pre | oft) ye’ Oe Otte : ay he ; “aay? ; j i Tae ne ieoewenoe. | SUS aie, vf a det BTA tore ke eid j ‘re I 7 OE rt instth Saealre aehinend? wi EM abe pag SGI He Fy aia ROARS